Catalog Tehnic Complet

Temperature relief - valve
- I.S.P.E.S.L. approved
CALEFFI
series 542
cert. n 0003
01001/03 GB
ISO 9001
General
Temperature relief valves are made by Caleffi S.p.A. in compliance
with the essential safety requirements laid down by Directive
97/23/CE of the European Parliament and the Council of the
European Union for harmonisation of member States with regard to
pressurised equipment.
Function
111 5
Temperature relief valves are used in heating systems with the

function of discharging water from the system when the calibrated
limit temperature is reached.
These valves are positive action (fail-safe) devices, i.e. they will
operate even in the case of failure of the sensor element.
I.S.P.E.S.L.
Product range
Series 542 Temperature relief valve - fail-safe action - I.S.P.E.S.L. approved
Technical specification
Dimensions
brass EN 12165 CW617N

EPDM
EPDM
stainless steel
PP
RIARMO
542
Materials:
Body:
Control spindle:
Obturator seal:
Seals:
Springs:
Protective cover:
Sizes 1 1/2 M x 1 1/4 F, 1 1/2 M x 1 1/2 F
Working pressure:
Calibration temperature:
Temperature range:
Medium:
PED category:
Threaded connections:
0,3 P 10 bar
1 1/2 x 1 1/4; 98C
1 1/2 x 1 1/2; 99C
5100C
1 1/2 X 1 1/2
542
water
IV
1 1/2 M x 1 1/4 F
1 1/2 M x 1 1/2 F
Code
A
542870 1 1/2"
542880 1 1/2"
B
1 1/4"
1 1/2"
C
45
53
D
115
131
E
158
183
F
209
239
References to I.S.P.E.S.L. standards

According to the provisions of section R 1982 Edition, technical specification for
application of chapter II of D.M. 1/12/75, regarding hot water systems (fluid temperature
<100C), the installation of temperature relief valves is required in the following cases:
Open vented systems
- Heating systems having safety vent pipework which, for practical reasons, has an
adverse slope. In this case, the heat discharge valve must be sized for the full output
of the boiler (R.3.A. point 1.14).
- Systems with boilers fed with non-pulverized solid fuel, replacing the emergency heat
exchanger (R.3.C. point 1).
Sealed systems
- Heating systems where the required correlation between temperature increase and
pressure rise does not exist (R.3.B. point 3.5).
- Heating systems with circulating pumps with no flow switch (R.3.B. point 5.4).
- Heating systems with a working pressure greater than 5 bar or of capacity greater than
300.000 kcal/h, replacing the second overheat thermostat (R.3.B. points 6.1 and 7.1).
- Water heaters with water supply temperatures above 100C (R.3.E. point 1).
Operating principle
A temperature-sensitive element directly immersed in the fluid of the system acts on the
valve actuator.
On reaching the calibrated limit temperature value, the valve opens and discharges
water from the system.
The movement of the actuator in turn operates an electric switch which can be used to
shut off the fuel supply to the burner or to activate the top-up reset device.
The position of the actuator and the consequent flow rate through the valve vary with
the temperature of the fluid. When the limiting reclosing temperature is reached, the
valve automatically closes.
The valve also features fail-safe operation; i.e. the discharge opens in the event of
damage of the temperature-sensitive element.
Operating characteristics
The values below represent the average results obtained in the certification test and are
shown on the conformity certificates issued by the I.S.P.E.S.L.:
1 1/2 x 1 1/4
- calibration temperature at which the valve starts to open:
to= 98C
to= 99C
- discharge temperature at which the nominal discharge flow rate is achieved:
t1= 104C
t1= 99C
- reclosing temperature at which the valve re-closes in the temperature reduction phase:
t2= 95C
t2= 96C
- emergency intervention temperature at which the valve starts to open if the

thermostatic element is damaged fail-safe action:
tE= 99C
tE= 98,5C
6.100 l/h
20.300 l/h
0,382
0,495
1 1/2 x 1 1/2
- discharge flow rate given by the graph, attached to each valve, based on the
equation Gv= kv pn where:
Gv
kv
p
is the flow rate in l/h of water at temperature t1, discharged by the valve;
is the nominal characteristic flow rate of the valve, of value:
(the lower of that measured in normal operation and that measured in
fail-safe action, when p = 1 bar);
is the difference between the pressures upstream and downstream of the
valve. When top-up reset is used, p is taken as the hydrostatic pressure at
the point where the valve is installed, whilst otherwise, p takes the
conventional set value of 0,5 bar;
is the exponent of the variable p of value:
- heat capacity P without top-up reset:
136 kW
419 kW
(117.000 kcal/h)
(360.100 kcal/h)
p (bar)
1 1/2 x 1 1/2
10
100
30
2,0
20
1,0
10
0,5
0,3
0,2
0,1
1
50.000
10.000
4.680
2.000
G (l/h)
Certification
The approval certificate is the document issued by the I.S.P.E.S.L.

which confirms the positive result of the tests carried out on the
prototype sample and consequently certifies that the series in
question has been approved.
The document is valid for five years. Every item of the series
covered by the certificate, which is manufactured during the five
years validity period, is approved for an indefinite period.
The bench calibration report is the document confirming the
testing of each individual device included in the approved series.
The test is carried out in the presence of an I.S.P.E.S.L. inspector
who draws up the report after the test has been passed. The
document gives the serial number of the valve, which is also to be
found on the plate fixed to the valve body.
There is only one copy of the report and it is therefore vital for
it to be kept with the valve.
Installation
Before installing a temperature relief valve, correct sizing must be
carried out by specialist technical personnel in accordance with the
current legislation governing the specific applications. It shall not
be used other than for its stated purpose.
The temperature relief valve must be installed by competent
technical personnel qualified in accordance with current legislation.
The temperature relief valve must be installed on line with the flow
direction indicated by the arrow on the valve body.
The temperature relief valve should be installed as close as
possible to the boiler, either on the top of the boiler or in the flow
pipework within 0,5 metres of the boiler and upstream of any
shut-off device.
original
e
229
O) - S.S.
ogna (N
TI
eto d'Agnti idrotermici
IMPIAN
Fontan
O PER OGATA
IC
28010 nenti per impia
RM
OL
TE
Compo
ARICO ALVOLA OMIFICAZIONI
V
A DI SC
- SPEC 1/12/75
VALVOLQUA CALDA.
R
TA
DM
AD ACNDO RACCOLICATIVE DEL
SECO ICHE APPL
TECN
ISTITUTO
I.S
SUPERI.P.E.S.L
OR
DipartimE SICUREZZ E PREVENZI
A LA
ONE
ento di
BIELLA VORO
- Via Ce
rruti, 7
VERBAL
E DI TA
DI SCAR
ICO TE RATURA AL
SECOND
RMICO
BANC
TECNIC O RACCOL PRESSO IL O DI VALVOL
A
FABBRI
HE APPL TA R CA
SP
ICATIV
E DEL ECIFICAZIO NTE
NI
DM 1/12
/1975
FONTAN
HIO: 2
PN 10 X 1 1/4" F I IN
54
A) MARC
NALE:
M
DELLO:
B) MO SIONE NOMINALE: 1 1/2" RA AMMESS
C) PRESETRO NOMI RI DI TARATU
D) DIAM O DEI VALO 100C
E) CAMPERANZA: 95
3/00
TOLL
VST 32
S.L. n.
I.S.P.E.
ICATO
CERTIF
li:
C
nomina 00
t o = 984 C
istiche
Caratter 50 - Kv E = 6.1ra:
t 1 = 10 C
Kv = 6.6 tura di taratuco:
t 2 = 95 C
Tempera tura di scari ura:
t E = 99
era
ius
ch
mp
.:
Te
tura di nto di emerg
in
Tempera
olare e
d'interve
nto rege positiva)
Temp.
zioname
ion
ETO D'
AGOGNA
............
............
......
............
Valvola
.....
di
542, DN scarico termico
: 1 1/2"
ad azion
n. VST
e positiva
323/00 M x 1 1/4"F,
,
m
.
certific
La verifi
ato I.S odello
ca della
.P
.E.S.L.
al ba
n c o c taratura della
valvo
on
98 1
C, cam a c q u a a l l a la stata eseg
stessa
po di va
uita
tempe
ha
con inizio cominciato a lori entro i qu r a t u r a d i
scarica
ali la va
La tem dell'alzata.
re in m
odo co lvola
pe
ntinuo,
campo ratura di inter
de
ve
valore no i valori amm nto riscontra
essi in
ta
tolleranz rientra nel
ed in minale di tara
tura
ac
a rispe
II de lla cordo con qu , dichiarato
tto al
dal
anto ind
Ra cc ol
applica
icato ne costruttore
tive del ta R - Sp
ll'A
ppendi
ec ific az
DM 1/12
Il blocco
ce
io
/1
ni
m
97
Te cn ic
ecca
5.
ghiera
he
di tara nico dell'elem
tura
L'inam
assicur ento sensibile
ov
ato a m
e della
di ta ra ibilit della pa
ez
rte supe
zo spina
tu
riore e
A segu ra re al izz
della po tura.
ito
at
siz
l'identif del buon esito a m ed ia nt e
icazione
pi om ba ione
de
seguen
tu
della va lla verifica di
ti da
taratura ra .
lvola, ve
a) march ti:
, per
ngono
io I.S.P.
pu
nz
onati i
b) num
ero della E.S.L.;
valvola.
(az
fun
rgenza
vola in
della val nto d'eme
Portata ni di interve
condizio
10
8
6
5
4
3
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
A DI SC
PORTAT
n
16 20
12
8 9 10
0 l/h)
Gv (x 100
Por tata
4680 l/h
ARICO
VALVOL
DELLA
0.382
00 p
G = 6.1
p
in l/h
G = kvE
bar
pressa
ziale in
rtata es
la po
e differen
sono
dove: G la pression
piegati ido a
p
l flu
teriali im
ed i madi esercizio de ghiere di
le
lvo
lle
va
e delle ni di pressionesensibile e de sp ina tu ra .
ion
uz
ndizio ll'elemento
m ez zoale e la prova
La costr
de
per le co
fin
ne
ib ile a
idonei . Il fissaggio
ina m ov il controllo lla guarnizio o
contatto ion e re son buon esito materiale de in prolu ng at si
n
e
r. Il
re go laz ti eseguiti co
e an ch
za e no
a 15 ba
valvola re ta le ch e di resisten
Sono sta
lla
de
to
a
ra
istich
idraulic
ed ot tu le caratter
fra se deo conserva
esercizialla sede.
ale di
incolla
dal verb
agnata
accomp
ZE
plicati .
EN
solo se ale.
sciare ducentrale
AVVERTla idonea pia
origin
ibile rila
di
La valvo che la co to non possnte al libretto im pia nt o.
taratura,di smarrimen ato unitame ve rif ica di
In caso va conserv in se de di
I S.p.A.
ibi to
Il verbale
CALEFF Tecnica
se re es
pe r es
zione
La Dire
Il Tecn
ico I.S
.P.E.S.L
.
58222.0
3
I.S.P.E.S.L. mark
The series 542 temperature relief valves is a component which is
also I.S.P.E.S.L. approved. Devices of this type are covered by
the following types of document:
S.p.A.
CALEFFI
p (bar)
CE mark
The series 542 temperature relief valves meets the requirements of
Directive 97/23/CE for pressurised equipment (also referred to as
the PED). They are therefore classified in category IV and granted
the CE mark. In addition, the electrical components meet the
requirements of Directive 73/23/CE.
Max 0,5 m
RIARMO
542
a) For pipework up to 2,
use of a tee-piece is
recommended;
b) for pipework of 2 and
over, a welded connection
may be used, whose collar
height, for correct positioning
of the temperature-sensitive
element, must be 15 mm.
100.000
3,0
20.000
50
5.000
5,0
1.000
Without top-up reset

When top-up resetting of the water discharged by the valve is not
provided for, the valve must discharge, at a pressure of 0,5 bar, a
flow of water:
Gv Gr i.e. (Gv=Kv0,5n) (Gr=P/25) [l/h]
Where Gr is the required flow rate and P [Kcal/h] the rated output
of the boiler.
The discharge flow rate can also be calculated by using the graph
shown alongside. The discharge flow rates without top-up reset are
shown in red.
p (m w.g.)
1 1/2 x 1 1/4
500
With top-up reset

When total top-up of the water discharged by the valve is provided
for, the valve must discharge, at working pressure, a flow of water:
Gv Gr i.e. (Gv=Kv pn) (Gr=P/80) [l/h]
Where Gr is the required flow rate and P [Kcal/h] the rated output
of the boiler.
14.404
Sizing
1 1/2 X 1 1/2
542
RIARMO
RIARMO
542
542
1 1/2 X 1 1/2
1 1/2 X 1 1/2
542
542
Fitting
RIARMO
542
1 1/2 X 1 1/2
245
OMRAIR
2/1 1 X 2/1 1
The temperature relief valve can be fitted

vertically or horizontally, but not upside
down.
This prevents deposits of impurities from
affecting correct functioning.
245
542
542
1 1/2 X 1 1/2
542
RIARMO
Discharge pipework
As the temperature relief valve is designed to discharge, in relation
to the pressures involved, considerable flows of water, the
discharge pipework must be as short as possible, and of diameter
not less than that of the outlet of the valve itself.
The discharge pipework from the temperature relief valve must be
fitted in such a way as not to prevent the correct operation of the
valve and not to cause damage or injury.
In accordance with current legislation, the outlet of the temperature
relief valve must be visible and connected to a suitable drain
pipework.
RIARMO
542
1 1/2 X 1 1/2
542
Auxiliary micro-switch
The temperature relief valve has a micro-switch with changeover
contact which is activated after the discharge has opened. This
can be used, for example, to shut off the burner or to control the
top-up reset device.
After the micro-switch has been activated, it must be reset manually
by means of the pushbutton on the upper cover.
Electrical connections
1. solenoid valve on the fuel supply;
2. burner;
3. motorised valve for supplying
top-up water (optional);
4. audible alarm (optional, not
mandatory);
5. visual alarm (alternative to the
audible alarm).
220 V 50 Hz
220 V 50 Hz
blue
2
4
black
brown
3
blue
black
brown
yellow-green
yellow-green
SPECIFICATION SUMMARIES
Series 542
Temperature relief valve. I.S.P.E.S.L. approved and calibrated. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE and
73/23/CE. Positive action (fail-safe). Threaded connections 1 1/2 M x 1 1/4 F (1 1/2 M x 1 1/2 F). Brass body.
Stainless steel springs. EPDM seals. Complete with 4-wire cable with manual reset electric changeover switch.
Calibration temperature at which the valve starts to open: 98C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
We reserve the right to change our products and their relevant technical data, contained in this publication, at any time and without prior notice.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.P.A. I 28010 FONTANETO DAGOGNA (NO) S.R. 229, N.25 TEL.INT. +39 0322 8491 R.A. FAX +39 0322 863723
Http://www.caleffi.com E-mail: info@caleffi.it
Check valves
01005 00
Replaces 01005/94
GB
Series
3041
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
Check valves for

protecting drinking
water against the
return of contaminated
backflow which does
constitute any toxic
or microbiological
danger to human
health
Qualification
certificate for the
NF Class A
Anti-Pollution Mark
Acoustic characteristics
comply with Group 1
of ISO standards 3822
Check mechanism
with press fit seal
suitable for high
and low pressures
ANTIPOLLUTION
ISO 9001
Quality Assured Firm
CALEFFI
Antipollution Division
Class A Check valve
General data
-
Maximum operating pressure: 10 bar

Maximum operating temperature: 90C
Opening pressure: 100 mm w.g.
Complies with French Standard NF P 43 007
Qualification certificate for Class A NF Anti-Pollution Mark
Acoustic characteristics to Group 1 of ISO standards 3822
Operating media: water, compressed air, gas
Construction
- UNI EN 12165 CW617N brass body
- Check mechanism made of POM acetal resin
- Seals made of NBR nitrile rubber (WRC-KTW approved for
drinking water)
- Spring made of AISI 302 stainless steel
- 1/4 test ports.
Sealing system
The lip seal also ensures effective
sealing without back pressure.
3045
Check valve with Female-Female
connections. Available in sizes 1/2,
3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2 and 2.
Controllable.
In the case of considerable back

pressure the obturator shapes the
seal and rests on the shoulder.
This arrangement ensures the
system has a long service life.
3046
Check valve with loose nut-Male
connections (3/4 x 3/4, 1 x 1,
1 1/4 x 1 1/4, 1 1/2 x 1 1/2 and
2 x 2).
Controllable.
3047
An isolation cock is fitted upstream of the valve to enable control of

the check valve. To test the efficiency of the check valve the shutoff
is closed and the upstream plug A is unscrewed.
The downstream plug B is used for
draining the system (NF P 43 007).
Double check valve with

Female-Female connections.
Available in sizes 1/2 and 3/4.
Controllable.
3041
Ball valve with 1/2 incorporated check
mechanism with loose nut-Male
connections (3/4 x 3/4).
Controllable.
For use downstream from water
meters.
A
Versions with loose nut
These valves are suitable for
downstream installation of the
water meter. The loose nut is
fitted directly on to the body of
the meter.
NF
3048
CALEFFI
Check valve with Female-Female

connections. Available in sizes 1/2,
3/4 and 1.
Not controllable.
Installation
CALEFFI
CODE 304540 304550 304560 304570 304580 304590
.9
.8
.7
.6
3/4
1 1/4 1 1/2
32
32
27
27,5
68
78
3/4
1/2
32
C
D
40
32,5
36
41,5
48
90
110
120
150
100
3/4
1/2
C
B
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
CODE 304640 304650 304660 304670 304680
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
.18
.16
.14
.12
32
32
32
40
24
27,5
32
36
41,5
78
81
128
153,5
168
CODE 304740 304750 304760

DN
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
68
78
90
1/2
10
32
6
7
8
9
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
.6
.7
.8
.9
.5
.25
.3
.35
.4
.45
.2
CODE 304840 304850
CALEFFI
.12
.14
.16
.18
1 1/4 1 1/2
CALEFFI
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
DN
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
71
78
25,5
27,5
.9
.8
.7
.6
CODE 304140
D
6
7
8
9
10
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
.6
.7
.8
.9
.5
.25
.3
.35
.4
.45
.2
.12
.14
.16
.18
.1
.18
.16
.14
.12
.45
.4
.35
.3
.25
CALEFFI
.1
1 1/4 1 1/2
B
NF
.2
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
.5
NF
9
8
7
6
CALEFFI
3/4
3/4
p (m water column)
1/2
.45
.4
.35
.3
.25
G (m3/h)
10
DN
.9
.8
.7
.6
.1
.1
CALEFFI
.2
.5
CALEFFI
9
8
7
6
NF
2
50
32
NF
p (m water column)
70
80
90
50 60
25
30
35
40
45
20
10
12
14
16
18
6
7
8
9
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
.6
.7
.8
.9
.5
.25
.3
.35
.4
.45
.2
1 1/4 1 1/2
1/2
.18
.16
.14
.12
.12
.14
.16
.18
DN
.45
.4
.35
.3
.25
.1
CALEFFI
NF
CALEFFI
G (m3/h)
10
1 1/2
1 1/4
CALEFFI
.1
NF
.2
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
.5
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
NF
NF
9
8
7
6
p (m water column)
10
3/4
Dimensions
1/2
Pressure loss
G (m /h)
B
E
DN
1/2
3/4
32
50,5
30
88
Construction
Class A flanged check valves
- Body and cover made of cast iron with 150 micron

epoxy coating
- Check valve and seat made of bronze
- Rod and spring made of stainless steel
- Seals made of EPDM rubber
The unit can be inspected. By dismantling the top cover the
complete closing mechanism which is integral with the cover
itself can be removed.
The bronze seal seat can also be replaced.
All these maintenance and inspection operations can be
carried out on site without having to remove the unit from
the installation.
3049
Check valve with flanged connections from DN 50 to DN 200.
Controllable.
With epoxy coating.
General data
-

Maximum operating temperature: 65 oC
Complies with French standard NF P 43 017
Qualification certificate for the Class A NF Anti-Pollution mark
Operating fluids: drinking water
PN 10/16 flanges
Table of flow rates (m3/h)
Dimensions
DN
50
65
80
100
19,8
41,8
63
99
125
150
154,8 223,2
200
396
Minimum flow rates shown with a pressure loss of 1.5 m

water pressure
DN
Pressure losses
p (m water column)
3
DN 50 DN 200
2.5
2
A
1.5
CODE 304905 304906 304908 304910 304912 304915 304920

DN
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
230
290
310
350
400
480
600
135
150
160
185
225
265
Weight
12,5
16
20
32
47
.5
0
0
.5
1.5
2.5
3.5
4.5
5
V (m/s) *
* Average speed on an entry section
CALEFFI S.P.A. I - 28010 FONTANETO D'AGOGNA (NO) S.S.229 TEL.INT. +39 0322 8491 R.A.
http://www.caleffi.com e-mail: info@caleffi.it
FAX +39 0322 863723
Anti-pollution check valves
CALEFFI
3045-3046-3047-3048-3041 series
01005/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
replaces dp 01005/00
Function
The anti-pollution check valve is a hydraulic protective
device capable of preventing the backflow of polluted
water into the public water system. This may occur due to
changes in pressure in the distribution network that cause
water to flow backwards. The check valve, which is fitted
between the public and the user system in water
distribution systems, prevents any contact between the
water in the two systems, as it closes automatically
whenever backflow conditions occur.
The 3045 and 3046 series of anti-pollution check valves
are certified as being compliant with the performance
specifications set out in European standard EN 13959.
Product range
3045 series Controllable check valve, EA type
Code 304601 Controllable compact check valve, EA type
3046 series Controllable check valve, EA type
3047 series Non-controllable check valve, EB type
3048 series Controllable double check valve
Code 304140 Controllable ball valve with approved built-in check valve
sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2, 2

size 3/4
sizes 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2, 2
sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1
sizes 1/2, 3/4
size 3/4
Technical specifications
series
Materials
Body:
Check valve:
Springs:
O-Ring seals:
Union seal:
Knob:
Ball:
Ball control stem:
Ball seal seat:
Inspection point plug:
Performance
Medium:
Maximum working pressure:
Min. opening pressure for check valve:
Maximum working temperature:
Connections
(and internal check valve DN)
Inspection point connections
3045-3046
3047-3048-3041

POM
stainless steel
EPDM, NBR
3046 series: asbestos free NBR fibre
3045/3046 series: PA66G30;
code 304601: brass EN 12164 CW614N

POM
stainless steel
EPDM, NBR
3041 series: asbestos free NBR fibre
3041 series: EN 12165 CW617N
3041 series: EN 12164 CW614N, chrome plated
3041 series: EN 12164 CW614N
3041 series: PTFE
3048/3041 series: PA66G30
drinking water
10 bar
0,5 kPa
90C
3045 series: 1/22 F (DN 1550)
code 304601: 3/4 F with union for M (DN 15)
3046 series: 3/42 F with union for M (DN 1540)
1/4 F; code 304601: 1/8 F
drinking water
10 bar
0,5 kPa
90C
3047 series: 1/21 F (DN 1525)
3048 series: 1/2, 3/4 F (DN 15, 20)
3041 series: 3/4 F with union for M (DN 15)
3048/3041 series: 1/4 F
Dimensions
A
C
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
NF
A
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
DN*
15
20
25
32
40
50
B
32
32
32
32
40
50
C
27
27,5
32,5
36
41,5
48
D
68
78
90
110
120
150
C
18
D
58
C
27
27,5
32,5
36
41,5
D
68
78
90
110
120
Weight (kg)
0,16
0,25
0,40
0,62
0,82
1,33
Code
304740
304750
304760
A
1/2
3/4
1
DN*
15
20
25
B
68
78
90
Weight (kg)
0,16
0,25
0,38
DN*
15
20
B
71
78
CALEFFI
NF
Code
304540
304550
304560
304570
304580
304590
CALEFFI
Code
304601
A
3/4
DN*
15
B
15
Weight (kg)
0,16
Code
304840
304850
A
1/2
3/4
C
25,5
27,5
Weight (kg)
0,16
0,26
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
NF
Code
304640
304650
304660
304670
304680
A
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
*Internal check valve DN
DN*
15
20
25
32
40
B
32
32
32
32
40
Weight (kg)
0,20
0,31
0,70
1,10
1,60
B
E
Code
304140
A
3/4
DN*
15
B
32
C
50,5
D
30
E
88
Weight (kg)
0,40
Backflow
Drinking water supplied by the public
network may suffer from hazardous
pollution
caused
mainly
by
contaminated fluids from plumbing
systems flowing back directly into the
public network.
This phenomenon, called backflow,
occurs when:
a) the pressure in the public network is
lower than that in the plumbing
circuit receiving the supply (back
siphoning). This situation may occur
when a pipe is broken in the public
system or when other consumer
demand on the public network is
very heavy.
b) the pressure in the plumbing circuit
receiving the supply rises (back
pressure) due, for example, to water
being pumped from a well.
Application of the EA type anti-pollution check valve with reference to European

standard EN 1717 and EN 13959
Proper use of the EA type anti-pollution check valve is regulated by the new European standards
relating to the prevention of pollution caused by backflow.
The reference standard is EN 1717: 2000 Protection against pollution of drinking water in hydraulic
systems and general requirements for the devices used to prevent pollution caused by backflow.
In this standard, the water in the systems is classified according to the level of risk it represents for
human health.
Category 1:
Water suitable for human consumption supplied by the water supplier.
Category 2:
Fluid that does not represent a health hazard, as in number 1, the quality of which has been
compromised due to changes in temperature, taste, smell or appearance.
Category 3:
Fluid that represents a slight health risk due to the presence of one or more harmful substances.
Category 4:
Fluid that represents a health hazard due to the presence of one or more toxic or highly toxic
substances, or one or more radioactive, mutagenic or carcinogenic substances.
Category 5:
Fluid that represents a severe health hazard due to the presence of microbiological or viral elements.
According to this classification, suitable backflow prevention devices must be fitted in water
distribution plant systems.
EA type anti-pollution check valves can be used to offer protection against the risk of water
contamination up to category 2.
For category 3 water, it is necessary to use a CA type backflow preventer.
The table below, called the Protection matrix, associates the various types of system with the
relative fluid categories and has been created based on the indications provided in the European
regulations.
The new European standard EN 13959 Anti-pollution check valves from DN 6 to DN 250. Family
E, type A, B, C and D. defines the functional, dimensional and mechanical requirements of antipollution check valves.
Protection matrix
Type of system
Risk assessment
Given the potential dangers of the
phenomenon and the requirements of
current regulations, the risk of pollution
caused by backflow must be assessed
on the basis of the type of system and
the characteristics of the fluid that flows
inside it. A suitable backflow
prevention device must be selected on
the basis of the assessment performed
by the system designer and the public
network supplier. The device must be
located along the supply line at the
points at risk of backflow which would
be hazardous to human health.
The protection can be provided by
fitting a check valve at critical points in
the circuit, at the inlet from the public
network or in the internal plumbing
system. This will prevent the backflow
of polluted water in all systems for
which direct connection to the public or
an internal network is considered
hazardous.
General
Hot and cold water mixing devices in domestic water systems
Water cooling devices for air conditioning units, without additives
Sterilisers for packaged or disinfected materials
Water in primary domestic heating system circuits, without additives
Domestic, residential or commercial gardens
Hand-held fertiliser sprayers for use in domestic gardens
Watering systems, without fertilisers or insecticides, with sprinkler
fixed to the ground at a depth of not more than 150 mm
Water softeners
Domestic water softeners regenerated with common salt
Commercial water softeners (only regenerated with common salt)
Commercial applications
Automatic dispensers with injection of ingredients or CO2
Automatic dispensers without injection of ingredients or CO2
Machines to wash out drink distribution pipes in restaurants
Hairdresser rinsing systems
Medicine
X-ray machine cooling systems
Food applications
Ice-making machines
Large kitchen machines with automatic filling system
Household applications
Water in sinks, baths and showers
Domestic dishwashers and washing machines
Flexible pipes with controlled flow spray nozzles or stop cock
Domestic dialysis machines
Cat. of fluid
2
3
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Operating principle
Construction details
The anti-pollution check valve consists of a valve body (1),

a check valve (2) and, if necessary, one or more inspection
points (3) for operation checking and system draining
procedures. The check valve (2) borders two different
zones: one upstream or at the inlet (A) and one
downstream or at the outlet (B).
Hydraulic seal devices

When the flow stops, the
check valve rests on a
lip-shaped EPDM seal (1)
which
guarantees
water-tightness, even in the
absence
of
counter
pressure.
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM
NORMAL OPERATION
No flow conditions
The check valve (2) closes in advance under the action of
the force exerted by the spring when the pressure
downstream (B) tends to equal the value upstream (A),
after the flow has stopped.
1
B
Elastomers complying with food regulations

The elastomers used for the hydraulic seals have been
approved by the Certifying Authorities in accordance with the
most recent provisions regarding compatibility for use with
drinking water.
Versions with captive nut
These versions are specifically designed for installation
downstream of the
water meter.
The captive nut should
be mounted directly
over the meter body.
IFFELAC
A
2
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM
NO FLOW CONDITION
Upstream pressure loss

The check valve (2) remains closed, preventing water
which has already been sent to the user from flowing back
towards the public network.
In the event of strong

counter
pressure,
the
obturator (2) alters the
shape of the seal and rests
on the actual end point. This
solution guarantees optimal
device durability.
FN
Correct conditions of flow

In correct flow conditions, the check valve (2) opens
automatically when the pressure in the flow direction
upstream (A) is greater than the downstream value (B).
Double check valve, 3048 series

The range of products also includes the double check valve
version (3) and (4), with inspection point (5).
1
A
B
2
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM
UPSTREAM PRESSURE LOSS
Downstream pressure increase

If the pressure in the downstream zone (B) increases until it
exceeds the upstream pressure value (A), the check valve
(2) remains closed, thus preventing water that has already
been sent to the user from flowing back towards the public
network.
The double check valve may be used, where permitted by

current local legislation, as an alternative to the backflow
preventer, whenever the water distribution mains has low inlet
pressure.
Certification
The 3045, 3046 and 3041 series anti-pollution check valves
have been certified as compliant with specific national and
European product standards by the following bodies:
NF-BELGAQUA-ACS.
DN 20
DN 15
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
2 1.8
18
16
14
12
1.6
1.4
1.2
10
1 0.9
9
8
7
6
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.2
3045 304540 304550 304560 304570 304580 304590

3046 304640 304650 304660 304670 304680
Series*
3047 304740 304750 304760
3046 304601
3041 304140
Internal check valve DN 15
20
25
32
40
50
4,50
8,80
13,40 21,40
33,20
53,00
Kv (m3/h)
10
0.45
0.4
0.35
0.3
0.25
Series**
3048
Internal check valve DN
Kv (m3/h)
304840
15
3,10
10
6
7
8
9
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.5
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
304850
20
5,40
** double check valve
* single check valve
Installation and operation checking procedures

EA EC TYPE
EB TYPE
Installation
Before installation, make sure that the device is suitable for protecting the
supply system, in relation to the type of fluid used in the system.
The controllable check valve should be installed after a shut-off valve,
upstream.
The unit should be installed in an accessible zone.
Installation
Before installation, make sure that the device is
suitable for protecting the supply system, in
relation to the type of fluid used in the system.
The check valve should be installed in an
accessible zone.
Before installing the check valve it will be
necessary to clean the piping with a
high-capacity jet of water. Poor cleaning of the
system can easily impair the operation of the
device.
CALEFFI
NF
WATER
MAIN
A B
SYSTEM
Shut-off valve
upstream
Controllable
check valve
A-B
Inspection points
Before installing the check valve it will be necessary to clean the piping with
a high-capacity jet of water. Poor cleaning of the system can easily impair
the operation of the device.
Inspection and operation checking procedure
The inspection and operation checking procedures should be carried out at
least once a year.
1) Check whether the installation standards still require the application of
the same device for the type of fluid used in the system.
2) Make sure that the hazard level of the fluid inside the system has not
altered over time.
3) Check that there are no leaks or areas of corrosion or deterioration.
4) Perform the check valve seal operation checking procedure; when the
water mains system pressure (and therefore the pressure upstream of the
check valve) drops, the valve should close and prevent the water in the
system from flowing back into the mains supply:
a. in order to maintain the system pressure in the absence of flow, close
all the shut-off valves downstream of the valve and the inspection
points for the same check valve.
b. close the shut-off valve upstream (1) and open the inspection point (A)
of the check valve.
The flow should stop after the part of piping, which has been cut off,
is emptied.
c. if this is not the case, check the seal of the shut-off valve upstream (1)
and, if the flow through the inspection point (A) continues, replace the
check valve.
d. the inspection point (B) (where present) may be used to empty the
system.
G (m3/h)
20
100
60
70
80
90
50
25
30
35
40
45
20
12
14
16
18
10
6
7
8
9
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.5
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.2
0.2
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
100
90
80
70
60
5 4.5
0.2
0.45
0.4
0.35
0.3
0.25
p (kPa)
4
3.5
3
2.5
G (m3/h)
DN 50
DN 40
DN 32
DN 25
0.5
9
8
7
6
9
8
7
6
CALEFFI
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
50
p (m w.g.)
10
NF
18
16
14
12
CALEFFI
100
CALEFFI
NF
45
40
35
30
25
CALEFFI
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
NF
90
80
70
60
CALEFFI
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
NF
p (kPa)
CALEFFI
9
8
7
6
DN 15
p (m w.g.)
10
DN 20
Hydraulic characteristics
Inspection and operation checking

procedure
The inspection and operation checking
procedures should be carried out at least once
a year.
1) Check whether the installation standards
still require the application of the same
device for the type of fluid used in the
system.
2) Make sure that the hazard level of the fluid
inside the system has not altered over time.
3) Check that there are no leaks or areas of
corrosion or deterioration.
4) Replace the valve every 10 years.
SPECIFICATION SUMMARY
3045 series
Controllable check valve. EA type. Threaded connections 1/2 (from 1/2 to 2) F, internal check valve DN 15 (from DN 15
to DN 50). Certification to standard EN 13959. Brass body. POM check valve. Stainless steel spring. EPDM and NBR O-Ring
seals. Medium drinking water. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,5 kPa.
Maximum working temperature 90C. Inspection point plugs in PA66G30, 1/4 F connections.
Code 304601
Controllable compact check valve. EA type. Threaded connections 3/4 F union x M, internal check valve DN 15.
Certification to standard EN 13959. Brass body. POM check valve. Stainless steel spring. EPDM and NBR O-Ring seals.
Asbestos free fibre NBR union seal. Medium drinking water. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Minimum opening
pressure for check valve 0,5 kPa. Maximum working temperature 90C. Brass inspection point plugs, 1/8 F connections.
3046 series
Controllable check valve. EA type. Threaded connections 3/4 F union x M (from 3/4 to 2), internal check valve DN 15
(from DN 15 to DN 40). Certification to standard EN 13959. Brass body. POM check valve. Stainless steel spring. EPDM
and NBR O-Ring seals. Asbestos free fibre NBR union seal. Medium drinking water. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,5 kPa. Maximum working temperature 90C. Inspection point plugs in
PA66G30, 1/4 F connections.
3047 series
Non-controllable check valve. EB type. Threaded connections 1/2 (from 1/2 to 1) F, internal check valve DN 15 (from
DN 15 to DN 25). Brass body. POM check valve. Stainless steel spring. EPDM O-Ring seals. Medium drinking water.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,5 kPa. Maximum working temperature 90C.
3048 series
Controllable double check valve. Threaded connections 1/2 (and 3/4) F , internal check valve DN 15 (and DN 20). Brass
body. POM check valve. Stainless steel spring. EPDM and NBR O-Ring seals. Medium drinking water. Maximum working
pressure 10 bar. Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,5 kPa. Maximum working temperature 90C. Inspection
point plug in PA66G30, 1/4 F connection.
Code 304140
Controllable ball valve with approved built-in check valve. Threaded connections 3/4 F union x M, internal check valve
DN 15. Brass body. POM check valve. Stainless steel spring. EPDM and NBR O-Ring seals. Asbestos free fibre NBR
union seal. Brass knob. Chrome plated brass ball. Brass ball control stem. PTFE ball seal seat. Medium drinking water.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,5 kPa. Maximum working temperature
90C. Inspection point plugs in PA66G30, 1/4 F connections.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.P.A. S.R.229, N.25 28010 FONTANETO DAGOGNA (NO) ITALY TEL. +39 0322 8491 FAX +39 0322 863723
www.caleffi.com info@caleffi.com
Copyright 2010 Caleffi
Balancing valves
CALEFFI
series 131 - 135

cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01006/05 GB
Function
Balancing valves are hydraulic devices that can precisely regulate
the flow rate of the fluid that supplies a systems emitters. Hydraulic
circuits must be correctly balanced to ensure that the system
operates at the design conditions and provides a high level of heat
comfort with low energy consumption.
In the 131 series threaded valves, the flow rate is measured by a
Venturi device that is incorporated into the body of the valve. This
device guarantees accurate setting as well as ease of use during
calibration.
Product range
Series 131 Balancing valve with Venturi device. Threaded version
Series 135 Balancing valve. Flanged version
Sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2 and 2

Sizes DN 65, DN 80, DN 100, DN 125, DN 150, DN 200, DN 250 and DN 300
series
131 threaded
135 flanged
Materials:
- Body:
- Bonnet:
- Control stem:

- Regulating disc:
- Seal seat:

cast iron ASTM A536 GR65-45-12

brass ASTM B-16
brass ASTM B-16 (DN 65 to DN 150)
stainless steel (DN 200 to DN 300)
bronze ASTM B584 C-84400
high-strength resin (DN 65 to DN 150)
EPDM (DN 200 to DN 300)
BunaN
EPDM
high-strength resin
brass body with EPDM seals
Hydraulic seals:
Flange seals:
Knob:
Pressure tappings:
Performance:
- Medium:
-
Max. percentage of glycol:

Max. working pressure:
Temperature range:
Accuracy:
Number of setting turns:
Connections:
- Connections:
- Valve body pressure tapping
connections:
EPDM
reinforced nylon, ABS
brass body with EPDM seals
water, glycol solution non hazardous, therefore

excluded from the guidelines of 67/548/EC Directive
50%
16 bar
-10 110C
5%
5
Water, glycol solution non hazardous, therefore excluded

from the guidelines of 67/548/EC Directive
50%
16 bar
-5 110C
5% (open 50 to 100%)
5 (DN 65, DN 80); 6 (DN 100 to DN 150)
12 (DN 200, DN 250); 14 (DN 300)
1/2 2 F
DN 65 DN 300, PN 16 (to be coupled with

EN 1092-1 counterflanges)
1/4 F
1/4 F
Dimensions
B
B
Code
A
131400 1/2"
131500 3/4"
131600
1"
131700 1 1/4"
131800 1 1/2"
135900
2"
B
76
83
97
110
129
153
C
117
125
135
143
150
170
Weight (kg)
0,49
0,55
0,84
1,06
1,59
2,46
Code
135060
135080
135100
135120
135150
135200
135250
135300
A
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
DN 125
DN 150
DN 200
DN 250
DN 300
B
305
305
356
445
525
716
762
967
C
244
267
268
332
349
625
673
722
Weight (kg)
9
11
19
37
54
141
209
395
Code
135060
135080
135100
135120
135150
135200
135250
135300
A
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
DN 125
DN 150
DN 200
DN 250
DN 300
B
187
213
244
305
359
481
516
611
C
244
267
268
332
349
625
673
722
Weight (kg)
9
11
19
37
54
141
209
395
Advantages of balanced systems
Operating principle
A balanced system provides the following main benefits:
A balancing valve is a hydraulic device that regulates the flow rate rate
of the fluid passing through it. The flow rate is regulated by means of
a knob that controls the movement of a disc that allows the passage
of the fluid. The flow rate is controlled according to the p value
measured by two pressure connectors located on the valve.
1. Allows the system emitters to perform correctly to heat, cool and

dehumidify without wasting energy and ensuring greater
comfort.
2. Permits the electropumps to work in the best efficiency zone with
less risk of overheating and premature wear.
3. Reduces fluid velocities that may lead to noise and abrasion.
4. Limits the value of the differential pressures acting on the
regulating valves, thus preventing malfunctions.
SISTEMI
CALORE
CALEFFI
sistemi calore
FLOMET
ZERO OFFSET
C
ROLL
SET
SIGNAL
+
O
DP
ROLL
DP
FLOW
SET
SET
FLOW
MFR
ESTIMATE
FLOW
ROLL
MODEL
TEMP
SIZE
ROLL
DP
UNIT
D. TEMP
FLOW
UNIT
ROLL
TEMP
UNIT
POWER
POWER
UNIT
ROLL
131 series construction details

Venturi flow rate measurement device
Rectification baffles
The 131 series 1/2 - 2 valves are equipped with a flow rate
measurement device based on the Venturi effect. The device is
incorporated in the body of the valve upstream of the valve disc,
as shown in the figure below.
The 131 series valves are equipped with special rectification baffles
located immediately downstream of the disc. These devices reduce
the turbulence of the fluid caused by the restriction of the disc and
rectify the fluid flow characteristics more quickly.
As a result, the Venturi device can make more accurate
measurements and the noise caused by the turbulence of the flow
is reduced. In addition, because the fluid flow is rectified more
quickly, the valves can be installed with a minimum amount of
straight sections of piping downstream of the valves.
Venturi
device
This system provides the following benefits:

1. Allows greater precision in measuring and regulating the flow
rate. Balancing valve pressure tappings are traditionally located
upstream and downstream of the valve disc. This means that
when the valve is closed at less than 50% of the total opening,
the turbulence created downstream of the disc causes the
pressure signal to become unstable, which in turn leads to
significant measurement errors. This phenomenon is more
apparent in medium- to small-sized 1/2 - 2 valves.
flow rate readout error %
18
14
12
Rectification
baffles
Adapting the valve size to the piping dimensions

Balancing valves are often selected based on the diameter of the
line piping in which they are to be installed rather than on the
design flow rates that need to pass through them. This means that
the valves are often oversized with respect to the flow rates, which
in turn means that they need to be very restricted during balancing
to ensure the design flow rate. To avoid this problem, the 131 series
valves have been designed so that their hydraulic properties
correspond to those of a valve with smaller connections than the
piping (for example, the hydraulic properties of a 1 valve
correspond to those of a valve with a 3/4 internal diameter).
10
8
Fast-coupling pressure tappings
The valves are equipped with fast-coupling pressure tappings that

allow for quick, precise measurements. When the measuring
syringe is withdrawn, the tapping automatically closes and thus
prevents water from leaking.
4
2
Number of turns
Fully open
1/2 turn
Closed
Pressure
measurement
Automatic
reclosure
Standard valve with variable orifice

131 series valve with Venturi device
Safety cap
2. Permits the measurement process and manual balancing of the
circuit to be performed more quickly. In fact, the flow rate is
now a function of the p only, which is measured upstream and
downstream of the fixed orifice of the Venturi device located
upstream of the disc and no longer across the entire valve.
In practical terms, this means that the only information required
for measuring the flow rate in the valves is now simply the
p, and no longer the p plus the position of the knob.
Measuring
syringe
Seal
USING AND SETTING THE BALANCING VALVE
Adjustment knob
The ergonomic shape of the adjustment knob has been designed
for maximum operator comfort and accurate adjustment.
The adjustment range of 5 complete turns provides a high level of
precision in balancing the hydraulic circuits.
The micrometric scale indicator graduations are large and clear
for very easy fine adjustment of the flow rate.
The knob is made of high strength, corrosion-free reinforced
polymer.
Adjustment reference scale
Each 360 rotation of the knob moves the turn indicator by one
position, within a range of 0 (valve closed) to 5 (valve fully open).
The decimal graduations of the micrometric scale situated around
the knob itself allow the flow rate to be even more finely adjusted.
The balancing valve is used by taking into consideration the

fluidodynamic characteristics that links the pressure drop, flow rate
and setting position of the knob that controls the disc.
Presetting
The position number that the knob should be set to (presetting) can
be derived by knowing the value of the pressure drop p that must
be created by the valve when a certain flow rate G passes through.
The characteristic curve for each valve size can be used to
determine the setting position, or the corresponding Kv can be
calculated using the following formula:
G
Kv =
(1.1) where:G = flow rate in m3/h
p
p = pressure drop in bar
(1 bar = 100 kPa, 10.000 mm c.a.)
Kv = flow rate in m3/h through the valve
corresponding to a pressure drop
of 1 bar
The value obtained is then compared to the characteristic curve
values that correspond to each valve size. It is best to choose a
valve size so that it can be preset to a half-open position and still
provide a certain margin both in opening and closing.
Micrometric scale
Measuring the flow rate

Connect a differential pressure gauge to the pressure tappings of the
Venturi device of the valve. Read the p value on the gauge, then
determine the flow rate value G by consulting the characteristic Venturi
curve for the valve size being used. Alternatively, calculate it using the
following formula:
Turn indicator
G = KvVenturi x
pVenturi
(1.2)
Note: The curve used in this step differs from the curve used for the
presetting step because it refers to the pVenturi-flow rate
characteristics of the Venturi device located upstream of the valve
and not those across the entire valve (including the disc), which are
shown in the curves used for presetting.
Memory stop
The valves are equipped with a system that memorises the setting,
allowing the valve to be reopened in the initial position if it has been
closed for any reason.
Locking the position to be memorised requires the use of a 2,5 mm
hex key.
Setting the flow rate manually

To manually calibrate the flow rate through the valve, adjust the
position of the knob until the differential pressure indicated by the
measuring device corresponds to the desired flow rate value on the
characteristic Venturi curve for the valve being used. Alternatively,
calculate the pressure drop of the Venturi device using the following
formula:
pVenturi =
Knob cover
Memory stop
lock screw
G2
(1.3)
KvVenturi2
Next, turn the adjustment knob until the theoretical p value

calculated using the formula (1.3) above is reached.
Nota: The curve used in this step differs from the curve used for the
presetting step because it refers to the pVenturi-flow rate
characteristics of the Venturi device located inside the valve and
not those across the entire valve (including the disc), which are
shown in the curves used for presetting.
Knob
Turn indicator
Correcting for liquids with a different density

The following comments apply to liquids with a viscosity 3E (for
example, water and glycol mixtures).
If using liquids with a density different from water at 20C
( = 1 kg /dm3), correct the value of the pressure drop p measured
using the following formula:
p' = p/'
where:p' = reference pressure drop

p = pressure drop measured
' = liquid density in kg/ dm3
Use the p' value to perform the presetting or flow rate

measurement steps using the curves or the formulas.
Code 131600 1"

Knob setting position
p (mm w.g.)
0,5
1 1,5
p (kPa)
2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5
15.000
150
10.000
100
5.000
50
2.000
20
1.000
10
500
200
100
60
100
250
500
1.000
2.500
5.000
Example: presetting
A flow rate G = 900 l/h must create a pressure drop of p = 18 kPa.
Use the curve for the 131600 1 valve to obtain a setting position of
2 (blue line).
Alternatively, use the formula (1.1) to obtain the value Kv = 0,9/ 0,18
= 2,14. Consult the table for the 131600 1 valve to obtain the
corresponding setting position of 2 (the value closest to the one
required).
Example: correcting for liquids with a different density

Liquid density ' = 1,1 Kg/dm3
Pressure drop measured (or desired) p = 18 kPa.
Reference pressure drop p' = 18/1,1 = 16,36 kPa.
Use this value when consulting the curve or using the formula (1.1)
to obtain the setting position that corresponds to flow rate G (new
position ~ 2,15).
0,6
25.000
10.000
G (l/h)
Kv

0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5
0,94 1,26 1,61 2,10 2,64 3,28 3,92 4,64 5,29 5,94
Venturi curve
p (mm w.g.)
1/2 3/4
1 1 1/4
1 1/2
15.000
p (kPa)
150
100
10.000
5.000
50
2.000
20
1.000
10
200
100
0,5
50
0,2
250
500
1.000
2.500
5.000
10.000
25.000
50.000
G (l/h)
Kv Venturi
Alternatively, use the formula (1.2), where a pVenturi measurement of

3 kPa, bearing in mind that the KvVenturi of the 1 131600 valve is equal
to 11,96, will result in a flow rate G = 11,96 x 0,03 = 2,07 m3/h.
Pressure drop measured pVenturi = 3 kPa
Reference pressure drop p' = 3/1,1 = 2,72 kPa
Use this value when consulting the Venturi curve for the valve used or using
the formula (1.2) to obtain the corresponding flow rate G (= 1,97 m3/h).
500
20
100
Example: measuring the flow rate

For a pVenturi measurement of 3 kPa on a 1 valve, consult the Venturi
curve for the valve in question where the x-axis will indicate a flow rate
value of 2000 l/h (blue line).
1/2
3,10
3/4
4,74
Connection
1
1 1/4
11,96
18,41
1 1/2
18,56
2
31,85
Example: setting the flow rate manually

Proceed as follows to adjust the flow rate for a 1 value to 2500 l/h.
Turn the valve knob into the fully open position and then gradually
close the valve controlling the pVenturi value indicated by the
measuring device. As shown in the curve at left, once the
differential value of 4,3 kPa (red line), has been reached, the flow of
the fluid passing through the valve will be at the desired rate of
2500 l/h.
Alternatively, with a flow rate rate of G = 2500 l/h and KvVenturi =
11,96 for the 131600 1 valve in question, use the formula (1.3) to
derive a pVenturi = 2,52 / 11,962 = 4,3 kPa. Set the valve to the
pVenturi value calculated.
Desired liquid flow rate G = 2.500 l/h.
Use the formula (1.3) or the Venturi curve to determine the
reference pressure drop p = 2,52 / 11,962 = 4,3 kPa.
If the density of the liquid used is = 1,1 kg/dm3 the formula below
will provide the pressure drop pVenturi value, which should be
indicated on the measuring device for the flow rate desired:
pVenturi = x p = 1,1 x 4,3 = 4,73 kPa.
Venturi curve
p (mm w.g.)
1/2 3/4
1 1 1/4
1 1/2
15.000
p (kPa)
150
100
10.000
Connection Kv
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
5.000
50
2.000
20
1.000
10
500
200
100
Venturi
3,10
4,74
11,96
18,41
18,56
31,85
0,5
50
20
100
0,2
250
500
1.000
2.500
5.000
10.000
25.000
50.000
G (l/h)
Code 131400 1/2"
Code 131500 3/4"

p (mm w.g.)
0,5
1 1,5 2
2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
0,5 1 1,5 2
2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5
p (kPa)
15.000
150
150
10.000
100
100
5.000
50
5.000
50
2.000
20
2.000
20
1.000
10
1.000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
60
50
100
250
500
1.000
2.500
5.000
0,6
10.000
60
50
G (l/h)
Kv

0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5
0,57 0,76 0,85 1,09 1,49 1,94 2,39 2,72 2,89 3,06
100
250
500
1.000
2.500
5.000
0,6
10.000
G (l/h)
Kv

0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5
0,62 0,86 1,02 1,32 1,72 2,17 2,70 3,22 3,60 3,97
Code 131700 1 1/4"
Code 131600 1"

p (mm w.g.)
0,5
1 1,5
p (kPa)
2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5
p (mm w.g.)
0,5
1,5 2 2,5 33,5 4 4,5 5
p (kPa)
15.000
150
15.000
150
10.000
100
10.000
100
5.000
50
5.000
50
2.000
20
2.000
20
1.000
10
1.000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
60
100
250
500
1.000
2.500
5.000
10.000
0,6
25.000
60
100
250
500
1.000
2.500
5.000
10.000
G (l/h)
Kv

0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5
0,94 1,26 1,61 2,10 2,64 3,28 3,92 4,64 5,29 5,94
Code 131800 1 1/2"

0,5
G (l/h)
Kv

0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5
1,90 2,95 4,00 4,74 5,69 6,58 7,47 8,41 9,42 10,43
Code 131900 2"

p (mm w.g.)
0,6
25.000
1,5 2 2,53 3,5 4 4,5 5
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
0,5
1,5
2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5
p (kPa)
15.000
150
15.000
150
10.000
100
10.000
100
5.000
50
5.000
50
2.000
20
2.000
20
1.000
10
1.000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
60
250
500
1.000
2.500
5.000
10.000
25.000
0,6
50.000
60
250
G (l/h)
Kv

0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5
1,88 3,66 5,12 6,54 7,67 8,99 10,1111,4712,9214,77
500
1.000
2.500
5.000
10.000
25.000
0,6
50.000
G (l/h)
Kv

0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5
3,73 5,24 7,98 11,19 14,35 16,99 19,17 21,74 22,86 24,48
135
series construction details
Convertibility of the connections
Adjustment knob
The 135 series valve bodies can be converted from straight

connections to angled connections and vice versa at the
installation site without using special tools or additional parts.
These connections are able to be converted because the bodies
have been constructed with a 45 seal. Rotating one half of the
body will change the direction of the connections by 90, making it
very easy to convert the connections at the
installation site without jeopardising the
precision of their operations. This is the first
time that a balancing valve, for this type of
product, can be used conventionally or
by replacing the elbows or bends in
a hydraulic circuit.
This adaptability allows it to be
situated in the ideal location.
The ergonomic shape of the adjustment knob has been designed

for maximum operator comfort and accurate adjustment.
The adjustment range of several complete turns provides a high
level of precision in balancing the hydraulic circuits.
The micrometric scale indicator graduations are large and clear
for very easy fine adjustment of the flow rate.
The indicator can be quickly repositioned to facilitate reading.
The knob is made of high strength, corrosion-free reinforced
resin.
Adjustment reference scale

Each 360 rotation of the knob moves the linear indicator by one
position, within a range of 0 (valve closed) to the maximum value
depending upon the size of the valve. The decimal graduations
situated around the knob
itself allow the flow rate to
be even more finely
adjusted.
Coupling with flanges

The 135 series valves are equipped with a special coupling system
of flanges composed of the following parts:
Adapters for two-part flanges with an
anti-rotation lock system.
Decimal graduations
A lip gasket for the hydraulic seal.
Linear indicator
Memory stop
The valves are equipped with a system that memorises the setting,
allowing the valve to be reopened in the initial position if it has been
closed for any reason.
Locking the position to be memorised does not require the use of
any special tools.
GASKET
VALVE
BODY
GROOVED FLANGE
Lock screw
Fast-coupling pressure tappings

The valves are equipped with quick-couple pressure tappings that
allow for quick, precise measurements. When the measuring
syringe is removed, the tapping automatically closes and thus
prevents water from leaking.
Pressure
measurement
Automatic
closure
Memory stop
Lock nut
Safety cap
Measuring
syringe
Seal
USING AND SETTING THE BALANCING VALVE

The balancing valve is used by taking into consideration the
fluidodynamic characteristics that links the pressure drop
measured at the pressure connections, flow rate and setting
position of the knob.
Presetting
The position number that the knob should be set to (presetting) can
be derived by knowing the value of the pressure drop p that must
be created by the valve when a certain flow rate G passes through.
The characteristic curve for each valve size can be used to
determine the setting position, or the corresponding Kv can be
calculated using the following formula:
Kv =
(1.1) where: G = flow rate in m3/h

p = pressure drop in bar
(1 bar = 100 kPa = 10.000 mm c.a.)
Kv = flow rate in m3/h through the valve,
corresponding to a pressure drop of 1 bar
Measuring the flow rate

The flow rate value G that is passing through the valve can be
derived by measuring the p value on the valve for a specific
setting position and consulting the curve or calculating it using the
following formula:
G = Kv
(1.2)
Correcting for liquids with a different density

The following comments apply to liquids with a viscosity 3E (for
example, water and glycol mixtures).
If using liquids with a density different from water at 20C
( = 1 kg/dm3), correct the value of the pressure drop p measured
using the following formula:
p =
where: p= reference pressure drop

p = pressure drop measured
= liquid density in kg/dm3
Use the p value to perform the presetting or flow rate

measurement steps using the curves or the formulas.
The value obtained is then compared to the characteristic curve

values that correspond to each valve size.
It is best to choose a valve size so that it can be preset to a halfopen position and still provide a certain margin both in opening and
closing.
Code 135060 DN 65 straight

p (mm w.g.)
0,5
1,5
4,5
p (kPa)
15.000
150
10.000
100
5.000
50
2.000
20
1.000
10
500
200
100
60
0,5
2,5
25
10
50
0,6
100

Kv
1
12,8
1,5
16
2
18
3
22,3
4
33
4,5
47
Alternatively, use the formula (1.1) to obtain the value Kv = 6 / 0,07

= 22,72.
Consult the table for the 135060 DN 65 straight valve to obtain the
corresponding setting position of 3 (the value closest to the one
required).

Pressure drop measured (or desired) p = 7 kPa.
Use this value when consulting the curve or using the formula (1.1)
to obtain the setting position that corresponds to flow rate G (new
position ~ 3.15).
G (m3/h)
0,5
11
Example: presetting
A flow rate G = 6000 l/h must create a pressure drop of p = 7 kPa.
Use the curve for the 135060 DN 65 straight valve to obtain a
setting position of 3 (blue line).
5
61
Code 135060 DN 65 angled

p (mm w.g.)
4,5
p (kPa)
15.000
150
10.000
100
5.000
50
2.000
20
1.000
10
500
200
100
60
0,5
2,5
25
10
Example: measuring the flow rate

For a 135060 DN 65 square valve with the knob set in position 4
(corresponding to a Kv = 35 in the table), and a pressure drop p
measurement = 14 kPa.
Consult the curve to obtain a flow rate value G of approximately
13 m3/h (blue line).
Alternatively, use the formula (1.2) to obtain:
G = 35 x 0,14 = 13 m3/h

Pressure drop measured p = 14 kPa
Use this value when consulting the curve for the valve used or using the
formula (1.2) to obtain the corresponding flow rate G (= 12,47 m3/h).
0,6
100
50
G (m3/h)

Kv
1
15,5
2
21
3
27
4
35
4,5
52
5
66

p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
15.000
150
15.000
150
10.000
100
10.000
100
p (mm w.g.)
0,5
1,5
4,5
4,5
p (kPa)
5.000
50
5.000
50
2.000
20
2.000
20
1.000
10
1.000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
60
0,5
2,5
25
10
50
60
0,6
100
0,5
2,5
25
10

Kv
1
12,8
1,5
16
2
18
3
22,3
4
33
0,6
100
G (m3/h)
G (m3/h)
0,5
11
50
4,5
47
5
61
Kv
1
15,5
2
21
3
27
4
35
4,5
52
5
66
p (mm w.g.)
0,5 1 1,5 2 3 3,5 4 4,5 5
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
0,5
3,5
4,5
p (kPa)
15.000
150
15.000
150
10.000
100
10.000
100
5.000
50
5.000
50
2.000
20
2.000
20
1.000
10
1.000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
0,6
250
60
1
2,5
25
10
50
100
2,5
25
10
50
100
G (m3/h)
G (m3/h)

Kv
0,5
14,5
1
17
1,5
20
2
22
3
26
3,5
32

4
49
4,5
63
5
82

0,5 1 1,5 2
2,5
0,5
13
Kv
1
16
2
21
3
23
3,5
31
4
45
4,5
63
5
82

p (mm w.g.)
0,6
250
60
3,5
4 4,5 5 5,5 6
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
1 2
2,5
p (kPa)
3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5 6
15.000
150
15.000
150
10.000
100
10.000
100
5.000
50
5.000
50
2.000
20
2.000
20
1.000
10
1.000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
60
1,5
2,5
25
10
50
100
250
0,6
400
60
2
25
10
50
100

1
18
1,5
21
2
23
2,5
38
3
58
3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5 6

83 110 140 165 180 220
0,6
400
G (m3/h)
G (m3/h)
0,5
Kv 14
250
Kv
1
21
2
25
2,5
39
3
61
3,5
86
4
112
4,5
132
5
168
5,5
190
6
217
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
15.000
150
15.000
150
10.000
100
10.000
100
0,5 1 2
2,5
3,5
4 4,5 5 5,5 6
2,5
3,5
p (kPa)
4 4,5 5 5,5 6
5.000
50
5.000
50
2.000
20
2.000
20
1.000
10
1.000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
60
2,5
10
25
50
100
250
0,6
500
60
2,5
10
25
100
50
250
G (m /h)
G (m /h)

Kv
0,5
23
1
28
2
35
2,5
46
3
78
3,5
4
4,5
5
5,5
6
120 145 178 220 248 275

1
2,5
1
27
Kv
2
33
2,5
49
3
80
3,5
4
4,5
5
5,5
6
116 151 180 220 247 275

p (mm w.g.)
0,6
500
3
3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5 6
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
2,5
3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5 6
p (kPa)
15.000
150
15.000
150
10.000
100
10.000
100
5.000
50
5.000
50
2.000
20
2.000
20
1.000
10
1.000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
60
2,5
10
25
50
100
250
0,6
500
60
2,5
10
25
50
100

Kv
2
52
2,5
91
3
130
3,5
175
4
220
4,5
260
0,6
500
G (m /h)
G (m /h)
1
29
250
5
310
5,5
360
6
395
Kv
1
27
2
56
2,5
92
3
135
3,5
173
4
230
4,5
270
5
315
5,5
370
6
400
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
7 8 910 1112
p (mm w.g.)
11
7 8 9 10 12
p (kPa)
15.000
150
15.000
150
10.000
100
10.000
100
5.000
50
5.000
50
2.000
20
2.000
20
1.000
10
1.000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
60
20
50
100
250
500
0,6
2500
1000
0,6
2500
60
20
50
100
250
500
1000
G (m3/h)
G (m /h)

Kv
4
244
5
332
6
424
7
538
8
645
9
753
11
920
10
863
12
1005
Kv
4
240
5
318
6
410
7
545
8
611
9
725
10
832
11
908
12
980

p (kPa)
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
15.000
150
15.000
150
10.000
100
10.000
100
p (mm w.g.)
7 8 10
7 8 10
5.000
50
5.000
50
2.000
20
2.000
20
1.000
10
1.000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
60
10
25
50
100
250
500
1000
0,6
2500
60
10
25
50
100
250
500
1000
G (m3/h)
G (m3/h)

Kv
3
374
4
480
5
718
6
1044
7
1440
0,6
2500

8
1690
10
1796
Kv
3
307
4
465
5
752
6
980
7
1435
8
1676
10
1720

p (mm w.g.)
7 10 14
6 8 12
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
7 10 14
5 6
8 12
p (kPa)
15.000
150
15.000
150
10.000
100
10.000
100
5.000
50
5.000
50
2.000
20
2.000
20
1.000
10
1.000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
60
25
50
100
250
500
1000
2500
0,6
5000
60
25
50
100
200
500
1000

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
12
14
430 712 1005 1366 1723 1976 2160 2440 2585 2836
Kv
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
12
14
417 711 1006 1306 1692 1967 2340 2371 2546 2719
Accessories
Installation
130 series Flomet
The balancing valves should be installed so that the pressure

tappings, drain cocks and adjustment knob can all be accessed.
The valves can be mounted on both horizontal and vertical pipes.
It is best to keep the piping sections upstream and downstream of
the valves straight for greater measurement precision, as shown in
the diagram below. The direction of flow rate indicated on the valve
body must be observed.
131 series
131 series
5D
Electronic device to measure

differential pressures and flow rates.
Calibration range 0.05 200 kPa.
Unit of measure and fluidodynamic
data can be selected and
memorised.
Measures
the
temperature of the fluid (0 90C).
Supplied complete with isolating
valves and connectors.
Pump
10D
Nut
135 series
135 series
5D
2D
Pressure tapping
Pump
FLOMET fast-coupling
2D
0,6
5000
G (m3/h)
G (m3/h)
Kv
2500
Syringe
10D
Sizing a system with balancing valves
100 series
Please see the 2nd volume of the Caleffi Handbooks for further
information about sizing a system with balancing valves, which
provides calculation examples and notes about the use of devices
in circuits.
Pair of connectors with fast-coupling syringe to

connect the pressure tappings to measuring
instruments.
Female 1/4 threaded connection.
Application diagrams
To regulate the flow rate that flows to each column
To regulate the flow rate that supplies each emitter
To balance circuits that serve the coils of air treatment units
To balance circuits that serve cooling towers
To balance sanitary distribution circuits
To balance zone branches in circuits with three-way valves
To balance the by-pass way in circuits for temperature control
GR1
GR2
GR1
GR2
To balance circuits that serve cooling unit evaporators or

condensers
To balance primary/secondary coupled circuits
To balance the various substations in district heating systems
Series 131
Balancing valve with Venturi device. Threaded 1/2 connections (from 1/2 to 2) F x F. Brass body, control stem and disc.
EPDM hydraulic seals. Temperature range: -10 110 C. Maximum operating pressure: 16 bar. Accuracy: 5%. Knob with
micrometric indicator. Five adjustment turns. Adjustment position lock and memory. Complete with fast-coupling pressure
tappings.
Series 135
Balancing valve. Flanged DN 65 connections (from DN 65 to DN 300), PN 16 convertible from straight to elbow and
viceversa with lip gaskets in EPDM. Cast iron body. Brass or stainless steel control stem. Bronze disc. Buna-N seals.
Temperature range: -5 110C. Maximum operating pressure: 16 bar. Accuracy: 5%. Knob with micrometric indicator.
Adjustment position lock and memory. Complete with fast-coupling pressure tappings.
We reserve the right to change the products and relevant technical data contained in this publication at any time and without prior notice.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.P.A. I 28010 FONTANETO DAGOGNA (NO) S.R. 229, N.25 TEL. +39 0322 8491 FAX +39 0322 863723
Http://www.caleffi.com E-mail: info@caleffi.com
Differential by-pass valve
CALEFFI
RE
IS
519 series
TERE
BSI EN ISO 9001:2000

Cert. n FM 21654
01007/07 GB
UNI EN ISO 9001:2000

Cert. n 0003
Function
The differential by-pass valve is used in systems working with
variable flow rates, for example in those making widespread use of
thermostatic valves or 2-way motorised valves. It ensures a flow
recirculation proportional to the number of valves being closed,
while limiting the maximum differential pressure value generated by
the pump.
In chilled water systems with high head pumps, installation of the
version with a setting range between 100 and 400 kPa is advisable.
Product range
Code 519500 Adjustable differential by-pass valve with graduated scale, setting range: 16 m w.g.
Size 3/4
Size 1 1/4
Size 3/4
Dimensions
Materials
EPDM
EPDM
asbestos free NBR
ABS
stainless steel
mH2O
1
2
3
4
5
6
Body:
Obturator:
Obturator gasket:
O-Ring seals:
Union seals:
Control knob:
Spring:
Performance
Connections:
3/4, 1 1/4 F x M with union
Medium:
water, glycol solutions
Max percentage of glycol:
30%
Temperature range:
0110C
10 bar
Setting range:
1060 kPa (16 m w.g.) for codes 519500 and 519700
100400 kPa (1040 m w.g.) for code 519504
A
B
Code
519500
519700
519504
A
3/4
1 1/4
3/4
B
59
88,5
59
C
26
41
26
D
104
158
104
Weight (Kg)
0,45
1,19
0,45
Operating principle
2
When the spring (1) compression is adjusted using the control knob (2), the force
balance acting on the obturator (3) changes, thus modifying the trigger pressure value
of the valve. The obturator opens, activating the by-pass circuit, only when it is subjected
to a differential pressure sufficient to generate a thrust greater than the thrust exerted
by the contrast spring. This allows the flow discharge through the outlet (4), limiting the
difference in pressure between the two points in the system where the valve is fitted.
5
1
3
System operation
The job of the by-pass valve is to maintain the pump operating
point as close as possible to its nominal value (point A on the graph
shown below). If the by-pass valve is not used, when the flow rate
in the circuit decreases due to partial closure of the two-way valves,
the head loss in the circuit increases, point B.
The by-pass valve, set to the nominal head value of the pump,
enables to limit the pressure increase, by-passing the flow rate G.
This behaviour is guaranteed at any closing condition of the system
regulating valves. In fact, once the position of the valve control
knob has been established, the trigger pressure value is more or
less constant as the discharge flow rate varies (see hydraulic
characteristic diagrams).
A proper valve sizing must guarantee a sufficient flow rate by-pass
to keep the pump at its nominal operating point in all system
operating conditions, for example when the first thermostatic valves
are closed.
TOTAL LOAD
PARTIAL LOAD
Regulating valve
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
mH2O 6
mH2O 6
B
Pump curve
pNOMINAL Circuit resistance curve

with regulating valves
partially open
p constant
on the circuit
Circuit resistance curve with

regulating valves fully open
G
50%
100%
Flow rate G
Setting
To regulate the valve, turn the knob to the required value on the
graduated scale: the values correspond to the differential pressure in
metres w.g. to open the by-pass.
To carry out rapid adjustment of the by-pass valve it is possible to use
the following practical method, which can be applied, for example, to
the system in an apartment fitted with thermostatic valves: the system
must be operating, the regulating valves must be fully open and the
by-pass valve must be set to the maximum value (a). Close approximately
the 30% of the thermostatic valve. Gradually open the valve using the
control knob. Use a thermometer, or simply your hand, to check that
the hot water is flowing into the by-pass circuit (b). As soon as a rise
in the temperature is noted, open the thermostat valves again and
check that the hot water stops flowing into the by-pass (c). Lock the
knob in this position (d) with the fixing screw (5).
a)
b)
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
mH2O 6
mH2O 6
c)
d)
1
2
3
4
5
mH2O 6
1
2
3
4
5
mH2O 6
code 519500 (3/4)
code 519700 (1 1/4)

Setting
positions
70
60
60
5
4
50
50
40
30
20
4
3
2
1
40
3
2
1
10
4
3
2
1
0
0,5
(kPa)
80
Setting
positions
p (m w.g.)
(kPa
p (m w.g.)
1,5
80
70
30
20
10
10
Flow rate (m3/h)
Flow rate (m3/h)

code 519504 (3/4)
Setting
positions
(kPa)
p (m w.g.)
60
600
50
500
Installation
The differential by-pass valve can be fitted in any position, respecting
the flow direction indicated by the arrow on the valve body.
In systems with a traditional boiler it is normally fitted between the
system flow and return ends, which allows the control of the pressure
and the passage of a minimum flow through the heat generator.
In systems with a condensation boiler, it is preferable to fit the
by-pass directly between the upstream and downstream sections
of the pump, as this allows a higher T in the circuit, with lower
return temperatures and therefore better operation of the system.
In the event of high by-pass flow rate levels, it is recommended to
fit the valve between the flow and return ends of each column,
rather than fitting a number of valves in parallel at the central boiler.
4
400
40
3
30
300
20
200
10
100
0,5
1,5
Flow rate (m3/h)
Shut-off valve
RT
Small-medium size system

by-pass in central plant
Pump
Room thermostat
Check valve
RT
Insulated manifold
Two way zone valve
Autoflow
Automatic air vent
O2Hm
Thermostatic valve
1
2
3
4
5
6
RT
Medium-large size system

mH2O
1
2
3
4
5
6
mH2O
1
2
3
4
5
6
by-pass on top of risers

RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
Chilled water system, central by-pass
RT
RT
RT
RT
1
2
3
4
5
6
O2Hm
CHILLER
519 series
Differential by-pass valve. Threaded connections 3/4 (1 1/4) F x M with union. Brass body. Brass obturator. EPDM
obturator gasket. EPDM O-Ring seals. Asbestos free NBR union seals. ABS control knob. Stainless steel spring.
Medium: water, glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Temperature range 0110C. Maximum working
pressure 10 bar. Setting range 1060 kPa size 3/4 and 1 1/4, 100400 kPa size 3/4.
We reserve the right to make changes and improvements to the products and related data in this publication, at any time and without prior notice.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.P.A. I 28010 FONTANETO DAGOGNA (NO) S.R. 229, N.25 TEL. +39 0322 8491 R.A. FAX +39 0322 863723
Copyright 2007 Calef fi S.P.A.
Non-controllable backflow preventer

with different pressure zones (CA type)
573 series
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
CALEFFI
01008/07 GB
Function
The backflow preventer is a protective plumbing device capable of
preventing backflow of polluted water into the mains water system.
This type of backflow may occur due to changes in pressure in the
distribution network that cause water to flow backwards.
The preventer, which is fitted between the mains and the user system
in water distribution systems, creates a safety separation area that
prevents any contact between the water in the two systems.
This particular series of backflow preventers is certified as
conforming to the performance requirements of standard
NF P 43.009, with certification in progress according to
standard EN 14367
SVGW
SSIGE
Product range
Series 573 Non-controllable backflow preventer with different pressure zones, CA type
size 1/2, 3/4
Dimensions
Materials
Body:
dezincification-resistant alloy
EN 12165 CW602N
Seat of central obturator:
EN 12164 CW602N
Check valve body:
POM
Springs:
stainless steel
Diaphragm:
shaped NBR
O-Ring seals:
NBR
Gaskets:
non asbestos NBR
Strainer:
stainless steel
Performance
Medium:
Nominal pressure:
Connections:
drinking water
PN 10
65C
1/2, 3/4 F with union
Code
573400
573500
A
1/2
3/4
B
D
C
119,5 113,5 40
119,5 113,5 40
E
54
54
F
Weight (kg)
44
1,3
44
1,3
Backflow
Potable water fed from the mains
supply may suffer from hazardous
pollution
caused
mainly
by
contaminated fluids from plumbing
systems flowing back directly into the
mains supply.
This phenomenon, termed backflow
occurs when:
a) the pressure in the mains system is
less that in the plumbing circuit
receiving
the
supply
(back
syphonage). This situation may
occur when there is a pipe
breaking in the mains system or
when demand on the mains supply
from consumers is very heavy.
b) the pressure in the plumbing circuit
receiving the supply rises (back
pressure) due, for example, to
water being pumped from a well.
Use of CA type backflow preventers - reference to European standard EN 1717

and EN 14367
Proper use of the CA type backflow preventer is regulated by the new European standards on
prevention of pollution from backflow.
The reference standard is EN 1717: 2000 Protection against polution of drinking water in water
systems and general requirements for the devices used to prevent pollution by backflow.
In this standard, the water in the systems is classified according to the level of risk it represents
for human health.
Category 1:
Water used for human consumption provided by a water company.
Category 2:
Fluid that does not present health hazard, as per 1, the quality of which has been
compromised due to changes in temperature, taste, odour or appearance.
Category 3:
Fluid that represents a slight health hazard due to the presence of one or more
harmful substances.
Category 4:
Fluid that represents a health hazard due to the presence of one or more toxic
or very toxic substances or one or more radioactive, mutagenic or
carcinogenic substances.
Category 5:
Fluid that represents a severe health hazard due to the presence of

microbiological or viral elements.
According to this classification, suitable backflow prevention devices must be inserted in water
distribution systems.
CA Type backflow preventers are used to protect against risk of contamination by waters
of up to category 3. For water of category 4, it is necessary to use a backflow preventer
of BA type. For water of category 2 on the contrary it is sufficient to use a controllable
check valve of EA type or a controllable double check valve of EC type.
The table given below, named Protection matrix, associates the various types of system with
the relative categories of fluid, and has been drawn up based on the indications provided in the
European standards.
Standard NF P 34.009 and the new European standard EN 14367 Devices to prevent pollution by
backflow of potable water. Non-controllable backflow preventer with different pressure zones. Family C
Type A establishes the functional, dimensional and mechanical requirements that must be satisfied
by non-controllable backflow preventers with different pressure zones of CA type.
Risk assessment
Given the potential dangers of the
phenomenon and the requirements of
current regulations, the risk of pollution
from backflow must be assessed on
the basis of the type of system and the
characteristic of the fluid that flows in it.
An appropriate backflow prevention
device must be selected on the basis
of that assessment performed by the
system designer and the mains
supplier. The device must be located
along the supply line at those points at
risk of backflow which would be
hazardous to human health.
The protection can be provided by
inserting a backflow preventer at critical
points in the circuit at the inlet from the
mains supply or in the internal plumbing
system. This will prevent polluted water
from flowing back in all systems for
which direct connection to the mains or
an internal supply is considered
hazardous.
Installation in a building
with multiple users
Protection matrix
Type of plant
General
Hot and cold water mixing devices in domestic water systems
Water cooling devices for air conditioning units, without
additives
Sterilisers for packed or disinfected materials
Water in primary domestic heating system circuits, without additives
Domestic, residential or commercial gardens
Hand held fertiliser sprayers for use in domestic gardens
Watering systems, without fertilisers or insecticides, with sprinkler
fixed to the ground at a depth of not more than 150 mm
Water softeners
Domestic water softeners regenerated with common salt
Commercial water softeners (only regenerated with common salt)
Commercial applications
Automatic dispensers with injection of ingredients or CO2
Automatic dispensers without injection of ingredients or CO2
Machines to wash out drink distribution pipes in restaurants
Hairdresser rinsing systems
Medicine
X-ray machine cooling systems
Food applications
Ice-making machines
Large kitchen machines with automatic filling system
Domestic applications
Water to sinks, baths and showers
Domestic dishwashers and washing machines
Flexible pipes with controlled flow spray nozzles or stop cock
Domestic dialysis machines
Fluid cat.
2
3
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Operating principle
The non-controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer, CA type comprises: a check valve upstream (1); a check valve downstream (2);
a discharge device (3).
The two check valves mark the limits of three different zones, in each of which there is a different pressure: upstream or inlet area (A);
intermediate zone, also known as the zone of different pressure (B); downstream or outlet zone (C). The discharge device (3) is located in the
intermediate zone. The discharge device (3) is connected directly to the diaphragm (4). This mobile assembly is opened and closed by the
difference in pressure between upstream and downstream of the check valve and by the counter spring (5).
Correct conditions of flow
Under correct conditions of flow, both check valves are open, while
the pressure in the intermediate chamber (B) is always lower than
the pressure upstream (A) due to a calculated loss of head at the
first check valve (1).
As a result, this pressure difference acts on the internal
diaphragm (4) and generates a force that keeps the drain valve
closed (3), communicating with the atmosphere, pressing on the
counter spring (5).
As the pressure upstream decreases, both the check valves close.

The discharge valve (3) opens at the moment in which the
difference in pressure p, existing between the upstream (A) and
intermediate areas (B) reaches a value just below the one
calculated for the counter spring (5). Drainage continues until the
intermediate chamber of the backflow preventer is empty.
This creates a (safety) air zone and prevents the contaminated
water of the circuit , coming from zone (C), from returning into the
water distribution mains if the downstream check valve (2) fails.
When the situation returns to normal (upstream pressure higher
than the downstream pressure), the discharge valve closes again
and the backflow preventer is once again ready to work.
2
7
8
1
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM
STRAINER
3
A
2
7
8
C
6
UPSTREAM
STRAINER
NORMAL OPERATION
DOWNSTREAM
3
A
No flow conditions
The check valves (1) and (2) are now closed. Due to the difference
in pressure that still exists between the upstream zone (A) and the
intermediate zone (B), the discharge valve (3) remains closed.
2
7
8
DOWNSTREAM
UPSTREAM
STRAINER
3
A
UPSTREAM PRESSURE LOSS
C
6
Downstream pressure increase

If the pressure in the downstream zone (C) increases until it
exceeds the upstream pressure value (A), the check valve (2)
closes, thus preventing the water that has already been sent to the
user from flowing back towards the water main.
Should check valve (2) have a slight problem with seal, or in
general should any other malfunction occur in the backflow
preventer, the latter will always shut off (disconnect) the connection
between the user and the water main.
The backflow preventer has been made with all the constructional
features typical of positive acting devices; this means it ensures
that optimum safety conditions are maintained in all situations.
NO FLOW CONDITION
Stainless steel strainer
The backflow preventer is fitted with a stainless steel strainer (9)
upstream, to prevent impurities or dirt from causing damage to the
check valve seals (1-2) or the central obturator internal
mechanism (8) over time.
Corrosion-proof materials
The materials used to manufacture the backflow preventers must be
insensitive to corrosion caused by contact with drinking water, and
these characteristics must be maintained over time. For this reason,
they have been made using dezincification-resistant alloy
for the
body (7), the central obturator seat (8) and the check valves (1-2), and
stainless steel for the springs and strainer.
Certification

The elastomers used for the hydraulic seals have been approved
by the Certifying Bodies in accordance with the most recent
regulations regarding compatibility for use with drinking water.
The non-controllable backflow preventer with different pressure

zones CA type 573 series is certified as in compliance with the
specific national and European product requirements by the
following Bodies: NF - SVGW - BELGAQUA - KIWA - SITAC - ACS.
p (bar)
2
p (m w.g.)
20
1,8
18
1,6
16
1,4
14
1,2
12
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
Before installing the backflow preventer it will be necessary to clean

the piping with a high-capacity jet of water. Poor cleaning of the
system can easily impair the operation of the unit.
For the protection of the public mains the disconnection unit must
be installed after the water meter, whereas in order to protect the tap
water outlets of the internal network it should be installed at the limit
of the areas where there may be contamination, for example: central
heating, watering gardens, etc.
10
0,5
5
4
0,3
1. Drain control operation. When there are drops in pressure in the

water supply mains, therefore upstream from the valve, the drain
valve must open and let the water contained in the valve body run
out:
50
Flow rate
3
(m /h)
20
0,5
10
5
0,2
0,1
0,4
0,2
Operating control procedure
a. Close the shut-off valves upstream and downstream (4).

b. Open the upstream control cock (2).
The water contained in the valve body should now flow out,
indicating that the device has tripped and has opened the drain
valve.
Installation
The backflow preventer unit must be installed horizontally after a
shut-off valve upstream and an inspectable filter; another shut-off
valve must be installed downstream.
The unit must be installed in an accessible area that is large
enough to prevent it getting submerged by any accidental flooding.
In addition there must be adequate waste pipe for medium drained
from the unit to flow away.
2. Check the seal of the second check valve. When back pressure
is applied on the downstream side of the valve, the second check
valve must close to prevent the water from flowing back:
a. Close the shut-off valves downstream and upstream from the
disconnection unit.
b. Open the upstream control cock (2).
c. Install a by-pass hose joining the control cock (1) to the other
control cock (3) downstream and open them both to carry the
mains pressure downstream of the second check valve.
No water must come out of the drain valve, thereby indicating that
the second check valve does not leak.
WATER MAINS
1 Water mains control cock

2 Upstream control cock
3 Downstream control cock
4 Upstream/downstream shut-off valve
5 Y-strainer
6 Backflow preventer series 573
with inspectable filter at inlet
7 Drain to sewer
573 series
Non-controllable backflow preventer with different pressure zones. CA Type. Complies with NF P 43.009.
Connections 1/2 (and 3/4) F with union. Body and seat of central check valve in dezincification-resistant alloy. POM check
valve body. Stainless steel springs and strainer. NBR shaped diaphragm and O-Ring seals. Non-asbestos fibre gaskets.
Medium: drinking water. Nominal pressure: PN 10. Maximum working temperature 65C.
CALEFFI
Convertible radiator valves

Thermostatic control heads
338 401 series

200 series
CALEFFI
01009/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
replaces dp 01009/01GB
Function
The following series of convertible radiator valves are typically used
for controlling the fluid in the emitters of heating systems.
These special valves can be converted from manual to
thermostatic operation by simple replacement of the adjusting knob
with a thermostatic control head. This means that the ambient
temperature of any room in which they are installed can be
constantly maintained at the set value.
The innovative 202 series thermostatic control head enables the
room temperature to be controlled, showing the actual room
temperature on the indicator on the front of the control head.
These valves have a special tailpiece with rubber hydraulic seal,
permitting quick, safe connection to the radiator without the use of
additional sealing materials.
Product range
Patent application No. MI2007U000405 (202 series)
VALVES:
For copper and plastic pipe:
338 series Angled convertible radiator valve
sizes 3/8, 1/2 radiator x 23 p.1.5 pipe

sizes 1/2 radiator x 3/4 pipe
339 series Straight convertible radiator valve

342 series Angled radiator lockshield valve
343 series Straight radiator lockshield valve
For iron pipe:
401
402
431
432
series
series
series
series
Angled convertible radiator valve

Straight convertible radiator valve
Angled radiator lockshield valve
Straight radiator lockshield valve
sizes
sizes
sizes
sizes
3/8,
3/8,
3/8,
3/8,
1/2,
1/2,
1/2,
1/2,
3/4,
3/4,
3/4,
3/4,
1
1
1
1
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
THERMOSTATIC CONTROL HEADS

200
201
202
203
209
series
series
series
series
series
Thermostatic control head with built-in liquid-filled sensor

Thermostatic control head with remote liquid-filled sensor
Thermostatic control with temperature indicator
Thermostatic control head with contact sensor for fluid temperature limitation
Tamper-proof / anti-theft cap for use in public places
adjustment scale from 0 to 5 corresponding to 028C

graduated scale 20-50C, 4090C
for 200 series control head
* 3/4 and 1 have tailpieces without rubber seals
Technical specifications of valves and lockshields

Material
Body:
brass EN 12165 CW617N, chrome plated
Obturator control stem:
stainless steel
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
Control knob and cap:
ABS (RAL 9010)
Performance
Medium:
30%
Max. differential pressure with control fitted:
1 bar
10 bar
Carrier medium temperature range:
5100C
Adjustment range of 200/201/202 series thermostatic control heads
OFF
7C
12C
234
16C
20C
24C
5
28C
Technical specification of 200/201/202 series

thermostatic control heads
Adjustment scale:
Control temperature range:
Frost protection cut-in:
Max. ambient temperature:
Length of capillary pipe (201 series):
Room temperature indicator (202 series):
05
028C
7C
50C
2m
1626C
Technical specifications of 203 series thermostatic

control heads
Adjustment scale:
- code 203502
- code 203702
Max sensor temperature:
Max pocket pressure:
Length of capillary pipe:
2050C
4090C
100C
10 bar
2m
Dimensions
2 3 4
E
A
2 3 4
Code
Code
Code
Code
338302
3/8
23 p.1,5
47,5
339302
3/8
23 p.1,5
47,5
342302
3/8
23 p.1,5
47,5
343302
3/8
23 p.1,5
47,5
338402
1/2
23 p.1,5
53,5
339402
1/2
23 p.1,5
53,5
342402
1/2
23 p.1,5
53,5
343402
1/2
23 p.1,5
53,5
338452
1/2
3/4
53,5
339452
1/2
3/4
53,5
342452
1/2
3/4
53,5
343452
1/2
3/4
53,5
Mass (kg)
Code
E'
Mass (kg)
Code
Mass (kg)
Code
Mass (kg)
338302 20,5
51,5
100
0,178
339302
24
55
103
0,178
342302
21,5
39
0,167
343302
24
44,5
0,184
338402 20,5
51,5
100
0,210
339402
24
55
103
0,210
342402
21,5
39
0,225
343402
24
44,5
0,228
338452 22,5
51,5
100 0,220
55
103 0,220
342452
23,5
39
0,205
343452
24,5
44,5
0,205
339452 24,5
E
A
2 3 4
2 3 4
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
401302
3/8
3/8
47,5
402302
3/8
3/8
21
431302
3/8
3/8
47,5
432302
3/8
3/8
21
401402
1/2
1/2
53,5
402402
1/2
1/2
22
431402
1/2
1/2
53,5
432402
1/2
1/2
22
401500
3/4
3/4
62,5
402500
3/4
3/4
30
431503
3/4
3/4
62,5
432503
3/4
3/4
30
401603
70,5
402603
38
431603
70,5
432603
38
Code
Mass (kg)
Code
Mass (kg)
401302 20,0
51,5
100 0,188
402302 46,5
Code
55,0 103,0 0,188
431302
20,0
38,0
0,182
432302
46,5
44,5
0,192
401402 23,0
51,5
100
0,242
402402 52,0
55,0 103,0 0,242
431402
23,0
38,0
0,237
432402
52,0
44,5
0,242
401500 25,0
60,5
108
0,190
402500 59,5
66,0 112,0 0,190
431503
25,0
47,0
0,360
432503
59,5
49,5
0,190
401603 30,5
77,5
125
0,590
402603 63,5
81,5 127,5 0,640
431603
30,5
47,5
0,590
432603
63,5
51,5
0,560
Mass (kg)
Mass (kg)
1/2
D
B
E
2 3 4
13
E
2 3 4
B
B
48
Code
200000 30 p.1,5 80
202000 30 p.1,5
Code
pocket for code
Mass (kg)
203502 30 p.1,5 80
Code
48 11 158 0,300
475002
203502
48
33
95
0,340
203702 30 p.1,5 80
48 9,5 134 0,300
475003
203702
B Mass (kg)
0,165
85 0,168
Code
201000 30 p.1,5 80
187
2 3 4
Code
Mass (kg)
Operating principle of
thermostatic control head
Valve closed
2
The control device of the thermostatic

valve is a proportional temperature
regulator, composed of bellows
containing a specific thermostatic
liquid. As the temperature increases,
the liquid increases in volume and
causes the bellows to expand. As the
temperature decreases the opposite
process occurs; the bellows contract
due to the thrust of the counter spring.
The axial movements of the sensor
element are transmitted to the valve
actuator by means of the connecting
stem, thereby adjusting the flow of
medium in the heat emitter.
Thermostatic control head with temperature indicator,

202 series
Room temperature indicator
The room temperature indicator,
mounted on the front of the
thermostatic control, is of the LCD
type. It highlights the actual room
temperature reading in green, to
enable precise regulation of the
temperature to the desired value.
Visibility with sufficient
lighting
Valve open
2
Pivoting system
A particular pivoting system keeps
the indicator always vertical thus
allowing its optimal visualization.
Valve
The stainless steel control stem (1) has an EPDM double seal
O-ring. In this way the upper portion of the headwork (2) can be
replaced even with the system running.
The obturator (3) is shaped so as to optimise the hydraulic
characteristics of the valve during the progressive action of
opening or closing in thermostatic operation. The wide passage
between the seat and obturator causes reduced head losses in
manual operation.
Convertible valve with

manual control
Thermostatic control head with remote sensor, 201 series

The use of the thermostatic head
with remote sensor requires
installation of the latter in
accordance with the dimensions
shown in the diagram.
10 cm
1,5 m
CALEFFI
Tamper-proof / anti-theft cap

Convertible valve with
Tailpiece with rubber seal

The radiator connection thread coupling
union is equipped with a special shaped
rubber ring (4). This system ensures a
hydraulic seal without using additional
sealing materials such as hemp or PTFE
tape.
The tamper-proof and anti-theft

version of the thermostatic control
head is obtained by fitting the cap
code 209000 on the control knob as
shown at side. It is secured with two
screws equipped with a special
head that can only be tightened
using the special allen key
code 209001.
3/4"
p (kPa)
1"
30
20
1000
10
500
50
2000
20
1/
1000
500
10
1/
5
1
200
3/8"
1/2"
3/4"
1"
Kv0,01
500
50
= 56 l/h
= 56 l/h
= 70 l/h
= 78 l/h
3/8"
1/2"
3/4"
1"
Max
differential
pressure
2000
0,1
1000
10
200
0,2
100
20
20
0,5
10
50
3/8" 1/2"
3/4"
0,5
20
0,2
10
0,1
G (l/h)
Kv0,01 = 242 l/h
Lockshield valves with angled connections 1/2", 342 and

431 series
Convertible radiator valves with straight connections, 339 series

and 402 series with thermostatic regulation, proportional band 2K
p (mm w.g.)
ll
Fu
50
3/8"
G (l/h)
= 1,6 bar
= 1,6 bar
= 1,6 bar
= 0,6 bar
en
p
yo
100
50
100
100
20
10
200
2000
3/8" 1/2"
3000
2000
p (kPa)
1000
p (mm w.g.)
p (mm w.g.)
5000
500
Convertible radiator valves with angled connections, 338 series and

401 series with thermostatic regulation, proportional band 2K
Lockshield valves with angled connections 3/8", 342 and

431 series
200
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
2000
20
200
100
100
50
50
0,5
20
0,2
20
0,2
10
0,1
10
0,1
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
G (l/h)
Kv0,01 = 399 l/h
50
50
2000
20
1000
10
500
20
1000
10
200
500
100
200
50
5
3
2000
2
5
1
0,5
5000
2000
500
20
1000
10
50
2000
20
1000
10
200
500
100
50
3000
2000
G (l/h)
1"
op
en
lly
0,5
Kv0,01 = 564 l/h
5000
0,1
2000
0,2
10
1000
20
500
0,1
1000
10
500
0,2
200
20
100
0,5
5
4
50
10
100
500
Fu
200
50
200
2000
200
p (kPa)
100
1"
3/4"
50
100
3/8" 1/2"
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
5000
5000
20
100
Lockshield valves with angled connections 1", 431 series
p (mm w.g.)
10000
= 135 l/h
= 179 l/h
= 258 l/h
= 443 l/h
G (l/h)
Kv0,01 = 452 l/h
3/4"
G (l/h)
= 222 l/h
= 270 l/h
= 336 l/h
= 447 l/h
Convertible radiator valves with straight connections, 339

series and 402 series with manual regulation
3/8"
1/2"
3/4"
1"
1000
3000
2000
1000
500
200
0,1
50
Kv0,01
0,2
10
20
3/8"
1/2"
3/4"
1"
100
0,1
50
0,2
10
20
20
20
50
0,5
10
50
20
100
p (kPa)
en
p (kPa)
100
p (mm w.g.)
5000
5000
Kv0,01
1
0,5
op
3/4"
op
lly
1/2"
y
u ll
en
Fu
3/8"
2
2
Lockshield valves with angled connections 3/4", 431
Convertible radiator valves with angled connections, 338 series

and 401 series with manual regulation
p (mm w.g.)
10000
200
1/2"
G (l/h)
= 1,6 bar
= 1,6 bar
= 1,6 bar
= 0,6 bar
5
1
10
500
50
Max
differential
pressure
3/8"
1/2"
3/4"
1"
10
2
1/
500
Kv0,01
= 52 l/h
= 56 l/h
= 65 l/h
= 77 l/h
4
1/
1000
3/8"
1/2"
3/4"
1"
2000
1000
500
200
10
100
1000
20
30
20
10
3000
2000
G (l/h)
Lockshield valves with straight connections 3/8", 343 and

432 series
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
5000
50
2000
20
1/
1000
10
2
1/
500
200
100
ull
n
pe
yo
50
0,5
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
0,1
20
0,2
10
10
20
G (l/h)
Kv0,01 = 132 l/h
3/8"
Lockshield valves with straight connections 1/2", 343 and

432 series
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
2000
2
1/
200
100
op
y
ull
en
50
0,5
Kv0,01 = 217 l/h
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
0,1
20
0,2
10
10
20
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
2000
20
1000
10
500
5
4
op
en
200
Fu
lly
100
5000
2000
1000
500
200
0,1
100
0,2
10
50
20
20
0,5
10
50
Kv0,01 = 258 l/h
G (l/h)
Lockshield valves with straight connections 1", 432 series

p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
50
2000
20
1000
10
2
5000
500
2
6
200
1
op
en
100
0,5
Fu
lly
50
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
0,1
20
0,2
10
10
20
Kv0,01 = 481 l/h
G (l/h)
TYPE
Convertible radiator valve
with manual adjustment
COPPER PIPE
Rad. Pipe int/ext STRAIGHT
conn. conn. pipe Kv0,01
le
(mm) (l/h)
(m)
Kv0,01
(l/h)
le
(m)
3/8"
23 p. 1,5
135
0,8
222
0,3
3/8"
23 p. 1,5 10/12
135
2,5
222
0,9
3/8"
23 p. 1,5 12/14
135
6,6
222
2,4
3/8"
23 p. 1,5 13/15
135
10,1
222
3,7
3/8"
23 p. 1,5 14/16
135
14,8
222
5,5
3/8"
23 p. 1,5 16/18
135
29,9
222
11,1
1/2"
23 p. 1,5
179
0,5
270
0,2
1/2"
23 p. 1,5 10/12
179
1,4
270
0,6
1/2"
23 p. 1,5 12/14
179
3,7
270
1,6
1/2"
23 p. 1,5 13/15
179
5,7
270
2,5
1/2"
23 p. 1,5 14/16
179
8,4
270
3,7
1/2"
23 p. 1,5 16/18
179
17,0
270
7,5
8/10
8/10
STEEL PIPE
Rad. Pipe int/ext STRAIGHT
conn. conn. pipe Kv0,01
le
(mm) (l/h)
(m)
ANGLED
ANGLED
Kv0,01
(l/h)
le
(m)
2,7
3/8"
3/8"
12,7/16,7
135
7,2
222
1/2"
1/2"
16,3/21,0
179
15,3
270
6,7
3/4"
3/4"
21,7/26,4
258
33,2
336
19,6
1"
1"
27,4/33,2
443
38,5
447
37,8
3/8"
23 p. 1,5
135
0,8
222
0,3
3/8"
23 p. 1,5 10/15
135
2,5
222
0,9
3/8"
23 p. 1,5 12/16
135
6,6
222
2,4
3/8"
23 p. 1,5 13/18
135
10,1
222
3,7
3/8"
23 p. 1,5 14/18
135
14,8
222
5,5
1/2"
23 p. 1,5
179
0,5
270
0,2
1/2"
23 p. 1,5 10/15
179
1,4
270
0,6
1/2"
23 p. 1,5 12/16
179
3,7
270
1,6
1/2"
23 p. 1,5 13/18
179
5,7
270
2,5
1/2"
23 p. 1,5 14/18
179
8,4
270
3,7
179
8,4
270
3,7
PLASTIC PIPE
G (l/h)
Lockshield valves with straight connections 3/4", 432 series
1"

10
500
3/4"
TYPE
20
4
1/
1000
1/2"
Values of nominal flow rate and equivalent lengths

1/2"
3/4
8/12
8/12
20 est
Installation
The thermostatic control heads must be installed in horizontal
position.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
The sensible element of thermostatic control heads must never be

installed in: niches, radiator cabinets, behind curtains or exposed
to direct sunlight, otherwise false readings may occur.
1
1
2
3
3
4
3
4
2 3
Converting valves from manual to thermostatic control

Before installing the thermostatic control head, turn the knob to position no. 5
5
0
Locking and restricting the thermostat control temperature
Temperature restriction
3. Re-lock the
ring. The valve
will now have a
temperature
range restriction
from 0 to the set
value.
3. Re-lock the
ring. The valve
will now be
locked at the set
temperature.
2. Turn the knob

to the new
maximum open
position required
(e.g. Pos. 3).
Turn the ring
anti-clockwise up
to the stop.
1. Turn the knob

to the fully open
position (Pos. 5).
Using a screw-driver,
unlock the ring,
pressing it fully
towards the valve
body.
3. Re-lock the
ring. The valve will
now no longer have
any temperature
restriction or lock.
Locking the temperature
1. Turn the knob to

the fully open
position (Pos. 5).
unlock the ring,
pressing it fully
towards the valve
body.
2. Position the
valve at the
required
temperature
and turn the ring
clockwise up to
the stop.
Resetting the temperature restriction and temperature lock
1. Using a
screw-driver, unlock
the ring, pressing it
fully towards the
valve body.
2. Turn the knob to

the fully open
position and the
ring anti-clockwise,
up to the stop. The
RESET arrows will
match up.
338 series
Convertible radiator valve fitted for thermostatic control heads and thermo-electric actuators. Angled connections for
copper and single and multilayer plastic pipes 23 p.1,5 for pipes from 10 to 18 mm, 3/4 for 20 mm plastic pipes.
Radiator connection 3/8 and 1/2 M with tailpiece equipped with EPDM pre-seal. Brass body. Chrome plated. Control
knob white RAL 9010, for manual control, in ABS. Stainless steel control stem. Double seal on control stem with EPDM
O-rings. Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
339 series
Convertible radiator valve fitted for thermostatic control heads and thermo-electric actuators. Straight connections for
copper and single and multilayer plastic pipes 23 p.1,5 for pipes from 10 to 18 mm, 3/4 for 20 mm plastic pipes.
Radiator connection 3/8 and 1/2 M with tailpiece equipped with EPDM pre-seal. Brass body. Chrome plated. Control
knob white RAL 9010, for manual control, in ABS. Stainless steel control stem. Double seal on control stem with EPDM
O-rings. Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
342 series
Lockshield valve. Angled connections for copper and single and multilayer plastic pipes 23 p.1,5 for pipes from 10 to 18 mm,
3/4 for 20 mm plastic pipes. Radiator connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece equipped with EPDM pre-seal. Brass
body. Chrome plated. Cap white RAL 9010 in ABS. Outward seal consisting of EPDM O-ring on control stem. Maximum
working temperature 100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
343 series
Lockshield valve. Straight connections for copper and single and multilayer plastic pipes 23 p.1,5 for pipes from 10 to
18 mm, 3/4 for 20 mm plastic pipes. Radiator connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece equipped with EPDM pre-seal.
Brass body. Chrome plated. Cap white RAL 9010 in ABS. Outward seal consisting of EPDM O-ring on control stem.
Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
401 series
Convertible radiator valve fitted for thermostatic control heads and thermo-electric actuators. Angled connections for steel
pipes 3/8, 1/2, 3/4 or 1 F. Radiator connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece equipped with EPDM pre-seal, 3/4 and 1 M
with tailpiece without seal. Brass body. Chrome plated. Control knob white RAL 9010, for manual control, in ABS. Stainless
steel control stem. Double seal on control stem with EPDM O-rings. Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum
working pressure 10 bar.
402 series
Convertible radiator valve fitted for thermostatic control heads and thermo-electric actuators. Straight connections for
steel pipes 3/8, 1/2, 3/4 or 1 F. Radiator connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece equipped with EPDM pre-seal, 3/4
and 1 M with tailpiece without pre-seal. Brass body. Chrome plated. Control knob white RAL 9010, for manual control,
in ABS. Stainless steel control stem. Double seal on control stem with EPDM O-rings. Maximum working temperature
100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
431 series
Lockshield valve. Angled connections for iron pipes 3/8, 1/2, 3/4 or 1 F. Radiator connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with
tailpiece equipped with EPDM pre-seal, 3/4 and 1 M with tailpiece without seal. Brass body. Chrome plated. White cap
RAL 9010 in ABS. Outward seal consisting of EPDM O-ring on control stem. Maximum working temperature 100C.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
432 series
Lockshield valve. Straight connections for iron pipes 3/8, 1/2, 3/4 or 1 F. Radiator connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with
tailpiece equipped with EPDM pre-seal, 3/4 and 1 M with tailpiece without seal. Brass body. Chrome plated. White cap
RAL 9010 in ABS. Outward seal consisting of EPDM O-ring on control stem. Maximum working temperature 100C.
200 series
Thermostatic control head for thermostatic and convertible radiator valves. Built-in sensor with liquid-filled element.
Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Graduated scale from 0 to 5 corresponding to a temperature adjustment range from
0 to 28C, with the possibility of locking and limiting the temperature. Frost protection cut-in at 7C.
201 series
Thermostatic control head for thermostatic and convertible radiator valves. Remote sensor with liquid-filled element.
Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Graduated scale from 0 to 5 corresponding to a temperature adjustment range from
0 to 28C, with the possibility of locking and limiting the temperature. Frost protection cut-in at 7C.
202 series
Thermostatic control head for thermostatic and convertible radiator valves. Built-in sensor with liquid-filled element, with
digital LCD room temperature indicator. Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Graduated scale from 0 to 5 corresponding
to a temperature adjustment range from 0 to 28C, with the possibility of locking and limiting the temperature. Frost
protection cut-in at 7C. Room temperature display range from 16C to 26C.
203 series
Thermostatic control head with contact sensor, for fluid temperature limitation. Control temperature range 2050C
(4090C). Maximum sensor temperature 100C. Numbered scale, with possibility of locking and limiting the temperature.
Capillary length 2 m.
209 series
Tamper-proof / anti-theft cap for thermostatic control head, for use in public places.
CALEFFI
Dual manifolds
and differential by-pass valve
356 - 357 series
CALEFFI
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01014/06 GB
Function
Dual manifolds are typically used for the distribution of the heatcarrying medium in heating and air conditioning systems. They are
available with both double and single side connections and can be
used to connect fittings for copper, plastic or multi-layer piping.
They are also offered for air-conditioning systems in a version
complete with hot pre-formed shell insulation, sized to limit thermal
losses and above all to prevent condensation on the surface.
The differential by-pass valve keeps the manifold flow and return
circuits pressure balanced when the flow rate varies. This
variation in flow rate can take place following the closure of room
temperature regulating valves on the heat emitters like for example,
thermostatic or thermo-electric valves.
Reference documentation
Tech. broch. 01091 Inspection box 362 series
Product range
MANIFOLDS:
356 series
Double side connections
356. . . IS series Double side connections with pre-formed insulation
357 series
Single side connections
sizes 3/4 and 1

size 1
size 3/4
DIFFERENTIAL BY-PASS VALVE:

Code 356050
size 3/4
Technical specifications of manifold
Technical specifications of insulation
Material:
brass EN 1982 CB 753S
Medium:
30%
10 bar
Temperature range:
-10110C
Main connections:
3/4 and 1 F, version without insulation
1 F, version with insulation
Outlet connections:
23 p.1,5 M - 18 mm
Main connections centre distance:
60 mm
Outlet centre distance:
40 mm
Average inside diameter:
3/4: 20 mm
1: 26 mm
Material:
expanded PE-X with closed cells
Thickness:
20 mm
Density: - internal portion:
30 kg/m3
- external portion:
50 kg/m3
Thermal conductivity (DIN 52612): - at 0C:
0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C:
0,045 W/(mK)
Coefficient of resistance to the diffusion
of water vapour (DIN 52615):
>1.300
Temperature range:
0100C
Reaction to fire (DIN 4102):
Class B2
CALEFFI
Monoblock casting
These manifolds are made with a monoblock casting, without any
connections made between the internal tubes. This eliminates a
possible cause of leakage due to coupling with metals with different
coefficients of expansion.
The connections of the side outlets are obtained tangentially to the
main tubes to make fitting the unions easier.
Mod. Dep.
B
60
Dimensions
356
40
E
A
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1
1
No. out.
2+2
4+4
6+6
8+8
10+10
4+4
6+6
8+8
10+10
12+12
Code
356502
356504
356506
356508
356510
356604
356606
356608
356610
356612
C
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
B
116
116
116
116
116
122
122
122
122
122
CALEFFI
E
100
180
260
340
420
184
264
344
424
538
D
30
30
30
30
30
32
32
32
32
32
Weight (kg)
0,84
1,55
2,20
3,00
3,70
1,75
2,54
3,44
4,38
5,30
B
60
220
Mod. Dep.
Pre-formed insulation
The manifold
356 series is also
offered for the
specific use of
air-conditioning
systems, with hot
pre-formed shell
insulation.
356
40
E
F
A
1
1
1
1
No. out.
4+4
6+6
8+8
10+10
CALEFFI
B
122
122
122
122
C
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
D
32
32
32
32
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
E
Weight (kg)
184
2,05
264
2,84
344
3,74
424
4,68
This insulation has

been specially
designed to help
coupling with the
manifold and the
operations of
installation in the
boxes.
Mod. Dep.
B
60
Code
356604 IS
356606 IS
356608 IS
356610 IS
357
40
Code
357502
357503
357504
357505
357506
A
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
No. out.
2+2
3+3
4+4
5+5
6+6
357
73
E
B
105
105
105
105
105
C
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
D
30
30
30
30
30
E
180
260
373
453
533
Weight (kg)
1,30
1,95
2,80
3,45
4,06
Coefficient of localized loss inlet loss (F+R):
Coefficient of localized loss outlet loss (F+R):
3,0
6,5

Function
In heating systems, the heat-carrying medium distribution circuits can be totally or partially shut off by
closing the thermostatic or thermoelectric valves in the radiators.
After reducing the flow rate, the differential pressure in the circuit may increase up to values able to
generate problems of noise, high medium speed, mechanical erosion and hydraulic unbalancing of the
system itself.
The differential by-pass kit for manifolds 356 series performs the function of keeping the flow and return
pressure of the manifold circuit balanced when the flow rate varies.
This valve is fitted for quick coupling with the manifolds 356 series, reducing the overall dimensions to a
minimum.
Technical specifications of by-pass valve
Materials: -
By-pass pressure differential:
50
45
40
35
3000
30
2500
25
20
2000
15
20
CALEFFI
A
C
2 3 4
Principle of operation
Thermostatic valve
CALEFFI
Mod
.
Dep.
356
The by-pass valve contains a non-return obturator integral with a

counter spring.
When the fixed calibrated pressure value is reached, the valve
obturator opens gradually. The flow is in this way recirculated and,
being proportional to the closure of the thermostatic or
electrothermal valves, keeps the differential pressure constant in the
manifold circuit.
900
800
1000
700
600
450
400
500
30
Application diagram
2 3 4
10
Q (l/h)
10
356050
Code
A
3/4
B
3/8
C
60
D
55
Weight (kg) 0,333
25
200
50
Dimensions
350
12
300
1200
1000
250
18
16
14
180
1800
1600
1400
160
3/4 M (captive nut)

3/8 (with plug)
60 mm
60
4500
4000
3500
140
Connections to manifold:
Head connections:
Centre distance:
6000
5000
120
10 bar
-10110C
20 kPa (2000 mm w.g.)
90
80
70
90

Temperature range:
Fixed pressure setting:
100
9000
8000
7000
80

30%
P (kPa)
10000
100
Medium:
20 kPa (2000 mm w.g.)
P (mm w.g.)
70

PA
stainless steel
EPDM
60
body:
check valve obturator:
spring:
seals:
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Mod
Dep.
2 3 4
Mod
.
357
Dep.
357
Plastic inspection box and port

Function
The new shockproof plastic box has been specially made for
using single and dual manifolds, combined with the various types
of zone valves.
The ventilation openings in the cover have a special shape
designed to prevent rings forming on the walls. The surface finish
of the door is suitable for painting.
The housing of the dual manifold 356 series in the boxes is easy
for both the insulated version and the non-insulated version,
especially if done by using the shockproof plastic box 362 series.
Product Range
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
362036
362056
362073
363036
363056
363073
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
inspection
inspection
inspection
inspection
inspection
inspection
box
box
box
port
port
port
useful dimensions 360 x 270 mm, depth 100/80

useful dimensions 360 x 270
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
356 series
Cast monoblock dual distribution manifold with double side connections. Brass body. Main connections 3/4 or 1 F. Outlet
connections: 23 p.1,5 M - 18 mm. Main centre distance: 60 mm. Outlet centre distance: 40 mm. Medium: water and glycol
solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol: 30%. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Temperature range: -10110C.
356 IS series
Cast monoblock dual distribution manifold with double side connections and hot pre-formed insulation. Brass body. Main
connections: 1 F. Outlet connections: 23 p.1,5 M - 18 mm. Main centre distance: 60 mm. Outlet centre distance: 40 mm.
Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol: 30%. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Temperature
range: -10110C.
357 series
Cast monoblock dual distribution manifold with single side connections. Brass body. Main connections: 3/4 F. Outlet
connections: 23 p.1,5 M - 18 mm. Main centre distance: 60 mm. Outlet centre distance: 40 mm. Medium: water and glycol
Code 356050
Differential by-pass valve for dual distribution manifolds. Brass body. Connections to manifold 3/4 M with captive nut. Head
connections: 3/8 F with plug. Seals of EPDM. Temperature range: -10110C. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum
percentage of glycol: 30%. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Centre distance: 60 mm. Differential pressure fixed setting: 20 kPa.
362 series
Plastic inspection box with ventilation openings.
White colour RAL 9010. Useful dimensions ( h x b x d ):
Code 362036
360 x 270 x 100/80 mm.
Code 362056
560 x 330 x 100/80 mm.
Code 362073
730 x 360 x 100/80 mm.
363 series
Plastic inspection port with ventilation openings.
White colour RAL 9010. Useful dimensions ( h x b ):
Code 363036
360 x 270 mm.
Code 363056
560 x 330 mm.
Code 363073
730 x 360 mm.
CALEFFI
Ball zone valves
CALEFFI
series 6460
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01015/03 GB
Function
Zone valves are used to automatically shut-off the flow of carrier
fluid distributed to a system. Specifically:
- In central heating systems, they support the ambient temperature
regulation and indirect heat metering when connected to a meter.
- In domestic hot water systems, they allow control of the
temperature in the storage cylinders.
- In commercial and industrial systems, they can shut-off the flow
in the distribution networks.
Motorised ball valves are used in the above applications mainly
because of the following characteristics:
- No seeping across the valve.
- Rapid operation (valve opening - closing).
- Ability to operate with high differential pressures.
- Low head losses.
Registered design.
European Directives conformity

CE mark as per Directives 89/336 EC and 73/23 EC.
Product range
Series
Series
Series
Series
Series
Series
Series
6460..
6470..
6480..
6489..
6490..
6490..
6480..
actuator for zone valve

2-way ball zone valve
3-way ball zone valve
4-way ball zone valve, telescopic
by-pass tee without calibrated nozzle
by-pass tee with calibrated nozzle U4 U6 U8
off-centre union fittings
supply voltage 220 or 24 V

sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4 M with union
sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4 M with union
size 3/4 M with union
sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1 M with union
sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1 M with union
sizes 3/4, 1 M
Valve body
Actuator
Materials:- body
- ball
- ball seal
PTFE with O-Ring in EPDM
- control shaft seal
double O-Ring in EPDM
Synchron motor
Electrical supply:
Medium:
Max working pressure:
Temperature range:
Max differential pressure:
Connections:
3-way bottom connection:
water, glycol solution

50%
10 bar
-5110C
10 bar
1/21 1/4 M with union
3/4 F
220 V ( 20%) - 50 60 Hz
24 V ( 10%) - 50 60 Hz
Power consumption:
4 VA
Rating of auxiliary microswitch contacts:
220 V; 0,8 A
24 V; 1,3 A
Protection class:
IP 44
Operating time:
50 s
Max ambient temperature:
55C
Permissible humidity:
class G to DIN 40040
Dynamic starting torque:
9 Nm
Dimensions
Operating principle
Ambient temperature control in central
heating systems.
A reduction in ambient temperature causes

the room thermostat contacts to close, and
the actuator controlling the opening of the
valve to receive electrical power.
The zone is then supplied with hot water and
the area is heated.
When the required ambient temperature is
reached, the thermostat causes the contacts
to open, and the valve then closes again.
The room thermostat must be of the two-position
(ON/OFF) type and of reduced thermal inertia.
B
A
Code
D
647040+6460.. 1/2
647050+6460.. 3/4
647060+6460.. 1
647070+6460.. 1 1/4
A
141
141
178
172
B
80
80
92
92
E
36
36
36
36
C
105
105
105
105
H
G
F
65,5 101,5 124
65,5 101,5 124
106 128,5
70
106 128,5
70
L
68,5
68,5
68,5
68,5
M
59
59
59
59
Heat metering is carried out by means of a

meter which totals the hours run time when the
zone valve is open.
The principle of metering for the heat
consumption with the zone valve and hours-run
meter is defined by the following technical
standards, issued by the Italian Standards
organization:
Ambient temperature control and indirect

heat metering
UNI 8465: System of sharing heating

expenses using zone valves and meters for
hours run time.
This standard also contains an interesting
appendix designed to allow checking of the
heating power installed in each dwelling and
the relevant heating quotas;
UNI 8156: The use of zone valves in
dividing heating costs;
B
A
Code
D
A
B
648040+64904.+6460.. 1/2 141 80
648050+64905.+6460.. 3/4 141 80
648060+64906.+6460.. 1 178 92
11/4 172 92
648070+6460..
C
105
105
105
105
UNI 8631: Hours-run time meters.
F
E
I
M
G
H
L
36 65,5 161,5 184 60 68,5 59
36 65,5 161,5 184 60 68,5 59
36 70 166 188,5 60 68,5 59
36 70
- 68,5 59
-
B
A
Code
D
A
B
C
E
F
G
H
I
L
M
648950+6460.. 3/4 141 80 105 36 65,5 150,5164,5 173187 4963 68,5 59
- Control of fluids in commercial and

industrial systems.
In these types of system, non seeping devices
are required, with short operating times,
ability to operate at high differential
pressures, and low head loss.
Constructional details
The electrical connection of the actuator consists of an external
plug-in socket system, which does not require the cover to be
opened for the supply cable to be connected.
This solution is particularly useful if the actuator needs to be replaced.
An efficient rubber protective cover safeguards the connection
system.
2-way valve, series 6470
Actuator
The actuator has an auxiliary microswitch which can be used to
switch on an hours-run meter when the valve opens or for shut-down
of the pump. The microswitch contacts are closed when the valve
is approximately 80% open.
63
C A L E F F I
356
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
CALEFFI
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
CALEFFI
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
356
49
The actuator mechanisms are contained in a self-extinguishing

polycarbonate box; for this reason it is suitable for all installations
with the highest guarantee of safety.
The actuator can be mounted on the valve body in the two positions
indicated, vertical or horizontal. Fixing is via a stainless steel clamp
ring.
Manual opening
Balanced by-pass tee
By removing the actuator, the valve can be opened and closed

manually by means of a screwdriver.
3-way zone valve, PATENTED
Although this is a 3-way ball valve, the technical solution adopted
and patented enables it to be used as a normal piston valve
(CALEFFI series 633), which can thus be connected to dual
manifolds.
This obviously simplifies the system and makes it possible to
connect the valve directly to the manifold, thus avoiding more
complicated pipework.
This is provided with union connections of 1/2, 3/4 or 1 and is

particularly useful for connecting 3-way zone valves with dual
manifolds.
The connection to the third outlet has a calibrated nozzle whose
purpose is to balance the loss of head in the user circuit. This
makes it possible to keep the flow in the system constant and thus
the pump head, with the valves both open and closed.
This is particularly important when the pump curve has a very steep
characteristic and the distribution network has a considerable
length of pipework.
The fixed nozzle system is preferable to the adjusting screw system
as:
- it avoids the need for complicated adjusting operations;
4-way telescopic valve

The 4-way telescopic valve, series 6489, allows connection with
manifolds whose main centre distances are between 49 and 63 mm.
The tee has a U6 calibrated nozzle.
- calibration cannot be lost;

- it does not cause noise due to possible vibrations of the moving
regulator.
Calibrated nozzles
P (kPa)
Three different nozzles are provided of suitable dimensions for

incorporation on the different types of manifold (4+4, 6+6, 8+8
connections).
The flow characteristics of the nozzles, which determine the third
way flow, are shown in the graph below.
40
900
800
700
600
9
8
7
6
400
300
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
3500
3000
G (l/h)
3-way zone valve series 6480, in BY-PASS operation

with by-pass tee series 6490 supplied with nozzles
U4 - U6 - U8, to be specified when ordering
/4
30
400
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
40
0,4
50
20000
3
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
3/
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
3500
3000
2500
1800
1600
1400
1200
900
800
700
600
450
400
350
250
180
160
140
120
50
3-way zone valve,

series 6480 operating
in BY-PASS mode
without by-pass tee
1/2" 3/4"
1"
1 1/4"
Kv (m3/h) 2,45 2,50 3,60 3,80
3500
4-way telescopic zone valve, series 6489

in BY-PASS operation with nozzle U6
1
0,5
4000
3000
2500
1800
1600
2000
1400
1200
1000
900
800
700
600
450
400
500
350
300
250
200
180
160
140
90
80
70
120
100
50
60
50
G (l/h)
1
0,5
G (l/h)
4000
300
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
2000
180
160
140
120
1000
400
500
300
500
9
8
7
6
10
200
900
800
700
600
20
400
100
18
16
14
12
1/
1600
1400
1200
100
30
2000 1800
200
40
10
9
8
7
6
500
100
50
1/
3000
20
18
16
14
12
900
800
700
600
90
/4
90
80
70
60
-3
2
4000
30
1600
1400
1200
P (kPa)
5000
3000
100
50
2000 1800
1000
8000
7000
6000
40
G (l/h)
1 1/4"
4000
300
18000
16000
14000
12000
10000
9000
8000
1"
90
80
70
60
80
1/2" 3/4"
7000
6000
5000
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
2000
1800
1600
8000
7000
6000
5000
Kv (m3/h) 14,10 14,43 33,52 36,00
P (mm w.g.)
100
1"
P (kPa)
10000 9000
0,1
10000 9000
200
1/2" 3/4"
Kv (m3/h) 2,20 2,25 3,25
P (mm w.g.)
0,2
70
3-way zone valve,

series 6480 and 4-way
valve,series 6489
operating in OPEN
position
1400
1200
1000
900
800
700
500
300
600
0,3
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
400
450
30
18
16
14
12
10
1000
3-way zone valve series 6480,

in BY-PASS operation with by-pass
tee series 6490 without nozzles
1
0,5
350
20
1" U8
3,10
60
100
300
1" U6
2,50
Kv (m3/h) 0,78
50
200
1/2" U4 1/2" U6 1/2" U8 3/4" U4 3/4" U6 3/4" U8 1" U4

1,16 1,40 0,87 1,20 1,50 1,90
500
10
9
8
7
6
1/
900
800
700
600
1/
1000
1600
1400
1200
20
18
16
14
12
-3
2000 1800
1
0,5
40
3000
4000
2500
1800
1600
2000
1400
1200
900
700
600
50
P (kPa)
450
50
400
100
500
200
350
0,1
4000
10
5
P (mm w.g.)
U8
U4
U6
U8
18
16
14
12
500
20000
18000
16000
14000
12000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
4500
4000
5000
3500
3000
2500
1800
1600
2000
0,2
20
1600
1400
1200
1000
G (l/h)
1/2" 3/4" 1" 1 1/4"

Kv (m /h) 17,00 17,27 36,58 39,50
50
300
2-way zone valve,

series 6470
1400
900
1200
800
1000
500
300
10
700
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
600
18
16
14
12
400
450
0,3
350
20
0,4
30
30
2000 1800
0,5
40
40
3000
250
50
4000
100
5000
180
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
160
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
P (kPa)
90
80
70
60
200
180
160
140
120
8000
7000
6000
140
90
300
U6
10000 9000
90
80
70
60
U4
400
120
100
1/2 - 3/4
P (mm w.g.)
60
200
4
1/
500
10
9
8
7
6
80
/4
1/
900
800
700
600
1000
20
18
16
14
12
-3
1600
1400
1200
800
30
100
3000
2000 1800
1000
4000
70
P (mm w.g.)
Example
Choice of nozzle for 3/4 3-way valve tee.
G = 400 l/h
by-pass circuit flow rate
P = 12 kPa
by-pass circuit pressure drop
Using the above diagram, U6 3/4 nozzle is specified.
3/4"
Kv (m3/h) 1,20
Installation
The zone valve must be installed in line with the direction of the
water circulation shown on the valve body.
Internal diagram with valve in closed position
The 2-way zone valve, series

6470 can be installed in
either the flow or the return
pipework.
- R relay
MC 3
MC 2
MC 1
- MC2 closing end microswitch.
- MC3 free auxiliary microswitch.

With the valve open, the free
microswitch contacts are closed.
The 3-way valve, series 6480

and 4-way valve, series 6489
must be installed in the flow
pipework.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Connection diagram for room thermostat (RT) and electricity
supply.
CALEFFI
C A L E F F I
1 2 3 4 5 6
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
The connections shown allow the

valve to open and close, as
demanded
by
the
room
thermostat (RT).
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
RT
Min 30 mm
C A L E F F I
356
C A L E F F I
When installing valves in the relevant

zone manifold boxes, sufficient space
must be left above the electrical actuator
to allow its replacement, whenever
necessary.
In order to prevent excessively high
temperatures in the zone manifold box,
sufficient air circulation must be provided
for inside the box.
C A L E F F I
Fitting the zone valve in a manifold box
The figures represent:

- installation in inspection box, series
5901 with dual manifold, series 356
and differential by-pass, code 356050;
- MC1 opening end microswitch.
01
N L
Connection diagram with hours-run meter installed.

- installation in manifold
box, series 5902 with
off-centre kit for
connection to the
by-pass tee allowing
installation of the zone
valve with simple
manifolds.
Min 30 mm
The connections shown allow the

hours-run meter (HM) to operate
whenever the zone valve is
opened as governed by the room
thermostat (RT).
The total hours-run on the meter
consitute a basis for sharing the
heating expenses.
1 2 3 4 5 6
RT
HM
01
System applications
N L
Zone control systems act in such a way as to shut-off automatically
the hydraulic loops supplying the heat transfer terminals, according
to the temperature reached in the room. This can cause variations
in pressure and flow rates throughout the system, and it is therefore
vital to ensure that these variations are kept under control within
acceptable limits.
System with 3-way zone valve
The system operates with a constant flow rate only if the zone valves
are provided with balanced tees or the circuits are balanced with
Autoflow automatic flow regulators, which keep the zone flow rate
constant with the zone valve open or in by-pass. In this case, the
closing of the zone valves does not cause variations in either
differential pressure or flow rate to the loops which remain open.
System with 2-way zone valves
The system operates with a variable flow rate and the pressure
increase generated by the closing of the zone valve must be kept
under control. This increase, which may reach levels which are
unacceptable for the correct operation of the system, is translated
as an increase in head in the circuits which are left open, with
consequent problems at the pump and boiler. It is therefore
necessary to keep the differential pressures under control by
means of differential by-pass valves or variable speed pumps.
However, the insertion of Autoflow regulators always limits the flow
rate in the open circuits to the nominal value.
Diagram allowing pump shut-down when no zone is operating.

The diagram below, using the auxiliary microswitch, enables the
pump to be shut down when no zone is operating.
If the pump has a consumption higher than 0,8 A (170 VA) an
intermediate remote relay switch must be used.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 0
1 2 3 4 5 6
RT
RT
HM
HM
N
N L
L
0
1

System with 3-way zone valves and Autoflow
Shut-off valve
RT
Thermostatic valve
Electric pump
RT
Room thermostat
Non-return check valve

Insulated manifold

Differential by-pass
Adjustable differential
by-pass valve
RT
Autoflow
System with 2-way zone valves and adjustable differential by-pass valve
RT
RT

System with 2-way zone valves, variable speed pump and Autoflow
RT

RT
System with 2-way zone valves, temperature regulating unit and Sepcoll
M S
20
18
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
100
2,25
2,0
1,75
80
1,5
1,25
60
1,0
0,75
40
0,5
0,25
20
20
15
1,0
0,75
0,5
0,25
10
1,25
-5
-10
-15
-20
1,5
1,75
2,0
2,25
20
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
16
22
24
Accessories
F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
Off-centre kit, code 648018 for

connection of valves, series 6480 to
the relevant by-pass tee, series 6490,
for installation in manifold box, series
5902 and connection to manifolds,
series 349, 350 and 592.
Off-centre fittings
Off-centre fittings 3/4,
(ref. 648005 and 1,
ref. 648006) for connecting
the 3-way zone valve and
the by-pass tee assembly
to any type of dual
manifold with centre to
centre distance between
50 and 70 mm.
50 to 70 mm
Off-centre kit
Series 6460
Electrical actuator for ball zone valve. Power supply 220 V (or 24 V). With auxiliary microswitch. Dynamic
starting torque 9 Nm. Auxiliary contact current 0,8 A (220 V), 1,3 A (24 V). Power consumption 4 VA.
Operating time 50 seconds. Protection class IP 44. Maximum ambient temperature 55C. Electrical connection
by means of external plug and socket system. Self-extinguishing polycarbonate protective box.
Series 6470
2-way ball zone valve. Threaded connections 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 1 1/4) with unions. Brass body. PTFE ball seal
with extra EPDM O-Ring. Control shaft seal with EPDM double O-Ring. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Temperature range from -5C to +95C (110C maximum peak). Maximum differential pressure 10 bar.
Maximum glycol 50%.
Series 6480
3-way ball zone valve. Threaded connections 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 1 1/4) with unions. Third way connection 3/4
F. Brass body. PTFE ball seal with extra EPDM O-Ring. Control shaft seal with EPDM double O-Ring. Maximum
working pressure 10 bar. Temperature range from -5C to +95C (110C maximum peak). Maximum differential
pressure 10 bar. Maximum glycol 50%.
Series 6489
4 -way telescopic zone valve. Threaded connections 3/4 M with unions. Brass body. PTFE ball seal with extra
EPDM O-Ring. Control shaft seal with EPDM double O-Ring. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Temperature
range from -5C to +95C (110C maximum peak). Maximum differential pressure 10 bar. Maximum glycol 50%.
Centre to centre distance between connections adjustable fro 49 to 63 mm. By-pass tee supplied with U6
calibrated nozzle.
Series 6490
By-pass tee for 3-way ball zone valve. Threaded connections 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 1) with unions. Third way
connection 3/4 M. Brass body. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Supplied with calibrated nozzle (U4, U6, U8),
for the third way (version without nozzle also available) for balancing the system.
Series 6480
Off-centre fittings for connection of the ball zone valves to manifolds with centre to centre distances between
50 and 70 mm. 1/2 M connections (1/2 and 3/4). In brass.
Code 648018
Eccentric kit for connection of 3-way zone valves to relevant by-pass tees. Connection 3/4 M x 3/4 F. For installation
in Caleffi manifold box, series 5902 and connection to simple manifolds.
CALEFFI
Hydraulic safety groups

for hot water storage heaters
CALEFFI
5261 series
01019/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
replaces dp 01019/03 GB
Function
These hydraulic safety groups are used in domestic water systems to
protect hot water storage heaters.
They combine different components with the following functions:
- safety, to prevent the pressure of the medium in the storage heaters from
reaching dangerous levels
- anti-pollution, to prevent backflow of hot water into the cold water supply
network
- a shut-off function to isolate the supply network for maintenance and
inspection of the heater system.
The hydraulic safety groups, the installation of which is required by
applicable regulations, are certified as conforming to European
Standard EN 1487.
Product range
5261 Series
Hydraulic safety group for hot water storage heaters
Code 526153
Hydraulic safety group for hot water storage heaters for horizontal installation
Code 319601
Discharge tundish for hydraulic safety groups
size 1/2, 3/4

size 3/4
size 1 F x 32/25 mm
Performance
Medium:
Max. working temperature:
Safety relief valve opening pressure:
Materials
Body:
Ball valve:
Check valve:
Safety relief valve obturator:
EPDM
Safety relief valve seat:
stainless steel
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
Springs:
steel UNI 3823
water
120C
10 bar
7 bar
Max. power output of the water heater:

10 kW
Discharge flow rate at 8,4 bar (+20% Po):- with water: > 600 l/h
- with steam: > 220 kg/h
inlet 3/4 M
outlet 3/4 F
discharge 1 M
Dimensions
D
A
C
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
A
C
B
B
E
Code
A
B C D
F Mass (kg)
526142 1/2" 1 29 38 98,5 122 0,46
526152 3/4" 1 29 38 98,5 122 0,45
Code
A B C
D
E
F Mass (kg)
526153 3/4" 1 29 38 114 116,5 0,49
Code A
B
C C D E Mass (kg)
319601 1 83100 25 32 55 117 0,08
Shut-off cock
Class A check valve
Inspection port to check functionality of the check valve
Safety relief valve
Discharge tundish and air gap
Knob for manual discharge
Plug for access to the check valve
Stainless steel seat
Connection
to heater
Characteristic components
Cold
water
inlet
Reference standards
Certification in accordance with European Standard EN 1487
European Standard EN 1487: 2000 Building valves-Hydraulic safety

groups-Tests and requirements describes the construction and
performance characteristics required of hydraulic safety groups for
hot water storage heaters.
Caleffi 5261 series hydraulic safety groups have been certified by
the CSTB and Belgaqua certification bodies as conforming to
European Standard EN 1487.
Connection to
discharge pipe:
- 25 mm
(rubber seals)
Discharge tundish
The discharge tundish, located at the outlet of the safety valve, must
conform to the dimension requirements of standard EN 1487 and
discharge must occur without any spillage of water. To meet this
requirement the 319 series tundishes are fitted with special side
walls which catch any water spillage during discharge from the
safety relief valve and direct it to the drainage pipes.
- 32 mm
(glued)
83-100 mm
LL UTI
TIP O
0k
5 2 61
6 - 3/ 4 1
. -0
7 bar
VI
EN 1487
DANGE
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
5261 series
Hydraulic safety group for hot water storage heaters. Certified to standard EN 1487. With shut-off and class A controllable
check valve. Safety relief valve seat in stainless steel. Connection to heater 1/2 (3/4) F. Discharge connection 1 M.
Brass body. Chrome plated. EPDM seals. Maximum working temperature 120C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Safety relief valve opening pressure 7 bar.
Code 526153
Hydraulic safety group for hot water storage heaters for horizontal installation. Certified to standard EN 1487. With
shut-off and class A controllable check valve. Safety relief valve seat in stainless steel. Connection to heater 3/4 F.
Discharge connection 1 M. Brass body. Chrome plated. EPDM seals. Maximum working temperature 120C.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Safety relief valve opening pressure 7 bar.
Code 319601
Discharge tundish for hydraulic safety groups to standard EN 1487. Connection 1. In plastic material.
CALEFFI
Water hammer arrester
CALEFFI
RE
IS
IS
ANT
HOC
525 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654
01020/08 GB

Cert. n 0003
Function
Water hammer phenomenon occurs in closed pipes when the fluid
is accelerated or decelerated very quickly, due to the rapid closure
of valves or taps or as a consequence of a circulation pump
stopping.
The effect consists in the propagation of over- and underpressures
along the pipes, which may result in noise and damage to the
whole system.
The water hammer arrester, when installed close to single-lever
mixing taps, solenoid valves, ball valves, etc., prevents such
negative effects.
The use of water hammer arrester is recommended in particular by
UNI 9182 regulation Cold and hot water supply and distribution
systems. Design, testing and management criteria.
Product range
Code 525040
Code 525130
Code 525150

Water hammer arrester for under sink and washhand basin application
Water hammer arrester for washing machines
Materials
Body:
Damping element:
Spring:
Seals:

high resistance polymer
steel
EPDM
size 1/2 M
size 3/8 F with nut x 3/8 M
size 3/4 F with nut x 3/4 M
Performance
Medium:
Max. medium temperature:
Max. water hammer pressure:
Operating start pressure:
Connections:
water
10 bar
90C
50 bar
3 bar
- 525040
- 525130
- 525150
1/2 M with PTFE seal

3/8 F with nut x 3/8 M
3/4 F with nut x 3/4 M
Dimensions
D
A
B
Code
525040
B
A
1/2 52
C
46
D
74
E
89
Weight (kg)
0,492
Code
525130
525150
A
3/8
3/4
B
75,5
84,5
C
46
46
D
71
74
Weight (kg)
0,492
0,538
The water hammer phenomenon

In domestic water systems, water hammer phenomenon occurs
when a pipe is closed rapidly by a device such as a single-lever
mixing tap, solenoid valve, ball valve, etc.. The abruptness of the
operation creates a perturbation in the water pressure which
propagates along the pipe in the form of an overpressure wave.
The perturbation starts from the check device, travels upstream,
reflects against other devices or elbows in the pipe and returns
downstream, damping progressively. The overpressure thus adds
to the existing pressure in the pipe (as visible in the next page
diagram), causing the following problems:
-
breakage of pipes, tanks and hoses

wear of seals, connecting welds and sanitary appliances
damage to shut-off, check and regulating equipments
high noise and powerful vibrations in both the pipes and the
structures.
The amount of the overpressure is influenced by numerous factors,

which make the phenomenon difficult to reproduce under
laboratory conditions:
-
equipment closing times

length, diameter and material of the pipe
velocity of the water.
For the practical purpose of calculating the water hammer

overpressure, the following formula combines the most common
variables in a domestic water system:
2 v1 L
p =
gt
(1)
formula valid for t > t*,

see next definition
p = overpressure due to water hammer (m w.g.)

v1 = water velocity at time of closure start (m/s)
L = length of pipe (m)
g = acceleration of gravity (9,81 m/s2)
t = valve closing time (s)
We can briefly indicate the physical significance of the closing
time (better defined as phase time) with the following formula:
2 L
t* =
v2
Numerical example: pipe length 10 m, diameter equivalent to 1/2,

steel, copper and PE-X pipes with water velocity v1 = 2 m/s. We
give the values of the velocity of the perturbation propagation v2,
sudden operating times t* (phase time) and the overpressure p
obtained with the formulas.
p (m w.g.)
p (bar)
Steel
10
1411
14,2
288
28,8
Copper
10
1400
14,3
285
28,5
PE-X
10
885
22,6
180
18
L (m) v1(m/s) v2 (m/s) t* (ms)
Due to the greater stiffness of metal pipes, the velocity of the

perturbation v2 is greater than in plastic pipes and close to the
velocity of sound in water (1420 m/s at 7C). From these results, it
is evident that plastic pipes for domestic water systems are more
easily subject to water hammer, since they have a longer phase
time t* than metal pipes. In practice, this means that closing
operating times must be slower than in metal pipes. Although the
overpressure values p for plastic pipes are lower than those for
metal pipes (since they are less stiff, they partially dampen the
water hammer), such overpressures can nonetheless stress the
pipes beyond their resistance limit. Furthermore, in wall
installations, the presence of a corrugated sheath or insulation
influences the stiffness of plastic pipes, making the calculation of
the water hammer even more complicated.
From the example given, it is clear that the use of a water hammer
arrester, already useful for metal pipes, is even more advisable for
domestic water systems with plastic pipes, especially if installed
externally.
The graph at the bottom of the page shows the influence of the
various parameters on the overpressure in copper pipes at the time
of the pipe closure. The three curves were obtained setting a
closing time t equal to the phase time t* of a 100 m pipe of size
20x1.
Copper pipe
v2 (m/s)
t* (ms) 100 m pipe
20x1
1393
143,5
(2)
t* = valve phase time (s)

L = length of pipe (m)
v2 = velocity of the perturbation propagation (m/s) (as a function of
the medium, pipe material, inner diameter and thickness of
the pipe).
For mechanical devices such as single-lever mixing taps, solenoid
valves, ball valves, etc., all closing times t t* are defined sudden
operations and induce a water hammer in the pipe with an
overpressure at the maximum intensity, which is the same for any
operating time. On the other hand, a closing time t > t* is defined
slow operation and causes a less intense water hammer effect,
which may even be negligible.
By setting t = t* within the formula (1), we obtain the maximum
overpressure p value for the water hammer effect.
We can draw the following conclusions:

1) The longer the pipe, the greater the phase time t* and hence
operations must be slower to prevent water hammer (formula
(2)).
2) For a given operating time t and medium velocity v1, the longer
the pipe, the greater the p caused by the operation
(formula (1)).
3) For a given medium velocity v1 and length of pipe, larger
diameters yield a slightly lower p (formula (1), but the
difference is close to be negligible).
4) For a given pipe length and operating time t, if the medium
velocity v1 increases, the p generated by the operation also
increases (formula (1) and graph at foot of page).
Overpressure in copper pipe 20x1
This will be evident from the following graph.

p
80
pmax.
70
Overpressure p (bar)
60
Diagram obtained by setting the

operation time t = t* = phase time
of the 100 m pipe
Overpressure
50
40
30
Sudden
operation
20x1 v1 = 1 m/s
20x1 v1 = 2 m/s
20x1 v1 = 5 m/s
20
Slow
operation
10
t*
(phase time)
Closing time
0
1
10
Pipe length (m)
100
The Caleffi 525 series water hammer arrester is composed of a

cylinder (1) divided into two chambers (2) and (3) by a piston with
two o-ring seals (4). The closed chamber (2) contains air and acts
as a damper due to the compressibility of the air. The open
chamber (3) is connected directly to the pipe and fills with the
system water. The water thrust on the piston is counteracted both
by the air pressure variation in the chamber (2) and by the contrast
spring (5) housed behind the piston in the air chamber.
The oscilloscope graph reveals the following:
- speed of the pressure increase
- oscillatory character of the phenomenon
- continuance of high pressure in the pipe even after the water
hammer
- effectiveness of the water hammer arrester.
Overpressure
Water hammer arrester - effectiveness
After the repeated oscillations, the

pressure in the pipe remains high
Reducer
set
pressure
Operating principle
Registration of water hammer phenomenon

Effect with water hammer arrester
Time
Sudden flow rate stop
Certified performance
The Caleffi 525 series water
hammer arrester has been
tested by KIWA (NL) to verify
the
conformity
to
the
performance requirements for
water
hammer
devices
(reference standard BRL
K632/02). The laboratory tests
showed that the Caleffi
525 series provides a water
hammer
overpressure
damping ratio of more than
60%.
BRL K632/02
2000-06-02
Beoordelingsrichtlijn
voor het Kiwa productcertificaat voor
Waterslagdempers
1999 Copyright, KIwa N.V.

Niets uit deze uitgave mag
verveelvoudigd en/of openbaar
gemaakt worden door middel van
druk, fotocopie, microfilm of op
welke andere wijze dan ook, zonder
voorafgaande schriftelijke
toestemming van de uitgever.
Het gebruik van deze
Beoordelingsrichtlijn door derden,
voor welk doel dan ook, is
uitsluitend toegestaan nadat een
schriftelijke overeen komst met Kiwa
is gesloten waarin het gebruiksrecht
is geregeld.
Bindend verklaring
Deze beoordelingsrichtlijn is door de
directeur Certificatie en Keuringen
van Kiwa bindend verklaard. per
2 juni 2000.
Erkenning
Kiwa N.V
Certificatie en Keuringen
Sir Winston Churchill-laan 273
Postbus 70
2280 AB Rijswijk
Tel. 070 - 41 444 00
Tel. 070 - 41 444 20
Internet www.kiwa.nl
Reduced dimensions
Water hammer arresters are easy to install in the system, preferably
in the vicinity of the shut-off devices which originate the
overpressure to damp.
Installation
Maintenance free
Compared to pneumatic arresters, Caleffi 525 series arresters,
since mechanical, are maintenance free.
Foodsafe elastomers and other materials
The elastomers used in the seals and the other materials comply
with the compatibility requirements for use with potable water as
required by WRAS certifications.
Reference standards
Article 15 of UNI 9182 (IT) Cold and hot water supply and
distribution systems. Design, testing and management criteria,
specifies that: All cold and hot water distribution systems must be
equipped with water hammer arrester of the mechanical (spring) or
hydropneumatic (permanent or serviceable air cushion) type...
The installation of the water hammer arrester must also comply with
the Guidelines for the prevention and control of Legionnaires
Disease, as set out by the Ministry of Health and adopted by the
Regional State Conference on 4.4.2000. The arresters must be
installed in such a way as not to create zones of stagnant water,
which may be difficult to reach for the purposes of disinfection.
The Caleffi 525 series water hammer arrester must be installed as

close as possible to the device which gives rise to the water
hammer by suddenly shutting off the water flow, so as to damp the
resulting overpressure as soon as possible. It may be installed
horizontally, vertically or upside down.
For better results, the installation of the Caleffi 525 series should
include the following:
- installation at the public network inlet of a pressure reducing
valve to keep the system pressure at 3-4 bar, which is the optimal
value for the operation of the water hammer arrester as well as
the sanitary appliances;
- reduction of the water velocity in the pipes. The water velocity
directly affects the overpressure in case of rapid closure of the
pipe.
The recommended solution is that shown below, where the water

hammer arrester is installed either next to the end user service or at
the main connection of a distribution manifold for a small group of
domestic appliances.
When installing the water hammer arrester under sinks and

washhand basins, code 525130, create a space of 5-6 cm between
the copper pipes and the threaded section of the shut-off valves.
The radial connections enable water hammer arrester to be rotated
to fit the available space.
Installation recommendations
The Caleffi 525 series water hammer arresters are designed for
single service installation (under washhand basins) or small groups
of services, such as in a bathroom supplied by a domestic
manifold. For larger scale water hammer problems, the solutions
are different and must be designed to fit the particular case. One
possible solution to water hammer may be to install an expansion
vessel to act as an arrester.
Water hammer
arrester
Dead
zones
The traditional approach of installing water hammer

arresters at the top of rising column, requires a review in
the light of legislation about Legionnaires Disease.
Although this solution was effective in attenuating water
hammer, it is counterproductive in terms of system disinfection
(both thermal and chemical) since it creates two types of hard to
reach dead zones:
- sections of pipe connecting the hot water rising pipes with the
water hammer arresters above the recirculation connections;
INADVISABLE
INSTALLATION
- zones of stagnant water inside the water hammer arresters

themselves.
525 series
Water hammer arrester. Threaded connections: 525040 1/2 M with PTFE seal on thread, 525130 3/8 F with
nut x 3/8 M, 525150 3/4 F with nut x 3/4 M. Chrome plated brass body, high resistance polymer damping element, stainless
steel spring, EPDM seals. Medium water. Maximum water hammer pressure 50 bar. Operating start pressure
3 bar. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum medium temperature 90C.
CALEFFI
Depl. 01021-10_GB.qxp:Depl. 01015/02
1-07-2010
12:42
Pagina 1
Ball valves
with built-in check valve
CALEFFI
3230 - 332 - 333 - 334 - 327 series
01021/10 GB
P
O
T
S
L
L
BA
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
The ball valves with built-in check valve BALLSTOP combine two
devices in a single body: a ball shut-off valve and a check valve
housed inside the ball itself. This dual function allows for quicker
installation and a more compact device, which means less space
required on the pipe.
BALLSTOP valves are available in two versions for two different
uses: the version with black plastic external ring for use in domestic
water systems and the version with red external ring for heating
systems.
Product range
3230 series
3230 series
Code 332400
333 series
334 series
327 series
327 series
Ball
Ball
Ball
Ball
Ball
Ball
Ball
valve
valve
valve
valve
valve
valve
valve
with
with
with
with
with
with
with
built-in
built-in
built-in
built-in
built-in
built-in
built-in
check
check
check
check
check
check
check
valve,
valve,
valve,
valve,
valve,
valve,
valve,
series
Materials
Body:
Ball:
Check valve:
sizes 1/21
sizes 1 1/42
size 1/2
size 3/4
sizes 1 and 1 1/4
sizes 1 1/2 and 2
Check valve spring:

Check valve seal:
Control handle (lever, butterfly):
Control stem seals:
Performance
Medium:
Min. pressure for check valve opening (p):
Working temperature range:
Connections
butterfly handle
lever handle
butterfly handle
butterfly handle
butterfly handle
butterfly handle
lever handle
3230 - 332 - 333 - 334

PA
POM
PSU
stainless steel
NBR
aluminium
PTFE
water, hydrocarbons
16 bar
0,02 bar
590C
3230 series: 1/22 F
Code 332400: 1/2 M x 1/2 F
Code 333400: 1/2 F x nut 3/4 F
Code 333500: 3/4 F x nut 3/4 F
Code 334400: 1/2 M x nut 3/4 F
Code 334500: 3/4 M x nut 3/4 F
333 and 334 series: drilled anti-tamper safety nut
sizes 1/21
sizes 1 1/42
size 1/2
sizes 1/2 and 3/4 x 3/4
sizes 1/2 and 3/4 x 3/4
sizes 1/2 and 3/4
sizes 12
327
PA
POM
PSU
stainless steel
EPDM
aluminium
PTFE
30%
16 bar
0,02 bar
5110C
1/22 F
Depl. 01021-10_GB.qxp:Depl. 01015/02
1-07-2010
12:42
Pagina 2
Dimensions
B
B
Code
327400
327500
C
50,5
52,5
61,5
B
51
57
70
A
1/2"
3/4"
1"
Mass (kg)
0,28
0,37
0,55
Code
Code
327600
323070 327700
323080 327800
323090 327900
A
1"
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
B
70
83
89
110
C
61,5
65,5
80
89
D
111
111
149
149
D
50,5
52,5
E
70
73
Mass (kg)
0,55
1,01
1,60
2,80
Code
323040
323050
323060
E
Code
A
332400 1/2
B
1/2
D
50,5
F
61
Mass (kg)
0,40
334400 1/2
334500 3/4
3/4nut
3/4nut
63,5
69,5
50,5
52,5
70
73
0,40
0,42
Operating principle
The valve consists of a ball (1) containing a check obturator (2) with
a fluid-dynamic shape. During normal circulation of the medium in
the system, the obturator is pushed against the retaining spring (3)
housed inside it, thereby opening the aperture and allowing the
medium to flow through it. When the pressure downstream of the
valve is higher than the upstream pressure, the obturator is pushed
in the opposite direction against the seal seat on the ball (4), in
order to prevent backflow of the medium.
Even with no flow, the valve is closed by the action of the retaining
spring alone.
The obturator, owing to the thrust exerted by the retaining spring (3)
and by the downstream pressure, completely shuts off the flow
passage by means of the specially shaped seal (5) (positioned on
the ball seal seat or on the obturator depending on the version).
The ball valve, equipped with butterfly handle (6) or lever handle
depending on the size of the valve, acts as a standard shut-off
device.
Code
333400
333500
A
1/2"
3/4"
B
3/4"
3/4"
nut
nut
C
63,5
69,5
3230 series
6
1
4
2
5
327 series
6
4
1
2
Mass (kg)
0,42
0,42
Depl. 01021-10_GB.qxp:Depl. 01015/02
1-07-2010
12:42
Pagina 3
Silent operation and low head losses
Thanks to the ogival, fluid-dynamic shape of the obturator, the
BALLSTOP valve ensures silent operation. Furthermore the flow
rate curve is fairly flat, indicating limited head loss increases even
in the case of substantial increases in flow rate.
Quick operation
The seal (positioned on the end point of the ball or on the obturator
itself depending on the version) and the retaining spring (housed
inside the obturator) ensure instant shut-off and a perfect seal, even
with slight back pressure.
Insensitive to dirt
The sliding parts, due to the special coupling, are insensitive to dirt
particles present in the water and deposits which may form after
long periods of non-use.
Easy system commissioning

and maintenance
During system commissioning or
maintenance or if it is necessary
to reverse the flow direction
through the valve, setting the
lever to 45 disables the check
valve, enabling the medium to
flow through the aperture
between the outer surface of the
ball and the valve body. This
procedure also releases any air
which may have formed while
the system was not in use.
Foodsafe elastomers and other materials

The elastomers used in the seals and the other materials of 3230,
332, 333 and 334 series BALLSTOP ball valves meet the
compatibility requirements for use with potable water as required
by WRAS and ACS certifications.
9
8
7
6
11/2
11/4
10
p (m w.g.)
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
3/4
p (bar)
1/2
1/2
p (m w.g.)
10
11/4
11/2
327 series
3/4
3230 - 332 - 333 - 334 series
p (bar)
9
8
7
6
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,50,45
0,50,45
0,20,18
0,10,09
0.5 0.45
0,05
0,045
0,5 0.45
0,05
0,045
0.2 0.18
0,02
0,018
0,2 0.18
0,02
0,018
0.1
0,01
0,1
0,01
0,08
0,07
0,06
0,04
0,035
0,03
0,025
0.16
0.14
0.12
G (m3/h)
Kv
(m3/h)
1/2
4,2
3/4
7
1 1/4
13,5
Installation
Caleffi 3230, 332, 333 and 334 series
BALLSTOP ball valves with built-in check
valve are recommended for domestic
water systems where there is a need to
disable the check valve. Typical uses
include connection to the water network
or installation on hot water storage supply
lines etc.
Caleffi 327 series BALLSTOP ball valves
with built-in check valve are recommended
for heating systems, thanks to the seal
materials which are compatible with high
temperature operating conditions. The
application of a check valve after the
pump (see figure opposite) is aimed at
preventing the convective motion of
natural circulation when the circulator is
switched off and which causes an
unwanted increase in room temperature,
resulting in higher costs and discomfort
for the user.
24
1 1/2
29
50
35
40
45
G (m3/h)
2
43
30
25
18
16
12
14
20
10
3.5
4
4.5
2.5
1.8
1.6
1.4
0.9
1.2
0.8
0,016
0,014
0,012
50
35
40
45
30
25
18
16
14
20
12
10
3.5
4
4.5
2.5
1.8
1.6
1.4
0.9
0.8
1.2
0.7
0.6
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
0.3
0.25
0,016
0,014
0,012
0.2
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.4
0.35
0.3
0.25
0.7
0,04
0,035
0,03
0,025
0,08
0,07
0,06
0.4
0.35
0.3
0.25
0,16
0,14
0,12
0,10,09
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.6
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0,20,18
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
0.5
0,16
0,14
0,12
0.35
0.4
0.45
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
0.3
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
0.25
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
0.2
Kv
(m3/h)
1/2
3/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
4,2
10
18
29
43
By contrast the ball valve, where the check device is housed, serves
as a shut-off device: if the pump is removed or the boiler emptied, it
prevents all the water draining out from the system.
The ball shut-off valve with built-in check valve must be installed in
the system following the flow direction indicated on the plastic band
applied to the valve body. The valve can be fitted in any position,
vertical, horizontal or upside down.
Depl. 01021-10_GB.qxp:Depl. 01015/02
1-07-2010
12:42
Pagina 4
Central hot water production system with thermal disinfection

Ball shut-off valve
Pressure gauge
Shut-off valve
Pump
Check valve
Pressure reducing valve
Thermostatic mixing valve
Temperature gauge
Three-way mixing valve
Safety relief valve
Clock
Temperature probe
Outside compensated
temperature controller
Deaerator-dirt separator
Solar system with thermal integration
T
T
Normally
closed valve
Depl. 01021-10_GB.qxp:Depl. 01015/02
1-07-2010
12:42
Pagina 5
Heating system with two heat generators and various secondary circuits
SEPARATORE IDRAULICO
Serie 548
Tmax 120C
Pmax 10 bar
Tmax 105C
Pmax 10 bar
Heating system with one heat generator and two different secondary circuits
P
T
F
A
Depl. 01021-10_GB.qxp:Depl. 01015/02
1-07-2010
12:42
Pagina 6
3230 BALLSTOP series
Ball valve with built-in check valve. Butterfly handle. Threaded connections 1/2 F (from 1/2 to 1). Brass body, chrome
plated. Brass ball, chrome plated. Check valve in PA (1/2), POM (3/4), PSU (1). Aluminium control lever. PTFE control
stem seals. NBR check valve seal. Stainless steel check valve spring. Medium water and hydrocarbons. Working
temperature range 590C. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,02 bar.
3230 BALLSTOP series

Ball valve with built-in check valve. Lever handle. Threaded connections 1 1/4 F (from 1 1/4 to 2). Brass body, chrome
plated. Brass ball, chrome plated. Check valve in PSU (1 1/4), chrome plated brass (1 1/2 and 2). Aluminium control lever.
PTFE control stem seals. NBR check valve seal. Stainless steel check valve spring. Medium water and hydrocarbons. Working
temperature range 590C. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,02 bar.
Code 332400 BALLSTOP

Ball valve with built-in check valve. Butterfly handle. Threaded connections 1/2 M x 1/2 F. Brass body, chrome plated.
Brass ball, chrome plated. PA check valve. Aluminium control lever. PTFE control stem seals. NBR check valve seal.
Stainless steel check valve spring. Medium water and hydrocarbons. Working temperature range 590C. Maximum
working pressure 16 bar. Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,02 bar.
333 BALLSTOP series

Ball valve with built-in check valve. Butterfly handle. Connections 1/2 (1/2 and 3/4) F x nut 3/4 F. Brass body, chrome
plated. Brass ball, chrome plated. Check valve in PA (1/2), POM (3/4). Aluminium control lever. PTFE control stem seals.
NBR check valve seal. Stainless steel check valve spring. Medium water and hydrocarbons. Working temperature range
590C. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,02 bar.
334 BALLSTOP series

Ball valve with built-in check valve. Butterfly handle. Connections 1/2 (1/2 and 3/4) M x nut 3/4 F. Brass body, chrome
plated. Brass ball, chrome plated. Check valve in PA (1/2), POM (3/4). Aluminium control lever. PTFE control stem seals.
NBR check valve seal. Stainless steel check valve spring. Medium water and hydrocarbons. Working temperature range
590C. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,02 bar.
327 BALLSTOP series

Ball valve with built-in check valve for heating systems. Butterfly handle. Connections 1/2 (1/2 and 3/4) F. Brass body,
chrome plated. Brass ball, chrome plated. Check valve in PA (1/2), POM (3/4). Aluminium control lever. PTFE control
stem seals. EPDM check valve seal. Stainless steel check valve spring. Medium water and glycol solutions. Maximum
percentage of glycol 30%. Working temperature range 5110C. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Minimum opening
pressure for check valve 0,02 bar.
327 BALLSTOP series

Ball valve with built-in check valve for heating systems. Lever handle. Connections 1 (from 1 to 2) F. Brass body,
chrome plated. Brass ball, chrome plated. Check valve in PSU (1 and 1 1/4), chrome plated brass (1 1/2 and 2).
Aluminium control lever. PTFE control stem seals. EPDM check valve seal. Stainless steel check valve spring. Medium
water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Working temperature range 5110C. Maximum working
pressure 16 bar. Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,02 bar.
CALEFFI
Controllable reduced pressure zone

backflow preventer (BA type)
series 574 - 575 - 570
CALEFFI
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01022/03 GB
Replaces 01022/99 GB
Function
The backflow preventer is a plumbing protection device designed
to prevent polluted water from flowing back into the mains supply.
This type of backflow may occur when the pressure in the mains
supply changes and causes a reversal of the flow. The backflow
preventer is installed between the mains supply and the internal
consumer circuit in water supply systems and creates a safety zone
which prevents the water in the two circuits from coming into contact.
Product range
Series
Series
Series
Series
574
575
570
570
Controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer (BA type). Threaded connections
Controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer (BA type). Flanged connections
Assembly fitted with backflow preventer (BA type), shut-off valves, strainer. Threaded connections
Assembly fitted with backflow preventer (BA type), shut-off valves, strainer. Flanged connections
Sizes 1/22
Sizes DN 50DN 100
Sizes 1/22
Sizes DN 50DN 100
series
Materials
Body and cover:
Check valve spindle:

Discharge seat:
Springs:
Diaphragm:
Seals:
Shut-off valve body:
Strainer body:
Strainer cartridge:
Performance
Medium:
Filter mesh:
Connections
Pressure test port connections
574-570 threaded
575-570 flanged
dezincification resistant alloy

EN 12165 CW602N (1/21 1/4)
bronze RG5 Pb3 DIN 50930-6 (1 1/2-2)
stainless steel
EN 12164 CW602N (1/2-3/4)
stainless steel (12)
stainless steel
EPDM
NBR
bronze EN1982 CB491K
stainless steel
bronze RG5 Pb3 DIN 50930-6
stainless steel
stainless steel
stainless steel
EPDM
NBR
Ductile iron GGG 40 coated with epoxy resin
Cast iron GG 25 coated with epoxy resin
stainless steel
water
10 bar
65C
0,8 mm
water
10 bar
65C
0,7 mm (DN 50-DN 65)
0,9 mm (DN 80-DN 100)
1/22 M with union
DN 50DN 100 flanged PN 16
1/4 F
DN 50: 1/4 F
DN 65DN 100: 1/2 F
CALEFFI
D
C
C
D
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Dimensions
F
B
E
Code
365
130
44,5
103 40
3,0
570005 3/4"
390
130
44,5
103 40
3,6
570006
430
162
72,5 99,5 40
5,4
Weight (kg)
570007 1 1/4" 540
162
72,5 99,5 40
6,2
Weight (kg)
103
30
263 40 227
2,9
574800 1 1/2" 130
31
382 50 387
11,3
570008 1 1/2" 670
221 103,4 129,6 50 14,4
574050 3/4"
103
30
263 40 227
2,9
574900
31
382 50 395
11,4
570009
221 103,4 129,6 50 16,5
130
574040 1/2"
2"
Weight (kg)
Code
1"
2"
735
CALEFFI
Code
570004 1/2"
E
F
C
D
LT
C
D
DN 100
PN 10
DN 100
PN 10
E
E
F
Weight (kg)
Code
DN
Lt
Weight (kg)
575005 DN 50 129
27
382 50 302
13,2
570050
50
1050
50
70
Weight (kg)
575006 DN 65 132,5
27
385 50 305
17,0
570060
65
1150
50
80
Code
D
Code
574600
1"
100
30
292 40 280
3,6
575008 DN 80 170
26
484 80 470
26,5
570080
80
1350
80
104
574700 1 1/4" 100
30
292 40 280
3,8
575010 DN 100 170
26
484 80 470
28,0
570100
100
1430
80
135
Backflow
Potable water fed from the mains supply may suffer from hazardous pollution caused mainly by
contaminated fluids from plumbing systems flowing back directly into the mains supply.
This phenomenon, termed backflow occurs when:
a) the pressure in the mains system is less that in the plumbing circuit receiving the supply
(back syphonage). This situation may occur when there is a pipe breaking in the mains
system or when demand on the mains supply from consumers is very heavy.
b) the pressure in the plumbing circuit receiving the supply rises (back pressure) due, for
example, to water being pumped from a well.
Risk assessment
Given the potential dangers of the phenomenon and the
requirements of current regulations, the risk of pollution from
backflow must be assessed on the basis of the type of system and
the characteristic of the fluid that flows in it. An appropriate
backflow prevention device must be selected on the basis of that
assessment performed by the system designer and the mains
supplier. The device must be located along the supply line at those
points at risk of backflow which would be hazardous to human
health.
The protection can be provided by inserting a backflow preventer at
critical points in the circuit at the inlet from the mains supply or in the
internal plumbing system. This will prevent polluted water from
flowing back in all systems for which direct connection to the mains
or an internal supply is considered hazardous.
Installation in a building with

multiple outlets
Installation in a fire fighting

system
Use of backflow preventers (BA type)

according to European standards
EN 1717 and EN 12729
Protection matrix
Type of system
Proper use of the BA type backflow

preventer is regulated by the new European
standards on the prevention of pollution
from backflow.
The relevant standard is EN 1717: 2000
Protection against pollution of potable
water in water installations and general
requirements of devices to prevent pollution
by backflow.
The types of water contained in water
systems are classified in this standard
according to the degree of risk to health.
General
Sprinkler fire fighting systems using anti freeze solutions
Industrial cisterns
Non-domestic hose union taps
Permeable hoses in others than domestic gardens, laid below or at ground level,
with or without chemical additives
Primary circuits and central heating circuits in other than a house
Reclaimed water systems
Urinals, WCs and bidets
Category 1:
Water used for human consumption
provided by a water company.
Category 2:
Fluid which does not present health hazard,
as in category 1, whose quality has been
compromised as a result in changes to its
temperature, taste, odour or appearance.
Category 3:
Fluid which presents a slight health hazard
due to concentrations of low toxic
substances.
Category 4:
Fluid that presents a significant health
hazard due to concentrations of toxic
substances.
Category 5:
Fluid that presents a serious health hazard
due to concentrations of pathogenic
organisms, radioactive or very toxic
substances.
Appropriate backflow prevention devices
must be fitted in water supply systems on
the basis of this classification.
Backflow preventers (BA type) can be
used to protect against the risk of
pollution from backflow for types of
water up to category 4.
For category 5 types of water an air gap
separation must be used.
The table on the right, entitled Protection
matrix, relates the categories of water to
different types of system. It has been
compiled on the basis of indications given
by the European regulations.
The new European standard EN 12729 Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of
potable water. Controllable backflow preventer
with reduced pressure zone. Family B Type A - stipulate the functional, dimensional
and mechanical requirements that must be
met for controllable reduced pressure zone
backflow preventers (BA type).
Fluid cat.
5
4
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Domestic or residential gardens

Mini-irrigation systems without fertilisers or insecticides applications,
such as pop-up sprinklers or porous hoses
Food processing
Bottle washing apparatus
Butchery and meat trade
Dairies
Food preparation
Slaughterhouse equipment
Vegetable washing
*
*
Medical
Medical or dental equipment with submerged inlets
Bed-pans washers
Commercial clothes washing in health care premises
Domestic appliances such as sinks, baths and wash basins
Dialysing machines
Laboratories
Mortuary equipment
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Catering
Bottle washing apparatus
Dish washing machines in commercial buildings
Dish washing machines in health care premises
Drink vending machines in which ingredients or CO2
are injected into the supply or distribution pipe
Refrigerating equipment
Vegetable washing
Industrial and commercial applications
Brewery and distillation
Car washing and degreasing plants
Commercial clothes washing plants
Drain cleaning plant
Dyeing equipment
Industrial and chemical plants
Industrial disinfection equipment
Laboratories
Mobile plant, tankers and gully emptiers
Printing and photographic equipment
Water storage for agricultural purposes
Animals drinking systems
Water treatment plant or water softeners using products other than salt
Pressurised water fire fighting systems
Water storage for fire fighting purposes
Agricultural
Commercial irrigation with outlets below or at ground level and/or permeable pipes,
with or without chemical additives
Commercial hydroponic systems
Insecticide of fertiliser applications
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Operating principle
The controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer is comprised of: a body with an inspection cover, an upstream check valve (1), a
downstream check valve (2), a discharge device (3).
The two check valves divide three different zones, each of which at a different pressure: an upstream or inlet zone (A); an intermediate zone,
also known as the reduced pressure zone (B); a downstream or outlet zone (C). Each of these has a test port for measuring pressure.
A discharge device (3), is located in the lower part of the intermediate zone.
The obturator of the discharge device is connected via the valve stem (4) to the diaphragm (5).
This mobile unit is pushed upwards by the spring (6). The diaphragm (5) marks the limit of the top chamber (D), which is connected to the
upstream zone by the channel (7).
Normal flow conditions
Under conditions of normal flow, both check valves are open, while
the pressure in the intermediate chamber (B) is always lower that
the inlet pressure by at least 140 mbar due to the pressure loss
caused by the check valve (1).
In the top chamber (D), however, the pressure is the same as in the
inlet zone.
In this situation, the mobile unit consisting of the diaphragm (5), the
valve stem (4) and the valve obturator (3) is pushed down by the
push created by the difference in pressure acting on the diaphragm
which is greater than that of the spring(6) acting in the opposite
direction.
The discharge valve is therefore held in the closed position.
2
D
7
5
4
6
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM
No flow conditions
The check valves (1) and (2) are now closed.
Since the pressure in the upstream zone and therefore also in the
top chamber (D), is still at least 140 mbar higher than the pressure
in the intermediate chamber (B), the discharge valve remains
closed.
3 C
2
D
7
5
4
6
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM

Both check valves close as the pressure upstream drops. The
discharge valve (3) opens when the difference in pressure P,
between the upstream and the intermediate zones falls, drops
below 140 mbar.
Under these conditions the action exerted by the pressure
difference P on the diaphragm (5), becomes weaker than that
exerted by the spring (6), and the discharge valve (3) opens as a
result. Discharge then occurs until the body of the backflow
preventer is empty.
When the situation returns to normal (pressure upstream greater
than pressure downstream), the discharge valve closes and the
backflow preventer is again ready to operate.
3 C
2
D
7
5
4
6
UPSTREAM
A
B
DOWNSTREAM
3 C
Downstream back pressure

If the pressure in the downstream zone increases until it is greater than the upstream pressure, the check valve (2) closes and therefore prevents
water already delivered from returning back into the mains system.
If the seal of the check valve (2), is slightly defective or in general terms there is any other type of fault in the backflow preventer, the device
always interrupts (disconnects) the connection between the mains system and the receiving system.
The backflow preventer has been designed with all construction details required for a properly functioning positive action device; the best
possible safety conditions are therefore ensured under all conditions.
Discharge funnel
In compliance with standard EN 1717 backflow from the connected
pipe must be prevented during discharge and this must occur
without any external water spillage. Consequently the tundish
connected to the discharge pipe must be of an appropriate size
with special openings to create the necessary air gap and it must
be equipped with a proper flow conveyor.
Anti-corrosion materials
The materials used to manufacture the backflow preventers must
be corrosion resistant due to contact with drinking water.
They are therefore constructed using an dezincification resistant
alloy
, bronze and stainless steel to ensure longlasting high
performance.
The elastomers employed for the water seals are approved by
Certifying Bodies in compliance with the most recent regulations
governing compatibility for use with drinking water.
Easy maintenance
The backflow preventer is inspected periodically during its normal
operating life to check that it is functioning correctly. Should the
need arise, dismantling and maintenance operations are simple
and easy to perform with components that are easy to inspect and
replace without disconnecting the valve body from the pipework.
Certification
The series 574 and 575 BA type controllable reduced pressure zone
backflow preventers are certified as complying with the National and
European standards by the following Certifying Bodies: UNI-NF-WRASKIWA-DVGW-SVGW-OVGW-KIWA-SITAC-BELGAQUA-SAI-Global.
p (bar)
p (m w.g.)
3/4
20
1,8
1,6
1,4
18
16
14
1,2
12
10
0,9
0,8
9
8
p (bar)
2
1 1/2
20
18
16
14
1,2
12
10
0,9
0,8
9
8
0,7
0,6
0,6
5
4,5
0,5
20
1,8
1,6
1,4
18
16
14
1,2
12
10
0,9
0,8
40
45
50
35
G (m /h)
p (bar)
p (m w.g.)
1 1 1/4
9
8
p (m w.g.)
DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100
20
1,8
1,6
1,4
18
16
14
1,2
12
10
0,9
0,8
9
8
0,7
0,7
0,6
0,6
0,5
5
4,5
0,5
1
11
20
3/4
8
11
500
400
450
350
G (m /h)
Series 570
1/2
4,5
7
G (m /h)
Strainer
Shut-off valve
300
250
180
200
160
140
120
90
100
80
70
60
50
40
45
35
30
25
18
20
16
14
12
10
0,2
50
40
45
35
30
25
20
18
16
14
12
10
4
4,5
0,5
3,5
2,5
0,2
0,25
2,5
2,5
3,0
0,25
1,8
3,5
0,30
1,6
0,35
3,0
1,4
3,5
0,30
1,2
0,35
0,9
4,5
4,0
0,8
0,45
0,40
0,7
4,0
0,6
0,45
0,40
G (m /h)
p (bar)
30
25
18
16
20
14
12
10
4
4,5
3,5
2,5
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
0,9
0,8
0,2
0,7
40
45
50
35
30
25
18
16
20
14
12
10
4
4,5
0,5
2,5
0,2
3,5
0,25
2,5
2,5
1,8
3,0
0,25
1,6
3,5
0,30
0,35
3,0
1,4
3,5
0,30
1,2
0,35
0,9
4,5
4,0
0,8
0,45
0,40
0,7
4,0
0,6
0,45
0,40
p (m w.g.)
0,7
0,5
1,8
1,6
1,4
0,6
1/2
0,5
1 1/4
16
35
Kv (m3/h)
2
1 1/2
25
22
80
49
DN 65
180
610
DN 50
104
300
DN 80
258
950
DN 100
365
1.700
Installation
Backflow preventers must be installed by qualified personnel in accordance with current norms and regulations.
They must be installed downstream from a shut-off valve and from a strainer with a discharge that can be inspected and another shut-off valve must
be fitted downstream from it. The unit must be installed in an accessible position, appropriately located to avoid possible immersion due to accidental
flooding (see diagram).
The device must be fitted horizontally. The discharge tundish must comply with standard EN 1717 and be connected to the sewage piping. Before
installing the backflow preventer and the strainer, the pipework must be flushed with a large flow rate.
When used to protect the mains supply, backflow preventers must be installed downstream from the water meter, whereas when used to protect the
potable water supply system for internal usage, they are installed at the limit of the zone where pollution might occur, e.g. central heating systems,
garden irrigation systems, etc.
CALEFFI
L
4
1
2
pipe
0,50
sewer mains
tunnel
pipe
GROUND, FLOOR, GANGWAY
GROUND, FLOOR, GANGWAY

1
2
3
4
shut-off valve
strainer
backflow preventer
shut-off valve
Discharge to sewer
B=0,50 a 1,50
sewer mains
tunnel
B=0,50 a 1,50
0,50
DN 100
PN 10
1
2
3
4
shut-off valve
strainer
backflow preventer
shut-off valve
Discharge to sewer
Control instrumentation (code 575000)
Inspection and maintenance

The backflow preventer is a safety device and requires periodical
inspection.
The first sign of poor functioning, generally caused by the presence
of foreign bodies (sand or other impurities), is seen with a constant
discharge from the discharge valve. This discharge is only a first
alarm and does not mean in any way that the backflow preventer is
not safe but the device and the strainer upstream from it requires
dismantling and cleaning. A quick method of inspection (requires
less than 15 minutes) is described in the table below.
N.B. If water is discharged from the discharge valve, a strong flow
of water is recommended by turning on one or more taps since this
is often sufficient to expel foreign bodies and return everything to
normal.
The periodical (annual) control

instrumentation consists of the
following:
- Upstream pressure gauge
- Downstream pressure gauge
- Differential pressure gauge
The flexible tubes and necessary connections are included as well

as accessories useful for dismantling the unit.
The instrumentation comes in its own case.
QUICK INSPECTION METHOD

Check that the system is under pressure before each operation and watch the discharge valve located on the lower part of the device (use a
mirror if necessary).
OPERATION
FINDINGS
PROBABLE CAUSE
Constant discharge
Upstream check valve or

discharge valve do not seal
Close the downstream

shut-off valve
No constant discharge
2
Close the upstream
shut-off valve and open
the test cock for checking
the upstream pressure
(on the front flange)
The discharge valve does

not open or better there is
a minor discharge and
lasts more than one minute
Dismantle and check
Move to step 2
Discharge valve is blocked
The discharge valve opens

suddenly and the unit
empties in less than one
minute
Continuous discharge
DECISION
Dismantle and check
Move to step 3
Downstream check valve

is leaking
Dismantle and check
Open the downstream

shut-off valve.
No discharge
N.B. : During normal operation there should be no constant discharge.

If there is a constant discharge dismantle and inspect the device.
Put back into operation
Series 574
Controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer (BA type). EN 12729 certified. 1/2 M (1/2-3/4 M) threaded
connections with union. Body, cover and discharge valve seat in dezincification resistant alloy. Check valve spindle and
springs in stainless steel. Seals in NBR. Max. working temperature 65C. Max. working pressure 10 bar. Positive action
safety device in compliance with standard EN 12729. Complete with upstream, intermediate and downstream pressure test
ports and discharge tundish with collar fitting to pipe.
Series 574
Controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer (BA type). EN 12729 certified. 1 M (1-1 1/4 M) threaded
connections with union. Body and cover in dezincification resistant alloy. Check valve spindle, discharge valve seat and
springs in stainless steel. Seals in NBR. Max. working temperature 65C. Max. working pressure 10 bar. Positive action
safety device in compliance with standard EN 12729. Complete with upstream, intermediate and downstream pressure test
ports and discharge tundish with collar fitting to pipe.
Series 574
Controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer (BA type). EN 12729 certified. 1 1/2 M (1 1/2-2) threaded
connections with union. Body and cover in bronze. Check valve spindle, discharge valve seat and springs in stainless steel.
Seals in NBR. Max. working temperature 65C. Max. working pressure 10 bar. Positive action safety device in compliance
with standard EN 12729. Complete with upstream, intermediate and downstream pressure test ports and discharge tundish
with collar fitting to pipe.
Series 575
Controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer (BA type). EN 12729 certified. DN 50 (DN 50DN 100) PN 16
flanged connections. Body and cover in bronze. Check valve spindle, discharge valve seat and springs in stainless steel.
Seals in NBR. Max. working temperature 65C. Max. working pressure 10 bar. Positive action safety device in compliance
with standard EN 12729. Complete with upstream, intermediate and downstream pressure test ports and discharge tundish
with collar fitting to pipe.
Series 570
Assembly fitted with backflow preventer. 1/2 F (1/22 F) threaded connections. Max. working temperature 65C. Max.
working pressure 10 bar. Consisting of:
- Controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer (BA type). EN 12729 certified. M threaded connections with union.
Body in dezincification resistant alloy. Check valve spindle, discharge valve seat and springs in stainless steel. Seals in
NBR. Positive action safety device in compliance with standard UNI 9157. Complete with upstream, intermediate and
downstream pressure test ports and discharge tundish with collar fitting to pipe.
- Y strainer. Body in bronze. Mesh in stainless steel. Seal in Saital K. Filter mesh 0,8 mm.
- Upstream and downstream shut-off ball valves. Brass body. Chrome plated.
Series 570
Assembly fitted with backflow preventer. DN 50 (DN 50DN 100) PN 16 flanged connections. Max. working temperature
65C. Max. working pressure 10 bar. Consisting of:
- Controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer (BA type). EN 12729 certified. Body and cover in bronze. Check
valve spindle, discharge valve seat and springs in stainless steel. Seals in NBR. Positive action safety device in
compliance with standard EN 12729. Complete with upstream, intermediate and downstream pressure test ports and
discharge tundish with collar fitting to pipe.
- Y strainer. Body in cast iron GG 25. Epoxy resin coated. Mesh in stainless steel. Filter mesh: 0,7 mm (DN 50-DN 65),
0,9 mm (DN 80-DN 100). Complete with 1/2" F discharge valve connection.
- Upstream and downstream shut-off valves. Body in ductile iron GGG 40. Epoxy resin coated. Control spindle seal in NBR.
Series 5750
The periodical (annual) control instrumentation consists of the following:
upstream pressure gauge 010 bar; downstream pressure gauge 010 bar; differential pressure gauge 01.000 mbar;
flexible hoses and connectors to pressure test ports; instrument case.
CALEFFI
Inclined pressure reducing valves
CALEFFI
5330 series
01024/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
replaces 01024/03 GB
Function
Pressure reducing valves are installed in residential water system to
reduce and stabilise inlet pressure from the water network which is
generally too high and variable for domestic systems to work
properly.
The 533 series was created for small systems, such as apartments,
and to protect water storage heaters, where size and absence of
noise are of particular concern.
Product range
5330
5331
5332
5334
5336
5337
5338
series
series
series
series
series
series
series
Inclined
Inclined
Inclined
Inclined
Inclined
Inclined
Inclined
pressure
pressure
pressure
pressure
pressure
pressure
pressure
reducing
reducing
reducing
reducing
reducing
reducing
reducing
valve
valve
valve
valve
valve
valve
valve
with pressure gauge

with pressure gauge connection
with pressure gauge connection
with pressure gauge
sizes 1/2 and 3/4 F

size 3/4 M x 3/4 F with nut
sizes 1/2 and 3/4 F
sizes 1/2 and 3/4 F
sizes 15 and 22 for copper pipe
Materials
Body:
- 5330/1/2/4 series;
- 5336/7/8 series;

EN 12165 CW602N, chrome plated
Cover:
PA66GF30
Control stem:
dezincification resistant alloy EN 12165 CW602N
Cartridge:
POM
Internal components:
Diaphragm:
NBR
Seals:
NBR
Strainer:
stainless steel
Performance
Max. upstream pressure:
Downstream pressure setting range:
Factory setting:
Pressure gauge scale:
Medium:
Connections
Main connections:
Pressure gauge connection:
16 bar
16 bar
3 bar
60C
010 bar
water
see product range

1/4 F
Dimensions
Operating principle
The functioning of the pressure reducing valve is based on the balance between two
opposing forces:
1 the thrust of the spring to open the flow through the cross section.
2 the thrust of the diaphragm to the close the flow through the cross section.
Mass (kg)
533041 1/2
Code
72,5
22,5
46
64
0,39
533051 3/4
72,5
22,5
46
66
0,41
UPSTREAM
Code
533151 3/4
Mass (kg)
72,5
22,5
46
85,5
0,46
DOWNSTREAM
Operation with water flow

When a draw-off outlet is opened on the water system, the force of the spring becomes
greater than that of the diaphragm; the obturator moves downwards opening the valve
to the flow of water.
The greater the demand for water the lower the pressure under the diaphragm with a
resulting greater flow of water through the valve.
4
8
Code
10
bar
10
bar
Mass (kg)
533241 533441 1/2 72,5 22,5 46 70
0,51
533251 533451 3/4 72,5 22,5 46 72
0,52
Operation without water flow
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
Code
Mass (kg)
533641 15
72,5
22,5
46
91
0,43
533651 22
72,5
22,5
46
93
0,46
When the draw-off outlet is closed, the downstream pressure rises and pushes the
diaphragm upwards.
As a result the obturator closes the valve to the passage of water and maintains the
pressure constant at the calibrated pressure.
The slightest difference in favour of the force exercised by the diaphragm, in relation to
that of the spring, causes the device to close.
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
Code
Mass (kg)
533741 533841 15 72,5 22,5 46 103
0,55
533751 533851 22 72,5 22,5 46 107
0,57
4
8
bar
10
bar
10
Contoured diaphragm
The membrane was designed with a special shape to give an
accurate pressure regulation as a function of changes in the
downstream pressure.
This design feature also extends the valve life because the diaphragm
is more resistant to pressure sudden changes and to wear.
Silent operation
The large chamber on the outlet side of the reducing valve creates
a low flow speed zone, which is particularly effective in reducing
noise generated by narrowing the width of the passage through
which the water flows when the valve is reducing pressure.
Small size
The inclined design makes the 533. series reducers small in size
so that they are easy to fit especially in domestic systems.
Non-stick materials
The central support , which
contains the moving parts is
made of a plastic material with
a low coefficient of adhesion.
This reduces the probability of
scale deposits being formed,
the main cause of malfunction.
Use with boiler hydraulic safety groups

The 5331 model is specially designed for use with the Caleffi
hydraulic safety groups for hot water storage heaters 5261 series.
The 3/4" nut provided can be used for an easy direct connection to
the hydraulic safety groups.
Extractable cartridge
The cartridges in the Caleffi 533. series of pressure reducing valves
can be removed for periodic cleaning and maintenance.
REMOVABLE
CARTRIDGE
CALEFFI
REMOVABLE
STRAINER
Approvals
The pressure reducing valves are approved as compliant with
WRAS specifications in the United Kingdom and ACS in France.
Graph 1 (circulation velocity)
The steps to take for selecting the correct size are as follows:
V (m/s)
The total flow rate is calculated from the number and type
of appliances present by taking the sum of the individual
flow rates.
5
4
3
2
Example:
One living unit with 1 bathroom
1 bidet
G = 6 l/min
1 shower
G = 9 l/min
1 wash basin
G = 6 l/min
1 wc with cistern
G = 6 l/min
1 kitchen sink
G = 12 l/min
1 washing machine
G = 12 l/min
1/2
0,5
3/4
0,4
0,3
0,2
Gtot = 51 l/min
No appliances = 6
10
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
5
100
50
2
20
0,5
10
0,2
0,1
The design flow rate is calculated from the table of

coefficients of simultaneity (using that for 10 appliances).
Graph 2 (Pressure drop)

p (bar)
p (m w.g.)
1,5
15
1,2
12
1
0,9
0,8
10
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
Example:
Gds = Gtot % = 51 41 % = 21 l/min
Reference values:
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
10
5
100
50
2
20
0,5
10
0,2
Upstream pressure = 6 bar

Downstream pressure = 4 bar
Sizing the valve

The flow rates of commonly used appliances in domestic
plumbing systems are given below to assist in the selection
of the correct valve diameter:
It is recommended that flow velocity is kept within 1 to 2

metres per second when calculating the correct reducer
size. This will prevent noise in the pipes and rapid wear of
appliances.
The correct diameter of the reducing valve is taken from
diagram 1 on the basis of the design flow rate taking into
account an ideal flow velocity of between 1 and 2 m/s
(blue band).
Example:
for Gds = 21 l/min select diameter 1/2
(see indications on diagram 1)
The pressure drop is taken from diagram 2 again on the

basis of where the design flow rate intersects the curve for
the relative diameter already selected (the downstream
pressure falls by an amount equal to the pressure drop,
with respect to the set pressure at no flow condition).
Example:
Table of typical flow rates
Bathtub, kitchen sink, dishwasher
12 l/min
Shower
9 l/min
Washbasin, bidet, washing machine, WC with cistern 6 l/min
The simultaneous-use factor must be taken into account to
avoid selecting a valve that is too large. Basically, the fewer
people using the system, the lower the probability of two
appliances being used at the same time.
Table of simultaneous-use factor values (%)

Number Residential Community
of
%
%
appliances
5
10
15
20
25
30
54
41
35 29
27,5
24,5
64,5
49,5
43,5
37
34,5
32

of
%
%
appliances
35
40
45
50
60
70
23,2
21,5
20,5
19,5
18
17
30
28
27
26
24
23

of
%
%
appliances
80
90
100
150
200
300
16,5
16
15,5
14
13
12,5
22
21,5
20,5
18,5
17,5
16,5
for Gds = 21 l/min

1/2
(see indications on diagram 2)
p = 0,8 bar
Recommended flow rates

For an average flow velocity of 1,5 m/s, the recommended
flow rates for each diameter are as follows:
Diameter
Flow rate m3/h
Flow rate l/min
1/2
1,2
20
15
1,2
20
3/4
2,1
35
22
2,1
35
Installation
1. Turn all taps on before installing the valve to flush the
system and expel any air remaining in the pipes.
2. Install shut-off valves upstream and downstream of the
pressure reducer to facilitate future maintenance
operations. The upstream valve may have a check valve
incorporated (Caleffi BALLSTOP).
3. Install the pressure reducer in any position.
2. Water hammer
This is one of the main causes of faults in pressure
reducing valves. It is best to fit special devices to absorb
water hammer when installing pressure reducers in at-risk
systems.
Trouble-shooting
Certain types of fault, which are generally due to faulty design
of the system, are often wrongly attributed to pressure
reducing valves. The most frequent cases are as follows:
4. Close downstream shut-off valve.

5. Calibrate it by turning the
screw on the top of the plastic
cover.
Turn it clockwise to increase
the pressure and anticlockwise
to decrease it.
1. Increased downstream pressure in the presence of a

water heater
This problem is due to heating of the water caused by the
water heater. There is not relief
of the pressure because the
reducing valve is rightly closed.
6. Adjust until the correct pressure is read on the pressure

gauge. Series 533. reducers are factory set at 3 bar.
Recommendations for installation
The solution is to install an

expansion vessel (between the
heater and the reducer) to
absorb the pressure increase.
2. The reducer does not maintain its calibrated value
1. Installation below ground

Installing pressure reducing valves below ground is not
recommended, for three reasons:
- there is a risk of the reducing valve being damaged by
frost
- inspection and maintenance is difficult
- reading the pressure gauge is difficult.
In most cases this is the result of impurities that deposit on

the valve seat causing leakage with a resulting increase in
pressure downstream. The solution is to fit a strainer
upstream of the reducer and subsequently to maintain and
clean the extractable cartridge (see Maintenance).
Maintenance
Proceed as follows for periodic cleaning of the strainer and inspection or replacement of the cartridge:
1 Shut off the reducer
2 Unscrew (anticlockwise) the calibrating screw to decompress the spring inside.
3 Unscrew the cover.
4 Extract the cartridge with the aid of pincers to grip the head of the screw.
5 The cartridge can be fitted back into the valve after inspection and cleaning or alternatively a replacement cartridge can be fitted.
6 Recalibrate the reducer.
5330 series
Inclined pressure reducing valve. Threaded connections 1/2 F (or 3/4 F). Brass body. Chrome plated. Dezincification
resistant alloy stem. Glass/nylon cover. NBR diaphragm and seals. Maximum working temperature 60C. Maximum
upstream pressure 16 bar. Downstream pressure setting range from 1 to 6 bar. Extractable cartridge and strainer for
maintenance operation.
5331 series
Inclined pressure reducing valve. Threaded connection 3/4 M for 3/4 F with nut. Brass body. Chrome plated.
Dezincification resistant alloy stem. Glass/nylon cover. NBR diaphragm and seals. Maximum working temperature 60C.
Maximum upstream pressure 16 bar. Downstream pressure setting range from 1 to 6 bar. Extractable cartridge and
strainer for maintenance operation.
5332 series
Inclined pressure reducing valve with pressure gauge. Threaded connections 1/2 F (or 3/4 F). Pressure gauge connection
1/4 F. Brass body. Chrome plated. Dezincification resistant alloy stem. Glass/nylon cover. NBR diaphragm and seals.
Maximum working temperature 60C. Maximum upstream pressure 16 bar. Downstream pressure setting range from 1 to
6 bar. Extractable cartridge and strainer for maintenance operation. Complete with pressure gauge, scale 010 bar.
5334 series
Inclined pressure reducing valve with pressure gauge connection. Threaded connections 1/2 F (or 3/4 F). Pressure
gauge connection 1/4 F. Brass body. Chrome plated. Dezincification resistant alloy stem. Glass/nylon cover. NBR
diaphragm and seals. Maximum working temperature 60C. Maximum upstream pressure 16 bar. Downstream pressure
setting range from 1 to 6 bar. Extractable cartridge and strainer for maintenance operation.
5336 series
Inclined pressure reducing valve. 15 (or 22) connections. Dezincification resistant alloy body and stem. Chrome
plated. Glass/nylon cover. NBR diaphragm and seals. Maximum upstream temperature 60C. Maximum working pressure
16 bar. Downstream pressure setting range from 1 to 6 bar. Extractable cartridge and strainer for maintenance operation.
5337 series
Inclined pressure reducing valve with pressure gauge connection. 15 (or 22) connections. Pressure gauge
connection 1/4 F. Dezincification resistant alloy body and stem. Chrome plated. Glass/nylon cover. NBR diaphragm and
seals. Maximum working temperature 60C. Maximum upstream pressure 16 bar. Downstream pressure setting range
from 1 to 6 bar. Extractable cartridge and strainer for maintenance operation.
5338 series
Inclined pressure reducing valve with pressure gauge. 15 (or 22) connections. Pressure gauge connection 1/4 F.
Dezincification resistant alloy body and stem. Chrome plated. Glass/nylon cover. NBR diaphragm and seals. Maximum
working temperature 60C. Maximum upstream pressure 16 bar. Downstream pressure setting range from 1 to 6 bar.
Extractable cartridge and strainer for maintenance operation. Complete with pressure gauge, scale 010 bar.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.p.A. S.R.229, N.25 28010 Fontaneto dAgogna (NO) Italy Tel. +39 0322 8491 Fax +39 0322 863723
Automatic filling units
CALEFFI
series 553
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01025/05 GB
Function
The automatic filling unit is a device consisting of a pressure
reducing valve with compensating seat, an inlet strainer, a shut-off
valve and a check valve.
It is installed in the water supply pipework in sealed heating
systems and its main function is to maintain the system pressure
stable at a set value, automatically topping up with water, as
required.
After installation, during the filling or topping-up phase, feed will
stop when the set pressure is reached.
Product range
Code 553040 Automatic filling units with pressure gauge connection
Code 553140 Automatic filling units with pressure gauge
Dimensions
Materials: - body:
- cover:
- seals:
Size 1/2
Size 1/2

NBR
E
2
16 bar
0,3 4 bar
1,5 bar
70C
0 4 bar
CA
LEFF
I
Connections: - inlet:
1/2 M with union tailpiece
- outlet:
1/2 F
- pressure gauge connection:
1/4 F
Max. inlet pressure:

Pressure setting range:
Factory setting:
Code
553040
553140
A
1/2"
1/2"
B
122
122
C
61
61
D
87
87
E
149
Weight (kg)
0,85
0,95
Installation
Components
The valve body is made of hot forged brass. The re-inforced rubber
control diaphragm is formed in a shape permitting deformation to
take place without creating stresses. The only sealing element of
the compensating piston is in the upper part of the device, ensuring
that impurities cannot be deposited.
1. Automatic filling unit code 553040/140 can be installed in either

horizontal or vertical position. It is, however, vital that the unit is
not installed upside down.
CA
LEF
FI
Manual / automatic opening

In the lower part of the unit, a manual shut-off valve is provided,
which can close off the supply to the system.
The automatic condition of operation is restored when the valve is
re-opened. The pressure level in the system will gradually return to
the set calibration value.
CA
LEF
FI
CA
LEF
FI
3
1
The unit is adjusted by means of the regulator located inside the

top cover: rotating it in a clockwise or anticlockwise direction
increases or decreases the pressure at which the unit operates.
2. When the system is being commissioned,
the unit is normally calibrated at a pressure
no lower than the hydrostatic pressure plus
0,3 bar. The internal mechanism will
automatically regulate the pressure by
closing down the supply on reaching the
set value.
0
CA
LEF
FI
3. The system fills slowly, as the amount of

water entering is in direct proportion to the
amount of air vented.
4. When the system is filled, the shut-off valve
can be closed. In order to restore the
automatic top-up condition, merely re-open
the valve. The pressure in the system will
gradually return to the set pressure.
Code 553140
Series 553
Automatic filling unit. 1/2 M with union tailpiece x 1/2 F threaded connection. Brass body and cover. Diaphragm and
seals in NBR. Maximum working temperature 70C. Maximum inlet pressure 16 bar. Pressure setting range 0,3 4 bar.
Complete with pressure gauge, scale 0 4 bar (or pressure gauge connection), shut-off, strainer and check valve.
CALEFFI
Pressure reducing valves
CALEFFI
series 5360 - 5362 - 5365 - 5366

cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01026/05 GB
Function
Pressure reducers are devices which, when installed on a water
system, reduce and stabilise the pressure entering from the mains.
This incoming pressure is generally too high and variable to be
applied directly to domestic systems.
A basic characteristic of a good pressure reducer is that it makes it
possible to maintain constant downstream pressure when the
upstream pressure varies.
SVGW
SSIGE
Product range
Series 5360.1
Series 5360.0
Series 5362.1
Series 5362.0
Series 5365.1
Series 5365.0
Code 536660
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
reducing
reducing
reducing
reducing
reducing
reducing
reducing
valve,
valve,
valve,
valve,
valve,
valve,
valve,
male connections, with pressure gauge

male connections, with pressure gauge connection
female connections, with pressure gauge
female connections, with pressure gauge connection
male connections, with double pressure gauge
male connections, with double pressure gauge connection
flanged connections, with double pressure gauge
Sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2 M

Sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2 M
Sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1 F
Sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1 F
Sizes 1 1/2, 2 M
Sizes 1 1/2, 2 M
Size DN 65
series
Materials:
- Body:
- Cover:
- Membrane:
- Seal:
- Seat and filter:
Performance:
- Max pressure upstream:
- Downstream pressure setting range:
- Factory setting:
- Max working temperature:
- Pressure gauge scale:
- Medium:
- Certification:
- Acoustic group:
Connections:
Pressure gauge connections:
5360/5362
5365
5366
brass EN 1982 CB753S

NBR
NBR
stainless steel
bronze DIN 50930-6 RG5 PB3

NBR
NBR
stainless steel
bronze DIN 50930-6 RG5 PB3

NBR
NBR
stainless steel
25 bar
0,56 bar
3 bar
80C
010 bar
25 bar
0,56 bar
3 bar
80C
025 bar upstream
010 bar downstream
water
EN1567
-
16 bar
0,56 bar
3 bar
80C
025 bar upstream
010 bar downstream
water
-
- 5360;
1/21 1/2 M
with union connection
- 5362
1/21 F
1 1/22 M
with union connection
DN 65 flanged, coupled with flat

counterflanges EN 1092-1, PN 16
one of 1/4 F
two of 1/4 F
two of 3/8 F
water
EN1567
I
Dimensions
Operating principle
The operation of the pressure reducing valve is based on the balancing of two
opposing forces:
Pressure
regulating nut
2 the thrust of the membrane

towards the closing of the
obturator.
1 the thrust of the spring towards

the opening of the obturator.
C
B
Code
A
536040/1 1/2
536050/1 3/4
536060/1 1
536070/1 1 1/4
536080/1 1 1/2
D
C
B
140 76 51
160 90 60
180 95 60
200 110 72
220 120 72
E
53,5
54
54
63
63
F
89,5
111,5
111,5
126
126
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM
When a draw-off point is opened on the water main, the force of the spring prevails over
the opposing pressure of the membrane; the obturator moves downwards, allowing
water to pass.
The greater the demand for water, the lower the pressure under the membrane, thus
permitting more fluid to flow through the obturator.
Operating with flow
Code
A
536240/1 1/2
536250/1 3/4
536260/1 1
E
D
C
51 53,5 89,5
60 54 111,5
60 54 111,5
B
81
95
100
4
8
bar
10
bar
10
C
B
D
C
B
Code
A
536580/1 11/2 260 160 110
536590/1 2 280 160 110
Operating without flow

E
97
94
F
201
204
When the draw-off point is fully closed, the downstream pressure rises and pushes the
membrane upwards.
The obturator therefore closes, preventing the fluid from passing through and holding
the pressure constant at the calibrated value.
A minimum difference in favour of the force exercised by the membrane in relation to
that of the spring causes the device to close.
A
C
E
94
F
204
4
8
Code
A
B
C
D
536660 DN 65 225 185 110
bar
10
bar
10
Compensated seat
Caleffi pressure reducing valves are supplied with compensated
seats. This means that the set pressure value downstream
remains constant independently of the variations in value of the
pressure upstream.
In the figure, the thrust towards

opening is counterbalanced by
the closing pressure acting on
the compensating piston. As the
latter has a surface equal to that
of the obturator, the two forces
cancel each other out.
Noiseless
The internal layout, designed to obtain the optimum fluid dynamic
characteristics, has made it possible to achieve a noise level of less
than 20 dB in all the tests carried out.
Thanks to this quality, Caleffi reducing valves are approved to the
I acoustic group, in compliance with the EN 1567 European
standard.
Low pressure losses

The internal fluid-dynamic shape of the reducing valve makes it
possible to attain low pressure losses even when a large number of
draw-off points are open.
This characteristic is important in relation to the high pressure
losses caused by various devices present in modern systems, for
example thermostatic mixers, which make it necessary to install
reducers with minimum pressure losses.
High pressures
Sliding surfaces
The components most subject
to wear due to the friction of
moving parts are PTFE coated.
This treatment considerably
increases the life of the
pressure reduction device.
Removable cartridge
The cartridge containing the membrane, filter, seat, obturator and
adjusting piston can be removed for maintenance and strainer
cleaning purposes.
The zone exposed to the

upstream pressure is constructed
in such a way that it can operate
at high pressure. Thanks to the
PTFE anti-extrusion rings on the
compensating piston, the valve
can be used in continuous
service with upstream pressures
of up to 25 bar.
Seat seal
The fluid passage seat on which
the obturator operates is made
of stainless steel, which ensures
the long-lasting operation of the
device.
Certification
Pressure reducing valves are certified in accordance with the
requirements of the EN 1567 European standard.
Graph 1 (Circulation velocity)
The steps to be taken for correct dimensioning are as

follows:
V (m/s)
5
4
Calculate the total flow on the basis of the number

and types of appliance present in the system, adding
up their individual typical flow rates.
3
2
Example:
0,5
0,4
0,3
1/2
3/4
1 1/4 1 1/2 2
DN 65
40
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
20
500
200
10
5
100
50
20
0,5
10
0,2
0,1
0,2

p (bar)
p (m w.g.)
1,5
15
1,2
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
12
10
9
8
7
0,6
0,5
0,4
5
4
1/2
0,3
3/4 1 1 1/4
1 1/2
2 DN 65
40
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
20
500
10
200
100
50
1
20
10
Reference conditions:
0,1
0,5
0,2
0,2
Single dwelling with 2 bathrooms

2 bidets
G = 12 l/min
1 shower
G = 9 l/min
2 washbasins
G = 12 l/min
2 WCs
G = 12 l/min
1 bath
G = 12 l/min
1 kitchen sink
G = 12 l/min
1 dishwasher
G = 12 l/min
Gtot = 81 l/min
No. of devices = 10
The design flow is calculated
simultaneous-use factors table.
using
the
Example:
Gdes = Gtot % = 81 41 % = 33 l/min
When sizing pressure reducing valves, it is advisable to
keep the velocity of flow in the pipes at between 1 and
2 m/s. This prevents both noise in the pipework and
rapid wear in the point of use equipment.
The size of the pressure reducing valve is
determined by means of graph 1, starting with the
design flow figure and remembering that the ideal
velocity is between 1 and 2 m/s (blue band).
Example:
for Gdes = 33 l/min size 3/4 is selected
(see graph 1)
Pressure upstream = 8 bar

Pressure downstream = 3 bar
Dimensioning
The typical flow rates of equipment commonly used in hot water
systems are shown below to help in the selection of correct pipe
sizes:
Using graph 2, still starting with the design flow

figure, identify the pressure drop, intersecting the
curve relating to the size already selected (the
downstream pressure falls by a value equal to the
pressure drop in relation to the zero flow set
pressure).
Example:

Shower
Washbasin, bidet, washing machine, WC
12 litres/min
9 litres/min
6 litres/min
In order to prevent over-sizing of the pressure reducing valve and

pipework, a simultaneous-use correction factor should be taken
into account. In essence, the greater the number of users of the
system, the lower the percentage of draw-off points opened at the
same time.
for Gdes = 33 l/min

(see graph 2)
p = 0,55 bar
Nominal flow rates

In accordance with the requirements of the EN 1567
European standard, these are the flow rates for each
diametre, at an average speed of 2 m/s.
Table showing simultaneous-use factors as %

Number of
Private
Public
devices dwelling % building %
5
10
15
20
25
30
54
41
35
29
27,5
24,5
64,5
49,5
43,5
37
34,5
32
Number of
Private
Public
35
40
45
50
60
70
23,2
21,5
20,5
19,5
18
17
30
28
27
26
24
23
Number of
Private
Public
80
90
100
150
200
300
16,5
16
15,5
14
13
12,5
22
21,5
20,5
18,5
17,5
16,5
Size
1/2
Flow rate (m3/h) 1,27
Flow rate (l/min) 21,16
3/4
2,27
37,83
1
3,6
60
1 1/4 1 1/2 2
5,8
9,1
14
96,66 151,66 233,33
Installation
Trouble-shooting
1 Prior to installation, open all the draw-off taps to empty the

system and expel any air remaining in the pipework.
2 Install shut-off valves upstream and downstream to assist
in future maintenance operations.
3 Install the pressure reducing valve in any position except
upside down.
Some faults, which are usually due to the lack of suitable

system safeguards, are sometimes incorrectly attributed to
pressure reducing valves. The most frequent cases are:
1. Increased pressure downstream of the pressure
reducing valve when a water heater is installed
This problem is due to the overheating of the water caused
by the water heater.
The pressure cannot leak, as the reducing valve is
properly closed.
The solution is to install an expansion vessel (between the
reducer and the water heater) to absorb the pressure
increase.
4 Close the downstream shut-off valve.

5 Calibrate by means of the spring pressure regulating nut
located under the head cover, turning with a 10 mm
hexagonal Allen key clockwise to increase the set value or
anticlockwise to reduce it.
6 Check the required pressure on the pressure gauge.
(Caleffi reducers come factory set at 3 bar).
1. Installation in pits
Installing pressure reducing valve inside pits is not
recommended, for two reasons:
- it is very difficult, if not impossible, to read the pressure
gauge.
- impurities may enter the device through the pressure
relief outlet in the head cover.
2. Water hammer
This is one of the main causes of failure of pressure
reducing valves.
During the installation of at risk systems, the use of
specific devices designed to absorb water hammer should
be provided for.
2. The pressure reducing valve does not maintain the set

value
In the majority of cases, this problem arises from the
presence of impurities on the seat seal causing leakage
and consequent increases in the pressure downstream.
The solution consists of the preventive installation of a filter
upstream of the pressure reducing valve and subsequently
of maintenance and cleaning of the removable cartridge
(see maintenance).
Maintenance
For cleaning, inspection or replacement of the entire cartridge:
1 Isolate the pressure reducing valve.
2 Unscrew the spring pressure regulating nut to release the spring tension.
3 Remove the head cover.
4 Extract the cartridge using two screwdrivers.
5 After inspection and cleaning if necessary, the complete cartridge can be refitted or replaced using a spare cartridge.
6 Recalibrate the pressure reducing valve.
System application diagram
Washing machines
Shut-off valve
Mixer taps
BALLSTOP ball valve with

built-in check valve
Filter
Solenoid valve
Regulator
Irrigation systems
10
CALEFFI
Series 5360
Pressure reducing valve with compensated seat to standard EN 1567. Threaded connections 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 1 1/2)
with union. Brass body. Stainless steel seat and filter. NBR seal and membrane. Maximum working temperature 80C.
Maximum upstream pressure 25 bar. Downstream pressure setting range from 0,5 to 6 bar. Sliding surface heat-coated
with PTFE. Cartridge with membrane, filter and obturator, removable for maintenance operations.
Series 5362
Pressure reducing valve with compensated seat. Threaded connections 1/2 F (from 1/2 to 1). Brass body. Stainless
steel seat and filter. NBR seal and membrane. Maximum working temperature 80C. Maximum upstream pressure 25 bar.
Downstream pressure setting range from 0,5 to 6 bar. Sliding surface heat-coated with PTFE. Cartridge with membrane,
filter and obturator, removable for maintenance operations.
Series 5365
Pressure reducing valve with compensated seat to standard EN 1567. Threaded connections 1 1/2 M (from 1 1/2 to 2)
with union. Bronze body. Stainless steel seat and filter. NBR seal and membrane. Maximum working temperature 80C.
Maximum upstream pressure 25 bar. Downstream pressure setting range from 0,5 to 6 bar. Sliding surface heat-coated
with PTFE. Cartridge with membrane, filter and obturator, removable for maintenance operations.
Code 536660
Pressure reducing valve with compensated seat. Flanged connections PN 16 DN 65. Bronze body. Stainless steel seat
and filter. NBR seal and membrane. Maximum working temperature 80C. Maximum upstream pressure 16 bar.
Downstream pressure setting range from 0,5 to 6 bar. Supplied with double pressure range: 025 bar upstream and
010 bar downstream. Sliding surface heat-coated with PTFE. Cartridge with membrane, filter and obturator, removable
for maintenance operations.
CALEFFI
Radiator and lockshield valves

series 340 - 411 - 415
01030/01 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The following series of manual and lockshield valves are typically
used for controlling and regulating the fluid flow in heat emitters of
central heating systems.
They are supplied with a special tailpiece with rubber hydraulic
seal, permitting quick, safe connection to the radiator without the
use of additional sealing materials.
Product range
For copper and plastic piping:
Series
Series
Series
Series
340
341
342
343
Elbow manual radiator valve

Straight manual radiator valve
Elbow radiator lockshield valve
Sizes
Sizes
Sizes
Sizes
3/8,
3/8,
3/8,
3/8,
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
radiator
radiator
radiator
radiator
x
x
x
x
23
23
23
23
p.1,5
p.1,5
p.1,5
p.1,5
piping
piping
piping
piping
Sizes
Sizes
Sizes
Sizes
3/8,
3/8,
3/8,
3/8,
1/2,
1/2,
1/2,
1/2,
(3/4 use code 401500)

(3/4 use code 402500)
3/4 (*)
3/4 (*)
Sizes
Sizes
Sizes
Sizes
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
x
x
x
x
For steel piping:

Series
Series
Series
Series
411
412
431
432

For copper and plastic piping (with tailpiece without rubber seal):
Series
Series
Series
Series
*
415
416
435
436

3/4 with tailpiece without rubber seal
- Material: -
Body: brass UNI EN 12165 CW617N, chrome plated

Obturator:
brass UNI EN 12164 CW614N
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
Gland:
PTFE
ABS (RAL 9010)
Fluid:
Temperature range:

30%
10 bar
5100C
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
and
and
and
and
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
radiator
radiator
radiator
radiator
x
x
x
x
23
23
23
23
p.1,5
p.1,5
p.1,5
p.1,5
piping
piping
piping
piping
Dimensions
Code
Code
Code
Code
340302
3/8
23 p.1,5
47,5
341302
3/8
23 p.1,5
47,5
342302
3/8
23 p.1,5
47,5
343302
3/8
23 p.1,5
47,5
340402
1/2
23 p.1,5
53,5
341402
1/2
23 p.1,5
53,5
342402
1/2
23 p.1,5
53,5
343402
1/2
23 p.1,5
53,5
Code
Code
Code
Code
340302
21,5
48,5
37,5
341302
24
57
37,5
342302
21,5
39
28,5
343302
24
44,5
28,5
340402
21,5
48,5
37,5
341402
24
57
37,5
342402
21,5
39
28,5
343402
24
44,5
28,5
F
F
E
A
Code
Code
Code
Code
411302
3/8
3/8
48
412302
3/8
3/8
21
431302
3/8
3/8
47,5
432302
3/8
3/8
21
411402
1/2
1/2
54
412402
1/2
1/2
22
431402
1/2
1/2
53,5
432402
1/2
1/2
22
431500
3/4
3/4
62,5
432500
3/4
3/4
30
Code
Code
Code
Code
411302
20
48
37,5
412302
46,5
55
37,5
431302
20
38
28,5
432302
46,5
44,5
28,5
411402
23
48
37,5
412402
52,0
55
37,5
431402
23
38
28,5
432402
52,0
44,5
28,5
431500
25
47
28,5
432500
59,5
49,5
28,5
Code
Code
Code
Code
415303
3/8
3/8
47
416303
3/8
3/8
46,5
435303
3/8
23 p.1,5
47
436303
3/8
3/8
46,5
415403
1/2
23 p.1,5
51
416403
1/2
23 p.1,5
50
435403
1/2
23 p.1,5
51
436403
1/2
23 p.1,5
50
Code
Code
Code
Code
415303
21,5
48
37,5
416303
23,5
55
37,5
435303
21,5
38
28,5
436303
23,5
44,5
28,5
415403
21,5
48
37,5
416403
24,0
55
37,5
435403
21,5
38
28,5
436403
24,0
44,5
28,5
Construction characteristics
Valve
The hydraulic seal on the control spindle is guaranteed by a PTFE gland
nut and an EPDM O-Ring.
Values of nominal flow and equivalent length
Control knob
The knob is push-located on the control spindle by means of simple
manual pressure, without any fixing screws. Dismantling for any
operations on the gland or for replacement is very easy.
COPPER PIPING
TYPE
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Manual valve
Rad.
con.
Pipe Int/ext STRAIGHT

con. pipe Kv0,01 e.l.
(mm) (l/h)
(m)
ELBOW
Kv0,01
(l/h)
e.l.
(m)
3/8"
23 p.1,5
6/8
132
0,2
242
0,1
3/8"
3/8"
23 p.1,5
8/10
132
0,8
242
0,2
3/8"
3/8"
23 p.1,5
10/12
132
2,7
242
0,8
3/8"
23 p.1,5
12/14
132
6,9
242
2,1
3/8"
23 p.1,5
13/15
132
10,6
242
3,1
3/8"
23 p.1,5
14/16
132
15,5
242
4,6
3/8"
23 p.1,5
16/18
132
31,3
242
9,3
1/2"
23 p.1,5
8/10
217
0,3
399
0,1
1/2"
23 p.1,5
10/12
217
1,0
399
0,3
1/2"
23 p.1,5
12/14
217
2,6
399
0,8
1/2"
23 p.1,5
13/15
217
3,9
399
1,2
1/2"
23 p.1,5
14/16
217
5,7
399
1,7
1/2"
23 p.1,5
16/18
217
11,6
399
3,4
Lockshield
valve
STEEL PIPING
TYPE
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Lockshield valve
Rad.
con.

(mm) (l/h)
(m)
Kv0,01
(l/h)
e.l.
(m)
3/8"
3/8"
12,7/17,2
132
7,5
242
2,2
1/2"
1/2"
16,3/21,3
217
10,4
399
3,1
3/4"
3/4"
21,7/26,4
258
33,2
452
11
ELBOW
PLASTIC PIPING
TYPE

The coupling union to the radiator
connection thread has a specially
shaped rubber ring.
This system guarantees the
hydraulic seal with no need for
further sealing materials, such as
PTFE tapes etc.
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Radiator or
lockshield valve
Rad
con.

(mm) (l/h)
(m)
ELBOW
Kv0,01
(l/h)
e.l.
(m)
3/8"
3/8"
23 p.1,5
8/12
132
0,8
242
0,2
3/8"
23 p.1,5
10/15
132
2,7
242
0,8
3/8"
23 p.1,5
12/16
132
6,9
242
2,1
3/8"
23 p.1,5
13/18
132
10,6
242
3,1
3/8"
23 p.1,5
14/18
132
15,5
242
4,6
1/2"
23 p.1,5
8/12
217
0,3
399
0,1
1/2"
23 p.1,5
10/15
217
1,0
399
0,3
1/2"
23 p.1,5
12/16
217
2,6
399
0,8
1/2"
23 p.1,5
13/18
217
3,9
399
1,2
1/2"
23 p.1,5
14/18
217
5,7
399
1,7
Manual regulating valves, elbow connections, series 340,

series 411 and series 415
p (daPa)
3/8"
p (kPa)
1/2"
Manual regulating valves, straight connections, series 341,

p (daPa)
3/8"
p (kPa)
1/2"
5000
50
5000
50
2000
20
2000
20
1000
10
1000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
3/8"
1/2"
3/8"
1/2"
Lockshield valves, 3/8" elbow connections, series 342,

p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
2000
4
1000
1/
2
1/
500
200
100
en
lly
op
fu
3000
2000
500
G (l/h)
Kv0,01 = 132 l/h

Kv0,01 = 217 l/h
Lockshield valves, 3/8" straight connections, series 343,

p (mm w.g.)
50
5000
20
2000
10
1000
500
p (kPa)
50
20
4
1/
10
2
1/
200
100
fu
en
lly
op
3/8"
Lockshield valves, 1/2" elbow connections, series 342,

p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
2000
20
2000
10
1000
500
200
100
2
1/
500
200
100
op
en
2000
1000
500
p (mm w.g.)
50
4
1/
G (l/h)
Kv0,01 = 132 l/h
Lockshield valves, 1/2" straight connections, series 343,

5000
1000
200
200
50
2000
3/8"
G (l/h)
Kv0,01 = 242 l/h
100
0,1
50
0,2
10
20
20
0,1
10
0,2
10
1000
20
500
0,5
100
50
20
0,5
10
50
50
3000
50
1000
G (l/h)
Kv0,01 = 242 l/h

Kv0,01 = 399 l/h
1000
0,1
200
0,2
10
100
20
0,1
20
0,2
10
2000
20
500
0,5
200
50
100
0,5
20
50
p (kPa)
50
20
4
1/
10
2
1/
1
2
en
y
ull
op
0,2
10
0,1
1/2"
G (l/h)
Kv0,01 = 399 l/h
Lockshield valves, 3/4" elbow connections, series 431

p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
2000
20
2000
1000
10
1000
500
200
100
50
20
5
2
op
en
fu
lly
op
en
10
G (l/h)
3/4"
Kv0,01 = 258 l/h
5000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
fu
Kv0,01 = 452 l/h
100
50
20
10
3/4"
2000
0,1
1000
0,2
10
500
20
0,1
200
0,2
10
100
20
50
0,5
20
50
10
0,5
lly
50
2000
p (kPa)
5000
100
1000
G (l/h)
p (mm w.g.)
50
200
500
Kv0,01 = 217 l/h
Lockshield valves 3/4", straight connections, series 432
5000
500
0,5
200
2000
500
200
100
50
20
10
1/2"
100
20
0,1
50
0,2
10
20
20
10
50
ll
fu
1000
0,5
50
G (l/h)
Choice of connections
Accessories
COLORSET
4383
Piping
connections
Compression connection
for copper pipes,
with PTFE seal.
FOR COLOURED RADIATORS
3/8
Code
3680
Con.
438310 3/8
438312 3/8
- 10
- 12
Coloured lockshield valve caps and

valve control knobs.
Available in a range of 11 colours.
12
12
Available in colours:
purple
ivory
blue
yellow
grey
Piping
connections
23 p.1,5
brown
RAL 8017
black
RAL 9005
red
RAL 3000
green
RAL 6024
chrome plated
4370
382
Compression connection
for copper pipes,
with O-Ring seal.
Connection with adjustable nut

23 p.1,5.
Chrome plated.
Code
437010
437012
437014
437015
437016
RAL 3003
RAL 1013
RAL 5015
RAL 1021
RAL 7035
Con.
23
23
23
23
23
p.1,5
p.1,5
p.1,5
p.1,5
p.1,5
10
12
14
15
16
18
18
18
18
18
Code
382000
23 p.1,5
3870
Hex. nut spanner 25 and 26 mm.
4380
Compression connection,
for copper pipes,
with PTFE seal.
387000
Con.
Code
438010
438012
438014
438015
438016
438018
Code
23
23
23
23
23
23
p.1,5
p.1,5
p.1,5
p.1,5
p.1,5
p.1,5
10
12
14
15
16
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
3871
Hex. nut spanner 26 and 30 mm.
For DARCAL connections
23 p.1,5 and 3/4.
Code
387100
6810
Auto-adaptable
diameter connection
for single and multilayer
plastic pipes.
Code
681000
681002
681001
681006
681015
681017
681024
681026
681035
681044
Int.
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
23 p.1,5
17,5-18,0
19,0-19,5
19,5-10,0
19,5-10,0
10,5-11,0
10,5-11,0
11,5-12,0
11,5-12,0
12,5-13,0
13,5-14,0
Ext.
Con.
12-14
14-16
12-14
14-16
14-16
16-18
14-16
16-18
16-18
16-18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
3871
Multi-purpose tool.
Can be used for unions
from 3/8 to 1.
Code
387127
Series 340
Manual radiator valve. Elbow connections for copper and single and multilayer plastic pipe 23 p.1,5 for piping from
10 to 18 mm. Connection to radiator 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece supplied with seal in EPDM. Brass body. Chrome
plated. Control knob white RAL 9010 in ABS. Double seal consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle and
gland in PTFE. Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Series 341
Manual radiator valve. Straight connections for copper and single and multilayer plastic pipe 23 p.1,5 for piping from
10 to 18 mm. Connection to radiator 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece supplied with seal in EPDM. Brass body. Chrome
plated. Control knob white RAL 9010 in ABS. Double seal consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle and gland
in PTFE. Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Series 342
Lockshield valve. Elbow connections for copper and single and multilayer plastic pipe 23 p.1,5 for piping from 10 to
18 mm. Radiator connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece provided with EPDM seal. Brass body. Chrome plated. Cap
white RAL 9010 in ABS. Outward seal consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle. Maximum working temperature
100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Series 343
Lockshield valve. Straight connections for copper and single and multilayer plastic pipe 23 p.1,5 for piping from 10
to 18 mm. Radiator connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece provided with EPDM seal. Brass body. Chrome plated.
Cap white RAL 9010 in ABS. Outward seal consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle. Maximum working
temperature 100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Series 411
Manual radiator valve. Elbow connections for steel pipe, 3/8 or 1/2. Connection to radiator 3/8 or 1/2 M with
tailpiece supplied with seal in EPDM. Brass body. Chrome plated. Control knob white RAL 9010 in ABS. Double seal
consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle and gland in PTFE. Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum
Series 412
Manual radiator valve. Straight connections for steel pipe, 3/8 or 1/2. Connection to radiator 3/8 or 1/2 M with
tailpiece supplied with seal in EPDM. Brass body. Chrome plated. Control knob white RAL 9010 in ABS. Double seal
consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle and gland in PTFE. Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum
Series 415
Manual radiator valve. Elbow connections for copper and single and multilayer plastic pipe, 3/8 or 23 p.1,5.
Connection to radiator 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece. Brass body. Chrome plated. Control knob white RAL 9010 in ABS.
Double seal consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle and gland in PTFE. Maximum working temperature 100C.
Series 416
Manual radiator valve. Straight connections for copper and single and multilayer plastic pipe, 3/8 or 23 p.1,5.
Connection to radiator 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece. Brass body. Chrome plated. Control knob white RAL 9010 in ABS.
Double seal consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle and gland in PTFE. Maximum working temperature 100C.
Series 431
Lockshield valve. Elbow connections for steel pipes 3/8, 1/2 or 3/4. Radiator connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with
tailpiece provided with EPDM seal, 3/4 with tailpiece without seal. Brass body. Chrome plated. Cap white RAL 9010
in ABS. Outward seal consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle. Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum
Series 432
Lockshield valve. Straight connections for steel pipes 3/8, 1/2 or 3/4. Radiator connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with
tailpiece provided with EPDM seal, 3/4 with tailpiece without seal. Brass body. Chrome plated. Cap white RAL 9010
in ABS. Outward seal consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle. Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum
Series 435
Lockshield valve. Elbow connections for copper and single and multilayer plastic pipe 3/8 or 23 p.1,5. Radiator
connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece. Brass body. Chrome plated. Cap white RAL 9010 in ABS. Outward seal
consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle. Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Series 436
Lockshield valve. Straight connections for copper and single and multilayer plastic pipe 3/8 or 23 p.1,5. Radiator
connection 3/8 or 1/2 M with tailpiece. Brass body. Chrome plated. Cap white RAL 9010 in ABS. Outward seal
consisting of EPDM O-Ring on control spindle. Maximum working temperature 100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
CALEFFI
S.S. 229 Km 26,5 I-28010 Fontaneto dAgogna (NO) Tel. Int. +39 0322 8491 Fax +39 0322 863723
Http://www.calef fi.com E-mail:info@calef fi.it
MAXCAL
Automatic air vent for heating, air
CALEFFI
conditioning and refrigeration systems

series 501
01031/05 GB
Function
Automatic air vent valves are designed to remove the air that accumulates in heating, air
conditioning and refrigeration systems without the need for manual intervention. This
prevents harmful phenomena that may compromise the life and the performance of the
heating system and which include:
- corrosion due to the oxygen;
- pockets of air trapped in the heating emitters;
- cavitation in the circulation pumps;
- noise from air passing through the pipes.
These high capacity air vent valves are ideal for use in large piping systems and can also
be installed in horizontal sections.
Product range
Code 501500 MAXCAL Automatic air vent for heating, air conditioning and refrigeration systems
Body:
Cover:
Float:
Obturator stem:
Obturator:
Hydraulic seals:
Filter:
Screws:
Spring:
Medium:
Dimensions
stainless steel
stainless steel
VITON
EPDM
stainless steel
stainless steel
stainless steel
F
A
Materials: -
Sizes 3/4 x 3/8
water, glycol solution non hazardous,

therefore excluded from
the guidelines of 67/548/EC Directive
50%

Max. discharge pressure:
Temperature range:
16 bar
6 bar
-20 120C
Connection: - Inlet:
- Discharge:
3/4 F
3/8 F
B
C
D
Code
501500
A
3/8
B
C
D
3/4 Hex. 40 97
E
158
F
Weight (kg)
135
3,00
Operating principle
The accumulation of air bubbles in the valve body causes the float
to drop and thus the obturator to open. This phenomenon occurs,
and consequently the valve functions correctly, as long as the water
pressure remains below the maximum discharge pressure.
Filter
As shown in the drawing, the air to be vented is forced through a
fine mesh filter before arriving at the obturator. This device greatly
reduces the risk of leakage from the seal due to metal chips, hemp
fibres, plaster flakes, etc., becoming lodged between the seat and
the obturator.
Flow curves
Air flow (when the system is being filled)
Flow rate (Nl/s)
4
3,5
3
2,5
2
1,5
Threaded outlet
For installation at the top of risers and/or in attics, the air vent valve
is equipped with a threaded outlet (1) that shall be connected to a
vent pipe.
Protection against foreign objects
The vent outlet is equipped with a mechanism (2) to protect against
dust and down, which may collect at the bottom of the valve over
time and thus obstruct the vent.
Vent valve
The slide surfaces of the vent valve (3) have been ground to
minimise friction and prevent the formation of harmful
encrustations.
5,5
4,5
3,5
2,5
1,5
0,5
0,5
Anticorrosive materials
The valve body and cover are made of hot forged brass whilst the
filter, obturator stem, float and spring are all made of stainless steel
to prevent rust from forming and later detaching and clogging the
seal seat filter.
bar (air)
Maintenance
To facilitate maintenance of the
deaerator, it is recommended
to first install a 3/4 full
bore-through passage shut-off
valve as shown in the figure.
O-Rings
For maintenance purposes, the seals between the body and
cover (4) and the vent unit and cover (5) are equipped with large
cross-section O-rings.
Vent pipe
3/4" full
bore-through
passage
shut-off valve
Code 501500
Automatic air vent valve for heating, air conditioning and refrigeration systems. Threaded connections, 3/4 F (inlet), 3/8 F
(discharge). Brass body and cover. Stainless steel filter, spring, obturator stem, float and screws. VITON obturator. EPDM seals.
Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Maximum
discharge pressure 6 bar. Temperature range -20 120C.
CALEFFI
AERCAL end plug for radiators

with automatic air vent
CALEFFI
507 series
01032/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
The end plugs for radiators with automatic air vents are designed
to automatically expel any air trapped inside heat emitters, both
during the system filling phase and during normal operation. This
helps to prevent undesirable effects such as noisy operation and
inefficient performance of the heat emitters themselves.
All models in the 507 series are supplied complete with a
hygroscopic safety cap.
Patented models
Product range
End
End
End
End
plug
plug
plug
plug
for
for
for
for
radiator
radiator
radiator
radiator
with
with
with
with
air
air
air
air
vent,
vent,
vent,
vent,
chrome
chrome
chrome
chrome
plated,
plated,
plated,
plated,
with
with
with
with
Materials
Body:
Float:
Obturator:
Spring:
Protective cage:
Air vent seal:
Heater unit seal:
safety
safety
safety
safety
cap
cap
cap
cap
size 1 M right
size 1 M left
size 1 1/4 M right
size 1 1/4 M left
Dimensions

high-resistance polymer
silicone rubber
stainless steel
POM
silicone rubber
EPDM
Performance
Medium:
water and glycol solutions

30%

10 bar
6 bar
100C
Connections:
hygroscopic
hygroscopic
hygroscopic
hygroscopic
C
D
507611
507621
507711
507721
Code
Code
Code
Code
11 1/4 M
Code
A
B
507611 1 R
35
507621 1 L
35
507711 11/4 R 39,5
507721 11/4 L 39,5
C
61,5
61,5
63
63
D
14
14
15,5
15,5
E
47,5
47,5
47,5
47,5
F
25,5
25,5
27
27
G
36
36
36
36
Mass (kg)
0,13
0,13
0,17
0,17
Operating principle
The water almost entirely fills the inside of the valve body and
keeps the float (1), totally immersed in it, in a horizontal position.
The build-up of air bubbles inside the valve makes the float end (1)
rotate downward. This motion puts the float into contact with the
control stem and rim (2), strictly connected to the control stem, this
opening the obturator (3).
This action, as well as correct valve operation, is ensured as
long as the water pressure remains under the maximum
discharge pressure value.
3
Water level
2
3
Installation
The plug performs its function correctly when the valve is in a
vertical position.
The hygroscopic cap functions correctly when fully screwed on
(as supplied by the manufacturer). We also recommend it is
replaced regularly.
Discharge capacity (system filling phase)
Nl/s
Hygroscopic safety cap

All models are supplied with a hygroscopic safety cap.
The operating principle is based on the properties of the cellulose
fibre discs forming the sealing cartridge (5).
These discs increase in volume by 50% when 5
they come into contact with water, thus
closing the valve.
Dry obturator
The position of the float and the other internal
parts allow the obturator (3) to always remain
clear of the water, so as to limit the risks
caused by the infiltration of impurities present
in the water.
Protective cage
The acetal resin cage (4) protects the float
(1) from knocks when the plug is screwed
into the heater unit.
0,15
0,14
0,13
0,12
0,11
0,10
0,09
0,08
0,07
0,06
0,05
Leverage system
The float (1) is moved by the stainless steel rod (6) supporting it,
which rotates on supports built into the cage (4) holding the float.
Therefore,
friction
is
minimised in the event of 4
limescale build-up.
This system ensures correct
operation of the device over
long periods of time.
0,04
0,03
0,02
0,01
0,5
1,5
2,5
3,5
4,5
5,5
6 bar
(air)
Accessories
The hygroscopic safety cap is available as spare
part, code R59720.
507 series
End plug for radiators with automatic air vent. Threaded 1 M (and 1 1/4 M) right and left connection. Brass body, chrome
plated. High-resistance polymer float. Silicone rubber obturator. Stainless steel spring. POM protective cage. Silicone rubber
air vent seal. EPDM seal to heater unit. Medium water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum
working pressure 10 bar. Maximum discharge pressure 6 bar. Maximum working temperature 100C.
Code R59720
Hygroscopic safety cap. Brass body, chrome plated. EPDM hydraulic seal. Cellulose fibre discs sealing cartridge; fibre volume
increase on contact with water 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum working temperature 110C.
CALEFFI
ROBOCAL
Automatic air vents
CALEFFI
series 5024 - 5025 - 5026 - 5027
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01033/03 GB
Function
These automatic air vents eliminate residual air in heating and air
conditioning systems without the need for manual intervention. This
prevents undesired noise, wear of devices in the circuits and
inefficient performance of heating units.
Product range
Series
Series
Series
Series
5024
5025
5026
5027
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
air
air
air
air
vent
vent
vent
vent
with
with
with
with
horizontal discharge
horizontal discharge and automatic shut off valve
vertical discharge
vertical discharge and automatic shut off valve
Sizes 1/4 e
Size
Sizes 3/8 and
Size
3/8
3/8
1/2
3/8
M
M
M
M
Materials:
Body and cover:
Float:
Obturator:
Spring:
Seals:
Seals on shut off valve:

PP
silicone rubber
stainless steel
EPDM
PTFE
Performance:
Medium:
Max. venting pressure

30%
10 bar
5024, 5025 4 bar
5026, 5027 6 bar
5024, 5026 115C
5025, 5027 110C
Dimensions
C
C
D
A
A
C
E
Code
A
B
D
502420 1/4 55 40 25 45
502430 3/8 55 40 25 45
F Weight (kg)
10 0,140
10 0,147
Code
A
B
C
D
502530 3/8 72 40 25
E Weight (kg)
57 0,167
C
Code
A
B
D
502630 3/8 77 40 10
502640 1/2 77 40 10
E Weight (kg)
67 0,155
67 0,160
Code
A
B
C
D
502730 3/8 101 40 19
E Weight (kg)
82 0,175
Version with shut-off valve

The automatic shut-off valve makes maintenance and inspection of
the air vent easier by shutting off the flow of water when the valve
has been removed. O-rings in EPDM ensure a good seal with the
valve body.
Fluid dynamic characteristics

Air flow (when filling the system)
Nl/s
5024-5025
5026-5027
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
3,5
4,5
5,5
6 bar
(air)
Installation
- Air is vented from the system by turning the plug on the air outlet
anticlockwise by one complete turn from the fully closed position.
Air is automatically vented if the cap is kept in this position.
Float with anti rotation and

anti vibration system
The float is fitted so that when it
is in rest position the obturator is
not affected by any external
movement.
- It is recommended that the air vents are not fitted in places

difficult to inspect and at risk of freezing.
Accessories
Dry obturator
The positioning of the float and the internal parts is such that the
water never reaches the obturator itself. This prevents faults
caused by the infiltration of impurities present in the fluid.
- Series 561 shut off valves are available

for the 3/8 and 1/2 sizes.
- The anti suction valve code 562200,
is available for all air vents in the
ROBOCAL series.
Series 5024
Automatic air vent. 1/4 M (or 3/8 M) threaded connection. Body and cover in brass. Obturator in silicone
rubber. Max. working temperature 115C. Max. working pressure 10 bar. Max. venting pressure 4 bar. Float with
anti rotation and anti vibration system. Horizontal discharge.
Series 5025
Automatic air vent complete with automatic shut-off valve. Threaded connection 3/8" M. Body and cover in brass.
Obturator in silicone rubber. Max. working temperature 110C. Max. working pressure 10 bar. Max. venting
pressure 4 bar. Float with anti rotation and anti vibration system. Horizontal discharge.
Series 5026
Automatic air vent. Threaded connection 3/8 M (o 1/2 M). Body and cover in brass. Obturator in silicone
rubber. Max. working temperature 115C. Max. working pressure 10 bar. Max. venting pressure 6 bar. Float with
anti rotation and anti vibration system. Vertical discharge.
Series 5027
Automatic air vent complete with automatic shut-off valve. Threaded connection 3/8" M. Body and cover in brass.
Obturator in silicone rubber. Max. working temperature 110C. Max. working pressure 10 bar. Max. venting
pressure 6 bar. Float with anti rotation and anti vibration system. Vertical discharge.
CALEFFI
Thermostatic radiator valves
CALEFFI
series 220
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01034/05 GB
Function
Thermostatic valves are typically used for regulating the fluid flow
to the radiators of central heating systems.
They are provided with a regulating element which automatically
controls the opening of the valve to keep the ambient temperature
of the room where they are installed constant at the set value. This
prevents unwanted temperature rises and achieves considerable
energy savings.
These valves have a special tailpiece with rubber hydraulic seal,
permitting quick, safe connection to the radiator without the use of
additional sealing materials.
Product range
VALVES:
For steel pipes:
Series
Series
Series
Series
220
221
224
225
Angled thermostatic radiator valve

Straight thermostatic radiator valve
Reverse thermostatic radiator valve
Double angled thermostatic radiator valve
Sizes 3/8, 1/2, 3/4 (*)

Sizes 3/8, 1/2, 3/4 (*)
Sizes 3/8, 1/2
Sizes 3/8, 1/2 Rh and 3/8, 1/2 Lh
For plastic and copper pipes:

Series 222 Angled thermostatic radiator valve
Series 223 Straight thermostatic radiator valve
Series 227 Reverse thermostatic radiator valve
Sizes 1/2 radiator x 23 p.1,5 piping

THERMOSTATIC CONTROL HEADS

Series 200 Thermostatic control head with built-in sensor with liquid-filled element
Series 201 Thermostatic control head with remote sensor with liquid-filled element
Series 203 Thermostatic control head with contact probe for fluid temperature limitation
Series 209 Tamper-proof and antitheft cap for use in public places
* 3/4 with tailpiece without rubber seals
Control adjustment scale, 200/201 series
Technical specification of valve bodies

- Material: -
Regulating scale 0-5 corresponding to 0-28C

Regulating scale 0-5 corresponding to 0-28C
Graduated scale 20-50C, 40-90C
For control head 200 series
Body:
Obturator stem:
stainless steel
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
ABS (RAL 9010)
0C
7C
12C
234
16C
20C
24C
5
28C
Medium:
30%
Max differential pressure with control fitted:
1 bar
10 bar
Temperature range:
5100C
Technical specification of control heads 200/201 series
Technical specification of control heads 203 series
Scale of adjustment:
Setting temperature range:
Frost protection cut-in:
Length of capillary, 201 series:
05
028C
7C
50C
2m
Max sensor temperature:

Max pocket pressure:
Length of capillary:
- code 203502
- code 203702
2050C
4090C
100C
10 bar
2m
Dimensions
LH version
2 3 4
B
E
220302 + 200001 3/8
3/8
48
48
20
100
225322 + 200001 3/8
3/8
48
51
25
104
220402 + 200001 1/2
1/2
48
52,5
23
100
225422 + 200001 1/2
1/2
48
57
30
104
220500 + 200001 3/4
3/4
48
62
26
100
Code
2 3 4
Code
Code
200001 30 p. 1,5
80
48
C
C
2 3 4
Code
D
A
221302 + 200001 3/8
3/8
48
48
26
104
221402 + 200001 1/2
1/2
48
52,5
29
104
221500 + 200001 3/4
3/4
48
62
35
104
Code
2 3 4
2 3 4
Code
222402 + 200001 1/2 23 p.1,5
201000 30 p. 1,5
C
48
80
48
33
95
52,5 20,5 100
A
D
2 3 4
2 3 4
2 3 4
224302 + 200001 3/8
3/8
48
35
45
104
224402 + 200001 1/2
1/2
48
40
51
104
RH version
Code
223402 + 200001 1/2 23 p.1,5
203502 30 p. 1,5
80
48
11
158
203702 30 p. 1,5
80
48
9,5
134
Code
Code
48
52,5
24
104
A
B
1 2
2 3 4
2 3 4
B
D
Code
225312 + 200001 3/8
3/8
48
51
25
104
225412 + 200001 1/2
1/2
48
57
30
104
Code
227402 + 200001 1/2 23 p.1,5
48
37
49,5 104
Code
475002
1/2
13
187
11,5
475003
1/2
13
187
10
of
Valve closed
2
Details are given in accordance with the specification in standard

UNI EN 215: 1990.
The thermostatic valve control head is a

proportional temperature regulator,
consisting of bellows containing liquid.
Thermostatic valves with angled connections 220 series, with

straight connections 221 series for steel pipe and thermostatic
valves with angled connections 222 series and with straight
connections 223 series for copper pipe (*); with thermostatic
control head 200 or 201 series
p (mm w.g.)
3/8" 1/2"
p (kPa)
3/4"
3000
2000
1000
10
s-1K
500
200
100
20
0,2
10
0,1
500
2000
0,5
1000
50
200
100
50
Valve open
2
30
20
10
When the ambient temperature

increases, the consequent build-up in
pressure causes an expansion in
volume in the bellows, which, in turn,
dilate. When the temperature falls, the
reverse takes place; the bellows
contract due to the effect of the thrust
generated by the return spring. The
axial movement of the sensitive
element is trasmitted to the valve
obturator through the connecting
spindle, thus regulating the flow of
liquid to the heat emitter.
Hydraulic charateristics
20
Operating
principle
G (l/h)
p (kPa)
3/4"
30
20
1000
10
s-2K
500
200
100
0,1
500
2000
0,2
10
1000
20
200
0,5
100
50
10
The control stem is stainless steel with EPDM O-Ring double seal.
This means that the upper part of the control device can be
replaced even when the system is in operation.
The obturator is shaped in such a way as to optimise the fluid-dynamic
characteristics of the valve during the progressive opening and
closing actions in thermostatic operation. The large passage
between seat and obturator causes reduced pressure drops in
manual use.
3/8" 1/2"
3000
2000
50
Valve
p (mm w.g.)
20
G (l/h)
Valves with angled connections

Code
Kv (m3/h)
Proportional band (K)
Size
220302
3/8
220402/222402 1/2
3/4
220500
1,5
Kvs
0,32
0,34
0,40
0,50
0,52
0,63
0,60
0,64
0,81
0,86
0,90
1,09
2,29
2,39
3,19
Size
Nominal flow
(l/h)
Obturator
autority
Max diff. press.

(bar)
3/8
220302
220402/222402 1/2
3/4
220500
180
180 (170*)
240
0,92
0,92
0,93
0,1
0,1
0,1
Code
* With control head 201 series
Valves with straight connections

Code
3/8
221302
221402/223402 1/2
3/4
221500
connection thread has a specially shaped
rubber ring. This system guarantees the
hydraulic seal with no need for further
sealing materials, such as PTFE tapes
etc.
Code
Kv (m3/h)
Size
Size
3/8
221302
221402/223402 1/2
3/4
221500
1,5
Kvs
0,28
0,32
0,43
0,45
0,50
0,63
0,59
0,67
0,82
0,77
0,86
1,05
1,05
1,52
2,20
Nominal flow
(l/h)
Obturator
autority
Max diff. press.

(bar)
180
180
240
0,60
0,60
0,86
0,1
0,1
0,1
Kv = Volume flow in m3/h producing pressure drop 1 bar

Kvs = Kv with valve totaly open
Thermostatic valves with reverse connections 224 series

for steel pipe and 227 (*) series for copper and plastic pipe,
with thermostatic control head 200 or 201 series
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
3/8" 1/2"
3000
2000
1000
Thermostatic valves with double angled connections 225

series for steel pipe with thermostatic control head 200 or 201
series
p (mm w.g.)
30
20
3000
2000
p (kPa)
3/8" 1/2"
30
20
10
1000
500
500
200
200
100
100
s-1K
10
s-1K
G (l/h)
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
3/8" 1/2"
3000
2000
2000
1000
500
100
10
1000
100
200
0,1
50
0,2
10
20
20
0,1
2000
0,2
10
500
20
200
0,5
50
50
20
0,5
10
50
G (l/h)
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
3/8" 1/2"
30
20
3000
2000
10
1000
500
500
200
200
100
100
1000
s-2K
30
20
10
s-2K
G (l/h)
Valves with reverse connections
2000
1000
500
200
100
1000
100
50
0,1
20
0,2
10
10
20
0,1
2000
0,2
10
500
20
200
0,5
50
50
20
0,5
10
50
G (l/h)
Valves with double angled connections
(not to HD 1215-2)
Kv (m3/h)
Code
Size
1
1,5
Kvs
224302
224402
227402
3/8
1/2
1/2
0,36
0,37
0,37
0,48
0,51
0,51
0,57
0,63
0,63
0,66
0,82
0,82
0,93
1,39
1,39
Code
Size
Nominal flow
(l/h)
Obturator
authority
Max diff. press.

(bar)
224302
224402
227402
3/8
1/2
1/2
180
180
180
0,65
0,93
0,93
0,1
0,1
0,1
Kv (m3/h)
Code
Size
1
1,5
Kvs
2253.2
2254.2
3/8
1/2
0,34
0,35
0,46
0,52
0,58
0,60
0,75
0,83
0,96
1,40
Code
Size
Nominal flow
(l/h)
Obturator
authority
Max diff. press.

(bar)
2253.2
2254.2
3/8
1/2
180
180
0,60
0,80
0,1
0,1
(*) Certification
System sizing
Caleffi valves 220, 221 series sizes 3/8, 1/2, 3/4 and 224, 225
series sizes 3/8, 1/2, in combination with control heads 200
and 201 series, are approved to standard UNI EN 215: 1990.
For correct system sizing, the valves are normally selected by

identifying the pressure drop in accordance with the flow on
diagrams s-2K as above (regulation with proportional band of 2K).
Additional information available on request.
Remote sensor control
Thermostatic controls should be installed in the horizontal

position.
The use of the thermostatic

head with remote sensor
requires installation of the
latter in accordance with the
dimensions shown in the
diagram.
CALEFFI
Installation
CALEFFI
1
2 3
1,5 m
CALEFFI
1
3
3
4
10 cm
The sensitive element of the thermostatic control head must

not be sited in niches, alcoves, behind curtains or directly
exposed to sunlight, any of which would falsify the readings.
Tamper-proof and antitheft cap

The thermostat control can be protected
against tampering and theft by mounting
the cover (code 209000) on the knob as
shown in the figure at side.
Before fitting the thermostatic

control head, turn the control knob
to the number 5 position.
4
The cover is fastened with two screws with

special heads that can only be tightened or
loosened by means of the appropriate
wrench. (code 209001).
5
0
Locking and restricting the thermostat control temperature

3. Re-lock the
ring. The valve
will now have a
temperature
range restriction
from 0 to the set
value.
3. Re-lock the
ring. The valve
will now be
locked at the set
temperature.
2. Turn the knob

to the new
maximum open
position required
(e.g. Pos.3).
Turn the ring
anti-clockwise
up to the stop.
1. Turn the knob

to the fully open
position (Pos.5).
unlock the ring,
pressing it fully
towards the valve
body.
3. Re-lock the
ring. The valve
will now no
longer have any
temperature
1. Turn the knob to

the fully open
position (Pos.5).
unlock the ring,
pressing it fully
towards the valve
body.
2. Position the
valve at the
required
temperature
and turn the ring
clockwise up to
the stop.
1. Using a
fully towards the
valve body.
2. Turn the knob

to the fully open
position and the
ring anti-clockwise,
up to the stop.
The RESET arrows
will match up.
Series 220
Thermostatic valve for radiators suitable for thermo-electric and thermostatic control heads. Angled connections for steel pipes
3/8, 1/2 and 3/4. Radiator connection 3/8 and 1/2 M with tailpiece provided with EPDM seal, 3/4 with tailpiece without seal.
Brass body. Chrome plated. Control knob in ABS white RAL 9010. Double seal on control stem with EPDM O-Rings. Maximum
Series 221
Thermostatic valve for radiators suitable for thermo-electric and thermostatic control heads. Straight connections for steel pipes
3/8, 1/2 and 3/4. Radiator connection 3/8 and 1/2 M with tailpiece provided with EPDM seal, 3/4 with tailpiece without seal.
Brass body. Chrome plated. Control knob in ABS white RAL 9010. Double seal on control stem with EPDM O-Rings. Maximum
Series 222
Thermostatic valve for radiators suitable for thermo-electric and thermostatic control heads. Angled connections for copper and
single and multilayer plastic pipes 23 p1,5 M. Radiator connection 1/2 M with tailpiece provided with EPDM seal. Brass body.
Chrome plated. Control knob in ABS white RAL 9010. Double seal on control stem with EPDM O-Rings. Maximum working
Series 223
Thermostatic valve for radiators suitable for thermo-electric and thermostatic control heads. Straight connections for copper and
single and multilayer plastic pipes 23 p1,5 M. Radiator connection 1/2 M with tailpiece provided with EPDM seal. Brass body.
Series 224
Thermostatic valve for radiators suitable for thermo-electric and thermostatic control heads. Reverse connections for steel pipes
3/8 and 1/2 F. Radiator connection 3/8 and 1/2 M with tailpiece provided with EPDM seal. Brass body. Chrome plated.
Control knob in ABS white RAL 9010. Double seal on control stem with EPDM O-Rings. Maximum working temperature 100C.
Series 225
Thermostatic valve for radiators suitable for thermo-electric and thermostatic control heads. Double angled connections for
steel pipes 3/8 and 1/2 F. Radiator connection 3/8 and 1/2 M, LH or RH with tailpiece provided with EPDM seal. Brass body.
Series 227
Thermostatic valve for radiators suitable for thermo-electric and thermostatic control heads. Reverse connections for copper
and single and multilayer plastic pipes 23 p1,5 M. Radiator connection 1/2 M with tailpiece provided with EPDM seal. Brass
body. Chrome plated. Control knob in ABS white RAL 9010. Double seal on control stem with EPDM O-Rings. Maximum working
Series 200
Thermostatic control head for thermostatic and convertible radiator valves. Sensor incorporated with liquid-filled element.
Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Graduated scale from 0 to 5 corresponding to a temperature range of 0 to 28C,
with possibility of temperature restriction and locking. Frost protection cut-in at 7C.
Series 201
Thermostatic control head for thermostatic and convertible radiator valves. Remote sensor incorporated with liquid-filled
element. Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Graduated scale from 0 to 5 corresponding to a temperature range of 0 to 28C,
with possibility of temperature restriction and locking. Frost protection cut-in at 7C.
Series 203
Thermostatic control head with contact probe, for fluid temperature restriction. Setting temperature range 2050C (4090C).
Maximum sensor temperature 100C. Numbered scale, with possibility of temperature restriction and locking. Length of
capillary 2 m.
Series 209
Tamper-proof and antitheft cap for thermostatic control head 200 series, for use in public places.
CALEFFI
Couplings for polyethylene pipe
CALEFFI
series DECA
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01037/03 GB
Function
DECA couplings, which are supplied in brass for diameters up to
63 mm and in cast iron for larger sizes, are used for connecting
polyethylene piping.
As proof of the high standard of quality, the threaded DECA
connections (up to 63) have DVGW and SVGW approval, which
means that they are approved for use in Germany and Switzerland.
SVGW
SSIGE
Product range
Series 860 Female coupling in brass
Sizes 20x1/2, 21x1/2, 25x3/4, 27x3/4, 25x1, 32x1, 34x1, 40x1 1/4, 50x1 1/2, 63x2
Series 860 Female coupling in cast iron
Sizes 75x2 1/2, 90x3, 110x4
Series 861 Male coupling in brass
Sizes 20x1/2, 21x1/2, 25x3/4, 27x3/4, 25x1, 32x1, 34x1, 40x1 1/4, 50x1 1/2, 63x2
Series 861 Male coupling in cast iron
Sizes 75x2 1/2, 90x3, 110x4
Series 862 Male reduced coupling in brass
Sizes 20x3/8, 25x1/2, 32x3/4, 40x1, 50x1 1/4, 63x1 1/2
Series 863 Sleeve coupling in brass
Sizes 20, 21, 25, 27, 32, 34, 40, 50, 63
Series 863 Sleeve coupling in cast iron
Sizes 75, 90, 110, 125
Series 864 Tee coupling in brass
Sizes 20, 21, 25, 27, 32, 34, 40, 50, 63
Series 865 Reduced male-female tee coupling, in brass
Sizes 20x1/2Mx3/8F, 25x3/4Mx1/2F, 32x1Mx3/4F,
40x1 1/4Mx1F, 50x1 1/2Mx1 1/4F, 63x2Mx1 1/2F
Series 866 Elbow coupling in brass
Sizes 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
Series 867 Male elbow coupling in brass
Sizes 20x1/2, 25x3/4, 32x1, 40x1 1/4, 50x1 1/2, 63x2
Series 868 Female elbow coupling in brass
Sizes 20x1/2, 25x3/4, 32x1, 40x1 1/4, 50x1 1/2, 63x2
Series 869 Female elbow coupling with wall fixing in brass
Sizes 20x1/2, 25x1/2, 25x3/4
Series 870 Sleeve coupling for repairs
Sizes 25, 32, 40, 50
Series 871 Female coupling with ball valve
Sizes 25x1/2, 32x3/4
Series 875 Female reduced coupling in brass
Sizes 25x1/2, 32x3/4, 40x1
Series 876 Female union coupling in brass
Sizes 25x1/2, 32x3/4, 40x1
Series 888 Flanged coupling PN 10 in cast iron
Sizes 75xDN 65, 90xDN 80, 110xDN100, 125xDN 100
Brass couplings
Cast iron coupling
Materials
Body:
Lock nut:
Seal:
Bolts and nuts:
Brass EN 12165 CW617N

Brass EN 12165 CW617N
NBR
//
GG 25
GG 25
NBR
Stainless steel
Performance
Max working temperature:
Medium:
16 bar
40C
Water
10 bar
40C
Water
Connections:
See product range
See product range
Dimensions
C
C
Code
860420
860421
860525
860527
860625
860632
860634
860740
860850
860963
A
20
21
25
27
25
32
34
40
50
63
B
47,5
47,5
49,5
49,5
56
56
56
64,5
66,5
74,5
C
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
A
Code
861075
861090
861110
A
75
90
110
B
130
130
140
C
2 1/2
3
4
Code
863075
863090
863110
863125
A
75
90
110
125
B
180
180
190
205
C
B
C
A
75
90
110
B
120
120
125
C
2 1/2
3
4
A
20
25
32
40
50
63
B
47
51,5
56,5
67
72
75,5
B
87
87
93
93
108
108
129
145
155
C
46
46
49
49
56,5
56,5
66,5
75
84
A
B
50,5
46
53
49
59,5
59,5
55
69
72,5
79,5
C
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Code
863020
863021
863025
863027
863032
863034
863040
863050
863063
A
20
21
25
27
32
34
40
50
63
B
66,5
66,5
68,5
68,5
76,5
76,5
89
95
101,5
B
A
20
21
25
27
25
32
34
40
50
63
A
20
21
25
27
32
34
40
50
63
D
E
Code
864420
864421
864525
864627
864632
864634
864740
864850
864963
Code
861420
861421
861525
861527
861625
861632
861634
861740
861850
861963
C
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
Code
860075
860090
860110
Code
862320
862425
862532
862640
862750
862863
Code
865020
865025
865032
865040
865050
865063
A
20
25
32
40
50
63
B
87
93
108
129
145
155
C
31,5
37
41
49
56
68
D
E
1/2 3/8
3/4 1/2
1
3/4
1 1/4 1
1 1/2 1 1/4
2 1 1/2
6
A
Code
866020
866025
866032
866040
866050
866063
A
20
25
32
40
50
63
B
48,5
53,5
60,5
73,5
80,5
91,5
28
39
C
Code
A
B
D
869420 20 48,5 1/2 25
869425 25 53,5 1/2 26
869525 25 53,5 3/4 26
F
E
20 41,5
25 46,5
25 46,5
Code
875425
875532
875640
A
25
32
40
B
49
55
66
C
1/2
3/4
1
B
59,5
61
64,5
70
C
3/4
3/4
1
1
B
145
135
135
135
C
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
DN 100
50
Code
867020
867025
867032
867040
867050
867063
A
20
25
32
40
50
63
B
37
42
48
58
64
74
C
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
D
30,5
37,5
43
51,5
57
69,5
Code
870025
870032
870040
870050
A
25
32
40
50
Code
876520
876525
876625
876632
B
125
127
138
143
A
20
25
25
32
A
D
Code
868020
868025
868032
868040
868050
868063
A
20
25
32
40
50
63
B
48,5
53,5
60,5
73,5
80,5
91,5
C
C
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
D
26,5
28
32
38
42,5
67
Code
A
871425 25
871532 32
B
73
79
C
49
52
D
1/2
3/4
Code
888075
888090
888110
888125
A
75
90
110
125
Accessories
Ease of use
DECA series polyethylene
pipe couplings are extremely
practical, as they do not
have to be taken apart
when connecting to the
piping (see example at foot
of page).
Series 886 reducer
Repair joints
Series 870 sleeve coupling allows piping connections to be
made with a maximum space between ends of 50 mm.
Thanks to the absence of internal ledges, the pipe can slide
freely.
Code
886022
886032
886043
886054
886065
Series 887 pipe stiffener
Series
PN 10
887120
887223
887330
887437
887546
887658
20 x 2
25 x 2,3
32 x 3
40 x 3,7
50 x 4,6
63 x 5,8
For REHAU
pipes
887128
887235
20 x 2,8
25 x 3,5
max.
50
Strength
Caleffi DECA couplings are not affected by frost, as any
deformations are absorbed by the pipe itself. In addition, in
the case of ground movement or excessive loads in the
connection area, there is no risk of breakage or
disconnection.
Preparation of the pipe
from 25 to 20
from 32 to 25
from 40 to 32
from 50 to 40
from 63 to 50
Instructions for the correct assembly of couplings
90
do
Insert the pipe into the

coupling with the nut
slackened.
Do not cut
at an angle
Cut
at 90
do not
Dismantle the coupling

and slide the various
components onto the
pipe.
Remove any
external burrs
Series 860
Female coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 20 x 1/2" F (from 20 x 1/2" F to 63 x 2" F).
Brass body. NBR O-Ring seal. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Maximum working temperature
40C. For use with water.
Series 860
Female coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 75 x 2 1/2" F (from 75 x 2 1/2" F to 110 x 4" F).
Body in GG 25 cast iron. Polyacetal resin ring. NBR seal. Stainless steel bolts and nuts. Maximum
working pressure 10 bar. Maximum working temperature 40C. For use with water.
Series 861
Male coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 20 x 1/2" M (from 20 x 1/2" M to 63 x 2" M).
Series 861
Male coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 75 x 2 1/2" M (from 75 x 2 1/2" M to 110 x 4" M).
Body in GG 25 cast iron. Polyacetal resin ring. NBR seal. Stainless steel bolts and nuts. Maximum
working pressure 10 bar. Maximum working temperature 40C. For use with water.
Series 862
Male reduced coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 20 x 3/8 M (from 20 x 3/8 M to
63 x 1 1/2 M). Brass body. NBR O-Ring seal. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Maximum
working temperature 40C. For use with water.
Series 863
Sleeve coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 20 (from 20 to 63). Brass body. NBR O-Ring
seal. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Maximum working temperature 40C. For use with water.
Series 863
Sleeve coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 75 (from 75 to 125). Body in GG 25 cast
iron. Polyacetal resin ring. NBR seal. Stainless steel bolts and nuts. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Maximum working temperature 40C. For use with water.
Series 864
Tee coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 20 (from 20 to 63). Brass body. NBR O-Ring
Series 865
Reduced male-female tee coupling, for polyethylene pipe. Connections 20 x 1/2" M x 3/8" F
(from 20 x 1/2" M x 3/8" F to 63 x 2" M x 1 1/2" F ). Brass body. NBR O-Ring seal. Maximum working
pressure 16 bar. Maximum working temperature 40C. For use with water.
Series 866
Elbow coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 20 (from 20 to 63). Brass body. NBR O-Ring
Series 867
Male elbow coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 20 x 1/2" M (from 20 x 1/2" M to 63 x 2" M).
Series 868
Female elbow coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 20 x 1/2" F (from 20 x 1/2" F to 63 x 2" F). Brass
body. NBR O-Ring seal. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Maximum working temperature 40C. For use with water.
Series 869
Female elbow coupling, with wall fixing, for polyethylene pipe. Connections 20 x 1/2" F (from 20 x 1/2" F to
25 x 3/4" F). Brass body. NBR O-Ring seal. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Maximum working
temperature 40C. For use with water.
Series 870
Sleeve coupling, for repairs, for polyethylene pipe. Connections 25 (from 25 to 50). Brass body.
NBR O-Ring seal. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Maximum working temperature 40C. Maximum space
between the ends of the pipes to be joined 50 mm. For use with water.
Series 871
Female coupling with ball valve, for polyethylene pipe. Connections 25 x 1/2" F ( 25 x 1/2" F and 32 x 3/4" F).
Brass body. NBR O-Ring seal. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Maximum working temperature 40C. For
use with water.
Series 875
Female reduced coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 25 x 1/2" F (from 25 x 1/2" F to 40 x 1" F ). Brass
Series 876
Female union coupling for polyethylene pipe. Connections 20 x 3/4" F (from 20 x 3/4" F to 32 x 1" F). Brass
Series 888
Flanged coupling PN 10 for polyethylene pipe. Connections 75 x DN 65 (from 75 x DN 65 to 125 x DN 125).
Body in GG 25 cast iron. Polyacetal resin ring. NBR seal. Stainless steel bolts and nuts. Maximum working
pressure 10 bar. Maximum working temperature 40C. For use with water.
Series 886
Coupling reducer for polyethylene pipe from 25 to 20 (available: reducers from 25 to 20 up to 63 to 50).
CALEFFI
Flow rate metering device
CALEFFI
683 series
01040/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
The flow rate metering device is used to measure the flow rate
within a circuit. When used for central heating purposes, therefore,
it allows monitoring of the thermal power supplied to the systems;
in water treatment systems and industrial chemical or textile plants
etc., it can be used to continuously monitor the water flowing
through the circuits. This particular series of devices is equipped
with quick-fit ports for easier differential pressure measurement.
Product range
683 series Flow rate metering device, threaded connections
683 series Flow rate metering device, flanged connections, to be coupled with counterflanges PN 6
683 series Flow rate metering device, flanged connections, to be coupled with counterflanges PN 16
sizes 3/4 and 1

sizes DN 32DN 100
sizes DN 125DN 200
series
Materials
Body:
Gaskets:
Screws:
Nuts:
Pressure test ports:
Pressure test port seals:
Performance
Medium:
Minimum p for measurement:
Connections
Main:
Pressure test ports:
683 threaded
683 flanged

EPDM
painted steel
asbestos free NBR fibre
steel
steel
EPDM

50%
10 bar

50%
6 bar (DN 32DN 100),
16 bar (DN 125DN 200)
-5110C
0,01 bar
-5110C
0,01 bar
3/4, 1 F
counterflange EN 1092-1 PN 6 (DN 32DN 100)

counterflange EN 1092-1 PN 16 (DN 125DN 200)
1/4 F
1/4 F
Dimensions
E
C
CALEFFI
E
A
3/4"
1"
B
23
29
C
32
32
D
51
54
E
78
90
Mass(kg)
0,30
0,43
Code
683030
683040
683050
683060
683080
683100
683120
683150
683170
683200
DN
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
175
200
Operating principle
D
74
77
83
90,5
101
106
145
160
175
185
57324
A)
The 683 series flow rate metering device operation is based on the
Venturi effect. The metering device contains a diaphragm that, by
restricting the cross-section of the channel, speeds up the medium
and generates an increased p (for measurement) at the ends, in
order to guarantee precise flow rate metering. Each differential
pressure value (measured at the ends of the diaphragm) has a
corresponding accurate flow rate value, with the diaphragm Kv
noted.
The total head loss for the metering device is, however, very low
since the length of the pipe downstream from the diaphragm allows
the medium to slow down and increase the pressure again.
C
64
71
88
110
140
182
75
80
85
100
C)
p (kPa)
'h
h = 'h sen
p = 12,6 h
E
205
230
307
390
451
530
275
300
325
350
F
120
130
140
160
190
210
250
285
315
340
Mass(kg)
5,55
6,27
7,56
10,43
16,03
20,06
48,00
61,00
74,00
96,00
B)
aria
D)
Code
683005
683006
p
(for mesurement)
E)
p (total head loss)
Differential pressure measurement

The differential pressure can be measured using any pressure
gauge or meter capable of operating within the range 010 kPa
(01000 mm w.g.; see adjacent figure). Whichever method or
instrument is used, the air must be vented from the connection
pipes to prevent errors when reading the differential pressure
values.
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
Caleffi FLOMET electronic measuring station (130 series)

differential pressure gauges with dial
inclined U-shaped pressure gauges with mercury column
upturned U-shaped pressure gauges with water column
a transparent plastic hose (resistant to the static pressure of the
system), system water functioning as pressure gauge fluid, air
trapped in the hose acting as a separator.
Pressure
measurement
Automatic
reclosure
Flow rate monitoring can take place at any moment, without any of
the pipes being dismantled. The patented self-cleaning
single-casting diaphragm profile and the quick-fit pressure test
ports offer rapid and accurate differential pressure measurement.
Safety cap
Measuring
syringe
Seal element
Flow rate measurement
1000
I.S. UNITS
100
G = Flow rate in l/s

p = Differential pressure in kPa
water density () 1 kg/dm3
50
20
10
5
3
2
500
DN 200
DN 175
DN 150
DN 125
200
100
DN 100
50
DN 80
DN 65
20
DN 50
10
DN 40
DN 32
1"
0,5
3/4"
0,3
0,2
15
1000
(m3/h)
(l/s)
50
100
20
500
200
DN 125
DN 150
DN 175
DN 200
10
500
DN 100
100
DN 80
50
DN 65
200
2
DN 40
DN 50
20
50
10
0,5
2
3
5
10
100
200
500
0,2
0,3
0,5
0,5
1000
0,2
10
3/4"
p
(kPa) (mm w.g.)
1500
15
1"
DN 32
0,5
50
100
0,2
1500
p
(kPa) (mm w.g.)
0,5
1000
0,1
G= 0,129 p0,5
3/4
G= 0,229 p0,5
1
p
G= 0,337 p0,5
DN 32
G= 0,533 p0,5
DN 40
G= 0,989 p0,5
DN 50
G= 1,654 p0,5
DN 65
G= 2,438 p0,5
DN 80
DN 100
G= 4,029 p0,5
DN 125
G= 9,032 p0,5
p
DN 150
G= 11,290 p0,5
DN 175
G= 15,806 p0,5
0,5
DN 200
G= 22,580 p0,5
G= 0,129 p
3/4
G= 0,229 p0,5
1
G= 0,337 p0,5
DN 32
p = f (G)
le (m)
Kv
(1
kPa)
G= 0,533 p0,5
DN 40
p
=
41,8769 G2
12
7
3/4
0,154
G= 0,989 p0,5
DN
50
Kv 1
coefficients,
localised losses
lengths,
p
=
13,3637
G2
10
8and equivalent
0,273
G= 1,654 p0,5
DN 65
head
losses 0,403
p = 6,1579 G2
13
15
DN
G= 2,438 p0,5
DN 32
80
p = 2,4652 G2
10
13
DN 100
40 p 0,637
DN
G= 4,029 p0,5
p = 0,7153 G2
7
14
DN 125
50
1,182
DN
G= 9,032 p0,5
I.S.
UNITS
p = 0,2557 G2
7
18
DN 150
65
1,978
DN
G= 11,290 p0,5
2
p
6
20
DN
80
2,914
0,5 = 0,1178 G
DN 175
15,806
pl/s
G G=
= Flow
rate in
2
p
=
0,04142
G
6
27
DN
100
4,913
0,5
DN 200
22,580 p
pG=
= Differential
pressure
in kPa 2
p = 0,001 G
0,7
5
DN 125
23,290
water density () 1 kg/dm3
p = 0,001 G2
DN 150
29,144
1
8
p = 0,6 10-3 G2
DN 175
40,822
0,9
9
p = f (G)
le (m)
Kv (1 kPa)
2
DN 200
58,352
p = 0,293 10-3 G
0,7
9
p = 41,8769 G2
12
7
3/4
0,154
p = 13,3637 G2
10
8
1
0,273
p = 6,1579 G2
13
15
DN 32
0,403
p = 2,4652 G2
10
13
DN 40
0,637
p = 0,7153 G2
7
14
DN 50
1,182
p = 0,2557 G2
7
18
DN 65
1,978
p = 0,1178 G2
6
20
DN 80
2,914
p
= 0,04142 G2
6
27
DN 100
4,913
p = 0,001 G2
0,7
5
DN 125
23,290
p = 0,001 G2
DN 150
29,144
1
8
p = 0,6 10-3 G2
DN 175
40,822
0,9
9
DN 200
58,352
p = 0,293 10-3 G2
0,7
9
(m3/h)
0,1
(l/s)
Correction for liquids with different density
Installation
The following notes apply to liquids with viscosity 3E (water

and glycol mixtures, for example).
If using liquids with a density different to that of water at 20C
( = 1 kg/dm3), the head loss value p measured may be
corrected using the formula:
p = p/
(1)
p = reference head loss
p = measured head loss
= liquid density in kg/dm3
The value p is used when measuring flow rate G, using the
graphs or the formula (2):
where:
G = Kv
(2)
The metering device should be installed in the system during

the initial setup phase, observing the flow direction indicated
on its body and in accordance with the following instructions:
- installation on the return pipe, in a position where it can be
easily accessed for measurement purposes, with the
pressure test ports facing upwards in order to prevent
impurities from building up.
The return water temperature has fewer variations, which
increases measurement accuracy.
- installation on a straight length of piping, either horizontally
or vertically but not turned upside down, well away from
twists or devices which may disrupt flow, particularly at the
inlet, during measurement.
Example of correction for liquid with different density

Metering device DN 100
Liquid density ' = 1,1 kg/dm3
Head loss measured on Venturi p = 3 kPa
Let us use formula (1):
Reference head loss p = 3/1,1 = 2,72 kPa
This value is marked on the x-axis of the graph corresponding
to the p measured with the Venturi (green line); the point at
which this value meets the line for the DN 100 metering
device
indicates
the
corresponding
flow
rate
G = 7 l/s on the y-axis. Similarly, by using formula (2):
G' = 4028,96 10-3
2,72
= 6,64 l/s
Sizing method
The size of the metering device should be selected so that,
when operating at the design flow rate, it has a
corresponding minimum measured p of 100 mm w.g.
(1 kPa). Sometimes, to achieve this condition, it may be
necessary to use a metering device with a diameter which is
different to that of the pipe. In this case, a tapered fitting
should be used (as illustrated in the figure below).
In thermal installations, the metering device can be used in

supply systems with several risers, branches or zones, to
monitor the value of the individual flow rates or wherever
metering of heating costs is required. The rapid flow rate
monitoring keeps the system at optimal running conditions,
making it possible to identify balancing variations caused by
lockshield valves or other balancing and regulation devices,
or by tampering. The application diagrams at the end of the
brochure indicate the optimal points for flow rate monitoring:
1) installation on the boiler circuit,
2) installation on each riser, for system balancing monitoring,
3) installation on the horizontal sections of supply columns, as
an alternative to point 2,
4) installation on each zone, for balancing throughout the
system.
min.1,5 d
d
min.1,5 d
Accessories
100
100
Pair of fast-plug pressure/temperature test

ports.
Their special construction allows rapid and
accurate measurements, guaranteeing a
perfect hydraulic seal.
Cap clamp available in the following colours:
- Red for upstream pressure test port.
- Green for downstream pressure test port.
Pair of fittings with fast-plug syringe for

connection of pressure test ports to
measuring instruments.
Max. working pressure: 10 bar.
Max. working temperature: 110C.
Code
100010
Brass body.
EPDM seals.
Working temperature range: -5130C
130 FLOMET
Flow rate and differential pressure electronic
measuring station. Supplied complete with
shut-off and connection fittings. Can be
used for checking the correct operation of
AUTOFLOW devices.
Measurement range: 0,05200 kPa.
Differential Pmax: 250 kPa.
Code
Code
100000
130000
130001
Supply voltage 230 V (ac)

Battery operated
Central heating system
P
T
Tmax 120C
Pmax 10 bar
Tmax 105C
Pmax 10 bar
F
A
Riser and zone systems
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Shut-off valve
Zone valve
Expansion vessel
Ball valve
Pump
3-way cock
BALLSTOP
AUTOFLOW
Temperature gauge
Dirt separator
Inspection pocket
Temperature probe
Gas filter
Safety thermostat
Gas regulator
Temperature controller
Deaerator
A
Fuel shut-off valve
Pressure switch
Anti-vibration joint
Pocket
Flow switch
Backflow preventer
Safety valve
Y-strainer
683 series
Flow rate metering device. Threaded connections 3/4 and 1 F. Brass body. Brass pressure test ports. EPDM pressure test
port seals. Threaded connections 1/4 F for pressure test ports. Medium water, glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol
50%. Working temperature range -5110C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Minimum p for measurement 0,01 bar.
Complete with quick-fit pressure test ports.
683 series
Flow rate metering device. Flanged DN 32DN 200 connections. Painted steel body. Asbestos-free fibre NBR gaskets. Steel
screws. Steel nuts. Brass pressure test ports. EPDM pressure test port seals. Threaded connections 1/4 F for pressure test
ports. Flanged connections. Coupling with counterflanges EN 1092-1 DN 32DN 100, PN 6; DN 125DN 200, PN 16. Working
temperature range -5110C. Maximum working pressure 6 bar (DN 32DN 100), 16 bar (DN 125DN 200). Minimum p for
measurement 0,01 bar. Complete with fast-plug pressure test ports, counterflanges, bolts and gaskets.
130 series FLOMET
Flow rate and differential pressure electronic measuring station. Supplied complete with shut-off and connection fittings. It can
be used to check AUTOFLOW device operation falls within the working range. It can also be used to measure the flow rate
of series 131 and 135 balancing valves, and of the 683 series metering device. Measurement range 0,05200 kPa. Unit of
measurement can be selected from Pa, kPa, mmW, mW, inW, mbar, PSI. Maximum line pressure 16 bar. Maximum differential
pressure tolerated 250 kPa.
100 series
Pair of fast-plug pressure and temperature test ports. threaded connections 1/4 M. Brass body. EPDM internal elements.
Working temperature range -5130C. Maximum working pressure 30 bar.
100 series
Pair of fittings with fast-plug syringe. Threaded connection 1/4 F. Maximum working temperature 110C. Maximum working
pressure 10 bar.
CALEFFI
Automatic flow rate regulator

with stainless steel cartridge
CALEFFI
120 - 125 - 103 series
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01041/07 GB
Function
The Autoflow devices are automatic flow rate
regulators. They are used to keep the flow rate
constant, at the design value, in air conditioning and
plumbing system circuits.
They automatically balance the hydronic circuit by
ensuring the design flow rate to each terminal unit,
regardless of any change in the system working
conditions. The devices are available both as simple
flow regulator and complete with ball shut-off valve.
Product range
120 series Automatic flow rate regulator with steel cartridge and ball valve
125 series Automatic flow rate regulator with steel cartridge
103 series Automatic flow rate regulator with steel cartridge, flanged version
sizes 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 1 1/4 - 1 1/2 - 2

sizes 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 1 1/4 - 1 1/2 - 2 - 2 1/2
sizes DN 65 - 80 - 100 - 125 - 150 - 200 - 250 - 300 - 350
series
Materials
Body:
Autoflow cartridge:
Spring:
Seals:
Ball:
Ball seat:
Control stem seal:
Lever:
Pressure ports plugs:
Performance
Medium:
Maximum percentage glycol:
p range:
Flow rates:
Accuracy:
Connections
Pressure ports connections
120
125
103

stainless steel
stainless steel
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM + PTFE
special zinc plated steel

stainless steel
stainless steel
EPDM
cast iron ASTM A126-61T

stainless steel
stainless steel
asbestos free
quick-fit pressure test ports

50%

50%

50%
25 bar
0110C
25 bar
-20110C
16 bar
-20110C
7100 kPa; 14220 kPa; 35410 kPa

0,1215,5 m3/h
5%
7100 kPa; 14220 kPa; 35410 kPa

0,1226,5 m3/h
5%
14220 kPa; 35410 kPa

53850 m3/h
5%
1/22 F with union x F
1/22 1/2 F x F
DN 65350 flanged PN 16
EN1092-1
1/4 F
1/4 F
1/4 F
Dimensions
D
A
C
FI
LEF
CA
FFI
LE
CA
Code
A
120141 ... 1/2"
120151 ... 3/4"
120181 ... 1 1/2"
120191 ... 2"
B
C
156,5 52,5
159,5 52,5
253
84
253
84
D
50
50
88
88
E
100
100
140
140
F
Weight (kg)
1/4"
1,10
1/4"
1,10
1/2"
4,60
1/2"
4,60
C
52,5
52,5
105
105
133
B
101
106
177
176
230
Code
A
125141 ... 1/2"
125151 ... 3/4"
125181 ... 1 1/2"
125191 ...
2"
125101 ... 2 1/2
D
30
30
38,5
38,5
48,5
F
1/4"
1/4"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2
Weight (kg)
0,55
0,58
2,25
2,45
4,36
CA
LE
FF
I
CA
LE
FF
I
B
F
C
68
68
D
66
66
E
120
120
F
Weight (kg)
1/2"
2,30
1/2"
2,30
A
C
B
Code
A
218,5
120161 ... 1"
120171 ... 1 1/4" 220,5
D
B
Code
10311. ...
10321. ...
10331. ...
10341. ...
10351. ...
10361. ...
10371. ...
10381. ...
10391. ...
A
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
DN 125
DN 150
DN 200
DN 250
DN 300
DN 350
B
208
212
216
271
271
287
295
319
311
C
185
200
220
250
285
360
425
515
555
D
172
172
172
223
223
223
223
223
223
Weight (kg)
007,50
011,58
012,38
016,55
024,11
041,62
058,09
093,27
108,17
Code
A
125161 ...
1"
125171 ... 1 1/4"
B
140,5
148
C
102
102
D
33,5
33,5
F
1/2"
1/2"
Weight (kg)
1,02
1,16
Circuit balancing
DYNAMIC CIRCUIT BALANCING
Modern heating and air-conditioning systems have to guarantee a high level of thermal comfort with a low energy consumption. This means
supplying the system terminal emitters with the correct design flow rates, to produce balanced hydraulic circuits.
Unbalanced circuits
In
case
of
an
unbalanced circuit, the
hydraulic umbalance
between
emitters
creates areas with
temperatures which
are not uniform, and,
as a consequence,
problems with thermal
comfor t and higher
energy consumption.
Flow rate
50 %
17
140 %
22
24
180 %
Circuits balanced with manual valves

Traditionally, hydraulic
circuits are balanced
using
manual
calibration valves.
With these static-type
devices, such circuits
are difficult to balance
per fectly and have
operating limitations in
case of partial closure
by means of the
regulating valves. The
flow rate in the open
circuits does not
remain constant at
the nominal value.
Flow rate
Flow rate
100 %
100 %
140 %
Regulating
valve
0%
100 %
120 %
Manual valve
FULL LOAD
PARTIAL LOAD
Circuits balanced with Autoflow

Flow rate
Flow rate
100 %
100 %
CALEF
FI
CALEF
FI
100 %
0%
CALEF
FI
Regulating
valve
100 %
CALEF
FI
CALEF
FI
100 %
CALEF
FI
Autoflow balances the

hydraulic
circuit
automatically,
by
ensuring to each
ter minal emitter the
design flow rate.
Even in the case of
partial circuit closure
by means of the
regulating valves, the
flow rates in the open
circuits
remain
constant at the
nominal value. The
system
always
guarantees
the
greatest comfort and
the highest energy
savings.
Autoflow
FULL LOAD
PARTIAL LOAD
Autoflow devices
Function
The AUTOFLOW device has to guarantee a constant flow rate when its upstream/downstream pressure differential varies.
It is therefore necessary to refer to the p - flow rate diagram and to a basic diagram illustrating the operation methods and the relevant
variable effects.
Operating principle
The regulating element of these devices is composed of a cilinder and a piston with fixed and variable geometry orifices, through which the
fluid flows. The surface area of these orifices is governed by the piston movement when pushed by the flow. A specially calibrated spring
counteracts this movement.
Autoflows are high performance automatic regulators. They regulate selected flow rates within a very tight tolerance (approx. 5%) and offer a
wide range of operation.
Below the control range
In this case, the regulating piston

remains
fully
out
without
compressing the spring and gives
the medium the maximum free flow
area. In practice, the piston acts as
a fixed regulator and thus the flow
through the AUTOFLOW depends
solely on the differential pressure.
FLOW RATE
G0
0,07 bar/7 kPa

0,14 bar/14 kPa
0,35 bar/35 kPa
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
kv0,01=0,378G0 p range 7-100 kPa

kv0,01=0,267G0 p range 14-220 kPa
kv0,01=0,169G0 p range 35-410 kPa
1 bar/100 kPa
2,20 bar/220 kPa
4,10 bar/410 kPa
where G0 = nominal flow rate
Within the control range
FLOW RATE
Control range
G0
0,07 bar/7 kPa

0,14 bar/14 kPa
0,35 bar/35 kPa
Final p
Initial p
If the differential pressure is

contained within the control range,
the piston compresses the spring
and modulates the flow area to
maintain regular flow at the
nominal rate for which the
AUTOFLOW is calibrated.
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
1 bar/100 kPa
2,20 bar/220 kPa
4,10 bar/410 kPa
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
1 bar/100 kPa
2,20 bar/220 kPa
4,10 bar/410 kPa
Above the control range
In this case, the piston fully

compresses the spring and only
allows flow through the fixed
geometry orifice.
As in the first case above, the
piston acts as a fixed regulator. The
flow rate through the AUTOFLOW
thus depends solely on the
differential pressure.
FLOW RATE
G0
0,07 bar/7 kPa

0,14 bar/14 kPa
0,35 bar/35 kPa
p range 7-100 kPa

kv0,01=0,1G0
kv0,01=0,067G0 p range 14-220 kPa
kv0,01=0,049G0 p range 35-410 kPa
Selecting the control range or p range of the AUTOFLOW device

Autoflow devices are available with different control ranges, so as to satisfy a wide array of system requirements.
By definition, the control range is contained between two differential pressure values:
p range: p start p end
The choice must be made taking into account the following:

differential pressure at the start of the control range. This value must be added to the fixed loss of head in the circuit in the most
unfavourable conditions. In this case it is necessary to evaluate the available pump head.
differential pressure at the end of the control range. If this value is exceeded the Autoflow spring is fully compressed and the device no
longer performs any regulating action. It will be necessary to switch to a higher control range.
The following Autoflow control ranges are available.
7100 kPa
0,071 bar
Can be used in sealed circuits served by pumps with a limited head.

For example in small heating systems with wall-mounted boilers that have their own internal circulator.
14220 kPa
0,142,20 bar
Can be used in the majority of sealed systems.

The ample control range allows it to be inserted with a minimum addition of differential pressure, amounting to 14 kPa
(0.14 bar).
35410 kPa
0,354,10 bar
Can be used in open systems, for example in water distribution systems or with high level of available head,
for example in district heating systems. The high upper limit, 410 kPa (4,1 bar), makes proper operation possible within
the control range.
Sizing the circuit with Autoflow
Sizing the circuit containing Autoflow valves is particularly

easy to accomplish. As illustrated alongside by the example
diagrams, calculation of the loss of head in order to choose
the pump is made by referring to the hydraulically most
unfavourable circuit and by adding this value to the
minimum differential pressure required by the Autoflow. In
the example the circuits have the same nominal flow rate.
The Autoflow devices, located on intermediate circuits,
automatically absorb the excess differential pressure to
ensure the corresponding nominal flow rate.
As the regulating valves open or close, the Autoflow
repositions itself dynamically to maintain the nominal flow
rate (50% load = circuits 3, 5, 7, 8 closed).
For more detailed information on sizing a system with
Autoflow, please refer to the 2nd volume of the Handbooks
Caleffi and the technical bulletin Dynamic balancing of
hydronic circuits. They give theoretical calculations,
numerical examples and notes on the application of the
above-mentioned devices in circuits.
Regulating valve
Autoflow
Differential pressures (p)
p along the circuit (flow and return)

extra p absorbed by Autoflow
at 50% load
p absorbed by Autoflow
at 100% load
Pump H
minimum p required by Autoflow

p in branch circuit
at nominal flow rate
4
Terminal
Steel regulator
The flow rate regulator is made entirely of steel, suitable for use in airconditioning and plumbing systems.
It is fully compatible with the glycols and additives used in the
circuits.
Wide range of working pressures
The regulator is able to provide precise regulation of the flow rate
over a wide range of working pressures. It is factory calibrated to
keep the flow rate automatically within 5% of the set value.
For these reasons it can be used in system circuits both at zone
branching and directly at the terminal emitters.
Ball valve
The control stem of the ball valve is blow-proof and the reversible
closing lever is covered with vinyl. If there are any insulated pipes, it
can be changed with the extended lever series 117.
Replaceable cartridge
The internal regulator is assembled in the form of a one-piece
cartridge so as to permit easy removal from the body for inspection
or replacement.
FI
LEF
CA
Q
d.
01
ge
Ran
FI
LEF
CA
co
15
p
=
/h
kP
a
Pressure ports - checking flow rate

Known the device dynamic characteristics, it is sufficient to check
the differential pressure from upstream to downstream, using the
pressure provided ports (1) - (2).
If the differential pressure is contained within the control range
(range p) indicated on the data plate, then the through flow rate is
equal to the nominal value.
G
To take the measurement,
Range p
simply use a differential
GNominal
pressure gauge.
Series
100
snap-on
pressure test ports and a
Flomet 130 series electronic
p
measuring device can be
used as accessories.
p (kPa)
Cartridge plug
The cartridge plug (3)
contains a connection that
allows the use of a circuit
drain valve (4).
2
1
Autoflow, flanged version
This is supplied equipped with flanges EN 1092-1 PN 16 (on request
PN 25), gaskets and quick-fit pressure test ports.
3
FI
LEF
CA
18
d.
co
150
ge
Ran
FI
LEF
CA
p
=
m
a
kP
/h
Flow rate tables for 120 series

Minimum
p range
Kv0.01 (l/h) working p (kPa)
(kPa)
Code
120141
120151
120161
7100
7100
7100
1690
1773
1704
1774
4724
4889
14
14
14
14
14
14
14220
14220
14220
14220
14220
14220
Minimum
p range
(kPa)
Code
120141
120151
120161
120171
120181
120191
7
7
7
Minimum
p range
(kPa)
Code
120141
120151
120161
120171
120181
120191
1690
1773
1704
1690
1773
1704
1774
4724
4889
35
35
35
35
35
35
35410
35410
35410
35410
35410
35410
Flow rates (m3/h)
0,45; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0

0,45; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0
0,45; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0
Flow rates (m3/h)
0,12; 0,15; 0,2; 0,25; 0,3; 0,35; 0,4; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8
0,12; 0,15; 0,2; 0,25; 0,3; 0,35; 0,4; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8
0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25
0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25
2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0; 6,5; 7,0; 7,5; 8,0; 8,5; 9,0; 9,5; 10,0; 11,0
2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0; 6,5; 7,0; 7,5; 8,0; 8,5; 9,0; 9,5; 10,0; 11,0
Flow rates (m3/h)
0,25; 0,35; 0,45; 0,55; 0,7; 0,9; 1,1; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75
0,25; 0,35; 0,45; 0,55; 0,7; 0,9; 1,1; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75
1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0
1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0
3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0; 6,5; 7,0; 7,5; 8,0; 8,5; 9,0; 9,5; 10,0; 11,0; 12,0; 13,0; 14,5; 15,5
3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0; 6,5; 7,0; 7,5; 8,0; 8,5; 9,0; 9,5; 10,0; 11,0; 12,0; 13,0; 14,5; 15,5
Flow rate tables for 125 series

Minimum
p range
(kPa)
Code
125141
125151
125161
7100
7100
7100
1669
1758
1342
1326
3472
3738
7582
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14220
14220
14220
14220
14220
14220
14220
Minimum
p range
(kPa)
Code
125141
125151
125161
125171
125181
125191
125101
7
7
7
Minimum
p range
(kPa)
Code
125141
125151
125161
125171
125181
125191
125101
1669
1758
1342
1669
1758
1342
1326
3472
3738
7582
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35410
35410
35410
35410
35410
35410
35410
Flow rates (m3/h)
0,45; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0

0,45; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0
0,45; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0
Flow rates (m3/h)
0,12; 0,15; 0,2; 0,25; 0,3; 0,35; 0,4; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8
0,12; 0,15; 0,2; 0,25; 0,3; 0,35; 0,4; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8
0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25
0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25
2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0; 6,5; 7,0; 7,5; 8,0; 8,5; 9,0; 9,5; 10,0; 11,0
2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0; 6,5; 7,0; 7,5; 8,0; 8,5; 9,0; 9,5; 10,0; 11,0
6,0; 7,0; 7,5; 8,0; 8,5; 9,0; 9,5; 10,0; 11,0; 12,0; 13,5; 14,5; 15,5; 16,5; 17,0; 18,0
Flow rates (m3/h)
0,25; 0,35; 0,45; 0,55; 0,7; 0,9; 1,1; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75
0,25; 0,35; 0,45; 0,55; 0,7; 0,9; 1,1; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75
1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0
1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0; 2,25; 2,5; 2,75; 3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0
3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0; 6,5; 7,0; 7,5; 8,0; 8,5; 9,0; 9,5; 10,0; 11,0; 12,0; 13,0; 14,5; 15,5
3,0; 3,25; 3,5; 3,75; 4,0; 4,25; 4,5; 5,0; 5,5; 6,0; 6,5; 7,0; 7,5; 8,0; 8,5; 9,0; 9,5; 10,0; 11,0; 12,0; 13,0; 14,5; 15,5
6,5; 7,0; 7,5; 8,0; 8,5; 9,0; 9,5; 11,0; 12,0; 13,0; 14,5; 15,5; 16,5; 18,0; 19,0; 20,0; 21,0; 22,0; 23,0; 24,5; 25,5; 26,5
Minimum differential pressure required

Given by the sum of two values:
1. The minimum working p of the Autoflow
cartridge
2. The p required for the nominal flow rate to
pass through the valve body.
This value can be calculated according to the
values of kv0,01 stated above and referring to
the valve body only.
Example
Autoflow 125 series dimension 1 with flow rate G0 = 2500 l/h and p Range 14220 kPa:
prequired = pAutoflow + pbody = 14 + (G0 /kv0.01)2 = 14 + (2500 /1342)2 = 17,4 kPa

Pump head H = pcircuit + prequired
Coding criteria for Autoflow 120 - 125 series

For correct identification of the device, fill in the form giving series No., size, construction, flow rates and p range.
2nd
3rd
5th
6th
SERIES
1st
SIZE
5th
7th
SERIES
SIZE
2nd
8th
3rd
9th
7th
8th
9th
Complete code:
FLOW RATE
AND p RANGE
4th
1st
FLOW RATE AND p RANGE
The first three digits

indicate the series:
120
125
The fifth digit

indicates the size:
Size
1/2"
3/4"
1"
Digit
Autoflow regulator and ball valve

Autoflow regulator
1 1/4" 1 1/2"
7
2"
2 1/2"
The last three digits indicate the flow rate available.
with p range 7-100 kPa

m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
0,45
0,50
S45
S50
0,60
0,70
S60
S70
0,80
0,90
S80
S90
1,00
1S0
m /h
digit
m /h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h digit
0,12
0,15
0,20
0,25
0,30
0,35
0,40
0,50
L12
L15
L20
L25
L30
L35
L40
L50
0,60
0,70
0,80
0,90
1,00
1,20
1,40
1,60
L60
L70
L80
L90
1L0
1L2
1L4
1L6
1,80
2,00
2,25
2,50
2,75
3,00
3,25
3,50
1L8
2L0
2L2
2L5
2L7
3L0
3L2
3L5
3,75
4,00
4,25
4,50
5,00
5,50
6,00
6,50
3L7
4L0
4L2
4L5
5L0
5L5
6L0
6L5
7,00
7,50
8,00
8,50
9,00
9,50
10,0
11,0
7L0
7L5
8L0
8L5
9L0
9L5
10L
11L
12,0
13,5
14,5
15,5
16,5
17,0
18,0
12L
13L
14L
15L
16L
17L
18L
with p range 14-220 kPa
with range p 35-410 kPa

m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
0,25
0,35
0,45
0,55
0,70
0,90
1,10
1,40
H25
H35
H45
H55
H70
H90
1H1
1H4
1,60
1,80
2,00
2,25
2,50
2,75
3,00
3,25
1H6
1H8
2H0
2H2
2H5
2H7
3H0
3H2
3,50
3,75
4,00
4,25
4,50
5,00
5,50
6,00
3H5
3H7
4H0
4H2
4H5
5H0
5H5
6H0
6,50
7,00
7,50
8,00
8,50
9,00
9,50
10,0
6H5
7H0
7H5
8H0
8H5
9H0
9H5
10H
11,0
12,0
13,0
14,5
15,5
16,5
18,0
19,0
11H
12H
13H
14H
15H
16H
18H
19H
20,0
21,0
22,0
23,0
24,5
25,5
26,5
20H
21H
22H
23H
24H
25H
26H
Flow-rate tables for 103 series

Code
103111
103113
103121
103123
103131
103133
103141
103143
103151
103153
103161
103163
103171
103173
103181
103183
103191
103193
Minimum
working p (kPa)
DN
065
065
080
080
100
100
125
125
150
150
200
200
250
250
300
300
350
350
Flow rates (m3/h)
14
35
14
35
14
35
14
35
14
35
14
35
14
35
14
35
14
35
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
p range(kPa)
005180
006260
018220
018220
018220
018220
016610
019770
016122
019154
032 215
038 270
064 338
077 425
095 460
115580
160580
190730
14220
35410
14220
35410
14220
35410
14220
35410
14220
35410
14220
35410
14220
35410
14220
35410
14220
35410

This is equal to the minimum working p of the
Autoflow cartridge (14 or 35 kPa).
Example
prequired = pAutoflow = 14 or 35 kPa; 0,14 or 0,35 bar
- The flow rates are available in increments of approximately 1 m3/h.

- They are available on request with sizes from DN 400 to DN 800, with flow rates up to 3850 m3/h.
* They are available on request with 4 ANSI flanges
Coding criteria for Autoflow series 103

For correct identification of the device, fill in the form giving size, p range and flow rate
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
FLOW RATE
8th
9th
The fifth digit

indicates the size:
5th
The sixth digit indicates

the differential pressure
range (Range p):
6th
7th
8th
9th
{
{
SIZE p RANGE
SERIES
p RANGE
7th
1 0 3 1
Complete code
SIZE
6th
FLOW RATE
DN
65
80
100
125
150
Digit
kPa
14220
35410
Digit
200 250 300 350

6
The last three digits indicate the flow rate values.

(See tables below and in the following page)
Notes
Installation of AUTOFLOW
In air-conditioning systems, Autoflow devices must be installed on the circuit return pipe.
Some typical installation examples are given in the following pages.
Sizing the system with AUTOFLOW
For more detailed information on sizing a system with Autoflow, please refer to the 2nd volume of the Handbooks Caleffi and the technical
bulletin Dynamic balancing of hydronic circuits. They give theoretical calculations, numerical examples and notes on the application of the
Medium
Autoflow devices can be used with fluids other than water.
In this case it is recommended to contact our head office to select the most suitable product.
Applications of Autoflow (
For use in line with various types of heat emitter: radiators,

convectors, fan convectors, thermal strips, etc.
To ensure constant flow rates to each emitter.
To regulate the flow rate in each riser or secondary branch

of a system.
T.A.
T.A.
To ensure constant flow rates (in any valve position) in

circuits with traditional temperature control.
T.A.
To guarantee the design flow rates (with open or closed valve)

to the various zones of a system.
To balance circuits for hot water distribution.
To create heat exchanger flow balancing by-passes
To balance circuits that serve air conditioning units.
To balance circuits that serve cooling towers.
CH1
To limit the hot water flow rate delivered in systems with

instantaneous production or limited capacity.
CH2
To control the amount of delivered water and balance the
various circuits in irrigation systems.
To balance plumbing circuits.
To limit the flow rate delivered to each user in remote heating

systems.
CH1
CH2
For industrial type applications, such as:
- control of water taken from wells,
- cooling of machinery at nominal conditions,
- balancing of extremely complex distribution systems.
To balance the circuits that serve chiller unit evaporators or

condensers.
For further details, consult Applications Sheets

Nr. 04301, 04302, 04303 and the technical report
"Dynamic Balancing of Hydronic Systems".
Autoflow version 120 series
Automatic flow regulator and ball valve, Autoflow. Suitable to maintain constant flow rate values as the operating conditions in
the system change. 1/2 F connections with F union (from 1/2 to 2). Brass body. Replaceable stainless steel inner cartridge.
Stainless steel spring. EPDM seals. Chrome plated brass ball. Ball seat and control stem seal in EPDM and PTFE. Special zinc
plated steel lever. Brass pressure port plugs. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%.
Maximum working pressure 25 bar. Temperature range 0110C. Working range p 7100 kPa (14220 and 35410 kPa).
Range of available flow rates: 0,1215,5 m3/h. Accuracy 5%. Suitable for fitting pressure ports with 1/4 F connections and
drain pipe.
Autoflow version 125 series

Automatic flow regulator, Autoflow. Suitable to maintain constant flow rate values as the operating conditions in the system
change. 1/2 F x F connections (from 1/2 to 2 1/2). Brass body. Replaceable stainless steel inner cartridge. Stainless steel
spring. EPDM seals. Brass pressure port plugs. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%.
Maximum working pressure 25 bar. Temperature range -20110 C. Working range p 7100 kPa (14220 and 35410 kPa).
Range of available flow rates: 0,1226,5 m3/h. Accuracy 5%. Suitable for fitting pressure ports with 1/4 F connections and
drain pipe.
103 series
Automatic flow regulator, Autoflow. Suitable to maintain constant flow rate values as the operating conditions in the system
change. DN 65 flanged connections (from DN 65 to DN 350) EN1092-1. Cast iron body. Stainless steel inner cartridge.
Stainless steel spring. Non-asbestos fibre seals. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%.
Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Temperature range -20110 C. Working range p 14220 kPa (and 35410 kPa). Range
of available flow rates: 53850 m3/h. Complete with quick-fit 1/4 pressure test ports, counterflanges, rods and gaskets.
Strainers
Function
These devices comprise a combination of a Y strainer and a ball valve (120 series) or a Y strainer
alone (125 series). It is possible to inspect, clean and change the inner screen without having to
remove the device body from the pipeline.
They are suitable to fit pressure ports to check the clog level within the inner strainer and to connect
a drain pipe to clean the inner strainer without removing it from the body.
In the version with shut-off valve, the ball valve control stem is blow-proof and the reversible closing
lever is covered with vinyl.
If there are any insulated pipes, the lever can be replaced with an extended 117 series handle.
Product range
120 series Y-strainer with ball valve
125 series Y-strainer
sizes 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 1 1/4 - 1 1/2 - 2

sizes 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 1 1/4 - 1 1/2 - 2 - 2 1/2
series
Materials
Body:
Strainer cartridge:
Seals:
Ball:
Ball seat:
Control stem seal:
Lever
Pressure ports plugs:
Performance
Medium:
Maximum percentage glycol:
Strainer mesh :
Connections
120
125

stainless steel
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM + PTFE
special galvanized steel

stainless steel
EPDM

50%

50%
25 bar
0110C
25 bar
-20110C
1/21 1/4: 0,87 mm; 1 1/2 and 2: 0,73 mm
1/21 1/4: 0,87 mm; 1 1/22 1/2 : 0,73 mm
1/22 F with union x F
1/22 1/2 F x F
1/4 F
1/4 F
Dimensions
A
F
CA
LEF
FI
CA
LEF
FI
D
50
50
88
88
B
Code
A
C
120141 000 1/2" 156,5 52,5
120151 000 3/4" 159,5 52,5
120181 000 1 1/2" 253
84
253
120191 000
2"
84
E
100
100
140
140
F Weight (kg)
1/4"
1,07
1/4"
1,07
1/2"
4,55
1/2"
4,55
C
52,5
52,5
105
105
133
B
101
106
177
176
230
Code
A
125141 000 1/2"
125151 000 3/4"
125181 000 1 1/2"
125191 000
2"
125101 000 2 1/2
D
30
30
38,5
38,5
48,5
F
Weight (kg)
1/4"
0,52
1/4"
0,55
1/2"
2,20
1/2"
2,45
1/2
4,30
A
CA
LE
FF
I
CA
LE
FF
I
B
B
B
Code
A
120161 000
1" 218,5
120171 000 1 1/4" 220,5
Code
120141
120151
120161
120171
120181
120191
000
000
000
000
000
000
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
D
66
66
C
68
68
F Weight (kg)
E
120 1/2"
2,26
120 1/2"
2,26
Kv0,01 (l/h)
Mesh
(mm)
1.687
1.725
1665
1723
3913
3969
0,87
0,87
0,87
0,87
0,73
0,73
Code
B
A
125161 000
140,5
1"
125171 000 1 1/4" 148
Code
125141
125151
125161
125171
125181
125191
125101
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
C
102
102
D
33,5
33,5
F
Weight (kg)
1/2"
0,98
1/2"
1,12
Kv0,01 (l/h)
Mesh
(mm)
1.688
1.705
1410
1494
3227
3621
6825
0,87
0,87
0,87
0,87
0,73
0,73
0,73
Pressure drop
- The kv value indicated refer to the valve complete with strainer
Strainer cleaning
The strainer can be cleaned without removing it from the body.
1. By opening the drain valve to allow the dirt to flow into the drain
pipe.
1.
2. By performing a reverse flow operation (the water flow hits the

strainer from the opposite side). The shut-off valve on the flow
pipe shuold be closed before the drain valve is opened.
2.
.
cod
15018
Range
I
EFF
CAL
.
20,5
=
cod
cod. ER =
=
Q FILT p
Range
I
EFFFI
LEF
CAL
CA
15018
15011
p
=
mes
USER
SIDE
USER
SIDE
kPa
/h
ER
ER
FILT
cod.
FI
LEF
CA
FILT
cod.
FI
LEF
CA
15011
3 /h
m
h kPa
15011
20,5
20,5
mes
mes
Inspecting the strainer

FI
LEF
CA
150
11
,5
cod.
= 20
ER
FILT
FFI
CALE
The strainer is assembled in such a way to permit

an easy removal from the body for inspection or
replacement.
es
7m
h
120 series
STRAINER
15011
mesh
FILTER = 20,57
cod.
CALEFFI
AUTOFLOW
USER
SIDE
15012
m3 /h
Range p = 14220 kPa
CALEFFI
Q=
cod.
125 series
STRAINER
15011
mesh
FILTER = 20,57
cod.
CALEFFI
AUTOFLOW
USER
SIDE
15012
m3 /h
Range p = 14220 kPa
CALEFFI
Q=
cod.
Strainer version 120 Series
Y-strainer and ball valve. 1/2 F connections with F union (from 1/2 to 2). Brass body. Stainless steel inner strainer; strainer
mesh 0,87 mm (for sizes 1/2 to 1 1/4; strainer mesh 0,73 mm for sizes 1 1/2 and 2). EPDM seals. Chrome-plated brass ball.
Ball seat and control stem seal in PTFE. Special zinc plated steel lever. Brass pressure port plugs. Medium: water and glycol
solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 25 bar. Temperature range 0110C. Suitable for
fitting pressure ports with 1/4 F connections and drain pipe.
Strainer version 125 Series
Y-strainer. 1/2 F x F connections. Brass body. Stainless steel inner strainer; strainer mesh 0,87 mm (for sizes 1/2 to 1 1/4;
strainer mesh 0,73 mm for sizes 1 1/2 to 2 1/2). EPDM seals. Ball seat and control stem seal in EPDM and PTFE. Special
zinc plated steel lever. Brass pressure port plugs. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%.
Maximum working pressure 25 bar. Temperature range -20110 C. Suitable for fitting pressure ports with 1/4 F connections
and drain pipe.
Accessories
130 FLOMET
100
Flow rate and differential pressure

electronic measuring station.
Supplied complete with probes and
connection fittings.
Can be used for checking the
correct operation of Autoflow
devices.
It can also be used for measuring
the flow rate of balancing valves
series 131, 135 and of the flow
metering device 683 series.
Transducer range: 0,05200 kPa.
Max. differential pressure: 200 kPa.
Pair of fast-plug pressure/temperature

test ports.
Their special construction allows
rapid and accurate measurements while
ensuring leaktightness.
Can be used for:
- checking the working range of Autoflow
- checking the clog degree of strainers
- checking the heat output of the
terminals.
Cap cover facing available in:
- Red for upstream pressure port
- Green for downstream pressure port.
Code
130000
130001
Supply 230 V (ac)

Battery operated
Brass body.
EPDM seals.
117
Dual-purpose ball valve extended control handle:
- valve open/close control possible, even when
insulation is fitted, thanks to extended lever;
- memory stop position by means of
mechanically-locking selector.
Useful if you want to create a certain loss of
head in the user circuit which needs to be
maintained even after subsequently closing and
reopening the valve.
Ring nut
FLOMET fast-plug
100 series connection
Syringe
Code
100000
Code
117000
117001
1/4
1/2, 3/4
1, 1 1/4
100
Pair of fittings with fast-coupling syringe for
connection of pressure ports to measuring
instruments.
538
Drain cock
with hose connection.
Code
538201
538401
1/4
1/2
Code
100010
1/4
CALEFFI
Thermo-electric actuator
series 656
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01042/03 GB
Function
The thermo-electric actuator, in conjunction with convertible
thermostatic radiator valves, with radiator and underfloor heating
systems distribution manifolds and with zone valves, allows
automatic shut-off of the system fluid under the control of a room
thermostat or of another electrical switching device.
European Directives conformity

CE mark as per Directives 89/336 EC and 73/23 EC.
-
Leaflet 01051 Convertible thermostatic radiator valves for single and two pipe systems, series 455.
Leaflet 01072 Zone valves, series 676.
Leaflet 01044 Distribution manifolds for underfloor heating systems, series 668.
Leaflet 01065 Distribution manifolds for radiator systems, series 663.
Product range
Standard thermo-electric actuator
Standard thermo-electric actuator with auxiliary microswitch
Standard thermo-electric actuator with auxiliary microswitch
Thermo-electric actuator with special connection
Thermo-electric actuator with special connection
- Materials: - protective cover
- colour
-
Normally closed
Power supply:
Starting current:
Working current:
Supply 220 V
Supply 24 V (ac) or 24 V (dc)
Supply 220 V
Supply 220 V
Dimensions
self-extinguishing polycarbonate
white RAL 9010
220 V (ac) - 24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)

1A
220 V (ac) = 13 mA
24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc) = 140 mA
- Power consumption:
3W
- Rating of auxiliary microswitch contacts
(code 656112/114):
0,8 A (220 V)
- Level of protection:
IP44 (in vertical position)
- Product with double insulation:
CE
- Max ambient temperature:
50C
- Operating time:
opening and closing from 120 s to 180 s
- Supply cable length:
80 cm
Code
656102
M 30 x 1,5 62
41
656104
M 30 x 1,5 62
41
656112
M 30 x 1,5 62
41
656114
M 30 x 1,5 62
41
656002
M 30 x 1,5 62
41
656004
M 30 x 1,5 62
41
Code 656102
Code 656104
Code 656112
Code 656114
Code 656002
Code 656004
Connection table
With power off, the device

(actuator + valve) is normally
closed.
With power on, the valve opens
thanks to the action of a wax
expansion thermostatic element,
directly controlled by a PTC
resistor.
The following table highlights the connections between the various

types of valve body and the thermo-electric actuator types.
220 V -
656102
656104
656112
656114
4-
24 V -
CALEFFI
65611
24 V -
4-
2-
CALEFFI
3W
65610
65611
220 V -
CALEFFI
3W
2-
3W
65610
Operating principle
CALEFFI
338
339
401
402
455
Electrical connections for

code 656002, 656004,
656102 and 656104.
65610
227
*480
656102
656104
656112
656114
4-
24 V -
221
220 V -
BROWN
BLUE
24 V -
CALEFFI
220
2-
CALEFFI
3W
RT
4-
65611
220 V -
65611
2-
CALEFFI
3W
65610
1
0
3W
CALEFFI
222
223
*481
*482
224
*483
225
*484
663
666 - 668
Electrical connections for code 656112 and 656114
677
678
RT
*
Discontinued
2-
220 V -
CALEFFI
4-
656002
656004
24 V 3
W
65600
RT
3W
The auxiliary microswitch can

be used to switch off the pump
when heat is not required and
the valves are closed.
If the power consumption of
the pump is greater than the
rating of the contacts at 0,8 A,
an intermediate relay switch
should be used.
BLACK
BLACK
BROWN
BLUE
676
1
0
65600
Electrical connection
diagram with pump
switching.
CALEFFI
*6750
652
*672
*673
6620
6621
Special connection
The different configuration of some of these series of valves makes
necessary the modification of the connection geometry of the
thermo-electric actuator. Compared to the standard actuators ,
actuators code 656002 and 656004 are supplied with a longer
control spindle .
Attention: actuators 656002 and 656004 cannot be connected
to a valve body designed for use with actuators 656102,
656104, 656112 and 656114, and vice-versa.
Discontinued
*674
*670
*671
Fluid-dynamic characteristics
Installation
Hydraulic characteristics table for 656 actuator + valve body.
- The thermo-electric actuator should be tightened by hand

without the use of tools.
Straight thermostatic
Reverse valve
220 - 222
221 - 223
224 - 227
Double elbow thermostatic
225
Elbow valve thermostatic

(old)
480-482
Straight valve thermostatic

(old)
481-482
Reverse valve (old)
Underfloor heating manifold
Zone valve
(straight / by-pass)
484
663 (ret.)
666
668 (ret.)
676
677
678
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1/2
3/4
1
3/8
1/2
3/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
3/8
1/2
3/8
1/2
3/8
1/2
3/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/4
1/21
1/21
1/21
185
210
270
440
110
145
225
420
200/110
200/110
200/110
180
200
255
100
135
200
80
125
85
125
178
267
446
119
178
356
277
138
287
287
287
370
370/100
370/100
25
25
18
12
25
25
18
12
10
10
10
25
25
18
25
25
18
25
25
25
25
25
25
12
25
25
12
12
12
25
25
25
12
12
12
* Maximum pressure differential to ensure correct operation of the actuator
656002, 656004 +
3-way zone valves
pmax *
(m w.g.)
6750
652
6620
6621
3/4
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/8
1/2
3/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/2
445
140
140
140
178
267
446
119
178
356
247 total
12
25
25
25
25
25
12
25
25
12
12
Elbow valve thermostatic

(old)
670-672
Straight valve thermostatic

(old)
671-673
Single pipe (old)
674
* Maximum pressure differential to ensure correct operation of the actuator
Min. 20 mm
- In assemblies with zone valves

or manifolds in manifold boxes,
a space of at least 20 mm
between the thermo-electric
actuator and the frame should
be left for possible servicing
or replacement.
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
40
60
20
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
Recommendations for use

- When thermo-electric actuators are to be installed on devices
which shut-off heat emitters automatically, it is always advisable to
use a differential by-pass to control the over-pressure of the
system during the partial or total closure of the circuits.
For pre-assembled manifolds
series 663-668, a differential
by-pass with a fixed calibration
setting of 2000 mm w.g. is
available (code 663000).
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
Code 663000
For installations with series 356-357

dual manifolds, a differential by-pass
having a fixed differential pressure
setting of 2000 mm w.g. is also
available (code 356050).
Code 356050
For centralised installations or

installations with rising pipes, a
differential by-pass valve is
available with an adjustable setting
of 1 to 6 m w.g. (series 519).
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
356
kv0,01
(l/h)
- If it is necessary to control multiple zones with actuators in

parallel using the same thermostat, the possibility of
including an intermediate relay to prevent electrical overload
should be considered.
Mod. Dep.
DN
- For the correct functioning of the actuator, the electrical circuit

shoul be sized on the basis of the starting current.
CALEFFI
Valves for underfloor heating

systems
Series
- The actuator should always be fitted in a horizontal or vertical

position, never upside-down. In chilled water circuits, positions
which allow condensation to get into the actuator are not advisable.
CALEFFI
Elbow thermostatic
455
pmax *
(m w.g.)
CALEFFI
Single / Two pipe
339 - 402
kv0,01
(l/h)
PN 10
Straight valve with

thermostatic option
338 - 401
DN
CALEFFI
Elbow valve with

thermostatic option
Series
CALEFFI
656102, 656104,
656112, 656114 +
- The thermo-electric actuator should not be dismantled for

possible repair. Such interference could lead to permanent
damage.
Applications
In domestic water heating systems, for controlling the temperature
of the water heater.
65610
2-
220 V 3W
Thermo-electric actuators can be installed:

On individual radiators as an alternative to
thermostatic controls to allow the radiator
valves to be converted from manual to
automatic operation, in combination with a
room thermostat for each room or zone.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
In loop systems with single pipe valves

(series 455).
In radiator systems, with automatic shut-off of the heat emitter

directly at the manifold, with reduced work and cost associated
with the electrical connections.
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
RT
In fan coil systems, if they are to be fitted with valves for

automatic shut-off of the fluid.
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
In zoned systems, where reduced dimensions and limited flow

rate coefficient at the automatic regulating valve are required.
RT
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
357
Series 656002/004/102/104
Thermo-electric actuator. Normally closed. Supply voltage 220 V (ac); 24 V (ac); 24 V (dc). Starting current 1 A.
Working current 13 mA (220 V (ac)), 140 mA (24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)). Rated power consumption 3 W. Level of protection
IP44 (in vertical position). Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Operating time of 120 to 180 seconds. Length of
supply cable 80 cm.
Series 656112/114
Thermo-electric actuator. Normally closed, with auxiliary microswitch. Supply voltage 220 V (ac); 24 V (ac); 24 V (dc).
Starting current 1 A. Working current 13 mA (220 V (ac)), 140 mA (24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)). Rated power consumption 3 W.
Level of protection IP44 (in vertical position). Rating of auxiliary microswitch contacts 0,8 A. Maximum ambient
temperature 50C. Operating time of 120 to 180 seconds. Length of supply cable 80 cm.
CALEFFI
01043 96
GB
Series
Patented self-cleaning
rotameter
669
Dual reading
scale
The main scale
(white) is used when
the instrument is
new.
If when a
subsequent reading
is taken the float is
no longer visible
because of deposits
on the clear section,
the auxiliary scale
(yellow) can be
used. Because of its
special construction,
this scale is always
clean
Scale:
1 to 4 l/min
Patented
ISO 9001
Quality Assured Firm
CALEFFI
Heating & Plumbing Components
Applications
The rotameter (1 to 4 l/min flow rate meter) can be fitted to
distribution manifolds for radiant panel or underfloor heating
systems.
When fitted to the return manifold it can be used to read off the
actual flow rate values in each individual circuit during the
commissioning operation and at the same time to achieve perfect
balancing of the whole system.
Operation
The rotameter has a 3/4 BSP union connection which is attached to
the manifold and the sealing is achieved by the O-Ring on the
convex spigot. The union connection was chosen to allow for
possible dismantling allowing the rotameter to be withdrawn from
the front. The lower connection consists of a 3/4 BSP male thread
with an internal shape which can be connected to the Series 680
fittings for plastic tubes. Balancing is achieved by operating the
adjusting valve on the flow manifold until the set flow rate is
reached. The flow rate is read off on the transparent cylinder when
the lower part of the float corresponds to the desired value in litres
per minute.
Construction
The body is made of hot stamped brass and the transparent tube
and internal protection are made of Polysulphone. The float
indicator is made of Hostaform/PTFE. All the seals are made of
silicone rubber.
General data
-

Maximum operating temperature: 80C
Flow rate range: 1 to 4 l/min
Accuracy: 10%
Dimensions
code 669050
Es. ch. 30
3/4"
If over a period of time it becomes necessary to check the flow rate

or to carry out a new balancing operation and the float is no longer
visible because of deposits on the transparent section, an auxiliary
graduated scale can be used. If the knurled ring nut is turned to the
left a second yellow scale appears which is always clean thanks to
an airtight protection which prevents any contact with the water of
the system during normal operation. After taking the reading it is
important to return the ring nut to its original position (white scale).
Instructions for taking

readings if the glass is
dirty
CALEFFI S.P.A.
Turn the ring nut

to the yellow scale
69,5
2
1
CALEFFI
L/MIN
3/4"
28010 FONTANETO D'AGOGNA (NO) S.S.229
Take the reading
TEL.INT. +39 322 8491 R.A.
Return the ring nut

to the white scale
FAX +39 322 863723
Pre-assembled distribution manifolds

for radiant panel systems
series 668
CALEFFI
01044/05 GB
Function
Distribution manifolds for radiant panel systems are used to
optimally distribute the heating fluid in floor heating system circuits
and ultimately improve the control of heat emission from the panels.
The manifolds ensure that the flow to each circuit is regulated
precisely and also control the shut-off, venting and automatic
removal of air from the system.
Special solutions devised during sizing have also enabled depth to
be reduced and connection between manifold and branches
facilitated.
Reference Documents
- Tech. Broch. 01042 Thermo-electric actuator, series 656
- Tech. Broch. 01041 Automatic flow regulators
- Tech. Broch. 01054 Automatic air vent valves, series 5020, 5021
and 5022
Product range
Series 668 Pre-assembled distribution manifold for radiant panel systems
Sizes 1 and 1 1/4
End fitting
- body:
Materials:
Flow manifold
- body:
Micrometric balancing valve

- body:
- control device upper part:
- obturator:
- obturator seal:
- knob:
Return manifold
- body:
PA
POM
EPDM
ABS
Performance:
Medium:

stainless steel
EPDM
PP

30%
Shut-off valve
- control device upper part: brass EN 12164 CW614N and PA
- obturator stem:
stainless steel
- obturator:
EPDM
- springs:
stainless steel
- seals:
EPDM
- knob:
ABS
Ball valve
- body:
- ball:
- handle:
Automatic air vent valve

- obturator stem:
- spring:
- seals:
- float:

aluminium EN AB 46100

Max. end fitting discharge pressure:
Nr. adjustment curves:
Micrometric regulating valve scale:
Accuracy:
Main connections:
Connection centre distance:
Outlets:
10 bar
2,5 bar
080C
10
010
5%
1, 1 1/4 F
195 mm
3/4M - 18
50 mm
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
195
383
1 o 1 1/4
101
Dimensions
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
1 o 1 1/4
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
87
CALEFFI
25
3/4
50
L total
27
Code (1)
Code (1 1/4)
Nr. outlets
Total length
Weight (kg)
6686C5
6687C5
3
385
7,30
6686D5
6687D5
4
435
7,85
6686E5
6687E5
5
485
8,40
6686F5
6687F5
6
535
9,50
6686G5
6687G5
7
585
10,20
6686H5
6687H5
8
635
10,70
6686I5
6687I5
9
715
11,50
6686L5
6687L5
10
765
12,30
6686M5
6687M5
11
815
13,10
6686N5
6687N5
12
865
13,80
6686O5
6687O5
13
915
14,60
1 Flow manifold complete with micrometric pre

regulating valves with flow curve number
indicator.
2 Return manifold complete with shut-off valves
that can be used with thermoelectric actuators.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
3 Pair of shut-off ball valves

4 End fittings consisting of a 3-way end fitting,
automatic air vent valve and drain cock.
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
5 Pair of mounting brackets for use with series 659

boxes or direct wall installation.
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
Exterior shape of the manifolds and mounting brackets
Flow manifold
The micrometric regulating valve
obturator is made of plastic (POM)
and features an upside down V
channel
(1) to provide greater
precision when regulating the flow
delivered to the floor system circuits.
This solution offers the following
advantages with respect to the
traditional
conically
shaped
obturator:
The exterior of the manifold deserves special mention because it

can be cast in any shape to meet any requirements.
In the example shown below, indentations have been created in the
manifold to correspond to the plastic pipes exiting from the upper
manifold, thus partially accommodating the pipes and reducing
their overall thickness. This does not interfere with the pressure loss
values because the sections with the indentations (a) are equal to
the sections in which the pipes are branched (b) and (c) and where
the regulating parts (micrometric regulating and shut-off valve
obturators) obstruct the passage of the fluid.
- greater precision, particularly for

the low flow rates usually
encountered in this kind of system.
- proportional flow rates due to the
ability to mould the fluid passage
profiles.
- absolute dimensional consistency

during manufacture due to the
die-cast obturator.
The return manifold is equipped with manual shut-off valves (1)

which are used to shut off the flow to individual circuits.
They can also be used with a
thermoelectric
actuator
which, when used with an
ambient
thermostat,
maintains
the
ambient
temperature at the set limits
when thermal load varies.
The obturator stem (2) is
made of polished stainless
steel to minimise friction and
prevent harmful encrustation
from forming.
1
The control device upper part
features a double EPDM
O-ring seal (3) (4) on the
3
sliding stem.
The obturator (5) is made of
EPDM and is moulded to
4
optimise
the
hydraulic
characteristics of the valve
and reduce noise to a
2
minimum
as
the
fluid
passes through and as it
gradually opens and closes
5
when operating with a
thermo-electric actuator.
The partial accommodation of the pipes in the indentations created

in the manifold is further enhanced by the shape of the mounting
brackets, which are slanted to create a 25 mm offset between the
upper and lower manifolds.
As shown in the figure below, this offset positions the pipes so that
they perfectly match the profile of the manifold during installation.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Return manifold
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
25 mm
End fitting and automatic air vent valve
The end fitting consists of a fill/drain cock (1)

and an automatic air vent valve with a
hygroscopic safety cap (2). It has been
specifically designed to close the air vent valve
automatically if there is water near the vent
itself.
CALEFFI
To determine the hydraulic characteristics of the circuit, we must calculate the total pressure loss experienced by the flow of fluid as it passes
through the manifold unit parts and the radiant panel circuits.
From a hydraulic standpoint, the manifold unit and circuits can be shown as an assembly of hydraulic elements that are arranged in series and
parallel to each other.
PBV
PRM
PTot
PSV
P
PAnello
Loop
PVM
GTot
GLoop
PBV
PFM
PTot
PMV
PLoop
PSV
PTot
= Total loss at the manifold heads

(Flow + Return + Loop)
PMV
= Localised loss at the micrometric

regulating valve loop (loop flow)
PLoop = Loop loss (loop flow)

PBV
GTot.
PFM
GLoop
PRM
PBV
PSV
= Localised loss at the shut-off valve in the

panel circuit (loop flow)
PFM
= Distributed loss of the flow manifold

(total flow)
PRM
= Distributed loss of the return manifold

(total flow)
PBV
= Ball valve loss (total flow)
GTot
PTot = PMV +PLoop + PSV + PFM + PRM + PBV x 2
(1.1)
After noting the hydraulic characteristics of the individual components and the design flows, the total loss can be calculated as the sum of the
partial pressure losses of each specific component in the system, as shown in the formula (1.1).
0,6
45
40
35
0,45
0,4
0,35
30
0,3
25
0,25
0,5
0,2
450
400
0,1
120
1,2
100
50
20
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
45
40
35
0,45
0,4
0,35
30
0,3
25
0,25
18
16
14
0,18
0,16
0,14
12
0,12
0,5
0,2
10
500
350
300
250
180
160
200
140
120
80
90
100
50
25
20
70
0,12
60
12
10
45
0,18
0,16
0,14
40
18
16
14
35
20
60
30
50
0,9
0,8
0,7
Kv
1,15
2,87
Kv0,01
115
287
- Kv = flow in m3/h for a pressure loss of 1 bar

- Kv0,01 = flow in l/h for a pressure loss of 1 kPa
0,1
G (l/h)
G (l/h)
Micrometric balancing valve fully open

Shut-off valve
3500
1,2
90
80
70
1,8
1,6
1,4
4000
120
100
2,5
180
160
140
3000
1,8
1,6
1,4
250
2500
180
160
140
300
200
1800
4,5
4
3,5
2000
2,5
450
400
350
1600
250
600
500
1400
300
200
1200
4,5
4
3,5
900
450
400
350
9
8
7
1000
600
500
10
900
800
700
800
9
8
7
1000
700
900
800
700
P (kPa)
P (mm w.g.)
600
10
500
P (kPa)
P (mm w.g.)
1000
Flow manifold 37 outlets

Flow manifold 813 outlets
Return manifold 37 outlets
Return manifold 813 outlets
Ball valve
Kv
24*
17*
33,5*
23,5*
47,5
Kv0,01
2400*
1700*
3350*
2350*
4750
* Average value
Example of how to calculate the total pressure loss

Suppose we need to calculate the pressure loss of a manifold with three circuits with the following characteristics:
Total manifold flow: 400 l/h
The flow and pressure loss characteristics of the three piping loops are as follows:
Circuit 1
P1= 10 kPa
G1= 120 l/h
Circuit 2
P2= 15 kPa
G2= 200 l/h
Circuit 3
P3= 7 kPa
G3= 80 l/h
(1.2)
Each segment of the formula (1.1), is calculated using the following relationship:
P=G2/Kv0,012
G= flow in l/h
P = pressure loss in kPa (1 kPa =100 mm w.g.)
Kv0,01 = flow in l/h through the device in question, with a pressure loss of 1 kPa
Note that the PTot must be calculated taking into account the circuit with the greatest pressure losses distributed along the entire piping loop of
the panel.
The circuit in question in our example is circuit 2.
Thus:
PMV
PLoop
PSV
PFM
PRM
PBV
=
=
=
=
=
=
2002/1152 = 3 kPa
15 kPa
2002/2872 = 0,5 kPa
4002/24002 = 0,03 kPa
4002/33502 = 0,01 kPa
4002/47502 = 0,007 kPa
} Values obtained disregarding variations due to flow rate delivered to each branch circuit
Using the formula (1.1) we can add all the calculated terms to obtain:
PTot= 3 +15 + 0,5 + 0,03 + 0,01 + 0,0071 18,5 kPa
Note:
We can ignore the three terms for the pressure losses associated with the ball valves and manifolds because their values are so low. Generally
speaking, the total pressure loss is fairly close to the pressure loss of the branched circuit of the panel.
Use of the micrometric balancing valve

The micrometric balancing valves balance each individual circuit in the panels so that the actual design flow is obtained in each one.
Each individual circuit consists of a micrometric balancing valve, panel piping and shut-off valve. The following information must be taken into
account in order to calibrate the system correctly:
The flow of fluid that must pass through each circuit (design data).
The pressure loss that occurs in each circuit in accordance with the flow:
(1.3)
PCircuit = PLoop + PSV

The available head on the panel circuit or predetermined head:
HPredetermined PCircuit
(1.4)
= PMV + PLoop + PSV
+ disadvantaged
In accordance with the passage of the flow GLoop the

micrometric valve must ensure an additional pressure loss
in all the circuits equal to the difference, indicated as PMV
(p micrometric valve).
SV
To allow for an eventual increase in flow, the micrometric

valve of the circuit with the greatest pressure loss may
sometimes be considered as 80% open.
PCircuit
PTot
HPredetermined PCircuit
Once the two pieces of information, PMV and GLoop,

are known for each circuit, the optimal adjustment curve
corresponding to the adjustment position of the valve must
be chosen from the graph.
+ disadvantaged
PMV
MV
Example of preregulating the valve

Suppose that we need to balance three circuits that have the same pressure loss and loop flow characteristics shown in example (1.2):
Since circuit 2 is the most disadvantaged because it experienced the greatest pressure loss in the panel piping, the remaining circuits must be
adjusted as follows:
Circuit 2
PLoop = 15 kPa
G2 = 200 l/h
Circuit 1
PLoop = 10 kPa
G1 = 120 l/h
Circuit 3
PLoop = 7 kPa
G3 = 80 l/h
PMV = 2002/1152 = 3 kPa

PSV = 2002/2872 = 0,5 kPa
PSV =1202/2872 = 0,2 kPa
PSV = 802/2872 = 0,1 kPa
P 2
P Circuit +
with the relationship (1.3):

PCircuit = 10 + 0,2 = 10,2 kPa
+ disadvantaged
5000
4500
4000
3500
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
50
30
10
8
6
4
2
0
25
10
8
6
4
2
0
900
800
700
18
16
14
20
12
9
8
7
1
1,5
600
10
500
10
450
400
350
4,5
4
3,5
300
250
2,5
200
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
100
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
50
450
500
400
350
300
250
180
200
160
140
120
90
100
80
70
60
45
50
40
35
30
25
18
0,5
12
Circuit 3
PMV3 = 11,4 kPa
G3 = 80 l/h
Adjustment position ~ 3,5
2000
10
Circuit 2
Adjustment position completely open
45
40
35
3000
2500
Circuit 1
PMV1 = 8,3 kPa
G1 = 120 l/h
Adjustment position ~ 5.5
P (kPa)
P (mm w.g.)
20
To adjust circuits 1 and 3, we need the

following information to determine the
adjustment position of the micrometric
valves:
= 18,5 kPa
PCircuit
16
HPredetermined

PCircuit = 7 + 0,1 = 7,1 kPa
14
+ disadvantaged
P MV2
P MV1
disadvantaged
With the relationship (1.4):

PCircuit = 3 + 15 + 0,5 = 18,5 kPa
P 3
P 1
H Predetermined
Q (l/h)
Hydraulic characteristics of the micrometric valve
P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
5000
4500
4000
3500
45
40
35
3000
2500
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
50
30
10
8
6
4
2
0
25
10
8
6
4
2
0
18
16
14
12
1000
900
800
700
20
1,5
9
8
7
10
10
600
450
400
350
4,5
4
3,5
300
250
2,5
500
200
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
100
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
50
450
500
400
350
300
250
200
180
160
140
120
90
100
80
70
60
45
50
40
35
30
25
18
20
16
14
10
12
0,5
G (l/h)
Adjustment position
Kv
Kv0,01
1,5
10
0,06
0,09
0,18
0,21
0,27
0,31
0,42
0,53
0,7
0,89
1,15
18
21
27
31
42
53
70
89
115

Series 668
Pre-assembled distribution manifold for radiant panel systems with 3 (from 3 to 13) outlets. Brass body. EPDM seals. 1 (1 and
1 1/4) threaded F connections. 3/4"M outlet connections. Medium: water, glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol: 30%.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Temperature range 080C. End fitting maximum discharge pressure 2,5 bar.
Consists of:
- Flow manifold complete with micrometric preregulating valves with graduated scale from 1 to10. Accuracy 5%.
- Return manifold complete with shut-off valves for use with thermo-electric actuator.
- Pair of end fittings consisting of a fitting with automatic air vent and drain cock.
- Pair of shut-off ball valves.
- Pair of mounting brackets.
MANIFOLDS AND ACCESSORIES

13
11
12
40
CA
LEFF
I
10
14
15
40
60
20
60
20
80
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
40
60
20
60
20
80
40
60
20
80
80
16
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
CA
LEFF
I
20
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
17
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
18
1. Manifold complete with shut-off valves, series 666

2. Manifold complete with micrometric balancing valves, series 667
3. Shut-off ball valve, series 391
4. Autoflow, series 120
5. Strainer, series 120
6. Thermo-electric actuator, series 656
7. Flow meter, code 669050
8. Temperature gauge fitting, code 657050
9. End fitting complete with automatic air vent valve, code 599671
10. End fitting complete with manual air vent valve, code 599672
11. Pair of mounting brackets, code 658100
12. DARCAL fitting, series 680
13. Inspection wall box, series 659
14. Automatic air vent valve, code 59575
15. Mini drain cock, code 337131
16. Eccentric bypass kit, code 668000
17. Double radial end fitting, code 599474
18. Drain cock, code 538400
Flow meter series 669

Function
The flow meter is a device that is mounted on the return manifold of panel systems. It instantaneously controls the actual
flow values in each individual circuit during the regulating phase, making the balancing operations of the system easier and
more accurate.
Patented
Product range
Code 669050 Flow meter
Size 3/4
body:
measuring spring:
stainless steel
seals:
EPDM
transparent cylinder and internal protection:
PSU
float-indicator:
POM/PTFE
Materials: -
Dimensions
Medium:
Temperature range:
Flow measurement scale:
Accuracy:
Dual readout scale
Connections:

30%
6 bar
580 C
14 l/min
10%
3/4 M 18 x 3/4 F nut
3
2
1
CALEFFI
L/MIN
B
Code
669050
A
3/4"
B
3/4"
C
69,5
Weight (kg)
0,146
Operating principle
The flow meter must always be installed in a vertical position with

the flow indication arrow pointing up (7) to ensure the greatest
accuracy when measuring the flow.
5
4
6
1
P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
5000
4500
4000
3500
45
40
35
3000
30
2500
1200
12
1000
900
800
700
9
8
7
600
20
10
500
450
400
350
4,5
4,0
3,5
300
3,0
250
2,5
200
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
450
0,5
500
400
350
300
250
180
100
50
60
50
200
0,6
160
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
140
90
80
70
120
100
90
CALEFFI
18
16
14
80
2
1
1800
1600
1400
70
50
25
2000
L/MIN
A spring (1) connected to a float

(2) is located inside the flow meter.
The force applied by the water to
the float as it flows through the
flow meter is countered in
proportion to the force applied by
the spring.
When the flow
becomes stabilised at a particular
value, the float reaches a specific
position of equilibrium which also
serves as an indicator.
The
system is balanced by moving the
calibration valve on the flow
manifold until it corresponds to the
design flow, which can be read on
the graduated scale printed on the
transparent cylinder (3).
The flow (l/min) readout value
corresponds to the lower edge of
the float.
Installation
G (l/h)
Kv = 1
Kv0,01 = 100

Easy installation
The flow meter is equipped with a captive nut (4) that is mounted onto the manifold and sealed with an O-ring (5) mounted on the tail piece.
The captive nut solution simplifies assembly because it allows the flow meter to be mounted at the front of the manifold without having to change
the optimal readout position.
Dual readout scale
The flow meter is equipped with a spare graduated scale that can be used if flow needs to be checked or the system rebalanced but the float
can no longer be seen due to deposits on the transparent cylinder.
Turning the knurled nut (6) to the left will bring into view another scale in yellow that always stays clean due to the hermetic seal that prevents
water from entering while the system is operating.
The nut must be returned into the original position on the white scale after reading the measurement.
Series 669
Flow meter with float. 3/4M x 3/4F nut threaded connections. Brass body, stainless steel measuring spring, EPDM seals,
transparent cylinder and internal protection in PSU, float-indicator in POM/PTFE. Medium: water and glycol solutions.
Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum working pressure: 6 bar. Temperature range 580 C. Flow measurement scale:
14 l/min. Accuracy 10%. Dual readout scale.
Fitting with self-adjusting diameter for simple and multi-layer plastic pipes series 680
Function
The self-adjusting fitting for simple and multi-layer plastic pipes is a mechanical device that allows the pipes, the radiant
panel system circuits and the manifolds to be connected easily and securely. This versatile fitting has been specifically
designed to adapt to the varying pipe diameters of these types of systems.
Patented
Product range
Series 6805 . . Self-adjusting fitting for simple and multi-layer plastic pipes
Materials:- nut:
- adapter:
- seals:
EPDM
- insulation ring:
EPDM
- olive:
PA 66 GF
Medium:
Temperature range:

30%
10 bar
580C (PEX)
550C (Multilayer)
1) Adapter
2) Olive
3) Nut
Size 3/4
Pipe (mm)
internal
external
Code
680502
680503
680500
680501
680506
680515
680517
680524
680526
680535
680537
680544
680546
680555
680564
680505
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
7,58,0
8,59,
99,5
9,510
9,510
10,511,
10,511,0
11,512,0
11,512,0
12,513,0
12,513,0
13,514,0
13,514,0
14,515,0
15,516,0
1716,0
1214
1214
1416
1214
1416
1416
1618
1416
1618
1618
1820
1618
1820
1820
1820
22,50
Versatility of pipe-fitting
This fitting has been specifically designed to adapt to several pipe diameters. The large variety of simple
and multi-layer plastic pipes available on the market and the wide range of permissible tolerances have
made it necessary to find an innovative solution for mechanical fittings. While maintaining the nominal
dimensions of the fittings currently available on the market, this new solution has been constructed so that
the same fitting can be used for pipes with differences on external diameters of up to 2 mm and differences
on internal diameters of up to 0,5 mm.
Resistance to pull out

This adapter offers a high degree of resistance to pull out of pipe. Its special clamping system makes it
suitable for every application and ensures a leak tight fit.
Low pressure losses

The internal profile of the adapter (1) has been shaped to obtain a Venturi effect when the fluid passes
through, reducing pressure losses by 20% compared to those created by passages with a similar diameter.
Insulation ring
The fitting is equipped with a rubber insulation element (2) to prevent contact between the aluminium in the multi-layer pipe and the brass fitting,
thus preventing galvanic corrosion generated by the two different metals.
Dual O-ring seal
The adapter is equipped with two O-ring seals (3) and (4) in EPDM to prevent leaks even when operating at high pressure.
Series 680
Self-adjusting fitting for simple and multi-layer plastic pipes with internal Venturi effect profile to limit pressure losses. 3/4F
connection. Brass nut and adapter, EPDM seals, EPDM insulation ring, PA 66 GF olive coupling. Medium: water and glycol solutions.
Maximum percentage of glycol: 30%. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Temperature range: 580C (PEX); 550C (Multilayer).
Off-centre bypass assembly with fixed setting code 668000

Function
The distribution circuits of the heating fluid in radiant panel systems may be totally or partially shut off by closing the
thermoelectric valves inside the manifolds.
When the flow decreases, the differential pressure inside the circuit may rise to levels that could cause problems with noise,
high rates of fluid speed, mechanical erosion and hydraulic imbalance of the system itself. The differential bypass kit for
series 668 manifolds maintains the pressure of the flow and return manifold circuits in balance if the flow changes.
The valve can be quickly connected to the series 668 manifolds, reducing overall size to a minimum.
Product range
Code 668000 Off-centre bypass assembly with fixed setting
Size 1/2 x 1/2
10 bar
-10110C
25 kPa (2500 mm w.g.)
B
C
1/2 M x 1/2 M
Code
668000
B
1/2"
A
1/2"
Operating principle
The by-bass valve contains a

non-return obturator connected to a
contrast spring. When the fixed
setting pressure is reached, the
valve obturator gradually opens,
recirculating the flow in proportion
to the closing of the thermo-electric
valves and maintaining a constant
differential pressure in the manifold
circuit.
Bypass differential pressure:
25 kPa (2500 mm w.g.)

P (kPa)
10000
100
9000
8000
7000
90
80
70
6000
60
50
5000
4500
4000
3500
45
40
35
3000
30
2500
25
20
2000
12
10
2000
350
400
450
300
250
180
200
140
160
1800
1200
1000
1400
1600
18
16
14
1200
1800
1600
1400
120
The differential bypass assemby

features a fixed setting that cannot
be changed because it does not
contain accessible adjustment
parts. The small, compact size and
offset connections makes this kit
particularly easy to mount after
installing thermo-electric valves on
the manifold. It does not require a
larger or deeper zone box than
those used for normal manifolds.
Weight (kg)
0,336
P (mm w.g.)
100
C
35
1000
Connections:

30%
700
800
900

Temperature range:
Fixed setting pressure:
600
Medium:

copper
PA
stainless steel
EPDM
asbestos-free fibre
500
body:
nuts:
18 pipe with plate:
spring:
seals:
gaskets:
137150
Materials: -
Dimensions
G (l/h)
Installation of the differential bypass valve on series 668 manifolds

The differential bypass on series 668 manifolds is mounted by following the procedure below:
1) Remove the drain cock (A) from the terminal connector on the upper manifold.
2) Remove the end fitting (B) on the lower manifold.
3) Install the new terminal connector C (code 599474 purchased separately) on the lower manifold.
4) Install the differential bypass (code 668000) and reinstall the drain cock on the new terminal connector (code 599474) of the lower manifold.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
Code 668000
Off-centre bypass assembly with fixed setting. 1/2M threaded connections. Brass body and nuts. Copper pipe. PA check valve
obturator, stainless steel spring, EPDM seals, asbestos-free fibre gaskets. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum
percentage of glycol: 30%. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Temperature range: -10110 C. Fixed setting pressure: 25 kPa.
Thermo-electric actuators
656
depl. 01042
Thermo-electric actuator.
For series 666 and 668 manifolds.
Normally closed.
Code
656102
656104
656
- Materials: - protection shell

- colour
Voltage (V)
230
224
depl. 01042
For series 666 and 668 manifolds.
Normally closed.
With auxiliary microswitch
Code
656112
656114
Voltage (V)
230
224
Normally closed
Electric supply:
Peak current:
Working current:
RAL 9010 white
version with micro: RAL 9002 grey
230 V (ac) - 24 V (ac) - 24 V (cc)

1A
230 V (ac) = 13 mA
24 V (ac) - 24 V (cc) = 140 mA
Power consumption:
3W
Auxiliary microswitch contacts rating (code 656112/114):
0,8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
IP 44 (in vertical position)
Double insulation construction:
CE
50C
Operating time:
Length of supply cable:
80 cm
Automatic flow regulators
120 AUTOFLOW version

Combined ball valve and automatic flow regulator unit.
Factory set to automatically maintain the flow between 5% of the established value.
Can be inspected, cleaned and the internal cartridge replaced without having to remove the
valve body from the pipe.
Suitable for use with pressure test ports to check operation.
Can be connected to a drain pipe. The ball valve has a control stem with anti-slip device and
vinyl-covered reversible closure handle. Male union connections.
With thermometer scale 080C - 40 mm
Max. working pressure: 25 bar
Max. working temperature: 110C
p range: 14220 kPa
Accuracy: 5%
Code
120961
120961
120961
120961
120961
120961
120961
Flow m3/h
1L2
1L4
1L6
1L8
2L0
2L2
2L5
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1,20
1,40
1,60
1,80
2,00
2,25
2,50
Code
120971
120971
120971
120971
120971
120971
120971
Flow m3/h
1L2
1L4
1L6
1L8
2L0
2L2
2L5
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1,20
1,40
1,60
1,80
2,00
2,25
2,50
Additional flow values are available upon request
120 STRAINER version

Combination Y strainer and ball valve.
valve body from the pipe. Can be used with pressure test ports to check amount of clogging
of strainer. Can be connected to a drain pipe to clean the strainer without removing it from the
body. The ball valve has a control rod with anti-slip device and vinyl-covered reversible
closure lever. Male pipe union connections.
With thermometer scale 080C - 40 mm
Maximum working temperature: 110C
Strainer mesh size : 0,87 mm
Code
120961 000
Code
1 F x 1 1/4 M
120971 000
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
Manifolds
666
Return distribution manifold complete

with shut-off valves suitable for
thermo-electric actuators.
Materials:
Flow manifold
- body:
- seals:
Code
666735
666745
666755
666765
666775
666785
Connections N. outlets
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
F
F
F
F
F
F
x
x
x
x
x
x
3
4
5
6
7
8
Outlets
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
M
M
M
M
M
M

EPDM
Micrometric balancing valve

- body:
PA
- control device upper part:brass EN 12164
CW614N
- obturator:
POM
- obturator seal:
EPDM
- knob:
ABS
Return manifold
- body:
667
Flow distribution manifold complete
with micrometric balancing valves and
visual display for flow regulation.
Code
667735
667745
667755
667765
667775
667785
Connections
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
F
F
F
F
F
F
N. outlets
x
x
x
x
x
x
3
4
5
6
7
8
Outlets
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
M
M
M
M
M
M
Shut-off valve
- control device upper part:brass EN 12164
CW614N and PA
- obturator stem:
stainless steel
- obturator:
EPDM
- springs:
stainless steel
- seals:
EPDM
- knobs:
ABS

Main connections:
Outlets:
10 bar
080 C
1 1/4 F x M
3/4M
50 mm
Shut-off valves
391
391
Pair of ball valves.

Female-male connections with union.
Temperature gauge scale 080C, 40 mm.

Female-male connections with union.
With temperature gauge connections.
Code
391167
391177
Code
1 x 1 1/4
1 1/4 x 1 1/4
391067
391077
1 x 1 1/4
1 1/4 x 1 1/4
End fittings
5996
5996
End fitting consisting of 3-way end

fitting series 5994 with automatic
air vent valve code 59575 and
drain cock series 538.
Max. discharge pressure: 2,5 bar.
End fitting consisting of 3-way end

fitting series 5994 with manual air
vent valve series 337 and drain
cock series 538
Code
Code
599671
1 1/4
599672
1 1/4
Mounting brackets
Fittings
3642
658
Reduction fitting.
Pair of mounting brackets for use with

boxes 659 series or for direct fixing.
Complete with screws and fixings.
Code
364276
1 F x 1 1/4 M
Code
658100 for manifolds series 666, 667 e 668
5991
End fitting.
Temperature gauge fitting
Code
657
599173
599174
Temperature gauge fitting.

Suitable for manifold outlets.
Temperature gauge 080C, 40 mm.
Kv0,01 = 100 (l/h)
5994
Code
657050
1 1/4 F x 3/8 F
1 1/4 F x 1/2 F
Double radial end fitting.
3/4 M x 3/4 F nut
Code
1 1/4 F x 1/2 F x 3/8 F

599473
599474* 1 1/4 F x 1/2 F x 1/2 F
* For use with kit 668000
59575
Automatic air vent valve.
Hot forged brass.
Max. pressure loss: 2,5 bar.
5995
Single radial end fitting.
Code
59575
Code
3/8 M
599573
1 1/4 F x 3/8 F
337
Mini drain cock.
Adjustable outlet.
PTFE seal on thread.
Code
337131
3/8 M
End fittings
5993
End cap.
Code
599370
1 1/4 F
Drain cock
538
Drain cock with hose connection
and cap.
Code
538400
386
Screw plug with nut for manifold
outlets.
Code
1/2 M
386500
3/4
Box
Code
659
660
Inspection wall box for

manifold systems.
Wall and floor installations
(with 660 series).
With lock.
In painted sheet steel.
Adjustable depth from 110 to
140 mm.
For manifolds series 668.
Floor installation kit for inspection wall boxes 659 series.

Consists of:
- 2 supports of 20 cm height,
- 2 side panels,
- 1 pipe-bending bar.
(h x b x p)
659040
659060
659080
659100
659120
450
450
450
450
450
x
x
x
x
x
1400
1600
1800
1000
1200
x
x
x
x
x
Code
660040
660060
660080
660100
660120
110140
110140
110140
110140
110140
for
for
for
for
for
box
box
box
box
box
659040
659060
659080
659100
659120
For max n. 17+17 outlets
659 series inspection wall box dimension choice

in accordance with the number of outlets
With Autoflow with max n. 15+15 outlets


1200
1000
800
600

40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Anti-thermosiphon check valve
CALEFFI
510 series
01045/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
ISO 9001 No. 0003
FM 21654
Function
The anti-thermosiphon check valve prevents the natural circulation
of water in systems where ambient temperature adjustment is
carried out by a thermostat connected to the pump.
The anti-thermosiphon check valve allows water to reach the heat
emitters only when the pump is running: when the pump is not
running, the check valve is activated and the system remains
separate from the heat generator.
The check valve function can be overridden using the
corresponding knob and the valve can be used with straight or
angled connections by moving the relevant cap.
Product range
510 series Anti-thermosiphon check valve
sizes 3/41 1/4
Dimensions
Materials

PSU
stainless steel
EPDM
EPDM
ABS
PTFE
EPDM
Body:
Check valve:
Check valve spring:
Check valve seal:
Cap seal:
Control knob:
Control knob seal:
Control stem seals:
Performance
Medium:
Min. opening pressure for check valve:
Connections:

30%
D
10 bar
0,02 bar
5110C
C
B
3/41 1/4 F
A
Code
D
A
510500 3/4 87
510600
1
87
510700 1 1/4 103
B
77
77
91
C
43
43
48
E
45
45
52
F
82
82
93
G
92
92
105
Mass (kg)
0,65
0,53
0,82
Operating principle
The anti-thermosiphon check valve body houses a special
hydraulically-shaped check obturator (1). During normal circulation
of the medium (while the pump is running), the obturator is pushed
against the counter-acting spring inside it, so as to open the
channel to allow the medium to flow through. When the pump stops
running and the flow of medium stops, the obturator is pushed in
the opposite direction, against the seal seat (2), in order to prevent
medium backflow. In this way, the obturator completely shuts off the
flow of medium through the special contoured seal (3). Knob (4)
can be used to deactivate obturator intervention, by turning the
control stem (5) by 180 to keep the channel always open.
Silent operation
Thanks to the ogival hydraulic shape of the obturator, the
anti-thermosiphon check valve guarantees silent operation.
Quick operation
The seal positioned on the obturator and the couter-acting spring
located inside the obturator ensure there are no delays in closure
and guarantee an watertight seal, even when slight back pressure
is applied.
Non-sensitivity to impurities
The sliding parts, thanks to a special coupling, are not sensitive to
the small impurities in the water, or to the deposits which can form
as a result of prolonged periods of inactivity.
p (mm w.g.)
1
3
3/4"
1"
3/4"
1"
p (bar)
1 1/4" 1 1/4"
5.000
0,5
2.000
0,2
1.000
0,1
2
0,05
20
500
200
2
50
1
20
100
10
0,2
5
0,1
0,5
200
150
10
Angled connections
Straight connections
0,02
0,015
50
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
500
Installation
Knob positions
ouvert-offen
open
CA L E FFI
ouvert-offen
open
CA L E FFI
normal
In open position, the valve

overrides its check function.
normal
In normal position, the valve is

in its operating condition, with
the check valve active and an
opening pressure of 0,02 bar.
The valve should be installed in accordance with the flow direction

indicated by the arrow on the valve body. The valve can be used
with straight or angled connections, by moving the third way
sealing cap. The valve should be installed with the check valve axis
vertically, in accordance with one of the two diagrams provided.
510 series
Anti-thermosiphon check valve. Threaded connections 3/4 F (from 3/4 to 1 1/4). Brass body. PSU check valve. Stainless
steel spring. EPDM seals. PTFE control knob seal. ABS control knob. Medium water, glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol
30%. Working temperature range 5-110C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Minimum opening pressure for check valve 0,02
bar. Angled or straight layout depending on cap position. Check valve override option.
CALEFFI
Fuel shut-off valve I.S.P.E.S.L. approved
CALEFFI
series 541
01046/03 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
General
Series 541 (98C) fuel shut-off valves are made by Caleffi S.p.A. in
compliance with the essential safety requirements of Directive
97/23/CE of the European Parliament and the Council of the
European Union for the harmonisation of the member states with
regard to pressurised equipment.
Function
Product range
Sizes 1/22
Sizes DN 65 and DN 80
Sizes DN 65 and DN 80
A
C
E
B
B
72
72
98
98
134
134
Code
A
54104. 1/2"
54105. 3/4"
54106.
1"
54107. 1 1/4"
54108. 1 1/2"
54109.
2"
C
38,5
41
50
50
57,5
57,5
D
112,5
112,5
123
123
136
136
E
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
F
43
43
43
43
43
43
Weight (kg)
F
60
60
Weight (kg)
1,3
1,3
2,1
1,9
3,6
3,2
Materials: - threaded body:

- flanged body:
bronze EN 1982 CB491K
- spring:
stainless steel
- seals:
NBR
1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2 and 2; FxF
Flanged connections PN 16:
DN 65 and DN 80
Sensor pocket connection:
1/2 M
98C (+0 -5C) I.S.P.E.S.L. approved
140C (+0 -5C) supplied with declaration of conformity
Max temperature: - (sensor side): Calibration temperature + 20%
- (valve side):
85C
Average working temperature: - threaded:
40C
- flanged (for gas):
15C
Max allowed pressure PS: - threaded:
1 bar
- flanged:
0,6 bar
Max working pressure: - (sensor side):
12 bar
- (valve side) threaded:
50 kPa
11 kPa
- (valve side) flanged:
- (valve side) high pressure flanged:
50 kPa
Suitable for following fuels:
diesel oil, fuel oil, methane, LPG
PED category:
IV
Dimensions
I.S.P.E.S.L.
Series 541 Threaded version

Series 541 Flanged version
Series 541 High pressure flanged version
111 5
The Caleffi series 541 fuel shut-off valve is a fail-safe safety device
with pre-set calibration. This valve, installed in the burner fuel supply
pipework, shuts off the flow of fuel when the temperature of the
heat-carrying fluid reaches the calibrated value of the sensor. As this
is a fail-safe device in the case of damage to the sensor assembly,
the fuel supply pipe is automatically closed. This valve can be used
with different types of fuel and is also available in versions for
superheated water.
5 or 10 m
Length of capillary connection tube:
With 5 m capillary
2 120C 4 140C 6 160C 8 180C
0 98C
Code completion (.)
With 10 m capillary
1 98C
3 120C 5 140C 7 160C 9 180C
Code completion (0)

0 standard
1 high pressures
Code
5416 .
5418 .
A
DN 65
DN 80
B
180
180
C
120
120
D
175
175
E
1/2"
1/2"
13,6
15,5
If the calibrated temperature is reached, the vapour pressure sensitive

element, with the change of state, causes the actuator to be triggered
via the capillary tube and the flexible bellows.
The resetting is achieved by pressing the pushbutton positioned in the
lower part of the valve and protected by a plastic cover.
Diesel oil at 20C
P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
500
300
1/
2"
Operating principle
3/
4"
200
1"
11
/4
"
100
0,5
11
/
2" 2"
50
30
0,3
20
0,2
10
0,1
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
50
100
0,05
40
G (kg/h)
Fuel oil (35 C at 50C) at 20C
P (kPa)
P (mm w.g.)
10
1000
500
2"
1/
300
4"
3/
200
1" 4"
/
11
100
"
/2
11 2"
5000
1000
100
2000
0,1
500
10
200
0,2
50
0,3
20
20
0,5
30
10
50
G (kg/h)
100
50
0,5
30
20
0,3
10
400
300
200
100
G (m3/h)
LPG at 15C
P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
100
3/
4"
1/
2"
200
0,5
11
/4
"
1"
30
0,3
0,2
DN
DN 65
80
11
/2
2" "
20
10
0,1
400
300
200
100
20
0,02
10
0,03
0,05
The compact dimensions of the pocket

make it suitable even for small diameter
pipework. In addition, its limited height
means that it can be positioned vertically,
avoiding difficult installation in the
case of bends or near elbows. The
superheated water version of the
pocket is made of stainless steel.
50
20
10
0,02
0,03
0,05
50
Sensor pocket
0,1
Series 541 valves are

positive action (fail-safe)
devices; if the sensor
element is damaged or
the capillary is broken, the
fail-safe action consists of
an upward movement of the
control unit, thus triggering
the actuator, which in turn
closes the valve. If this
situation occurs, the valve
must be replaced.
0,2
DN
DN 65
80
c) Press the reset button.
50
b) Unscrew the protective cap.
11
/2
2" "
a) Wait until the water temperature falls to 10C below the shut-off
temperature (otherwise it will not be possible to reset the device).
P (kPa)
200
1
11 "
/4
"
Should the shut-off device be activated, it has to be reset to its

original status as follows:
P (mm w.g.)
3/
4"
Reset
Methane at 15C
1/
2"
G (m3/h)
Guideline ratings of boilers (kW)
Size
Diesel oil
Fuel oil
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
DN 65
DN 80
0.650
1.450
2.550
3.800
5.800
8.100
-
0.290
0.580
1.000
1.500
2.300
3.400
-
Methane
60
30 90
45 85 - 170
115 - 230
290 - 580
340 - 690
460 - 930
690 - 1.380
Certification
LPG
50 60
70 80
145 - 230
230 - 290
460 - 580
520 - 750
1.010 - 1.450
1.100 - 1.590
CE mark
Series 541 (98C) fuel shut-off
valves meet the requirements
of Directive 97/23/CE for
pressurised equipment (also
referred to as the PED).
They are therefore classified
in Category IV and granted
the CE mark.
Installation
The fuel shut-off valve must be installed by competent technical
personnel qualified in accordance with current legislation.
The valve sensor must be installed at the top of the boiler or in the
flow pipework within 0,5 m of the boiler, upstream of any other
shut-off control.
I.S.P.E.S.L. mark
The fuel shut-off valve (in our case the valves calibrated to 98C
and 120C) is a component which is I.S.P.E.S.L. approved.
Devices of this type are covered by the following types of
document:
which attests to the positive result of the tests carried out on the
prototype sample and consequently certifies that the series in
question has been approved.

Series 541, calibration 98C
Use: hot water systems (temperature < 100C) - section R
ed. 82 (R.2.A. 4)
The fuel shut-off valve is used in the following types of open vented
system:
- Hot water heating systems where the safety pipe runs
downwards (R3A 1.14).
- Hot water heating systems in existence on the date of the coming
into force of D.M. 1-12-75, where the safety pipe, although having
a minimum diameter greater than 18 mm, does not permit
discharge into the atmosphere of the maximum quantity of vapour
which can be produced in relation to the capacity of the boiler
(R3A 3.1).
It is not used in sealed systems:
- In secondary circuits in heat exchangers supplied with fluids at a
temperature above 100C with controls on the secondary or
where automatic on/off control is not excluded.
CALEFFI
S.p.A.
origina
9
- S.S. 22
gna (NO)
rmici
to d'Ago
nti idrote
Fontane
ILE
28010 enti per impia
MBUSTIB
on
CO
mp
L
Co
DE
VOLA
A. VAL
TAZIONE
TERCETACQUA CALDCCOLTA R
A DI IN
VALVOLR IMPIANTI ADSECONDO RAAPPLICATIVEE.S.L.
.P.
HE
A
PE
I.S
IC
AT
A
CN
OG
IC
OMOL CAZIONI TE ARE TECN /92
DEL 6/8
SPECIFI2/75 E CIRCOL
OT. 8273
1/1
DEL DM N. 68/92, PR
I.S
SUPERI.P.E.S.L
OR
DipartimE SICUREZZA E PREVENZIO
ento di
LA
NE
BIELLA VORO
- Via Ce
rruti, 7
VERBAL
DI INTEE DI TARATU
RA AL
RCETTA
BANCO
PRESSO
ZIONE
DI VA
DEL
RACCOL
IL
TA R FABBRICA COMBUST LVOLA
APPLIC - SPECIF NTE SECO IBILE
ND
ICAZIO
ATIVE
NI TE O
DEL DM
FONTAN
1/12/1 CNICHE
975
ETO D'
AG
:
RCHIO
10
A) MA : 541/100/FI
LE: PN "
IN
1/4
NOMINA
MESSI
B) SERIE
SIONE MINALE: 1 RATURA AM
NO
C) PRES
RI DI TA
METRO
D) DIAMPO DEI VALO 100C
E) CA ERANZA: 95
NE
IO
TOLL
OLOGAZ
DI OM -2-1997
CATO
l 24
CERTIFI/678/97 de
VIC
98C
OGNA
tura no
........
............
Valvola
............
di
............
...
positiva intercettazion
e
,
I.S.P.E. serie 541/10 del combustib
S.
0/
ile ad az
La ve rif L. n VIC/678 FI, DN: 1 1/
4", certi ione
/97
ic a de
ficato
eseguit
lla ta ra del 24-2-97.
a al ba
tu ra de
nc
98 1
lla va lvo
C, camp o con acqua
l'i nt er
alla tem la st at a
o di va
ve
intercett nt o in ch iu lori entro i qu peratura di
ali av
az
su ra
ve
de l di
La tem ione.
sp os iti nuto
pe
vo di
de
ve
valore no i valori amm nto riscontra
es
ta
ed in minale di taratu si in tolleranz rientra nel
ac
a rispe
ra, dichia
tto al
III de lla cordo con qu
anto ind rato dal costr
utt
applica Ra cc olt a R
icato ne
tiv
ll'Appen ore
L'inamo e del DM 1/12 - Sp ec ific az
ion i Te dice
/1975.
vibilit de
cn
di ta ra
ich
lle parti
e
tu
interess
A segu ra re ali zz
ate e de
ito
at
lla posiz
l'identifi del buon esito a m ed ian te
pi om ba ione
cazione
de
seguen
tu
ti da
taratura, ra .
lvola, ve
a) march ti:
per
ngono
io
punzon
b) nume I.S.P.E.S.L.;
ati i
ro della
valvola.
ra:
di taratu
piegati
teriali im ercizio
ed i ma
le
ed es
lvo
delle va ni di pressione buon esito
n
uzione
izio
La costr i per le cond stati eseguiti co valvola a 15
ne
sono ido contatto. Sono a idraulica della
a
ov
re
dei fluidi finale e la pr
otturato
o
sede ed nserva le
il controll
co
ione fra
guarniz ato esercizio
bar.
ng
iale della
Il mater anche in prolu .
za
e
tale ch iche di resisten
ist
caratter
Tempera
le
ISTITUTO
minale
dal
gnata
compa
le.
ENZE
lo se ac pi a or igi na e
nea so
la co
sciar
la ido
ch e
ibile rila
La valvo di ta ra tu ra ,
poss
n
no
di
rimento
ve rb ale
ar
tto
re
sm
lib
di
di
ente al
In caso
unitam
verifica
ti.
ervato
sede di
duplica
va cons
ibito in
Il verbale per essere es
centrale
.
impianto
AVVERT
Il Tecn
ico I.S
.P.E.S.
L.
I S.p.A.
CALEFF e Tecnica
ion
La Direz
58606.0
3
The valve is installed in the fuel supply pipework, in line with the
flow direction indicated by the arrow, even if it is in the vertical
position.
When installing the device, appropriate precautions must be taken
to ensure that the capillary connecting the sensor to the valve does
not become squashed or excessively bent.
In order to prevent tampering or accidental leaks of the sensor,
the latter must be sealed in the pocket (the seal and the securing
wire are included in the package).

who draws up the report after the test has been passed.
The document gives the serial number of the valve, which is
also to be found on the plate fixed to the valve body.
In these cases a temperature relief valve must be installed.

Series 541 calibration 120-140-160-180C
Use: superheated water systems (temperature >100C) - section H
ed. 82 (H.4. 4)
The fuel shut-off device is used in all types of open vented and
sealed systems, except for those fed by solid fuel or with heat
sources other than fire.
The declaration of conformity is the document issued by the

manufacturer which declares that the article in question was made
in accordance with the reference standards for I.S.P.E.S.L.
approval, but without having had a prototype sample approved.
In practice, this is equivalent to a declaration of compliance (i.e. L. 46).
Application diagram
Max 0,5 m
Series 541. threaded
Manual reset fuel shut-off valve. I.S.P.E.S.L. approved and calibrated. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE
(calibration 98C). Positive action (fail-safe). Calibration 98C (or 120C). Threaded connections F x F 1/2 (from
1/2 to 2). Sensor pocket connection 1/2 M. Brass body. Stainless steel springs. Capillary length 5 m (or 10 m).
Maximum temperature (valve side) 85C. Maximum temperature (sensor side) +20% of calibrated temperature.
Maximum working pressure (valve side) using fuel gas 50 kPa. Maximum working pressure (sensor side) 12 bar.
Manual reset fuel shut-off valve. Supplied with declaration of conformity. Positive action (fail-safe). Calibration
140C (160C or 180C). Threaded connections F x F 1/2 (from 1/2 to 2). Sensor pocket connection 1/2 M.
Brass body. Stainless steel springs. Capillary length 5 m (or 10 m). Maximum temperature (valve side) 85C.
Maximum temperature (sensor side) +20% of calibrated temperature. Maximum working pressure (valve side)
using fuel gas 50 kPa. Maximum working pressure (sensor side) 12 bar.
Series 541. flanged
Manual reset fuel shut-off valve. I.S.P.E.S.L. approved and calibrated. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE
(calibration 98C). Positive action (fail-safe). Calibration 98C (or 120C). Flanged connections PN 16 DN 65 (or DN 80).
Sensor pocket connection 1/2 M. Bronze body. Stainless steel springs. Capillary length 5 m (or 10 m). Maximum
temperature (valve side) 85C. Maximum temperature (sensor side) +20% of calibrated temperature. Maximum
working pressure (valve side) using fuel gas 11 kPa. Maximum working pressure (sensor side) 12 bar.
Manual reset fuel shut-off valve. Supplied with declaration of conformity. Positive action (fail-safe). Calibration
140C (160C or 180C). Flanged connections PN 16 DN 65 (or DN 80). Sensor pocket connection 1/2 M. Bronze
body. Stainless steel springs. Capillary length 5 m (or 10 m). Maximum temperature (valve side) 85C. Maximum
temperature (sensor side) +20% of calibrated temperature. Maximum working pressure (valve side) using fuel gas
11 kPa. Maximum working pressure (sensor side) 12 bar.
Series 541. flanged for high pressures

Manual reset fuel shut-off valve. High pressure version. I.S.P.E.S.L. approved and calibrated. Bearing CE mark as
per Directive 97/23/CE (calibration 98C). Positive action (fail-safe). Calibration 98C (or 120C). Flanged
connections PN 16 DN 65 (or DN 80). Sensor pocket connection 1/2 M. Bronze body. Stainless steel springs.
Capillary length 5 m (or 10 m). Maximum temperature (valve side) 85C. Maximum temperature (sensor side)
+20% of calibrated temperature. Maximum working pressure (valve side) using fuel gas 50 kPa. Maximum working
pressure (sensor side) 12 bar.
Manual reset fuel shut-off valve. High pressure version. Supplied with declaration of conformity. Positive action
(fail-safe). Calibration 140C (160C or 180C). Flanged connections PN 16 DN 65 (or DN 80). Sensor pocket
connection 1/2 M. Bronze body. Stainless steel springs. Capillary length 5 m (or 10 m). Maximum temperature
(valve side) 85C. Maximum temperature (sensor side) +20% of calibrated temperature. Maximum working
pressure (valve side) 50 kPa. Maximum working pressure (sensor side) 12 bar.
CALEFFI
Adjustable, anti-scale
thermostatic mixing valve
CALEFFI
series 521
01050/02 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The thermostatic mixing valve is used in systems producing
domestic hot water.
Its function is to maintain the temperature of the mixed water sent
to the user constant at the set value when there are variations in the
temperature and supply pressure of the hot water and incoming
cold water or in the flow rate.
These devices are also available with connections complete with
filters and check valves on the hot and cold water inlets.
Product range
Code 521400/500 Thermostatic mixing valve
Code 521503
Thermostatic mixing valve with check valves on the inlets
Code 521115/122 Thermostatic mixing valve with filters and check valves on the inlets
Sizes 1/2, 3/4

Size 3/4
Sizes 15 mm and 22 mm for copper pipe
- Materials: - Body:
DZR brass
PPO
stainless steel
EPDM
- Shutter:
- Springs:
- Seals:
Temperature setting range:
Temperature stability:
2:1
Min temperature difference between

hot water inlet and mixed water outlet
for optimum performance:
15C
Complying with EN 1287.
3065C
2C
Max working pressure (static):

Max working pressure (dynamic):
Max inlet temperature:
Max inlet pressure ratio (H/C or C/H):
Connections:
- 1/2 and 3/4 M with union tailpiece

- 15 mm and 22 mm compression
14 bar
5 bar
85C
Dimensions
MIN
MAX 7
HOT
MIX
MIX
MIX
MAX 7
MIN
HOT
COLD
COLD
COLD
MAX 7
MIN
HOT
521122
521115
Code
521400
1/2
67
134
152 86,5 65,5
Code
521500
3/4
67
134
152 86,5 65,5
521503
F
A
3/4 71,5 143 156,5 91
Code
521115
15
79
65,5
521122
22 80,5 161
158 163,5 98
F
65,5
132 66,5 65,5
Legionella-scalding risk
In systems producing domestic hot water with storage, in order to
avoid the dangerous infection known as Legionella, the hot water
must be stored at a temperature of at least 60C. At this temperature
it is certain that the growth of the bacteria causing this infection will
be totally eliminated.
At this temperature, however, the water cannot be used directly.
As shown on the diagram opposite, temperatures of more than
50C can cause burning very quickly. For example, at 55C partial
burning will occurr in approximately 30 seconds, while at 60C
partial burning will occurr in approximately 5 seconds. The time
may be reduced by 50 percent or more for children and elderly
people.
In view of the above, it is necessary to install a thermostatic mixing
valve which can:
reduce the temperature at the point of use to a value lower than
that of storage and suitable for sanitary users. For safety reasons,
it is advisable to limit the mixed water temperature to 50C;
maintain the temperature constant when the incoming pressure
and temperature conditions vary.
Thermal disinfection
The diagram opposite
shows the behaviour of
the bacteria Legionella
Pneumophila when the
temperature conditions
of the water in which it is
contained vary.
In order to ensure proper
thermal disinfection,
the values must not be
below 60C.
70
Instant death of bacteria
60
Death of 90% of bacteria in 2 minutes
50
Death of 90% of bacteria in 2 hours
40
30
Optimum temperature
for growth of bacteria
20
10
Surviving bacteria inactive
Temperature - Exposure time

C
75
Total
burning
70
Energy saving
Energy saving is regulated by D.P.R. n 412/93 (Italy) which makes
the use of mixers obligatory on domestic hot water distribution units
with storage which are not otherwise regulated, to restrict to 48C,
with a tolerance of +5C, the temperature of the water flowing into
the distribution system.
The purpose of this temperature limitation is to reduce as much as
possible passive losses through the distribution system, and to
avoid delivery of water which is hotter than required.
65
Partial
burning
60
55
Safety condition.
Maximum exposure
time at a given
temperature
50
45
10
100
1.000
10.000
Seconds
COLD
Anti-scale materials
The material used in the construction of the mixer eliminate
the problem of jamming caused by lime deposits. All the
working parts such as shutter, seats and slide guides are
made of a special anti-scale material, with a low friction
coefficient, guaranteeing that the performance will be
maintained over the long term.
HOT
Operating principle
The controlling element of the thermostatic mixing valve is a
0,1
temperature sensor fully immersed in the mixed water outlet tube
which, as it expands or contracts, continuously establishes the
correct proportion of hot and cold water entering the valve. The
regulation of these flows is by means of a piston sliding in
a cylinder between the hot and cold water passages. Even
Code 521400/500
when there are pressure drops due to the drawing off of hot
or cold water for other uses, or variations in the incoming
temperature, the mixer automatically regulates the water
flow to obtain the required temperature.
Temperature setting and locking

The control knob permits temperature setting between
minimum and maximum in one turn (360). It also has a
tamper-proof system to lock the temperature at the set
value.
Option with check valves

and filters
MIXED
Instant production of hot water

The Caleffi series 521 thermostatic mixing valves cannot be used
in conjunction with boilers with instant production of domestic hot
water. Their addition would compromise the correct operation of the
boiler itself.
p (bar)
1,0
0,5
0,3
Installation
Before installing the mixer, the pipework must be flushed to ensure
that no circulating impurities can harm its operation.
It is always advisable to install filters of suitable capacity where the
water enters the water system.
Mixers codes 521115/22 have filters on the hot and cold water
inlets.
Series 521 thermostatic mixing valves must be installed in
accordance with the installation diagrams given in the instruction
sheet or in this leaflet.
Series 521 thermostatic mixing valves can be installed in any
position, either vertical or horizontal.
The following are shown on the body of the mixer:
hot water inlet, colour red, marked HOT
cold water inlet, colour blue, marked COLD
mixed water outlet marked MIX.
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,03
0,02
0,01
0,005
0,003
0,002
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
0,001
G (l/h)
Kv = 2,6 (m3/h)
Use
The Caleffi series 521 thermostatic mixing valves, given their flow
characteristics, can be installed to control temperature either for
individual uses (e.g. washbasin, bidet, shower) or for multiple uses.
Warning: wherever an antiscald feature is required, Caleffi
series 5212 high performance thermostatic mixing valves need
to be installed.
In order to guarantee the delivery of water mixed at the set
temperature, the thermostatic mixing valves must have a minimum
flow rate of 5 l/min.
Temperature stability
The diagram below shows the stability of the temperature of the
mixed water on variation of the temperature of the stored water.
Check valves
In order to prevent undesirable backsiphonage, check valves
should be installed in systems with thermostatic mixing valves.
Thermostatic mixing valves 521503 and 521115/22 have built-in
check valves on the hot and cold water inlets.
Commissioning
In view of the special purpose of the thermostatic mixing valve, it
must be commissioned in accordance with current standards by
qualified personnel using temperature measuring equipment. Use
of a digital thermometer is recommended for measurement of the
mixed water temperature.
Temperature adjustment
The temperature is set to the required value by means of the knob
with the graduated scale, on the top of the valve.
14
13
12
1 00
11
10
1 00
24
1 00
Temperature setting table
2 min.
90
90
90
10 C
Min
Max
T (C)
27
32
38
44
49
53
58
63
67
80
80
80
Position
70
70
70
Reference conditions: Thot = 68C

Tcold = 13C
60
60
60
15
50
14
13
50
12
11
10
50
40
40
40
30
30
30
Locking the adjustment

After adjustment, the temperature
can be locked at the set value by
means of the knob.
20
20
20
10
10
10
hot water
mixed water
cold water
Hot and cold inlet pressure = 3 bar
24
To do this, unscrew the lock nut on

the top of the knob, remove the
knob itself and put it back in such a
way that the internal reference slide
locates onto the projection on the
shaft below.
2
3
1 MI N
MA
Ball valve
System without recirculation
System with recirculation
Ball valve with

check valve
Thermometer
Backflow preventer
Zone valve
Pump
MIN
MAX 7
COLD
CALEFFI
MIX
HOT
Expansion vessel
Thermostat
Safety valve
System with thermal disinfection

19
20
18
17
16
21
15
12
22
14
23
13
24
WATCH
12
11
10
9
4
5
3
4
MIX
Series 521
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve to EN 1287. Connections 1/2 (or 3/4) M with union tailpieces. DZR alloy
body. Chrome plated. Shutter, regulating seats and sliding surfaces in anti-scale plastic. Seals EPDM. Stainless
steel spring. Maximum working temperature 85C. Setting range 30C to 65C. Maximum working pressure 14 bar.
Tolerance 2C. Provided with tamper-proof setting lock.
Series 521
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve to EN 1287. Connections 3/4 M with union tailpieces. DZR alloy body.
Chrome plated. Shutter, regulating seats and sliding surfaces in anti-scale plastic. Seals EPDM. Stainless steel
spring. Maximum working temperature 85C. Setting range 30C to 65C. Maximum working pressure 14 bar.
Tolerance 2C. Check valve on hot and cold water inlets. Provided with tamper-proof setting lock.
Series 521
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve to EN 1287. Connections for copper pipe 15 mm (or 22 mm). DZR alloy body.
Chrome plated. Shutter, regulating seats and sliding surfaces in anti-scale plastic. Seals EPDM. Stainless steel spring.
Maximum working temperature 85C. Setting range 30C to 65C. Maximum working pressure 14 bar. Tolerance 2C.
Check valve on hot and cold water inlets. Provided with tamper-proof setting lock.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.P.A. I 28010 FONTANETO D'AGOGNA (NO) S.S.229 TEL.INT. +39 0322 8491 R.A. FAX +39 0322 863723
Convertible radiator valve for one-pipe and

two-pipe systems
CALEFFI
455 series
01051/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
The 455 series convertible radiator valve can be used both on
one-pipe and two-pipe radiator systems.
It is fitted for thermostatic control head, thermo-electric actuator and
radio wave control, to automatically regulate the ambient
temperature.
The valve must be installed only at the radiator lower connection,
which is used both as medium inlet and medium outlet.
- Tech. Broch. 01034 Thermostatic radiator valves
- Tech. Broch. 01009 Convertible radiator valves
with thermostatic option.
Thermostatic control heads
- Tech. Broch. 01042 Thermo-electric actuator
- Tech. Broch. 01118 Radio wave temperature control systems
Product range
Valve
455 series Convertible radiator valve for one-pipe and two-pipe systems,
for copper, single and multi-layer plastic pipes
sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1 right, 1 left
Thermostatic control heads, thermo-electric actuator and radio wave control

200 series Thermostatic control head with built-in sensor with liquid-filled element, adjustment scale from 0 to 5 corresponding to 0-28C
201 series Thermostatic control head with remote sensor with liquid-filled element, adjustment scale from 0 to 5 corresponding to 0-28C
202 series Thermostatic control head with built-in sensor with liquid-filled element and LCD type ambient temperature indicator, adjustment
scale from 0 to 5 corresponding to 0-28C
209 series Tamper-proof / anti-theft cap for use in public places for 200 series and 202 series thermostatic control heads
6561 series Thermo-electric actuator
electric supply 230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac/dc)
741 series Electronic actuator with radio receiver - 868 MHz
Materials
Body:
Headwork:
Spring:
Seals:
Control knob:
Probe holder (deflector):
Probe:
Lockshield:
brass EN 1982 CB753S, chrome plated

stainless steel
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
POM
brass EN 1249 CW508L
electric supply C-size batteries
Performance
Medium:
30%
10 bar
5100C
Max. differential pressure (with thermostatic control head): 1 bar
Flow rate to radiator for one-pipe version:
- with manual control knob:
- with thermostatic control head (proportional band 2K):
- radiator:
- pipes:
Probe length:
Probe diameter:
50%
30%
1/2, 3/4, 1 right, 1 left

23 p.1,5, centre distance 40 mm
300 mm
- 1/2 and 3/4
11 mm
- 1
14 mm
Conversion from one-pipe to two-pipe mode and vice versa by
means of 10 mm Allen key.
4

3
2
Dimensions
B
D
B
D
B
C
H
Code
455400
455500
455600
455601
A
B
1/2 23 p. 1,5
3/4 23 p. 1,5
1 D 23 p. 1,5
1 S 23 p. 1,5
C
40
40
40
40
D
44,5
44,5
44,5
44,5
E
267
267
264
264
F
27,5
27,5
27,5
27,5
G
48
48
48
48
H Mass (kg)
0,61
103
0,62
103
0,65
103
0,65
103
Operating principle
The 455 series valve can be used in both one-pipe and two-pipe
In one-pipe systems, radiators are connected in series with respect
to the same manifold outlet. However the 455 series valve, when
configured for this type of system, sends only the 50% of the flow
rate (30% with thermostatic control head) to the radiator, whereas
the remaining medium is by-passed and conveyed to the next
radiator. In this way the radiators can be shut off individually (for
isolation or maintenance) while allowing radiators further
Code
455400 + 200
455500 + 200
455600 + 200
455601 + 200
To next
radiator 100%
C
40
40
40
40
D
44,5
44,5
44,5
44,5
E
267
267
264
264
F
27,5
27,5
27,5
27,5
G H Mass (kg)
64 147 0,78
64 147 0,79
64 147 0,82
64 147 0,82
downstream in the system to continue operating. Furthermore, the

temperature can be regulated automatically using thermostatic
control heads or thermo-electric actuators.
In two-pipe systems, all radiators are connected in parallel with
respect to all the manifold outlets. In this type of system, the 455
series valve sends to the radiator the 100% of the inlet flow rate. The
455 series valve, in two-pipe mode, incorporates in a single device
the dual function of a convertible valve and a lockshield valve, a
feature of systems where the medium inlet valve is connected to the
radiator upper connection and the lockshield valve to the lower
connection.
Example: Flow rate in ring G =200 l/h

Medium temperature at ring inlet 75C
Temperature difference in radiator T = 10C
One-pipe system
To radiator 50%
in by-pass 50%
A
B
1/2 23 p. 1,5
3/4 23 p. 1,5
1 D 23 p. 1,5
1 S 23 p. 1,5
Inlet:
By-pass:
Heat
exchange:
To next
radiator:
200 l/h - 75C

100 l/h - 75C
200 l/h - 70C

100 l/h - 70C
200 l/h - 65C

100 l/h - 65C
100 l/h - 65C
100 l/h - 60C
100 l/h - 55C
200 l/h - 70C
200 l/h - 65C
200 l/h - 60C
CALEFFI
2 3 4
2 3 4
2 3 4
CALEFFI
75C
70C
65C
Example: Flow rate to each radiator G =100 l/h

Medium temperature at radiator inlet 75C
Temperature difference in radiator T = 10C
Two-pipe system
To return
circuit 100%
To radiator 100%
2 3 4
75C
2 3 4
CALEFFI
2 3 4
CALEFFI
Conversion of valve from one-pipe to two-pipe mode
Radiator shut-off
The valve is converted from one-pipe to two-pipe mode by shutting

off the by-pass (1) on the mobile sleeve (2) located above the outlet
connections (3).
The valve is provided preconfigured for one-pipe function, e.g. with
the sleeve (2) in the forward position and the by-pass (1) open. To
convert the valve from the one-pipe factory configuration to the twopipe configuration, remove the plastic cap (4) and fully unscrew the
sleeve (2) to the withdrawn position, by turning the outermost 10 mm
hexagonal head screw. To revert to the one-pipe configuration, carry
out the procedure in reverse order, fully screwing down the sleeve
to the forward position.
The radiator can be isolated, for maintenance or other operations,

by fully closing the obturator (1) using the knob (2) and, after having
removed the plug (4), shutting off the lockshield (3) using the 5 mm
Allen key. In this configuration, the flow rate still reaches the heat
emitters further downstream via the by-pass (5).
1
2
5 mm
4
4
3
2
3
10 mm
Two-pipe application
One-pipe application
In the one-pipe configuration, the 50% of the flow rate circulating in
the ring passes through the radiator (30% with thermostatic control
head). The figure below shows the path taken by the medium: the
water enters from the right-hand connection (1) and is divided into
two parts. One part is by-passed (2) and sent to the next radiator
via the left-hand connection (3), the second part enters the radiator
passing through the obturator (4) (controlled using the knob (5)) and
the probe (6). After the heat exchange, the medium exits the
radiator through the apertures outside the probe (7) and, mixing
with the by-passed flow rate, reaches the downstream radiator.
In the one-pipe configuration, the pipe connections are
interchangeable, therefore the valve can be used with flows in
opposite directions to those indicated in the figure, in order to adapt
it to any installation requirement.
Using the 455 series valve in combination with a thermostatic
control head, the flow rate entering the radiator is reduced from 50%
to 30% of the flow rate arriving at the radiator inlet. This is due to an
increase in head losses caused by the continuous modulation of the
thermostatic control head.
In the two-pipe configuration, the 100% of the flow rate circulating in

the pipe also passes through the heat emitter. In this version it is
suggested that the connection (1) nearest the radiator is used as
the inlet (flow) connection.
The medium enters the radiator through the aperture (2) outside the
probe (3), circulates in the radiator to achieve the heat exchange
and exits the radiator via the probe (3), passing through the
obturator (4) (controlled using the knob (5)) and the outermost
connection (6).
In the two-pipe configuration, circuit balancing may be required on
each radiator by means of the lockshield on each valve. To perform
this operation, first remove the plastic end cap (7) and fully screw
down the pre-regulation lockshield valve (8) using a 5 mm Allen key.
Balancing is achieved by unscrewing the lockshield (8) by the
number of turns needed to reach the desired flow rate value.
5
4
5 mm
9
6
100
4

3
2
250
2,5
180
160
140
120
25
0,25
18
16
14
12
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
450
400
500
350
300
250
180
160
200
140
10
0,1
G (l/h)
G (l/h)
Curve 1: knob fully closed, 100% of the

flow rate in by-pass.
Kv0.01=145 l/h
0,5
0,2
90
10
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
120
0,1
45
40
35
30
80
20
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
100
0,2
10
90
80
70
60
70
50
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
60
900
0,5
4,5
4
3,5
3
1000
800
700
600
450
500
400
350
300
200
50
100
60
10
250
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
180
0,25
18
16
14
12
160
25
140
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
120
45
40
35
30
90
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
80
20
200
90
80
70
60
70
50
450
400
350
300
45
100
500
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
40
2,5
180
160
140
120
p (kPa)
1 2 F.O.
9
8
7
6
50
250
200
900
800
700
600
35
4,5
4
3,5
3
0,5
1000
30
450
400
350
300
p (mm w.g.)
25
500
10
18
9
8
7
6
4

3
2
900
800
700
600
16
p (kPa)
1 2 3
1000
20
p (mm w.g.)
14
455 series valve, ONE-PIPE configuration: overall

hydraulic characteristics of the valve with lockshield
valve built into the horizontal sleeve in the fully open
position. Head losses measured at the pipe connections.
455 series valve TWO-PIPE configuration: variation of the

overall hydraulic characteristics of the valve with a
thermostatic control head during balancing by means of
the lockshield valve built into the horizontal sleeve.
Proportional band 2K. Head losses measured at the pipe
connections.
12
No. of
lockshield
valve turns
0,5
1,5
2,5
F.O.
Kv (m3/h)
0,31
0,47
0,55
0,57
0,58
0,61
0,62
Kv0.01 (l/h)
31
47
55
57
58
61
62
Kv=1,45 m3/h
Curve 3: knob fully open,

50% of flow rate to radiator,
50% in by-pass.
Kv0.01=170 l/h
Kv=1,7
m3/h
Kv0.01=200 l/h
Kv=2,0 m3/h
25
0,25
18
16
14
12
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
Kv0.01=55 l/h
Kv=0,55 m3/h
0,1
500
450
400
350
300
250
180
200
G (l/h)
Curve 1: thermostatic control head instead

of control knob, proportional band
2K, 100% of flow rate to radiator.
By-pass not active in two-pipe
mode.
Curve 2: knob fully open,
100% of flow rate to radiator.
By-pass not active in two-pipe
mode.
G (l/h)
No. of
lockshield
valve turns
0,5
1,5
F.O.
Kv (m3/h)
0,34
0,62
0,78
0,91
1,09
1,15
Kv0.01 (l/h)
34
62
78
91
109
115
Kv0.01=110 l/h
Kv=1,1 m3/h
0,5
0,2
160
10
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
140
0,1
45
40
35
30
120
20
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
100
0,2
500
450
400
350
300
250
200
180
160
140
120
80
90
100
70
60
40
35
30
45
50
20
10
12
10
25
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
18
0,25
18
16
14
12
16
25
50
90
80
70
60
90
0,5
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
80
100
10
2,5
180
160
140
120
70
250
60
200
50
45
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
4,5
4
3,5
3
500
45
40
35
30
14
20
90
80
70
60
4

3
2
50
100
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
450
400
350
300
40
2,5
180
160
140
120
9
8
7
6
35
250
200
900
800
700
600
30
4,5
4
3,5
3
1 1,5 2 F.O. p (kPa)
0,5
1000
450
400
350
300
p (mm w.g.)
25
500
10
16
9
8
7
6
20
p (kPa)
4

3
2
900
800
700
600
14
1000
12
p (mm w.g.)
455 series valve TWO-PIPE configuration: variation of the

overall hydraulic characteristics of the valve with shut-off
control knob fully open during balancing by means of the
lockshield valve built into the horizontal sleeve. Head
losses measured at the pipe connections.
18
455 series valve TWO-PIPE configuration: overall

hydraulic characteristics of the valve with lockshield
valve built into the horizontal sleeve in the fully open
position. Head losses measured at the pipe connections.
10
4

3
2
Curve 2: thermostatic control head instead of

the control knob, proportional band
2K, 30% of flow rate to radiator, 70%
in by-pass.
Versatile installation
The 455 series valve can be installed in both new and old
systems. The tilted control knob reduces the overall dimensions
of the valve, enabling it to be used in confined spaces.
The 455 series valve is suitable in the case of building
renovations or modernisation of existing heating systems. The
system can be constructed by laying out the pipes in the floor
slab only or by using the skirting board to route the pipes,
leaving the walls intact.
Sizing method
Valve sizing
To correctly size the system, 455 series valves are chosen by
identifying the overall head loss, according to the flow rate, by
means of the hydraulic characteristic diagrams in the left-hand
column of the previous page. The overall head losses of the
valve, used in combination with the thermostatic control head,
have been calculated with a proportional band of 2K (EN 215
standard).
Probe sizing
After having checked with
the manufacturer whether
the radiator is suitable for
installation in a mono or
two-pipe system, the correct
operation of the valve is
guaranteed
by
the
structure of the body and
by
the
body-probe
connection, whereas the
length of the probe does not affect the performance of the valve
and is therefore appropriate. Nevertheless the probe can be
extended by means of the 453 series extension, even if this is
not strictly necessary.
Conversion to thermostatic valve

The 455 series valves can be converted to thermostatic
valves applying the thermostatic control heads 200, 201
and 202 series instead of the manual control knob. The
thermostatic control head can be used with the pipe
connections either facing the wall or pointing to the floor.
The sensor built into the control head is far enough from
the valve body and is able to perform a correct ambient
temperature reading, without being influenced by the heat
radiated by the valve body itself.
Thermostatic control heads or thermo-electric actuators

must always be installed in a horizontal position. The
sensible element of thermostatic control heads must never
be installed in niches, radiator cabinets, behind curtains or
exposed to direct sunlight, otherwise false readings may
occur.
Accessories
200
2 3 4
Code
Installation
The 455 series valves must always be installed with the probe
horizontal, but the pipe connections can face the wall or point
towards the floor.
Combination with thermo-electric actuators

The 455 series valves can be used in combination with the
6561 series thermo-electric actuator, instead of the manual
control knob.
Combination with thermostatic
thermo-electric actuators
tech. broch. 01034
Thermostatic control head for

convertible radiator valves; built-in
sensor with liquid-filled element.
Graduated scale from 0 to 5
corresponding to a temperature
adjustment range from 0C to 28C.
With adapter.
control
heads
200000
201
Code
tech. broch. 01034
Thermostatic control head for

thermostatic and convertible radiator
valves; with remote sensor.
corresponding to a
temperature adjustment
range from 0C to 28C.
Length of capillary
pipe: 2 metres.
With adapter.
201000
and
202
Code
202000
Thermostatic control head for radiator

valves; built-in sensor with liquid-filled
element.
With LCD type ambient temperature
indicator.
corresponding to a temperature
adjustment range from 0C to 28C.
Ambient temperature display range from
16C to 26C.
With adapter.
Patent application:
N MI2007U000405
209
6561
tech. broch. 01034
Tamper-proof / anti-theft cap for use in

public places.
To be used with special Allen key
code 209001.
Code
209000
209
tech. broch. 01034
Special Allen key for tightening

tamper-proof anti-theft cap.
To be used with 209 series tamper-proof
caps.
Code
tech. broch. 01042
Normally closed.
Electric supply: 230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac)/(dc).
Power consumption: 3 W.
Protection class: IP 44 (in vertical position).
Supply cable: 80 cm.
With adapter.
Code
656102
656104
230 V
24 V
209001
741
tech. broch. 01118
Electronic actuator with radio

receiver - 868 MHz.
For convertible or thermostatic
radiator valves.
Can be combined with 740 series
systems.
Electric supply: 2 x 1,5 V C-size alkaline
batteries.
Protection class: IP 30.
472
Thermostatic control head with remote
adjusting knob, liquid-filled element.
Working temperature range: 6-28C.
Length of capillary pipe: 2 metres.
Code
Code
472000
741000
455 series
Convertible one/two-pipe radiator valve, fitted for thermostatic control heads, thermo-electric actuators and radio wave controls.
Connections for copper, single and multi layer plastic pipes 23 p.1,5 from 10 to 18 mm. Centre distance 40 mm. Brass body, chrome
plated. Manual control knob, white RAL 9010, in ABS. Probe holder (deflector) in POM. EPDM gaskets. Brass probe 300 mm. Brass
lockshield valve. Working temperature range 5100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum differential pressure (with
thermostatic control head fitted) 1 bar. Convertible from one-pipe to two-pipe mode and vice versa by means of Allen key. Flow rate
to radiator for the one-pipe version 50% with manual control knob (30% with thermostatic control head).
200 series
Thermostatic control head for thermostatic and convertible radiator valves. Built-in sensor with liquid-filled element. Maximum
ambient temperature 50C. Graduated scale from 0 to 5 corresponding to a temperature adjustment range from 0C to 28C, with the
possibility of locking and limiting the temperature. Frost protection cut-in at 7C. With adapter.
201 series
Thermostatic control head for thermostatic and convertible radiator valves. Remote sensor with liquid-filled element. Maximum
ambient temperature 50C. Graduated scale from 0 to 5 corresponding to a temperature adjustment range from 0C to 28C, with the
possibility of locking and limiting the temperature. Frost protection cut-in at 7C. With adapter.
202 series
Thermostatic control head with temperature indicator. Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Graduated scale from 0 to 5
corresponding to a temperature adjustment range from 0C to 28C, with the possibility of locking and limiting the temperature. Frost
protection cut-in at 7C. Ambient temperature display range from 16 to 26C. With adapter.
209 series
Tamper-proof / anti-theft cap for thermostatic control head, for use in public places.
6561 series
Thermo-electric actuator. Normally closed. Electric supply 230 V (ac); 24 V (ac); 24 V (dc). Starting current 1 A. Working current
13 mA (230 V (ac)), 140 mA (24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)). Power consumption 3 W. Protection class IP 44 (in vertical position). Maximum
ambient temperature 50C. Operating time from 120 to 180 seconds. Length of supply cable 80 cm.
Code 741000
Electronic actuator with radio receiver. Electric supply 2 x 1,5 V C-size alkaline batteries. Maximum power consumption 9 mA.
Autonomy 1 year. Reception frequency 868 MHz. Protection class IP 30. Insulation class III. Maximum signal range in free air 120 m.
CALEFFI
Flow switch
CALEFFI
626 series
cert. n 0003
01052/07 GB
ISO 9001
Function
The flow switch detects whether there is any flow in the piping and
opens or closes an electrical contact. It is normally used in heating,
air-conditioning, refrigeration, water treatment, additive pumping
and process systems in general. By means of the flow switch it is
possible: to control devices such as pumps, burners, compressors,
refrigerators, motorized valves; to turn on indicator and alarm
devices and regulate equipments for dosing water additives.
In heating systems, especially, the flow switch has the objective of
switching the burner off in case of a lack of medium circulation
within the water heater circuit. A lack of circulation would otherwise
impair the operation of the temperature-sensitive safety and
protection devices.
Product range
Code 626600 Flow switch
Code 626009 Set of paddles
size 1 M
for pipe diameters from 1 to 8
Dimensions
Connection:
Pipe adjustability:
Electric specifications
Voltage:
Current:
Protection class:
Mark:
Performance
Medium:
Medium temperature range:

stainless steel
stainless steel
stainless steel
EPDM
Materials
Body:
Cover:
Microswitch protection casing:
Bellows rod and bellows:
Paddle for pipes:
Microswitch spring:
O-Ring seals:
drinking water and glycol solutions

50%
10 bar
-30120C
55C
1 M
from 1 to 8
A
B
250 V
15 (5) A
IP 54
CE
Code
626600
A
1"
B
63
C
86,5
D
134,5
E
74
F
Weight (Kg)
60,5
0,930
Operating principle
The flow switch is composed of a blade (1) integral with a control

rod (2) connected, at the top, to an adjustable counter spring (3).
The assembly, by turning around a pin under the action of the water
flow, operates a microswitch contained in a protective casing (4). At
rest, the counter spring keeps the microswitch contact open. When
the increasing flow rate of the medium within the piping becomes
equal or greater than the trip flow rate, the thrust (5) on the blade
applied (1) by the flow overcomes the opposing force applied by
the adjustable spring (3) thus making the microswitch contact
close. With a decreasing flow rate, on reaching the trip flow rate
values, the flow thrust on the blade is not enough to overcome the
opposing force applied by the adjustable spring, so the blade
returns to the rest position and the microswitch contact opens.
The trip values for closing (increasing flow) and opening
(decreasing flow) the microswitch contact can be modified by
means of the adjusting screw (6).
Electric component protection

A metal bellows (7) separates the electric and the hydraulic parts.
Since this is the most stressed part that must prevent any contact
between the medium and the electric components, it is made of
stainless steel. Stainless steel is moreover used in the construction
of other mechanical components as well so as to make them
immune from corrosion.
Electric switchover contact

The electric switchover contact indistinctly permits turning on or off
any electric device at the trip flow rate.
4
6
3
8
Insulating protective cover

The O-Ring seal (8) between the body and the cover,
with a protection class of IP 54, ensures operation in particularly
damp and dusty places. The insulating protective casing (4) on the
microswitch avoids the risk of accidental contact when calibrating.
Both the microswitch protection and the cover are made of
self-extinguishing V-0 class plastic.
Setting screw
The setting screw (6) allows easy adjustment of the trip flow rate as
desired.
2
5
Certification
The water flow switch 626 series is made by Caleffi S.p.A. in
compliance with the essential safety requirements of directive
89/336/EC and 72/23/EC of the European Parliament and Council of
the European Union.
p (mm w.g.)
1 1/4"
1 1/2"
p (kPa)
2"
900
800
700
9
8
600
450
400
4,5
4
350
3,5
300
250
2,5
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
4"
6"
p (kPa)
8"
10
9
8
900
800
700
600
450
400
4,5
4
350
3,5
300
250
2,5
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
0,9
0,8
500
200
100
0,7
90
80
70
60
0,6
60
0,6
45
40
0,45
0,40
0,5
0,45
45
40
50
0,40
0,7
0,5
35
0,35
35
0,35
30
0,30
30
0,30
25
0,25
25
0,25
18
16
14
0,18
0,16
0,14
12
0,12
1
10
1 1/4
21
1 1/2
32,5
2
58
0,1
1000
G (m3/h)
Size
Kv* (m3/h)
600
700
800
900
500
250
300
350
400
450
200
120
140
160
180
60
70
80
90
100
50
25
30
35
40
45
20
12
14
16
18
10
7
8
9
16
18
20
14
12
10
4
4,5
3,5
2,5
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
0,8
0,9
0,2
0,7
0,1
10
0,12
12
10
0,2
3,5
4
4,5
0,18
0,16
0,14
14
18
16
20
2,5
3
0,2
0,6
20
3"
0,9
0,8
0,5
50
1000
2 1/2"
90
80
70
0,35
0,40
0,45
100
0,30
200
0,25
500
10
p (mm w.g.)
1000
1"
G (m3/h)
Size
Kv* (m3/h)
2 1/2
120
3
180
4
350
6
950
8
1950
*The stated Kv values refer to the head loss within the pipes with diameters from 1 to 8 and standard length of 1 m, in which flow switches,
equipped with a blade of adequate size, are installed.
Reference standards
Setting
In heating systems with a closed expansion tank, where circulation

is ensured by motor pumps, the flow switch must be used to stop
the heat supply to the generator when the pumps stop and there is
no circulation.
The setting is made by turning the screw (1) clockwise to close the
contacts at higher flow rates or anticlockwise for lower values.
Water circulation is indeed essential for safety and

temperature-sensitive protection devices such as thermostats,
thermal discharge valves and fuel shut-off valves to work properly.
After making the adjustment, lock the setting screw with the ring nut (2).
The operator is protected against accidental contact with electrical
parts of the flow switch by an insulating protective cover (3) on the
microswitch.
3
2
1
Installation
The unit is equipped with a set of blades (1), to be used for different
pipe diameters, particularly sized to allow easy installation and
minimal head losses.
For diameters equal to or greater than 3 (DN 80), it is necessary to
add to the preassembled blades in increasing order the long blade
(2) (supplied in the package), just cutting it to the size
corresponding to the desired diameter.
Outline of the microswitch connections:

Flow switch used to turn on a device with no flow
LINE
1
COM.
3
N/O
2
N/C
INLET
3"-DN 80
Flow switch used to turn on a device with flow

LINE
4"-DN100
1
COM.
5"-DN125
2
1
1"
6"-DN150
1
1
2"
DN175
3
N/O
2
N/C
8"-DN200
INLET
2 1/2
1,3
1,7
2,6
6,8
10 16,5 37
with
decreasing
flow
0,9 1,25 1,9
2,2
3,7
5,2
8,5 14,5 33
with
increasing
flow
2,8 3,8
5,9
6,7 11,7 15,8 21,5 43
76
with
decreasing
flow
2,7 3,7
5,8
6,6 11,5 15,6 21
70
FACTORY
SETTING
20 mm
80 mm
MAXIMUM
SETTING
36
with
increasing
flow
Diameter
pipe
1 1/2
1 1/4
Trip flow rate (m3/h) for horizontal installation*

When the trip flow rate is reached or exceeded with an increasing
flow, contacts 1 and 3 of the microswitch close, while contacts 1
and 2 open.
On the contrary, when the trip flow rate is reached with a
decreasing flow, contacts 1 and 2 close.
The flow switch should preferably be installed on the pipe with the
control rod upright, respecting the flow direction indicated by the
arrow on the cover and on the body exterior.
For blade proper operation it is necessary to install the flow switch
by respecting the distance shown on the drawing, using a sleeve
welded for total passage.
*For vertical installations, it is necessary to use the setting screw (1)

to identify the optimal trip point.
Example of using the flow switch in a plumbing system
In systems for instantaneous hot water production with heat exchangers, the flow switch has the job of governing the pump and enabling water
circulation in the exchanger primary circuit when required by the user.
Instantaneous production of hot water
Mixed production of hot water

C F
Tmax
Shut-off valve
Mixing valve
Pump
Check valve
Autoflow
Example of flow switch use in a refrigerating system or heat

pump
The flow switch is useful on machinery in general where water
circulation is considered essential for the equipment to work
properly.
A typical example is the chiller unit shown in the figure.
CHILLER UNIT / HEAT PUMP

COMPRESSOR
The two flow switches trip to stop the compressor from working if
one of the following conditions occurs:
- insufficient or no flow of cooling water in the condenser (danger
of overheating)
- insufficient or no flow of refrigerated water (danger of ice forming
on the evaporator and liquid returning to the compressor suction
side).
SECONDARY
CONDENSER
CONDENSER
EXPANSION
VALVE
EVAPORATOR
SECONDARY
EVAPORATOR
626 series
Flow switch. 1 M connection. CE certificate in accordance with directives 89/336 EC and 72/23 EC. Brass body.
Self-extinguishing polycarbonate cover and microswitch protection casing. Stainless steel bellows and bellows rod, paddles
for pipes and microswitch spring. EPDM O-Ring seals. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Medium temperature range
-30120C. Maximum ambient temperature 55C. Medium drinking water and glycol solutions; Maximum percentage of glycol
50%. Voltage 250 V. Current 15 (5) A. Protection class IP 54. Pipes adjustability from 1 to 8.
CALEFFI
Copyright 2007 Calef fi
Safety relief valves for heating

and hot water systems
CALEFFI
series 311-312-313-314-513-514-527
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01053/03 GB
General
Series 311, 312, 313, 314, 513, 514, 527 safety (pressure relief)
valves are made by Caleffi S.p.A. in compliance with the essential
safety requirements laid down by Directive 97/23/CE of the
European Parliament and the Council of the European Union for
harmonisation of member States with regard to pressurised
equipment.
Function
111 5
Safety relief valves are typically used for controlling pressure on

boilers in heating systems, on stored hot water cylinders in
domestic hot water systems and in water systems generally.
When the calibrated pressure is reached, the valve opens, and, by
means of the discharge to atmosphere, prevents the pressure of
the system from reaching levels which would be dangerous for the
boiler and the components in the system itself.
Series 527 valves are fail-safe devices, i.e. they are
guaranteed to operate even in the case of wear or breakage of the
diaphragm.
I.S.P.E.S.L.
Product range
Series 311
Series 312
Series 313
Series 314
Series 513
Series 514
Series 527
Standard safety relief valve. F-F connections

Sizes 1/2 , 3/4
Standard safety relief valve. M-F connections
Size 1/2
Standard safety relief valve with pressure gauge or pressure gauge connection. F-F connections
Sizes 1/2, 3/4
Standard safety relief valve with pressure gauge or pressure gauge connection. M-F connections
Size 1/2
Standard safety relief valve. F-F connections
Sizes 1/2x3/4, 1x1 1/4, 1 1/4x 1 1/2
Standard safety relief valve. M-F connections
Size 1/2
I.S.P.E.S.L. approved fail-safe safety relief valve. F-F connections
Sizes 1/2x3/4, 3/4x1, 1x1 1/4, 1 1/4x 1 1/2
Materials:
Body:
Cover:
Control spindle:
Obturator seal:
Diaphragm:
Spring:
Control knob:
Nominal pressure:
Temperature range:
1/2-3/4; brass EN 12165 CW617N

1-1 1/4; brass EN 1982 CB753S
513-514 (1/2); PA 6 G 30
EPDM
EPDM
steel UNI 3823
311-312-313-314-513 (1/2)-514; ABS
513 (1 and 1 1/4)-527; PA 6 G 20
PN 10
5110C
Performance:
Max opening pressure:
Min closing differential:
Medium:
PED Category:
527; Pset +10%Pset

311-312-313-513-514; Pset +20%Pset
Pset - 20%Pset
water, air
IV
Calibrations:
Series 311
2-2,5-3-3,5-4-5-6-7-8 bar (2 - 5 bar only 3/4)
Series 312
2,5-3-3,5-4-6-7-8 bar
Series 313 with pressure gauge
2,5-3-6-7-8 bar
Series 314 with pressure gauge
2,5-3-6-7-8 bar
Series 313 with pressure gauge connection
3 bar
Series 314 with pressure gauge connection
3-6 bar
Series 513
1,5-2-2,5-3-3,5-6-7-8 bar
Series 514
2-2,5-2,7-3-3,5-4-6-7-8 bar
Series 527 standard
2,25-2,5-2,7-3-3,5-4-4,5-5-5,4-6 bar
Series 527 special
1-1,5-2-7-8 bar
Dimensions
F
D
65,5
74,5
E
25,5
27,5
D
F
E
78 25,5 61
B
C
A
Code
3144.. 1/2 1/2 32
A
B
Code
5144.. 1/2 1/2
C
23
D
E
81,5 29,5
C
Code
A
B
3114.. 1/2 1/2 19,5
3115.. 3/4 3/4 24
D
69,5
D
E
78,5 29,5
E
25,5
A
E
C
Code
A
B
26
5274.. 1/2 3/4
30
5275.. 3/4
1
5276.. 1 1 1/4 39
5277.. 1 1/4 1 1/2 42,5
D
93
136
166
185
E
33
39,5
48
56
Code
A
B
C
3124.. 1/2 1/2 23,5
C
19
Code
A
B
5134.. 1/2 1/2
A
G
F
Code
A
B
C
D
E
F
3134.. 1/2 1/2 21,5 72 25,5 61
3135.. 3/4 3/4 24 74,5 27,5 61
G
24
24
Code
A
B
5136.. 1 1 1/4
5137.. 1 1/4 1 1/2
C
38
44
D
144
187
E
48
57,5
Code completion
bar
bar
bar
1
1,5
2
2,25
2,5
10
15
20
22
25
2,7
3
3,5
4
4,5
27
30
35
40
45
5
5,4
6
7
8
50
54
60
70
80
Safety relief valves for heating systems, I.S.P.E.S.L. approved and

calibrated
Series 527 safety relief valves meet the technical requirements of point 2, chapter R.2.A. of section R
1982 Edition, technical application specification of Part II - D.M.:1/12/75.
Operating details
Discharge overpressure <10%
The full discharge capacity of the valve must be reached at pressure values Ps<1,1Pset.
This characteristic, combined with the particular range of calibration values, enables the correct valve to
be selected for the maximum working pressure value of the system or the boiler.
Closing differential <20%
The valve must close again within pressure values Pr>0,8Pset. This characteristic makes it possible to
limit the water loss from the system if the valve opens.
Fail-safe action
The performance of the valve is guaranteed even in the case of wear or breakage of the diaphragm.
Increased outlet diameter
This feature makes the reduction in the discharge capacity or the variation in behaviour on opening or
closing negligible due to the fitting of discharge pipework.
Certification
Outl.
(mm)
Nett
area
(cm2)
Calibn. Nom.disch. Clos.

press. press. press.
(bar)
(bar)
(bar)
Outfl. Disch. flow

coeff.
rate
K
W (kg/h)
Maximum
boiler rating
(kW)
(kcal/h)
1/2
15
1,767
1,10
0,80
0,79
140,38
81,6
1/2
15
1,767
1,50
1,65
1,20
0,79
175,73
102,1
87.800
1/2
15
1,767
2,20
1,60
0,79
211,17
122,7
105.500
1/2
15
1,767
2,25
2,475 1,80
0,79
226,39
131,6
113.100
1/2
15
1,767
2,50
2,75
2,00
0,79
246,36
143,2
123.100
1/2
15
1,767
2,70
2,97
2,16
0,79
261,76
152,2
130.800
1/2
15
1,767
3,30
2,40
0,79
282,35
164,1
141.100
1/2
15
1,767
3,50
3,85
2,80
0,79
318,09
184,9
159.000
1/2
15
1,767
4,40
3,20
0,79
353,93
205,8
176.900
1/2
15
1,767
4,50
4,95
3,60
0,79
386,60
224,8
193.200
1/2
15
1,767
5,50
4,00
0,79
425,91
247,6
212.900
1/2
15
1,767
5,40
5,94
4,32
0,79
456,89
265,6
228.400
1/2
15
1,767
6,60
4,80
0,79
483,25
281,0
241.600
1/2
15
1,767
7,70
5,60
0,79
558,42
324,7
279.200
1/2
15
1,767
8,80
6,40
0,79
628,22
365,3
314.100
3/4
20
3,1416
1,10
0,80
0,67
211,66
123,0
105.800
3/4
20
3,1416
1,50
1,65
1,20
0,67
264,95
154,0
132.400
3/4
20
3,1416
2,20
1,60
0,67
318,38
185,1
159.100
3/4
20
3,1416
2,25
2,475 1,80
0,67
341,33
198,4
170.600
3/4
20
3,1416
2,50
2,75
2,00
0,67
371,45
215,9
185.700
3/4
20
3,1416
2,70
2,97
2,16
0,67
394,66
229,4
197.300
3/4
20
3,1416
3,30
2,40
0,67
425,70
247,5
212.800
3/4
20
3,1416
3,50
3,85
2,80
0,67
479,59
278,8
239.700
3/4
20
3,1416
4,40
3,20
0,67
533,63
310,3
266.800
3/4
20
3,1416
4,50
4,95
3,60
0,67
582,89
338,9
291.400
3/4
20
3,1416
5,50
4,00
0,67
642,16
373,4
321.000
3/4
20
3,1416
5,40
5,94
4,32
0,67
688,87
400,5
344.400
3/4
20
3,1416
6,60
4,80
0,67
728,61
423,6
364.300
3/4
20
3,1416
7,70
5,60
0,67
841,95
489,5
420.900
3/4
20
3,1416
8,80
6,40
0,67
947,19
550,7
473.500
25
4,9087
1,10
0,80
0,88
434,38
252,5
217.100
25
4,9087
1,50
1,65
1,20
0,88
543,74
316,1
271.800
25
4,9087
2,20
1,60
0,88
653,40
379,9
326.600
25
4,9087
2,25
2,475 1,80
0,88
700,49
407,3
350.200
25
4,9087
2,50
2,75
2,00
0,88
762,30
443,2
381.100
25
4,9087
2,70
2,97
2,16
0,88
809,94
470,9
404.900
25
4,9087
3,30
2,40
0,88
873,65
508,0
436.800
25
4,9087
3,50
3,85
2,80
0,88
984,23
572,3
492.100
70.100
25
4,9087
4,40
3,20
0,88 1095,13
636,8
547.500
25
4,9087
4,50
4,95
3,60
0,88 1196,22
695,6
598.100
25
4,9087
5,50
4,00
0,88 1317,87
766,3
658.900
25
4,9087
5,40
5,94
4,32
0,88 1413,72
822,0
706.800
25
4,9087
6,60
4,80
0,88 1495,28
869,5
747.600
25
4,9087
7,70
5,60
0,88 1727,88
1004,7
863.900
25
4,9087
8,80
6,40
0,88 1943,86
1130,3
971.900
1 1/4
32
8,0424
1,10
0,80
0,74
348,0
299.200
1 1/4
32
8,0424
1,50
1,65
1,20
0,74
749,13
435,6
374.500
1 1/4
32
8,0424
2,20
1,60
0,74
900,22
523,4
450.100
1 1/4
32
8,0424
2,25
2,475 1,80
0,74
965,10
561,2
482.500
1 1/4
32
8,0424
2,50
2,75
0,74 1050,25
610,7
525.100
1 1/4
32
8,0424
2,70
2,97
2,16
0,74 1115,89
648,8
557.900
1 1/4
32
8,0424
3,30
2,40
0,74 1203,66
699,9
601.800
1 1/4
32
8,0424
3,50
3,85
2,80
0,74 1356,02
788,5
678.000
1 1/4
32
8,0424
4,40
3,20
0,74 1508,81
877,3
754.400
1 1/4
32
8,0424
4,50
4,95
3,60
0,74 1648,09
958,3
824.000
1 1/4
32
8,0424
5,50
4,00
0,74 1815,69
1055,8
907.800
1 1/4
32
8,0424
5,40
5,94
4,32
0,74 1947,74
1132,6
973.800
1 1/4
32
8,0424
6,60
4,80
0,74 2060,11
1197,9 1.030.000
1 1/4
32
8,0424
7,70
5,60
0,74 2380,57
1384,3 1.190.200
1 1/4
32
8,0424
8,80
6,40
0,74 2678,14
1557,3 1.339.000
2,00
598,47
CE mark
Series 527 safety relief
valves
meet
the
requirements of Directive
97/23/CE for pressurised
equipment (also referred
to as the PED).
They
are
therefore
classified in Category IV
and granted the CE mark.
I.S.P.E.S.L. mark
The series 527 safety relief valve is a component which is
I.S.P.E.S.L. approved. Devices of this type are covered by the
following types of document:
The approval certificate is the document issued by the
I.S.P.E.S.L., which attests to the positive result of the tests carried
out on the prototype sample and consequently certifies that the
series in question has been approved.
covered by the certificate which is manufactured during the five
years validity period is approved for an indefinite period.
who draws up the report after the test has been passed.
The document gives the serial number of the valve, which is also to
be found on the plate fixed to the valve body.
CALEFFI
S.p.A.
original
e
229
O) - S.S.
ogna (N
QUA
eto d'Agnti idrotermici
TI AD AC
Fontan
IMPIAN
28010 nenti per impia
R
PE
R
A
ARIA.
Compo
CCOLTA
CUREZZ
A DI SI CALDA E ADCONDO RA IVE DEL DM
SE
AT
VALVOL
IC
A
PL
HE AP
OLOGAT
IC
OM
CN
LA
TE
5
VALVOIFICAZIONI
1/12/7
- SPEC
ISTITUTO
I.S
SUPERI.P.E.S.L
OR
DipartimE SICUREZZ E PREVENZI
A LA
ONE
ento di
BIELLA VORO
- Via Ce
rruti, 7
VERBAL
E
DI SICUDI TARATURA
REZZA
AL BA
SECOND
PR
NC
TECNIC O RACCOL ESSO IL FA O DI VALVOL
BB
TA
HE AP
PLICAT R - SPEC RICANTE A
IF
IVE DE
L DM 1/ICAZIONI
12/197
FONT
5
ni
prestazio
iva. Le so di rottura
zza posit
che in ca
a sicure
RCHIO:
A ) MA DELLO: 527 no garantite an
a.
so
MO
ran
)
B
mb
della me LE: PN 10
NOMINALE: DN 3/4"
NA
ESSIONE
C ) PR ETRO NOMI ZIO: 20 mm2
D ) DIAM ETRO ORIFI 3,1416 cm 3 bar
A:
AM
DI
TT
Pt =
)
NE
E
TURA:
%
ZIONE
F ) SE ESSIONE TARA NE MAX: 103,30 bar
Ps = rica
G ) PR VRAPPRESSIO
ARICO:
H ) SO ESSIONE SC NE: Atmosfere 20% Pt
SIO
I ) PR NTROPRES IUSURA: mino
CO
CH
)
L
ARTO DI
lvole
M ) SC
sulle va
ortati
Dati rip
RCHIO
a ) MA DELLO
MO
)
b
ESSIONE
c ) PR TARATURA ARICO
DI
h)
DI SC
00 Kcal/
RTATA
d ) PO7,5 kW (212.8
o
24
effluss
iente di
Coeffic
7
K = 0,6
Alzata
mm
L.
h = 7,3
.P.E.S.
ato I.S
Certific
319/00
n. VS
ego
d'impi
di
ui
Fl
A
A CALD
- ACQU
- ARIA
ico
di scar one 1982
Portata a R Edizi
RaccoltPunto 2.3.1
R.2.A
A
x
0,9 x K
W= 0,005 x M
DN 1
Size
DO 20
3/4
ANETO
D'AGOG
NA ......
............
- Valvo
............
la
............
n. VS 31modello 527
.....
e DN 3/
9/00.
4". Certif
- Ti po
icato I.S
.P.E.S.L.
a se de
pi an a
ca ric at
- Diam
etro D
a da
m ol la
0 = 20 m
di re tta
m.
- Guar
.
niz
stelo gu ione interpo
sta tra
idato.
sede ed
- Vite
otturato
di rego
re
e con
lazione
mezzo
di
su
valvola riscontro all ghiera file
per la
tta
invariaba parte superio ta con blo
cc
ilit de
- Bl oc
lla tensre del corpo o a
co
de
ione de
posizion m ec ca nic o
lla moll lla
a.
della pa e di taratura de l sis te m a
di regolarte superiore assicurato m di ta ra tu ra
e
che im
ed
zione de
pedisce iante piombade lla
lla tensio
l'acces
- La ta
ne della
so alla tura
ratura
m
oll
vite
a.
de
con ar
ia com lla valvola di
pressa
sic
e cont urezza sta
- La va
ropressio
ta
lvo
ne atm eseguita
sc ar ica la, alla pres
osferica
dell'alza re il flu id o sione di 3 ba
.
r,
in m od
ta.
o co ntha incominciat
in uo ,
- A se
co n in o a
gu
izi o
l'identif ito del buon
es
ica
ito
zio
seguen
della
ne della
ti dati:
valvola, prova di ta
ratu
vengon
- Pres
o punz ra, per
sione di
onati i
taratura
: 3 bar
- Marc
hio I.S.P.
E.S.L.
- Num
ero della
valvola
DN
79
one 19
Edizi
9
olta E
M = 0,85.70 Kg/h
) - Racc
W = 42
ico (aria
2 Kg/h
di scar
2.
= 649,3
W
Portata2. Punto 5.2.
A
x
x C x P1
E.1.D.
x 394,9
0,9 x K
Z1 x T1
W=
rtata,
M
piena po
o
ante
ric
arico di ri ad almen
del fabb
pa
he
ni di sc
razione lla, in condizio a lunghezza ca ra tte ris tici di
le
Dichia
on
r un
mo
e
izi
pe
li
lla
nd
o
ria
de
co
lor
e
te
Le spire distanti tra l filo . I ma ne i pe r le ntrollo finale o
o
ido
de
co
hann
restan dia me tro lvo la so no contatto. Il
15 bar
me zz o tiv e de lla va dei fluidi a pressione di fra se de ede
la alla ion e po sta tire, anch
co str ut e ed esercizio
ran
lla valvo
pression idraulica de . La gu ar nize tale da ga e assenza di
terial
'usura
la prova ito fav orev ole
enza all
a con ma
da to es e costruit ercizio, resist
I S.p.A.
otturatorprolungato es .
CALEFF Tecnica
per un enti alla sede
zione
La Dire
incollam
58856.0
2
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES 527
di
l verbale
nata da
compag
to.
ENZE
lo se ac
arrimen
AVVERT idonea so .
so di smdi centrale
ale
la
ti in ca
La valvo in copia originiare duplica nte al libretto im pia nt o.
taraturapossibile rilasc ato unitame ve rif ica di
di
erv
Non
va cons to in se de
ibi
Il verbale
se re es
pe r es
Il Tecn
ico I.S.P.
E.S.L.
Standard safety relief valves

The series 311, 312, 313, 314, 513 and 514 standard safety relief
valves are used in heating systems, domestic hot water systems
protecting the hot water cylinder and in water systems generally.
Heating systems
Standard safety relief valves, in compliance with Italian regulations,
can be applied to heat generators of capacity below 35 kW.
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES 311-312-313-314

(bar)
(bar)
(bar)
Outfl. Disch. flow

rate
coeff.
W (kg/h)
K
Maximum
boiler rating
(kW)
(kcal/h)
Size
Outl.
(mm)
Nett
area
(cm2)
1/2
13
1,327
2,50
3,00
2,00
0,5
124,4
72,3
62.200
1/2
13
1,327
3,60
2,40
0,5
142,17
82,5
71.000
1/2
13
1,327
3,50
4,20
2,80
0,5
161,39
93,6
80.600
1/2
13
1,327
4,80
3,20
0,5
178,25
103,3
89.000
1/2
13
1,327
7,20
4,80
0,5
248,81
144,6
124.400
1/2
13
1,327
8,40
5,60
0,5
284,35
165,2
142.100
1/2
13
1,327
9,60
6,40
0,5
322,78
187,5
161.300
3/4
13
1,327
2,40
1,60
0,5
106,63
61,8
53.300
3/4
13
1,327
2,50
3,00
2,00
0,5
124,4
72,3
62.200
3/4
13
1,327
3,60
2,40
0,5
142,17
82,5
71.000
3/4
13
1,327
3,50
4,20
2,80
0,5
161,39
93,6
80.600
3/4
13
1,327
4,80
3,20
0,5
178,25
103,3
89.000
3/4
13
1,327
6,00
4,00
0,5
213,26
123,6
106.600
3/4
13
1,327
7,20
4,80
0,5
248,81
144,6
124.400
3/4
13
1,327
8,40
5,60
0,5
284,35
165,2
142.100
3/4
13
1,327
9,60
6,40
0,5
322,78
187,5
161.300
311425 1/2 2,5 bar

311430 1/2 3 bar
311435 1/2 3,5 bar
311440 1/2 4 bar
311460 1/2 6 bar
311470 1/2 7 bar
311480 1/2 8 bar
311520 3/4 2 bar
311525 3/4 2,5 bar
311530 3/4 3 bar
311535 3/4 3,5 bar
311540 3/4 4 bar
311550 3/4 5 bar
311560 3/4 6 bar
311570 3/4 7 bar
311580 3/4 8 bar
313425 1/2 2,5 bar

313430 1/2 3 bar
313460 1/2 6 bar
313470 1/2 7 bar
313480 1/2 8 bar
313525 3/4 2,5 bar
313530 3/4 3 bar
313560 3/4 6 bar
313570 3/4 7 bar
313580 3/4 8 bar
312425 1/2 2,5 bar

312430 1/2 3 bar
312435 1/2 3,5 bar
312440 1/2 4 bar
312460 1/2 6 bar
312470 1/2 7 bar
312480 1/2 8 bar
314425 1/2 2,5 bar

314430 1/2 3 bar
314460 1/2 6 bar
314470 1/2 7 bar
314480 1/2 8 bar
313432 1/2 3 bar

313532 3/4 3 bar
314432 1/2 3 bar

314462 1/2 6 bar
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES 513-514

Size
Outl.
(mm)
Nett
area
(cm2)
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
1,767
1,767
1,767
1,767
1,767
1,767
1,767
1,767
1,767
1,767

(bar)
(bar)
(bar)
1,50
2
2,50
2,70
3
3,50
4
6
7
8
1,80
2,40
3,00
3,24
3,60
4,20
4,80
7,20
8,40
9,60
1,20
1,60
2,00
2,16
2,40
2,80
3,20
4,80
5,60
6,40
Outfl. Disch. flow

coeff.
rate
K
W (kg/h)
Maximum
boiler rating
(kW)
(kcal/h)
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
68,3
82,3
96,2
102,4
110,0
124,6
137,6
192,5
220,1
249,8
117,80
141,99
165,65
176,70
189,32
214,90
237,35
331,31
378,64
429,81
58.900
70.900
82.800
88.300
94.600
107.400
118.600
165.600
189.300
214.900
513415 1/2 1,5 bar

513420 1/2 2 bar
513425 1/2 2,5 bar
513430 1/2 3 bar
513435 1/2 3,5 bar
513460 1/2 6 bar
513470 1/2 7 bar
513480 1/2 8 bar
514420 1/2 2 bar

514425 1/2 2,5 bar
514427 1/2 2,7 bar
514430 1/2 3 bar
514435 1/2 3,5 bar
514440 1/2 4 bar
514460 1/2 6 bar
514470 1/2 7 bar
514480 1/2 8 bar
Domestic hot water systems

Series 513 and 514 valves comply with the requirements of Section R
for safety standards of equipment containing hot liquids under
pressure (Italian standard):
in the case of water heaters intended for domestic use, the
expansion system protecting the vessel should consist of a vent
valve, understood as a counter-weight or spring valve whose outlet
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES 513-514

Size
Outl.
(mm)
Nett
area
(cm2)
1/2
1/2
1/2
1
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/4
15
15
15
25
25
25
32
32
32
1,767
1,767
1,767
4,9087
4,9087
4,9087
8,0424
8,0424
8,0424
Calibn. Nom.disch.
press.
press.
(bar)
(bar)
6
7
8
6
7
8
6
7
8
7,20
8,40
9,60
7,20
8,40
9,60
7,20
8,40
9,60
Clos.
press.
(bar)
Capacity
of heater
(l)
4,80
5,60
6,40
4,80
5,60
6,40
4,80
5,60
6,40
1.000
1.000
1.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
5.000
5.000
5.000
has a diameter, in mm, not less than
where V is the volume of the heater in litres, with a minimum of 15 mm.

To illustrate the above, see the table with the hot water storage
capacity limits for each type of valve.
513460 1/2 6 bar

513470 1/2 7 bar
513480 1/2 8 bar
513660 1 6 bar
513670 1 7 bar
513680 1 8 bar
513760 1 1/4 6 bar
513770 1 1/4 7 bar
513780 1 1/4 8 bar
Water systems
These safety relief valves can also be used for discharging cold
water; in this case, the discharge capacities indicated are the
results of experimental testing, without the use or any conversion
formula for fluids of different types.
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES 513

Size
Outl.
(mm)
Nett
area
(cm2)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/4
25
25
25
25
25
25
32
32
32
32
32
32
4,9087
4,9087
4,9087
4,9087
4,9087
4,9087
8,0424
8,0424
8,0424
8,0424
8,0424
8,0424
Calibn. Nom.disch.
press.
press.
(bar)
(bar)
Clos.
press.
(bar)
Capacity
of heater
(l)
2,50
3
3,50
6
7
8
2,50
3
3,50
6
7
8
2,00
2,40
2,80
4,80
5,60
6,40
2,00
2,40
2,80
4,80
5,60
6,40
8,3
8,7
9,1
10,5
11,5
12,3
13,2
13,8
14,1
17,5
18,6
19,4
3,00
3,60
4,20
7,20
8,40
9,60
3,00
3,60
4,20
7,20
8,40
9,60
Certification
CE mark
Series 311, 312, 313, 314, 513 and 514
safety relief valves meet the requirements
of Directive 97/23/CE for pressurised
equipment (also referred to as the PED).
They are therefore classified in Category IV
and granted the CE mark.
V
5
513625 1 2,5 bar

513630 1 3 bar
513635 1 3,5 bar
513660 1 6 bar
513670 1 7 bar
513680 1 8 bar
513725 1 1/4 2,5 bar
513730 1 1/4 3 bar
513735 1 1/4 3,5 bar
513760 1 1/4 6 bar
513770 1 1/4 7 bar
513780 1 1/4 8 bar
514460 1/2 6 bar

514470 1/2 7 bar
514480 1/2 8 bar
Installation
Fitting
Before installing a safety relief valve, correct sizing must be carried

out by specialist technical personnel in accordance with the current
legislation governing the specific applications. It shall not be used
other than for its stated purpose.
Safety relief valves must be installed by competent technical
personnel qualified in accordance with current legislation.
The safety relief valve can be fitted vertically or horizontally, but not
upside down.
This prevents deposits of impurities from affecting correct
functioning.
Correct installations
The safety relief valve must be installed in line with the flow direction
indicated by the arrow on the valve body.
Heating system
The safety relief valve bust be installed on the top of the boiler or in
the flow pipework at a distance of not more than one metre from the
boiler (section R). The connecting pipework between the safety
relief valve and the boiler must not be interrupted.
Max 1 m
Incorrect installation
Domestic hot water system

The safety relief valve must be installed close to the hot water
storage, taking care not to fit any shut-off devices between the
valve and the storage cylinder.
Discharge pipework
40
60
20
80
The discharge pipework from the safety relief valve must be fitted
in such a way as not to prevent the correct operation of the valve
and not to cause damage or injury.
In accordance with current legislation, the safety relief valve
discharge must be visible and carried in suitable collection pipework.
As shown in the diagrams, it is advisable to install a tundish directly
in the discharge pipework for low capacity valves, as diagram 1.
In the case of larger capacities, proceed as shown in diagram 2.
Diagram 1
Diagram 2
Series 311
Standard diaphragm safety relief valve. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE. Threaded connections 1/2 F x 1/2 F
(1/2x1/2 and 3/4x3/4). Calibration 2,5 bar (calibrations available: 2,5 3 3,5 4 6 7 8 for 1/2 and 3/4,
2 - 5 bar only for 3/4). Maximum temperature 110C. Brass body. Diaphragm and seal in EPDM. Control knob in ABS.
Series 312
Standard diaphragm safety relief valve. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE. Threaded connections 1/2 M x 1/2 F
Calibration 2,5 bar (calibrations available: 2,5 3 3,5 4 6 7 8). Maximum temperature 110C. Brass body.
Diaphragm and seal in EPDM. Control knob in ABS.
Series 313
Standard diaphragm safety relief valve with pressure gauge connection. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE.
Threaded connections 1/2 F x 1/2 F (1/2 and 3/4). Calibration 3 bar. Maximum temperature 110C. Brass body.
Diaphragm and seal in EPDM. Control knob in ABS.
Series 313
Standard diaphragm safety relief valve with pressure gauge. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE. Threaded
connections 1/2 F x 1/2 F (1/2 and 3/4). Calibration 2,5 bar (calibrations available: 2,5 3 6 7 8). Maximum
temperature 110C. Brass body. Diaphragm and seal in EPDM. Control knob in ABS.
Series 314
Standard diaphragm safety relief valve with pressure gauge connection. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE.
Threaded connections 1/2 M x 1/2 F. Calibration 3 bar (calibrations available 3 and 6). Maximum temperature 110C.
Brass body. Diaphragm and seal in EPDM. Control knob in ABS.
Series 314
Standard diaphragm safety relief valve with pressure gauge. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE. Threaded
connections 1/2 M x 1/2 F. Calibration 2,5 bar (calibrations available: 2,5 3 6 7 8). Maximum temperature 110C.
Brass body. Diaphragm and seal in EPDM. Control knob in ABS.
Series 513
Standard diaphragm safety relief valve. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE. Connections 1/2 M x 1/2 F.
Calibration 1,5 bar (calibrations available: 1,5 - 2 - 2,5 - 3 - 3,5 - 6 - 7 - 8). Maximum temperature 110C. Brass body.
Diaphragm and seal in EPDM. Cover and control knob in glass-fiber re-inforced nylon.
Series 513
Standard diaphragm safety relief valve. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE. Connections 1 F x 1 1/4 F (1 x 1 1/4
and 1 1/4 x 1 1/2). Calibration 2,5 bar (calibrations available: 2,5 - 3 - 3,5 - 6 - 7 - 8). Maximum temperature 110C.
Body and cover in brass. Diaphragm and seal in EPDM. Cover and control knob in glass-fiber re-inforced nylon.
Series 514
Standard diaphragm safety relief valve. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE. Connections 1/2 M x 1/2 F. Calibration
2 bar (calibrations available: 2 - 2,5 - 2,7 - 3 - 3,5 - 6 - 7 - 8). Maximum temperature 110C. Brass body. Diaphragm and
seal in EPDM. Cover in glass-fiber re-inforced nylon, control knob in ABS.
Series 527
I.S.P.E.S.L. approved and calibrated diaphragm safety relief valve. Bearing CE mark as per Directive 97/23/CE.
Connections 1/2 F x 3/4 F (available 1/2 x 3/4, 3/4 x 1, 1 x 1 1/4, 1 1/4 x 1 1/2). Calibration 1 bar (calibrations
available: 1 1,5 2 2,25 2,5 2,7 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,4 6 7 8). Maximum temperature 110C. Body
and cover in brass. Diaphragm and seal in EPDM. Control knob in glass-fiber re-inforced nylon. Discharge
overpressure 10%, closing differential 20%. Fail-safe. Accompanied by bench calibration report.
Accessories
5521
5520
5520
Discharge tundish
with rotating elbow,
male-female.
Sizes: 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4.
Straight discharge
tundish, female-female.
Sizes: 3/4 and 1 1/4.
Discharge collector.
In coated sheet metal.
Size: 1 1/2.
Dimensions
B
A
A
A
Code
A
B
3/4
552140 1/2
1
552150 3/4
1 1/4
552160
1
552170 1 1/4 1 1/2
Code
552080
C
25
25
40
40
D
125
125
180
180
Code
552050
552070
A
3/4
1 1/4
B
25
40
A
1 1/2
B
210
C
150
C
96
134
SPECIFICATION DETAILS
Series 5520
Straight discharge tundish. Connections 3/4 F x 3/4 F (3/4 x 3/4 and 1 1/4 x 1 1/4). Body in die-cast
aluminium. Visible discharge.
Series 5520
Discharge collector. Connection 1 1/2 F. Body in coated sheet metal.
Series 5521
Discharge tundish with rotating elbow. Connections 1/2 M x 1/2 F (from 1/2 to 1 1/4). Body in die-cast
aluminium. Visible discharge.
CALEFFI
MINICAL VALCAL
Automatic air vent valves
CALEFFI
series 5020 - 5021 - 5022
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01054/05 GB
Function
Automatic air vent valves are designed to remove the air that
accumulates in heating and air conditioning systems without the
need for manual intervention. This prevents harmful phenomena
that may compromise the life and the performance of the heating
system and which include:
- corrosion due to the oxygen;
- pockets of air trapped in the heating emitters;
- cavitation in the circulation pumps.
Product range
Series
Series
Series
Series
Series
Series
Series
5020
5020
5020
5020
5021
5021
5022
MINICAL Automatic air vent valve

MINICAL Automatic air vent valve, chrome plated
MINICAL Automatic air vent valve, with safety hygroscopic cap
MINICAL Automatic air vent valve, with safety hygroscopic cap, chrome plated
MINICAL Automatic air vent valve, complete with automatic shut-off cock
MINICAL Automatic air vent valve, complete with automatic shut-off cock, chrome plated
VALCAL Automatic air vent valve, chrome plated
Sizes 3/8 and 1/2

Sizes 3/8 and 1/2
Sizes 3/4 and 1
Sizes 3/4 and 1
Sizes 3/8 and 1/2
Sizes 3/8 and 1/2
Sizes 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Materials:
Body and cover:
Float:
Obturator stem:
Spring:
Seals:
Shut-off cock seal:

PP
stainless steel
EPDM
PTFE
Performance:
Medium:
water and glycol solution

30%
10 bar
5020, 5021: 2,5 bar
5022: 4 bar.
5020, 5022: 120C
5021: 110C
Dimensions
C
A
To complete codes
end number 0 with brass body and plastic cap
end number 1 with chrome plated body and metallic cap
A
Code
50203. 3/8
50204. 1/2
B
79
79
C
48
48
D
11
11
Weight (kg)
0,18
0,18
To complete codes
end number 0 with brass body and hygroscopic cap
end number 1 with chrome plated body and hygroscopic cap
To complete codes
end number 0 with brass body and plastic cap
end number 1 with chrome plated body and metallic cap
A
Code
50205. 3/4
50206. 1
A
Code
50213. 3/8
50214. 1/2
B
86
86
C
48
48
D
11
11
Weight (kg)
0,18
0,18
B
96
96
C
48
48
D
11
11
Weight (kg)
0,21
0,23
A
Code
502221 1/4
502231 3/8
502241 1/2
B
94
97
97
C
55
55
55
D
9
11
11
Weight (kg)
0,29
0,29
0,29
Flow curves
to drop so that the air vent valve opens.
This phenomenon occurs, and consequently the valve functions
correctly, as long as the water pressure remains below the
maximum discharge pressure.

Nl/s
Operation
1,1
1
5022
0,9
0,8
0,7
5020
0,6
0,5
Hygroscopic cap
All MINICAL and VALCAL
models are equipped with a
hygroscopic safety cap. Its
functionality is based on the
properties of the cellulose fibre
discs that serve as the seal
cartridge and whose volume
increases by 50% as soon as
they become wet and thus
cause the valve to close. This
way, possible damages are
avoided in case of leakage.
Models with shut-off
The automatic shut-off valve,
which forms a seal with the
valve body by means of an
O-ring made of EPDM,
facilitates
maintenance
operations by shutting off the
water flow when the valve is
removed and also allows for
easy inspection of the air vent
device.
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
3,5
4,5
5,5
6,5
7 bar
(air)
Installation
- The valve is installed in the vertical position, on the air separator,
on manifolds, on riser pipes and generally in parts of the system
where a concentration of air pockets is to be expected.
- During operation the upper cap in the standard version must be
loosened whilst it must be completely hand tightened in the
hygroscopic version.
- It is not advisable to fit the valve in places which could be subject
to freeze. In such cases the Caleffi Maxcal Series 501 automatic
deaerator can be used.
- It is advisable to replace the valve cap with a Caleffi Series
5620 safety hygroscopic cap in all fitting locations which
cannot be inspected.
Accessories
- Check valve series 561 for air vent valves series
5020 and 5022 is available. 3/8 and 1/2
connections. Available in brass or chrome plated
version. PTFE sealing on thread.
- Hygroscopic safety plug AQUASTOP series
5620 for MINICAL and VALCAL series is
available in brass or chrome plated.
- Small anti-suction valve series 5621 for air vent
valves for MINICAL and VALCAL series.
Series 5020
Automatic air vent valve. 3/8M (or 1/2M) threaded connection. Brass and chrome plated versions. Brass body and cover, PP
float, brass obturator stem, EPDM O-Rings. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum
working pressure 10 bar, maximum discharge pressure 2,5 bar. Maximum working temperature 120C.
Series 5020
Automatic air vent valve. 1/2M ( or 3/4M) threaded connection. Brass and chrome plated versions. Brass body and cover, PP
float, brass obturator stem, EPDM O-Rings. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum
working pressure 10 bar, maximum discharge pressure 2,5 bar. Maximum working temperature 120C. Complete with
hygroscopic safety cap.
Series 5021
Automatic air vent valve with automatic shut-off cock. 3/8M (or 1/2M) threaded connection. Brass and chrome plated versions.
Brass body and cover, PP float, brass obturator stem, EPDM O-Rings. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum
percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar, maximum discharge pressure 2,5 bar. Maximum working
temperature 110C.
Series 5022
Automatic air vent valve. 1/4M (3/8, 1/2M) threaded connection. Chrome plated with metallic cap. Brass body and cover,
PP float, brass obturator stem, EPDM O-Rings. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar, maximum discharge pressure 4 bar. Maximum working temperature 120C.
CALEFFI
AERCAL
Automatic air vent for radiators
CALEFFI
series 504
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01055/05 GB
Function
Automatic air vents with external float are designed to remove the
air that is released from the water when it is heated and which
accumulates at the top of radiators, limiting the normal heat
exchange process and giving rise to noise and corrosion.
The air vent has been constructed so that it can be installed on any
type of heating emitters ranging from the traditional cast iron
radiators to the thin steel panel radiators. All models are equipped
with a hygroscopic safety cap.
Product range
Series 504 Automatic air vent for radiators, chrome plated, with hygroscopic safety cap
Sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1 right and left
Dimensions
Materials:- Body and cover: brass EN 12165 CW617N, chrome plated

- Float:
PP
- Obturator stem:
- Spring:
stainless steel
- Seals:
EPDM
- Hygroscopic safety cap seal:
NBR
- Hygroscopic safety cap discs:
cellulose fibre
Medium:
water and glycol solutions

30%

10 bar
2,5 bar
100C
Connections:
1/2 - 3/4 - 1M right and left
B
G
Code
504401
504501
504611
504621
A
1/2
3/4
1 R
1 L
B
51
51
51
51
C
48
48
48
48
D
37
34
30
30
E
63
60
56
56
F
76
76
76
76
G
88,5
88,5
88,5
88,5
Weight (kg)
0,28
0,27
0,33
0,33
Flow curves
to drop and thus the obturator to open. This phenomenon occurs,
and consequently the valve functions correctly, as long as the water
pressure remains below the maximum discharge pressure.

Nl/s
Operating principle
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
3,5
4,5
5,5
6,5
7 bar
(air)
Installation
The valve must be installed
in a vertical position.
The hygroscopic safety cap
must be screwed tight when
the system is operating.
Hygroscopic cap
All models are equipped with a hygroscopic safety cap. Its
functionality is based on the properties of the cellulose fibre discs
that serve as the seal cartridge and whose volume increases by
50% as soon as they become wet and thus cause the valve to
close.
Cover
The removable cover has a strong opening mechanism to vent the air.
Float
The location of the float and other internal parts means that the
water never reaches the obturator, thus limiting the harmful effects
from the impurities contained in the liquid.
Maintenance
The valve can be inspected as follows if the water contains
impurities that jeopardize the correct functioning of the system:
a) isolate the heating emitter by closing the valve and lockshield;
b) unscrew the valve cover with the O-ring seal.
The valve has been constructed so that this operation can be
performed without leakage of water.
Series 504
Automatic air vent valve for radiators. Threaded connections, 1/2 M (3/4 M, 1 M right or 1 M left). Hygroscopic safety cap.
Chrome plated brass body and cover, stainless steel spring, PP float, EPDM O-ring seals. Hygroscopic safety cap seal in NBR.
Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum operating pressure 10 bar. Maximum
discharge pressure 2,5 bar. Maximum working temperature 100C.
CALEFFI
Radiator air vents and

drainage devices
series 505 - 5054 - 5055 - 5080 - 560
01056/01 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
Two types of device are covered here:
- Automatic or manual air vent valves.
- Radiator drain valve with extractor drain tube.
The purpose of the radiator air vent valve is to remove, either
manually or automatically, any air trapped inside the heat emitters
both during the filling of the system and in normal operation.
The drain valve, on the other hand, makes it possible to easily
discharge the water contained in the radiator, thanks to the
extractor which is inserted into the valve itself.
Product range
Series 505
Series 5054
Series 5055
Series 5080
Code 560421
Code 560000
Manual radiator air vent valve

Manual radiator air vent valve with revolving discharge
Manual radiator air vent valve with soft seat
Automatic hygroscopic radiator air vent valve
Radiator drain valve
Extractor drain tube
Sizes
Sizes
Sizes 1/8,
Sizes 1/8,
1/8,
1/8,
1/4,
1/4,
1/4,
1/4,
3/8,
3/8,
Size
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
M
M
M
M
M
series
Materials:
- Body:
- Knob:
- Outer seal:
Performance:
- Max working pressure:
505 / 5054
5055
5080
560421
brass UNI EN 12164

CW614N; nickel plated
brass UNI EN 12164

brass UNI EN 12164

brass UNI EN 12164

POM
white RAL 9010
POM
white RAL 9010
POM
white RAL 9010
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
EPDM
10 bar
10 bar
10 bar
10 bar
90C
90C
100C
100C
Dimensions
A
F
A
F
C
18
18
18
B
29
29
32
E
22
22
25
F
Es.13
Es.13
Es.17
D
7
7
7
A
B
C
Code
505411 1/8 36,5 18
505421 1/4 36,5 18
505431 3/8 37 18
Code
505511
505521
505531
505541
E
G
F
29,5 Es.13 12
29,5 Es.13 12
30 Es.17 12
A
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
B
30
30
33
35
D
7
7
7
10
E
23
23
26
25
F
Es.14
Es.14
Es.17
Es.17
C
18
18
18
18
E
A
D
7
7
7
A
Code
505111 1/8
505121 1/4
505131 3/8
B
G
Code
508011
508021
508031
508041
A
B
1/8 30
1/4 30
3/8" 30,5
1/2" 33
C
18
18
18
18
D
10
10
10,5
10
E
20
20
20
23
F
Es.15
Es.15
Es.17
Es.17
Code
560421
560000
A
1/2"
-
B
32,5
-
C
Es.22
-
D
21,5
-
E
11
-
F
8 p. 1
8 p. 1
G
205
Operating principle / Construction details

505
Valve 505 operates manually. The knob is
turned until the air in the heat emitter is
completely expelled and water starts to
come out.
5054
This valve operates in the same way as
the series 505, but differs in having
a 360 revolving discharge facility
which makes air venting easier.
5055 (REG. MOD.)

Once again, this model operates in the
same way as the previous two. The
identifying detail of this valve is an
internal seal in a special elastic
material which provides a tight seal in
relation to limited tightening of the knob
and possible temperature changes.
The knob of the valve is shaped so as to be similar

in appearance to Caleffi thermostatic valve heads,
which enhances the uniformity of the range of
radiator components.
5080
Valve code 5080 can be used manually or
automatically.
The principle of manual discharge is the
same as for the valves already described,
whilst automatic discharge is based on the
property of the cellulose fibre discs forming
the seal cartridge.
560
The drain valve is applied to the lower connection of the radiator.
When inserting the extractor drain tube into the valve itself, the
sliding piston which provides the outer seal must be screw-located
and extracted, making the water flow outwards.
Valve closed
The
manual
discharge
position is achieved by
unscrewing the knob approx.
one turn. Typical use of this
method is when refilling the
system.
The automatic discharge

position, however, is achieved
with the knob fully closed.
Use of the series 560 drain valve
The hygroscopic discs increase their volume by 50% when they are
immersed in water.
s+50%
Dry
disc
Valve open
1 Remove
2 Screw
protective
cap
Immersed
disc
Dried
disc
In this way, when the system is operating under normal conditions,

the discs are immersed and, thanks to their increase in volume,
they close the valve. However, when air is present, the discs dry out
and allow the air to vent.
on the drain
tube provided
The hygroscopic discs close very quickly, in just a few seconds.

The drying times are such that there are no problems with the cycle
of formation and elimination of air.
Table of drying times

Water
temperature C
40
50
Times in
hours
60
70
2 1/2 1 1/2
The valve is constructed in such
a way that the part containing the
hygroscopic discs can easily be
replaced without having to empty
the heat emitter. This may be
necessary because the discs can
deteriorate in time if there is
unfiltered or hard water present.
It is, in any case, advisable to
replace the disc cartridge at least
every 36 months.
80
90
100
1/2
1/4
3 Pull
out the tube,

turning it into a basin.
Series 505
Radiator air vent valve. Threaded connection 1/8 M (from 1/8 to 3/8) with PTFE seal. Brass body. Nickel
plated. White heat resistant knob in POM. Max working temperature 90C. Max working pressure 10 bar.
Series 5054
Radiator air vent valve. Threaded connection 1/8 M (from 1/8 to 3/8) with PTFE seal. Brass body. Nickel
plated. White heat resistant knob in POM. Max working temperature 90C. Max working pressure 10 bar.
Rotable outlet.
Series 5055
Radiator air vent valve with EPDM soft seal. Threaded connection 1/8 M (from 1/8 to 1/2) with PTFE seal.
Brass body. Nickel plated. White heat resistant knob in POM. Max working temperature 90C. Max working
pressure 10 bar.
Series 5080
Automatic hygroscopic air vent valve. Threaded connection 1/8 M (from 1/8 to 1/2) with PTFE seal. Brass
body. Nickel plated. White heat resistant knob in POM. Max working temperature 100C. Max working pressure
10 bar. Replaceable hygroscopic cartridge.
Code 560421
Radiator drain valve. Threaded connection 1/2 M. EPDM seal. Brass body. Nickel plated. Max working
temperature 100C. Max working pressure 10 bar. Designed for use with extractor drain tube.
Code 560000
Extractor drain tube for extraction of sliding piston from radiator drain valve.
CALEFFI
Temperature safety relief valve
CALEFFI
RE
IS
543 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01057/07 GB
General description
Temperature safety relief valves are manufactured by Caleffi S.p.A. in
compliance with the essential requirements contained in Directive
97/23/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of the
European Union to harmonise member state regulations on pressure
equipment.
Function
111 5
The temperature safety relief valves limit the temperature of water

in multi-fuel or solid fuel boilers with either a boiler incorporated or
an emergency heat exchanger.
When the temperature reaches 95C, the valve starts to discharge
the necessary amount of water to keep the boiler temperature
within the safety limits.
Its use is specified by I.S.P.E.S.L. regulations (collection R - pub2005), it complies with EN 14597 and can be used on systems that
comply with EN 12828, relating to solid fuel boilers with a power
output of less than 100 kW.
Product range
Temperature safety relief valve
Size 3/4

EPDM
EPDM
stainless steel
POM
Connections:
Probe connection:
Capillary length:
C
1/2
10 bar
95C
5110C
3000 l/h
080C
2 KP
130C
water
IV
3/4 F x 3/4 F
1/2 M
1300 mm
Performance:
Set temperature:
Temperature range:
Discharge flow rate at 110C and p 1 bar:
Ambient temperature range:
Action type (EN 14597):
Max. temperature of the sensor:
Medium:
PED category:
F
E
Materials:
Body:
Control spindle:
Obturator seal:
Seals:
Spring:
Protection cover:
Dimensions
197
Code 543513
Code
543513
A
3/4
B
40
C
42
D
86
E
42
F
70
Weight (kg)
1,06
Operating principle
Installation
When the temperature rises, the fluid contained within the sensor
(1) undergoes a change of state from liquid to gas. The consequent
volume increase creates a mechanical movement causing the
expandable bellows (2), inside the valve, to push on the obturator
and lift it up.
Installation
of
the temperature
safety relief valve
in boilers with
built-in heater.
DOMESTIC
water supply
Hot
water
storage
mains
inlet
safety
discharge
Installation
of
the temperature
safety relief valve
in the emergency
heat exchanger.
mains
inlet
safety
discharge
The sensor should be mounted at the top of the boiler or on the

outlet piping upstream of any isolating device and at a maximum
distance of 0,5 m.
1. After mounting the valve on the pipe, according to the flow
direction indicated on the valve body, place the part connected
to the sensor in its seat.
Redundant expansion system
The entire expansion system has a built-in
redundancy (1)-(2) to ensure maximum
safety, so if one part of the sensor system
fails the other part will perform the same
functions as the entire sensor.
2. Loosely tighten the knurled lock nut.

3. Position the sheath outlet that connects the probe by turning the
black cap. Completely tighten the knurled lock nut.
Pocket and capillary tubes

The size of the pocket is such that it is always in contact with the
sensors, which improves heat transmission and keeps thermal
inertia to a minimum. The capillary tubes are protected by a
galvanized sheath.
Bellows holder support
The bellows holder support is made of
acetalic resin and can be repositioned by
loosening the knurled lock nut.
Accessories
We
recommend
inserting a visible
discharge tundish
(5521 series Caleffi)
when connecting the
device
to
the
discharge pipe.
Drain
The lower part of the valve contains a button
in order to drain the system.
Code 543513
Temperature safety relief valve. EC certified and approved to German DIN standards. Redundant safety sensor. Connections 3/4
F. Chrome plated brass body. Stainless steel spring. EPDM seals. Temperature range 5 110C. Nominal set temperature 95C.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Complete with 1/2 M remote probe with pocket. Length of capillary 1300 mm.
CALEFFI
Temperature safety valve

with automatic filling
CALEFFI
RE
IS
544 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01058/07 GB
Function
The dual effect temperature safety discharge valve is used to ensure
safety in heating systems that use a fireboxes or stoves as a heat
generator.
The device integrates in a single block a heat discharge valve and
a filling valve that operate simultaneously controlled by a positive
safety type remote sensor. The refilling, in case of valve intervention,
ensures water circulation in the phase of fuel running out, thus
protecting the integrity of the generator.
Product range
Code 544400 Temperature safety valve with automatic filling
Size 1/2
Dimensions
Materials:
Body:
Pocket:
Spring:
Hydraulic seals:

steel UNI 3823
EPDM
Performance:
Medium:
Set temperature:
Temperature range:
Discharge flow rate at 1 bar p:
Connections:
Probe connection:
Length of capillary:

30%
6 bar
100C (+0C/-5C)
5110C
1600 l/h
1/2 F
1/2 M
1300 mm
Code
A
544400 1/2
B
60
C
77
D
50
E
F
162 1/2
G
43
Weight (kg)
1,32
Operating principle
Fig.1
When the setting temperature is reached, (Fig.1) the cold

water inlet aperture is opened (passage from 4 to 3) and,
simultaneously, the drain aperture is opened (passage from
1 to 2), until the temperature drops to below the trigger
value and the inlet and drain close simultaneously. In the
event of a malfunction in the sensitive element (5) (6), the
valve will perform the same functions described above in a
continuous manner.
The following are highlighted on the valve body (Fig.2):

- arrow indicating the point of arrival of the generator pipes
on the flow pipe (1) and connection to the safety drain
marked with a letter S (2).
- arrow indicating delivery to the generator (3) and the
mains water system inlet, marked with a letter C (4).
IMPORTANT:
it is not possible
to reverse the
flows, the
indications for
filling and drain
shown on the
valve must be
followed.
Fig.2
2
4
Installation
The valve can be fitted in any position, vertical, horizontal or upside down.
The temperature probe pocket (6), supplied together with the valve, must be fitted on the flow pipe at a distance lower than 0,5 m from the
generator or at the highest point of the water heater and anyhow before the drain pipe. The pocket provided with the valve must be used.
In order to be able to control the inlet pressure better, it is advisable to have a charging unit (normally open) on the valve filler pipe, set at the
system operating pressure. In the case of operation with an open vessel system, the entire system is charged directly through the pipe
connected to the vessel.
In order to avoid any type of malfunction due to the presence of debris, it is advisable to install an inspectable Y strainer on the filling inlet. It
is necessary to check periodically that the strainer is not dirty or blocked.
The installation of a low head loss strainer, fitted with devices to check the state of cleanliness, is recommended to enable functional testing
during the work phase (e.g., pressure gauges upstream and downstream of the filtering element).
system flow
safety pipe
system return
max 0.5 m
S
C
S
mains infeed
C
main inlet
filter
safety drain
normally open valves,

only closed for filter inspection
System accessories
551 DISCAL
broch. 01060
Deaerator.
Brass body.
Female connections.
With drain.
Max. discharge pressure: 10 bar.
Working temperature range: 0110C.
Patented.
Function
Code
551005
551006
551007
551008
551009
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Air separators are used to remove continuously the air contained in the hydraulic circuits of
heating and cooling systems. The air discharge capacity of these devices is very high. They are
capable of removing automatically all the air present in the system down to micro-bubble level.
The circulation of fully deaerated water allows systems to work under optimal conditions without
any trouble of noise, corrosion, local overheating and mechanical damage.
5462 D I RTCAL
broch. 01137
Dirt separator.
Brass body.
Female connections.
Drain cock with hose connection.
Top connection with plug.
Particle separation rating: to 5 m.
Patented.
Function
Code
546205
546206
546207
546208
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
In heating and air conditioning systems, the circulation of water containing impurities may result in
rapid wear and damage to components such as pumps and valves. It also causes blockages in
the heat exchangers, heating elements and pipes, resulting in a lower thermal efficiency within the
system. The dirt separator separates off these impurities, which are mainly made up of particles
of sand and rust. The impurities are collected in a large collection chamber that requires low
frequency cleaning operations, from which they can be removed even while the system is in
operation. This device is capable of efficiently removing even the smallest particles, with extremely
limited head loss.
553
broch. 01061
Pre-adjustable automatic filling unit, anti-scale,

inspectionable with pressure setting indicator.
Complete with manual cock, strainer and
check valve.
Max. inlet pressure: 16 bar.
Setting pressure range: 0,24 bar.
Function
Code
553540
553640
1/2 with press. gauge conn.

1/2 with press. gauge
The automatic filling unit is a device consisting of a pressure reducing valve with compensating
seat, an inlet filter, a shut-off valve and a check valve.
It is installed on the water inlet piping in sealed heating systems, and its main function is to
maintain the pressure of the system stable at a set value, automatically topping up with water
as required. After installation, during the filling or topping-up phase, the water feed will stop
when the set pressure is reached.
SYSTEM WITH OPEN EXPANSION VESSEL
Expansion vessel
IMPORTANT: for overall power levels exceeding 35 kW the dimensions of the safety pipe
must comply with current regulations.
Safety relief valve

Pump
Y-Strainer with drain

3-way zone valve
Shut-off valve
Inlet
Sistem drain
Filling group
T
Thermostat
Pressure gauge
T
C
Thermostatic timer
Deaerator
Dirt separator
Main inlet filter
SYSTEM WITH CLOSED EXPANSION VESSEL

IMPORTANT: This diagram may only be used only if it is allowed by national or local rules or regulations.
For overall power levels exceeding 35 kW it is necessary to have appropriate safety devices according to current regulations.
T
Code 544400
Temperature safety valve with automatic filling. Connections 1/2" F. Brass body. Chrome plated. Steel spring. EPDM seals.
Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Maximum working temperature 110C. Maximum discharge temperature 100C (0C/-5C).
Complete with remote probe with pocket. Connection 1/2" M. Length of capillary 1300 mm.
CALEFFI
Copyright 2007 Caleffi S.P.A.
DISCAL deaerator
CALEFFI
551 series
01060/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
Deaerators are used to continuously remove the air contained in the
hydraulic circuits of heating and cooling systems. The air discharge
capacity of these devices is very high. They are capable of
automatically removing all the air present in the system down to
micro-bubble level, with very low head losses.
The circulation of fully deaerated water enables the equipment to
operate under optimum conditions, free from any noise, corrosion,
localised overheating or mechanical damage.
The threaded connection product is available in versions for
installation to horizontal or vertical pipes.
Flanged and weld-end DISCAL deaerators are supplied complete
with hot pre-formed shell insulation to ensure perfect thermal
insulation when used in both hot and chilled water systems.
Product range
551 series DISCAL deaerator for horizontal pipes with drain
sizes 3/42
551 series DISCAL deaerator for horizontal pipes, compact version
sizes 3/4
551 series DISCAL deaerator for horizontal pipes with olive connections, compact version
sizes compression ends for 22 copper pipe
551 series DISCAL deaerator for horizontal pipes with flanged connections and pre-formed insulation with drain
sizes DN 50DN 150
551 series DISCAL deaerator for horizontal pipes with weld ends and pre-formed insulation with drain
sizes DN 50DN 150
551 series DISCAL deaerator for vertical pipes, compact version
sizes 3/4, 1
551 series DISCAL deaerator for vertical pipes with olive connections, compact version
sizes 22 with nuts for copper pipe
series
Materials:
Body:
Internal element:
Float:
Float guide:
Stem:
Float lever:
Spring:
Hydraulic seals:
Drain cock:
Performance:
Medium:
Connections:
Main:
Drain:
551 threaded
551 flanged and weld ends

PA66G30; stainless steel (compact version)
PP
stainless steel
stainless steel
EPDM
-
epoxy resin coated steel

stainless steel
PP
stainless steel
stainless steel
EPDM
water, non-hazardous glycol solutions excluded

from the guidelines of directive 67/548/EC
50%
10 bar
10 bar
0110C

50%
10 bar
10 bar
0110C
3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2, 2 F

with compression ends for 22 mm copper pipe
DN 50 - 65 - 80 - 100 - 125 - 150 weld ends;

DN 50 - 65 - 80 - 100 - 125 - 150 flanged PN 16
to be coupled with counterflanges EN 1092-1
1 M (with plug)
1/2 F (with plug)
Technical specification of insulation for flanged models

from DN 50 to DN 100
Technical specification of insulation for flanged models

DN 125 and DN 150
Inner part
Material:
rigid closed cell expanded polyurethane foam
Thickness:
60 mm
Density:
45 kg/m3
Thermal conductivity (ISO 2581):
0,023 W/(mK)
0105C
Inner part
Material:
Thickness:
Density: - inner part:
- outer part:
External cover
Material:
Thickness:
closed cell expanded PE-X

60 mm
30 kg/m3
80 kg/m3
- at 0C:
0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C:
0,045 W/(mK)
Coefficient of resistance to water vapour (DIN 52615):
> 1.300
0100C
class B2
embossed unfinished aluminium

0,7 mm
class 1
Head covers
Heat moulded material:
External cover
Material:
Thickness:
PS

0,7 mm
class 1
Dimensions
F
B
A
Code
551005 3/4" 110
146
551006
E
F Mass (kg)
205 1/2 1,7
205 1/2 1,7
110
146
551007 1 1/4" 124
166
551008 1 1/2" 124
166
225 1/2 2,2

225 1/2 2,2
551009
160
225 1/2 2,5
1"
2"
130
Mass (kg)
Code
551905
551906
Mass (kg)
A
Code
22
551902
2,05
2,05
2,05
BI-DIRECTIONAL
Tmax 105C
Pmax 10 bar
Tmax 110C
Pmax 10 bar
Tmax 105C
Pmax 10 bar
BI-DIRECTIONAL
Tmax 110C
Pmax 10 bar
38415.01
38415.01
Code
551003 3/4"
Mass (kg)
78
55
143
162
0,9
G
B
B
E
Code
551062 DN 65 350 374 506 169
551052 DN 50 350 374 506 169

551082 DN 80 466 435 595 219
551102 DN 100 470 435 595 219

551122 DN 125 635 545 775 324
551152 DN 150 635 545 775 324
Code
551002 22
1" 28,5
1" 30,5
Code
F
E
D
A
B
551053 DN 50 260 374 506 169
551063 DN 65 260 374 506 169
551083 DN 80 366 435 595 219
551103 DN 100 366 435 595 219
1 20,0
1 21,0
1" 48,5
1" 53,5
551123 DN 125 525 544 775 324

551153 DN 150 525 544 775 324
1 35,0
1 38,0
G Mass (kg)
1" 15,5
1" 15,5
G Mass (kg)
1" 09,3
1" 09,4
Mass (kg)
Size
DN 50
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
DN 125
DN 150
97
55
143
162
0,9
Volume (l)
18
18
52
52
Velocity
The amount of air which can remain dissolved in a water solution is

a function of pressure and temperature. This relationship is
governed by Henrys Law and the graph below allows the physical
phenomenon of the air content release of the fluid to be quantified.
As an example, at a constant absolute pressure of 2 bar, if the water
is heated from 20C to 80C, the amount of air released by the
solution is equal to 18 l per m3 of water. According to this law it can
be seen that the amount of air released increases with temperature
rise and pressure reduction. The air comes in the form of
micro-bubbles of diameters in the order of tenths of a millimetre.
In heating and cooling systems there are specific points where this
process of formation of micro-bubbles takes place continuously: in
the boiler and in any device which operates under conditions of
cavitation.
Cavitation micro-bubbles
Micro-bubbles develop where the fluid velocity is very high with the
corresponding reduction in pressure.
These points are
typically the pump
impeller and the
regulating valve
seating. These air
and vapour
Implosions
micro-bubbles, the
Seat-obturator
formation of which
distance
Cavitation
is enhanced in
micro-bubbles
the case of non
Pressure
Velocity
de-aerated water,
may subsequently
implode due to
Fluid vapour
the cavitation
pressure
phenomenon.
Pressure
The process of air formation
Graph: Solubility of air in water

Operating principle
Max amount in litres of dissolved air per m3 of water (l/m3)
Absolute pressure
The deaerator uses the
combined action of several
physical principles. The active
part consists of an assembly of
concentric
metal
mesh
surfaces. These elements
create the whirling movement
required to facilitate the release
of micro-bubbles and their
adhesion to these surfaces.
The bubbles, fusing with each
other, increase in volume until
the hydrostatic thrust is such as
to overcome the adhesion force to the structure. They rise towards
the top of the unit from which they are released through a
float-operated automatic air release valve.It is designed in such a
way that the direction in which the medium is flowing inside it
makes no difference.
55
3 bar
4 bar
5 bar
6 bar
7 bar 8 bar
100
120
50
45
40
2 bar
35
30
25
1 bar
20
15
10
5
0
0
20
40
60
80
140
160
180
Water temperature C
Boiler micro-bubbles
Micro-bubbles are formed continuously on the surface separating
the water from the combustion chamber due to the fluid
temperature. This air, carried by the water, collects in the critical
points of the circuit from where it must be removed. Some of this air
is reabsorbed in the presence of colder surfaces.
Flame temperature
1000C
Combustion chamber
wall
Boundary layer
FLAME
WATER
Micro-bubbles
Wall temperature
160C
Boundary layer
temperature 156C
Average water
temperature 70C
- When cleaning, simply unscrew the part of the body

containing the automatic air vent (4). On threaded
models without a
drain, this part
4
cannot
be
removed (5).
2
4
A
1
Flanged and weld-end deaerators

are equipped with a cock (A) that
has the dual function of releasing
large quantities of air when the
system is being filled and of
removing the impurities that float
on top of the water.
A drain valve (B) can be
connected at the bottom of the unit
to drain the impurities that have
collected at the bottom of the
deaerator.
B
Air separation efficiency
The automatic air vent is located at the top of the unit and is
equipped with a long chamber for the floating action. This feature
prevents the impurities present in the water from reaching the seal
seat.
The construction of the DISCAL deaerator allows it to be
maintained and cleaned without removing the device from the
system. Note the following:
- The moving parts

that control the air
venting are
accessed simply by
removing the upper
cover.(3).
DISCAL devices are capable of continuously removing

the air contained within a hydraulic circuit, with a high
degree of separation efficiency.
The amount of air which may be removed from a circuit
depends on various parameters: it increases as the
circulation speed and pressure values fall.
As illustrated on the graph below, after just 25
recirculations at the maximum recommended speed,
almost all the air artificially introduced into the circuit is
eliminated by the deaerator, with variable percentages
according to the pressure within the circuit.
The small amount which remains is then gradually
eliminated during normal system operation. In conditions
where the speed is slower or the temperature of the
medium is higher, the amount of air separated is even
greater.
Air introduced - Air removed - (%)
100
90
1 bar
2 bar
3 bar
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
1200
Tme
(s)
25
No.
of
recirc.
1100
900
1000
20
700
600
800
15
V = 1 m/s - T = constant
10
500
400
300
200
0
100
DN 150
DN 125
DN 100
DN 80
DN 65
1 1/2"
2
DN 50
1 1/4"
Vertical version
1"
400
3/4"
p (mm w.g.)
22 - 3/4" - 1
p (kPa)
4
350
3,5
300
250
2,5
200
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
100
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
0,5
50
45
40
0,45
0,4
35
0,35
30
0,3
25
0,25
0,2
20
22 - 3/4
3/4
22 - 3/4 - 1
180
1 1/4 1 1/2
0,1
200
140
160
120
100
70
80
90
60
50
25
35
40
45
30
18
20
14
16
12
7
8
9
10
3,5
4
4,5
2,5
1,8
0,5
DN
1,4
1,6
0,12
1,2
12
10
0,7
0,8
0,9
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,6
18
16
14
G (m3/h)
Flanged and weld-end DISCAL devices are

supplied complete with hot pre-formed shell
insulation.
This system ensures not only perfect thermal
insulation, but also the tightness required to
prevent atmospheric water vapour from
entering the unit. For this reason, this type of
insulation may also be used in cooling water
circuits as it prevents condensation from
forming on the surface of the valve body.
22 (551002)
3/4" (551003)
Insulation
Vertical version
Kv (m3/h)
10,0
16,2
DN
Kv (m3/h)
DN 50
75,0
DN 65
150,0
17,0
DN 80
180,0
28,1
DN 100
280,0
48,8
63,2
DN 125
450,0
70,0
DN 150
720,0
The maximum recommended speed of the medium at the

device connections is ~ 1,2 m/s. The following table gives
the maximum flow rates to meet this condition.
DN
l/min
m3/h
DN
l/min
m3/h
22 - 3/4 - 1
22,7
1,36
DN 50
141,20
8,47
3/4
22,7
1,36
DN 65
238,6
14,32
1
35,18
2,11
DN 80
361,5
21,69
1 1/4
57,85
3,47
DN 100
564,8
33,89
Installation
DISCAL units may be used in both heating and cooling
systems, to ensure the progressive removal of air which is
continuously formed. The units should preferably be installed
after the boiler and on the pump suction side, as these are
the points where the formation of micro-bubbles is greatest.
DISCAL deaerators must be installed in a vertical position,
and preferably:
- upstream of the pump where, due to the high speed of
the medium and the ensuing drop in pressure, air
micro-bubbles develop more easily.
The flow direction of the medium is not important in
DISCAL devices.
In installation sites where inspection is not possible, it is
recommended that the air vent cap is replaced with a
Caleffi 5620 series hygroscopic safety cap.
CHILLER
1 1/2
90,33
5,42
DN 125
980,0
58,8
2
136,6
8,20
DN 150
1436,6
86,2
Application diagram
P
T
F
A
Shut-off valve
Flow switch
Zone valve
Ball valve
Safety thermostat
Control pocket
Regulator
Gas filter
Sensor pocket
Gas regulator
Safety valve
Y-strainer
Backflow preventer
Pump
BALLSTOP
Expansion vessel
AUTOFLOW
Thermometer
3-way valve
Flow meter
valve
Pressure switch
Temperature probe
P
Fuel shut-off valve

Automatic filling unit
DISCAL 551 series
Deaerator, version with drain. Connections for horizontal pipes 3/4 F (from 3/4 to 2) with union. Drain 1/2 F (with plug).
Brass body. PA66G30 internal element. PP float. Brass float guide and stem. Stainless steel float lever and spring. EPDM
hydraulic seals. Medium water and non-hazardous glycol solutions excluded from the guidelines of EC directive 67/548;
maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum discharge pressure 10 bar. Working
temperature range 0110C. Patented.
DISCAL 551 series
Deaerator. Flanged connections DN 50 (from DN 50 to DN 150) PN 16; to be coupled with counterflanges EN 1092-1. Weld
end connections DN 50 (from DN 50 to DN 150). Drain 1 M (with plug). Epoxy resin coated steel body. Stainless steel
internal element. EPDM hydraulic seals. Medium water and non-hazardous glycol solutions excluded from the guidelines of
EC directive 67/548; maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum discharge pressure
10 bar. Working temperature range 0110C. Patented.
Complete with:
- automatic air vent: brass body, PP float, brass float guide and stem, stainless steel float lever and spring;
- chrome plated brass drain cock;
- rigid closed cell expanded polyurethane foam insulation for sizes up to DN 100 (closed cell expanded PE-X for DN 125
and DN 150) and embossed unfinished aluminium external cover. Working temperature range 0105C (0-100C for
DN 125 and DN 150).
DISCAL 551 series
Deaerator, compact version. Connection for horizontal or vertical pipes with compression ends for 22 copper pipe,
threaded connections 3/4 F (and 1) for vertical pipes, threaded connections 3/4 F for horizontal pipes. Brass body.
Stainless steel internal element. PP float. Brass float guide and stem. Stainless steel float lever and spring. EPDM hydraulic
seals. Medium water and non-hazardous glycol solutions excluded from the guidelines of EC directive 67/548; maximum
percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum discharge pressure 10 bar. Working temperature
range 0110C.
CALEFFI
Pre-adjustable filling and charging units
CALEFFI
553 - 573 574 series
01061/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
reducing valve with compensated seat, an inlet strainer, a shut-off
valve and a check valve.
It is installed on the water inlet pipe in sealed heating systems and
its main function is to maintain the pressure of the system stable at
a set value, automatically topping up with water as required.
This product has the characteristic of being pre-adjustable,
which means that it can be adjusted at the required pressure
value before the system filling phase.
Two pre-assembled versions are also available, complete with
shut-off valves and different upstream backflow preventers,
depending on the hazard level of the water inside the system.
- Tech. Broch. 01008 Backflow preventer, 573 series
- Tech. Broch. 01022 Backflow preventer, 574 series
Product range
Code 553540
Code 553640
Code 573001
Code 574000
Filling unit with pressure gauge connection and pressure setting indicator
Filling unit with pressure gauge and pressure setting indicator
Charging unit with pressure gauge, complete with 573 series CAa-BA type ckflow preventer and shut-off valves
Charging unit with pressure gauge, complete with 574 series BA-BA type ckflow preventer, strainer and shut-off valves
size 1/2
size 1/2
size 1/2
size 1/2
Code
Materials (code 553540/640 only)
Body:
Cover:
Control stem:
Moving parts:
Seals:
Strainer:
Shut-off valves:
Performance
Setting range:
Factory setting:
Indicator accuracy:
Pressure gauge range:
Filter mesh size :
Medium:
Connections
Inlet:
Outlet:
Pressure gauge:
553540
553640
573001
574000

PA66GF30
NBR
stainless steel
-

PA66GF30
NBR
stainless steel

PA66GF30
NBR
stainless steel
16 bar
0,24 bar
1,5 bar
0,15 bar
65C
04 bar
0,28 mm
water
10 bar
0,24 bar
1,5 bar
0,15 bar
65C
04 bar
upstream strainer: 0,47 mm
unit strainer: 0,28 mm
water
10 bar
0,24 bar
1,5 bar
0,15 bar
65C
04 bar
upstream strainer: 0,4 mm
unit strainer: 0,28 mm
water
1/2 M with union

1/2 F
1/4 F
1/2 F
1/2 F
-
1/2 F
1/2 F
-
Dimensions
0
CA
LEF
FI
CA
LEF
FI
3
CA
LEFF
I
C
F
F G Mass (kg)
Code A
B
C
D
E
573001 1/2" 335 40 87 101,5 122 213 2,2
Code 553540 and 553640 (patent pending model)
2
3
bar
F G Mass (kg)
Code A
B
C
D
E
574000 1/2" 382 40 80 101,5 164 218 1,9
Obturator guide
In order to
reduce the
frictional
surfaces, the
obturator
stem guide
has been
positioned in the upper part of the device.
It consists of four spokes directly stamped on
the plastic central support.
Pre-adjustment
This model is provided with a pressure
adjustment indicator, which facilitates
setting operations. The system filling
pressure may be set by turning the
regulating screw, even before the system
charging phase begins.
G
B
D
C
Code
A
B
E Mass (kg)
553540 1/2" 122 50 101,5 0,62
553640 1/2" 122 152 50 101,5 0,70
CALEFFI
Non-sticking materials
The central support containing
moving parts and the internal
sliding compensation piston is
made using plastic with a low
adhesion
coefficient.
This
solution minimises the chance of
scale forming, the major cause
of malfunctions.
Diaphragm-seat
seal
The
useful
working surface
of the diaphragm
is particularly large, in order to guarantee greater precision and
sensitivity when working with minimum pressure differences. This
feature is also useful for giving greater force to the sliding of the
piston and overcoming friction.
In view of the low flow rates involved,
the filling unit seat has been
designed with the smallest possible
diameter.
This factor, combined with the
extended surface of the diaphragm,
creates an optimum dimensional
ratio for a piece of equipment which
must
maintain
its
operating
characteristics unchanged over time.
Removable cartridge and strainer

The cartridge containing the operation mechanisms, protected by
a strainer having a large surface area, is removable. This makes it
possible to perform inspections, internal cleaning and, if
necessary, cartridge replacement in an extremely simple and
functional manner.
Code 553540
Backflow preventer and related

reference to European standards
use
in
Code 574000
Charging unit code 574000 is composed of:
To avoid the backflow of water from the heating system, which is

potentially polluted and dangerous for human health, it is always
advisable to install a preassembled charging unit with a backflow
preventer.
The correct use of water backflow preventers is regulated by
European reference standard EN 1717: 2000 Protection against
- Controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer, BA type,

574 series
- Filling unit, 553 series
- Ball shut-off valves
- Y-strainer, 577 series
pollution of potable water in water installations and general requirements

of devices to prevent pollution by backflow.
Code 573001
Charging unit code 573001 is composed of:
- Non-controllable backflow preventer with different pressure
zones, type CAa, 573 series
- Filling unit, 553 series
- Ball shut-off valves
573 series
574 series
The 573 non-controllable backflow preventer with different pressure

zones is of CA type, manufactured according to European standard
EN 14367 Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water.
The 574 controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer is

of BA type , manufactured according to European standard
EN 12729 Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water.
Non-controllable backflow preventer with different pressure zones.

Family C Type A. It may be used to protect against the risk of
Controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer. Family B Type

A. It may be used to protect against the risk of contamination by
contamination by waters classified up to Category 3 (with

reference to European standard EN 1717): Fluid that represents a
waters classified up to Category 4 (with reference to European

standard EN 1717): Fluid that represents a significant health hazard
slight health risk due to the presence of one or more harmful substances.
due to the concentration of toxic substances.
Installation
Maintenance
1. The 553 series filling unit can be installed in either horizontal or

vertical position. It is, however, vital that the unit is not installed
upside down.
The following steps are necessary for the cleaning, inspection and
replacement of the entire regulating cartridge:
2. The special mechanical pre-adjustment system with pressure

indicator allows the assembly to be set to the desired system
value before the charging phase starts.
3. The assembly is normally set at a pressure no lower than that
obtained by adding 0,3 bar to the hydrostatic pressure.
4. During charging, the internal mechanism will automatically adjust the
pressure when the set value is reached, without the need to oversee
the lengthy filling operation. This prevents the system being
charged to a higher pressure value than required.
5. In view of the pre-adjustment function, a pressure gauge
downstream of the fitting is not crucial.
6. Once the system is filled, the shut-off valve can be closed.
To reinstate the automatic filling conditions, the valve just has to be
re-opened. The system pressure value will gradually go back to the
set value.
1) Shut off the unit.

2)Open the lower control knob.
3)Loosen the calibration screw all
the way.
4) Remove the top cover.
5)Remove the cartridge with the
aid of pliers.
6) After inspection and any
necessary cleaning, the entire
assembly can be reassembled
or replaced using the spare
cartridge.
7) Reset the equipment.
Application diagram
P
T
0
4
C
ELA
IFF
F
A
1
0
4
3-way cock
Shut-off valve
Pump
Ball valve
AUTOFLOW
P
Flow meter device
Temperature gauge
BALLSTOP
Temperature probe
Safety thermostat
Pressure switch
C
ELA
IFF
Fuel shut-off valve
Control pocket
Pocket
Gas filter
Safety relief valve
Flow switch
Regulator
Gas regulator
Zone valve
Expansion vessel
Air separator
Code 553540 and 553640
Pre-adjustable filling unit. Threaded connections 1/2 M with union x 1/2 F. Brass body and internal moving parts. Glass nylon
cover. Sliding surfaces in anti-scale plastic. NBR diaphragm and seals. Cartridge removable for maintenance operations.
Maximum working temperature 65C. Maximum inlet pressure 16 bar. Adjustment range 0,24 bar. Pressure indicator for
pre-adjustment of device, accuracy 0,15 bar. Complete with pressure gauge, scale 04 bar (code 553640), pressure gauge
connection 1/4 F (code 553540), shut-off valve, strainer and check valve.
Code 573001
Charging unit with backflow preventer. Connections 1/2 F. Maximum working temperature 65C. Maximum working pressure
10 bar. Complete with: pre-adjustable filling unit, brass body, glass nylon cover, NBR seals, pressure adjustment range
0,24 bar, complete with shut-off valve, strainer and check valve; backflow preventer with non-controllable reduced pressure
zones, CAa type, conforms to EN 14367, with DZR alloy body, NBR seals, complete with collar for fixing to discharge pipe, ball
shut-off valves with brass body, downstream pressure gauge 04 bar.
Code 574000
Charging unit with backflow preventer. Connections 1/2 F. Maximum working temperature 65C. Maximum working pressure
10 bar. Complete with: pre-adjustable filling unit, brass body, glass nylon cover, NBR seals, pressure adjustment range 0,24 bar,
complete with shut-off valve, strainer and check valve; controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer, BA type , conforms
to EN 12729, with DZR alloy body, NBR diaphragm and seals, complete with tundish with collar for fixing to discharge piping, ball
shut-off valves with brass body, downstream pressure gauge 04 bar, Y-strainer for backflow preventers.
CALEFFI
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve

for high flow rates
CALEFFI
524 series
01063/10
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
ISO 9001 No. 0003
FM 21654
Function
The thermostatic mixing valve is used in heating systems with
centralised hot water production.
It is designed to keep the temperature of the mixed water supplied
to the user circuits constant when there are variations in the
temperature of the water contained within the storage.
It is designed for direct connection to the recirculation circuit.
The materials used and high flow rate offered are central factors in
achieving the desired thermal performance and reliability levels.
Product range
524 series Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve for high flow rates
Materials
Body:
Obturator:
bronze
stainless steel
sizes DN 65 and DN 80
Performance
Adjustment temperature range:
Accuracy:
Factory setting:
Max. inlet temperature:
3653C
2C
48C
10 bar
90C
Flanged connections:
DN 65 and DN 80
DN 65
DN 80
Dimensions
p (bar)
1,5
1,0
0,5
p (m w.g.)
A
F
CALEFFI
524
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,02
Code
A
B
524060 DN 65 330
524080 DN 80 355
C
145
155
D
82
92
E
F
G
H
I
Mass (kg)
112 185 121 145 1 1/2
31
124 200 127 155 2
36
Code
524060
524080
DN 65
DN 80
Kv
32
43
100
50
20
10
0,5
0,005
200
Flow rate
(m3/h)
0,01
H
B
Operating principle
RECIRCULATION
HOT
MIXED
The (hot and cold) water proportions are regulated by a double

obturator that slides inside a special cylinder placed between the
hot and cold water passage channels.
For optimal regulation, make sure that the two inlet pipe pressures
are aligned.
The recirculation circuit is easy to construct, thanks to the shut-off
system for both the cold and hot water.
Maximum silent operation and minimal head losses.
Check valves
In systems with thermostatic mixing valves, check valves must be
installed to prevent undesired backflow.
COLD
Regulation and recirculation
(which cannot exceed the setting value) during periods when no

water is drawn.
The check valve (1) prevents undesired circulation from the hot
water storage.
If, after carrying out the procedure described in point 2, it is not

possible to guarantee the stability of the desired temperature
whether or not water is being drawn by the users, valve (3) must be
set to a p greater than the value set for valve (2).
The balancing valve (2) should be opened until the temperature of

the mixed water being recirculated reaches the desired value
Application diagram
524 series
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve for high flow rates. Flanged connections DN 65 (and DN 80). Bronze body. Adjustment
temperature range 3653C. Accuracy 2. Factory setting 48C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum inlet
temperature 90C.
CALEFFI
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valves

for water storage heaters
RE
IS
520 - 522 series

TERE

Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI
Cert. n 0003
01064/08 GB
Function
The 520 and 522 series mixing valves are used in systems that
produce hot water for sanitary purposes with a water storage
heater. They are designed to maintain the preset temperature of the
mixed water delivered to the user despite variations in the
temperature of the water contained in the storage.
Product range
520 series Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve
522 series Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve for installations under a water storage heater
Materials
Body:
Obturator:
Spring:
Sealing elements:
522 series extension:

stainless steel
EPDM
chrome plated brass
Performance
Medium:
Max. working pressure (static):
Max. working pressure (dynamic):
water
10 bar
5 bar
sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1

size 1/2
Max. inlet pressure ratio (H/C or C/H):

1,1:1
Max. hot water inlet temperature:
90C
(code 520430/530/630, 522430)
Setting range: 3048C
4060C
(code 520440/540/640, 522440)
Minimum flow rate to ensure the highest performance:
Connections:
5 l/min
1/2, 3/4, 1 F (520 series)

1/2 M x F (522 series)
Centre distance between

the 522 series connections:
adjustable from 105 to 160 mm
Dimensions
B
A
C
A
Code
5204..
5205..
5206..
A
1/2
3/4
1
B
56
61
64
C
96
103
103
D
54
60
55
Weight (kg)
0,38
0,47
0,59
Code
5224..
A
1/2
B
56
C adjustable
105 160
Weight (kg)
0,65
Legionella vs scalding risk
Energy Savings
In systems producing hot water for sanitary purposes with storage,

in order to avoid the dangerous infection known as Legionnaires
disease, the hot water must be stored at a temperature of at least
60C. At this temperature it is certain that the proliferation of the
bacteria that cause this infection will be totally inhibited. At this
temperature, however, the water cannot be used directly. Water
temperatures over 50C can cause scalding injuries very quickly
and even considerably faster to children and elderly people.
Therefore, it is necessary to use a thermostatic mixing valve which
can reduce the temperature at the point of use to a value much
lower than that of the storage so it can be used by the domestic
user.
For reasons of safety, it is recommended to set the temperature of
the mixed water sent to the user to values no higher than 50C.
Energy savings rules advice to use mixing valves on water delivery

systems for sanitary use with storage, to limit the temperature of the
water at the inlet of the delivery network to 48C with a tolerance of
+5C.
The purpose of limiting the temperature is to reduce passive
thermal losses through the delivery network as much as possible,
besides preventing delivering water at a higher temperature than
necessary.
70
60
Death of 90% of bacteria within

2 minutes
Death of 90% of bacteria within
2 hours
50
3/4
p (m w.g.)
1,5
15
1,0
10
0,5
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,5
40
Kv (m3/h)
1/2
1,30
3/4
1,80
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
50
Bacteria survive but remain

inactive
0,5
10
20
20
10
30
Optimum temperature
for spread of bacteria
0,2
The drawing alongside

Legionella Pneumophila
bacteria as the conditions
vary in the temperature
of the water containing
the bacteria.
To ensure correct thermal
disinfection, it is necessary to go up to values
of no less than 60C.
1/2
p (bar)
1
2,75
Operating principle
The regulating element within the thermostatic mixing valve consists of a temperature sensor in contact with the mixed water outlet pipe. By
expanding and contracting, it continuously ensures correct proportioning of the hot and cold water at the inlet, modulating with the obturator
on the cold water. Correct mixing therefore requires the hot and cold water pressures to be balanced.
522 series
520 series
HOT
HOT
MIXED
COLD
MIXED
COLD
COLD
Use
Under standard conditions, Caleffi 520 and 522 series thermostatic
mixing valves can manage reduced flow rates (from 5 l/min).
Instantaneous hot water production
Caleffi 520 and 522 series thermostatic mixing valves must not be
used in combination with boilers with instantaneous hot water
production for sanitary purposes.
Adding them would impair the operation of the boiler.
Temperature setting
The control knob is used to adjust
temperature between 30C and 48C
or from 40C to 60C depending on
the version.
60
40
160
150
Commissioning
The thermostatic mixing valve must be commissioned in
accordance with current regulations and by qualified personnel
using suitable temperature measuring instruments. We recommend
using a digital thermometer for measuring the temperature of the
mixed water.
155
140
145
135
130
125
120
115
105
Centre
distance
boiler mm.
110
Installation
The 520 and 522 series thermostatic mixing valves must be
installed as shown in the diagrams in this leaflet. They can be
installed in any position, horizontally or vertically. The following
marks are indicated on the mixing valve body: hot water inlet,
indicated by a red colour, cold water inlet, indicated by a blue
colour, and mixed water outlet, indicated by the word MIX.
The 522 series is equipped with a telescopic extension on the cold
water inlet line with an adjustable connection centre distance from
105 to 160 mm. This permits fitting directly under the water storage
heater, easily adapting to different models and sizes. On the
extension there is a label showing the reference marks so as to be
able to cut the pipe to size easily.
Check valves
In systems with thermostatic mixing valves, check valves should be
fitted to prevent undesired backflows, as shown in the diagrams in
this leaflet.
Ball valve
Ball check valve

CALEFFI
Expansion vessel
5261 Series
Safety relief valve
Pressure reducing
valve
Y-strainer
3230 BALLSTOP Series
520 series
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve. Threaded connections 1/2 F (3/4, 1). Chrome plated brass body. Brass obturator.
Stainless steel spring. EPDM seals. Maximum working pressure (static) 10 bar. Maximum working pressure (dynamic)
5 bar. Maximum working temperature 90C. Maximum inlet pressures ratio 1,1:1. Setting range 3048C (4060C).
Minimum flow rate to ensure the highest performance 5 l/min.
522 series
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve for installations under a water storage heater. Threaded connections 1/2 M x F. Chrome
plated brass body. Brass obturator. Stainless steel spring. EPDM seals. Maximum working pressure (static) 10 bar. Maximum
working pressure (dynamic) 5 bar. Maximum working temperature 90C. Maximum inlet pressures ratio 1,1:1. Setting range
3048C (4060C). Minimum flow rate to ensure the highest performance 5 l/min. Centre distance between the connections
adjustable from 105 to 160 mm.
CALEFFI
Preassembled distribution manifolds
CALEFFI
for heating and air-conditioning systems

663 series
01065/06 GB
Function
The preassembled distribution manifolds are designed to optimize
the distribution of the medium in the circuits of the heating and
air-conditioning systems.
They ensure accuracy in controlling the flow to the single circuits,
cutting them off and reduced depth that, at the time of assembly,
facilitates hooking up with the outlet pipes.
They are also offered in a version complete with hot pre-formed
insulation to limit thermal losses and above all to prevent
condensation on the surface when used in air-conditioning
systems.
- Tech. Broch. 01042 Thermo-electric actuator 6561 series
- Tech. Broch. 01142 Thermo-electric actuator with manual opening
and position indicator 6563 series
- Tech. Broch. 01041 Automatic flow stabilizers
- Tech. Broch. 01054 Automatic air vent valves 5020 series
Product range
663 series
Preassembled distribution manifold
663... IS series Preassembled distribution manifold for air-conditioning systems
size 1 1/4
size 1 1/4
Materials:
Flow manifold
- body:
Lockshield valve
- control device upper part
- stem
- seals
- plug
- adjustment key:
Return manifold
- body:

EPDM
5 mm allen key
Shut-off valve
- control device upper part: brass EN 12164 CW614N and PA
- obturator stem:
stainless steel
- obturator:
EPDM
- springs:
stainless steel
- seals:
EPDM
- knob:
ABS
End fitting
- body:
Performance:
Medium:
Temperature range:
Main connections:
Centre distance:
Outlets:
Centre distance:

30%
10 bar
5100C
1 1/4 F; 1 F with reduction as standard

195 mm
3/4 M - 18
50 mm

Material:
Thickness:
20 mm
30 kg/m3
- outer part:
50 kg/m3
Thermal conductivity (DIN 52612): - at 0C
0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C
0,045 W/(mK)
>1.300
Temperature range:
0100C
Class B2
CALEFFI
1 1/4
195
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
1 1/4
Dimensions
CALEFFI
25
CALEFFI
3/4
50
27
L total
Code without insul. 6637C5

6637D5
6637E5
Code with insul.
6637C5 IS 6637D5 IS 6637E5 IS
Nr. outlets
3
4
5
Total L
220
270
320
Weight (kg)
4,8
5,4
5,9
6637F5
6637F5 IS
6
370
6,8
6637G5
6637H5
6637G5 IS 6637H5 IS
7
8
420
470
7,4
8,1
6637I5
6637I5 IS
9
550
8,5
6637L5
6637M5
6637N5
6637O5
6637L5 IS 6637M5 IS 6637N5 IS 6637O5 IS
10
11
12
13
600
650
700
750
9,6
10,5
11
11,6
1 Flow manifold with lockshield valves for flow rate
adjustment
2 Return manifold with shut-off valves fitted for
thermo-electric actuator
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
3 End fittings composed of union with double radial

connection and plugs
4 Pair of brackets fastening to the box
5 Reduction 1 1/4 M x 1 F
6 Hot pre-formed shell insulation (version with
insulation)
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
External shape of the manifolds and brackets
Flow manifold
The flow manifold is
equipped with outlet circuit
shut-off
and
setting
lockshield valves.
In order to prevent leaks or
seepage over time, the
assembly seal is guaranteed
by the EPDM O-Rings on the
headwork (1) and on the
control stem (2) while the
O-Ring on the obturator (3)
permits fully closing the
outlet circuit, if necessary.
1
2
3
A special mention should be given to the outer shape of the manifold

that, thanks to the casting process, can be shaped as needed.
In this case, recesses have been made in correspondence with the
passage of the pipe that comes down from the upper manifold,
allowing it to be partially housed, for the benefit of depth.
This is without interfering with the values of head losses, since the
cross-sections of the recesses (a) are the same as in
correspondence with the zones where the outlets (b)+(c) branch out
and where the adjusters (lockshield valves and shut-off valves)
obstruct the flow of the medium.
b
a
c
Return manifold
The partial housing of the pipe in the manifold shaping is moreover
helped by the brackets, made with such an angle as to obtain a
misalignment of 25 mm between the upper and lower manifolds.
As shown in the figure, this misalignment, at the time of installation,
makes a perfect match automatic between the position of the piping
and the shape of the manifold.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
The return manifold is

equipped with manual shut-off
valves (1), by means of which
the flow to the single circuits
can be cut off.
They are moreover fitted for
an electro-thermal control (2)
that, used with a room
thermostat, permits keeping
the ambient temperature on
the set values as the thermal
load varies.
The obturator stem (3) is
made of ground stainless
steel in order to minimize
friction
and
prevent
dangerous encrustation.
The headwork has a double
seal (4) - (5) on the slide stem
in the form of an O-Ring in
EPDM.
The EPDM obturator (6) is
shaped so as to optimize the
hydraulic characteristics of
the valve and minimize the
noise caused by the flow of
the medium, also during the
progressive action of opening
or closing in operation with
2
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
1
25 mm
4
Pre-formed insulation
5
3
6
The manifold 663 series is also offered in a version complete with

hot pre-formed insulation. This solution is recommended in
applications where it is necessary to limit thermal losses
(installations outdoors in particularly cold places) or, specifically, to
prevent condensation on its surface when used in air-conditioning
systems.
The insulation has been specially designed to aid its coupling with
the manifold and any accessories, such as the thermo-electric
actuators, as well as its installation in boxes.
In order to determine the hydraulic characteristics of the circuit, it is necessary to calculate the total loss of head suffered by the flow of medium
on passing through the devices forming the manifold assembly and the fan coil circuits.
From a hydraulic point of view, the system composed of the manifold assembly and the circuits can be represented as a set of hydraulic elements
arranged in series and in parallel.
PRM
SV = Shut-off valve
LV = Lockshield valve
P/F = Pipe/Fan coil
PSV
P
PP/T/VF
PTot.
PLV
GTot.
GP/F
PFM
PTot.
PLV
PFM
PP/F
PTot.
PSV
GP/F
GTot.
PLV
PP/F
PRM
PSV
GTot.
GP/F
PFM
PRM
= Total loss at the ends of the manifold

(Flow + Return + Pipe/Fan coil)
= Localised loss of circuit setting
lockshield valve
(P/V circuit flow rate)
= Pipe/Fan coil (P/F) loss
(P/F circuit flow rate)
= Localized loss of P/F circuit shut-off valve
(P/F circuit flow rate)
= Distributed loss of the flow
manifold (total flow rate)
= Distributed loss of the return
GP/F
PTot. = PLV +PP/F + PSV + PFM + PRM
(1.1)
When the hydraulic characteristics of each component and the design flow rates are known, the total loss can be calculated as the sum of the
partial losses of head for each specific component of the system, as indicated with the formula (1.1).
P (kPa)
10
600
450
400
350
4,5
4
3,5
300
2,5
250
2,5
0,25
0,2
900
0,1
1000
800
700
600
450
500
400
350
300
250
180
200
160
60
50
140
0,12
120
12
10
90
0,18
0,16
0,14
80
18
16
14
20
60
0,6
45
40
35
0,45
0,4
0,35
30
0,3
25
0,25
18
16
14
0,18
0,16
0,14
12
0,12
0,5
0,2
10
G (l/h)
G (l/h)
Kv
3,10
2,87
Lockshield valve fully open

Shut-off valve
Kv0,01
310
287
0,1
4000
0,3
25
50
0,9
0,8
0,7
3500
30
0,5
1,2
90
80
70
3000
0,45
0,4
0,35
120
100
2500
0,6
45
40
35
100
20
60
70
50
0,9
0,8
0,7
1,8
1,6
1,4
1800
1,2
90
80
70
180
160
140
2000
120
200
1600
1,8
1,6
1,4
1400
180
160
140
1200
250
500
900
300
1000
4,5
4
3,5
800
450
400
350
700
600
100
10
9
8
7
9
8
7
200
1000
900
800
700
900
800
700
500
P (kPa)
P (mm w.g.)
600
1000
500
P (mm w.g.)
Kv
33,5*
23,5*
Flow/return manifold 37 outlets

Kv0,01
3350*
2350*
* Average value
- Kv = flow rate in m3/h for a loss of head of 1 bar

- Kv0,01 = flow rate in l/h for a loss of head of 1 kPa
Example of calculation of total head loss

Supposing we need to calculate the loss of head of a manifold with three outlets with the following characteristics:
Total manifold flow rate: 900 l/h
The pipes and fan coils of the three circuits have the following characteristics of flow rate and loss of head:
Circuit 1
G1 = 200 l/h
PF 1 = 1,3 kPa
PPipe 1 = 1,7 kPa
PP/F1 = 1,7 + 1,3 = 3 kPa
Circuit 2
G2 = 300 l/h
PF 2 = 3 kPa
PPipe 2 = 7,8 kPa
PP/F2 = 7,8 + 3 = 10,8 kPa
Circuit 3
G3 = 400 l/h
PF 3 = 5,3 kPa
PPipe 3 = 7,2 kPa
PP/F3 = 7,2 + 5,3 = 12,5 kPa
(1.2)
We calculate each term of the formula (1.1), using the relationship:

P=G2/Kv0.012
G = flow rate in l/h

P = loss of head in kPa (1 kPa =100 mm w.g.)
Kv0,01 = flow rate in l/h through the device, which corresponds to a head loss of 1 kPa
It should be stressed that the calculation of PTot. must be made taking account of the circuit in which there are the greatest head losses
distributed along the entire circuit composed of piping + fan coil.
In the case we are examining, the relevant circuit is No. 3.
It follows that:
PLV
PP/F
PSV
PFM
PRM
=
=
=
=
=
4002/3102 = 1,7 kPa

12,5 kPa
4002/2872 = 1,9 kPa
9002/33502 = 0,07 kPa
9002/33502 = 0,07 kPa
} Values obtained by neglecting the changes due to flow rate to the single branched circuits.
By means of (1.1) adding up all the calculated terms, we have:

PTot.= 1,7 +12,5 + 1,9 + 0,07 + 0,07 16 kPa
Note:
Because of the low head losses for the manifolds, the two terms relating to them can be neglected.
In general, the total head loss is reasonably approximate to that of the circuit composed of the piping, fan coil and lockshield valve fully open.
Using the lockshield valve

The lockshield valve permits balancing the single circuits of the fan coils to obtain the actual flow rates in each of them that are determined at
the design stage. We consider each single circuit composed of: lockshield, pipe/fan coil and shut-off valve. To be able to set the system correctly
it is necessary to take into account the following data:
the flow rate of the medium that must pass through each circuit (project data).
the loss of head that, for this flow rate, is generated in each circuit:
PCircuit = PP/F + PSV
(1.3)
the loss of head of the most disadvantaged circuit:

PCircuit = PLV + PP/F + PSV (1.4)
+ disadvantaged
In all the circuits the lockshield, for the flow rate GCircuit,
must provide an additional loss of head equal to the
difference, which we can indicate as PLV (p lockshield).
SV
To permit an increase in flow rate, we sometimes consider

the lockshield valve of the circuit with the greatest losses of
head open 80%.
PCircuit
PTot.
Once we know the data PLV and GCircuit for each circuit, we
need to go to the graph of hydraulic characteristics of the
lockshield valve and choose the optimum adjustment
curve to which the valve adjustment position corresponds.
PMost disadvantaged
circuit
PLV
LV
Example of adjustment
Suppose we need to balance three circuits with the characteristics of loss of head and flow rate for the pipe/fan coil shown in the example (1.2):
Since circuit No. 3 is the most disadvantaged one, because it has the greatest loss of head for the pipe/fan coil, we need to adjust the remaining
circuits:
Circuit 3
PP/F = 12,5 kPa
G3 = 400 l/h
Circuit 1
PP/F = 3 kPa
G1 = 200 l/h
PLV = 4002/3102 = 1,7 kPa

PSV = 4002/2872 = 1,9 kPa
PSV =200 /287 = 0,5 kPa
PSV = 300 /287 = 1,1 kPa

PCircuit 3 = 1,7 + 12,5 + 1,9 = 16,1 kPa

PCircuit 1 = 3,0 + 0,5 = 3,5 kPa

PCircuit 2 = 10,8 + 1,1 = 11,9 kPa
most disadvantaged
Circuit 2
PP/F = 10,8 kPa
G2 = 300 l/h
P1
P
P2
PLV1
Most disadvantaged
circuit
P3
PLV2
PCircuit 16 kPa
+ disadvantaged
3000
30
2500
25
2000
20
1800
1600
1400
1,5
2,5
18
16
14
3,5 4 F. O.
1200
12
1000
900
800
700
9
8
7
600
500
10
450
400
350
4,5
4
3,5
300
250
2,5
200
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
100
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
50
1800
2000
1600
1400
900
1200
800
1000
700
600
450
400
500
350
300
250
180
160
200
140
120
80
90
100
70
60
40
45
50
35
30
25
20
18
0,5
16
Circuit 3
Adjustment position fully open
50
45
40
35
14
Circuit 2
PLV2 = 16 - 11,9 = 4,1 kPa
G2 = 300 l/h
Nr. of turns of adjustment = 3
P (kPa)
4500
4000
3500
12
Circuit 1
PLV1 = 16 - 3,5 = 12,5 kPa
G1 = 200 l/h
Nr. of turns of adjustment = 2
P (mm w.g.)
5000
10
To adjust circuits 1 and 2, the data we need

for each one to go and read the lockshield
valve adjustment position will be the
following:
G (l/h)
Hydraulic characteristics of lockshield valve
P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
5000
50
4500
4000
3500
45
40
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
20
1800
1600
1400
1,5
1200
2,5
18
16
14
3,5 4 F. O.
12
1000
900
800
700
9
8
7
600
10
500
450
400
350
4,5
4
3,5
300
250
2,5
200
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
100
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
0,5
1800
2000
1600
1400
1200
900
1000
800
700
600
450
500
400
350
300
250
180
200
160
140
90
120
50
100
80
70
60
45
40
35
30
25
18
20
16
14
10
12
50
Adjustment position
1,5
2,5
3,5
F.O.
Kv
0,22
0,53
0,90
1,50
2,30
2,90
3,10
22
53
90
150
230
290
310
Kv0,01
- Kv = flow rate in m /h for a loss of head of 1 bar

3
663 series
Preassembled distribution manifold for heating systems with 3 (from 3 to 13) outlets. Brass body. Seals of EPDM. Head
connections 1 1/4 (1 with reduction as standard) threaded F, centre distance 195 mm. Outlet connections 3/4 M - 18,
centre distance: 50 mm. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol: 30%. Maximum working
pressure: 10 bar. Temperature range: 5100C. Composed of:
- Flow manifold with lockshield valves with 5 full turns of adjustment.
- Return manifold, with shut-off valves fitted for thermo-electric actuator.
- End fittings composed of union with double radial connection and plugs.
- Pair of brackets.
- Reduction 1 1/4 M x 1 F.
663 IS series
Preassembled distribution manifold for air-conditioning systems, with hot pre-formed insulation, with 3 (from 3 to 13)
outlets. Brass body. Seals of EPDM. Head connections 1 1/4 (1 with reduction as standard) threaded F, centre distance
195 mm. Outlet connections 3/4 M - 18, centre distance 50 mm. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum
percentage of glycol: 30%. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Temperature range: 5100C. Composed of:
- Flow manifold with lockshield valves with 5 full turns of adjustment.
- Return manifold, with shut-off valves fitted for electro-thermal control.
- End fittings composed of union with double radial connection and plugs.
- Pair of brackets.
- Reduction 1 1/4 M x 1 F.
- Hot pre-formed shell insulation made of expanded PE-X with closed cells.

8
10
11
40
60
60
20
80
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
40
60
20
60
20
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
14
13
40
20
0
12
19
18
22
1) Flow manifold with lockshield valve to adjust flow rate, 6631 series
2) Return manifold with shut-off valves fitted for thermo-electric
actuator, 6630 series
3) End fittings composed of union with double radial connection and
plugs, 5994 series
4) Pair of brackets fastening to the box, 658 series
5) Reduction 1 1/4 M x 1 F, 3642 series
6) Hot pre-formed shell insulation (version with insulation) 663 IS series
7) Ball shut-off valves, 391 series
8) Autoflow, 120 series
9) Filter, 120 series
10) Thermo-electric actuator, 6560 - 6561 series
11) Thermo-electric actuator with manual opening and position
indicator, 6563 series
20
21
17
16
23
12) Manual air vent valve, code 337131

13) Automatic air vent valve, code 59575
14) End fitting with automatic air vent valve, code 599671
15) End fitting with manual air vent valve, code 599672
16) Drain cock, code 538400
17) By-pass eccentric kit, code 663000
18) DARCAL fitting, 680 series
19) Plug disc, 386 series
20) Compression fitting, code 3475 ..
21) DARCAL fitting, code 679
22) Box, 659 series
23) Box, 5902 series
15
By-pass eccentric kit with fixed setting, code 663000

Function
In heating and air-conditioning systems, the medium distribution circuits can be totally or partially shut off by closing the
thermoelectric valves in the manifolds or the thermostatic valves of the radiators.
After reducing the flow rate, the differential pressure in the circuit may increase up to values able to generate problems of
noise, high medium speed, mechanical erosion and hydraulic unbalancing of the system itself.
The differential by-pass kit for 663 series manifolds performs the function of keeping the flow and return pressure of the
manifold circuit balanced when the flow rate varies.
This valve is fitted for quick coupling with the 663 series manifolds, reducing the overall dimensions to a minimum.
Product range
Code 663000 By-pass eccentric kit with fixed setting
sizes 3/8 x 1/2
body:
nuts:
18 pipe with plate:
spring:
seals:
gaskets:

copper
POM
stainless steel
EPDM
asbestos-free fibre
Medium:
Temperature range:
Fixed pressure setting:
137150
Materials: -
Dimensions

30%
10 bar
-10110C
20 kPa (2000 mm w.g.)
Flow manifold connection:

Return manifold connection:
B
C
3/8 M
1/2 M
B
3/8"
A
1/2"
Code
663000
C
35
Weight (kg)
0,3
The by-pass valve contains a non-return
obturator connected to a contrast spring.
When the fixed setting pressure is reached, the
valve obturator gradually opens, recirculating
the flow in proportion to the closing of the
thermo-electric valves and maintaining a
constant differential pressure in the manifold
circuit.
20 kPa (2000 mm w.g.)
P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
10000
100
9000
8000
7000
90
80
70
6000
60
50
5000
45
40
35
3000
30
2500
25
20
2000
1800
1600
1400
18
16
14
1200
12
1000
700
800
900
600
500
350
400
450
300
250
180
200
140
160
100
50
120
10
70
80
90
1000
60
The differential by-pass assembly features a

fixed setting that cannot be changed
because it does not contain accessible
adjustment parts.
The small, compact size and offset
connections makes this kit particularly easy
to install, deciding to mount it after installing thermo-electric valves
on the manifold. It does not require a larger or deeper zone box
than those used for normal manifolds.
4500
4000
3500
Q (l/h)
Code 663000
By-pass eccentric kit with fixed setting. Threaded connections 3/8 M x 1/2 M. Brass body and nuts. 18 pipe with plate in
copper. POM check valve obturator, stainless steel spring, EPDM seals, asbestos-free fibre gaskets. Medium: water and glycol
Fixed pressure setting: 20 kPa.
6561
tech. broch. 01042
For manifolds 663 series.
Normally closed.
Code
Materials: - protective shell

- colour
Voltage (V)
230
224
656102
656104
6561
tech. broch. 01042
Normally closed.
With auxiliary microswitch.
Code
(codes 656102/04) white RAL 9010
(codes 656112/14) grey RAL 9002
Normally closed
Electric supply:
Starting current:
Working current:
230 V (ac) - 24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)

1A
230 V (ac) = 13 mA
24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc) = 140 mA
Power consumption:
3W
Auxiliary microswitch contacts rating (codes 656112/14): 0,8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
CE
50C
Operating time:
80 cm
Voltage (V)
230
224
656112
656114
Thermo-electric actuator with manual opening and position indicator
6563
tech. broch. 01142
Normally closed.
Code
656302
656304

- colour
Voltage (V)
230
224
6563
tech. broch. 01142
Normally closed.
Code
656312
656314
(codes 656312/14) grey RAL 9002
Normally closed
Electric supply:
Starting current:
Working current:
230 V (ac) - 24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)

1A
230 V (ac) = 13 mA
24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc) = 140 mA
Power consumption:
3W
Auxiliary microswitch contacts rating (656312/14 codes): 0.8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
IP 40
CE
50C
Operating time:
80 cm
Voltage (V)
230
224
The thermo-electric actuator 6563 series is equipped with a control knob for manual opening, valve opening/closing indicator and a device
for returning to automatic operation from the manual position when the electricity supply is restored.
The control knob for manual opening and the
automatic return from the manual to the automatic
position is particularly useful when testing or
servicing the system if:
- hydraulic tests need to be carried out without
having necessarily to connect and power up the
controls.
- the knob is left on the manual position at the end
of the tests. In this case the control automatically
goes back onto automatic operation when the
system is electrically put into operation.
Automatic flow stabilizers
tech. broch. 01041
Combination of automatic flow stabilizer and ball valve.

Factory set to keep the flow rate automatically within 5% of the set value.
Inspecting, cleaning and replacing the internal cartridge without having to remove the valve
body from the piping.
Suitable for fitting pressure points to check operation.
Suitable for connecting to a drain pipe. The control stem of the ball valve has a blowout-proof
stem and the closing lever is covered with vinyl. Reversible lever.
Male connections with union nut.
Code
120961
120961
120961
120961
120961
120961
120961
Flow rate m3/h
1L2
1L4
1L6
1L8
2L0
2L2
2L5
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1,20
1,40
1,60
1,80
2,00
2,25
2,50
Code
120971
120971
120971
120971
120971
120971
120971
Flow rate m3/h
1L2
1L4
1L6
1L8
2L0
2L2
2L5
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1,20
1,40
1,60
1,80
2,00
2,25
2,50
Thermometer scale:
p Range:
Accuracy:
080C - 40 mm
25 bar
110C
14220 kPa
5%
They are available on request with other flow rates
120 FILTER Version
tech. broch. 01041
Combination of Y-filter and ball valve.

Inspecting, cleaning and replacing the filter without having to remove the valve body from the
piping. Fitted for fitting pressure points to check the degree of filter clogging. Fitted for
connecting to a drain pipe to clean the filter without having to remove it from the body.
The control stem of the ball valve has a blowout-proof stem and the closing lever is covered with
vinyl. Reversible lever.
Male connections with union nut.
Code
120961 000
Code
1 F x 1 1/4 M
120971 000
Thermometer scale:
Filter mesh :
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
080C - 40 mm
25 bar
110C
0,87 mm
Manifolds
6630
Return manifold, with shut-off valves

fitted for thermo-electric actuator.
Materials:
Return manifold
- body:
Shut-off valve
brass
EN 12164 CW614N and PA
- obturator stem:
stainless steel
- obturator:
EPDM
- springs:
stainless steel
- seals:
EPDM
- knobs:
ABS
Code
Connection No. outlet
663030
663040
663050
663060
663070
663080
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
F
F
F
F
F
F
x
x
x
x
x
x
3
4
5
6
7
8
Outlets
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
M
M
M
M
M
M
Flow manifold
- body:
6631
Flow manifold with lockshield valves.
Code
663130
663140
663150
663160
663170
663180
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
F
F
F
F
F
F
x
x
x
x
x
x
3
4
5
6
7
8
Outlets
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
M
M
M
M
M
M
Lockshield valve
brass
EN 12164 CW614N
- obturator stem: brass EN 12164 CW614N
- seals:
EPDM
- plug:
Temperature range:
10 bar
5100C
Main connections:
Outlets:
1 1/4 F x M
3/4 M - 18
50 mm
Shut-off valves
Mounting brackets
391
658
Pair of mounting brackets for use with
boxes 659 series or direct fixing.
Complete with screws and fixings.

Female - male connections with union.
With thermometer scale 0-80C, 40 mm.
Code
391167
391177
Kv (m3/h)
1 x 1 1/4
1 1/4 x 1 1/4
Code
47,5
47,5
658100 for manifolds 666, 667 and 668 series
391
Female - male connections with union.
With thermometer connection.
59575
Automatic air vent valve.

Hot forged brass.
Kv (m /h)
Code
391067
391077
Automatic air vent valves
1 x 1 1/4
1 1/4 x 1 1/4
47,5
47,5
Code
59575
3/8 M
End fittings
5996
337
End fitting composed of union with

double radial connection, 5994 series
with automatic air vent valve code 59575
and drain cock, 538 series.
Mini drain cock.

Adjustable outlet.
Code
Code
599671
337131
3/8 M
1 1/4
5996
End fitting composed of union with
double radial connection, 5994 series,
with automatic air vent valve, 337 series
and drain cock, 538 series.
Drain cock
538
Drain cock
with hose connection and cap.
Code
Code
599672
1 1/4
538400
1/2 M
Fittings
680
679
Self-adjustable diameter fitting for single

and multilayer plastic pipes.
Temperature range:
580C (PE-X)
575C (Multilayer marked 95C)
Patented.
Fitting for multilayer pipe for

continuous high temperature use.
Temperature range: 095C.
Code
680502
680503
680500
680501
680506
680515
680517
680524
680526
680535
680537
680544
680546
680555
680564
680505
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
inside
outside
17,518,0
8,519,
19,019,5
19,510.0
19,510.0
10,511.0
10,511.0
11,512.0
11,512.0
12,513.0
12,513.0
13,514.0
13,514.0
14,515.0
15,516
17
1214
1214
1416
1214
1416
1416
1618
1416
1618
1618
1820
1618
1820
1820
1820
22,50
347
Code
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
Code
679514
679524
679525
679544
679564
679565
679566
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
14x2
16x2
16x2,25
18x2
20x2
20x2,25
20x2,5
679
Case kit to calibrate multilayer pipes
before use with fittings 679 series.
Code
Compression fitting for copper pipe

with O-Ring seal.
Temperature range: -25120C.
347510
347512
347514
347515
347516
347518
WARNING: For a correct use, calibrate

the multilayer pipe before installation.
10
12
14
15
16
18
679000
679001
679002
679003
679004
679006
679007
679008
679005
Set calibrators
calibrator 14x2
calibrator 16x2
calibrator 16x2,25
calibrator 18x2
calibrator 20x2
calibrator 20x2,25
calibrator 20x2,5
handle for calibrator
Calibration of the multilayer pipe and assembly of the fitting

components, 679 series
386
Screw plug with nut, for manifold
outlets.
Pipe
Code
386500
3/4
Pipe clamp
Nut
Hose connection
Manifold or valve
connection
Box
5902
659
Ventilated box with frame.

For single manifolds 663 series.
Adjustable depth
from 110 to 140 mm.
Closure with a push-fit clamp.
In painted sheet steel.
Inspection wall box for

manifold systems.
Wall or floor installations
(with 660 series).
Adjustable depth
from 110 to 140 mm.
In painted sheet speel.
Code
Code
Useful dim. (h x b x d)
590204
590206
590208
590210
450
450
450
450
x
x
x
x
1400
1600
1800
1000
x
x
x
x
659040
659060
659080
659100
659120
110140
110140
110140
110140
Choice of box size, 659 series, according to the number

of outlets
x
x
x
x
x
1400
1600
1800
1000
1200
x
x
x
x
x
110140
110140
110140
110140
110140
660
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
450
450
450
450
450
Floor installation kit for inspection wall boxes 659 series.

Consists of:
- 2 supports of 20 cm height,
- 2 side panels,
- 1 pipe bending bar.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
(h x b x d)
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
L total
Code
40
40
60
20
0
225
80
60
20
0
80
95
660040
660060
660080
660100
660120
for
for
for
for
for
659040
659060
659080
659100
659120
Code without insulation

6637C5
6637D5
6637D5
6637F5
6637G5
6637H5
6637I5
6637L5
6637M5
6637N5
6637O5
Code with insulation
6637C5 IS 6637D5 IS 6637D5 IS 6637F5 IS 6637G5 IS 6637H5 IS 6637I5 IS 6637L5 IS 6637M5 IS 6637N5 IS 6637O5 IS
Nr. outlets
3
4
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Tot. length manifold (mm)
220
270
270
370
420
470
550
600
650
700
750
Box length (mm)
400
400
400
600
600
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
Box code, 5902 series
590204
590204
590204
590206
590206
590208
590208
590208
590208
590210
590210
659040
659040
659040
659060
659060
659080
659080
659080
659080
659100
659100
Radiator system with wall-mounted boiler with direct distribution
RT
RT
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
Heating and air-conditioning

system with two-pipe fan coils
RT
RT
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
CHILLER
CALEFFI
Distribution manifolds
with pre-formed insulation
series 650
cert. n 0003
01067/03 GB
ISO 9001
Function
This manifold has been designed specifically for heating and
air conditioning systems, for the distribution of hot or cold fluids. It is
provided with pre-formed insulation, whose shape and dimensions
prevent not only heat loss but also condensing on the metal surfaces.
The tight sealing of the insulation is an essential factor in
preventing damp air from passing from the atmosphere to the
surface of the manifold and forming condensation. For this reason,
this solution is considerably more efficient than the traditional
polyurethane foam. It is also simpler to check the hydraulic seals
and carry out any maintenance work that may be required.
Technical specification:
CALEFFI
brass EN 12165 CW617N (cast)

1 1/4" F x 1 1/4" M
3/4" 18
60 mm
36 mm
C
Material:
Manifold connections:
Branch connections:
Branch centre distance:
Manifold internal diameter:
Dimensions
Localized loss factor of inlet connections:
Localized loss factor of branches:
1,0
3,0
Characteristics of insulation
Hot pre-formed insulation, can be sealed with glue (615500).
Material:
Thickness:
Density:
Thermal conductivity (UNI 7745):
cross-linked PE expanded
20 mm
33 kg/m3
0C 0,038 W/mK
40C 0,045 W/mK
Steam diffusion resistance factor (DIN 52615):
> 1300
Temperature range:
- 40 95C
Fire resistance (D.M. 26/06/84):
class 1
Code
Branches
650722
1 1/4"
180
100
60
3/4"
80
650732
1 1/4"
240
100
60
3/4"
80
650742
1 1/4"
300
100
60
3/4"
80
Application diagram
CHILLER
Two pipe system
Manifold series 650
Single manifold in cast brass for heating and air conditioning systems. Manifold connections 1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M.
Number of branches 2 (or 3 or 4); connection 3/4 M 18, centre distance 60 mm. Complete with
heat-formed cross-linked PE expanded shell insulation.
Accessories
347
Compression connection for
copper pipe, with O-Ring seal.
5994/5995
Single end connection and
with double radial connection.
680
Self-adjusting diameter
fitting for plastic pipes,
single and multi-layer.
392
Connection with thermometer.
5991/5993
Connection and end plug.
615500
Sealant for insulation.
Set point regulating unit for underfloor

heating radiant panels
series 160
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01069/01 GB
Function
The set point regulating unit carries out the function of maintaining
the fluid flow temperature constant at the input value when
distributed in a low temperature system with underfloor radiant
panels.
The unit is preassembled with distribution manifolds and is housed
in a casing enclosure which guarantees functional simplicity, safety
and ease of installation.
Technical / constructional characteristics
Safety thermostat characteristics
- Pipe material:
- Setting range:
- Factory setting:
- Level of protection:
- Setting range:
- Max. primary input temp.:
- Max. pressure:
- Differential by-pass regulation:
- Thermometers:
- brass UNI EN 12165 CW617N,

- copper with polished surfaces
2050C
100C
10 bar
0,10,6 bar
080C
- Circulator centre distance:

- Circulator connections:
- Connections to manifold:
- Connections to primary circuit:
- Connections to branch circuits
180 mm
1 1/2 with union
1 1/4 with union
1 with union
3/4 M
555C
50C
IP 40
Yellow/Green
C Blue
1 Brown
2 Black
+C
- Contacts rating:
- Contacts rating:
(C-1) 10(2,5)A / 250V

(C-2)
1(1)A / 250V
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
1200
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
60
20
80
40
60
20
80
13 outlets
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
450
205
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
10 outlets
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
20
0
6 outlets
1000
3 outlets
800
600
Dimensions
CALEFFI
ATTENZIONE:
Il circolatore
deve essere
installato
CALEFFI
seguendo
il senso
di flusso
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
CALEFFI
8
10
8
6
4
2
0
6
4
2
0
40
CALEFFI
1606C1
3
590
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
CALEFFI
8
10
8
6
4
2
0
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
CALEFFI
8
10
8
6
4
2
0
6
4
2
0
40
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
CALEFFI
60
20
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
50
35
Code
Outlets
A
10
8
6
4
2
0
60
20
CALEFFI
80
310
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
1606D1
4
640
1606E1
5
690
1606F1
6
740
1606G1
7
790
1606H1
8
840
1606I1
9
915
1606L1
10
965
60
150190
1606M1
11
1015
1606N1
12
1065
1606O1
13
1115
Functional scheme
Thermostatic valve
Calibration valve
20 50C
9
ST
60 95C
System pump
By-pass valve
Shut-off valve
Check valve
Delivery flow sensor
Safety sensor
Safety thermostat
ST
Thermometer
Pressure tapping
Manual air vent
Operating principle
The unit operates on the principle of mixing the high temperature

fluid from the boiler primary circuit at point A with the low temperature
fluid returning from the user secondary circuit.
The unit consists of the following devices with functions as described:
BOILER
RETURN
40
SYSTEM
RETURN
60
20
80
45
50
55
2 Thermostatic valve, which keeps the selected temperature

constant in the secondary circuit flow, modulating the quantity of
primary fluid at high temperature entering the secondary circuit.
It is controlled by the sensor immersed in the secondary fluid. The
quantity of incoming primary fluid, under average operating
conditions, is approx. 25% of the total flow of the secondary circuit.
1 Template for circulator insertion, for distributing the low

temperature fluid in the user secondary circuit.
ATTENZIONE:
Il circolatore
deve essere
installato
seguendo
il senso
di flusso
40
60
20
3 Calibration valve, which makes it possible to balance the quantity

of the two fluids mixed according to the nominal working
temperatures, the required output and the secondary fluid flow.
The regulating unit comes preassembled with:
5 Ball valve with built-in Ballstop, to control circulation in the

hydraulic circuit and to allow for complete shut-off for maintenance
purposes.
Delivery manifold series 667

equipped with individual circuit
micrometric calibration valve.
7 Thermometers, which make it possible to control the flow and

return temperatures of the underfloor panels circuit to maintain the
system output, facilitating the calibration operation.
8 Manual air vent, useful during the filling operation of the system.
9 Tapping for connection of pressure gauges, to check the
operating conditions of the circuit and the circulator. The gauges
can also be connected to the Flomet electronic differential pressure
measurer to speed up the system calibration process.
FLOW TO
SYSTEM
FLOW FROM
BOILER
4 Differential by-pass valve, which keeps the pressure in the

secondary circuit constant at the set value when the number of open
circuits to the underfloor panels varies. These may in fact be
automatically closed if the circuit valves have a thermo-electric
control head and a thermostat for controlling the output requirement.
6 Safety thermostat, which limits the maximum temperature of the

fluid flowing to the underfloor panels circuit. If the valve sensor is
damaged, it stops the electricity supply to the circulator or the boiler.
80
Series 666 return manifold

equipped with individual circuit
shut-off valves suitable for
application of thermo-electric
control heads.
Series 5996 head units with

automatic air vent valve and drain
valve.
For further details see

brochure
01044 GB
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
Regulating the calibration valve
THERMOSTATIC VALVE
The calibration valve (VB on scheme 1) must create a differential

pressure sufficient to force the injection of fluid at a high temperature
through the thermostatic valve, pV ~ pVB.
50
20
10
5
2
1
5000
3500
4000
4500
3000
2500
2000
100
G (l/h)
kv (2K) = 0,82
kv (1K) = 0,42
1800
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1400
1600
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
900
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
1200
0.1
0.45
0.4
0.35
0.3
0.25
800
0.2
9
8
7
6
1000
0.5
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
700
18
16
14
12
600
7 TA
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
500
5 5,5 6
45
40
35
30
25
350
400
450
10
300
20
p (kPa)
2
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
250
180
900
p (m w.g.)
1000
800
700
600
500
350
400
450
300
250
140
160
180
200
100
120
90
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
80
.18
.16
.14
.12
70
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
60
.45
.4
.35
.3
.25
CALIBRATION VALVE
200
9
8
7
6
50
140
160
.9
.8
.7
.6
20
.1
18
16
14
12
50
.2
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
35
40
45
.5
45
40
35
30
25
30
p (kPa)
2K
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
25
1K
120
p (m w.g.)
G (l/h)
System sizing
The nominal incoming flow from the boiler circuit is calculated using
the following equation (see scheme 1):
Gc = Gs (Tm-Tr) / (Tc-Tr)
Gc
Gs
Tm
Tr
Tc
=
=
=
=
=
boiler primary circuit flow

secondary circuit flow
secondary circuit delivery flow temperature
secondary circuit return temperature
boiler primary circuit temperature
These values are used to determine the thermostatic valve head

loss, using the graph shown above. The value found must be added
to the pressure drop across the secondary circuit to determine the
necessary head of the corresponding pump in the case of zero
head at the unit connections.
Practical method
With reference to the operating temperature conditions of the boiler
circuit and the system, the calibration valve must be gradually closed
until the set temperature imposed by the thermostatic valve is
reached on the unit flow delivery thermometer.
This balances the amount of fluid passing respectively through the
thermostatic valve and the calibration valve itself under the rated
conditions.
Reference table
Gc
Tc
Tm
pV
Gs
The table below can be used as a guide for setting the calibration
valve. It takes account of the main parameters which interact when
the system is operating under steady state conditions.
H
VB
H=0
Tc
(C)
Tm
(C)
Tr
(C)
VB
(n giri)
Gs
(l/h)
ps
(kPa)
P max
(kW)
70
35
30
6,5
1850
15
10
70
40
33
5,5
1500
15
12
70
45
35
4,0
1150
15
13
70
50 ( - 2 )
38
3,5
1150
15
16
70
30
6,5
2750
25
16
70
35
50
40
33
5,5
2000
25
16
70
45
35
4,5
1550
25
18
70
50 ( - 2 )
38
4,5
1800
25
25
ps
Tr
+0
+0
Example
Tm = 40C
Pump 1
SCHEME 1
Pump 2
where:
The calibration valve permits 8 regulating turns between the fully

closed and fully open positions; normally it is supplied preset at
5,5 turns, which will permit the unit to meet most of the systems
operating conditions.
If adjustment is necessary, in order to satisfy the real requirements
of the system, a practical method and a reference table are given
below.
50
Tr = 33C
Tc = 70C
Gs = 2000 l/h
Gc = 2000 (40-33) / (70-33) = 378 l/h

The following is found from the graph: thermostatic valve head loss pV ~ 25 kPa
The loss of head across the check valve is negligible.
Knowing the pressure drop across the secondary circuit ps = 20 kPa
at nominal flow Gs, the following head is obtained
H = pV + ps = 45 kPa
Values found with circulators having the following characteristics:

H (kPa)
H (kPa)
60
80
Pump 1
50
60
30
50
20
40
10
0
Pump 2
70
40
30
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
G (l/h)
20
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
G (l/h)
Applications schemes
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Mixed system with

wall-mounted boiler
and zone valve
RT
Manual valve
3-way zone valve
Pump
RT
Room thermostat
Check valve
RT
Autoflow
Filter
Hydraulic separator
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
ATTENZIONE:
Il circolatore
deve essere
installato
CALEFFI
seguendo
il senso
di flusso
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
Air separator
Average / large systems
RT
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
ATTENZIONE:
Il circolatore
deve essere
installato
CALEFFI
seguendo
il senso
di flusso
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
RT
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
ATTENZIONE:
Il circolatore
deve essere
installato
CALEFFI
seguendo
il senso
di flusso
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
Series 160 set point regulating unit
Set point thermal regulating unit with brass and polished copper piping. Connections to primary circuit 1 with union.
Primary max. temperature 100C, max. pressure 10 bar. Complete with: template for insertion of circulator, max.
outlets centres 180 mm, connections 1 1/2 with union. Thermostatic valve with remote sensor, setting range
2050C. Calibration valve. Differential by-pass valve, range of calibration 0,10,6 bar. Ball valve with built-in stop.
Safety thermostat, setting range 555C, factory calibration 50C, protection to IP 40. Thermometers scale 080C.
Tappings for connection to pressure gauge. Flow and return manifolds with 3 (from 3 to 13) outlets complete with
micrometric preregulating valves, shut-off valves suitable for thermo-electric control heads and automatic air vent
units. Supplied pre-assembled in pre-coated sheet steel casing with lock.
S.S. 229 Km 26,5 I - 28010 Fontaneto dAgogna (NO) Tel. Int. +39 0322 8491 Fax +39 0322 863723
Zone valves
CALEFFI
series 676
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01072/02 GB
Function
Zone valves are used to control the thermal carrier fluid in heating
and air-conditioning systems. Coupled with a thermo-electric
actuator and managed by a room thermostat, they allow automatic
on/off control of the part of the hydraulic circuit on which they are
inserted.
Their special feature is their low flow rate coefficient and they can
therefore be installed to control small areas or used directly on the
emitters.
Product range
Zone valves are available in the following configurations:
Series 676
Series 677
Series 678
2-way
3-way
4-way
sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1

sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1
sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1
They can be coupled with thermo-electric actuator heads:

Code 656102/4
Code 656112/4
220 V / 24 V
220 V / 24 V
without auxiliary microswitch

with auxiliary microswitch
Actuator with auxiliary microswitch
Valves
Materials: -
body:
obturator:
control spindle:
hydraulic seals:

stainless steel
EPDM
- Medium:
- Max. percentage of glycol:
-
Temperature range:
Max. pressure:
Max. pressure differential:
Connections:
Bottom 3-way connection:

30%
095C
10 bar
1,2 bar
1/2, 3/4, 1, M with union
1/2 M with union
Actuator without auxiliary microswitch
Normally closed with auxiliary contact

Supply:
220 V o 24 V
Starting current:
220 V =0,6 A and 24 V = 2 A
Power consumption:
220 V and 24 V = 3 W
Auxiliary microswitch contacts current:
0,8 A (220 V)
Level of protection:
50C
Operating time:
Supply cable length:
80 cm
For further details of the characteristics of series 656 thermo-electric
actuators, see the following leaflet:
- Thermo-electric actuators
Normally closed
Supply:
220 V o 24 V
Starting current:
220 V = 0,6 A; 24 V = 2 A
Power consumption:
220 V e 24 V = 3 W
Level of protection:
50C
Operating time:
Supply cable length:
80 cm
leaflet 01042
A
A
Dimensions
B
C
B
Code
A
676040 1/2
676050 3/4
676060
1
B
113
113
122
C
41
41
41
D
81
81
81
B
Code
A
677040 1/2 1/2
677050 3/4 1/2
1/2
677060 1
C
113
113
122
D
52
52
52
E
81
81
81
Code
A
678040 1/2
678050 3/4
678060
1
B
113
113
122
C
4963
4963
4963
D
81
81
81
Operating principle
When a room thermostat operates, the thermo-electric actuator
causes the opening or closing of the valve obturator controlling the
thermal carrier fluid.
The actuator operates via a wax expansion thermostat heated up
by a PTC resistor, which automatically limits the current once
reaching regime temperature.
Control spindle
The stainless steel control spindle has a double hydraulic seal
consisting of two EPDM O-rings; this means that the upper part of
the unit can be replaced even when the system is operating.
Variable centre distance
The series 678 4-way valve allows for adjustable centre distance
between connections from 49 to 63 mm, permitting direct
connection to twin parallel type manifolds.
2-way valve, series 676 + actuator, series 656
Manual opening
The manual knob on the valve can be used for any preliminary
opening/closing operations. It is removed to fit the thermo-electric
actuator by unscrewing the lower metal ring.
The valve, with the servo-actuator fitted, is in the normally closed
position; for manual opening, remove the thermo-electric actuator.
63
49
Locking ring
Valves in OPEN position
Valves in BY-PASS position
P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
40
4000
2000 1800
18
16
14
12
900
800
700
600
9
8
7
6
400
300
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
10
7000
70
6000
60
2000
1000
0,5
50
50
40
4000
3000
30
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
900
800
1,0
1,0
1,2
1,2
1,2
C A L E F F I
The 2-way valve, series 676, can be installed in the flow or

return pipework.
C A L E F F I
The zone valves must be installed in line with the direction of flow
indicated by the arrow on the valve body.
C A L E F F I
Installation
C A L E F F I
* Max. differential pressure ensured by servo-actuator in normal operation
When installing the valves in

the relevant zone manifold
box, adequate space (20 mm)
must be left above the
servo-actuator head to permit
its replacement.
To prevent excessively high
temperatures being reached,
ensure that sufficient air can
circulate inside the manifold
box.
900
C A L E F F I
3,7
3,7
3,7
Assembly in manifold box
C A L E F F I
1/23/4-1
pmax *
(bar)
straight by-pass
Kv (m3/h)
C A L E F F I
676
677
678
DN
G (l/h)
C A L E F F I
Series
10
G (l/h)
Thermo-electric
actuators codes:
656102, 656104,
656112, 656114,
+
zone valves
20
1000
800
700
600
450
500
400
350
300
500
250
1800
0,2
2000
1600
1400
1200
900
1000
800
700
600
450
200
500
400
600
350
700
0,3
300
0,4
30
250
40
20
100
5000
200
100
80
500
200
90
8000
20
1600
1400
1200
P (kPa)
10000 9000
30
3000
1000
P (mm w.g.)
The figure represents installation

in inspection box, series 5901
with controlled pressure twin
parallel manifold, series 356.
Electrical connections with auxiliary microswitch

Diagram with pump disconnected
The 3-way valve, series 677 and 4-way valve, series 678 must be
installed in the flow pipework.
The auxiliary microswitch can be used to switch off the pump

when heat is not required and the valve is closed.
If the pumps power consumption exceeds the capacity of the
contacts, equal to 0,8 A, an intermediate relay should be used.
L
N
Thermostat
220 V / 50 Hz
24 V / 50 Hz
The valve is installed with the control knob at the top or in the
horizontal position, never upside down.
The 2-way valve cannot be converted into a 3-way valve or vice versa.
2 Blue
3 Watt
1 Brown
3 Black
max. 0,8 A
4 Black
Applications diagrams
RT
Shut-off valve
Manual valve
Electric pump
RT
Room thermostat
Check valve
Insulated manifold
Zoned system
RT
RT
CHILLER
Two pipe system
Series 676
2-way zone valve. Designed for thermo-electric actuator. Connections 1/2 (from 1/2 to 1) M, with union.
Brass body. Stainless steel control spindle. Control spindle seal with EPDM double O-ring. ABS manual
control knob. Temperature range 095C. Max. working pressure 10 bar. Max. differential pressure 1,2 bar.
Series 677
Lower connection 1/2 M, with union. Brass body. Stainless steel control spindle. Control spindle seal with
EPDM double O-ring. ABS manual control knob. Temperature range 095C. Max. working pressure 10 bar.
Max. differential pressure 1,2 bar.
Series 678
Brass body. Stainless steel control spindle. Control spindle seal with EPDM double O-ring. ABS manual
control knob. Temperature range 095C. Max. working pressure 10 bar. Max. differential pressure 1,2 bar.
CALEFFI
Set point regulating unit with

distribution kit for high temperatures
series 160
CALEFFI
01073/01 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The high temperature fluid distribution kit has been produced for
use in mixed system solutions: radiant panels and radiators in
combination with the low temperature set point regulating unit and
underfloor radiant panel distribution manifolds. The kit has the
function of distributing to the heat emitters a proportion of the high
temperature fluid coming from the boiler primary circuit. It is
supplied complete with fixed rating differential by-pass valve.
This accessory is, in fact, essential in cases where the radiator
circuits are controlled by thermostatic or thermo-electric
valves.
The kit is available in either a separate component version or a
pre-assembled version, with series 160 distribution and set point
regulating unit.
Technical specification of kit code 160002/3
- Material: -
For further details, see leaflet:
Manifolds:
By-pass body:
Pre-formed 18 mm flared pipe:
copper
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
Dimensions kit code 160002/3

160003
3
1
1
1/2
205
214
50
B
C
F
- Manifold internal diameter:

30 mm
- Manifold connections : - Inlet:
1 F
- Outlet:
1 M
- Branch outlets:
1/2 F
- Branch outlets centre distance: 50 mm
160002
2
1
1
1/2
205
164
50
Code
Outlets
A
B
C
D
E
F
10 bar
100C
20 kPa (2000 mm w.g.)

Max temperature:
Differential by-pass valve setting:
ref. 01069
- Set point regulating unit for underfloor panel systems
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
2+11 outlets
3+10 outlets
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
1200
2+7 outlets
3+6 outlets
800
2+3 outlets
1000
Dimensions
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
450
205
CALEFFI
ATTENZIONE:
Il circolatore
deve essere
installato
CALEFFI
seguendo
il senso
di flusso
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
310
A
35
A
60
150190
Code
Radiator outlets
Panel outlets
A
1606C1 002 1606D1 002 1606E1 002

2
2
2
3
4
5
740
790
840
1606F1 002 1606G1 002 1606H1 002

2
2
2
6
7
8
890
940
990
1606I1 002
2
9
1065
1606L1 002 1606M1 002

2
2
10
11
1115
1165
Code
Radiator outlets
Panel outlets
A
1606C1 003 1606D1 003 1606E1 003

3
3
3
3
4
5
790
840
890
1606F1 003 1606G1 003 1606H1 003

3
3
3
6
7
8
940
990
1040
1606I1 003
3
9
1115
1606L1 003
3
10
1165
Manifold hydraulic characteristics
P (mm w.g.)
Localised loss coefficient:

- of end connection:
- of branch outlet:
By-pass valve hydraulic characteristics
1,0
3,0
P (kPa)
10000
100
9000
8000
7000
90
80
70
6000
60
50
5000
4500
4000
3500
45
40
35
3000
30
2500
25
20
900
800
1000
700
10
600
450
400
500
350
300
250
180
200
160
140
100
50
90
12
120
1200
1000
80
18
16
14
70
1800
1600
1400
60
2000
Q (l/h)
Application diagram
Shut-off valve
Mixed system with

wall-mounted boiler
Electric pump
RT
Room thermostat
Thermostatic valve
Lockshield valve
Manual valve
RT
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
2-
3W
CALEFFI
65610
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
220 V -
CALEFFI
ATTENZIONE:
Il circolatore
deve essere
installato
CALEFFI
seguendo
il senso
di flusso
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
RT
Series 160 (HT)
High temperature set point thermal regulating unit with copper piping and polished surface. Connections to
primary circuit 1 F. Connections to high temperature manifold 1 F with nut. Maximum primary temperature
100C. Maximum pressure 10 bar. Complete with template for insertion of circulator, maximum distance 180 mm,
connections 1 1/2 with nut; thermostatic valve with remote sensor, regulating range 2050C; balancing valve;
differential by-pass valve, setting range 1060 kPa; ball valve with built-in non return valve; safety thermostat,
setting range 555C, factory setting 50C, protection to IP40; thermometers, scale 080C; arrangement for
connection of pressure gauges; 3-outlet flow manifold (3 to 11) connection 3/4 M for panel system circuit,
complete with micrometric preregulation valve and air venting unit; 3-outlet return manifold ( 3 to 11) connection
3/4 M for panel system circuit, complete with shut-off valve arranged for thermo-electric actuator operation and
air balancing unit; 2-outlet return manifold (2 to 3) connection 1/2 F for high temperature circuit, with differential
by-pass valve set at 20 kPa. Supplied pre-assembled in pre-coated sheet steel casing.
Code 160002
2-outlet flow and return manifolds for high temperature circuit. Brass body. Manifold connections 1 M x 1 F.
Outlet connections 1/2 F. Supplied with differential by-pass valve set at 20 kPa.
Code 160003
3-outlet flow and return manifolds for high temperature circuit. Brass body. Manifold connections 1 M x 1 F.
Outlet connections 1/2 F. Supplied with differential by-pass valve set at 20 kPa.
CALEFFI
Fuel shut-off valve I.S.P.E.S.L. approved
CALEFFI
series 540
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01074/03 GB
General
Series 540 (97C) fuel shut-off valves are made by Caleffi S.p.A. in
compliance with the essential safety requirements laid down by
directive 97/23/CE of the European Parliament and the Council of
the European Union for harmonisation of member states with
Function
111 5
The Caleffi series 540 fuel shut-off valve is a fail-safe safety

device with pre-set calibration. The valve, installed in the burner
fuel supply pipework, shuts off the flow of fuel when the
temperature of the heat-carrying fluid reaches the calibrated value
of the sensor.
As this is a fail-safe device, in the case of damage to the sensor
assembly, the fuel supply pipe is closed automatically.
This valve can be used with different types of gaseous fuels and is
available in versions for superheated water.
I.S.P.E.S.L.
Product range
Series 540 Fuel shut-off valve with flanged connections
Dimensions
DN 65 - 80 - 100
1/2 M
Code completion (.)

Max temperature: - (sensor side): calibration temperature + 20%
- (valve side):
50C
Average working temperature (using gas):
15C
12 bar
- (sensor side):
- (valve side) using gas:
50 kPa
Suitable for following fuels:
methane, LPG
PED category:
IV
Flanged connections PN16:

Sensor pocket connection:
aluminium alloy
stainless steel
NBR
Materials: - body:
- spring:
- seals:
Sizes DN 65, DN 80, DN 100
With 5 m capillary
0 97C
2 120C 4 140C 6 160C 8 180C
With 10 m capillary
1 97C
3 120C 5 140C 7 160C 9 180C
Length of connecting capillary tube 5 or 10 m

Code
A
B
C
D
E
F
54060. DN 65 310 112,5 225 337,5 1/2
54080. DN 80 310 112,5 225 337,5 1/2
54010. DN 100 350 157,0 214 371,5 1/2
G
60
60
60
Weight (kg)
9,5
9,9
15,5
Operating principle
Sensor pocket
If the calibrated temperature is reached, the vapour pressure

sensitive element, with the change of state, causes the triggering of
the actuator via the capillary tube and the flexible bellows.
The intervention functions are restored by pressing the pushbutton
positioned in the lower part of the valve and protected by a metal
cover.
The compact dimensions of the pocket make it suitable even for

small diameter pipework. In addition, its limited height means that
it can be positioned vertically, avoiding difficult installation in the
case of slopes or near bends.
The superheated water versio
of the pocket is made of
stainless steel.
Methane at 15C
P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
DN 65 DN 80 DN 100
500
450
400
350
4,5
4
3,5
250
2,5
300
200
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
40
35
0,45
0,4
0,35
25
0,25
100
0,5
5045
30
0,3
20
0,2
18
16
14
12
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
8
7
6
0,09
0,08
0,07
0,06
10 9
0,1
54,5
0,05
4
3,5
0,045
0,04
0,035
2,5
0,025
4000
2500
0,02
3000
1400
1600
1800
2000
800
900
1200
700
1000
600
350
400
450
500
300
250
140
160
180
200
120
100
70
80
90
60
50
35
40
45
30
20
10
14
16
18
25
0,03
12
G (m3/h)
LPG at 15C
Reset
P (mm w.g.)
Should the shut-off device be activated, it has to be reset to its

original status as follows:
500
a) Wait until the water temperature falls to 10C below the shut-off
temperature (otherwise it will not be possible to reset the device).
200
b) Unscrew the protective cap.
100
250
2,5
300
3
2
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
40
35
0,45
0,4
0,35
25
0,25
5045
0,5
30
0,3
20
0,2
18
16
14
12
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
8
7
6
0,09
0,08
0,07
0,06
10 9
0,1
54,5
0,05
4
3,5
0,045
0,04
0,035
2,5
0,025
4000
2500
0,02
3000
1400
1600
1800
2000
1200
1000
800
900
700
600
500
350
400
450
300
250
200
140
160
180
120
100
70
80
90
60
50
35
40
45
20
30
25
0,03
14
16
18
12
Series 540 valves are positive action (fail-safe) devices: if the

sensor element is damaged or the capillary is broken, the positive
action consists of an upward movement of the control unit,
thus triggering the actuator, which in turn closes the valve. If this
situation occurs, the valve must be replaced.
4,5
4
3,5
10
c) Press the reset button.
P (kPa)
DN 65 DN 80 DN 100
450
400
350
G (m3/h)
Guideline ratings of boilers (kW)

Series
Size
Methane
LPG
540
540
540
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
900 - 1.900
1.100 - 2.600
1.900 - 4.500
1.700 - 2.300
1.900 - 2.900
3.400 - 4.600
Certification
CE mark
Series 540 (97C) fuel shut-off valves meet the requirements of
directive 97/23/CE for pressurised equipment (also referred to as
the PED). They are therefore classified in Category IV and granted
the CE mark.

testing of each individual device included in the approved
series. The test is carried out in the presence of an I.S.P.E.S.L.
inspector who draws up the report after the test has been passed.
The document gives the serial number of the valve, which is
also to be found on the plate fixed to the valve body.
CALEFFI
S.p.A.
origina
le
9
- S.S. 22
gna (NO)
rmici
to d'Ago
nti idrote
Fontane
ILE
28010 enti per impia
MBUSTIB
on
CO
mp
L
Co
DE
VOLA
A. VAL
TAZIONE
TERCETACQUA CALDCCOLTA R
A DI IN
RA
IVE
VALVOLR IMPIANTI ADSECONDO APPLICAT .P.E.S.L.
PE
ATA TECNICHE CNICA I.S
NI
OMOLOG
ARE TE L 6/8/92
CAZIO
SPECIFI2/75 E CIRCOL
8273 DE
1/1
PROT.
DEL DM N. 68/92,
:
RCHIO
: PN 16
A) MARIE: 540
IN
MINALE
MESSI
B) SE ESSIONE NO NALE: DN 65
TURA AM
C) PR METRO NOMI RI DI TARA
D) DIAMPO DEI VALO 100C
94
:
E) CA LLERANZA
NE
IO
TO
AZ
OLOG 98
DI OM
19
CATO del 23-10CERTIFI
/98
VIC/725
atura: 97
le di tar
ISTITUTO
I.S
SUPERI.P.E.S.L
OR
DipartimE SICUREZZA E PREVENZIO
ento di
LA
NE
BIELLA VORO
- Via Ce
rruti, 7
VERBAL
E
DI INTE DI TARATU
RA
RC
PRESSOETTAZIONE AL BANCO
DI VA
DEL
RACCOL
IL
TA R FABBRICA COMBUST LVOLA
APPLIC - SPECIF NTE SECONDIBILE
ICAZIO
ATIVE
NI TE O
DEL DM
FONTAN
1/12/1 CNICHE
975
ETO D'
AG
OGNA
mina
tura no
gati
i impie
material
izio
le ed i ione ed eserc
ito
lle valvo
ss
ione de ndizioni di pre i con buon es
uz
str
co
1,5
eguit
La co
i per le
stati es della valvola a
ne
no
ido
So
.
a
sono
contatto prova idraulic
a
idi
flu
e
e la
dei
otturator le
o finale
oll
ed
ntr
de
il co
ne fra se izio conserva
erc
guarnizio
bar.
e della prolungato es
ial
ter
Il ma
e in
za.
e anch
tale ch iche di resisten
ist
caratter
Tempera
l
nata da
compag
le.
ZE
lo se ac co pia or igi na e
nea so
iar
la ido ra , ch e la ssibile rilasc
lvo
va
tu
po
La
non
di ta ra
di
rimento
ve rb ale
libretto
di smar
nte al
In caso
rifica di
unitame
ti.
de di ve
ervato
duplica
va cons esibito in se
ale
rb
re
ve
se
Il
per es
le
ra
nt
ce
.
impianto
EN
AVVERT
I S.p.A.
CALEFF e Tecnica
ion
La Direz
............
............
Valvola
............
di
.......
positiva intercettazion
, serie
e
540, DN del combus
VIC/725
tibile
65, certif
/9
La ve rif 8 del 23-10icato I.S ad azione
98.
ica de
.P.
E.S.L.
eseguit
lla ta ra
n
a al ba
tu ra de
nc
97 3
lla va lvo
C, camp o con acqua
la st
l'i nt er
all
at
o di va
ve
lori entro a temperatur a
intercett nt o in ch iu
a di
i quali
azione.
su ra
av
ve
de l di
La tem
sp os iti nuto
pe
vo di
de
ve
valore no i valori amme nto riscontra
ta
ss
minale
ed in
di taratu i in tolleranz rientra nel
accord
a
ra,
ris
dic
petto al
o con qu
hia
III de lla
anto ind rato dal costr
utt
applica Ra cc olt a R
icato ne
tiv
ll'Appen ore
L'inamo e del DM 1/12 - Sp ec ific az
ion i Te dice
/1975.
vibilit de
cn ich e
di ta ra
tu ra lle parti intere
ssate e
A segu
re ali zz
della po
ito del
at
a
m
buon es
ed ian te
sizione
l'identifi
ito de
pi om ba
cazione
seguen
tu ra .
ti da
tar
lvola, ve
a) march ti:
ngono atura, per
io
punzon
b) nume I.S.P.E.S.L.;
ati i
ro della
valvola.
Il Tecn
ico
I.S.P.E.
....
S.L.
I.S.P.E.S.L. mark
The fuel shut-off valve (in our case the valves calibrated to 97C
and 120C) is a component which is I.S.P.E.S.L. approved.
Devices of this type are covered by the following types of document:
which attests to the positive result of the tests carried out on the
prototype sample and consequently certifies that the series
in question has been approved.
The declaration of conformity, is the document issued by the

manufacturer which confirms that the article in question was made
in accordance with the reference standards for I.S.P.E.S.L.
approval, but without having had a prototype sample approved. In
practice, this is equivalent to a declaration of compliance (i.e. L. 46).
Installation
Before installing a fuel shut-off valve, correct sizing must be carried

out by specialist technical personnel in accordance with the
current legislation governing the specific applications. It shall not
be used other than for its stated purpose. The fuel shut-off valve must
be installed by competent technical personnel qualified in accordance
with current legislation. The valve sensor must be installed at the
top of the boiler or in the flow pipework within 0,5 m of the boiler,
upstream of any other shut-off control.
The valve is installed in the fuel supply pipework, in line with the
flow direction indicated by the arrow, even if this is in the vertical
position.
Series 540, calibration 97C

Use: hot water systems (temperature < 100C) - section R
ed. 82 (R.2.A. 4)
The fuel shut-off valve is used in the following types of open
vented system:
- Hot water heating system where the safety pipe runs
downwards (R3A 1.14).
- Hot water heating system in existence on the date of the coming
into force of D.M. 1-12-75, where the safety pipe, although
having a minimum diameter greater than 18 mm, does not permit
discharge into the atmosphere of the maximum quantity of steam
which could be produced in relation to the capacity of the boiler
(R3A 3.1).
It is not used in sealed systems:
- In secondary circuits in heat exchangers supplied with fluids at a
temperature above 100C with controls on the secondary or where
automatic on/off control is not excluded.
In these cases a heat discharge (temperature relief) valve must be
installed.
When installing the device, appropriate precautions must be

taken to ensure that the capillary connecting the sensor to the
valve does not become squashed or excessively bent.
In order to prevent tampering or accidental leaks of the sensor,
the latter must be sealed in the pocket (the seal and the securing
wire are included in the package).
Series 540, calibration 120-140-160-180C

Use: superheated water systems (temperature > 100C) section H ed. 82 (H.4. 4)
The fuel shut-off device must be used in all types of open and
sealed systems except for those fired by solid fuel or with heat
sources other than fire.
Application diagram
Max 0,5 m
Series 540, calibrations 97 and 120C
Manual reset fuel shut-off valve. I.S.P.E.S.L. approved. Bearing CE mark as per directive 97/23/CE (calibration 97C).
Positive action (fail-safe). Flanged connections DN 65 (from DN 65 to DN 100), PN 16. Body in aluminium. Sensor
pocket connection 1/2 M. Stainless steel spring. Seals NBR. Capillary length 5 m (or 10 m). Maximum
working temperature (valve side) 50C. Maximum working temperature (sensor side) + 20% of calibrated
temperature. Maximum working pressure (valve side) 50 kPa. Maximum working pressure (sensor side) 12 bar.
Calibration 97C (97 and 120C).
Series 540, calibrations 140 - 160 and 180C
Manual reset fuel shut-off valve. Supplied with declaration of conformity from the manufacturer. Positive action
(fail-safe). Flanged connections DN 65 (from DN 65 to DN 100), PN 16. Body in aluminium. Sensor pocket
connection 1/2 M. Stainless steel springs. Seals NBR. Capillary length 5 m (or 10 m). Maximum working
temperature (valve side) 50C. Maximum working temperature (sensor side) + 20% of calibrated temperature.
Maximum working pressure (valve side) 50 kPa. Maximum working pressure (sensor side) 12 bar. Calibration
140C (140 - 160 and 180C).
CALEFFI
Hydraulic separator
CALEFFI
548 series
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01076/06 GB
Function
This device consists of several different functional components,
each of which meets specific requirements, typical of the circuits
used in heating and air-conditioning systems.
Hydraulic separator
To keep connected hydraulic circuits totally independent from
each other.
Dirt remover
To permit the separation and collection of any impurities present
in the circuits. Provided with a valved connection with discharge
piping.
For automatic venting of any air contained in the circuits.
Provided with a valved connection for maintenance purposes.
Insulation
Flanged and welded versions of separators are supplied
complete with pre-formed shell insulation to ensure perfect heat
insulation when used in both hot and cold water systems.
- Tech. Broch. 01031 Automatic air vent valve, 501 series
- Tech. Broch. 01054 Automatic air vent valve, 5020 series
Product range
548 series Threaded hydraulic separator with pre-formed insulation
548 series Flanged hydraulic separator with pre-formed insulation
sizes 1, 1 1/4, and 1 1/2 F with union

sizes DN 50, DN 65, DN 80, DN 100, DN 125 and DN 150
series
Materials:
- Separator body:
- Automatic air vent body:
- Automatic air vent float:
- Automatic air vent hydraulic seals:
- Drain valve body
- Shut-off valve body:
548 threaded
548 flanged

PP
EPDM
-

stainless steel
VITON
water, glycol solutions non hazardous, therefore

30%
10 bar
0110C
water, glycol solutions non hazardous, therefore

50%
10 bar
0110C
1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2 F with union
DN 50 - 65 - 80 - 100 - 125 - 150 flanged PN 16

to be coupled with counterflanges EN 1092-1
3/4 F
3/8 F
1 1/4 F
Performance:
- Medium
- Max. percentage glycol:
- Max. working pressure:
- Temperature range:
Connections:
- Separator:
-
Front (thermometer pocket)

Automatic air vent:
Automatic air vent discharge
Drain valve
1/2 F
1/2 M
hose connection
E
A
Serie 548
Tmax 120C
Pmax 10 bar
Tmax 105C
Pmax 10 bar
Tmax 105C
Pmax 10 bar
External cover (for flanged versions DN 125 and DN 150)

- Material:
embossed aluminium
- Thickness:
0,70 mm
- Reaction to fire (DIN 4102):
class 1
Tmax 120C
Pmax 10 bar
Internal part
- Material:
- Thickness: - threaded
20 mm
- flanged
60 mm
- Density: - internal part:
30 kg/m3
- external part: 50 kg/m3 (threaded), 80 kg/m3 (flanged)
- Thermal conductivity (ISO 2581): - 0C:
0,038 W/(mK)
- 40C:
0,045 W/(mK)
- Coefficient of resistance to the
diffusion of water vapour (DIN 52615):
> 1.300
0100C
class B2
Dimensions
Technical specifications of insulation for threaded and

flanged versions DN 125 and DN 150
Technical specifications of insulation for flanged versions

Internal part
- Material:
- Thickness:
60 mm
- Density:
45 kg/m3
- Thermal conductivity (ISO 2581):
0,023 W/(mK)
0 105C
External cover
- Material:
- Thickness:
embossed aluminium
0,7 mm
class 1
Head covers
- Heat moulded material:
B
F
Code
A
548006 1"
548007 1 1/4
548008 1 1/2
Size
Volume (l)
B
C
D
E Weight (kg)
225 195 220 204 2,7
248 225 240 214 3,8
282 235 260 224 5,7
1
1,7
Code
548052
548062
548082
548102
548122
548152
A
DN 50
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
DN 125
DN 150
B
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
C
341
341
389
389
374
374
D
330
330
450
450
560
560
E
398
398
440
440
499
499
F Weight (kg)
350 33
350 36
466 49
470 53
635 100
635 105
1 1/4 1 1/2 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 125 DN 150

2,6
4,8
15
15
30
30
85
88
PS
Operating principle
When a single system contains a primary production circuit, with its
own pump, and a secondary user circuit, with one or more
distribution pumps, operating conditions may arise in the system
whereby the pumps interact, creating abnormal variations in circuit
flow rates and pressures.
The hydraulic separator creates a zone with a low pressure loss,
which enables the primary and secondary circuits connected to it to
be hydraulically independent of each other; the flow in one circuit
does not create a flow in the other if the pressure loss in the
common section is negligible.
In this case, the flow rate in the respective circuits depends
exclusively on the flow rate characteristics of the pumps, preventing
reciprocal influence caused by connection in series.
Therefore, using a device with these characteristics means that the
flow in the secondary circuit only circulates when the relevant pump
is on, permitting the system to meet the specific load requirements
at that time.
Primary
Secondary
Gp
Gs
Gprimary = Gsecondary
Primary
When the secondary pump is off, there is no circulation in the

secondary circuit; the whole flow rate produced by the primary
pump is by-passed through the separator.
With the hydraulic separator, it is thus possible to have a production
circuit with a constant flow rate and a distribution circuit with a
variable flow rate; these operating conditions are typical of modern
heating and
Gp
Gs
air-conditioning
systems.
primary
secondary
Three possible hydraulical balance situations are shown below.
Secondary
Gp
Gs
Gprimary > Gsecondary
Primary
Secondary
Gp
Gs
Gprimary < Gsecondary
Insulation
Flanged versions separators up to DN 100 are available complete
with the insulation made of a shell in expanded polyurethane foam
coated with an aluminium layer. For threaded and flanged versions
DN 125 and DN 150, insulation is made of a pre-formed shell in
closed cell expanded PE-X.
This insulation ensures not only perfect heat insulation but also the
tightness required to prevent atmospheric water vapour from
entering the unit. For these reasons, this type of insulation can also
be used in cooling water circuits, as it prevents the formation of
condensate on the surface of the valve body.
Isolating the air vent valve

In flanged separators, the air vent is
isolated manually, using a ball valve. In
threaded separators, however, the air
vent body is automatically isolated by the
built-in valve, which closes when the air
vent body is removed.
Dirt removing element

A vital function of the hydraulic separator
is carried out by the dirt removing
element inside the device. This makes it
possible to separate and collect any
impurities which may be present in the
system.
These impurities are removed by means
of the drain valve, which can be
connected to a discharge pipe, placed
at the bottom of the separator.
The hydraulic separator should be sized according to the maximum
flow rate value at the inlet. The selected design value must be the
greatest between the primary circuit and the secondary circuit.
Size
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
Flow rate m3/h

2,5
4
6
Size
DN 50
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
DN 125
DN 150
Flow rate m3/h

9
18
28
56
75
110
Application diagram
Shut-off valve
Check valve
Clock
Pressure gauge
548 series
Hydraulic separator. Connections 1 F (from 1 to 1 1/2) with union. Front connection 1/2" F (thermometer pocket). Epoxy
resin coated steel body. Medium: water, glycol solutions non hazardous, therefore excluded from the guidelines of
67/548/EC Directive. Maximum percentage of glycol: 30%. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Temperature range:
0110C.
Supplied with:
- Automatic air vent valve. 1/2 M connection. Brass body, chrome plated. PP float. EPDM hydraulic seals.
- Drain valve. Hose connection. Brass body.
- Hot pre-formed shell insulation in closed cell expanded PE-X. Temperature range: 0100C.
548 series
Hydraulic separator. Flanged connections DN 50 (from DN 50 to DN 150) PN 16, to be coupled with counterflanges EN 1092-1.
Epoxy resin coated steel body. Medium: water, glycol solutions non hazardous, therefore excluded from the guidelines of
67/548/EC Directive. Maximum percentage of glycol: 50%. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar.
Supplied with:
- Automatic air vent valve. 3/4" F connection. 3/8 F discharge connection. Brass body. Stainless steel float. VITON hydraulic
seals.
- Drain valve. 1 1/4" F connection. Brass body, chrome plated.
- Rigid closed cell expanded polyurethane foam shell insulation to DN 100 (closed cell expanded PE-X for DN 125 and DN 150).
External embossed aluminium cover. Temperature range: 0105C (0100C for DN 125 and DN 150).
CALEFFI
Hydraulic separator
CALEFFI
548 series
01076/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
This device consists of several different functional components,
each of which meets specific requirements, typical of the circuits
used in heating and air-conditioning systems.
Hydraulic separator
To keep connected hydraulic circuits totally independent from
each other.
Dirt remover
To permit the separation and collection of any impurities present
in the circuits. Provided with a valved connection with discharge
piping.
Automatic air vent
For automatic venting of any air contained in the circuits.
Provided with a valved connection for maintenance purposes.
Insulation
The separators, threaded and flanged up to DN 150, are supplied
complete with pre-formed shell insulation to ensure perfect
thermal insulation when used in both hot and cold water
systems.
- Tech. Broch. 01031 Automatic air vent, 501 series
- Tech. Broch. 01054 Automatic air vent, 5020 series
Product range
548 series Threaded hydraulic separator with pre-formed insulation
548 series Flanged hydraulic separator with pre-formed insulation
548 series Flanged hydraulic separator with floor supports
sizes 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2, 2

sizes DN 50, DN 65, DN 80, DN 100, DN 125, DN 150
sizes DN 200, DN 250, DN 300
series
Materials
Separator body:
Automatic air vent body:
Automatic air vent float:
Automatic air vent seals:
Drain valve body:
Shut-off valve body:
Performance
Medium:
Connections
Separator:
Probe holder:
Automatic air vent:
Automatic air vent discharge:
Drain valve:
548 threaded
548 flanged

PP
EPDM
-

stainless steel
VITON

30%
10 bar
0110C

50%
10 bar
0110C
1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2, 2 F with union
DN 50 - 65 - 80 - 100 - 125 - 150 Flanged PN 16

DN 200 - 250 - 300 Flanged PN 10
to be coupled with counterflange EN 1092-1
inlet/outlet 1/2 F
3/4 F
3/8 F
DN 50DN 150: 1 1/4 F
DN 200DN 300: 2 F
front 1/2 F
1/2 M
hose connection
Technical specifications of insulation for threaded and

DN 125 / DN 150 flanged models
Volumes
Size
Volume (l)
001,7
1 1/4
002,6
1 1/2
004,8
013,5
DN 50
015,0
DN 65
015,0
Inner part
Material:
Thickness: - threaded
20 mm
- flanged
60 mm
Density:
- inner part:
30 kg/m3
- outer part:
50 kg/m3 (threaded), 80 kg/m3 (flanged)
Thermal conductivity (ISO 2581): - at 0C:
0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C:
0,045 W/(mK)
> 1.300
0100C
class B2
Dimensions
Tmax 105C
Pmax 10 bar
Tmax 120C
Pmax 10 bar
DN 80
030,0
DN 100
030,0
DN 125
085,0
DN 150
088,0
DN 200
394,0
DN 250
778,0
DN 300
990,0
External cover (for DN 125 and DN 150 flanged models)

Material:
Thickness:
0,7 mm
class 1
Technical specifications of insulation for flanged models
B
Code
A
B
C
548006 1"
225 195
548007 1 1/4 248 225
548008 1 1/2 282 235
548009 2
315 281
D
220
240
260
300
Mass (kg)
E
204 2,7
214 3,8
224 5,7
230 11,8
Inner part
Material:
rigid closed cell polyurethane foam
Thickness:
60 mm
Density:
45 kg/m3
0,023 W/(mK)
0105C
External cover
Material:
Thickness:

0,7 mm
class 1
Head covers
PS
Serie 548
Tmax 120C
Pmax 10 bar
Tmax 105C
Pmax 10 bar
Operating principle
When a single system contains a primary

production circuit, with its own pump, and a
secondary user circuit, with one or more
distribution pumps, operating conditions may
arise in the system whereby the pumps
interact, creating abnormal variations in circuit
flow rates and pressures.
B
F
B
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
D
330
330
450
450
560
560
C
341
341
389
389
374
374
E
398
398
440
440
499
499
F
460
460
526
529
670
670
Mass (kg)
34,5
39
51
55
104
108
Code
A
548052 DN 50
548062 DN 65
548082 DN 80
548102 DN 100
548122 DN 125
548152 DN 150
38...
Serie 548
Pmax 10 bar
Tmax 110C
The hydraulic separator creates a zone with a

low pressure loss, which enables the primary
and secondary circuits connected to it to be
hydraulically independent of each other; the
flow in one circuit does not create a flow in
the other if the pressure loss in the common
section is negligible.
In this case, the flow rate in the respective
circuits depends exclusively on the flow rate
characteristics of the pumps, preventing
reciprocal influence caused by connection in
series. Therefore, using a device with these
characteristics means that the flow in the
secondary circuit only circulates when the
relevant pump is on, permitting the system to
meet the specific load requirements at that
time.
Primary
Secondary
Gs
With the hydraulic separator, it is thus

possible to have a production circuit with a
constant flow rate and a distribution circuit
with a variable flow rate; these operating
conditions are typical of modern heating and
Gp
primary
Gs
secondary
Three possible hydraulical balance situations

are shown below.
Secondary
Gp
Gs
Primary
Secondary
Gp
Gs
Gp
Primary
When the secondary pump is off, there is no

circulation in the secondary circuit; the whole
flow rate produced by the primary pump is
by-passed through the separator.
E
Code
A
B
E
F Mass (kg)
C D
548200 DN 200 1000 610 400 900 250 255
548250 DN 250 1100 660 460 1060 250 410
548300 DN 300 1200 710 500 1180 250 600
Without insulation
Gprimary = Gsecondary
Insulation
Flanged versions separators up to DN 100 are available complete
with the insulation made of a shell in expanded polyurethane foam
coated with an aluminium layer. For threaded and flanged versions
DN 125 and DN 150, insulation is made of a pre-formed shell in
closed cell expanded PE-X.
This insulation ensures not only perfect thermal insulation but also
the tightness required to prevent atmospheric water vapour from
entering the unit. For these reasons, this type of insulation can also
be used in cooling water circuits, as it prevents the formation of
condensate on the surface of the valve body.
Air vent shut-off

In flanged separators, the automatic air
vent is shut off manually using a ball
valve. In threaded separators, however,
the air vent is shut off automatically by
the valve, which closes when the air vent
body is removed.
Dirt separator element

An essential function of the hydraulic
separator is carried out by the dirt
separator element inside the device. This
makes it possible to separate and collect
any impurities which may be present in
the system.
These impurities are removed by means
of the drain valve, which can be
connected to a discharge pipe, placed
at the bottom of the separator.
Probe holder connections

The range of separators is supplied with 1/2 probe holder
connections, which can be used with temperature probes or
temperature gauges.
Flanged models have a connection on
both flow and return channels, as they are
important points for the measurement.
Since the separator connections are
reversible on the primary or secondary
circuit, the temperature reading options
for the medium are expanded.
The hydraulic separator should be sized in accordance with the
maximum recommended flow rate value at the inlet. The selected
design value must be the greater between the primary circuit value
and secondary circuit value.
Size
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Flow rate (m3/h)

2,5
4
6
8,5
Size
DN 50
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
DN 125
DN 150
DN 200
DN 250
DN 300
Flow rate (m3/h)

9
18
28
56
75
110
180
300
420
Application diagram
Shut-off valve
Check valve
Clock
Outside temperature regulator
Pressure gauge
Outside temperature probe
548 series
Hydraulic separator. Connections 1 F (from 1 to 2) with union. Epoxy resin coated steel body. Medium water and
non-hazardous glycol solutions excluded from the guidelines of EC directive 67/548. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Working temperature range 0110C.
Complete with:
- Automatic air vent. 1/2 M connection. Brass body, chrome plated. PP float. EPDM hydraulic seals.
- Drain valve. Hose connection. Brass body.
- Front probe holder connection 1/2 F.
- Hot pre-formed shell insulation in closed cell expanded PE-X. Working temperature range 0100C.
548 series
Hydraulic separator. Flanged connections DN 50 (from DN 50 to DN 150) PN 16, DN 200 (from DN 200 to DN 300) PN 10,
for coupling with counterflanges EN 1092-1. Epoxy resin coated steel body. Medium water and non-hazardous glycol
solutions excluded from the guidelines of EC directive 67/548. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working
pressure 10 bar. Working temperature range 0110C.
Complete with:
- Automatic air vent. Connection 3/4 F. Outlet connection 3/8 F. Brass body. Stainless steel float. VITON hydraulic seals.
- Drain valve. Connection 1 1/4 F. Brass body, chrome plated; 2 F for DN 200DN 300.
- Inlet/outlet probe holder connections 1/2" F.
- Rigid closed cell polyurethane foam insulation for sizes up to DN 100 (closed cell expanded PE-X for DN 125 and DN 150).
Embossed unfinished aluminium external cover. Working temperature range 0105C (0100C for DN 125 and DN 150).
- Floor supports for sizes DN 200DN 300.
CALEFFI
Expansion vessels
series 555 - 5558 - 556 - 568
01079/01
Function
Expansion vessels are devices designed to accommodate the
increase in the volume of water due to the raising of its temperature,
both in heating systems and in domestic hot water production
systems.
They are also used as pressure restorers in potable water
Product range
Series 555
Series 5558
Series 556
Series 568
Standardised crimped expansion vessel for heating and potable water systems
Capacities l: 2, 5, 8, 12, 18, 24
Flat circular crimped expansion vessel for heating systems
Capacities l: 5, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18
Welded expansion vessel for heating systems, CE certified
Capacities l: 35, 50, 80, 105, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600
Welded expansion vessel for potable water systems, CE certified
Capacities l: 60, 80, 100, 200, 300, 500
Series
555
5558
556
568
Steel
Non-toxic butyl
Steel
SBR synthetic rubber
Steel
SBR synthetic rubber
Steel
Non-toxic butyl
Performance:
- Max working pressure:
10 bar
3 bar
35 and 50 l; 4 bar
80600 l; 6 bar
10 bar
- Pre-charge pressure:
1,5 bar
1 bar
35 and 50 l; 1,5 bar

80150 l; 2 bar
200600 l; 2,5 bar
1,5 bar
99C
90C
99C
99C
2 l; 1/2 M
524 l; 3/4 M
3/4 M
35400 l; 3/4 M
500 e 600 l; 1 M
60100 l; 1 M
200500 l; 1 1/2 M
Materials:
- Body:
- Membrane:

Connection to pipework:
Dimensions
Litres
2
5
8
12
18
24
A
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
Code
556035
556050
H
220
288
308
292
377
420
140
160
200
270
270
300
A
3/4
3/4
404
407
Litres
35
50
H
408
530
Code
555002
555005
555008
555012
555018
555024
Code
555805
555808
555810
555812
555814
555818
Litres
5
8
10
12
14
18
H
A
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
387
387
387
387
387
387
H
85
104
110
140
150
200
Code
568060
568080
568100
568200
568300
568500
Litres
A
B
60
1 1/2
80
1 1/2
100
1 1/2
200 1 1/2 1/2
300 1 1/2 1/2
500 1 1/2 1/2
380 860
450 830
450 910
550 1235
630 1365
750 1560
Code
Litres
556080 80
556105 105
556150 150
556200 200
556250 250
556300 300
556400 400
556500 500
556600 600
A
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1
450
500
500
600
630
630
630
750
750
H
608
665
897
812
957
1105
1450
1340
1555
Operating principle
Expansion vessel
The closed expansion vessel with membrane (diaphragm) consists
of a closed container divided into two parts by a membrane which
separates the water from the gas (usually nitrogen) and acts as an
expansion accommodator.
Following an increase in temperature, an increase in pressure takes
place in the vessel in relation to the pre-charge pressure when cold
(Fig. 1) until it reaches the value corresponding to the maximum
expansion (Fig. 2).
Pressure restorer
The operating principle of a pressure restorer is as follows:
The pump, activated by the pressure switch, starts up and the
vessel starts to fill. When the pressure reaches the set value, the
pump stops; the tank is at its maximum capacity (Fig. 1). If the user
draws off water, the pressure is gradually restored to the system, in
the period between the de-activation and the activation of the pump
(Fig. 2).
Sizing Method
Heating systems
The capacity of a closed expansion vessel with membrane
(diaphragm) for heating systems is calculated using the following
formula:
eC
V=
Pi
1Pf
Where:
V = Volume of vessel (l)
e = Water expansion coefficient. Calculated on the basis of the
maximum difference between the temperature of the water
when the system is cold and the maximum working temperature.
In practice, for heating, a conventional value
of 0,035 is assumed.
C = Water content of system (l).
Pi = Initial absolute pressure (bar) at the point where the vessel is
installed, given by hydrostatic pressure + 0,3 bar +
atmospheric pressure (1 bar). In practice this is the initial
charge pressure of the vessel plus 1 bar.
Pf = Final absolute pressure (bar), given by the maximum working
pressure of the system + atmospheric pressure (1 bar). In
practice, this is the calibrated pressure of the safety valve plus
1 bar.
Potable water system with storage

The capacity of a closed expansion vessel with membrane (diaphragm)
for potable water systems with storage is calculated by applying the
following formula:
e Ca
V=
Pin
1Pfin
Where:
V = Volume of vessel (l)
e = Water expansion coefficient. Calculated on the basis of the
maximum difference between the temperature of the cold
water feed and the stored hot water.
Ca = Volume of heated water (l).
Pin = Initial absolute pressure (bar), given by the maximum
incoming pressure + atmospheric pressure (1 bar).
In practice, this is the initial charge pressure of the vessel plus
1 bar.
Pfin = Final absolute pressure (bar) given by the maximum working
pressure of the system + atmospheric pressure (1 bar). In
practice, this is the calibrated pressure of the safety valve
plus 1 bar.
Table of coefficient e, on variation of temperature, relative to

a temperature of 4C. ( = 1000 kg/m3)
Example
T (C)
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
Coeff. e
0,00013
0,00025
0,00085
0,00180
0,00289
0,00425
0,00582
T (C)
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
Coeff. e
0,00782
0,00984
0,01207
0,01447
0,01704
0,01979
0,02269
T (C)
75
80
85
90
95
100
Coeff. e
0,02575
0,02898
0,03236
0,03590
0,03958
0,04342
Size an expansion vessel for a potable water system with the

following characteristics:
Ca =
T1 =
T2 =
Pes =
Psic =
Volume of hot water = 500 l

Temperature of cold feed water = 10C
Hot water storage temperature = 55C
Max incoming pressure = 3,5 bar
Calibrated pressure of safety valve = 6 bar
Solution
The following is taken from the table of coefficient e:
Example
Size an expansion vessel for a heating system with the following
characteristics:
for T1 = 10C e1 = 0,00025

Thus:
for T2 = 55C e2 = 0,01447
e(T=45C) = (e2 - e1) = (0,01447 - 0,00025) = 0,014
C = water content = 3000 l

Pid = hydrostatic pressure at installation point = 2 bar
Psic = calibrated pressure of safety valve = 3,5 bar
In addition:
Solution
The formula is applied:
Pin = Pes + Patm = 3,5 + 1 = 4,5 bar

Pfin = Psic + Patm = 6 + 1 = 7 bar
The above formula is applied, where:

e
Pi
Pf
=
=
=
V = (0,014 500) [1 - (4,5 7)] = 19,6 l
0,035 conventional absolute value

Pid + 0,3 + Patm = 2 + 0,3 + 1 = 3,3 bar
Psic + Patm = 3,5 + 1 = 4,5 bar
A vessel is therefore selected with a capacity of 24 l.

Quick method
V = (0,035 3000) [1 - (3,3 4,5)] = 393 l
For quicker calculation, the following formula can be applied:

Quick method
To obtain the vessel capacity, multiply the system water content,
expressed in litres, by the value shown in the table below.
Capacity of diaphragm expansion vessels per litre of system
capacity (expansion coefficient = 0,035)
Calibrated pressure of safety valve (bar)*
Initial charge pressure (bar)*
2,25
2,50
2,70
3,00
3,50
4,00
4,50
5,00
5,40
6,00
1,0
0,091
0,082
0,076
0,070
0,063
0,058
0,055
0,052
0,051
0,049
1,2
0,106
0,094
0,086
0,078
0,068
0,063
0,058
0,055
0,053
0,051
1,4
0,134
0,111
0,100
0,088
0,075
0,067
0,062
0,058
0,056
0,053
1,6
0,175
0,136
0,118
0,100
0,083
0,073
0,066
0,062
0,059
0,056
1,8
0,253
0,175
0,144
0,117
0,093
0,080
0,071
0,066
0,062
0,058
2,0
0,245
0,185
0,140
0,105
0,088
0,077
0,070
0,066
0,061
2,2
0,259
0,175
0,121
0,097
0,084
0,075
0,070
0,064
2,4
0,233
0,143
0,109
0,092
0,081
0,075
0,068
2,6
0,175
0,125
0,101
0,088
0,080
0,072
2,8
0,225
0,146
0,113
0,095
0,086
0,077
3,0
0,175
0,128
0,105
0,093
0,082
V = f Ca
Where f is a coefficient which, for temperature differences
between 40 and 50C, can be taken from the table below,
according to the working pressure and the calibrated pressure of
the safety valve.
Table coefficient f
Calibrated pressure of safery valve (bar)*
Thus:
Working pressure (bar)*
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
0,035
0,028
0,025
0,022
0,021
0,020
0,019
2,5
0,047
0,034
0,028
0,025
0,023
0,022
0,021
* Relative pressures
3
0,070
0,042
0,033
0,028
0,025
0,023
0,022
3,5
0,140
0,056
0,039
0,032
0,028
0,025
0,024
4
0,084
0,049
0,037
0,032
0,028
0,026
4,5
0,168
0,065
0,045
0,036
0,031
0,028
5
0,098
0,056
0,042
0,035
0,031
5,5
0,196
0,075
0,050
0,040
0,034
6
0,112
0,063
0,047
0,039
Membrane pressure restorers
Installation
The capacity of a membrane pressure restorer is calculated

by means of the following formula:
It is advisable to install expansion vessels in pipework containing

water at the lowest system temperature.
V=6
Gpr 60
Pmax + 1
a
Pmax - Pmin
Where:
V
= Volume of vessel (l)
Gpr = Design flow rate (l/s)
Pmin = Minimum boost in pressure (bar), equal to the
minimum pressure switch operating pressure
Pmax = Maximum boost in pressure (bar), equal to the
maximum pressure switch operating pressure
a
= Maximum number of pump start-ups per hour (h-1)
a = 30 for pump rating < 3kW
a = 25 for pump rating 35 kW
a = 10 for pump rating > 7 kW
The expansion vessels are supplied pre-charged with nitrogen. The

initial charge pressure can be modified with compressed air.
Series 555
Vessels in the series 555 up to 24 litres are standardised. This
means that they can be installed in either heating systems or
potable water systems, as they are supplied with membranes made
of a non-toxic material (butyl) and can withstand temperatures of up
to 99C.
Series 568
The membrane of vessels for potable water systems are
replaceable.
Example
Size a membrane pressure restorer for a system with the
following characteristics:
The standards relating to the construction of expansion vessels are

at present undergoing modification:
I.S.P.E.S.L. approval, which relates to certain types of vessel, has
been supplemented by CE Marking. This means that, when the
system is being checked, both devices tested to I.S.P.E.S.L. and
those with the CE Mark must be accepted. The European reference
standard is Directive 97/23/CE, also known as the P.E.D. (Pressure
Equipment Directive).
Caleffi series 556 expansion tanks for heating systems and 568 for
potable water systems already bear the CE mark instead of
I.S.P.E.S.L. approval.
Gpr = 3,4 l/s

Pmin = 5 bar
Pmax = 6 bar
Pump rating P = 1,5 kW
Solution
Application of the formula gives:
V=6
3,4 60
30
6+1
6-5
Standard references
= 285,6 l
Series 555
Crimped expansion vessel, standardised for heating and potable water systems. Connection 3/4"M (2 l 1/2").
Crimped membrane - non-toxic butyl (food standard). Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Pre-charge pressure
1,5 bar. Maximum working temperature 99C. Capacity 2 l (from 2 to 24 l).
Series 5558
Crimped circular flat expansion vessel for heating systems. Connection 3/4"M radial. Steel body. Crimped
membrane - SBR synthetic rubber. Maximum working pressure 4 bar. Pre-charge pressure 1 bar. Maximum
working temperature 90C. Capacity 8 l (from 8 to 18 l).
Series 556
Welded expansion vessel for heating systems. CE Mark. Connection 3/4"M (3/4" from 35 to 400 l and 1" 500 and
600 l). Steel body. Membrane sack - SBR synthetic rubber. Maximum working pressure 4 bar (4 bar 35 and 50
l; 6 bar 80600 l). Pre-charge pressure 1,5 bar ( from 1,5 to 2,5 bar - see technical specification table).
Maximum working temperature 99C. Capacity 35 l (from 35 to 600 l).).
Series 568
Welded expansion vessel for potable water systems. CE Mark. Connection 1"M (1" from 60 to 100 l; 1 1/2" from
200 to 500 l). Steel body. Replaceable butyl membrane sack. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Pre-charge
pressure 1,5 bar. Maximum working temperature 99C. Capacity 60 l (from 60 to 500 l).
CALEFFI
Thermostatic mixing valve with interchangeable

cartridge for centralised systems
CALEFFI
5230 series
01080/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
ISO 9001 No. 0003
FM 21654
Function
The thermostatic mixing valve is used in systems for domestic hot
water production. Its function is to maintain the temperature of the
mixed water supplied to the user constant at the set value when
there are variations in the temperature and supply pressure of the
incoming hot and cold water or in the draw-off flow rate.
This particular series of mixing valves is specifically designed for
systems which require high flow rates, such as centralised systems
or groups of equal users.
These systems also require stable and accurate temperature
adjustment, especially in relation to variations in the flow rate drawn
off by the users.
Patent application No. MI2001A001645.
Product range
Code 5230 . 0
Code 5230 . 3
Code 5230. 2
Code 523005
Code 523006
Code 523008
Thermostatic mixing valve with interchangeable cartridge for centralised systems

Thermostatic mixing valve with interchangeable cartridge, with check valves at the inlet
Thermostatic mixing valve with interchangeable cartridge, with check valves at the inlet
Spare cartridge for 1/2, 3/4 and 22 mixing valves
Spare cartridge for 1, 1 1/4 and 28 mixing valves
Spare cartridge for 1 1/2 and 2 mixing valves
sizes 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 1 1/4 - 1 1/2 - 2

sizes 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 1 1/4
sizes 22 and 28 mm for copper pipe
Materials
Body:
Cartridge and obturator:
Springs:
Seals:
Adjustment range:
stainless steel
EPDM
Performance
Medium:
3065C
3660C
Accuracy:
2C
Minimum temperature difference between inlet

hot water and outlet mixed water to ensure
optimal performance:
water

2:1
1/21 1/4, 22, 28:

1 1/2, 2:
Connections:
15C
1/22 M with union

22, 28 mm for copper pipe
14 bar
5 bar
85C
Dimensions
MAX 7
MIN
MAX 7
CALEFFI
Code
Mass
(kg)
MIN
MAX 7
CALEFFI
A
E
CALEFFI
A
D
MIN
Code
A
D
Mass
(kg)
Code
Mass
(kg)
523040 1/2 85
170 169
95
74
1,65
523043 1/2 91
182 175 101
74 1,69
523052 22 92
184 176 102
74
1,80
523050 3/4 85
170 169
95
74
1,68
523053 3/4 91
182 175 101
74 1,72
523062 28 116 232 207 119
88
3,31
101 202 195 107
88
3,09
523063
111 222 202 114
88 3,22
523070 11/4 101 202 195 107
88
3,07
523073 11/4 111 222 202 114
88 3,20
523060
1"
523080 11/2 129 258 243 135 108 8,00

523090
129 258 243 135 108 8,24
1"
Legionella - scalding risk
Operating principle
In systems producing domestic hot water

with storage, in order to prevent the
dangerous
infection
known
as
Legionnaires disease, the hot water must
be stored at a temperature of at least 60C.
At this temperature it is certain that the
growth of the bacteria causing this infection
will be completely prevented. However, the
hot water cannot be used directly at this
temperature, as it may cause scalding. For
example, at 55C, partial burn occurs in
about 30 seconds, whereas at 60C partial
burn occurs in about 5 seconds.
In view of the above, it is therefore
necessary to use a thermostatic mixing
valve able to:
The regulating element in the thermostatic mixing valve consists of a temperature sensor
(1) fully immersed in the mixed water outlet pipe which, by expanding and contracting,
continuously ensures correct proportioning of hot and cold water at the inlet.
The water proportions are regulated by a piston (2) that slides inside a special cylinder
placed between the hot (3) and cold (4) water passage channels.
Even if the pressure drops due to hot or cold water drawn-off by other users or temperature
variations at the inlet, the mixing valve automatically adjusts the water flow rate until the set
temperature is achieved.
reduce the temperature at the user outlet

to a lower value than the storage
temperature;
keep this temperature constant in spite of
variations in the inlet pressure and
temperature.
Double seat
The mixing valve has a special obturator which acts on a double water passage seat. This
ensures a high flow rate with a reduced overall dimension, while maintaining an accurate
temperature control.
Interchangeable cartridge
The internal cartridge containing all the control components is preassembled in a single
body and can easily be inspected for cleaning or replacement if necessary, without any
need to take the valve body out of the pipe.
Low-inertia thermostat
The diagram below shows the behaviour of

Legionella Pneumophila bacteria as the
temperature of the water containing the
bacteria varies.
To ensure correct thermal disinfection, it is
necessary to go up to values of no less
than 60C.
The temperature-sensitive element, the engine of the thermostatic mixing valve, has low
thermal inertia; in this way it can quickly react to changes in the conditions of inlet pressure
and temperature, shortening the valve response time.
70
60
50
Death of 90% of bacteria within 2 hours
40
30
Temperature adjustment and locking

The control knob is used to adjust the temperature in a full turn (360) between min. and
max. It also has tamper protection for locking the temperature at the set value.
Optimum temperature
for bacteria growth
20
10
Bacteria survive but remain inactive
HOT
COLD
Energy saving
Energy saving is governed in Italy by
Presidential Decree 412/93, making it
compulsory to use mixing valves on
domestic water systems with storage in
order to limit the temperature of the water at
the inlet of the delivery network to 48C with
a tolerance of +5C.
The purpose of limiting the temperature is
to reduce passive thermal losses through
the delivery network, as much as possible,
and to prevent the delivery of water at a
higher temperature than necessary.
Version with check valves
MIXED
p (bar)
1/2
3/4
22
Temperature adjustment table

p (m w.g.)
1
28
1 1/4
1 1/2
Position
Max
1/2 -3/4 - 22; T (C) 25
29
33
39
43
48
52
58
65
1 - 1 1/4 - 28; T (C) 27
32
38
44
49
53
58
63
67
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
1,5
15
1,0
10
0,5
0,3
0,2
1 1/2 - 2; T (C)
0,1
36
Reference values: Thot = 68C; Tcold = 13C; Hot and cold water inlet pressures = 3 bar
Locking the setting

Turn the knob onto the required number,
unscrew the upper screw, remove the
knob and put it back on so that the
internal reference couples with the
protrusion on the knob holder nut.
1/2
3/4 - 22
1 - 28
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Kv (m3/h)
4,0
4,5
6,9
9,1
14,5
19,0
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
1 MIN
MA
30
500
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
20
10
200
100
50
1
20
10
Recommended FLOW RATES to

ensure stable operation and an
accuracy of 2C
Minimum
(m3/h)
0,4
0,5
0,8
1,0
2,8
3,0
2
3
0,5
0,5
0,05
Min
Maximum*
(m3/h)
4,9
5,5
8,5
11,2
17,7
23,2
* P = 1,5 bar
Application
In view of their flow rate characteristics, Caleffi 5230 series
thermostatic mixing valves can be installed in centralised systems
with a number of user outlets or used to control groups of user
outlets, such as shower units, washbasin units, etc.
Installation
The system in which the Caleffi 5230 series mixing valve is to be
installed must be flushed and cleaned to remove any dirt that may
have accumulated during installation.
Replacement of the cartridge

The internal cartridge, containing all the control components, can
be inspected and replaced if necessary, without any need to take
the valve body out of the pipe.
1) Close the shut-off valves on the hot and cold inlets. Turn the
knob to the highest value.
2) Remove the temperature adjustment knob after unscrewing the
locking screw at the top.
Remove the plastic knob holder nut. Unscrew the chrome plated
protection cover using the hexagonal control (1 - 1 1/4).
3) Remove the internal cartridge for inspection or replacement,
using the hexagonal control.
4) Replace the chrome plated protection cover. Replace the knob
holder nut so that the position indicator can be seen.
5) The spare cartridge is supplied preset to the highest value.
Next, position the adjustment knob so that the text MAX is
aligned with the position indicator.
By rotating the knob clockwise, adjustment should be possible
from the maximum to the minimum value.
Secure the knob with the locking screw.
6) Reopen the shut-off valves and adjust the mixing valve to the
desired temperature value.
It is recommended to always install strainers of adequate

performance at the water inlet from the supply network.
Caleffi 5230 series thermostatic mixing valves must be installed
according to the diagrams shown in this manual, taking account of
the current applicable regulations.
3a
3b
Caleffi 5230 series thermostatic mixing valves can be installed in

any position, horizontally or vertically.
The following marks are indicated on the mixing valve body:
hot water inlet, indicated with the colour red;
cold water inlet, indicated with the colour blue.
Check valves
In systems with thermostatic mixing valves, check valves must be
installed to prevent undesired medium backflows.
Thermostatic mixing valves are also available with built-in check
valves at the hot and cold water inlets.
Commissioning
must be commissioned in accordance with current regulations by
qualified personnel, using appropriate temperature measurement
equipment. We recommend using a digital thermometer for
measuring the mixed water temperature.
The temperature is set at the desired value using the control knob
with the graduated scale on the valve.
System with equal user outlets
Check valve
Ball valve
Ball valve with built-in check valve
Temperature gauge
Backflow preventer
Motorised valve
Clock
Pump
7 XAM
NIM
Expansion vessel
T
Thermostat
Safety relief valve
Strainer
7 XAM
NIM
Centralised system
with thermal disinfection
Code 5230 . 0
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve with interchangeable cartridge. Connections 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 2) with union. Brass body.
Chrome plated. Brass cartridge and obturator. Stainless steel springs. EPDM seals. Maximum inlet temperature 85C. Adjustment
temperature range from 30C to 65C (from 36 to 60 for 1 1/2 and 2). Maximum working pressure (static) 14 bar. Maximum working
pressure (dynamic) 5 bar. Accuracy 2C. Minimum temperature difference between hot water inlet and mixed water outlet to ensure
optimal performance 15C. Tamper protection system to lock the set temperature.
Code 5230 . 3
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve with interchangeable cartridge. Connections 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 1 1/4) with union. Brass body.
Chrome plated. Brass cartridge and obturator. Stainless steel springs. Complete with check valves at the inlets. EPDM seals. Maximum
inlet temperature 85C. Adjustment range from 30C to 65C. Maximum working pressure (static) 14 bar. Maximum working pressure
(dynamic) 5 bar. Accuracy 2C. Minimum temperature difference between hot water inlet and mixed water outlet to ensure optimal
peformance 15C. Tamper protection system to lock the set temperature.
Code 5230 . 2
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve with interchangeable cartridge. 22 mm ( 22 and 28 mm) connections for copper pipe. Brass
body. Chrome plated. Brass cartridge and obturator. Stainless steel springs. Complete with check valves at the inlets. EPDM seals.
Maximum inlet temperature 85C. Adjustment range from 30C to 65C. Maximum working pressure (static) 14 bar. Maximum working
pressure (dynamic) 5 bar. Accuracy 2C. Minimum temperature difference between hot water inlet and mixed water outlet to ensure
optimala performance 15C. Tamper protection system to lock the set temperature.
CALEFFI
Temperature regulating unit for

manifold box
CALEFFI
series 154 - 155
01081/03 GB
Function
The temperature regulating unit is designed to guarantee the
correct contribution of heating energy required by the user, by
measuring the outside and room temperature values to regulate the
correct system flow temperature.
The unit, complete with all the devices required for a regulating
circuit, is of compact size in order to reduce the space taken up
and enable it to be installed within a manifold box.
It is supplied complete with:
4-way mixing valve, servomotor, electronically-regulated pump,
flow temperature sensor, return temperature sensor, outside
temperature sensor, temperature controller, flow thermometer and
unions for connecting to the primary and secondary circuits.
The unit is designed for connection for remote data transmission.
The unit solves the problems of installation of regulating
components in modern small and medium-sized systems, due to its
compact size and ease of use.
The product is available in various configurations, both stand-alone
and pre-assembled in manifold boxes with the distribution
manifolds.
The unit is factory set for use with underfloor heating systems.
Product range
Series 154
Series 155
Code 154600
Code 155600
Code 151000
Code 151002
Temperature regulating unit complete with room thermostat and clock, pre-assembled with manifolds
Temperature regulating unit pre-assembled with manifolds
Temperature regulating unit complete with room thermostat and clock
Temperature regulating unit
Room thermostat and indoor sensor
Room thermostat and indoor sensor with 3-position selector and digital clock
- Mixing valve:
-
Medium:
- Thermometer scale:
- Connections to manifolds:
- Primary connections:
- Servomotor: electric supply:
rating:
cycle time:
torque:
brass, G-MS 58
EPDM
4-way
30%
2090C
6 bar
20100C
1 1/2 adjustable nut
1 F with union
230V 50 Hz
1,3 VA
210 s
6 Nm
Grundfos electronic pump:

Total consumption:
Max flow rate:
Max ambient relative humidity:
Ambient temperature:
Protection class:
model UPE 25-60

~ 110 W
3,5 m3/h
95%
040C
IP 42
Head available at regulating unit connections

Operating at max speed.
H (m w. g.)
- Materials: - body:
- hydraulic seals:
6
5
Factory setting:
proportional
head regulation
4
3
2
1
0
4
5
Q (m3/h)
Dimensions
CALEFFI
25%
100%
80%
50%
50%
60
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
50
70
40
80
30
90
60
40
-25%
+25%
-50%
80
20
100
2
6 4
Zu
A
C
B
1 1/2
C
90
D
190
6 outlets
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10 outlets
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
25%
100%
80%
25%
100%
80%
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
+25%
-50%
20
2
6 4
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI50
70
80
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
Zu
20
0
40
60
2
6 4
25%
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
60
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
80
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
20
0
40
60
2
6 4
Zu
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
70
30
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
50
35
Outlets
A
1546E1
1556E1
5
655
60
150190
A
Code
L
142
50%
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
40
Zu
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
315
10
8
6
4
2
0
100%
80%
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
40
100
CALEFFI
8
I
30
50%
CALEFFI50
80
450
-25%
60
CALEFFI
80
90
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
70
CALEFFI
60
H
332
13 outlets
10
8
6
4
2
0
50%
50%
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
50
30
G
200
CALEFFI
50%
50%
40
F
25
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
E
100
CALEFFI
A
1
800
Code
154600/155600
1000
1200
1546F1
1556F1
6
730
1546G1
1556G1
7
780
1546H1
1556H1
8
830
1546I1
1556I1
9
880
1546L1
1556L1
10
930
1546M1
1556M1
11
980
1546N1
1556N1
12
1030
1546O1
1556O1
13
1080
11
CALEFFI
100%
80%
25%
50%
50%
19
20
18
17
16
21
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
15
12
22
14
13
23
50
24
WATCH
70
80
30
90
12
60
40
11
+25%
-50%
60
20
10
-25%
40
80
100
SYSTEM
FLOW
2. Electronic pump UPE 25-60
1. Temperature controller
10
3. 4-way mixing valve

4. Servomotor
5. Flow temperature sensor
M S
18
CALEFFI
22
16
24
2
6 4
Zu
SYSTEM
RETURN
16
22
24
FLOW FROM
BOILER
18
CALEFFI
8. Room thermostat and indoor sensor *

9. Room thermostat and indoor sensor with digital
clock and selector*
10. Flow thermometer
20
6. Return temperature sensor

7. Outside temperature sensor
20
BOILER
RETURN
11. Connection point for remote data transmission

(* optional)
7)
Automatic by-pass
Temperature and characteristic curve selector. This

selector enables the user to input the maximum required
flow temperature, corresponding to the minimum outside
design temperature.
Also enables optimisation of the standard configuration set at the
factory, allowing personal control of the operation of the system. If
this value matches the setting on the main printed circuit board
(item 6 PCB), the regulation complies with the calculation criteria
given by its own characteristic curve. If this value is different from
the setting on the main printed circuit board (item 6 PCB), the
controller will recalculate the new characteristic curve. The
maximum set temperature on PCB however, remains active.
Thermometer
8) Reference graph for calculation of the characteristic curve.

This is calculated on the basis of the following parameters:
Hydraulic diagram
SF
4-way mixing valve
Servomotor
Pump
SR
BF
BR
a)
Max flow temperature set on controller.

(item 7 PCB). Factory setting: 45C.
b)
Min flow temperature set on printed circuit board.

(item 5 PCB). Factory setting: 20C.
c)
Min outside temperature set on printed circuit board.

(item 1 PCB). Factory setting: -10C.
d)
Outside temperature limit for heating start in summer, set

on printed circuit board (item 3 PCB). Factory setting: 18C.
1
11
CALEFFI
ON
25%
100%
80%
50%
50%
19
20
18
16
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
15
21
17
12
22
14
13
23
50
24
WATCH
11
70
80
30
90
12
60
40
-25%
+25%
The characteristic curve has a straight line format.

In the example shown below, it has been calculated using the
factory set values.
10
-50%
Example of calculation of characteristic curve

10
X axis - Outside temperature - TX
Y axis - Flow temperature - TY
The controller, which is normally installed on the unit, can also be

positioned remotely, following the electrical wiring scheme.
The front panel of the controller shows the following functions:
1) ON Mains electric on: LED continuously lit. Flashes in screed
drying mode.
2)
Pump operating (ON): LED continuously lit.
3)
Mixing valve closing: LED lit.
4)
Mixing valve opening: LED lit.
5)
Sensor malfunction: LED lit.
Calculation of minimum and maximum points

Point A: given by the intersection of Tmax X (18C) and Tmin Y (20C).
Point B: given by the intersection of Tmin X (-10C) and Tmax Y (45C).
Calculation of change points
Calculate the difference X between Tmax X and Tmin X.
Thus: X = 18 - (-10) = 28C.
Calculate the difference Y between Tmax Y and Tmin Y.
Thus: Y = 45 - 20 = 25C.
Points of change C and D of the curve are identified as follows:
6) Function selector, 6 different functions possible:

a)
Main controller off. In models where clock fitted, clock

remains on.
b)
Controller in operation according to the cycles of the

comfort or set-back modes, controlled by the fitted
analogue clock or the remote digital clock.
Point C given by the intersection between:

X = Tmax X - 25% X = 18 - 0,25 28 = 11C
Y = Tmin Y + 55% Y = 20 + 0,55 25 = 33,75C
Point D given by the intersection between:
X = Tmax X - 50% X = 18 - 0,5 28 = 4C
Y = Tmin Y + 80% Y = 20 + 0,8 25 = 40C
55
c)
Controller operating in comfort mode.
d)
Controller operating in set-back mode.
e)
Controller de-activated (pump ON, mixing valve ON). This

function guarantees heating to the maximum temperature
value set on the printed circuit board (PCB).
C (11;33,75)
35 55%
Controller in summer mode (pump OFF, mixing valve OFF).

However, pump is activated daily for two minutes every 24
hours in order to prevent it from becoming seized when
inactive.
20
50
45
40
f)
50%
60
25%
TFLOW (C)
Characteristic curve
B (-10;45)
D (4;40)
80%
30
25
A (18;20)
15
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
9)
Correction selector for comfort mode.

Range of adjustment -25% to +25%.
Factory setting: correction = 0%
The selector determines a parallel displacement of the
characteristic curve according to the new percentage value
selected in the comfort range (red indicators).
Example: if the selector is set to +25%, its effect on the flow
temperature will be as follows:
+25% Y = 0,25 25 = 6,25C.
The characteristic curve is then moved upwards by 6,25C.
Printed circuit board

The surface of the printed circuit board identifies the following functions:
Typ 2124
2501/2601
230 V (ac)
4VA
optional
INLET PUMP
MIXING VALVE
LP
TA1
12
SR/TA
230V (ac)
10A max
SR
SE
4(2)A
PS
4(2)A
OPEN
-10
-20 -20
-5
20
55
40 40
65
22
4,5
SM
SM
1 2
0 14
N
30
50
11
18
MIXING VALVE
CLOSED
60
55
-10
-15
OFF
MC
SE
PUMP
MA
4(2)A
Curve with comfort correction

TFLOW (C)
13
ROOM
THERMOSTAT
T 40
DIGITAL
REGULATOR
90 1,5
6
max
NZ
10
50
6,25C
45
Y..72097
100
RF(%)
40
35
14
30
25
20
20
15
10
-5
-10
10)
TFLOW (C)
25
20
15
0
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
d
-7
21
22
11)Daily or weekly analogue clock, used to select the required

heating phases.
Comfort with red indicators or set-back with blue indicators.
Factory setting: daily mode, minimum selection interval 15 min.
The changeover from daily to weekly with a 60 min minimum
selection interval, is carried out as follows:
raise the outer ring and move the
drive ring to the required
position; to do this, turn the
1
pointer clockwise until the
24
2
23
3
12
innermost notch coincides with
one of the outer notches.
Reposition the outer ring, making
9
3
sure that the reference day
shown falls within the operating
sector of the switching point.
6
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
1 2
30
OFF
35
10
15
Selection microswitch for screed drying program.

Factory setting: OFF.
ON position.
This program is used for carrying out correct drying of the

screed, above which the final flooring will be laid (its activation
excludes all other functions).
The program has a duration of seven days; during the first three
days, the flow temperature is maintained at 25C, whilst for the
remaining four days, the flow temperature is raised and
maintained at the maximum temperature value set at point 7 of
the front panel.
The activation of this program is displayed by the flashing LED
on the front panel, point 1.
The frequency of flashing indicates the drying days which have
passed; one pulse every 8 seconds indicates day 1, two pulses
every 8 seconds indicates day 2, and so on. If the electricity
has to be switched off in this phase, the controller will start its
drying cycle again from the beginning.
The front panel LED, point 1, continuously lit, indicates the end
of the drying program. At this point, the microswitch must be
turned to OFF.
N.B.: In manual mode
the screed drying procedure cannot
be activated.
6,25C
15
1 2
4)
50
20
Maximum outside temperature to start heating, or summer

limit (Tmax X), adjustable from 14C to 22C.
Factory setting: 18C.
An outside temperature higher than the set temperature will
cause the following state: circulator OFF and mixing valve closed.
55
25
3)
60
40
Set-back mode exclusion selector, adjustable from

0C to -20C.
Factory setting: -15C.
If the outside temperature falls below the set value, the heating
is reactivated according to the characteristic curve of the
comfort mode.
Curve with set-back correction
45
2)
OFF
Correction selector for set-back mode.

Range of adjustment 0% to -50%.
Factory setting: correction = -25%.
selected on the set-back range (blue indicators).
Example: if the selector is set to -25%, its effect on the flow
-25% Y = -0,25 25 = -6,25C.
The characteristic curve is then moved downwards by 6,25C.
In addition if, following this move, the flow temperature has to
be lower than the minimum temperature for starting heating
(Tmin Y), the following state will be obtained: circulator OFF and
mixing valve closed OFF.
Minimum outside temperature (Tmin X), adjustable from

-5C to -20C, to which the set maximum flow temperature
corresponds (Tmax Y).
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
1)
15
25
5)
Selector for minimum flow temperature at heating start-up

(Tmin Y).
Adjustable from 20C to 40C
Factory setting: 20C
6)
Maximum limit temperature selector.

Adjustable from 40C to 90C.
In case a higher value has been set at point 7 of the panel front,
this will be restricted to the limit value.
7) NZ
Neutral zone regulating selector.

Adjustable from 1,5C to 6C.
Factory setting: 2C (equivalent to 1C).
If the variation of the flow temperature remains within the
temperature value selected in the neutral zone, the mixing valve
remains inactive. Moving the temperature in relation to the
calculated setting does not produce any movement of the valve.
13
10
12
11
Example with factory settings:

Flow temperature calculated on the characteristic curve,
Tflow set Y = 40C (project conditions).
Thus:
TY = (40 - 20) = 20C
T = 20 0,8 0,3 = 4,8C
Treturn set Y = 40 - 4,8 = 35,2C.
If the return temperature measured (Treturn Y) is Treturn set Y,
the controller will modify the characteristic curve, moving it upwards
or downwards, to move the return temperature to the set value.
This continuous comparison prevents any overheating in the room
caused by gratuitous heat sources modifying the heating load.
TFLOW (C)
Curve wih return temperature regulation
Pump shutdown wiring
RH terminal strip
8) RF(%) Return sensor regulating selector.

Adjustable from 0% to 100%.
Factory setting: 80%.
This selector is used to optimise the system output according to
the difference between flow and return temperatures (T).
T is calculated as a percentage of the flow temperature
calculated on the characteristic curve.
TY = (Tflow set Y-Tmin Y)
T = TY %set 0,3.
Treturn set Y = Tflow set Y - T.
Auxiliary user contact

6
PS
MA
MC
Brown
Pump, unit 155
Pump shutdown variation
15) Connector for remore data transmission.
Table of sensor resistance values

C
Ohm
-15 11.382
-12 9.912
-10 8.933
-6 7.439
-3 6.492
-2 6.206
0 5.632
C
0
2
4
6
8
10
15
Ohm
5.632
5.187
4.742
4.347
4.000
3.553
2.971
C
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Ohm
2.431
2.000
1.655
1.376
1.150
966
815
C
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
Ohm
690
587
501
430
370
319
276
C
90
95
100
Ohm
240
209
183
60
Safety
55
50
If the outside or flow sensor shows an ohm resistance value outside

the working range (damaged or detached sensor), the following
operating state is automatically activated:
Pump OFF, Mixing valve OFF, LED 5 continuously lit.
45
40
Treturn: 35,2C
35
30
Safety thermostat, code 622001
25
20
Additional, for use with underfloor heating systems.
15
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
9)
Auxiliary contact. This contact opens when the mixing valve is

completely closed to the secondary and open to the primary.
It can be used to shut down the pump or heat generator of the
primary circuit.
+C
10) SM Flow sensor wiring. Factory fitted.
Outside sensor wiring. Connect the outside sensor by

two-core cable (2x0,75) to the connector supplied with
the unit.
Outside sensor
SE
Connecting
cable
SE
Connector
1
2
Example of safety thermostat application on system low

temperature branch circuit
LH terminal strip
11) SE
- Range of adjustment:
555C
- Factory setting:
50C
- Protection class:
IP 40
- Contacts load:
(C-1) 10(2,5)A / 250 V
- Contacts load:
(C-2)
1(1)A / 250 V
12) SR Return sensor wiring. Factory fitted.

TS
CALEFFI
100%
80%
25%
50%
50%
19
20
17
16
21
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
22
14
23
50
13
24
WATCH
60
70
40
80
30
90
12
11
-25%
+25%
-50%
20
40
60
10
4
5
14) Pump shutdown variant. Sometimes the temperature regulating

unit is installed in a system where there are one or more users
with different usage requirements. In this case, for users
requiring ON/OFF, it may be necessary to shut down the unit
circulator.
The electrical diagram shown below illustrates this possibility;
the user auxiliary contact must be inserted in series with the
normal wiring.
18
12
15
13) TA1 Room thermostat wiring. Optional.
6 4
Zu
Frost protection function
Operation of room thermostat
When the selector, point 6 on the front panel, is positioned at

there are two types of intervention:
or
a) If the flow temperature is below 7C, the controller activates the

operation of the unit until a flow temperature of 20C is reached.
Once this value has been reached, it will return to the inactive status.
b) If the outside temperature is below 4C (+2 -0), the controller
keeps the pump running.
Manual control
n 2
n 3
MA
MC
2
6 4
Zu
RH terminal strip
Disconnect the electrical wires to

the right-hand side PCB in position
MA, identified as n 2 and MC,
identified as n 3.
Press the screw on the protective motor cover and turn it to the
required position.
The room thermostat makes it possible to optimise the operation of the

system, as it modifies the regulating curve automatically.
According to the time bands for comfort and set-back selected on the
clock and the room temperature setting, it will read the actual
temperature in the room. On the basis of this parameter, it will make a
substantial modification in the characteristic curve (A) to bring it into
operation and prevent excessive heating of the room.
The difference between the actual room temperature measured by the
thermostat and the set temperature produces an amplified effect in
relation to that produced by a similar variation in the outside temperature.
A difference of 1C in the room temperature causes a move in the
characteristic curve equal to 7C of the outside temperature, with the
corresponding variation in flow temperature.
For example, if Troom set = 20C and Troom measured = 19C, then
the difference of 1C will cause a characteristic curve movement of
7C towards the left (B). The flow temperature will consequently be
raised. In case of a negative difference the movement will be on
curve C.
This behaviour is applicable for a maximum difference of 3C in
room temperature.
In addition, the maximum temperature limit set at item 6 on the PCB
remains active.
In the set-back band, the set room temperature is automatically
reduced by 2C, defining the Tset-back set.
This reduction will cause a move to the right of the characteristic
curve, equating to 14C of the outside temperature (D), with a
If the measured ambient temperature falls belowTset-back set the
original curve (A) will be taken. In case of room thermostat code
151000 the set-back correction set at point 10 is applied.
Curve with room thermostat regulation

TFLOW (C)
Options
1) Room thermostat, code 151000.
b) Daily/weekly digital clock permitting

programming of comfort cycles and
set-back directly from the room. In this
case, remove the analogue clock from
the regulating unit self, and add the
appropriate cover.
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
18
CALEFFI
22
16
20
15
10
24
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
2) Room thermostat with 3-position selector and daily/weekly digital

clock, code 151002.
This device is similar in operation to code 151000, with the following
variations:
a) Selector with three positions:
, making it possible to change
the operation of the regulator remotely
from the boiler room. In this case, the
regulator must be set at
.
55
Room thermostat electrical regulation

Install the room thermostat and connect by sheathed 2-core cable
(2x0,75) to the terminal strip of the regulator PCB as shown below.
M S
+
20
18
CALEFFI
16
22
24
TA1
TA1
TA
SR/TA
LH terminal strip
The regulating unit can be completed

with a room thermostat able to adjust
the value of the flow temperature
according to the actual room
temperature.
This configuration makes it possible
to take account of gratuitous heat
gains by refining further the flow
temperature value, with optimum
results in terms of comfort and energy
saving.
60
Room thermostat
WARNING - If the connecting cable between the thermostat

and the control unit is not sheathed, it must run in its own
ducting.
The maximum length is 150 m.
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Mixed system
with wall boiler
and zone valve
TA
Manual valve
Lockshield valve
3-way zone valve
Electric pump
TA
Room thermostat
Non-return valve
M S
+
20
18
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
25%
100%
80%
50%
50%
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
70
80
30
90
+25%
20
40
60
CALEFFI
-25%
-50%
2
6 4
CALEFFI
50
40
Zu
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
220 V
Mixed system with wall boiler and

shut-off to the radiators
TA
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
M S
+
20
18
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
100%
80%
25%
50%
50%
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
50
60
CALEFFI
70
40
80
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
20
40
6 4
60
Zu
220 V
65610
220 V -
CALEFFI
2-
220 V 3W
2-
3W
65610
220 V 3W
65610
6
5
4
3
2
1
2-
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
mH2O
TA
CALEFFI
16
22
24
16
22
24
Code 154600
Temperature regulating unit for manifold box installation. Connections to primary circuit 1" F with unions.
Connections to manifold 1 1/2 F with nut. Brass body. EPDM hydraulic seals. Maximum working pressure 6 bar.
Ambient temperature from 0 to 40C. Regulating temperature from 20 to 90C (factory setting 45C). Consisting of:
4-way mixing valve; mixing valve servomotor with the following characteristics, supply 230 V 50 Hz, rating
1,3 VA, cycle time 210 s, torque 6 Nm. Electronic pump UPE 25-60, maximum flow rate 3,5 m3/h, protection
class IP42; temperature controller; flow temperature sensor; return temperature sensor; outside temperature
sensor, connectable to terminal; flow thermometer with pocket, scale 20100C; room thermostat with
programmable daily/weekly digital clock and 3-position selector (comfort, set-back and clock).
Code 155600
Temperature regulating unit for manifold box installation. Connections to primary circuit 1" F with unions.
Connections to manifold 1 1/2 F with nut. Brass body. EPDM hydraulic seals. Maximum operating pressure 6 bar.
Ambient temperature from 0 to 40C. Regulating temperature from 20 to 90C (factory setting 45C). Consisting of:
4-way mixing valve; mixing valve servomotor with the following characteristics: supply 230 V 50 Hz, rating 1,3 VA,
cycle time 210 s, torque 6 Nm. Electronic pump UPE 25-60, maximum flow rate 3,5 m3/h, protection class IP42,
temperature controller with analogue daily/weekly clock, flow temperature sensor; return temperature sensor,
outside temperature sensor connectable to terminal, flow thermometer with pocket, scale 20100C.
Series 154
Temperature regulating unit with underfloor heating manifolds preassembled in manifold box. Connections to
primary circuit 1" F with unions. Brass body. EPDM hydraulic seals. Maximum operating pressure 6 bar. Ambient
temperature from 0 to 40C. Regulating temperature from 20 to 90C (factory setting 45C). Consisting of: 4-way
mixing valve; mixing valve servomotor with the following characteristics, supply 230 V 50 Hz, rating 1,3 VA, cycle
time 210 s, torque 6 Nm; Electronic pump UPE 25-60, maximum flow rate 3,5 m3/h, protection class IP42;
temperature controller; flow temperature sensor; return temperature sensor; outside temperature sensor,
connectable to terminal; flow thermometer with pocket, scale 20100C; room thermostat with programmable
daily/weekly digital clock and 3-position selector (comfort, set-back and clock); 5-outlet flow manifold (5 to 13)
complete with regulating valves; 5-outlet return manifold (5 to 13) complete with shut-off valves, suitable for
connection of thermo-electric heads; manifold units with air vents and drain valves; manifold box, colour white
RAL 9010, depth adjustable from 150 to 190 mm.
Series 155
Temperature regulating unit with underfloor heating manifolds preassembled in manifold box. Connections to
primary circuit 1" F with unions. Brass body. EPDM hydraulic seals. Maximum operating pressure 6 bar. Ambient
temperature from 0 to 40C. Regulating temperature from 20 to 90C (factory setting 45C). Consisting of: 4-way
mixing valve; mixing valve servomotor with the following characteristic: supply 230 V 50 Hz, rating 1,3 VA, cycle
time 210 s, torque 6 Nm; electronic pump UPE 25-60, maximum delivery 3,5 m3/h, protection class IP42,
temperature controller with daily/weekly analogue clock; flow temperature sensor; return temperature sensor;
outside temperature sensor, connectable to terminal; flow thermometer with pocket, scale 20100C; 5-outlet
flow manifold (5 to 13) complete with regulating valves; 5-outlet return manifold (5 to 13) complete with shut-off
valves, suitable for connection of thermo-electric heads; manifold units with air vents and drain valves; manifold
box, colour white RAL 9010, depth adjustable from 150 to 190 mm.
Code 151000
Room thermostat and indoor sensor for temperature regulating unit.
Code 151002
Room thermostat and indoor sensor for temperature regulating unit with 3-position selector (comfort, set-back
and clock) and daily/weekly digital clock.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
series 152 - 153
01082/03 GB
Function
correct system flow temperature.
4-way mixing valve, servomotor, pump, flow temperature sensor,
outside temperature sensor, temperature controller, flow and return
thermometers and unions for connecting to the primary and
secondary circuits.
This unit solves the problems of installation of regulating
Gamma prodotti
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
152600
152601
153600
153601
151000
151002
Temperature regulating unit with pump UPS 25-60

Temperature regulating unit with pump UPS 25-80
Temperature regulating unit complete with room thermostat and clock, with pump UPS 25-60
Temperature regulating unit complete with room thermostat and clock, with pump UPS 25-80
Room thermostat and indoor sensor with 3-position selector and digital clock
- hydraulic seals:
- Mixing valve:
-
Medium:
By-pass regulating range:
- Grundfos pump:
code 152600/153600
code 152601/153601
- Max ambient relative humidity:

- Ambient temperature:
- Protection class:
H (m w.g.)
H (m w.g.)
4-way

30%
2090C
6 bar
0,050,5 bar
- Primary and secondary circuit connections:
rating:
cycle time:
torque:
grey cast iron GG19

EPDM
20100C
1 F with union
230V 50 Hz
10 VA
240 s
10 Nm
model UPS 25-60
model UPS 25-80
95%
040C
IP 42
UPS 25-60
code 152600
code 153600
UPS 25-80
code 152601
code 153601
2
2
1
0
Q (m3/h)
Power consumption
Speed
3
2
1
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,45
0,30
0,17
100
65
35
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
Q (m3/h)
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,13
1,04
0,69
250
220
140
2450
1500
1000
Dimensions

H
D

L
CALEFFI
ON
100%
80%
25%
50%
50%
19
20
18
17
16
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
15
21
12
22
14
13
23
50
24
WATCH
60
70
40
80
30
90
12
11
-25%
+25%
-50%
10
A
1"
Code
152600/601
B
142
C
78
D
90
20
22
24
16
H
205
I
320
L
120
18
CALEFFI
G
267
F
234
M S
E
40
ON
CALEFFI
100%
80%
25%
50%
50%
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
50
60
70
40
80
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
Code
153600/601
A
1"
B
142
C
78
60
40
SYSTEM
RETURN
SYSTEM
FLOW
40
80
20
100
60
80
20
100
D
90
E
40
H
205
I
320
L
120
M
70
01
4-way mixing valve.
02
Digital temperature controller.
03
Circulating pump:
code 152600 - 153600 GRUNDFOS UPS 25-60
code 152601 - 153601 GRUNDFOS UPS 25-80.
04
Differential by-pass valve with graduated scale.
05
Flow temperature sensor.
06
Outside temperature sensor, on mounting plate.
07
Circuit flow and return thermometers in pockets.
08
Connection point for remote transmission.
09
Room thermostat and indoor sensor with digital clock and

selector for series 153 (option for series 152).
10
Room thermostat and indoor sensor (option for series 152).
11
Servomotor.
11
CALEFFI
100%
80%
25%
50%
50%
19
20
18
17
16
21
12
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
15
50
13
23
22
14
24
WATCH
60
70
40
80
30
90
12
11
+25%
-50%
10
-25%
M S
20
18
CALEFFI
FLOW FROM
BOILER
BOILER
RETURN
G
267
F
234
22
16
24
10
20
18
CALEFFI
16
22
24
7)
Hydraulic diagram
SR
SF
Temperature and characteristic curve selector. This selector

enables the user to input the maximum required flow
temperature, corresponding to the minimum outside design
temperature.
Also enables optimisation of the standard configuration set at the
factory, allowing personal control of the operation of the system.
If this value matches the setting on the main printed circuit
board (item 6 PCB), the regulation complies with the calculation
criteria given by its own characteristic curve.
If this value is different from the setting on the main printed
circuit board (item 6 PCB), the controller will recalculate the new
characteristic curve. The maximum set temperature on PCB,
however, remains active.
4-way mixing valve
Servomotor
Pump
Automatic by-pass
BR
BF
8) Reference graph for calculation of the characteristic curve.

This is calculated on the basis of the following parameters:
Thermometer
1
11
Max flow temperature set on controller (item 7).

Factory setting 45C.
b)
Min flow temperature set on printed circuit board

(item 5 PCB). Factory setting 20C.
c)
Min outside temperature set on printed circuit board

(item 1 PCB). Factory setting -10C.
d)
Outside temperature limit for heating start in summer, set

on printed circuit board (item 3 PCB). Factory setting 18C.
CALEFFI
ON
a)
25%
100%
80%
50%
50%
19
20
18
16
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
15
21
17
12
22
14
13
23
50
24
WATCH
11
70
40
80
30
90
12
60
-25%
+25%
10

factory set values.
-50%

10
X axis - Outside temperature - TX
Y axis - Flow temperature - TY


1) ON Mains electric on: LED continuously lit.

Flashes in screed drying mode.
Calculation of change points

Thus: X = 18 - (-10) = 28C.
2)
Pump operating ON: LED continuously lit.
3)
Mixing valve closing: LED lit.

Thus : Y = 45 - 20 = 25C.
4)
5)
b)

comfort or set-back modes, controlled by the fitted
analogue clock or the remote digital clock.
c)
d)
e)
f)
Controller de-activated (pump ON, mixing valve ON). This

function guarantees heating to the maximum temperature
value set on the printed circuit board (PCB).
Controller in summer mode (pump OFF, mixing valve OFF).
However, pump is activated daily for two minutes every
24 hours in order to prevent it from becoming seized when
inactive.

X = Tmax X - 50% X = 18 - 0,5 28 = 4C
Y = Tmin Y + 80% Y = 20 + 0,8 25 = 40C
60
55
50%

remains on.
25%
a)
TFLOW (C)

X = Tmax X - 25% X = 18 - 0,25 28 = 11C
Y = Tmin Y + 55% Y = 20 + 0,55 25 = 33,75C
50
45
40
B (-10;45)
D (4;40)
80%
C (11;33,75)
35 55%
30
25
A (18;20)
20
15
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
9)

Range of adjustment -25% to +25%.
Factory setting: correction = 0%
selected in the comfort range (red indicator).
Example: if the selector is set to + 25%, its effect on the flow
+25% Y = 0,25 25 = 6,25C.

The surface of the printed circuit board identifies the following functions:
DIGITAL
REGULATOR
N
2501/2601
230 V AC
4VA
optional
LP
12
SR
SE
4(2)A
4(2)A
PS
4(2)A
MA
-10
-10
-15
11
SM
18
MIXING VALVE
-20 -20
-5
0 14
22
N
30
55
65
4,5
SM
1 2
CLOSED
OFF
MC
SE
PUMP
OPEN

TFLOW (C)
TA1
SR/TA
230V AC
10A max
INLET PUMP
MIXING VALVE
13
ROOM
THERMOSTAT
T 40
t Typ 2124
60
20
55
40 40
90 1,5
6
max
NZ
50
6,25C
45
10
50
Y..72097
100
RF(%)
40
14
35
15
30
25
20
1)
Minimum outside temperature (Tmin X), adjustable from

-5C to -20C, to which the set maximum flow temperature
corresponds (Tmax Y).
2)

0C to -20C.
comfort mode.
3)
Maximum outside temperature to start heating, or

summer limit, (Tmax X), adjustable from 14C to 22C.
An outside temperature higher than the set temperature will
cause the following state: circulator OFF and mixing valve closed.
15
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
10)
TFLOW (C)
50
6,25C
35
30
25
20
15
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
d
-7
21
22
11)Daily or weekly analogue clock, used to select the required

heating phases.
Comfort with red indicators or set-back with blue indicators.
Factory setting: daily mode, minimum selection interval 15 min.
The changeover from daily to weekly with a 60 min minimum
selection interval, is carried out
as follows:
1
24
2
23
3
12
drive ring to the required position;
to do this, turn the pointer
clockwise until the innermost
notch coincides with one of the
9
3
outer notches. Reposition the
outer ring, making sure that the
reference day shown falls within
6
the operating sector of the
switching point.
20
1 2
55
40
ON Position.

The program has a duration of seven days; during the first three
remaining four days, the flow temperature is raised and
maintained at the maximum temperature value set at point 7 of
the front panel. The activation of this program is displayed by
the flashing LED on the front panel, point 1.
The frequency of flashing indicates the number of drying
days which have passed; one pulse every 8 seconds indicates
day 1, two pulses every 8 seconds indicates day 2, and so on.
If the electricity has to be switched off in this phase, the
controller will start its drying cycle again from the beginning.
The front panel LED, point 1, continuously lit, indicates the end
of the drying program. At this point, the microswitch must be
turned to OFF.
N.B.: In manual mode,
the screed drying procedure cannot
be activated.
60
45
Selection microswitch for screed drying program.

Factory setting: OFF.
OFF
1 2
4)
OFF

Range of adjustment 0% to -50%.
selected in the set-back range (blue indicators).
-25% Y = -0,25 25 = -6,25C.
The characteristic curve is then moved downwards by 6,25C.
In addition if, following this move, the flow temperature has to
be lower than the minimum temperature for starting heating
(Tmin Y), the following state will be obtained: circulator OFF and
mixing valve closed.
5)

(Tmin Y).
Adjustable from 20C to 40C
6)

In case a higher value has been set at point 7 of the panel
front, this will be restricted to the limit value.
19
18
17
7) NZ
Neutral zone regulating selector.

If the variation of the flow temperature remains within the
temperature value selected in the neutral zone, the mixing valve
remains inactive. Moving the temperature in relation to the
calculated setting does not produce any movement of the valve.
16
15
10
14
13
12
11
Example with factory settings:

Flow temperature calculated on the characteristic curve,
Thus:
TY = (40 - 20) = 20C
T = 20 0,8 0,3 = 4,8C
Treturn set Y = 40 - 4,8 = 35,2C.
If the return temperature measured (Treturn Y) is Treturn
set Y, the controller will modify the characteristic curve, moving
it upwards or downwards, to move the return temperature to the
set value.
This continuous comparison prevents any overheating in the
room caused by gratuitous heat sources modifying the heating
load.
Auxiliary user contact

6
PS
MA
MC
Brown
Pomp, unit 152
Pump shutdown variation
15) Connector for remote data transmission.

C
Ohm
-15 11.382
-12 9.912
-10 8.933
-6 7.439
-3 6.492
-2 6.206
0 5.632
C
0
2
4
6
8
10
15
Ohm
5.632
5.187
4.742
4.347
4.000
3.553
2.971
C
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Ohm
2.431
2.000
1.655
1.376
1.150
966
815
C
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
Ohm
690
587
501
430
370
319
276
C
90
95
100
Ohm
240
209
183
Safety
Curve with return temperature regulation

TFLOW (C)
Pump shutdown wiring
RH terminal strip
8) RF(%) Return sensor regulating selector (optional).

the difference between flow and return temperatures (T).
T = TY %set 0,3.
If the outside or flow sensor shows an ohm resistance value outside

the working range (damaged or detached sensor), the following
60
55
50
45
40
Treturn: 35,2C
35
Safety thermostat, code 622001
30
Additional, for use with underfloor heating

systems.
25
20
15
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
9) Auxiliary contact. This contact opens when the mixing valve is

It can be used to shut down the pump or heat generator of the
primary circuit.
5 55C
- Factory setting:
50C
- Protection class:
IP 40
- Contacts load:
(C-1) 10(2,5)A / 250V
- Contacts load:
(C-2)
1(1)A / 250V
+C
C
1
2

Outside sensor wiring. Connect the outside sensor by
two-core cable (2x0,75) to the connector supplied with
the unit.
Outside sensor
SE
SE
Connecting cable
Connector

LH terminal strip
11) SE
CALEFFI
ON
100%
80%
25%
50%
50%
19
20
18
17
16
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
15
21
12
22
14
13
23
50
24
WATCH
11
-25%
+25%
-50%
4
5
14) Pump shutdown variant. Sometimes the temperature regulating

unit is installed in a system where there are one or more users
with different usage requirements.
In this case, for users requiring ON/OFF, it may be necessary
to shut down the unit circulator.
normal wiring.
80
90
70
30
10
12) SR Return sensor wiring. Optional.
60
40
12
Operation of room thermostat
When the selector, point 6 on the front panel, is positioned at

there are two types of intervention:
or

Once this value has been reached, it will return to the inactive status.
Zu
Close
Ferm
e
pe
ng
be
ft
au
Vo r l
a ch
ten
Auf
Open
Ouvrir
Beipass n
ich
Hand schliee
on
n
tv
To carry out adjustment:

- Remove the servomotor fixing
screws.
- Lift the servomotor. This gives
access to the control knob.
Refer to the information given
on the knob itself.
Mis
ch
e
Manual control
ra t
nh
u r f
r Fu b o d e
ei z
Options
1) Room thermostat, code 151000.

TFLOW (C)
The regulating unit can be completed

with a room thermostat able to adjust
the value of the flow temperature
temperature. This configuration
makes it possible to take account of
gratuitous heat gains by refining
further the flow temperature value,
with optimum results in terms of
comfort and energy saving.
The room thermostat makes it possible to optimise the operation of

the system, as it modifies the regulating curve automatically.
According to the time bands for comfort and set-back selected on
the clock and the room temperature setting, it will read the actual
temperature in the room. On the basis of this parameter, it will make
a substantial modification in the characteristic curve (A) to bring it into
operation and prevent excessive heating of the room.
The difference between the actual room temperature measured by
the thermostat and the set temperature produces an amplified
effect in relation to that produced by a similar variation in the
outside temperature.
A difference of 1C in the room temperature causes a move
of the characteristic curve equal to 7C of the outside temperature, with
the corresponding variation in flow temperature.
For example, if Troom set = 20C and Troom measured = 19C, then
the difference of 1C will cause a characteristic curve movement of
7C towards the left (B).
The flow temperature will consequently be raised.
In case of a negative difference the movement will be on curve C.
This behaviour is applicable for a maximum difference of 3C in room
temperature.
remains active.
reduced by 2C, defining the T set-back set.
corresponding variation in flow temperature. In case of room
thermostat code 151000 the set-back correction set at point 10 is
applied.
20
18
22
60
55
50
45
40
CALEFFI
16
35
24
30
25
2) Room thermostat with 3-position selector and daily/weekly digital

clock, code 151002.
20
15
10
a) Selector with 3 positions

,
making it possible to change the
operation of the regulator remotely
from the boiler room. In this case, the
regulator must be set at
.
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
M S
+
20
18
CALEFFI
16
22
24
Room thermostat electrical connection

(2 x 0,75) to the terminal strip of the regulator PCB as shown below.
b) Daily/weekly digital clock allowing for programming comfort

cycles and set-back directly from the room. In this case, remove the
analogue clock from the regulating unit itself, and add the
appropriate cover.
TA1
TA1
TA
SR/TA
LH terminal strip
This device is similar in operation to

code 151000, with the following
variations:
Room thermostat
WARNING - If the connecting cable between the thermostat

and the control unit is not sheathed, it must run in its own
ducting.

TA
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
PN 10
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI

TA
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
PN 10
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
25%
100%
80%
50%
50%
19
20
18
17
16
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
15
21
12
60
13
23
22
14
24
WATCH
7080
4050
12
30
11
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
10
M S
20
18
CALEFFI
22
16
24
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
M S
20
18
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
100
2,25
2,0
1,75
CALEFFI
100
2,25
2,0
1,75
80
80
1,5
1,5
1,25
1,25
60
60
1,0
1,0
0,75
0,75
40
40
0,5
0,5
0,25
0,25
20
20
15
1,0
0,75
0,5
0,25
10
1,25
-5
-10
-15
20
20
-20
15
1,0
1,5
0,75
1,75
2,0
0,5
2,25
0,25
10
1,25
-5
-10
-15
-20
1,5
1,75
2,0
2,25
20
20
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
16
22
24
Code 152600
Temperature regulating unit. Connections 1" F with unions. Body in grey cast iron GG19. EPDM hydraulic seals.
Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Ambient temperature 0 to 40C. Regulating temperature from 20 to 90C
(factory setting 45C). Consisting of: 4-way mixing valve; mixing valve servomotor with the following
characteristics: supply 230 V 50 Hz, rating 10 VA, cycle time 240 s, torque 10 Nm, pump UPS 25 60;
by-pass valve with regulating scale from 0,05 to 0,5 bar; temperature controller with clock for daily/weekly
programming; flow temperature sensor; outside temperature sensor, connectable to terminal; flow and return
thermometers with pocket, scale 20100C.
Code 152601
characteristics: supply 230 V 50 Hz, rating 10 VA, cycle time 240 s, torque 10 Nm; pump UPS 25 80;
by-pass valve with regulating scale from 0,05 to 0,5 bar; temperature controller with clock for daily/weekly
programming; flow temperature sensor; outside temperature sensor, connectable to terminal flow and return
thermometers with pocket, scale 20100C.
Code 153600
by-pass valve with regulating scale from 0,05 to 0,5 bar; temperature controller; flow temperature sensor; outside
temperature sensor, connectable to terminal; flow and return thermometers with pocket, scale 20100C; room
thermostat with programmable daily/weekly digital clock and 3-position selector (comfort, set-back and clock).
Code 153601
by-pass valve with regulating scale from 0,05 to 0,5 bar; temperature controller; flow temperature sensor;
outside temperature sensor, connectable to terminal; flow and return thermometers with pocket, scale
20100C, room thermostat with programmable daily/weekly digital clock and 3-position selector (comfort,
set-back and clock).
Code 151000
Code 151002
Room thermostat and indoor sensor for temperature regulating unit with 3-position selector (comfort, set-back
and clock) and daily/weekly digital clock.
CALEFFI
Hydraulic separator-manifold
SEPCOLL
CALEFFI
series 559
01084/05 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The SEPCOLL, a new device combining a hydraulic separator and
distribution manifold, is used in heating and air-conditioning
systems to allow different controls of the various rooms when there
is only one boiler or chiller.
The various configurations are compact, and can be easily fitted in
any kind of hydraulic circuit, with the advantages of ease of
installation and a saving of useful living space.
The SEPCOLL devices are supplied complete with preformed shell
insulation to ensure perfect heat insulation when used in both hot
and cold water systems.
Patent application No. MI2001A001270
Product range
Code 559022
Code 559031
Code 559021
Code 559121
Hydraulic separator-manifold 2+2 external use with insulation. Complete with fixing brackets
Hydraulic separator-manifold 3+1 external use with insulation. Complete with fixing brackets
Hydraulic separator-manifold 2+1 built-in version with insulation
Hydraulic separator-manifold 2+1 in manifold box with insulation
Insulation characteristics
painted steel

Temperature range:
Medium:
6 bar
0 110C
water; glycol solutions non hazardous, therefore

Connections:
- mains;
- branches;
- for air vent valve;

- for drain cock;
- mains;
- branches;
Size 1 1/4; branches 1

Size 1 1/4; branches 1
Size 1; branches 1
Size 1; branches 1
3+1 and 2+2:

2+1:
3+1 and 2+2:
2+1 (side):
2+1 (top):
3+1, 2+2 and 2+1:
3+1, 2+2 and 2+1:
3+1 and 2+2:

2+1:
3+1 and 2+2:
2+1:
1 1/4 F
1 F
1 M
1 M
1 F
1/2 F
1/2 F
80 mm
60 mm
90 mm
90 mm
Material:
closed cell expanded PEX
Thickness:
20 mm
Density: - internal part
30 Kg/m3
- external
50 Kg/m3
0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C
0,045 W/(mK)
Coefficient of resistance to the diffusion of vapour (DIN 52615):> 1.300
Temperature range:
0 100C
Class B2
Hydraulic characteristic
Maximum recommended flow rates at outlets:
Branches
2+1
2+2
3+1
Primary
2 m3/h
2,5 m3/h
2,5 m3/h
Secondary (total)
5 m3/h
6 m3/h
6 m3/h
Dimensions
C
A
A
38433.01
I
H
Domanda di brevetto
n. MI2001A 001270
C
D
38431.01
Domanda di brevetto
n. MI2001A 001270
H
G
C
D
B
E
L
E
I
F
F
G
Code
A
559021 1"
Weight
Domanda di brevetto
n. MI2001A 001270
Domanda di brevetto
n. MI2001A 001270
38435.01
I
H
38431.01
Volume (l)
L
Code
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
(kg)
559022 11/4" 1" 1/2 160 90 140 530 80 250 80 13,2 6,9
Weight
B
C
D
E
F
G H
I
L
(kg) Volume (l)
1" 1/2 155 90 570 60 195 140 60 7,7 4,1
A
Weight
Code A B C D E
F G H
I
L M (kg) Volume (l)
559031 11/4" 1" 1/2 390 90 90 140 80 250 760 80 17,5 9,8
Code
559121
A
800
B
770
C
595
E
D
85
E
150190
Operating principle
When a single system contains a primary generating circuit, with its
own pump, and a secondary user circuit, with one or more
distribution pumps, operating conditions may arise in the system
where the pumps interact, creating abnormal variations in flow
rates and pressures in the circuits.
In the SEPCOLL there is a low pressure loss zone, which enables
the primary and secondary circuits connected to it to be
hydraulically independent of each other; the flow in one circuit
does not create a flow in the other if the pressure loss in the
common section is negligible.
In this case, the flow rates passing through the respective circuits
depend exclusively on the flow characteristics of the pumps,
preventing reciprocal influence due to connection in series.
Downstream of the hydraulic separation zone are the flow and
return manifolds to which the various secondary distribution circuits
can be connected.
secondary circuit
primary circuit
Three possible hydraulic balance situations are shown below as

examples.
GS1
GS2
GS3
Gp
GS1
GS2
GS3
Gp
GS4
Gprimary = Gsecondary (GS1+GS2+GS3+GS4)
GS1
GS2
GS3
Gp
GS4
Gprimary > Gsecondary (GS1+GS2+GS3+GS4)
GS4
Gprimary < Gsecondary (GS1+GS2+GS3+GS4)
Installation
SEPCOLL units should be installed in accordance with the
diagrams shown in this leaflet, paying attention to the correct
connection of the flow and return pipework and the main and
branch connections. SEPCOLL can even be installed upside down,
as long as the right connection pattern is achieved.
The 1/2 F connections must only be used for connecting an air
vent valve and drain cock, and not for connecting branch circuits.
40
CALEFFI
80
1,75
80
1,5
60
1,0
40
0,5
0,25
15
21
0,75
16
20
20
22
14
23
13
10
1,25
-5
-10
-15
-20
1,5
1,75
2,0
12
24
15
1,0
0,75
0,5
0,25
2,25
11
10
80
The SEPCOLL devices are supplied complete with a hot preformed

shell insulation. This system ensures not only perfect heat insulation
but also the tightness required to prevent atmospheric water
vapour from entering the unit. For these reasons, this type of
insulation can also be used in cooling water circuits, as it prevents
the formation of condensate on the surface of the device body.
2,0
17
WATCH
60
20
Insulation
80
100
2,25
18
12
80
60
20
1,25
19
20
40
60
40
60
20
40
20
4
5
20
Support brackets
The SEPCOLL external versions
2+2 and 3+1 are supplied
complete with suitable wall-mounting
brackets, which make it possible
to adjust the front-to-back
positioning.
Pump
Lockshield valve
Variable speed pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
CALEFFI
bar
CALEFFI
40
60
20
5
conforme norme ISPESL
80
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
t
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
3
2
1
CALEFFI
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
System with wall-mounted

boiler and built-in
SEPCOLL 2+1
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
40
60
20
1
80
CALEFFI
System with floor

standing boiler
and SEPCOLL 3+1
M S
+
20
18
CALEFFI
22
16
24
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
M S
+
20
18
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
100
2,25
2,0
1,75
CALEFFI
80
1,5
1,25
60
1,0
0,75
40
0,5
0,25
20
5
-5
-10
-15
CALEFFI
1,75
40
0,5
0,25
10
1,25
10
8
6
4
2
0
2,0
60
1,0
0,75
15
1,0
0,25
10
8
6
4
2
0
100
2,25
80
1,5
1,25
20
0,75
0,5
22
24
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
16
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
20
20
-20
15
1,0
1,5
0,75
1,75
2,0
0,5
2,25
0,25
10
1,25
-5
-10
-15
-20
1,5
1,75
2,0
2,25
8
20
20
Code 559022
Hydraulic separator-manifold 2+2 external use, for heating and air-conditioning systems. Painted steel body. Connection to
generator 1 1/4 F, outlet centre distance 80 mm. Branch connections 1 M, outlet centre distance 90 mm. 1/2 F connections for
air vent valve and drain cock. Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Temperature range 0110C (0100C with insulation). With a
hot preformed insulation shell in closed cell expanded PEX. Complete with fixing brackets.
Code 559031
Hydraulic separator-manifold 3+1 external use, for heating and air-conditioning systems. Painted steel body. Connection to
generator 1 1/4 F, outlet centre distance 80 mm. Branch connections 1 M, outlet centre distance 90 mm. 1/2 F connections for
air vent valve and drain cock. Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Temperature range 0110C (0100C with insulation). With a
hot preformed insulation shell in closed cell expanded PEX. Complete with fixing brackets.
Code 559021
Hydraulic separator-manifold 2+2 built-in version, for heating and air-conditioning systems. Painted steel body. Connection to
generator 1 F, outlet centre distance 60 mm. Branch connections 1 M, outlet centre distance 90 mm. Head branch connections
1 F, outlet centre distance 60 mm. 1/2 F connections for air vent valve and drain cock. Maximum working pressure 6 bar.
Temperature range 0110C (0100C with insulation). With a hot preformed insulation shell in closed cell expanded PEX.
Code 559121
Hydraulic separator-manifold 2+2 built-in version, for heating and air-conditioning systems. Painted steel body. Connection
to generator 1 F, outlet centre distance 60 mm. Branch connections 1 M, outlet centre distance 90 mm. Head branch
connections 1 F, outlet centre distance 60 mm. 1/2 F connections for air vent valve and drain cock. Maximum working
pressure 6 bar. Temperature range 0110C (0100C with insulation). With a hot preformed insulation shell in closed cell
expanded PEX. Complete with painted sheet steel manifold box. White. Box dimensions 800 x 770 x 150190 mm.
CALEFFI
Pre-adjustable pressure reducing valves
CALEFFI
with self-contained cartridge

5350 - 5351 series
01085/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
Pressure reducing valves are devices which, when installed on
private water systems, reduce and stabilise the pressure of the
water entering from the public network. This inlet pressure, in
general, is too high and variable to be applied directly to domestic
systems.
This series of pressure reducing valves have the feature to be preadjustable. The pressure reducing valve can be set to the desired
pressure value before installation, using an adjustment knob with a
pressure setting indicator. After installation, the system pressure will
automatically adjust itself to the set value.
The internal cartridge containing all the regulating components is
pre-assembled as a self-contained unit, to facilitate inspection
and maintenance procedures.
A version fitted with an inspectable high-capacity strainer, located
inside a special transparent container, is also available. This
ensures the pressure reducing valve and water system are well
protected from any impurities in the water supply. 5350 and 5351
series pressure reducing valves are certified as compliant with
European standard EN 1567.
Patent application:
No. MI2001A001592
No. 188928201
SVGW
SSIGE
AS 1357.2
WMKA 02467
Product range
5350 series
5350 series
5351 series
5351 series
Pre-adjustable pressure reducing valve with self-contained cartridge. With pressure gauge
size 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2 and 2 M with union
Pre-adjustable pressure reducing valve with self-contained cartridge. Without pressure gauge
size 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2 and 2 M with union
Pre-adjustable pressure reducing valve with self-contained cartridge and inspectable strainer. With pressure gauge size 1/2, 3/4 and 1 M with union
Pre-adjustable pressure reducing valve with self-contained cartridge and inspectable strainer.
With pressure gauge connection
size 1/2, 3/4 and 1 M with union
series
Materials
Body:
Cover:
Control stem:
Moving parts:
Diaphragm:
Seals:
Strainer:
Strainer container:
Performance
Factory setting:
Strainer mesh size:
Medium:
Certification in compliance with standard:
Connections
Pressure gauge connections
5350
5351

EN 12165 CW602N
PA66G30
stainless steel
EN 12164 CW602N
NBR
NBR
stainless steel
-

PA66G30
stainless steel
EN 12164 CW602N
NBR
NBR
stainless steel
transparent PA12
25 bar
16 bar
3 bar
60C
010 bar
0,51 mm
water
EN 1567
25 bar
16 bar
3 bar
40C
010 bar
0,28 mm
water
EN 1567
1/22 M with union
1/21 M with union
1/4 F
1/4 F
Dimensions
Operating principle
The functioning of the pressure reducing valve is based on the balance between two
opposing forces:
1 the thrust of the

spring towards the
opening of the
obturator
2 the thrust of the

diaphragm towards the
closure of the obturator
CALEF
FI
Pressure adjusting knob
B
B
Code
Mass (kg)
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM
535040/1 1/2" 140 76* 20,5 112 54 0,92

535050/1 3/4 160 90* 20,5 112 54 1,06
535060/1
1 180 95* 20,5 112 54 1,38
535070/1 11/4 200 110* 40 178 73 2,6

535080/1 11/2 220 120* 40 178 73 3,4
535090/1
2 250 130 40 178 73 4,3
*Interchangeable with 5360 series

Operation with water flow
When a draw-off outlet is opened on the water system, the force of the spring becomes
greater than that of the diaphragm; the obturator moves downwards opening the valve
to the flow of water.
The greater the demand for water the lower the pressure under the diaphragm with a
resulting greater flow of water through the valve.
CALEF
FI
8
bar
10
bar
10
B
B
Code
Mass (kg)
535074/5 1 1/4" 197 103 25 113 56 1,65
Operation without water flow

When the draw-off outlet is closed, the downstream pressure rises and pushes the
diaphragm upwards.
As a result the obturator closes the valve to the passage of water and maintains the
pressure constant at the calibrated pressure.
The slightest difference in favour of the force exercised by the diaphragm, in relation to
that of the spring, causes the device to close.
Code
Mass (kg)
535140/11/2" 169 105 86,5 100,5 54 58 1,50

535150/13/4 180 110 89
98 54 58 1,57
535160/1 1 205 120 88,5 99,5 54 58 1,92
4
8
bar
10
bar
10
Pre-adjustment
Pressure reducing valves in the 5350
and 5351 series are fitted with an
operating knob and a pressure
setting indicator which is visible on
both sides. This pressure indicator
features incremental step operation,
therefore the pressure can be
adjusted continuously with the value
displayed at 0,5 bar increments.
The system pressure can therefore
be pre-set to the desired value, even
before the pressure reducing valve is
installed.
Removable self-contained cartridge

The cartridge, containing the diaphragm, strainer, seat, obturator
and compensating piston, is pre-assembled as a "self-contained
unit" with a cover and can be easily removed for inspection and
maintenance procedures.
Inspectable strainer
The 5351 series pressure reducing valves are fitted with a
high-capacity inspectable strainer, located in a special transparent
container. This means it is possible to view its condition and carry
out inspection and maintenance procedures as necessary.
Compensated seat
Caleffi pressure reducing valves are
fitted with compensated seats. This
means the set pressure value
remains constant, regardless of
variations in the upstream pressure
value.
In the figure, the thrust towards the
opening is counterbalanced by the
force created by the closing pressure
acting on the compensating piston.
Since the piston has a surface area
equal to the obturator one, the two
forces cancel each other out.
3
2
8
0
10
bar
Low head loss

The internal fluid-dynamic shape of
the pressure reducing valve allows to
obtain particularly low pressure losses, even if a large number of
user outlets are opened.
High pressures
The zone exposed to the upstream pressure is constructed so that it
can even operate at high pressure. The PTFE anti-extrusion rings
on the compensating piston make it possible for the valve to be used
continuously at upstream pressures of up to 25 bar.
The central support assembly , containing the moving parts, is
made of plastic material with a low adherence coefficient. This
solution minimises the chance of lime scale formation, the main
cause of malfunctions.
Pressure gauge
The pressure gauge used in the 5351 series has stainless steel
casing and a connection with a PTFE ring, which guarantees the
hydraulic seal without the need for any further sealing.
3
2
8
0
10
bar
4
6
2
8
0
10
bar
Certification
The 5350 and 5351 pressure reducing valves are approved by the
SVGW and DVGW bodies as compliant with the specifications of
European standard EN 1567.
Graph 1 (Water velocity)
Correct sizing should take place as follows:
V (m/s)
The total flow rate is calculated from the number and

type of appliances present by taking the sum of the
individual flow rates.
5
4
3
2
Example:
1
Residence with 2 bathrooms

2 bidets
G
1 shower
G
2 washbasins
G
2 WCs
G
1 bathtub
G
1 kitchen sink
G
1 washing machine
G
0,5
0,4
1/2
0,3
3/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
0,2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
12 l/min
9 l/min
12 l/min
12 l/min
12 l/min
12 l/min
12 l/min
20
200
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
10
5
50
100
2
20
0,5
10
0,2
0,1
No. of devices = 10
The design flow rate is calculated from the table of
simultaneous use factors.
2"
1 1/2"
1 1/4"
1/2"
3/4"
(535074/5)
5350
1"
1"
1 1/4"
5351
1/2"
3/4"

p (bar)
Gtot = 81 l/min
p (m w.g)
1,5
15
1,2
12
1
0,9
0,8
10
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
Example:
Gds = Gtot % = 81 41 % = 33 l/min
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
200
10
5
50
100
- Reference values:
20
10
0,5
0,2
It is recommended that flow velocity is kept within 1 to

2 metres per second when calculating the correct
reducing valve size. This will prevent noise in the pipes
and rapid wear of appliances.
The correct diameter of the reducing valve is taken
from diagram 1 on the basis of the design flow rate
taking into account an ideal flow velocity of between
1 and 2 m/s (blue band).
Example:
for Gds = 33 l/min, select the 3/4 diameter.
(see Graph 1)
Upstream pressure = 8 bar

Downstream pressure = 3 bar
Sizing
The typical flow rates of equipment commonly used in domestic
water systems are shown below, to help in the selection of correct
pipe diameters:
The pressure drop is taken from diagram 2 again on

the basis of where the design flow rate intersects the
curve for the relative diameter already selected (the
downstream pressure falls by an amount equal to the
pressure drop, with respect to the set pressure at no
flow condition).

Shower.
Washbasin, bidet, washing machine, WC
12 litres/min
9 litres/min
6 litres/min
To prevent oversizing of the pressure reducing valve and the pipes,

the correct simultaneous use correction factor must be taken into
account. Basically, the more outlets within the system, the lower the
percentage of draw-off outlets opened simultaneously will be.
Example:
for 5350 p = 0,60 bar
for Gds = 33 l/min
for 5351 p = 0,65 bar
(see Graph 2)
Nominal flow rates

Water flow rates corresponding to each diameter are
shown below, for an average velocity of 2 m/s, in
accordance with the specifications of the standard
EN 1567.
Table of simultaneous use factors (%)

Number
of devices
Private
dwelling
%
Public
building
%
Number
of devices
Private
dwelling
%
Public
building
%
Number
of devices
Private
dwelling
%
Public
building
%
5
10
15
20
25
30
54
41
35
29
27,5
24,5
64,5
49,5
43,5
37
34,5
32
35
40
45
50
60
70
23,2
21,5
20,5
19,5
18
17
30
28
27
26
24
23
80
90
100
150
200
300
16,5
16
15,5
14
13
12,5
22
21,5
20,5
18,5
17,5
16,5
Diameter
1/2
Flow rate (m3/h) 1,27
Flow rate (l/min) 21,16
3/4
2,27
37,83
1
3,6
60
1 1/4 1 1/2 2
5,8
9,1
14.
96,66 151,66 233,33
Installation
1) Turn all the taps on before installing the pressure reducing

valve, to flush the system and expel any air remaining in
the pipes.
1. Installation below ground

recommended, for three reasons:
- there is a risk of the reducing valve being damaged by
frost
- inspection and maintenance is difficult
- reading the pressure gauge is difficult.
2) Install shut-off valves upstream and downstream to

facilitate maintenance operations.
3) The pressure reducing valve may be installed on either
vertical or horizontal pipe.
However, it must not be installed upside down.
2. Water hammer
This is one of the main causes of faults in pressure
reducing valves. It is best to fit special devices to absorb
water hammer when installing pressure reducers in at-risk
systems.
Trouble-shooting
Certain types of fault, which are generally due to faulty design
of the system, are often wrongly attributed to pressure
reducing valves. The most frequent cases are as follows:
4) Close the downstream shut-off valve.

5) This mechanical pre-adjustment system, with the operating
knob and pressure indicator visible from both sides, allows
the pressure reducing valve to be set to the required value
in the system prior to installation. The pressure indicator
features incremental step movement, so that the pressure
can be adjusted continuously and the value displayed at
0,5 bar increments.
6) Set using the operating knob on the upper part of the
device. The pressure reducing valves are factory set to a
pressure of 3 bar.
7) In view of the pre-adjustment function, the presence of a
pressure gauge downstream of the device is not essential.
8) After installation, the internal mechanism will automatically
control the pressure, until the set value has been reached.
9) Slowly reopen the downstream shut-off valve.
1. Increased downstream pressure in the presence of

a water heater
This problem is due to
heating of the water caused
by the water heater. There is
not relief of the pressure
because the reducing valve
is rightly closed.
The solution is to install an
expansion vessel (between
the heater and the reducer)
to absorb the pressure increase.
2. The pressure reducing valve does not maintain its
calibrated value
In most cases this is the result of impurities that deposit on
the valve seat causing leakage with a resulting increase in
pressure downstream. It is advised to carry-out
maintenance and cleaning of the removable cartridge (see
maintenance).
Maintenance
The following steps are necessary for the

cleaning, inspection and replacement of the
entire regulating cartridge:
1) Shut off the pressure reducing valve.
2) The special construction of the regulating
unit requires no adjustment of the
calibrated pressure, which can be left at
the set value.
3)Remove the upper cover, using a suitable
spanner. The upper cover is integral with
the internal regulating cartridge.
4) Check and clean the strainer as necessary
(5350 series only).
5)The entire self-contained cartridge can be
re-fitted or replaced with a spare. When
the cartridge is screwed back onto the
valve body, the pressure indicator
windows will return to the original position.
6) Reopen the shut-off valves. The pressure
will return to the original set value.
Cleaning the 5351 series strainer

To clean the strainer cartridge, proceed as follows:
1) Shut off the pressure reducing valve.

2)Unscrew the transparent strainer cartridge
container using the spanner provided.
3)After cleaning, the entire strainer cartridge can be
re-fitted or replaced with a spare part.
4) Screw the container back on again using the
spanner provided and reopen the shut-off valves.
Application diagram
Shut-off valve
Ball check valve
Solenoid valve
5350 series
Pre-adjustable pressure reducing valve with compensated seat and self-contained cartridge, compliant to standard
EN 1567. Connections 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 2) with union. Dezincification resistant alloy body and internal moving parts.
PA66G30 cover. Stainless steel strainer, mesh size 0,51 mm. NBR diaphragm and seals. Maximum working temperature
60C. Maximum upstream pressure 25 bar. Downstream pressure setting range from 1 to 6 bar. Self-contained cartridge
can be removed for maintenance purposes. Complete with: adjustment knob with downstream pressure regulating scale
for manual setting, pressure gauge with scale 0-10 bar (version with pressure gauge). Pressure gauge connection 1/4 F
(version without pressure gauge).
5351 series
Pre-adjustable pressure reducing valve with compensated seat, self-contained cartridge and inspectable strainer,
compliant to standard EN 1567. Connections 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 1) with union. Brass body. Dezincification resistant alloy
internal moving parts. PA66G30 cover. Stainless steel strainer, mesh size 0,28 mm. Transparent PA12 strainer container.
NBR diaphragm and seals. Maximum working temperature 40C. Maximum upstream pressure 25 bar. Downstream
pressure setting range from 1 to 6 bar. Self-contained cartridge can be removed for maintenance purposes. Complete
with: adjustment knob with downstream pressure regulating scale for manual setting, pressure gauge with scale 0-10 bar
(version with pressure gauge). Pressure gauge connection 1/4 F (version without pressure gauge).
CALEFFI
Electronic mixing valve with

programmable thermal disinfection
CALEFFI
6000 series
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01086/07 GB
Function
The electronic mixing valve is used in central systems that produce
and distribute hot water for sanitary purposes.
It is designed to ensure and maintain the temperature of the hot tap
water distributed in the network when there are variations in the
temperature and pressure of the incoming hot and cold water or in
the draw-off flow rate.
This particular series of electronic mixing valves is equipped with
a special regulator that controls a set of programs for circuit
thermal disinfection against Legionella.
In addition it enables checking the temperature and time for
thermal disinfection are actually reached and undertaking the
appropriate corrective action. All the parameters are updated
every day and logged, recording the temperatures by time.
Depending on the type of system and habits of the consumer, it is
possible to program the temperature levels and the operation times
in the most appropriate manner.
In addition, it is fitted for a monitoring and remote control
connection.
Patented
Product range
6000 series Electronic mixing valve with programmable thermal disinfection. Threaded version.
6000 series Electronic mixing valve with programmable thermal disinfection. Flanged version.
sizes 3/4 - 1 - 1 1/4 - 1 1/2 - 2

sizes DN 65 and DN 80
Valve body
Materials: Body:
Ball:
Hydraulic seals:

NBR

Thermometer temperature scale:
10 bar
100C
0 80C
Hot and cold water connections:

3/4 2F
Mixed water connection:
3/4 2 F with union
Flanged connections: DN 65 and DN 80, PN 16 can be coupled
with counterflanges EN 1092-1
Actuator for threaded version
Electric supply:
230 V (ac)- 50/60 Hz directly from the regulator
Power consumption:
8 VA
Protective cover:
self-extinguishing V0
Protection class:
IP 44
-10 55C
0,9 m
Actuator for flanged version
Electric supply:
230 V (ac)- 50/60 Hz directly from the regulator
Power consumption:
10,5 VA
Protective cover:
self-extinguishing V0
Protection class:
IP 65
-10 55C
2m
Mixing valve performance
Accuracy:
Max ratio between inlet pressures
(C/H or H/C) with G = 0,5 Kv:
2C
5 bar
2:1
Digital regulator
Material: - box:
- cover:
self-extinguishing ABS white RAL 1467

self-extinguishing SAN smoked transparent
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
230 V (ac) 50/60 Hz

6,5 VA

Disinfection temperature range:
Protection class:
Contact capacity:
- mixing valve control:

- alarm relay (R2):
- relay 1, 3, 4:
20 65C
40 85C
0 50C
IP 54 (wall mounting)
(class II appliance).
5(2) A / 250 V
5(2) A / 250 V
10(2) A / 250 V
Fuses:
Charge reserve:
1A
15 days In case of a mains failure, with a
3-cell rechargeable buffer battery of 150 mAh
enabling via jumpe
Battery charging time:
72 h
Conforming to Directives:
Temperature sensors: -
CE
type of sensitive element:

NTC
working range:
-10 125C
resistance:
10000 Ohm at 25C
time constant:
2,5 s
Max distance of the flow sensor:

Max distance of the return sensor:
25 m
1000 m
Dimensions
Ok
Ok
Menu
Shock
Ok
Return C
13/02/2006
adjustment
running
Ok
Menu
Mixed C
tuesday
Adjustment
running
Shock
Return C
13/02/2006
Mixed C
tuesday
40
60
20
80
60
40
80
100
20
0
A
B
G
B
Code
A
74
600050 3/4"
75
600060 1
600070 1 1/4 85
600080 1 1/2 100
110
600090 2
D
85
95
140
150
170
C
200
212
226
248
266
E
145
145
145
145
145
F
180
180
180
180
180
G
G
105
105
105
105
105
120
A
B
Weight (kg)
1,3
1,7
2,3
2,9
5,0
B
Code
A
600006 DN 65 235
600008 DN 80 235
C
600
600
D
275
275
E
145
145
F
180
180
G
105
105
Weight (kg)
28
30,4
Legionella-distribution temperature
Energy savings
In central systems that produce hot water for sanitary purposes with
storage, in order to prevent the growth of dangerous Legionella
bacteria, the hot water must be stored at a temperature of at least
60C. At this temperature it is certain that the growth of the bacteria
that can lead to the illness called legionnaires disease will be totally
inhibited.
These temperatures, however, are too high to be able to be used
directly by the consumer; hot water at these levels can cause
severe burns. It is therefore necessary to reduce the temperature of
the hot water distributed in the network to a lower value compatible
with use.
In addition, not only the storage but also the entire distribution
network needs thermal disinfection at regular intervals. Otherwise
the bacteria would quickly form there too.
Energy savings rules advice to use mixing valves on water delivery

systems for sanitary use with storage, to limit the temperature of the
water at the inlet of the delivery network. The purpose of limiting the
temperature is to reduce passive dispersion through the delivery
network as much as possible, besides prevent delivering water at
a higher temperature than necessary.
In the light of all this, it is therefore advisable to install an electronic

mixing valve that is able to:
The electronic mixing valve is typically used in central systems

serving hospitals, nursing homes, sports centres, shopping malls,
hotels, campsites and boarding schools. In these structures with
their collective use, it is more than ever necessary to control and
prevent legionnaires disease in a programmed manner, managing
the disinfection times in the best possible way.
reduce the temperature of the distributed water to an adjustable

value lower than that of storage
keep the mixed water temperature constant as the temperature
and pressure at the inlet or the draw-off flow rate of the mixed
water vary
allow programming thermal disinfection with a higher temperature
than the adjustment value, in the necessary time and in periods with
less frequent consumption (nighttime).
bacteria
as
the
conditions vary in the
temperature of the water
containing the bacteria,
in laboratory cultures.
To
ensure
correct
thermal disinfection, it is
necessary to go up to
values of no less than
60C.
70
60
50
40
30
Optimum temperature
20
10
0
Reference documents
With regard to the prevention and control of Legionella, see the
National Regulations and applicable Code of Practice.
Applications
tuesday
13/02/2006
adjustment
running
5
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
40
Legiomix digital regulator

Mixing valve
Mixing valve actuator
Mixed water flow sensor
Return sensor
Mixed water flow thermometer
60
20
80
60
40
80
100
20
0
120
Operating principle
At the mixing valve inlet there is hot water from the storage and cold water from the
mains. At its outlet there is the flow mixed water.
By means of a specific sensor, the regulator measures the temperature of the mixed
water at the valve outlet and operates the mixing valve to maintain the set temperature.
It modifies the flows of hot and cold water at the inlet to bring the temperature of the
outlet water to the set value.
Even if there are drops in pressure due to hot or cold water usage or temperature
variations at the inlet, the mixing valve automatically adjusts the flow rate of water until
it obtains the set temperature.
HOT
For the best thermal disinfection control, in this type of system it may also be
necessary to measure the temperature of the water returning from the network,
measured with the recirculation sensor. When this measurement is available, it is
used in order to check and control the temperature reached over all or part of the
network, since the sensor can be located at a significant remote point of the system.
COLD
The appliance incorporates a digital clock and allows programming anti-legionella

disinfection treatment on the plumbing system.
The system is disinfected by raising the water temperature to a specific value for a
specific time duration.
The appliance is equipped with an RS-485 serial port for remote querying and
setting and via specific relays it carries alarm signals and controls for other
system devices outside.
recirculation sensor
20
80
0
40
60
flow sensor
MIX
p (bar)
3/4
1 1/4 1 1/2
2 p (m w.g.)
p (bar)
DN 65
DN 80
p (m w.g.)
10
0,5
0,5
0,3
0,3
0,2
0,2
0,1
0,1
0,05
0,5
0,05
0,5
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
* p = 1,5 bar
Minimum
(m3/h)
0,5
0,7
1,0
1,5
2,0
Maximum*
(m3/h)
6,4
11,0
17,8
28,0
39,0
100
2000
1000
50
20
500
500
200
5
100
50
20
200

ensure stable operation and
an accuracy of 2C

ensure stable operation and
an accuracy of 2C
Kv (m3/h)
5,2
9,0
14,5
23,0
32,0
200
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1,0
10
10
50
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1,0
20
15
10
1,5
15
1,5
DN 65
DN 80
Kv (m3/h)
90,0
120,0
DN 65
DN 80
* p = 1,5 bar
Minimum
(m3/h)
4,0
5,0
Maximum*
(m3/h)
110,0
146,0
Back panel
To remove the electrical wiring base you need to turn it round and extract it from its housing.
Appliance fuse
1 A - 250 V delayed
6 5
Relay 3
4 3
Relay 2
2 1
Relay 1
Screw
for closing front
with hole for
sealing
21 20 19
Temperature
sensors
Flow
Common
Return
Thermal shock
enabling
Relay contacts
18 17 16
RS485
Appliance
reset button
PIN
disable
8 7
Relay 4
Disabling
button
PIN code
Reset
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Closes
Common
Opens
Earth
Earth
Neutral
Live
Electric Mix valve

supply
230 V
Mix valve fuse

1 A - 250 V delayed
RS485
interface
terminal
Terminal for
temperature
sensors
Contacts for thermal
shock function enabling
jumper
Shock disabled
Battery connection
Battery connected
Battery disconnected
Shock enabled
Connecting sensors:
The cable connecting the flow and return sensors with the regulator must be installed in a
dedicated raceway. If the connecting cable is put into a raceway with other live cables then you
must use a grounded shielded cable.
Front panel
1 LCD display
2 LED display: HH:MM

3 LED display: TMixed-flow temperature
4 Indicator LED
Mixed C
tuesday
13/02/2006
adjustment
running
Shock
Menu
Return C
On
- Status OK
- Battery
- Alarm
5 LED display: TReturn-return temperature
Ok
6 Mixing valve open-close LED

7 Thermal shock button
Ok
8 Navigation buttons
- Menu
- OK
UP
DOWN
9 RS 485 front connection
Indicator description
Signals with LED display
On the front of the appliance there are 3 LED displays that constantly
give the current time and the temperatures of the flow and return
(system recirculation) sensor.
LED indicators
On the front of the appliance there are the following indicator LEDs:
Mains LED:
red LED: on steady when there is mains voltage.
Return C
Flow
Return
Signals with LCD display

On the front of the appliance there is a green backlit alphanumeric
display with four rows of 20 characters each, for setting parameters,
programming work, displaying error messages and machine status.
By scrolling through the menu items with the buttons on the front panel
(MENU, UP, DOWN and OK), you can configure the appliance,
set the various parameters and view the temperature log.
tuesday
13/02/2006
adjustment
running
tuesday
13/02/2006
disinfection
running
Ok
Mix valve LED:

open - red LED: on when opening hot water
close - blue LED: on when opening cold water
Appliance OK status LED:

green LED: on steady when there are no faults or alarms on.
Faulty Battery LED:
red LED: on steady when the battery is broken; otherwise off.
Generic Alarm LED:
red LED: on steady when there is an alarm (sensor trouble,
shock in progress, reset).
Blinks when on low power.
Work status
Depending on the time, according to the programs entered, the appliance may be in one of the following work modes:
Adjustment;
Disinfection;
Flushing;
Thermal shock (this function takes priority over the preceding ones);
In the event of trouble due to the appliance or the system, the device manages and reports the alarm and, depending on the situation, may maintain
operation or not. So the statuses include:
On with alarm
Off with alarm
The appliance is equipped with a chargeable battery that enables keeping the clock working in the event of a mains power failure.
In the event of a blackout, in order to ensure the longest operating time possible for the battery, the appliance is in the status of:
Off with Low Power.
Adjustment
In this mode the appliance continually checks the temperature detected by the flow sensor and as a result adjusts the mixing valve so that the flow
temperature is equal to the set point.
Disinfection
In this mode the appliance runs a disinfection phase, which consists of taking the water temperature up to a pre-set value for a specific duration, suitably
controlling the mixing valve.
It is possible, with the menu, to set the days of the week when disinfection must be carried out.
At the end of disinfection, the statistical data relating to the disinfection that has just been concluded are stored in memory.
Access to and exit from this mode take place automatically according to a time for starting (TIMEON) and ending (TIMEOFF) that the user can set.
CHECK ON DISINFECTION
Temperature
t1
t2
SET2 - PRG1A
SET3 - PRG1B of 2
Time
tDIS = ti > tMIN

TIME ON
TIME OFF
If, in the time span (Time OFF - Time ON), the actual disinfection time is reached tDIS greater than the set tMIN, the disinfection is concluded with a
positive outcome. It automatically exits this status and returns to adjustment.
If it is not possible to reach a sufficient time tDIS, the disinfection phase anyhow ends at Time OFF.
Example:
Time ON:
Time OFF:
tMIN:
Program:
Tdisinfection:
2:00
3:00
30 min
1A
60C
If, in the time span of 1 hour, there is a temperature higher than 60C for at least 30 minutes, disinfection has been
successful and the regulator returns to adjustment. Otherwise, disinfection anyhow ends at 3:00.
Programs
The operation of the regulator, during disinfection, can be set according to different programs, chosen according to the type of system and its
management:
Program 0 (default)
This program features continual adjustment of the flow temperature with automatic disinfection in a time band that can be set. With this program
the return sensor is not used; if present, it is only used as a monitor.
During the phase of disinfection, the temperature of the flow sensor must be above SET2 for a time tDIS at least equal to tMIN, if this occurs
then disinfection has been successful.
As soon as there are the conditions to be able to consider disinfection successful, it is stopped. If disinfection is not successful there is no alarm
signal.
Program 1A
This program features continual adjustment of the flow temperature with automatic disinfection in a time band that can be set. With this program
the return sensor is not used; if present, it is only used as a monitor.
During the phase of disinfection, the temperature of the flow sensor must be above SET2 for a time tDIS at least equal to tMIN, if this occurs
then disinfection has been successful.
As soon as there are the conditions to be able to consider disinfection successful, it is stopped.
If it is not possible to reach the disinfection temperature or it is not possible to hold it for a sufficient time, the alarm for unsuccessful disinfection
is generated. The alarm is recorded in the log.
Program 1B
This program can only be set if the return sensor is set as present.
It is identical to the previous program, the only difference lies in the fact that the successful outcome of the disinfection phase is checked via
the return sensor in relation to SET3 instead of via the flow sensor in relation to SET2.
Program 2
This program can only be set if the return sensor is set as present.
It is identical to the previous program, the only difference lies in the fact that, if after a wait time (tWAIT) since the start of disinfection the return
temperature does not reach SET3, the flow temperature SET2 is increased by a value equal to (SET3 - TR reached), considering the fact that
SET2 anyhow cannot exceed the limit of SETMAX.
This correction procedure (increasing only) of the disinfection SET is iterative: if necessary, it is repeated in the time span defined by TimeON
and TimeOFF at each time interval equal to tWAIT.
The temperatures and corresponding disinfection times for the network must be chosen according to the type of system and the related
intended use. In the light of the requirements of the most advanced world legislation on this matter, the following criteria can generally be
followed:
T = 70C for 10 minutes
Thermal disinfection is generally performed at times of reduced use of the system, for example at nighttime; this is to minimize the risk of users
getting scalded. It is recommended to perform thermal disinfection every day and at least once a week.
Thermal disinfection program guide table

Type of check
Progr.
Adjustment and simple disinfection

no check
Adjustment and disinfection check
on the flow temperature
Adjustment and disinfection check
on the return temperature to the heating plant
Continual disinfection
Use
return
sensor
NO
1A
NO
1B
YES
1B
YES
YES
Adjustment and check on disinfection with

modification of the flow temperature
according to the return temperature
Adjustment temperature
Disinfection temperature
Flow: (SET 1)
5055C
Flow: (SET 1)
5055C
Flow: (SET 1)
5055C
--
Flow: (SET 2)
60C
Flow: (SET 2)
60C
Recirculation: (SET 3)
57C
55C -24 h
55C with modification of flow
up to the max value
Flow: (SET 1)
5055C
Flushing
The appliance goes into this mode automatically at the end of the disinfection phase and it can be used for example to make the water
temperature return to the adjustment value more quickly or to periodically clear the storage of any impurities.
Thermal shock
In this mode, the appliance regulates the flow temperature on the shock setting for a time that can be set.
It is possible to start thermal shock on pressing the specific button on the front of the appliance (pressing it for at lease 5) while the work screen
is displayed, or to program it with the menu item for deferred execution (countdown in minutes), or by remote control.
After activating the procedure, it is anyhow possible to stop it by pressing the shock button and confirming it with the OK button
(display guided procedure), or by remote control.
At the end of the Thermal Shock phase the appliance goes back into the adjustment function.
Low Power
This mode is entered if there is a mains power failure.
The appliance continues running the internal date clock, however in this state there is no power to switch over the relays so the regulator will
perform neither adjustment nor disinfection.
When the mains power comes back on, the blackout is recorded in the log and the regulator returns to operating as programmed, unless the
mains failure lasted long enough to run down the battery completely. In this case the appliance will reset when the mains power comes back on.
In the event of a reset or an extended power failure, the default settings are restored.
Reset
Reset
On the back of the panel there is the reset button, if it is necessary to restore the initial settings.
If the date and time are not set after the reset, the regulator will only make the adjustment according to the default settings.
Actuation relays
On the power and terminals board there are the contacts of the relays used to govern the auxiliary equipment and to report alarms.
Relay 1: circulation pump (on in disinfection).
Relay 2: general alarm (sensor fault, battery fault, blackout or loss of current time). This relay is connected via the NC contact.
Relay 3: second thermostat.
Relay 4: flushing valves.
Relay contact for recirculation pump and hot water

storage thermostat 2
Here we give the electrical connection of relay 1 when there is the
clock for managing the recirculation pump times.
Here we give the electrical connection of relay 3 for connection to

the second thermostat of the hot water storage.
Relay 1
1
T1
60C
Relay 3
5
N
Recirculation pump
T2
70C
Hot water storage primary pump
Alarm management
In order to simplify the solution of any functional problems after installation and commissioning, the regulator is configured so as to signal any
operating trouble with alarms and to undertake the appropriate action.
In this case the cause of the alarm is shown on the LCD display.
If the alarm does not inhibit all the functions, the alarm screen will alternate with the appliance status screen.
Alarm description table

Alarm indicator
Description
AL1
Flow sensor faulty
AL2
Return sensor faulty
AL3
Disinfection failed
AL4
Thermal Shock in progress
AL5
Mains power failure
AL6
Appliance reset
AL7
Battery faulty
Depending on the type of alarm, certain actions are undertaken,

relay statuses modified and information shown on the LED displays,
the LCD display and the LEDs on the front panel.
For the operating details please refer to the installation and
commissioning manual.
Log
The log is a FIFO list (loop buffer) that is continually updated and records parameters relating to the phases of adjustment and disinfection
that took place during the day.
The last 40 days are saved, after which the data relating to the less recent day are overwritten and so on.
Every hour the hourly averages of the flow and return temperatures are saved to Eeprom, while the alarms are saved at the time when they
occur.
At any time it is possible to view the average hourly values of the current day (obviously the ones already recorded).
The data on disinfection are saved when disinfection ends.
It is possible to view the log on the display (via the specific menu item) or remotely via the RS485 serial interface.
The parameters saved in the log are:
- Date (day, month, year)
- Set program. This is saved when disinfection starts.
- tDIS: actual disinfection time (in steps of minutes).
When the set program is 0 or 1A, this parameter is the time when the temperature of the flow sensor was greater than SET2.
When the set program is 1B or 2, this parameter is the time when the return sensor was greater than SET3.
This is helpful when it is less than tMIN, to understand how much greater the span of TIME ON: TIME OFF should be to complete disinfection.
- TRMAX: Maximum temperature of the return sensor during disinfection (if there was disinfection that ended on that day).
- TRMIN: Minimum temperature of the return sensor during disinfection (if there was disinfection that ended on that day). It is calculated from
the time when the return sensor measured a value greater than SET3, that is starting from the time when the disinfection starts being effective.
- Alarms AL1, AL2, AL3, AL4, AL5, AL6, AL7 if they were activated on the day in question.
- 24 hourly average values of the flow temperature.
- 24 hourly average values of the return temperature.
- Marker indicating whether the previous data are reliable. Used in the event of resetting, changing time, changing date and any other event
that might have made the saved data unreliable.
If no disinfection ended on that day, then the related fields will contain a default value.
If there have been any faults with one or both sensors, the hourly average data will be displayed with dashes.
If there are any gaps or unavailable data due to a change in date, time, etc., the cells will contain a default value and will be shown on the
display with dashes.
hiSTORIc 06/04/2006
tDIS 060 PGRM 1A
TR MAX 58 TR MIN 48
ALARM ---45-7-
hiSTORIc 06/04/2006
h 01 02 03 04 05 06
TF ----------------TR -----------------
hiSTORIc 06/04/2006
h 07 08 09 10 11 12
TF 50 50 50 51 49 52
TR 47 47 47 47 46 48
Ready for remote control

The regulator can be controlled by computer, too, since it is fitted with an RS485 serial output connection, which is accessible both via terminals
for fixed wiring and via the connector on the front.
Since the interface is the multipoint bus type it is necessary for each appliance connected on the bus to be identified by an appropriate address
in order to avoid conflicting identification.
For a detailed description of the operations and controls that are possible from a remote location with this interface, please refer to the relevant
documentation.
Check valve
20
40
60
Temperature gauge
80
Ball valve
Backflow preventer
Pump
Expansion vessel
T
T2
T1
Thermostat
Safety valve
20
80
0
40
60
Filter
T2
T1
6000 series threaded version
Electronic mixing valve with programmable thermal disinfection. Consisting of: Valve body. Hot and cold water connections
threaded 3/4F (from 3/4 to 2), mixed water connection 3/4F (from 3/4 to 2) with union. Brass body. Chrome plated brass ball.
NBR hydraulic seals. Maximum working pressure (static) 10 bar. Maximum temperature at inlet 100C. Thermometer
temperature scale 080C. Actuator. Electric supply 230 V (ac) - 50/60 Hz directly from the regulator. Power consumption 8 VA.
Protection class IP 44. Ambient temperature range: -1055C. Self-extinguishing protective cover VO. Power cable length
0,9 m. Mixing valve. Accuracy: 2C. Maximum working pressure (dynamic) 5 bar. Maximum ratio between inlet pressures
(H/C or C/H), with G = 0,5 Kv, 2:1. Digital regulator. Electric supply 230 V (ac) - 50/60 Hz. Power consumption 6,5 VA.
Adjustment temperature range 2065C. Disinfection temperature range 4085C. Ambient temperature range 050C. With
program for checking the temperature and time for thermal disinfection are actually reached; equipped with system for logging
the measured parameters on a daily basis; fitted for a monitoring and remote control connection. Protection class IP 54 (wall
mounting). Conforms to EC directives.
6000 series flanged version
Electronic mixing valve with programmable thermal disinfection. Consisting of: Valve body. Flanged connections DN 65 (DN 65
and DN 80), PN 16 can be coupled with counterflanges EN 1092-1. Brass body. Chrome plated brass ball. NBR hydraulic seals.
Maximum working pressure (static) 10 bar. Maximum temperature at inlet 100C. Thermometer temperature scale 080C.
Actuator. Electric supply 230 V (ac) - 50/60 Hz directly from the regulator. Power consumption 10,5 W. Protection class IP 65.
Ambient temperature range: -1055 C. Self-extinguishing protective cover VO. Power cable length 2 m. Mixing valve. Accuracy:
2C. Maximum working pressure (dynamic) 5 bar. Maximum ratio between inlet pressures (H/C or C/H), with G = 0,5 Kv, 2:1.
Digital regulator. Electric supply 230 V (ac) - 50/60 Hz. Power consumption 6,5 VA. Adjustment temperature range 2065C.
Disinfection temperature range 4085C. Ambient temperature range 050C. With program for checking the temperature and time
for thermal disinfection are actually reached; equipped with system for logging the measured parameters on a daily basis; fitted
for a monitoring and remote control connection. Protection class IP 54 (wall mounting). Conforms to EC directives.
Accessories
6001
LEGIOMIX Interface
LEGIOMIX Interface for local or remote transmission and

management of the electronic mixing valve 6000 series.
Complete with:
- RS232 interface-computer connection cable,
- legiomix-interface connection cable with telephone connector,
- transmission and management software.
Power supply: 230 (V) - 50 Hz - 5 VA.
Dimensions: 160 x 125 x 40 mm.
Product range
Code
600100
755845
755846
755855
LEGIOMIX interface
analog modem
GSM digital modem
bus cable (FROR 450/750 - 2x1 mm2) - 100 m roll
The Legiomix electronic mixing valve

can be remote controlled using the
transmission interface and a specific
transmission software.
Legiomix
id 3
id 6
Mixed C
Martedi
Return C
Mixed C
13/02/2006
Martedi
regolazione
in corso
Shock
Ok
Return C
Mixed C
13/02/2006
Martedi
regolazione
in corso
Ok
Menu
Remote transmission
with GSM modem
id 9
Shock
13/02/2006
regolazione
in corso
Ok
Menu
Ok
Return C
Shock
Ok
Menu
Ok
CALEFFI
The interface is connected to the

Legiomix regulator via the front
connector, for local control, or via the
terminals on the back of the panel,
for remote control.
Up to 9 Legiomix regulators can be
connected to the same interface,
using a bus cable. The interface is
then connected to the transmission
modem, which can be both of analog
and GSM digital type.
id 2
id 5
Mixed C
Martedi
Return C
Mixed C
13/02/2006
Martedi
regolazione
in corso
Shock
Ok
Shock
id 1
Return C
Mixed C
13/02/2006
Martedi
regolazione
in corso
Ok
Menu
Ok
Martedi
Shock
The software supplied with the interface is used

to manage the regulator, both during data
acquisition and during modification of the
operating parameters.
In this way, it is possible to obtain information on
the status of the appliance even at a distance,
pick up temperature values and alarms
recorded in the backup files, pilot thermal
shocks, change the settings of various
parameters. This type of control is particularly
useful in the case of multiple installations with
one or more appliances, which are all controlled
by a single manager or maintenance technician.
Typical examples of this are hotels, public
buildings, schools, etc.
Mixed C
Martedi
Ok
Local transmission
Ok
Shock
Return C
Mixed C
13/02/2006
Martedi
regolazione
in corso
Ok
Menu
Ok
Menu
id 7
Return C
13/02/2006
regolazione
in corso
Shock
13/02/2006
regolazione
in corso
Ok
Menu
Ok
Shock
Return C
Ok
Menu
Ok
Daily data log
Device Parameters
Parametri
dispositivo
ID bus
Programme
Language
Set adjustment
Set disinfection
Set return
Set shock
Set max temp.
Time ON hh
Time OFF hh
Change done
Remote transmission
with analog modem
Return C
13/02/2006
regolazione
in corso
Ok
Menu
id 4
Mixed C
Legiomix
interface
id 8
1a
English
C
C
C
C
C
50
60
57
60
65
2 mm
3 mm
Date
Prgm T dis TR TR
Alarms
04-07-06 02
30 60 57 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
max min 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
()
Return sensor (Y/N)
Disinfection selection day
M T W T F S S
0
0
T wait
T min
T flux
T shock
T motor
T play
min
min
sec
min
min
min
2
30
0
5
60
2
Confirm
Hour
00-01
01-02
02-03
03-04
04-05
05-06
06-07
07-08
08-09
09-10
10-11
11-12
T.average
flow
ret
51
51
51
51
50
50
52
52
50
50
50
50
34
32
31
31
30
30
31
36
46
46
46
46
Hour
12-13
13-14
14-15
15-16
16-17
17-18
18-19
19-20
20-21
21-22
22-23
23-24
Help
T.average
flow
ret
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
51
58
58
51
Print
47
47
46
46
46
47
47
47
40
42
52
37
Store
Safety in use
As shown in the diagram opposite, temperatures of

more than 50C can cause burning very quickly.
For example, at 55C partial burning will occur in
approximately 30 seconds, while at 60C partial burning will occur
in approximately 5 seconds. These times are, on average, halved
for children and elderly people.
C
75
Full thickness
burns
70
65
Partial thickness
burns
60
Depending on the type of system and its intended use, together

with the relevant risk assessment, various devices can be
installed to safeguard users from scalding caused by hot tap water.
55
Safety conditions.
Max. exposure time
at a specific
temperature
50
45
0,1
10
100
1.000
10.000
Seconds
Anti-scald device for domestic hot water use, code 600140

Function
The purpose of the device is to cut off the flow of water if its temperature reaches the set value.
Designed for use in domestic hot water systems with electronic mixing valves with programmable thermal disinfection.
Installed directly at the point of use outlet, it prevents the hot water from scalding the user during the thermal disinfection
period (T>50C).
Materials: - body:
- springs:
Kv = 0,8 (m3/h)

stainless steel

Set temperature:
Dimensions
10 bar
5 bar
481C
B
Code
Connections:
Technical Specifications
1/2 F inlet
1/2 M outlet
C
A
600140 1/2
38
Application diagram
Operation
Open
Closed
Code 600140
Anti-scald device for domestic hot water use. 1/2 F inlet x 1/2 M outlet connections. Chrome plated brass body. Stainless
steel springs. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Set temperature 48C 1C.
CALEFFI
Controlled pressure zone kit
CALEFFI
series 640
01087/03 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The new series 640 zone kit provides, in a single assembly, all the
necessary components for installation in the zone manifold box,
making installation operations quicker and easier.
The kit consists of:
- A 4-way zone valve with thermo-electric actuator, equipped with
auxiliary micro-switch.
- A cast monoblock dual manifold.
- A differential by-pass.
- Two automatic air vents with hygroscopic safety caps.
The function of the differential by-pass is of particular importance,
as it controls the pressure of the manifold flow and return circuits
when the required flow rate varies. Variations of this nature may
take place following the closure of room temperature regulating
valves on the heat emitters, such as, for example, thermostatic or
electrothermal valves.
- Leaflet 01014 Dual manifolds. Series 356.
- Leaflet 01072 Zone valves. Series 676.
- Leaflet 01054 Automatic air vents. Series 5020.
Product range
Code 640542 Zone kit 4+4
Main connections 3/4M with union, branch connections 23 p.1,5M

Electrothermal actuator supply:

Start-up current:
Working current:
Working input:
Auxiliary micro-switch contacts rating:
Connections: - main;
- branches;
356
E
D
B

30%
Medium:
10 bar
1,2 bar
20 kPa (2000 mm w.g.)
2,5 bar
095C
Mod. Dep.

Max zone valve differential pressure:
Differential pressure of by-pass:
Max discharge pressure of air vent:
Temperature range:
brass, EN 12165 CW617N

brass, EN 1982 CB 753S
EPDM
stainless steel
PP
CALEFFI
Materials: - Auto air vent, zone valve and

by-pass bodies:
- Manifold body:
- Zone valve obturator:
- Hydraulic seals:
- Zone valve control spindle:
- Air vent float:
Dimensions
220V
0,6 A
13 mA
3W
0,8 A
3/4 M with union
23 p.1,5 M
A
F
Code Branches
640542 4+4
640562 6+6
640582 8+8
A
60
60
60
B
23 p. 1,5
23 p. 1,5
23 p. 1,5
C
126
126
126
D
40
40
40
E
405
485
565
F
142
142
142
Zone valve
Automatic air vents

Both air vents have automatic hygroscopic safety caps. These
devices permit air venting without manual intervention.
Upon contact with water, they automatically close off the discharge
passage.
P (kPa)
100
3000
30
50
2000 1800
1000
20
1600
1400
1200
18
16
14
12
900
800
700
600
9
8
7
6
400
300
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
40
0,4
30
0,3
10
500
200
100
1800
Installation
0,2
The zone kit, supplied with the control on the r.h. side come with
the air vents, differential by-pass and manifold pre-assembled.
G (l/h)
Series
Straight
By-pass
pmax *
(bar)
3,7
1,0
1,2
Kv (m3/h)
DN
3/4
678
Zone valve
The stainless steel control spindle has a double hydraulic seal
consisting of two EPDM O-rings. This means that the upper part of the
assembly can be removed even when the system is in operation.
0,5
2000
1600
1400
1200
900
1000
800
700
600
450
500
400
350
200
250
20
300
50
Dual manifold
These manifolds are made in a single monoblock casting without the
need for additional connections between the internal tubes.
This eliminates a possible cause of problems due to the joining of
metals with different thermal expansion coefficients.
The connections of the lateral branches are made at right angles to
the main headers to make fitting the connections easier.
* Max differential pressure guaranteed by the servo-control for correct operation

Manifold
Localized loss factor of inlet connections (F+R):
Localized loss factor of branches (F+R):
3,0
6,5
For the kit to operate

correctly, the flow of the
fluid must be in direction
indicated by the arrow
on the by-pass.
If special installation
conditions mean that
this requirement cannot
be met, dismantle the
by-pass and turn it
180 so that the flow is
in the correct direction.
356
40
Mod. Dep.
4000
5000
CALEFFI
90
80
70
60
356
Open
8000
7000
6000
Mod. Dep.
By-pass
10000 9000
CALEFFI
P (mm w.g.)
The zone valve must

always be installed on
the flow.
P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
10000
100
9000
90
8000
80
7000
70
6000
60
5000
Electrical connections to the thermo-electric actuator
L
50
4500
45
4000
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
1800
1600
18
1400
14
1200
12
2000
10
1000
900
800
700
600
450
500
400
350
300
250
180
200
160
140
120
90
100
80
70
60
16
50
220 V
50 Hz
Thermostat
20
1000
3 Watt
max 0,8 A
1 Brown
3 Black
2 Blue
4 Black
G (l/h)
Series 640
Controlled pressure zone kit, branches 4+4 (6+6 or 8+8). Manifold connections 3/4 M with union. Branch
connections 23p.1,5 M. Brass body. EPDM hydraulic seals. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Working temperature
range 095C. Comprising:
- Single cast monoblock dual manifold.
- 4-way zone valve. Maximum differential pressure 1,2 bar.
- 220V servomotor complete with auxiliary micro-switch. Start-up current 0,6 A. Working current 13 mA.
- Differential by-pass. Connections 3/4 M x 3/8 F. Differential pressure 20 kPa.
- Automatic air vents. Maximum discharge pressure 2,5 bar. Complete with hygroscopic safety caps.
CALEFFI

for heating and cooling
CALEFFI
series 152
01088/03 GB
Function
correct system flow temperature for either heating or cooling.
4-way mixing valve, servomotor, pump, flow temperature sensor,
outside temperature sensor, system temperature return sensor,
cooling surface humidity control sensor, temperature controller, flow
and return thermometers, unions for connecting to the primary and
secondary circuits, with preformed shell insulation.
Product range
Code 152650
Code 152651
Code 151000
Temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling with pump UPS 25-60
Temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling with pump UPS 25-80
- hydraulic seals:
- insulation shell:
grey cast iron GG19

EPDM
PPM
Medium:
By-pass regulating range:

30%
560C
6 bar
0,050,5 bar
- Primary and secondary circuit connections:
rating:
cycle time:
torque:
- Grundfos pump:
cod. 152650
cod. 152651
- Max ambient relative humidity:

- Ambient temperature:
- Protection class:
H (m w.g.)
6
4-way
- Mixing valve:
-
H (m w.g.)
6
060C
1 F with union
230V 50 Hz
10 VA
240 s
10 Nm
model UPS 25-60
model UPS 25-80
95%
040C
IP 42
UPS 25-60
code 152650
UPS 25-80
code 152651
5
4
2
2
1
0
Q (m3/h)
Power consumption
Speed
3
2
1
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,45
0,30
0,17
100
65
35
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
Q (m3/h)
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,13
1,04
0,69
250
220
140
2450
1500
1000
Dimensions

H
D
C*

L
CALEFFI
28
26
30
24
19
20
18
16
21
22
34
15
50
13
23
22
14
WATCH
12
24
32
17
12
11
60
70
40
80
30
90
+25%
-50%
10
-25%
A
1"
Code
152650/651
B
142
12
10
20 30 20
10
SYSTEM
FLOW
60
20 30 20
10
D
90
E
40
F
234
G
267
H
205
I
320
L
120
Hydraulic diagram
SYSTEM
RETURN
C
78
10
SR
SF
4-way mixing valve
60
Servomotor
Pump
Automatic by-pass
11
CALEFFI
26
19
20
18
50
21
13
23
22
14
WATCH
12
24
30
32
22
34
16
15
11
28
24
17
12
60
70
40
80
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
FLOW FROM
BOILER
BOILER
RETURN
BR
10
BF
Thermometer
10
20
18
CALEFFI
16
22
24
10
CALEFFI
01
4-way mixing valve.
03
Circulating pump:
code 152650 GRUNDFOS UPS 25-60
code 152651 GRUNDFOS UPS 25-80.
20
13
23
22
14
24
WATCH
11
06
Outside temperature sensor - connected via terminal.*
07
Circuit flow and return thermometers in pockets.
08
Connection point for remote transmission.
09
Limit control sensor for max relative humidity RH%.*
10
Room thermostat and indoor sensor (option for 152).*
11
Servomotor.
12
Return temperature sensor.
Flow temperature sensor.
50
60
70
40
80
30
90
-25%
11
+25%
* Max length of sensor cable: 150 m.
34
10
Differential by-pass valve with graduated scale.
05
32
22
16
15
04
30
24
17
12
21
Digital temperature controller for heating and cooling.
18
12
02
26
19
28
-50%
12


1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
The LED is lit when there is a risk of condensation forming

in the cooling function (the mixing valve is closed).
In the heating function, this lights up intermittently during the
screed drying phase.
The LED is lit in the cooling function.
10) Start or stop cooling selector. If the outside temperature

is higher than the set value, the cooling function is activated.
The characteristic curve is determined taking into account the
following parameters:
a)
Max flow temperature set on controller (item 9 PCB).

b)
Min flow temperature set on printed circuit board (item 5

PCB). Factory setting: 20C.
c)
Min outside temperature set on printed circuit board (item

1 PCB). Factory setting: -10C.
d)
Outside temperature limit for heating start in summer,

set on printed circuit board (item 3 PCB).
The LED is lit in the heating function.
Pump operating (ON): LED lit continuously.
Mixing valve closing: LED lit. The LED is lit continuously

when the controller is in the non-operative phase of
regulation, for example with TOutside between 18C and 24C
(see characteristic curve).
6)
7)

factory set values.

a)

remains on. The frost protection function remains active.
b)

Has no effect on the cooling function.
f)
9)
Calculation of slope change points

Thus: X = 18 - (-10) = 28C.
Thus: Y = 45 - 20 = 25C.
Controller de-activated (pump ON - mixing valve ON).

This function guarantees heating to the maximum
temperature value set on the printed circuit board (PCB).
Summer function. Cooling is activated if required by the

ambient conditions (TOutside greater than the value set at
point 10) and dependant on the clock settings.This activation
takes place after ten minute if the outside temperature is more
than 1C above the set value. With the exclusion of heating, the
frost protection function remains active.
Note: Normally, with the clock programme, the changeover from
heating to cooling takes place after the outside temperature has
been higher than the set value for at least half an hour. This
selector position can therefore be used to effect a changeover
to cooling.

X = Tmax X - 50% X = 18 - 0,5 28 = 4C
Y = Tmin Y + 80% Y = 20 + 0,8 25 = 40C

flow temperature, corresponding to the minimum
outside design temperature. Also enables optimisation of the
standard configuration set at the factory, allowing personal
control of the operation of the system.
criteria given by the characteristic curve.
circuit board (item 6 PCB) the controller will recalculate the new
characteristic curve. The maximum set temperature, however,
remains active. This selector also determines the characteristic
cooling curve, as it uses the inclination of the first line of the
curve, constructed for the heating (see characteristic curve graph).

X = Tmax X - 25% X = 18 - 0,25 28 = 11C
Y = Tmin Y + 55% Y = 20 + 0,55 25 = 33,75C
Point E is the cooling starting point, whose characteristic curve has

the same slope as section A-C.
Point E given by the intersection between: TX = value set in item 10
(24C) and TY = Tmin Y (20C).
60
55
50%
e)

comfort or set-back modes, determined by the two-channel
analogue clock, red indicator for heating times, blue indicator
for cooling times (item 13).

25%
d)

TFLOW (C)
c)
X Axis - Outside temperature - TX

Y Axis - Flow temperature - TY
50
B (-10;45)
45
D (4;40)
80%
40
55%
35
C (11;33,75)
30
25
E (24;20)
20
A (18;20)
15
10
5
35
30
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
Passive band
11)

Range of adjustment from -25% to +25%.
Factory setting: correction = 0%.
+25% Y = 0,25 25 = 6,25C.
This has no effect on the cooling function.
11) Printed circuit board

The surface of the printed circuit board (PCB) identifies the following
functions:
14
N
16
4(2)A
PS
4(2)A
MA
4(2)A
MC
230 V AC
4VA
OPEN
-10
OPEN
-10
-15
SM
18
30
20
40 35
UR
4,5
DIP
6,25C
45
65
22
KA
A
50
55
0 14
ON
4(2)A
12
SR
-20 -20
-5
F
KA
55
15
SE
PUMP
N
CLOSED
CLOSED
60
11
TA
230V AC
10A max
C
4(2)A
TA 1
1 2 3 4
TFLOW (C)
2501
INLET PUMP
MIXING VALVE
LP
17
t Typ 2125
N
13
ROOM
THERMOSTAT
T 40
DIGITAL
REGULATOR
65 1,5
6
max
NZ
10
50
40
100
RF(%)
35
30
25
20
20
15
10
-5
-10

Range of adjustment from 0% to -50%.
selected in the set-back range (blue indicator).
-25% Y = -0,25 25 = -6,25C.
The characteristic curve is thus moved downwards by 6,25C.
In addition, if, following this move, the flow temperature has to
be lower than the minimum heating start temperature (Tmin Y),
the following state will be obtained:
circulator OFF and mixing valve closed.
3)

limit, (Tmax X), adjustable from 14C to 22C.
An outside temperature higher than the set value will cause the
following state: circulator OFF and mixing valve closed. An outside
temperature 4C higher than the set value will cause activation of
the cooling, if this outside temperature is greater than the value set
on the front panel, item 10. - e.g.: To set on front panel=24C, To set
on PCB=22C.
Activation will take place at To=26C (22+4).
4)
Selection microswitch for screed setting drying program.

Factory setting: OFF (1234).
The program has a duration of seven days: during the first three
remaining four days, the flow temperature is raised and maintained
at the maximum temperature value set at point 9 on the front panel.
The activation of this program is displyed by the flashing LED
The frequency of flashing indicates the number of drying days
which have passed: one pulse every 8 seconds indicates
day 1, two pulses every 8 seconds indicates day 2, etc. If the
electricity has to be switched off in this phase, the controller will
start its drying cycle again from the beginning. The front panel
LED, point 1, continuously lit, indicates the end of the drying
program. At this point the microswitch should be turned to OFF.
Note: In manual mode
the screed drying procedure cannot be
activated.
When cooling, this series of microswitches has the function of
limiting the minimum temperature transmitted to the panel. This
minimum temperature depends on the characteristics of the
system and the type of air conditioning adopted. The different
activation configurations are shown below.
Factory configuration: 16C.
TFLOW (C)
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
d
-7
21
22
13)Daily or weekly analogue clock, used to select the heating and

cooling phases required with:
the red indicators for heating comfort and set-back and the blue
indicators to start and stop cooling.
Factory configuration: daily mode, minimum selection interval 15 min..
The changeover from daily to weekly mode, with a 60 min. minimum
drive ring to the required position;
1
to do this, turn the pointer clockwise
24
2
23
3
12
until the innermost notch coincides
with one of the outer notches.
Reposition the outer ring, making
sure that the reference day shown
9
3
on it falls in the operating sector
of the switching point.
6
ON
ON
DIP
DIP
DIP
DIP
ON
DIP
Flow temperature
limited 16C
1 2 3 4
17
Free flow
temperature
1 2 3 4
18
DIP
19
Screed
drying
1 2 3 4
20
16
15
14
ON
20
1 2 3 4
25
ON
30
1 2 3 4
35
ON
6,25C
15
18

0C to -20C. Factory setting: -15C.
comfort mode.
1 2 3 4
50
20
DIP
55
25
2)
ON
60
40
Minimum outside temperature (Tmin X), adjustable from -5C

to -20C, to which the set maximum flow temperature
corresponds (Tmax Y). Factory setting: -10C.
1 2 3 4
45
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
12)
1)
15
25
Flow temperature
limited 14C
Flow temperature
limited 12C
Flow temperature
limited 10C
13
10
12
11

(Tmin Y).
6)

In case a higher value has been set at point 7 of the front panel,
If various zones at risk of condensation are to be controlled, the

humidity sensor must be connected to a suitable interface kit
(transformer, converter and humidity sensor). Up to 12 converters
plus sensor can be connected to a single transformer.
TRANSFORMER
code 150052
7) NZ
Neutral zone regulation selector.

If the flow temperature variation remains within the temperature
value selected in the neutral zone, the mixing valve remains
inactive.
When cooling, the neutral zone automatically takes the value 1,5C.
Example with factory setting values:

flow temperature calculated on the characteristic curve,
Thus:
TY = (40 - 20) = 20C
T = 20 0,8 0,3 = 4,8C
Treturn set Y = 40 - 4,8 = 35,2C.
If the return temperature measured (Treturn Y) is Treturn
it upwards or downwards, to move the return temperature to the
set value.
This continuous comparison prevents room overheating caused
by gratuitous heat sources modifying the heating load.
There is no effect on the cooling function.
TFLOW (C)
50
45
40
Treturn 35,2C
30
25
20
15
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)

It can be used to shut down the pump of the primary circuit or
the boiler.
10) UR
220 V
24 V
UR
SENSOR RH%
code 150050
SENSOR RH%
code 150050
Humidity sensor control

At the start of each cooling season, the operating condition of the
sensor should be checked by placing a damp pad on its surface;
this operation should cause the mixing valve to close and the yellow
LED, point 1 on the front panel, to light.
Positioning humidity sensor
The umidity sensor must be positioned at the point where there is
most risk of the formation of condensation, depending on the
characteristics of the system. It must be positioned with the printed
part upward, according to the diagrams shown below.
Fix ends E, taking care that the central part adheres perfectly to the
manifold or to the piping.
Upper side: printed circuit
Lower side: sited on the cooling surface
The sensor should be

fixed to the manifold
installed in the position
where the RH% relative
humidity value has not
to exceed the safety
limits. Fixing in ensured
by inserting the two
straps contained in the
package through the
suitable holes on the
sensor.
55
25
Layouts for the correct positioning of the max RH% limit sensor.
60
35
SR
LH side
terminal strip
8) RF(%) Return sensor regulation selector.

the difference in temperature between flow and return (T).
T = TY %set 0,3.
CONVERTER
code 150051
1 2 3 4 5 6
10
5)
Relative humidity sensor wiring. This sensor is used to

detect the limiting value of relative humidity to prevent
condensation on the cooling surface.
This is calibrated for RH= 8085%. When the calibrated value
is reached, this will cause the following state: mixing valve
closed, pump ON.
16) C
Summer - winter circuit changeover valve wiring.
F
This connection enables the 3-way valve to be activated
automatically for hydraulic deviation between the boiler circuit
and the chiller circuit. This takes place after the outside
temperature has risen above the value set at point 10 for at least
half an hour.
Ten minutes later, the regulating unit pump is activated.
RH side
terminal strip
17) KA Chiller activation wiring. This activation takes place in the

same way as in point 16.
Boiler circuit open
F
KA
Chiller circuit open
KA
The maximum heat energy that the panel can produce in relation
with the climate values recorded, can be reached by controlling the
below outlined parameters.
CALEFFI
28
3032
2426
19
20
18
17
16
22
22
14
60
23
13
WATCH
12
24
34
15
21
12
11
7080
4050
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
10
4
5
- Minimum flow temperature on the characteristic curve, which can

be selected through the microswitch (point 4 on the back panel).
- Sensor (code 150050) controlled maximum RH% limit.
- Room temperature controlled through room thermostat (code 151000).
- Room temperature and relative humidity controlled through a
dedicated fan-coil).
N.B.: When installing the RH% limit sensor according to the
diagrams, as indicated, possible formation of condensation on the
surface. In areas where the max RH% limit sensor is installed,
adequate ventilation must always be present.
11) SE
Outside sensor wiring. Connect the outside sensor using

2-core cable (2x0,75) to the connector provided on the unit.
18)
Remote data transmission connector.
SE
Connecting
wiring
12) SR
SE
Connector
LH side
terminal strip
Table of sensor resistance values*

Outside sensor
Return sensor wiring. Factory fitted.
*excluding max RH% limit sensor

C
Ohm
-15 11.382
-12 9.912
-10 8.933
-6 7.439
-3 6.492
-2 6.206
0 5.632
C
0
2
4
6
8
10
15
Ohm
5.632
5.187
4.742
4.347
4.000
3.553
2.971
C
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Ohm
2.431
2.000
1.655
1.376
1.150
966
815
C
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
Ohm
690
587
501
430
370
319
276
C
90
95
100
Ohm
240
209
183

14)
Pump shut-down variant. Sometimes the temperature

regulating unit is installed in a system where there may be
one or more users with different usage requirements. In this case,
for users requiring ON/OFF operation, it may be necessary to
shut down the unit circulator.
normal wiring.
Safety
If the flow or outside sensor shows an ohm resistance value outside
its working range (damaged or disconnected sensor), the following
Safety thermostat code 622001
Additional for use with underfloor heating systems.

Pump shut-down wiring
RH side
terminal strip
User auxiliary contact

6
PS
MA
MC
Brown
Unit 152 pump
Pump shut-down variant
5 55C
- Factory setting:
50C
- Protection class:
IP 40
- Contacts load:
(C-1) 10(2,5)A / 250V
- Contacts load:
(C-2)
1(1)A / 250V
+C
C
1
2
CALEFFI
26
24
19
20
18
16
21
22
30
32
34
15
13
23
22
14
WATCH
12
24
28
17
12
11
50
60
70
40
80
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
10
4
5

When the selector, point 6 on the front panel, is positioned
to
or
, there are two types of intervention:
When this value is reached, it will return to the inactive status.
Anti-seize function
If the pump remains inactive for twenty four hours, the following
program automatically comes into operation, with:
mixing valve open for 30 seconds,
mixing valve closed for 30 seconds,
pump ON for 60 seconds.
When this function is operating, it cannot be interrupted.
Operation of the room thermostat

Depending on the time periods for comfort and set-back selected
on the clock and the room temperature setting, it will read the actual
room temperature. On the basis of this parameter, it will make any
necessary modification to the characteristic curve (A) for the
purpose of accelerating operation and preventing excessive
heating or cooling of the room.
A difference of 1C in the room temperature causes a move of the
characterisitc curve equal to 7C of the outside temperature, with
For example, if Troom set = 20C and Troom measured = 19C, than the
difference of 1C will cause a movement of the characteristic curve
of 7C towards the left (B). The flow temperature will consequently
be raised. In the case of a negative difference, the movement will
take place on the curve C.
This behaviour is applicable for a maximum difference of 3C in the
room temperature.
remains active.
reduced by 2C, thus defining Tset set-back.
Whenever the measured room temperature falls below Tset set-back,
the initial characteristic curve (A) will be restored with the set-back
correction set at point 12 on the front panel.
TFLOW (C)

60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
Manual control
10
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
ten
TOUTSIDE (C)
be
ng
pe
ra t
nh
u r f
r Fu b o d e
ei z
Options
TA1
20
TA
18
CALEFFI
22
TA 1
TA
LH side
terminal strip

(2x0,75) to the terminal strip of the regulator PCB, as shown in the
diagram below.
Room thermostat, code 151000.

The regulating unit can be
supplemented with a room
thermostat, able to adjust the
value of the flow temperature
makes it possible to take account
of gratuitous heat gains, by
refining the value of the flow
temperature, with optimum results
in terms of comfort and energy
saving. In cooling conditions, the
setting on the thermostat should
be increased by 2C.
a ch
Zu
Close
Ferm
e
15
Hand schliee
on
n
tv
Mis
ch
e
ft
au
Vo r l
To carry out adjustment:

- Remove the servomotor fixing screws.
- Lift the servomotor. This gives access
to the control knob.
Refer to the information given on
the knob itself.
20
Auf
Open
Ouvrir
Beipass n
ich
Room thermostat
16
24
WARNING - if the connecting cable between the thermostat

and the control unit is not sheathed, it must be run in its own
ducting.

Application diagram
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
CALEFFI
PN 10
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI

10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
CALEFFI
PN 10
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
28
3032
2426
19
20
18
17
16
22
60
13
23
22
14
WATCH
12
24
34
15
21
12
11
7080
4050
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
10
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Code 152650
Temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling. Connections 1" F with unions. Body in grey cast iron GG19.
Hydraulic seals in EPDM. Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Ambient temperature from 0 to 40C. Regulating
temperature from 5 to 60C (factory settings: heating 45C, cooling 16C). Maximum ambient relative humidity 95%.
Consisting of: 4-way mixing valve; mixing valve servomotor with the following characteristics: power supply 230 V
50 Hz, rating 10 VA, cycle time 240 s, torque 10 Nm. Pump UPS 25-60. By-pass valve with regulating scale
from 0,05 to 0,5 bar. Temperature controller with two channel clock, for daily/weekly programming. Flow
temperature sensor. Return temperature sensor. Outside temperature sensor, connectable to terminal.
Maximum RH% limit control sensor. Flow and return pocket thermometers, scale 060C. Automatic
summer/winter cycle changeover. Provided with connection for remote data transmission. Protection
class IP 42. Complete with PPM insulation.
Code 152651
Temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling. Connections 1" F with unions. Body in grey cast iron GG19.
Hydraulic seals in EPDM. Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Ambient temperature from 0 to 40C. Regulating
temperature from 5 to 60C (factory settings: heating 45C, cooling 16C). Maximum ambient relative humidity 95%.
Consisting of: 4-way mixing valve; mixing valve servomotor with the following characteristics: power supply 230 V
50 Hz, rating 10 VA, cycle time 240 s, torque 10 Nm. Pump UPS 25-80. By-pass valve with regulating scale from 0,05
channel clock, for daily/weekly programming. Flow temperature sensor. Return temperature sensor. Outside
temperature sensor, connectable to terminal. Maximum RH% limit control sensor. Flow and return pocket
thermometers, scale 060C. Automatic summer/winter cycle changeover. Provided with connection for remote
data transmission. Protection class IP 42. Complete with PPM insulation.
Code 151000
CALEFFI
Safety relief valve for solar systems
CALEFFI
253 series
cert. n 0003
01089/06 GB
ISO 9001
General
The safety relief valves manufactured by Caleffi are produced in
compliance with the essential safety requirements laid down by
Directive 97/23/EC of the European Parliament and the Council of
the European Union for the harmonisation of member States with
Function
111 5
These safety relief valves are used to control pressure in the

primary circuits of solar heating systems.
When the calibrated pressure is reached, the valve opens to
release the fluid into the atmosphere and prevents the pressure in
the system from reaching levels that might damage the solar
collectors and equipment installed.
These particular series of products have been specially made and
certified to work at high temperature with a glycol medium.
Product range
253 series Safety relief valve for solar systems
size 1/2 F x 3/4 F
Dimensions
Materials: - body:
brass EN 12165 CW 617N, chrome plated
- control spindle:
- obturator seal:
high resistance elastomer
- spring:
stainless UNI 3823
- control knob:
PA6G30
Medium:

50%
PN 10
-30160C
Connections:
IV
TV according to SV 100 7.7
N TV 01.SOLAR 02.146.p
PED category:
Approval:
Nominal pressure:
Temperature range:
1/2 F x 3/4 F
A
Performance
Opening overpressure:
Closing differential:
Discharge capacity:
Code
Set pressure
253043
3 bar
10%
20%
50 kW
253044
4 bar
253046
6 bar
253048
8 bar
253040
10 bar
Code
25304.
A
1/2"
B
3/4"
C
24
D
70
E
33,5
Weight (kg)
0,22
Operating principe
The obturator (1), opposed by a
set spring (2), raises on reaching
the setting pressure and fully
opens the outlet. The setting
pressure is chosen according to
the
maximum
permissible
pressure in the system.
The diameter of the outlet
connection (3) is greater in order
to help discharge the required
potential.
As the pressure decreases there
is the opposite action, with the
valve subsequently reclosing
within the set tolerances.
2
1
3
Discharge pipework
The discharge pipework from the safety relief valve must be fitted
in such a way as not to prevent the correct operation of the valve
and not to cause damage or injury.
In accordance with current legislation, the safety relief valve
discharge must be visible and
carried in suitable collection
pipework. The glycol medium must
therefore be drained off into a
specific container.
As shown in the diagram, it is
advisable to install a tundish
direcly in the discharge pipework.
Application diagram
Temperature and glycol

In solar systems, heating fluid of the primary circuit contains glycol
as additive and operates at high temperatures; to take account of
these particular operating conditions, the obturator seal of safety
valve is in high resistance elastomer.
The knob is in plastic material especially resistant to increases in
temperature and to UV rays, in the case of outdoor installations.
Chrome plating
The valve body is chrome plated to protect it from the aggression
of dirt and moisture, in the case of outdoor installations of solar
heating systems.
Certification
253 series safety relief valves are certified for specific use in solar
heating systems by the certifying body TV, in accordance with
standard SV 100 Ed. 10.01 par. 7.7.
Installation
The safety relief valves for solar systems must be installed near the
point in the circuit where the system is filled, before expansion
vessel.
Make sure that there are no shut-off devices between the valve and
the rest of the system.
The safety relief valves can be fitted vertically or horizontally, but
not upside down.
This prevents deposits of impurities from affecting correct
functioning.
The safety relief valves must be installed in line with the flow
direction indicated by the arrow on the valve body.
253 series
Safety relief valve for solar heating systems. CE mark as per Directive 97/23/EC. TV certified for solar systems. 1/2 F x 3/4 F
threaded connections. Brass body. Chrome plated. Diaphragm and obturator seal in high resistance elastomer. Spring in steel
UNI 3823. Control knob in PA6G30. Temperature range: -30160C. Nominal pressure: PN 10. Calibration setting: 3 bar
(3, 4, 6, 8, 10 bar). Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol: 50%.
CALEFFI
Inspection box and wall port

in plastic
series 362 - 363
CALEFFI
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01091/04 GB
Function
The new plastic shock resistant box was specially designed for
single and dual manifolds in combination with various types of
zone valves. The vent openings in the cover are specially
designed to prevent the formation of marks on walls. The
surface finish of the door is suitable for painting.
Product range
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
362036
362056
362073
363036
363056
363073
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
plastic
plastic
plastic
plastic
plastic
plastic
box
box
box
wall port
wall port
wall port
Code 360001 Mounting brackets for 1 distribution

manifolds, 350 and 592 series; for 3/4 and 1
distribution manifolds, 351 and 598 series.
Comes complete with two long and two short brackets.
Code 360002 Mounting brackets for 3/4 349 series,

350 and 592 distribution manifold.
Comes complete with two long and two short brackets.
Internal dimensions 270 x 360 mm, depth 80/100

Internal dimensions 270 x 360
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Code 362001 Mounting brackets for single sided

dual manifolds 356, 357 series and zone kit
640 series.
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
Choice of casing for use with series 356 dual manifolds
356
. Maximum number of outlets
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
series 5020
CALEFFI
code 356050
356
For use with:
shut-off valves
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
362036 - 363036 270 x 360 mm
6+6
6+6
4+4
4+4
4+4
4+4
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
10+10
12+12
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
10+10
12+12
10+10
10+10
12+12
10+10
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
362036 - 363036 270 x 360 mm
2+2
2+2
2+2
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
8+8
8+8
8+8
6+6
6+6
6+6
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
10+10
12+12
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
Code
Dimensions
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
series 5020
CALEFFI
code 356050
356
For use with:
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
series 633+635 shut-off valves
Code
Dimensions
series 6480
+ 6490
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
series 5020
CALEFFI
code 356050
356
For use with:
shut-off valves
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
362036 - 363036 270 x 360 mm
2+2
2+2
2+2
2+2
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
10+10
8+8
8+8
8+8
6+6
6+6
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
10+10
12+12
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
3/4
3/4
3/4
Code
Dimensions
Code
Dimensions
3/4
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
Mod. Dep.
shut-off valves
CALEFFI
series 678
Mod. Dep.
series 5020
CALEFFI
code 356050
356
For use with:
362036 - 363036 270 x 360 mm
4+4
4+4
2+2
2+2
2+2
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
10+10
10+10
8+8
8+8
8+8
6+6
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
10+10
12+12
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
3/4
3/4
2+2
2+2
10+10
10+10
8+8
8+8
8+8
6+6
10+10
12+12
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
2+2
2+2
8+8
8+8
6+6
6+6
4+4
4+4
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
8+8
8+8
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
2+2
2+2
Mod. Dep.
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
356
356
Mod. Dep.
356
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
CALEFFI
356
3/4
4+4
356
4+4
356
3/4
356
6+6
6+6
4+4
4+4
4+4
10+10
10+10
10+10
8+8
8+8
8+8
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
Mod. Dep.
356
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
356
8+8
10+10
356
8+8
356
2+2
2+2
2+2
10+10
8+8
6+6
6+6
6+6
4+4
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
CALEFFI
Choice of casing for use with 357 series single sided dual manifolds
Mod. Dep.
357
. Maximum number of outlets.
For use with:
CALEFFI
code 356050
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
357
Code
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
Mod. Dep.
shut-off valves
Dimensions
357
357
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
357
362036 - 363036 270 x 360 mm
3+3
2+2
2+2
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
6+6
5+5
5+5
4+4
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
6+6
6+6
6+6
For use with:
code 356050
shut-off valves
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
PN 10
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
PN 10
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
PN 10
357
357
357
Mod. Dep.
PN 10
357
PN 10
series 633 + 635
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
362036 - 363036 270 x 360 mm
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
4+4
4+4
3+3
3+3
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
6+6
6+6
5+5
5+5
Code
Dimensions
For use with:
code 356050
shut-off valves
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
357
357
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
Mod. Dep.
357
357
series 648950
Code
Dimensions
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
362036 - 363036 270 x 360 mm
2+2
2+2
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
4+4
4+4
4+4
3+3
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
6+6
6+6
6+6
6+6
For use with:
code 356050
shut-off valves
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
357
357
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
357
357
series 678
Code
Dimensions
362036 - 363036 270 x 360 mm
Mod. Dep.
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
4+4
2+2
2+2
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
5+5
4+4
5+5
4+4
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
6+6
6+6
6+6
6+6
Choice of casing for use with 350
and 592 series
distribution manifolds. Maximum number of outlets.
For use with:
series 5020
shut-off valves
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
362036 - 363036 270 x 360 mm
6+6
6+6
6+6
6+6
4+4
4+4
4+4
4+4
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
10+10
10+10
10+10
9+9
8+8
8+8
8+8
7+7
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
14+14
14+14
13+13
13+13
12+12
12+12
11+11
11+11
Code
Dimensions
For use with:
series 5020
shut-off valves
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
series 632
Code
series 5995
Dimensions
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
7+7
7+7
7+7
5+5
6+6
5+5
6+6
5+5
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
11+11
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
8+8
9+9
8+8
For use with:
series 5020
shut-off valves
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
series 633
series 635
Code
code 648018
series 5995
Dimensions
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
11+11
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
8+8
9+9
8+8
For use with:
series 5020 shut-off valves
series 6470
series 5995
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
8+8
7+7
7+7
6+6
7+7
6+6
6+6
5+5
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
11+11
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
8+8
10+10
9+9
Code
Dimensions
Choice for use with 350
and 592 series
distribution manifolds.
Maximum number of outlets.
For use with:
series 5020
series 6480
shut-off valves
code 648018
series 6490
series 5995
Code
Dimensions
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
11+11
10+10
10+10
10+10
10+10
8+8
10+10
9+9
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
For use with:
series
series 676
Code
shut-off valves
series 5995
Dimensions
362056 - 363056 330 x 560 mm
8+8
8+8
8+8
8+8
7+7
7+7
7+7
6+6
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
11+11
11+11
11+11
11+11
11+11
10+10
10+10
10+10
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
11+11
11+11
11+11
11+11
11+11
10+10
10+10
10+10
For use with:
series 5020
shut-off valves
series 677
code 648018
series 5995
Code
Dimensions
362073 - 363073 360 x 730 mm
Use
The type of system to be adopted, whether with single or dual manifolds, must be known for proper positioning of casings.
Positioning of code 362001 bracket
Dual manifolds mounting

Use bracket code 362001 to fit
series 356 distribution manifold in the box
by fixing it to the central ridge at the bottom of the box.
It is important that the space between the edge of the
box and the anchor ridge is greater on the side where a
motor for a zone valve is located, if fitted.
Examples of positioning serie 356 dual manifolds:

with series 678 zone valve
Mod. Dep.
CALEFFI
01 NP
CALEFFI
IFFELAC
The bracket fasteners marked by a

raised point (in red in the diagram) are
for the positioning of the brackets for
fixing manifolds with 50 mm spacing.
The fasteners without a raised point are
for the manifolds with 35 mm spacing.
IFFELAC
.peD .doM
IFFELAC
Use code 360001 brackets for 1

distribution manifolds, 350 and 592 series;
for 3/4 and 1 distribution manifolds, 351
and 598 series. Use code 360002
brackets for 3/4 349 series, 350 and 592
distribution manifold.
Make sure that the space between the
edge of the box and the manifolds is
greater on the pipe outlet side. If zone
valves are fitted, the greater space
should be left on the servo-control side.
.peD .doM
.peD .doM
Distribution manifold mounting
653
653
653
356
simple
Positioning of code 360001 bracket
Installation
The box is supplied with a series of spacers to set
the depth of the space available inside at between
80 mm and 100 mm.
The spacer is supplied for a depth of 100 mm. (fig. 1).

It can be cut or broken at the point indicated (fig. 2)
to provide a depth of 80 mm. (fig. 3).
The angle brackets for anchoring the box in the
wall can be fixed at the bottom (fig. 4) or to the
frame (fig. 5). They can also be set in a vertical or
horizontal position. The particular way in which they
are set will prevent them from moving while they are
being cemented in.
10
0m
m
The box comes complete with guards to place on the sides where
no piping passes to prevent mortar from falling on them and
dirtying them when the casing is set into the mortar.
Guards are provided for both the narrow and the broad side, to be
fitted depending on whether the casing is positioned horizontally or
vertically.
80
mm
The guards are fitted with special fasteners to fix them to the bottom
of the box and it is therefore best to fit them before placing the
casing in the wall.
After the components have been positioned and tested for leaks,
the guard (supplied with the casing) should be positioned before
cement operations commence to prevent cement from entering the
box and dirtying the contents.
The casing lends itself easily to methods normally employed on

building sites for embedding. For example, once the distributor
manifold has been installed with all the accessories and leak tests
have been performed, the proper depth is measured and it is
assembled from the two sides. It can all be then cemented in.
The shape of the frame and of the anchoring

brackets (Fig. 10 and Fig. 10a) ensures
reliable anchoring in the cement and will
prevent cracks and breaks in the wall near
the frame.
10
10a
A grid (Fig. 11) over the whole of the back

of the box ensures proper anchoring in the
plaster.
11
The box comes with an anti-crush bar which

must be removed after the cement has set.
12
A special fastening system for the cover

ensures rapid fitting and secure closing no
matter how many times it is opened and
closed. The screw can be turned with
either a 5 mm. Allen wrench or a coin
(fig. 13 fig. 13a). Turning the screw results
in controlled deformation of the screw hole
which ensures that it tightens and locks
(fig. 13b).
13b
13a
14
30 mm
The cover allows for a 30 mm depth

tolerance for possible errors in the wall
finish.
13
The ventilation holes in the cover are specially shaped so that air exits from the cover
at a speed and in a direction which takes it immediately away from the cover. This
prevents the formation of ugly marks on the wall.
Installation of 363 series wall port

Another typical type of installation is where
a recess is cut directly into the wall (fig. 16)
and consequently only the series 363
inspection wall port is required. As in the
case already described (fig. 5), the
anchoring brackets are fixed directly to the
inside of the frame.
16
15
When installed vertically box code 362073 has a width of 360 mm,
which is the same as the length of box code 362036 installed
horizontally; this allows the two boxes to be positioned one above
the other for particularly complex systems.
17
Application diagram for code 362073 + 362036 boxes
Manual valve
Thermostatic valve
Air vent valve
Zone valve
Series 362
Inspection plastic box with ventilation openings.
Colour white RAL 9010. Internal dimensions ( h x b x d ).
Code 362036 mm 360 x 270 x 100/80.
Code 362056 mm 560 x 330 x 100/80.
Code 362073 mm 730 x 360 x 100/80.
Series 363
Inspection plastic wall port with ventilation openings.
Colour white RAL 9010. Internal dimensions ( h x b x d ).
Code 363036 mm 360 x 270 x 100/80.
Code 363056 mm 560 x 330 x 100/80.
Code 363073 mm 730 x 360 x 100/80.
Code 360001
Mounting brackets for 1 distribution manifolds, 350 and 592 series; for 3/4 and 1 distribution manifolds, 351 and 598 series. In
each package: two long and two short brackets.
Code 360002
Mounting brackets for 3/4 349, 350 and 592 series distribution manifold. In each package: two long and two short brackets.
Code 360001
Mounting brackets for single sided dual manifolds 356, 357 series and zone kit 640 series.
CALEFFI
High performance, anti-scald,

thermostatic mixing valves
CALEFFI
series 5213
01092/04 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
In some domestic hot water distribution systems there is a need to
protect the most vulnerable people against scalding caused by hot
water, such as, for example, in hospitals, in nursing homes or in
schools.
This particular series of thermostatic mixing valves has been
specially designed for these applications and installation at the
point of use.
These thermostatic mixing valves ensure enhanced thermal
performance. They are able to accurately control the temperature
of the mixed water supplied to the user in case of variations in the
inlet supply pressure or temperature, or in the flow rate.
They are designed with a special anti-scald function which
immediately shuts off the flow of water discharging from the mixed
water outlet in the event of a failure of cold supply.
(The 5213 series thermostatic mixing valves are certified to UK
specification NHS D 08, standard BS 7942: 2000 and standards EN
1111 and EN 1287).
Product Range
Anti scald thermostatic mixing valve, complete with filters and check valves on the inlets
Anti scald thermostatic mixing valve, complete with filters and check valves on the inlets
30 50C
2C

10 bar
5 bar

85C
6:1
Minimum temperature difference between the inlet hot water and the
outlet mixed water to ensure anti scald performance:
10C
Minimum flow rate for stable operation:
4 l/min
Connections:
3/4 M with union tail piece
15 and 22 mm with union tail piece and compression ends

Temperature stability:
C
B
Shutter:
Springs:
Seals:
Cap:
anti dezincification alloy

PPO
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
Materials:- Body:
Dimensions
Size 3/4
Sizes 15 and 22 mm
for copper pipe
Code 521303
Code 521315/322
A
A
Code
A
B
C
D
E
F Weight (kg)
521303 3/4 66,5 133 130 81,5 48,5 0,75
B
C
D
A
E
Code
521315 15 67,5 135 105 56
521322 22 75 150 106 57
F Weight (kg)
49 0,50
49 0,60
Temperature exposure time
In systems producing domestic hot water with storage, in order to

avoid the dangerous infection known as Legionella, the hot water
must be stored at a temperature of the least 60C. At this
temperature it is certain that the growth of the bacteria causing this
infection will be totally eliminated.
At this temperature, however, the water cannot be used directly.
As shown on the diagram opposite, temperatures of more than
50C can cause burning very quickly. For example, at 55C partial
burning will occur in approximately 30 seconds, while at 60C
partial burning will occur in approximately 5 seconds. This time
may be reduced by 50 percent or more for children and elderly
people.
C
75
In view of the above, it is necessary to install a thermostatic mixing

valve which can:
reduce the temperature at the point of use to a value lower than
that of the storage and make it suitable for sanitary use;
maintain the temperature constant while the incoming pressure
and temperature conditions vary;
have an anti scald safety function in case of failure of the cold
water supply.
The diagram opposite
the bacteria Legionella
as
a
Pneumophila
function of changes in
the temperature of the
water in which it is
contained. In order to
ensure proper thermal
disinfection,
the
temperature must not
fall below 60C.
65
Partial
thickness
burns
60
55
Safety conditions.
Maximum exposure time
at a given temperature.
50
45
0,1
10
100
1.000
10.000
Seconds
Exposure time to receive partial burns
70
60
50
40
30
Full
thickness
burns
70
Optimum temperature
Temperature
Adults
Children 0-5 years
70C
1s
--
65C
2s
0,5 s
60C
5s
1s
55C
30 s
10 s
50C
5 min
2,5 min
20
10
Operating principle
HOT
COLD
Code 521303
The thermostatic mixing valve mixes incoming hot and
cold water in such a way as to maintain the temperature
of the mixed water constant. A thermostatic element is
fully immersed in the mixed water flow. As this expands
or contracts it causes the internal shutter to move and
thereby controls the flow of incoming hot and cold
water. If the temperature or pressure of the incoming
water changes, the internal element reacts immediately
to restore the original water temperature at the outlet.
The materials used in the construction of the mixer
eliminate the problem of jamming caused by lime
deposits. All the functional parts are made of a special
anti-scale material, with a low friction coefficient, which
guarantees high performance and long life.
Anti scald safety function
As a safety measure, in case of failure of the cold water
supply, the valve immediately shuts off the flow of mixed
water. This prevents dangerous burns. This performance
is guaranteed if there is a minimum temperature
difference between the inlet hot water and the outlet
mixed water of 10C. In case of failure of the hot water
supply, the valve shuts off the mixed water, to prevent
dangerous thermal shocks (performance in compliance
with UK standards NHS D 08 and BS 7942: 2000).
With compression ends
MIXED
Commissioning
Flow curves
P (bar)
1
15 mm
P (m w.g.)
3/4 - 22 mm
9
8
7
6
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
10
0,45
0,40
0,35
0,30
4,5
4
3,5
3
0,25
2,5
0,2
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
0,1
0,09
0,08
0,07
0,06
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,05
0,045
0,040
0,035
0,030
0,025
0,5
0,25
0,2

The temperature is set at the desired value by
turning the nut on the top of the valve using the
socket set in the protective cap.
Given the particular use of this type of mixing valve,
the following table shows the recommended
maximum outlet water temperatures to prevent
scalding.
Code
521303
521315
521322
3/4
15 mm
22 mm
Kv (m3/h)
1,7
1,5
1,7
45
40
Appliance
Bidet
Shower
Wash basin
Bath tub
0,1
50
35
30
25
18
20
16
14
12
10
4,5
3,5
2,5
1,8
1,6
1,4
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
1,2
0,018
0,016
0,014
0,012
0,45
0,40
0,35
0,30
0,02
0,01
In view of the special purpose of the thermostatic

mixing valve, it must be commissioned in
accordance with current regulations by qualified
personnel
using
appropriate
temperature
measuring equipment. Use of a digital thermometer
is recommended for measuring the temperature of
the mixed water.
Q (l/min)
Max. Temp.
38C
41C
41C
44C
Once the temperature has been set it can then be

locked at the desired value using a tamper-proof
locking nut.
Use
Given their flow characteristics, the Caleffi 5213 series thermostatic mixing valves
are suitable for point of use applications or to supply a limited number of outlets.
As a consequence, the flow rate through the mixing valve is generally the same as
that at the final outlet. For best performance the mixing valve must have a minimum
flow rate of 4 l/min.
The domestic water system must be sized in accordance with the current legislation
concerning the nominal flow rates of each outlet.
Public buildings, hospitals, nursery schools

The risk of scalding is very high in these types of applications due to the type of
users: children, the elderly and the sick.
In these installations, the two supply networks of hot water from a storage and cold
water can have different origin and operate at different pressures.
In the event of failure of the cold or hot water, the thermostatic mixing valve will
immediately shut off the flow of mixed water to prevent possible scalding or thermal
shocks.
View of temperature adjustment
Selecting the correct size of the mixing valve

Note the design flow rate, taking into account the possibility of simultaneous use of
appliances, select the size of mixing valve by checking the loss of pressure that will
be produced from the graph. In this case, check the available inlet pressure, the
loss of pressure in the system downstream of the mixing valve and the residual
pressure required by the appliances.
Installation
Before installing the mixing valve, the pipework must be flushed to ensure that no
circulating impurities can compromise its operation. It is always advisable to install
suitable filters at water connections with the mains.
The 5213 series thermostatic mixing valves are fitted with strainers on the hot and
cold water inlets. The 5213 series thermostatic mixing valves must be installed
according to the diagrams and instructions contained in the instruction sheet or in
this leaflet.
The 5213 series mixing valves can be fitted in any position either vertically or
horizontally.
The following markings are provided on the body of the valve:
the letter H on the hot water inlet
the letter C on the cold water inlet
the word MIX on the mixed water outlet.
Fitting temperature adjustment cap
Temperature adjustment cap in place
Check valves
In order to prevent undesirable backsiphonage, check valves must be installed in
systems with thermostatic mixing valves
The 5213 series thermostatic mixing valves are supplied with built-in check valves
at the hot and cold water inlets.
Locking adjustment spindle with locking nut
Point of use installation
Multiple use installation
MIX
COLD
HOT
Bathroom inlet installation
MIX
COLD
HOT
Code 521303
Anti-scald, thermostatic mixing valve. Certified to standards: NHS D08, BS 7942 - EN 1111 and EN 1287. 3/4 M
connections. Body in anti dezincification alloy. Chrome plated. Shutter in PPO. Springs in stainless steel. Seals in EPDM.
Cap in ABS. Maximum working temperature: 85 C. Temperature setting range: 30C to 50C. Temperature stability: 2C.
Maximum working pressure (static): 10 bar. Maximum working pressure (dynamic): 5 bar. Maximum inlet pressure ratio
(H/C or C/H): 6:1. With anti-scald safety function and complete with inlet strainers and check valves.
Series 5213 . .
Anti-scald, thermostatic mixing valve. Certified to standards: NHS D08, BS 7942 - EN 1111 and EN 1287. 15 mm
( 22 mm) compression ends. Body in anti dezincification alloy. Chrome plated. Shutter in PPO. Springs in stainless steel.
Seals in EPDM. Cap in ABS. Maximum working temperature: 85 C. Temperature setting range: 30C to 50C.
Temperature stability: 2C. Maximum working pressure (static): 10 bar. Maximum working pressure (dynamic): 5 bar.
Maximum inlet pressure ratio (H/C or C/H): 6:1. With anti-scald safety function and complete with inlet strainers and check
valves.
CALEFFI
Set point regulating unit for

radiant panels
series 162
cert. n 0003
01093/04 GB
ISO 9001
Function
The set point regulating unit is designed to maintain the flow temperature of
fluid distributed in a low temperature underfloor radiant panel system constant
at the set temperature.
It is preassembled with distribution manifolds in a box to guarantee simple
functioning, safety and easy installation.
Product range
Code 16263
Set point regulating unit preassembed with distribution

manifolds and box with pump UPS 25-60
Code 16264
Set point regulating unit preassembed with distribution

manifolds and box with pump UPS 25-80
Code 162600
Set point regulating unit with pump UPS 25-60
Code 162601
Set point regulating unit with pump UPS 25-80
- Piping materials:
- Setting temperature range:
- Max. primary inlet temperature:
- Max. pressure:
- Temperature gauge scale:
- brass EN 12165 CW617N,

- polished copper
20 50C
100C
10 bar
10 60 kPa (1 6 m w.g.)
0 80C
0 6 bar
- Centre distance pump:

- Pump connections:
- Manifold outlet connections:
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
1 1/4 with nut
1 with nut
3/4 M
Safety thermostat
Electric wiring
- Factory setting:
- Protection class:
- Contacts rating:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
L
230 V
N
Safety
thermostat
Room
thermostat
Pump
Three-speed pump:
Materials: - Body:
Electric supply:
Max. ambient relative humidity:
Protection class:
Model UPS 25-60/UPS 25-80

GG 15/20 cast iron
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
3
2
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
3
2
5
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
3
2
5
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
1200
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
2
5
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
80
bar
4
5
270-410
10
8
6
4
2
0
60
20
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
CALEFFI
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
60
20
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
60
20
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI

10
8
6
4
2
0
40
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI

10
8
6
4
2
0
55
10
8
6
4
2
0
55
55
55
10
8
6
4
2
0
50
50
50
50
10
8
6
4
2
0
45
45
45
45
10
8
6
4
2
0
60
80
80
40
20
0
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
13 outlets
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
450
205
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
10 outlets
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
20
6 outlets
1000
3 outlets
800
600
Dimensions
Code
310
with pump UPS 25-60

with pump UPS 25-80
Outlet
A
50
1626C3
3
590
1626D3
4
640
1626E3
5
690
A
1626F3
6
740
A
1626G3
7
790
1626H3
8
840
38
A
1626I3
1626I4
9
915
1626L3
1626L4
10
965
1626M3
1626M4
11
1015
27
150-190
1626N3
1626N4
12
1065
1626O3
1626O4
13
1115
Hydraulic diagram
Thermostatic valve
9 8
Balancing valve
SR
BR
9
System electric pump

By-pass valve
Shut-off valve
3
2
Check valve
Flow sensor
Safety sensor
4
6 ST
Safety thermostat
ST
10
Temperature gauge
Pressure gauge
SF
BF
Pressure tapping points

Air vent valve
Operating principle
The principle by which the unit functions is to mix, at node A, the high
temperature fluid of the primary boiler circuit with the low temperature
return fluid of the secondary user circuit. It consists of the following
components with their relative functions:
1 Pump, to distribute the low temperature fluid in the secondary
user circuit.
BOILER
RETURN
40
5 Shut-off valve with built-in check valve Ballstop, which prevents

undesired circulation in the circuit and allows circuits to be shut-off
for maintenance if necessary.
fluid sent to the radiant panel circuit, whatever happens. If the sensor
of the valve is damaged, it cuts out the supply to the circulator or
the generator.
7 Temperature gauges, that monitor the flow and return
temperatures of the radiant panel circuits to check the performance
of the system and facilitate setting operations.
80
55
4 Differential by-pass valve, which maintains the value set for the
head on the secondary circuit constant as the number of open outlet
circuits to panels varies. They can in fact be automatically shut-off
if the valves are fitted with a thermoelectric and thermostat control
to regulate the ambient thermal load.
SYSTEM
RETURN
60
20
0
50
3 Balancing valve, which balances the quantities of the two fluids

that are mixed on the basis of nominal working temperature, of the
desired power and of the flow rate of the secondary fluid.
7
45
2 Thermostatic valve, which maintains the temperature set for the

flow to the secondary circuit constant by regulating the quantity of
high temperature primary circuit fluid that can enter the secondary
circuit. It is operated by a sensor immersed in the secondary fluid.
The quantity of primary fluid that is let in, under average operating
conditions, amounts to approximately 25% of the total secondary
circuit flow.
40
60
20
80
SYSTEM
FLOW
BOILER
FLOW
3
2
bar
4
5
10
The regulating unit is preassembled with:
Return distribution manifold, serie 666,
fitted with shut-off valves for individual
circuits designed for use with
thermoelectric controls.
Flow distribution manifold, series 667,
fitted with micrometric valves for
calibrating individual circuits.
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
8 Manual air vent valve, for use when filling the system.
9 Suitable for connection to pressure tapping points, for
measuring the working conditions of the circuit and of the circulator.
The points can also be connected to a Flomet electronic differential
pressure measurement device to speed system calibration
operations.
Head units, series 5996, with automatic

air vent valve and drain valve.
CALEFFI
10 Pressure gauge, to read pressures and check the pump head.
For further details please refer to

brochure
01044
10
8
6
4
2
0
Regulation of the balancing valve
THERMOSTATIC VALVE
The balancing valve (VB in diagram 1) must create differential

pressure sufficient to force the injection of high temperature fluid
through the thermostatic valve; given that the rspective sections of
the circuit are in parallel, pV ~ pVB.
BALANCING VALVE
p (m w.g.)
50
20
10
5
5000
3500
4000
4500
3000
2500
2000
100
1800
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
1400
1600
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
900
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
1200
0,1
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
800
0,2
9
8
7
6
1000
G (l/h)
Kv (2K) = 0.82
Kv (1K) = 0.42
0,5
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
120
900
800
1000
700
600
500
350
400
450
300
250
180
200
140
160
90
100
120
80
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
70
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
18
16
14
12
700
4
3,5
3
2,5
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
600
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
45
40
35
30
25
500
5
4,5
5 5,5 6 6,5 7 7,5 TA
4 4,5
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
350
400
450
10
p (kPa)
3
300
250
20
180
9
8
7
6
50
200
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
20
0,1
18
16
14
12
60
0,2
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
50
0,5
45
40
35
30
25
35
40
45
p (kPa)
2K
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
30
1K
25
140
160
p (m w.g.)
G (l/h)
System sizing
The nominal operating inlet flow rate from the boiler circuit is
calculated with the following formula (see diagram 1):
Gb = Gs (Tf-Tr) / (Tb-Tr)
Practical method
this value is used to determine the loss of pressure on the thermostatic

valve using the graph given above.
The value found must be added to the loss of pressure in the
secondary circuit to determine the head necessary from the
corresponding pump if there is zero head at the unit connections.
Reference is made to the operating temperature of the boiler circuit

and the heating system and the balancing valve is gradually closed
until the temperature read on the flow temperature gauge of the unit
reaches the operating temperature set for the thermostatic valve
(-1K/-2K). The result is that the quantities of fluid which pass through
the thermostatic valve and through the balancing valve are balanced
to the nominal conditions.
Reference table
The table below may be used as a guide for setting the balancing
valve. It takes into account the main parameters that interact when
DIAGRAM 1
Gb
Tb
Tf
pV
Gs
H
VB
H=0
Tf
(C)
35
40
45
50 ( +0
- 2)
35
40
45
50 ( +0
- 2)
Tb
(C)
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
ps
Tr
VB
(turns)
7.5
6.5
5
4.5
7.5
6.5
5.5
5.5
Tr
(C)
30
33
35
38
30
33
35
38
ps
(kPa)
15
15
15
15
25
25
25
25
Gs
(l/h)
1900
1750
1200
1150
2700
2200
1550
1600
H (m w.g.)
H (m w.g.)
UPS 25-60
UPS 25-80
6
4
Example
Tr = 33C
Tb = 70C
Gs = 2000 l/h
Tf = 40C
Gb = 2000 (40-33) / (70-33) = 378 l/h
1
0
The following is obtained from the graph: loss of pressure on the thermostatic
valve pV ~ 25 kPa.
The loss of pressure on the check valve is negligible.
Given ps = 20 kPa the loss of pressure in the secondary circuit at
the nominal flow rate Gs, the head is obtained
P max
(kW)
10
13
14
16
15
17
18
20
With
= flow rate in the primary boiler circuit

= flow rate in the secondary circuit
= secondary circuit flow temperature
= secondary circuit return temperature
= primary boiler circuit temperature
With
Gb
Gs
Tf
Tr
Tb
UPS 25-80 UPS 25-60

pump
pump
where:
The balancing valve is adjusted through eight full turns between the
following conditions: fully closed, fully open. It is normally preset at
6.5 turns which satisfies the operating conditions of most systems.
If adjustment is necessary to satisfy the actual requirements of a
system, a practical method is described below with a reference
table.
1
0
0,5
1
1
1,5
2,5
3,5
Q (m3/h)
Speed
3
2
1
Q (m3/h)
(A)
P
(W)
n
(r.p.m.)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
(A)
P
(W)
n
(r.p.m.)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
1000
Application diagram
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Mixed system with wall

boiler and zone valve
RT
Manual valve
Three-way
zone valve
Electric pump
RT
Room thermostat
Check valve
RT
Autoflow
Filter
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
Hydraulic separator
CALEFFI
45
CALEFFI
50
55
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
4
5
Dearator
RT
Medium to large applications

CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
45
CALEFFI
50
55
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
3
2
bar
4
5
1
RT
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
45
CALEFFI
50
55
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
4
5
1
Series 162
Set point regulating unit with brass and polished copper piping. 1 connections with union to primary circuit. Primary circuit
maximum temperature: 100C, maximum pressure: 10 bar. Complete with: UPS 25-60 (UPS 25-80) pump, 130 mm between
centres, 1 1/2 connections with union. Thermostatic valve with remote sensor, setting temperature range: 20-50C. Balancing
valve. Differential by-pass valve, setting range: 10 60 kPa. Shut-off valve with built-in check valve. Safety thermostat, factory
setting: 55C, protection class: IP 55. Temperature gauge scale: 0 80C. Pressure gauge scale 0 6 bar. Suitable for connection
to pressure tapping points. Three-outlet (from 3 to 13) flow and return manifolds complete with built-in micrometric balancing
valves, shut-off valves designed for thermoelectric controls and automatic air vent units. Supplied preassembled in painted sheet
steel box with lock, depth adjustable from 150 to 190 mm, complete with floor supports, height adjustable from 270 to 410 mm.
C A L E F F I S . P. A . I 2 8 0 1 0 F O N TA N E T O D A G O G N A ( N O ) S . R . 2 2 9 , N . 2 5 T E L . + 3 9 0 3 2 2 8 4 9 1 FA X + 3 9 0 3 2 2 8 6 3 7 2 3
Http://www.calef fi.it E-mail: info@calef fi.it
Set point regulating unit

with high temperature distribution kit
series 162
cert. n 0003
01094/04 GB
ISO 9001
Function
The regulating unit with the high temperature distribution kit is designed for
use with mixed systems consisting of radiant panels and radiators in
combination with distribution manifolds for radiant panels.
The function of the set point regulating unit is to maintain the flow
temperature of the fluid distributed in a low temperature system for
underfloor radiant panels constant at the set temperature.
The function of the kit is to distribute part of the high temperature fluid from
the primary boiler circuit to the heater units. It is supplied complete with a
differential by-pass valve with a fixed calibration. This accessory is
indispensable if the radiator circuits are controlled by thermostatic or
thermo-electric valves.
Product range
Code 16263 00
Set point regulating unit preassembled with manifolds and box, high temperature distribution kit with UPS 25-60 pump
Code16264 00
Set point regulating unit preassembled with manifolds and box, high temperature distribution kit with UPS 25-80 pump
Code 160002
High temperature distribution kit complete with 2-outlet manifolds and differential by-pass
Code 160003
High temperature distribution kit complete with 3-outlet manifolds and differential by-pass
Technical specification for the set point regulating unit

series 162
Technical specification for the high temperature

distribution kit code 160002/3
- Piping materials:
- Materials: - Manifolds:
- By-pass body:
- Pipe gauged 18 with collar:
copper
- Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
- Setting temperature range:

- Max. primary inlet temperature:
- Max. pressure:
- brass EN 12165 CW617N,

- polished copper
20 50C
100C
10 bar
10-60 kPa (1-6 m w.g.)
0 80C
0 6 bar
- Centre distance pump:

- Pump connections:
- Manifold outlet connections:
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
1 1/4 with nut
1 with nut
3/4 M
Safety thermostat
10 bar
100C
20 kPa (2000 mm w.g.)
- Manifold internal diameter:

30 mm
- Manifold connections: - Inlet:
1 F
- Outlet:
1 M
- Branches:
1/2 F
- Branch outlet centre distance:
50 mm
Wiring diagram
Room
thermostat
Pump
Three-speed pump:
Materials: - Body:
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Model UPS 25-60/UPS 25-80

GG 15/20 cast iron
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
160002
2
1
1
1/2
205
164
50
160003
3
1
1
1/2
205
214
50
Code
Outlet
A
B
C
D
E
F
C
F
Safety
thermostat
Dimensions
A
L
230 V
N
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
- Factory setting:
- Protection class:
- Contacts rating:

Max. temperature:
Differential by-pass setting:
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
2+11 outlets
3+10 outlets
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
1200
2+7 outlets
3+6 outlets
1000
800
2+3 outlets
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
45
450
205
50
55
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
4
5
1
270410
Code
310
A
with UPS 25-60 UPS

with UPS 25-80 pump
Code
Radiator outlets
Panel outlets
A
with UPS 25-60 pump
with UPS 25-80 pump
Radiator outlets
Panel outlets
A
50
38
27
150190
1626C3 002 1626D3 002 1626E3 002

2
2
2
3
4
5
740
790
840
1626F3 002 1626G3 002 1626H3 002

2
2
2
6
7
8
890
940
990
1626I3 002
1626I4 002
2
9
1065
1626L3 002 1626M3 002

1626L4 002 1626M4 002
2
2
10
11
1115
1165
1626C3 003 1626D3 003 1626E3 003

3
3
3
3
4
5
790
840
890
1626F3 003 1626G3 003 1626H3 003

3
3
3
6
7
8
940
990
1040
1626I3 003
1626I4 003
3
9
1115
1626L3 003
1626L4 003
3
10
1165
Hydraulic diagram
Thermostatic valve
11
9 8
Balancing vale
SR
BR

By-pass valve
Shut-off valve
3
12
Check valve
Flow sensor
Safety sensor
4
6 ST
11
BF
ST
10
7
Safety thermostat
Temperature gauge
SF
Pressure gauge
Pressure tapping point
Air vent valve
BOILER
RETURN
40
SYSTEM
RETURN
60
20
80
45
50
55
12
40
60
20
80
SYSTEM
FLOW
BOILER
FLOW
3
2
bar
4
5
10
Operating principle
The principle by which the unit functions is to mix, at node A the high
temperature fluid of the primary boiler circuit with the low temperature
return fluid of the secondary user circuit. It consists of the following
components with their relative functions:
9 Suitable for connection to pressure tapping points, for

measuring the working conditions of the circuit and of the circulator.
The points can also be connected to a Flomet electronic differential
pressure measurement device to speed system calibration
operations.
1 Pump, to distribute the low temperature fluid in the secondary

user circuit.
10 Pressure gauge, to read pressures and check the pump head.
2 Thermostatic valve, which maintains the temperature set for the

flow to the secondary circuit constant by regulating the quantity of
high temperature primary circuit fluid that can enter the secondary
circuit. It is operated by a sensor immersed in the secondary fluid.
The quantity of primary fluid that is let in, under average operating
conditions, amounts to approximately 25% of the total secondary
circuit flow.
3 Balancing valve, which balances the quantities of the two fluids
that are mixed on the basis of nominal working temperature, of the
desired power and of the flow rate of the secondary fluid.
4 Differential by-pass valve, which maintains the value set for the
head on the secondary circuit constant as the number of open outlet
circuits to panels varies. They can in fact be automatically shut-off
if the valves are fitted with a thermoelectric and thermostat control
to regulate the ambient thermal load.
5 Shut-off with built-in check valve Ballstop, which prevents
undesired circulation in the circuit and allows circuits to be shut-off
for maintenance if necessary.
fluid sent to the radiant panel circuit, whatever happens. If the sensor
of the valve is damaged, it cuts out the supply to the circulator or
the generator.
7 Temperature gauges, that monitor the flow and return
temperatures of the radiant panel circuits to check the performance
of the system and facilitate setting operations.
8 Manual air vent valve, for use when filling the system.
11 Flow and return manifolds for high temperature distribution.

12 Fixed balancing differential by-pass to balance the pressure
in the distributor manifold circuit as the flow rate varies.
Return distribution manifold, series 666,

fitted with shut-off valves for individual
circuits designed for use with
thermoelectric controls.
Flow distribution manifold, series 667,
fitted with micrometric valves for
calibrating individual circuits.
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
Head units, series 5996, with automatic

air vent valve and drain valve.
CALEFFI
For further details please refer to

brochure
01044
10
8
6
4
2
0
Regulation of the balancing valve
THERMOSTATIC VALVE
The balancing valve (VB IN DIAGRAM 1) must create differential

pressure sufficient to force the injection of high temperature fluid
through the thermostatic valve; given that the respective sections of
the circuit are in parallel, pV ~ pVB.
BALANCING VALVE
p (m w.g.)
50
20
10
5
5000
3500
4000
4500
3000
2500
2000
100
1800
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
1400
1600
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
900
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
120
0,1
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
1200
0,2
9
8
7
6
800
G (l/h)
Kv (2K) = 0,82
Kv (1K) = 0,42
0,5
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
1000
1000
700
800
900
600
500
300
350
400
450
200
100
250
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
120
140
160
180
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
18
16
14
12
700
4
3,5
3
2,5
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
600
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
45
40
35
30
25
500
5
4,5
5 5,5 6 6,5 7 7,5 TA
4 4,5
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
350
400
450
10
p (kPa)
3
300
250
20
180
9
8
7
6
50
200
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
20
0,1
18
16
14
12
70
80
90
0,2
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
60
0,5
45
40
35
30
25
50
p (kPa)
2K
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
30
35
40
45
1K
25
140
160
p (m w.g.)
G (l/h)
System sizing
The nominal operating inlet flow rate from the boiler is
calculated with the following equation (see diagram 1):
The balancing valve is adjusted through eight full turns between the
following conditions: fully closed, fully open. It is normally preset at
6.5 turns which satisfies the operating conditions of most systems.
If adjustment is necessary to satisfy the actual requirements of a
system, a practical method is described below with a reference
table.
Gb = Gs (Tf-Tr) / (Tb-Tr)
Practical method
this value is used to determine the loss of pressure on

the thermostatic valve using the graph given above.
The value found must be added to the loss of pressure
in the secondary circuit to determine the head necessary
from the corresponding pump if there is zero head at
the unit connections.
Reference is made to the operating temperature of the boiler circuit

and the heating system and the balancing valve is gradually closed
until the temperature read on the flow temperature gauge of the unit
reaches the operating temperature set for the thermostatic valve
(-1K/-2K). The result is that the quantities of fluid which pass through
the thermostatic valve and through the balancing valve are balanced
to the nominal conditions.
Reference table
The table below may be used as a guide for setting the balancing
valve. It takes into account the main parameters that interact when
DIAGRAM 1
Gb
Tc
Tm
pV
Gs
H
VB
H=0
Tm
(C)
35
40
45
50 ( +0
- 2)
35
40
45
50 ( +0
- 2)
Tb
(C)
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
ps
VB
(turns)
7,5
6,5
5
4,5
7,5
6,5
5,5
5,5
Tr
(C)
30
33
35
38
30
33
35
38
Gs
(l/h)
1900
1750
1200
1150
2700
2200
1550
1600
P max
(kW)
10
13
14
16
15
17
18
20
ps
(kPa)
15
15
15
15
25
25
25
25
With
= flow rate in the primary boiler circuit

= flow rate in the secondary circuit
= secondary circuit flow temperature
= secondary circuit return temperature
= primary boiler circuit temperature
With
Gb
Gs
Tf
Tr
Tb
UPS 25-80 UPS 25-60

pump
pump
where:
Tr
H (m w.g.)
H (m w.g.)
UPS 25-60
UPS 25-80
Example
4
3
Tf = 40C
Tr = 33C
Tb = 70C
Gs = 2000 l/h
Gb = 2000 (40-33) / (70-33) = 378 l/h

The following is obtained from the graph: loss of pressure
on the thermostatic valve pV ~ 25 kPa.
The loss of pressure on the check valve is negligible.
2
1
0
1
0
0,5
1
1
1,5
2,5
3,5
Q (m3/h)
Speed
Given ps = 20 kPa the loss of pressure in the secondary

circuit at the nominal flow rate Gs, the head is obtained
3
2
1
Q (m3/h)
(A)
P
(W)
n
(r.p.m.)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
(A)
P
(W)
n
(r.p.m.)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
1000
Hydraulic characteristics of the

high temperature distribution kit
Hydraulic characteristics of the

high temperature distribution kit by-pass
Localised loss coefficient:

- inlet:
- branch outlet:
P (mm w.g.)
1.0
3.0
P (kPa)
10000
100
9000
8000
7000
90
80
70
6000
60
5000
50
4500
4000
3500
45
40
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
20
900
800
1000
700
10
600
450
400
500
350
300
250
180
200
160
140
90
100
50
120
12
80
1200
1000
70
18
16
14
60
1800
1600
1400
Q (l/h)
Application diagram
Shut-off valve
Mixed system with

wall boiler
Electric pump
Room thermostat
Thermostatic valve
Lockshield valve
Manual valve
RT
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
45
2-
6561
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
220 V - 3
50
RT
55
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
CALEFFI
80
3
2
bar
4
5
1
RT
CALEFFI
Series 162
Set point regulating unit with brass and polished copper piping. 1 connections with union to primary circuit. Primary circuit
maximum temperature: 100C, maximum pressure: 10 bar. Complete with: UPS 25-60 (UPS 25-80) pump, 130 mm between
centres, 1 1/2 connections with union. Thermostatic valve with remote sensor, setting temperature range: 20-50C. Balancing
valve. Differential by-pass valve, setting range: 10-60 kPa. Shut-off valve with built-in check valve. Safety thermostat, factory
setting: 55C, protection class: IP 55. Temperature gauge scale: 0-80C. Pressure gauge scale 0-6 bar. Suitable for connection
to pressure tapping points. Three-outlet (3 to 13) flow and return manifolds complete with built-in micrometric balancing valves,
shut-off valves designed for thermoelectric controls and automatic air vent units. Supplied preassembled in painted sheet steel
box with lock, depth adjustable from 150 to 190 mm, complete with floor supports, height adjustable from 270 to 410 mm.
Code 160002
2-outlet flow and return manifolds for primary distribution. Brass body. 1M X 1F main connections. 1/2F outlet
connections. Supplied with 20 kPa set differential by-pass.
Code 160003
3-outlet flow and return manifolds for primary distribution. Brass body. 1M X 1F main connections. 1/2F outlet
connections. Supplied with 20 kPa set differential by-pass.
C A L E F F I S . P. A . I 2 8 0 1 0 F O N TA N E T O D A G O G N A ( N O ) S . R . 2 2 9 , N . 2 5 T E L . + 3 9 0 3 2 2 8 4 9 1 FA X + 3 9 0 3 2 2 8 6 3 7 2 3
Http://www.calef fi.it E-mail: info@calef fi.it
Motorised temperature regulating unit
CALEFFI
series 161
01095/04 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The temperature regulating unit is designed for use with a climatic
or modulating temperature controller. The unit is compact to save
space and facilitates installation in an embedded wall box.
The unit is supplied complete with a three-way motorised valve, a
three-speed pump, flow and return temperature gauges, a
pressure gauge, a safety thermostat, an adjustable discharge
valve, connecting piping and shut-off valves on the primary circuit.
The unit is available in different configurations, both simple and
preassembled in a box with distribution manifolds.
Product Range
Code 1615 Motorised temperature regulating unit preassembled with distribution manifold and box
Code 161600 Motorised temperature regulating unit preassembled
Three -way valve
Materials: - Body:
brass EN 12165 CW617N, nickel plated
- Ball:
- Seals:
EPDM
Hydraulic unit:
Materials: - Piping:
polished copper
- Fittings:
- Shut-off valves: brass EN 12165 CW617N, nickel plated
Temperature gauge scale:
Connections to primary circuit:
Manifold outlet connections:
Actuator
Three-point type:
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
Cable length:
0 80C
0 6 bar
3/4 M
1 1/4 M union connection
3/4 M
230V 50-60 Hz
95 s
4W
IP 54
65C
self extinguishing VO
0,9 m
Safety thermostat:
Setting temperature:
Protection class:
Contacts rating:
Cable length:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A - 240 V
0,55 m
Pump
Three-speed pump:
UPS 25-60
Material: - Body:
GG 15/20 cast iron

Protection class:
Pump center distance:
Pump connections:
Cable length:
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with union
1m

H (m w.g.)
6
Power consumption
UPS 25-60
5
4
Speed
Medium:

30%
5 90C
10 bar
2
1
0
3
2
1
0,5
1,5
2,5
Q (m3/h)
(A)
P
(W)
n
(r.p.m.)
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
Dimensions
Code
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
40
60
20
80
bar
40
80
40
40
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
3
2
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
60
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
20
5
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
450
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
60
20
80
13 outlets
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
20
10 outlets
CALEFFI
6 outlets
1200
800
1000
A
C
60
20
5
3
2
1
161600
1
1 1/4
50
240
65
105
195
90
80
270-410
3/4
240
315
50
A
Code
Outlets
A
1615E0
5
635
1615F0
6
685
1615G0
7
735
1615H0
8
785
10
40
60
20
80
SYSTEM
RETURN
7
10
3
2
bar
5
BOILER
FLOW
60
1615M0
11
965
1615N0
12
1015
Three-way ball valve

Three-point servomotor
Three-speed pump: UPS 25-60
Adjustable discharge valve
Safety thermostat
Flow temperature gauge
Return temperature gauge
Pressure gauge
Primary distribution shut-off valves
Temperature sensor connection (option)
Series 666 return distribution

manifold, equipped with
shut-off valves on
individual circuit
specially designed for
thermoelectric control.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
SYSTEM
FLOW
40
20
1615L0
10
915
1615I0
9
865
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
110-150
6
BOILER
RETURN
Series 667 flow distribution

manifold, equipped
with micrometric valves
for calibrating individual
circuits.
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
Head units with automatic air vent,

differential pressure control by-pass
kit and drain valve.
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
1615O0
13
1065
Hydraulic diagram
10
4
Temperature sensor (option)
SR
Manual drain valve
1
ST
Temperature gauge
10
ST
Safety thermostat
SF
Shut-off ball valve

Three-way motorised valve
BF
BR
Wiring
Pressure gauge
Pump
Temperature sensor (option)

The unit is fitted with 1/8 F fittings for
secondary circuit flow and return
immersion
temperature
sensors,
available on request, code F69264.
diagram for
connecting
the regulating
Open
Close
valve
Temperature sensor technical specification
Use of the safety thermostat

The safety thermostat is fitted with a special
easy-to-fit connector and is used to stop the
boiler and protect the radiant panel circuits
from dangerous overheating.
Type NTC
Time constant:
Response:
Beta value:
Two-wire cable with connector
Cable length:
-40 125C
2,5 s
10000 a 25C
25/85C 39771,5%
0,55 m
System with wall boiler and Sepcoll 2+1
Pump
Lockshield valve
Variable speed pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
t
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
40
60
20
1
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Mixed system with wall boiler and zone

valves to the distribution manifolds
Pump
Variable speed pump
Thermostatic valve
Lockshield valve
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
CALEFFI
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Shut-off valve
Clock
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
t
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
CALEFFI
60
20
10
8
6
4
2
40
80
Series 1615.
Motorised temperature regulating unit with piping in polished copper. 3/4 M connections to the primary distribution.
3/4 M manifold outlet connections. Working temperature range: 5 to 90C. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Supplied
complete with: three-way ball valve; three-point actuator, electric supply 230 V, protection class: IP 54; three-speed pump
UPS 25-60, adjustable drain valve; safety thermostat, working temperature range: 55C 3C, protection class: IP 55;
temperature gauge scale: 0C to 80C; temperature gauge scale: 0 to 6 bar; primary distribution shut-off valve; fitted with
connections for temperature sensors; 5-outlet (5 to 13) flow distribution manifold complete with micrometric preregulation
valves and drain cock; 5-outlet (5 to 13) return distribution manifold complete with shut-off valves suitable for
thermoelectric control and air vent valve. By-pass kit for panel system manifold, setting: 25 kPa (2500 mm w.g.). Supplied
preassembled in coated steel sheet box with lock, adjustable depth from 110 and 140 mm, complete with adjustable
height to 410 mm floor supports.
Code 161600
Motorised temperature regulating unit with piping in polished copper. 1 F connections to the primary distribution.
1 1/4 M with union connections to the secondary distribution. Working temperature range: 5 to 90C. Maximum working
pressure: 10 bar. Supplied complete with: three-way ball valve; three-point actuator, power 230 V, protection class: IP 54;
three-speed pump UPS 25-60, adjustable drain valve; safety thermostat, working temperature range: 55C 3C,
protection class: IP 55; temperature gauge scale: 0C to 80C; pressure gauge scale: 0 to 6 bar; primary circuit shut-off
valve; suitable for connecting to temperature sensors.
CALEFFI
Modulating temperature regulating unit

CALEFFI

series 161
01096/04 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The modulating temperature regulating unit with high temperature
distribution kit is designed for use with mixed type systems
consisting of radiant panels and radiators or fan coils in
This unit, complete with digital temperature controller,
controls the temperature of the fluid sent to radiant
panels as a function of the actual thermal load.
The unit is compact to save space and facilitates installation into an
embedded wall box.
The unit is supplied complete with digital temperature controller for
both heating and cooling, a motorised three-way valve,
components to limit relative humidity, a three-speed pump, flow and
return sensors, a safety thermostat, flow and return temperature
gauges, a pressure gauge, adjustable drain valve and shut-off
valves on the primary circuit.
The function of the kit is to distribute part of the primary fluid from
the boiler or chiller unit to the heater and cooler units. It acts as a
hydronic separator for underfloor heating circuits and is supplied
complete with an adjustable differential by-pass for the primary
circuit.
Product range
Code 16152 003
Code 161503
Modulating temperature regulating unit with high temperature distribution kit, preassembled with manifolds and box
High temperature distribution kit with 3-outlet manifold and differential by-pass

30%
7 78C
5 90C
10 bar
Panel manifold differential by-pass setting:
25 kPa
(2.500 mm w.g.)
Differential by-pass hydraulic characteristics

P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
5000
50
1,8
20
1,6
1,4
1,2
0,5
0,8
0,9
25
2000
0,7
30
2500
0,6
35
3000
0,40
0,45
40
3500
0,35
4000
0,30
45
0,25
4500
0,18
0 80C
0 6 bar
3/4 M
3/4 M
0,2

230 V - 50 Hz
95 s
4W
IP 54
65C
Medium:
Primary inlet temperature range:
0,16
Hydraulic unit
polished copper
- Fittings:
0,14
valve
Body:
Ball:
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
Actuator
Three-point type:
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
0,12
Three-way
Materials: -
230 V - 50 Hz
IP 40
0,1
Electric supply:
Protection class:
G (m3/h)
Flow/return temperature sensor

NTC type
Time constant:
Response:
Beta value:
Two-wire cable with 1/8 M connection
High temperature distribution kit technical

specification - code 161503
-10 125C
2,5 s
10.000 at 25C
25/85C 3977 1,5%
Safety thermostat
Protection class:
Contacts rating:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A - 240 V
Pump
Three-speed pump:

EPDM

10 bar
100C
10 60 kPa (1 6 m w.g.)

20 mm
Manifold connections: - Inlet:
3/4 F nut
- To the regulating unit:
1 M
- Outlets:
23 p. 1,5 M - 18 mm
- Outlet center distance:
50 mm
UPS 25-60
Material: - Body:
Protection class:
Pump centre distance:
Pump connections:
Materials: - Manifold:
- By-pass:
- Hydraulic seals:
cast iron GG 15/20

95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with union connection
Insulation
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:
Thermal conductivity (DIN 52612):
closed cell PEX foam

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0,038 W/mK
40C: 0,045 W/mK
Coefficient of resistance to the diffusion of vapour (DIN 52615): >1.300
0 100C
Fire resistance (DIN 4102):
B2 class

Dimensions
H (m w.g.)
6
UPS 25-60
Power consumption
0,5
1,5
2,5
1800
1100
700
90
65
45
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
357
40
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
1200
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
150051
Convertitore
AC 230V 50Hz
10,5VA
T50
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
3/4
650
V
DE
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Trasformatore
60
20
80
12 outlets
40
60
20
80
150052
8 outlets
CALEFFI
40
20
0
1000
5 outlets
800
G (m3/h)
3
2
bar
40
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
60
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
20
5
6
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
80
Mod. Dep.
60
CALEFFI
80
60
20
CALEFFI
145
357
1
2
3
4
5
6
270410
mH2O
(A)
0,40
0,30
0,20
3
2
1
n
(r.p.m.)
1
2
3
4
5
Speed
P
(W)
mH2O 6
Code 161503
A
3/4
B
23 p. 1.5
C
60
D
1
E
240
F
75
G
87
H
50
440
50
A
Code
Radiator outlets
Panels outlets
A
1615E2 003
3
5
775
1615F2 003
3
6
825
A
1615G2 003
3
7
875
1615H2 003
3
8
925
110-150
A
1615I2 003
3
9
1015
1615L2 003
3
10
1055
1615M2 003
3
11
1105
1615N2 003
3
12
1155
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
6
7
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
150052
150051
Trasformatore
V
DE
SYSTEM
RETURN
CALEFFI
Convertitore
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
AC 230V 50Hz
10,5VA
T50
10
5
4
9
8
12
13
3
2
11
BOILER
FLOW
bar
CALEFFI
60
80
SYSTEM
FLOW
40
20
1
6

shut-off valves on
individual circuit
Mod. Dep.
BOILER
RETURN
Digital temperature controller

Three-point actuator
Flow temperature sensor
Return temperature sensor
Adjustable drain valve
Safety thermostat
Pressure gauge
Primary circuit shut-off valves
High temperature distribution manifold
Max. RH% control sensor
Max. RH% control components
357

manifold, equipped
circuits.
mH2O 6
1
2
3
4
5
14
15
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI

Hydraulic diagram
1
6
TC
10
Temperature sensor
16
Relative humidity sensor
SR
2
ST
8
11
TC
15
Transformer/Converter
Manual drain valve
Temperature gauge
SF
ST
Safety thermostat
Shut-off ball valve
12
13
Pressure gauge
BF
Pump
BR
12
14
High temperature distribution kit
Operating
The differential by-pass valve is
used to control the head to which
the distribution circuit to the heater
units is subjected; it facilitates
circulation to the heater units and
limits over pressure where there are
thermostatic or electro-thermal
valves.The differential valve is
calibrated at the pressure loss
value in the heater
unit circuit.
The high temperature distribution kit distributes water to the heater

or cooler units connected before the outlet to the secondary radiant
panel circuit. It consists of a single sided dual manifold and a
differential by-pass valve.
mH2O
1
2
3
4
5
6
Differential by-pass technical specification

A typical circuit design gives the following operating conditions:

G primary = G secondary (inlet to the mixing valve) + G heating units
G primary max. recommended: 1,5 m3/h
Setting
positions
p (m w.g.)
8
80
70
60
50
40
3
2
30
0,5
10
1
1,5
G (m3/h)
Localised loss coefficient inlet (F+R):

Localised loss coefficient outlets (F+R):
Gs
20
(kPa)
The distributor manifold not only distributes the water in the heater
unit circuits but also allows the hydronic separation between the
primary and the secondary circuits. This separation improves the
functioning of the secondary circuit to the panels and prevents
changes in the flow rate in the primary circuit from affecting the
secondary circuit. In this case, the flow rate in the respective circuits
is an exclusive function of the pump flow rate and the reciprocal
influence arising from coupling them in series is avoided. Two
possible conditions of circuit equilibrium follow.
3,0
6,5
Factory setting: 10 kPa (1 m w.g.)
Secondary
Gs
Gp
Gp
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Operation
The temperature controller receives the activation signal from the

ambient thermostat to start the pump and operate the mixing valve.
The controller operates the mixing valves according to two logic
approaches depending on whether the return sensor is on or off.
Set point regulation: return sensor off. Selector 6) OFF.
In this case the flow temperature FT is held constant at the value set
using the selector 5) both for heating and for cooling. The setting is
shown on the display 1).
Modulating regulation: return sensor on. Selector 6) ON.
In this case the flow temperature FT is modified as a function of the
temperature measured by the return sensor RT. This keeps the
actual thermal output of the slab and as a consequence the ambient
thermal load under control. The thermal response time of the
system is thus reduced to a minimum.
RTset = FTset - 35% (FTset - 20C)
FTcalculated = FTset + (RTset - RT)
Example:
FTset = 40C
RTset = 40 - 0,35 (40 - 20) = 33C
FTcalculated = 40 + (33 - RT)
10
11
12
The new FT value calculated is given on the display 1) with a small

side bar showing.
The front panel contains the following functions:

1) Three-digit LCD display for: temperature measured or
calculated and setting programmed delays in the system.
Temperature range displayed: 0 99C with a 0,1C resolution.
2) Controller function selector On/Off.
3) Mixing valve on opening: Led on.
4) Mixing valve on closing: Led on.
Each time the FT is calculated, the actual FT is displayed for 5 s,

after which the new FT calculated is shown. Changes to FT stop
when RT reaches RTset.
The return sensor is switched off for the cooling function.
5) Selector for setting flow temperature

Temperature range: 7 78C
Factory setting:
- heating: max. 50C
- cooling: min. 14C
Curve correction with return sensor

FT; RT
6) Return sensor selector

Sensor off: OFF
Sensor on: ON
Factory setting: ON
7) Pump running (ON): LED permanently on
8) S.T. led - safety temperature. Permanently on when the limit
signalled by the thermostat or humidistat is reached. It also
comes on permanently if the flow/return sensors malfunction
(see paragraph flow/return sensor).
(C)
Flow limit
temperature
50
ed
lat
lcu
Ca
45
40
35
FT
Design Flow
Temperature
FT Set
ted
ula
alc
C
T
RT Set
9) Switch for changing heating/ cooling function.

10) Adjuster for maximum duration of impulse on valve.
Adjustable 0,2 6 s. Factory setting: 2,5 s.
FT
Flow temperature
Design Return Temperature
30
25
11) Adjuster for time delay in reading return sensor.

Adjustable 1 360 s. Factory setting: 20 s.
20
12) Adjuster for valve-motor mechanical time delay.

50%
100%
150%
Design Thermal
Load %
Display
Heating safety thermostat
The three-digit LCD display shows the following parameters:
If the safety thermostat signals a flow temperature greater than 55C

the following state is set: pump OFF, mixing valve closed. The
thermostat terminal is NC; if it is not connected, the temperature
controller is set off.
- flow temperature set using the selector 5). The flow temperature
measured appears after 5 seconds.
- the flow temperature measured with the return sensor off.
- the flow temperature calculated with the return sensor on.
- the maximum duration of the impulse to the valve, selected using
the adjuster 10). Displayed for 5 seconds.
- delay time for acquiring the return temperature, selected using the
adjuster 11). Displayed for 5 seconds.
- valve-motor mechanical delays, selected using the adjuster 12).
Displayed for 5 seconds.
Back panel
CALEFFI
M 230 V~ 5060 Hz
~
5(2) A / 250 V~
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
7
FS
RS AT
9 10 11 12
The controller is equipped with an auxiliary micro-switch which can
be used to control other equipment.
Example:
For Heating: to switch the boiler on or off. Terminal NA- pump offambient thermostat OFF or safety thermostat ON (boiler off).
Terminal NC-pump on-ambient thermostat ON (boiler on).
For Cooling: to switch chiller unit on or off.
Terminal NA-pump OFF-ambient thermostat OFF or RH% limit
sensor on (chiller unit OFF).
Terminal NC-pump ON-ambient thermostat ON (chiller unit ON).
Contacts rating: 5 A (230 V).
ST
230 V~ IN OUT
Open Close
Flow /return sensor
13 14 15
1 2 3
The flow/return temperature sensors are of the NTC type. If the

sensor detects electrical resistance that indicates a short circuit, the
following operating state is set: pump OFF, mixing valve closed, LED
8) permanently on.
16 17 18
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
The terminals for the various electrical components are located on

the back panel.
Electric supply
1 Supply 230 V~ live
2 Supply 230 V~ neutral
3 Earth
Pump control
4 Earth
5 Pump control 230 V~ live
6 Pump control 230 V~ neutral
Mixing valve control
7 Valve control on opening
8 Common C
9 Valve control on closing
10 Auxiliary outlet NA
11 Common outlet C
12 Auxiliary outlet NC
Flow/return sensor
13 Flow temperature sensor
14 Common C
15 Return temperature sensor
Ambient thermostat/safety thermostat
16 Contact for ambient thermostat
17 Common C contact for ambient thermostat / common C
contact for safety thermostat and humidity sensor converter
18 Contact for safety thermostat and humidity sensor converter

C
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
97.060
72.940
55.319
42.324
32.654
25.396
C
10
15
20
25
30
35
19.903
15.714
12.493
10.000
8.056
6.530
C
40
45
50
55
60
65
5.327
4.370
3.603
2.986
2.488
2.083
C
70
75
80
85
90
95
1.752
1.480
1.255
1.070
915
787
C
100
105
110
115
120
125
680
592
517
450
390
340
Flow temperature limit for heating or cooling

Maximum heating and minimum cooling flow temperatures can be
set with the controller. Dip switches are located on the back of the
temperature control panel for this purpose. Different switch
configurations give different limit temperatures.
Factory setting:
- heating: max 50C
- cooling: min 14C.
Table of temperature limit dip switch positions

Dip switch Maximum Minimum
setting limit (C) limit (C)
0 0 0 0
50
14
0 0 1 0
54
13
0 1 0 0
58
12
0 1 1 0
62
11
1 0 0 0
66
10
1 0 1 0
70
9
1 1 0 0
74
8
1 1 1 0
78
7
ON
ON
Position 1
Position 0
1 2 1 2
Maximum cooling temperature limit

Cooling flow temperature cannot be set greater than 25C.
Control of relative humidity

When the temperature controller is used for cooling, the relative
humidity sensor must be used. The function of this sensor is to
detect the maximum relative humidity limit in order to prevent the
formation of condensation in the cooling thermal slab. It is set at
RH=80-85%. When this level is reached the following operating
state is set: pump ON, mixing valve closed.
Connection of the humidity sensor

The humidity sensor is connected to the temperature controller
through a special transformer and converter.
Testing the humidity sensor

The functioning of the sensor must be checked at the start of each
cooling season by placing a damp wad of cotton wool on the
surface; this should cause the mixing valve to be switched off and
switch on the red LED, 8), on the front of the control panel.
Location of the humidity sensor
The humidity sensor is located at the point where humidity is most
likely to form which will depend on the system design. It is
positioned with the carbon printed surface facing upwards as in the
diagrams.
ST
Inferior side: placed on the cooling surface
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
150051
150052
Converter
Transformer
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
AC 230V 50Hz
10,5VA
T50
V
DE
LN
24V
24V~
~ ~
1 2 3
4 5 6
The sensor should be fixed to the manifold installed in the position
where the RH% relative humidity value has not to exceed the safety
limits. Fix by inserting the two straps contained in the package
through the holes in the sensor.
230 V
AT
13 14 15
16 17 18
Controller
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
230 V~ IN OUT
7
FS
RS AT
9 10 11 12
ST
Open Close
The maximum heat energy that the panel can produce, in relation
to the climate values recorded, can be reached by controlling the
parameters below.
- Minimum flow temperature can be set using the selector 5) on the
front panel.
- Maximum RH% limit, controlled through RH% sensor.
- Room temperature controlled through room thermostat.
dedicated fan-coil or dehumidifier).
N.B.: Through the RH% limit sensor, possible formation of
condensation is anticipated. In areas with cooling, adequate air
treatment must always be present.
Accessories
738
Ambient chrono-thermostat, battery

operated.
With self-learning programme.
Weekly programmable clock.
Suitable for phone programmer.
Three temperature levels.
Minimum programming: 30 minutes.
Code
738107
120 x 90 x 20 mm
Application diagram
Pump
Shut-off valve
Three-way valve
Clock
Thermostatic valve
0
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
TU Thermostat/Humidistat
Lockshield valve
S/W
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
t
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
TU
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
150051
Trasformatore
V
DE
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
150052
Convertitore
AC
50Hz
230V
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
T50
6(2)A
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
60
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
20
1
6
Mod. Dep.
357
mH2O
1
2
3
4
5
6
Code 1615.2 003
Modulating temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling with piping in polished copper. 34 M connections to primary
circuit. 34 M distribution manifold outlets to radiant panels. 23 p.1,5 connections high temperature distribution manifold outlets.
Primary inlet temperature range: 5 90C. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Complete with: three-way ball valve; three-point
actuator, electric supply: 230 V, protection class: IP 54; radiant panel system temperature controller, electric supply 230 V,
setting temperature range: 7 78C, complete with flow, return and relative humidity sensors; three-speed pump UPS 25-60,
protection class: IP 44. Adjustable drain valve; safety thermostat, working temperature range: 55C3C, protection class:
IP 55; Scale temperature gauge: 0 to 80C; scale pressure gauge: 0 to 6 bar; primary circuit shut-off valves; 5-outlet (5 to 12)
flow manifold for panel systems complete with micrometric preregulation valves and drain cock; 5-outlet (5 to 12) return manifold
for panel systems complete with shut-off valves suitable for thermoelectric controls and air vent valve; by-pass kit for panel
system manifold, setting: 25 kPa (2500 mm w.g.); flow and return single sided dual manifold for high temperature circuit;
by-pass valve for high temperature manifold, setting: 10 60 kPa; supplied preassembled in coated steel sheet box with lock,
adjustable depth: 110 to 140 mm, complete with adjustable height 270 to 410 mm floor supports.
Code 161503
High temperature distribution kit for modulating temperature regulating unit consisting of: flow and return single sided dual
manifold for high temperature circuit. 34 F with union connections to primary circuit; 23 p.1,5 outlet connections; by-pass valve
for high temperature system manifold, setting: 10 - 60 kPa. Maximum working temperature: 100C. Maximum working pressure:
10 bar.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
series 161
01097/04 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The modulating temperature regulating unit is designed for use in
underfloor heating systems in combination with distribution
manifolds.
embedded wall box.
The unit is supplied complete with digital temperature controller, a
motorised three-way valve, a three-speed pump, flow and return
sensors, a safety thermostat, flow and return temperature gauges,
a pressure gauge, an adjustable drain valve and shut-off valves on
the primary circuit.
Product range
Code 16151
Modulating temperature regulating unit preassembled with manifolds and box
25 kPa
(2.500 mm w.g.)

P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
5000
50
1,8
20
1,6
1,4
0,5
1,2
25
2000
0,8
0,9
30
2500
0,7
35
3000
0,6
3500
0,40
0,45
40
0,35
45
4000
0,30
4500
0,25
3/4 M
1 1/4 M adjustable nut
3/4 M

30%
7 78C
5 90C
10 bar
0,18

0 80C
0 6 bar
0,2

230V - 50 Hz
95 s
4W
IP 54
65C
Medium:
0,16
Hydraulic unit
polished copper
- Fitting:
0,14
valve
Body:
Ball:
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
Actuator
Three-point type:
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
0,12
Three-way
Materials: -
230 V - 50 Hz
IP 40
0,1
Electric supply:
Protection class:
G (m3/h)

NTC type
Time constant:
Response:
Beta value:

H (m w.g.)
-10 125C
2,5 s
10.000 at 25C
25/85C 3977 1.5%
UPS 25-60
Power consumption
5
4
Speed
Safety thermostat
Protection class:
Contacts rating:
1
0
Pump
Three-speed pump:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
3
2
1
0,5
1,5
2,5
(A)
P
(W)
n
(r.p.m.)
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
G (m3/h)
UPS 25-60
Material: - Body:
GG 15/20 cast iron

Protection class:
Pump connections:
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with union
40
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
3
bar
CALEFFI
40
60
20
5
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
1200
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
40
20
5
10
8
6
4
2
0
80
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
450
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
60
20
80
13 outlets
40
60
20
80
9 outlets
CALEFFI
40
20
0
1000
6 outlets
800
Dimensions
80
270-410
3/4
240
50
365
A
Code
Outlets
A
1615E1
5
685
1615F1
6
735
1615G1
7
785
1615H1
8
835
1615I1
9
915
110-150
1615L1
10
965
1615M1
11
1015
1615N1
12
1065
1615O1
13
1115
1 Digital temperature controller
2 Three-way ball valve

3 Three-point actuator
4 Three-speed pump: UPS 25-60

SYSTEM
RETURN
40
60
20
80
7 Adjustable drain valve

8 Safety thermostat
9 Flow temperature gauge
10 Return temperature gauge
10
11 Pressure gauge
12 Primary circuit shut-off valves
5
4

shut-off valves on
individual circuit
9
8
SYSTEM
FLOW
3
2
11
bar
40

manifold, equipped
circuits.
80
60
20
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
12
BOILER
FLOW
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0

BOILER
RETURN
Hydraulic diagram
1
6
10
Temperature sensor
Manual air vent valve
SR
Temperature gauge
2
ST
8
11
ST
SF
Safety thermostat
Shut-off ball valve
Pressure gauge
12
Pump
12
BF
BR
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
Operation

2
The temperature controller receives the activation signal from

the ambient thermostat to start the pump and operate the
mixing valve.
The controller operates the mixing valves according to two
logic approaches depending on whether the return sensor is
on or off.
In this case the flow temperature FT is held constant at the
value set using the selector 5) both for heating and for
cooling. The setting is shown on the display 1).
In this case the flow temperature FT is modified as a function
of the temperature measured by the return sensor RT. This
keeps the actual thermal output of the slab and as a
consequence the ambient thermal load under control. The
thermal response time of the system is thus reduced to a
minimum.
10
11
12

Example:
FTset = 40C
RTset = 40 - 0,35 (40 - 20) = 33C
The new FT value calculated is given on the display 1) with a

small side bar showing.

Temperature range displayed: 0 99C with a 0,1C
resolution.
3) Mixing valve on opening: LED on.
4) Mixing valve on closing: LED on.
Factory setting:
- heating: max 50C
Sensor off: OFF
Sensor on: ON
Factory setting: ON
8) S.T. LED - safety temperature. Permanently on when the
limit signalled by the safety thermostat.
It also comes on permanently if the flow/return sensors
malfunction.
Each time the FT is calculated, the actual FT is displayed for

5 s, after which the new FT calculated is shown. Changes to
FT stop when RT reaches RTset.
FT/RT
(C)
Flow limit
temperature
50
45
FT
Design flow temperature

FT Set
ed
lat
lcu
ca
FT
flow temperature
40
9) Switch for changing heating / cooling only with RH%

control components.
35
FT
ed
lat
lcu
ca

Adjustable 0.2 6 s. Factory setting: 2,5 s.
RT Set
Design return temperature
30
11) Adjuster for delay time in reading return sensor.

25
12) Adjuster for valve-motor mechanical delays.

20
50%
100%
150%
Design thermal
load %
Display
The three digit LCD display shows the following parameters:
If the safety thermostat signals a flow temperature greater

than 55C the following state is set: pump OFF, mixing valve
closed. The thermostat terminal is NC; if it is not connected,
the temperature controller is set off.
- flow temperature set using the selector 5). The flow

temperature measured appears after 5 seconds.
- the maximum duration of the impulse to the valve, selected
using the adjuster 10). Displayed for 5 seconds.
- delay time for acquiring the return temperature, selected
- valve-motor mechanical delays, selected using the adjuster
12). Displayed for 5 seconds.
Back panel
The controller is equipped with an auxiliary micro-switch
which can be used to control other equipment.
Example:
For Heating: to switch the boiler on or off.
Terminal NA- pump off-ambient thermostat OFF or safety
thermostat ON (boiler off).
Contacts rating: 5 A (230 V)
Flow/return sensor
CALEFFI
M 230 V~ 5060 Hz
~
5(2) A / 250 V~
The flow/return temperature sensors are of the NTC type. If

the sensor detects electrical resistance that indicates a short
circuit, the following operating state is set: pump OFF, mixing
valve closed, led 8) permanently on.
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
7
FS
RS AT
9 10 11 12
ST
230 V~ IN OUT
Open Close

13 14 15
1 2 3
16 17 18
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
C
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
97.060
72.940
55.319
42.324
32.654
25.396
C
10
15
20
25
30
35
19.903
15.714
12.493
10.000
8.056
6.530
C
40
45
50
55
60
65
5.327
4.370
3.603
2.986
2.488
2.083
C
70
75
80
85
90
95
1.752
1.480
1.255
1.070
915
787
C
100
105
110
115
120
125
680
592
517
450
390
340
Flow temperature limit for heating
The terminals for the various electrical components are

located on the back of the panel.
Electrically powered
3 Earth
Pump control
4 Earth
8 Common C
11 Common outlet C
Maximum heating can be set with the controller.

Dip switches are located on the back of the temperature
control panel for this purpose. Different switch configurations
give different limit temperatures.
Factory setting:
- heating: max 50C
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Dip switch
setting
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
Maximum
limit (C)
50
54
58
62
66
70
74
78
ON
ON
Position 1
Position 0
1 2 1 2
Accessories
Flow/return sensor
14 Common C
738
Chrono-thermostat, battery operated.

Minimum required programming:
30 minutes.

17 Common C contact for ambient thermostat /
Common C contact for safety thermostat
18 Contact for safety thermostat
Code
738107
120 x 90 x 20 mm
Application diagram
Pump
Lockshield valve
Variable speed pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
1 2 3 4 5 6
C
C
ON OFF
t1
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
CALEFFI
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
60
80
CALEFFI
40
20
1
6
Without hydronic separator,

switch off the pump 161 unit using
room thermostat contact,
with boiler in sanitary hot water priority.
Pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
Lockshield valve
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
t
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
Code 1615.1
Modulating temperature regulating unit for heating with piping in polished copper. 3 4 M connections to primary circuit.
3 4 M distribution manifold outlets to radiant panels. Primary inlet temperature range: 5 90C. Maximum working
pressure: 10 bar. Complete with: three-way ball valve; three-point actuator, electric supply: 230 V, protection class: IP 54;
radiant panel system temperature controller, electric supply 230 V, setting temperature range: 7 78C, complete with
flow and return sensors; three-speed pump UPS 25-60, protection class: IP 44. Adjustable drain valve; safety thermostat,
working temperature range: 55C3C, protection class: IP 55; temperature gauge scale: 0 to 80C; pressure gauge
scale: 0 to 6 bar; primary circuit shut-off valves; 5-outlet (5 to 13) flow manifold for panel systems complete with
micrometric preregulation valves and drain cock; 5-outlet (5 to 13) return manifold for panel systems complete with
shut-off valves suitable for thermo-electric controls and air vent valve; by-pass kit for panel system manifold, setting:
25 kPa (2500 mm w.g.); supplied pre-assembled in coated steel sheet box with lock, adjustable depth: 110 to 140 mm,
complete with adjustable height 270 to 410 mm floor supports.
CALEFFI

CALEFFI
series 161
01098/04 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The modulating temperature regulating unit is designed for use in
underfloor heating systems in combination with distribution
manifolds.
embedded wall box.
The unit is supplied complete with digital temperature controller for
both heating and cooling, a motorised three-way valve,
components to limit relative humidity, a three-speed pump, flow and
return sensors, a safety thermostat, flow and return temperature
gauges, a pressure gauge, adjustable drain valve and shut-off
valves on the primary circuit.
Product range
Code 16152
Modulating temperature regulating unit preassembled with manifolds and box

30%
7 78C
5 90C
10 bar
25 kPa
(2.500 mm w.g.)

P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
5000
50
1,8
20
1,6
1,4
1,2
0,5
0,8
0,9
25
2000
0,7
30
2500
0,6
35
3000
0,40
0,45
40
3500
0,35
4000
0,30
45
0,25
4500
0,18
0 80C
0 6 bar
3/4 M
3/4 M
0,2

230V - 50 Hz
95 s
4W
IP 54
65C
Medium:
0,16
Hydraulic unit
polished copper
- Fittings:
0,14
valve
Body:
Ball:
brass EN 12165 CW617N chrome plated
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
Actuator
Three-point type:
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
0,12
Three-way
Materials: -
230 V - 50 Hz
IP 40
0,1
Electric supply:
Protection class:
G (m3/h)

NTC type
Time constant:
Response:
Beta value:

H (m w.g.)
-10 125C
2,5 s
10.000 at 25C
25/85C 3977 1,5%
UPS 25-60
Power consumption
5
4
Speed
Safety thermostat
Protection class:
Contacts rating:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
1
0
Pump
Three-speed pump:
3
2
1
0,5
1,5
2,5
(A)
P
(W)
n
(r.p.m.)
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
G (m3/h)
UPS 25-60
Material: - Body:
Protection class:
Pump connections:
cast iron GG 15/20

95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with union
40
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
V
DE
80
1200
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
150051
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
450
CALEFFI
Trasformatore
60
20
80
12 outlets
40
60
20
80
150052
8 outlets
CALEFFI
40
20
0
1000
5 outlets
800
Dimensions
Convertitore
AC 230V 50Hz
10,5VA
T50
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
T50
6(2)A
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
40
60
20
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
60
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
40
20
5
10
8
6
4
2
0
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
80
270-410
3/4
240
50
A
Code
Outlets
A
1615E2
5
775
1615F2
6
825
1615G2
7
875
1615H2
8
925
110-150
1615I2
9
1005
1615L2
10
1055
1615M2
11
1105
1615N2
12
1155
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
6
7
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
150052
150051
Trasformatore
V
DE
SYSTEM
RETURN
CALEFFI
Convertitore
AC 230V 50Hz
10,5VA
T50
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
10
5
4
9
8

Adjustable drain valve
Safety thermostat
Pressure gauge
Max. RH% control sensor

3
2
11
bar
60
80
SYSTEM
FLOW
40
20
5
6
13
12
BOILER
FLOW

shut-off valves on
individual circuit
manifold, equipped
circuits.
BOILER
RETURN
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI

Hydraulic diagram
1
6
TC
10
Temperature sensor
14
Relative humidity sensor
SR
2
ST
8
11
TC
13
Transformer/Converter
Manual drain valve
Temperature gauge
SF
ST
Safety thermostat
Shut-off ball valve
12
12
BF
Pressure gauge
BR
Pump
CALEFFI
Operation

actual thermal output of the slab and as a consequence the ambient
thermal load under control. The thermal response time of the
system is thus reduced to a minimum.
Example:
FTset = 40C
RTset = 40 - 0.35 (40 - 20) = 33C
10
11
12
5
side bar showing.

Each time the FT is calculated, the actual FT is displayed for 5 s,

after which the new FT calculated is shown. Changes to FT stop
when RT reaches RTset.
The return sensor is switched off for the cooling function.

Factory setting:
- heating: max. 50C
- cooling: min. 14C
Sensor off: OFF
Sensor on: ON
Factory setting: ON
8) S.T. LED - safety temperature. Permanently on when the limit
signalled by the thermostat or humidistat is reached. It also
comes on permanently if the flow/return sensors malfunction.
(see paragraph flow/return sensor).
9) Switch for changing heating/ cooling function.

FT/RT
(C)
Flow limit
temperature
50
ed
lat
lcu
a
C
FT
45
40
35
Design flow
temperature
FT Set
ed
lat
lcu
a
C
FT
RT Set

Adjustable 0,2 - 6 s. Factory setting: 2,5 s.
30
11) Adjuster for time delay in reading return sensor.

25
12) Adjuster for valve-motor mechanical time delay.

20
FT
Flow temperature
50%
100%
150%
Design thermal
load %
Display

- flow temperature set using the selector 5). The flow temperature
measured appears after 5 seconds.
- the maximum duration of the impulse to the valve, selected using
the adjuster 10). Displayed for 5 seconds.
- delay time for acquiring the return temperature, selected using the
adjuster 11). Displayed for 5 seconds.
- valve-motor mechanical delays, selected using the adjuster 12).
Displayed for 5 seconds.
Back panel
CALEFFI
M 230 V~ 5060 Hz
~
5(2) A / 250 V~
Example:
For Heating: to switch the boiler on or off. Terminal NA- pump offambient thermostat OFF or safety thermostat ON (boiler off).
For Cooling: to switch chiller unit on or off.
Terminal NA-pump OFF-ambient thermostat OFF or RH% limit
sensor on (chiller unit OFF).
Terminal NC-pump ON-ambient thermostat ON (chiller unit ON).
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
7
FS
RS AT
9 10 11 12
Flow/return sensor
ST
230 V~ IN OUT
Open Close
13 14 15

following operating state is set: pump OFF, mixing valve closed, LED
8) permanently on.
16 17 18

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
C
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5

the back panel.
Electric supply
3 Earth
Pump control
4 Earth
8 Common C
11 Common outlet C
Flow/return sensor
14 Common C
17 Common C contact for ambient thermostat / Common C
contact for safety thermostat and humidity sensor converter
18 Contact for safety thermostat converter and humidity sensor
converter
97.060
72.940
55.319
42.324
32.654
25.396
C
10
15
20
25
30
35
19.903
15.714
12.493
10.000
8.056
6.530
C
40
45
50
55
60
65
5.327
4.370
3.603
2.986
2.488
2.083
C
70
75
80
85
90
95
1.752
1.480
1.255
1.070
915
787
C
100
105
110
115
120
125
680
592
517
450
390
340
Flow temperature limit for heating or cooling

set with the controller. Dip switches are located on the back of the
temperature control panel for this purpose. Different switch
configurations give different limit temperatures.
Factory setting:
- heating: max 50C
- cooling: min 14C.

setting
limit (C) limit (C)
0 0 0 0
50
14
0 0 1 0
54
13
0 1 0 0
58
12
0 1 1 0
62
11
1 0 0 0
66
10
1 0 1 0
70
9
1 1 0 0
74
8
1 1 1 0
78
7
ON
ON
Position 1
Position 0
1 2 1 2


When the temperature controller is used for cooling, the relative
humidity sensor must be used. The function of this sensor is to
detect the maximum relative humidity limit in order to prevent the
formation of condensation in the cooling thermal slab. It is set at
RH=80-85%. When this level is reached the following operating
state is set: pump ON, mixing valve closed.
Connection of the humidity sensor

The humidity sensor is connected to the temperature controller
through a special transformer and converter.
Testing the humidity sensor

The functioning of the sensor must be checked at the start of each
switch on the red LED, 8), on the front of the control panel.
Location of the humidity sensor
The humidity sensor is located at the point where humidity is most
diagrams.
ST
Inferior side: placed on the cooling surface
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
150051
150052
Converter
Transformer
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
AC 230V 50Hz
10,5VA
T50
V
DE
LN
24V
24V~
~ ~
1 2 3
4 5 6

through the holes in the sensor.
230 V
AT
13 14 15
16 17 18
Controller
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
230 V~ IN OUT
7
FS
RS AT
9 10 11 12
ST
parameters below.
Open Close

front panel. Maximum RH% limit, controlled through RH% sensor.
- Room temperature controlled through room thermostat.
N.B.: Through the RH% limit sensor, possible formation of
condensation is anticipated. In areas with cooling, adequate air
treatment must always be present.
Accessories
738
Ambient chrono-thermostat, battery

operated. With self-learning
programme.
Code
738107
120 x 90 x 20 mm
Application diagram
0
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
Pump
Lockshield valve
Variable speed pump
Shut-off valve
Three-way valve
Clock
Thermostatic valve
E/I
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
CALEFFI
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
TH Thermostat/Humidistat
TH
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
150051
Trasformatore
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
150052
Convertitore
AC
50Hz
V
DE
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
T50
230V
6(2)A
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
60
80
CALEFFI
40
20
1
6
Without hydronic separator,

switch off the pump of 161 unit using
room thermostat contact,
with boiler in sanitary hot water priority.
0
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
Pump
Shut-off valve
Three-way valve
Clock
Thermostatic valve
TH Thermostat/Humidistat
Lockshield valve
E/I
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
t
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
150051
Trasformatore
V
DE
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
150052
Convertitore
AC
50Hz
230V
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
T50
6(2)A
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
40
60
20
1
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
TH
Code 1615.2
Modulating temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling with piping in polished copper. 3 4 M connections to
primary circuit. 3 4 M distribution manifold outlets to radiant panels. Primary inlet temperature range: 5 90C. Maximum
working pressure: 10 bar. Complete with: three-way ball valve; three-point actuator, electric supply: 230 V, protection
class: IP 54; radiant panel system temperature controller, electric supply 230 V, setting temperature range: 7 78C,
complete with flow, return and relative humidity sensors; three-speed pump UPS 25-60, protection class: IP 44.
Adjustable drain valve; safety thermostat, working temperature range: 55C3C, protection class: IP 55; temperature
gauges scale: 0 to 80C; pressure gauge scale:
0 to 6 bar; primary circuit shut-off valves; 5-outlet (5 to 12) flow
manifold for panel systems complete with micrometric preregulation valves and drain cock; 5-outlet (5 to 12) return
manifold for panel systems complete with shut-off valves suitable for thermo-electric controls and air vent valve; by-pass
kit for panel system manifold, setting: 25 kPa (2500 mm w.g.); supplied pre-assembled in coated steel sheet box with
lock, adjustable depth: 110 to 140 mm, complete with adjustable height 270 to 410 mm floor supports.
CALEFFI

series 161
CALEFFI
01099/04 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The modulating temperature regulating unit with high temperature
distribution kit is designed for use with mixed type systems
consisting of radiant panels and radiators or fan coils in
The unit is compact to save space and facilitates installation into
an embedded wall box.
The unit is supplied complete with digital temperature controller, a
motorised three-way valve, a three-speed pump, flow and return
sensors, a safety thermostat, flow and return temperature gauges,
a pressure gauge, adjustable drain valve and shut-off valves on the
primary circuit.
The function of the kit is to distribute part of the primary fluid from
the boiler to the heater units. It acts as a hydraulic separator for
underfloor heating systems and is supplied complete with an
adjustable differential by-pass for the primary circuit.
Product range
Code 16151 003
Code 161503
Modulating temperature regulating unit with high temperature distribution kit, preassembled with manifolds and box
High temperature distribution kit with 3-outlet manifold and differential by-pass

30%
7 78C
5 90C
10 bar
25 kPa
(2.500 mm w.g.)

P (mm w.g.)
P (kPa)
5000
50
1,8
20
1,6
1,4
1,2
0,5
0,8
0,9
25
2000
0,7
30
2500
0,6
35
3000
0,40
0,45
40
3500
0,35
4000
0,30
45
0,25
4500
0,18
0 80C
0 6 bar
3/4 M
3/4 M
0,2

230V - 50 Hz
95 s
4W
IP 54
65C
Medium:
0,16
Hydraulic unit
polished copper
- Fittings:
EN 12164 CW614N brass
- Shut-off valves: EN 12165 CW617N nickel plated brass
0,14
valve
Body:
EN 12165 CW617N nickel plated brass
Ball:
EN 12165 CW617N chrome plated brass
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
Servomotor
Three-point type:
Supply voltage:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
0,12
Three-way
Materials: -
230 V - 50 Hz
IP 40
0,1
Power consumption:
Protection class:
G (m3/h)

NTC type
Time constant:
Response:
Beta value:
High temperature distribution kit technical

specification - code 161503
-10 125C
2,5 s
10.000 a 25C
25/85C 3977 1,5%
Safety thermostat
Protection class:
Contacts rating:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A - 240 V
Pump
Three-speed pump:
GG 15/20 cast iron

Protection class:
Pump connections:

EPDM

10 bar
100C
10 60 kPa (1 6 m w.g.)

20 mm
Manifold connections: - Inlet:
3/4 F union
- To the regulating unit:
1 M
- Outlets:
23 p.1,5 M - 18 mm
- Outlet center distance:
50 mm
UPS 25-60
Material: - Body:
Materials:- Manifold:
- By-pass:
- Hydraulic seals:
Insulation
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:
closed cell PEX foam

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0,038 W/mK
40C: 0,045 W/mK
Coefficient of resistance to the diffusion of vapour (DIN 52615): >1300
0 100C
B2 class
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with union

Dimensions
H (m w.g.)
6
UPS 25-60
Power consumption
Code 161503
A
3/4
B
23 p. 1,5
C
60
D
1
E
240
F
75
G
87
H
50
0,5
1,5
2,5
1800
1100
700
90
65
45
CALEFFI
Mod. Dep.
0,40
0,30
0,20
357
40
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
3/4
3
bar
40
CALEFFI
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
bar
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
40
60
20
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
20
5
10
8
6
4
2
0
80
60
20
5
CALEFFI
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
650
10
8
6
4
2
0
60
20
80
10
8
6
4
2
0
40
60
20
80
12 outlets
CALEFFI
40
20
0
8 outlets
1200
5 outlets.
1000
800
G (m3/h)
80
60
Mod. Dep.
145
357
1
2
3
4
5
6
270-410
mH2O
3
2
1
n
(r.p.m.)
P
(W)
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
Speed
mH2O 6
D
4
440
50
A
Code
Radiator outlets
Panel outlets
A
1615E1 003
3
5
765
1615F1 003
3
6
815
A
1615G1 003
3
7
865
1615H1 003
3
8
915
110-150
A
1615I1 003
3
9
995
1615L1 003
3
10
1045
1615M1 003
3
11
1095
1615N1 003
3
12
1145
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
6
7
40
60
20
80
SYSTEM
RETURN
10
5
4
9

Three-point servomotor
Adjustable discharge valve
Safety thermostat
Pressure gauge
8
12
13
3
2
11
BOILER
FLOW
bar
CALEFFI
80
60
20
SYSTEM
FLOW
40
Mod. Dep.
BOILER
RETURN

shut-off valves on
individual circuit
manifold, equipped
circuits.
357
mH2O 6
1
2
3
4
5
14
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI

Hydraulic diagram
1
6
10
Temperature sensor
Manual discharge valve
SR
Temperature gauge
2
ST
8
11
ST
SF
Safety thermostat
Shut-off ball valve
Pressure gauge
Pump
12
13
BF
BR
12
14
CALEFFI
High temperature distribution kit
Operation
The differential by-pass valve is
used to control the head to which
the distribution circuit to the heater
units is subjected; it facilitates
circulation to the heater units and
limits over pressure where there are
thermostatic or electro-thermal
valves.The differential valve is
calibrated at the
value
where
pressure is lost in
the heater unit
circuit.
The high temperature distribution kit distributes water to the heater

units connected before the outlet to the secondary radiant panel
circuit. It consists of a single sided dual manifold and a differential
by-pass valve.
mH2O
1
2
3
4
5
6
Differential by-pass technical specification

p (m w.g.)
A typical circuit design gives the following operating conditions:

G primary = G secondary (inlet to the mixing valve) + G heating units
G primary max. recommended: 1,5 m3/h
Setting
positions
80
70
60
50
40
3
2
30
0,5
10
1
1,5
G (m3/h)
Localised loss coefficient inlet (F+R):

Localised loss coefficient outlets (F+R):
Gs
20
1
(kPa)
The distributor manifold not only distributes the water in the heater
unit circuits but also allows the hydronic separation between the
primary and the secondary circuits. This separation improves the
functioning of the secondary circuit to the panels and prevents
changes in the flow rate in the primary circuit from affecting the
secondary circuit. In this case, the flow rate in the respective circuits
is an exclusive function of the pump flow rate and the reciprocal
influence arising from coupling them in series is avoided. Two
possible conditions of circuit equilibrium follow.
3.0
6.5
Factory setting: 10 kPa (1 m w.g.)
Secondary
Gs
Gp
Gp
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Operation

actual thermal efficiency of the thermal mass and as a consequence
the ambient thermal load under control. The thermal response time
of the system is thus reduced to a minimum.
Example:
FTset = 40C
RTset = 40 - 0,35 (40 - 20) = 33C
10
11
12

side bar showing.

4) Mixing valve on closing: LCD on.
Each time the FT is calculated, the real FT is displayed for 5 s, after

which the new FT calculated is shown. Changes to FT stop when RT
reaches RTset.

Factory setting:
- heating: max. 50C
3) Mixing valve on opening: LCD on.

Sensor off: OFF
Sensor on: ON
Factory setting: ON
FT/RT
(C)
50

8) S.T. LED - safety temperature. Permanently on when the limit
signalled by the safety thermostat is reached. It also
comes on permanently if the flow/return sensors malfunction.
9) Switch for changing heating /
control components.
Limit flow
temperature
cooling only with RH%
45
40
35
FT
Design flow
temperature
FT Set
FT
ed
lat
lcu
a
c
ed
lat
lcu
a
c
RT Set

Adjustable 0,2 6 s. Factory setting: 2,5 s.
30
11) Adjuster for delay time in reading return sensor.

25
12) Adjuster for valve-motor mechanical delays.

20
FT
flow temperature
50%
100%
150%
Design thermal
load %
Display
The three digit lcd display shows the following parameters:

- flow temperature set using the selector 5). The flow

temperature measured appears after 5 seconds.
- the maximum duration of the impulse to the valve, selected
- delay time for acquiring the return temperature, selected
- valve-motor mechanical delays, selected using the adjuster
12). Displayed for 5 seconds.
Back panel
CALEFFI
M 230 V~ 5060 Hz
~
5(2) A / 250 V~
Example:
For Heating: to switch the boiler on or off.
Terminal NA- pump off-ambient thermostat OFF or safety thermostat
ON (boiler off).
Contacts rating: 5 A (230 V)
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
7
FS
RS AT
Flow/return sensor
9 10 11 12
ST
230 V~ IN OUT

following operating state is set: pump OFF, mixing valve closed, led
8) permanently on.
Open Close
13 14 15
16 17 18

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12

the back panel.
Electrically powered
1 Power 230 V~ live
2 Power 230 V~ neutral
3 Earth
Pump control
4 Earth
8 Common C
11 Common outlet C
Flow/return sensor
14 Common C
C
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
97.060
72.940
55.319
42.324
32.654
25.396
C
10
15
20
25
30
35
19.903
15.714
12.493
10.000
8.056
6.530
C
40
45
50
55
60
65
5.327
4.370
3.603
2.986
2.488
2.083
C
70
75
80
85
90
95
1.752
1.480
1.255
1.070
915
787
C
100
105
110
115
120
125
680
592
517
450
390
340

Maximum heating can be set with the controller.
Dip switches are located on the back of the temperature control
panel for this purpose. Different switch configurations give different
limit temperatures.
Factory setting:
- heating: max 50C
Dip switch
setting
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Maximum
limit (C)
50
54
58
62
66
70
74
78
ON
ON
Position 1
Position 0
1 2 1 2
Accessories
738
Chrono-thermostat, battery operated.

Minimum required programming:
30 minutes.

17 Common C contact for ambient thermostat/common C
contact for safety thermostat
18 Contact for safety thermostat
Code
738107
120 x 90 x 20 mm
Application diagram
Pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
Lockshield valve
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
t
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
40
80
Mod. Dep.
357
mH2O
1
2
3
4
5
6
CALEFFI
60
20
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Code 1615.1 003
Modulating temperature regulating unit for heating with piping in polished copper. 3 4 M connections to primary circuit.
34 M distribution manifold outlets to radiant panels. 23 p. 1,5 connections high temperature distribution manifold outlets.
Primary inlet temperature range: 5 90C. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Complete with: three-way ball valve;
three-point servomotor, electric supply: 230 V, protection level: IP 54; radiant panel system temperature controller, power
consumption 230 V, setting temperature range: 7 78C, complete with flow and return sensors; three-speed pump UPS
25-60, protection class: IP 44. Adjustable discharge valve; safety thermostat, working temperature range: 55C3C,
protection class: IP 55; temperature gauge scale: 0 to 80C; pressure gauge scale: 0 to 6 bar; primary circuit shut-off
valves; 5-outlet (5 to 12) flow manifold for panel systems complete with micrometric preregulation valves and drain cock;
5-outlet (5 to 12) return manifold for panel systems complete with shut-off valves suitable for thermo-electric controls and
air vent valve; by-pass kit for panel system manifold, setting: 25 kPa (2500 mm w.g.); supplied pre-assembled in coated
steel sheet box with lock, adjustable depth: 110 to 140 mm, complete with adjustable height 270 to 410 mm floor
supports.
Code 161503
High temperature distribution kit for modulating temperature regulating unit consisting of: flow and return single sided
dual manifold high temperature circuit. 3 4 F with union connections to primary circuit; 23 p.1,5 outlet connections;
by-pass valve for high temperature system manifold, setting: 10 60 kPa. Maximum working temperature: 100C.
Maximum working pressure: 10 bar.
CALEFFI
CONTECA direct heat meter MID directive - M-bus transmission

RE
IS
7554 series
TERE
BS EN ISO 9001:2008
Cert. n FM 21654
01111/09 GB

Cert. n 0003
Function
CONTECA is a direct heat energy meter especially suited to
measuring thermal consumption in residential buildings. Thanks to
its double memory register, it is able to keep a record of power in
both heating and air-conditioning modes (option 755810).
The device comprises an electronic calculator unit, a positive
displacement flow rate gauge and two temperature probes. The
CONTECA meter is very easy to install and hardly requires any
maintenance.
The CONTECA meter flow rate gauge is the turbine type. The
turbine speed is measured by means of a high-resistance
protected magnetic joint. As the mechanism is inside a vacuum
there is no condensation. The mechanism block nut, made of
non-magnetic material, prevents all attempted tampering.
The electronic technology and the materials used offer precise and
reliable measurements.
The high-precision NTC temperature probes are easy to seal for
greater protection against tampering. The cables connecting the
flow and return probes to the calculator unit are 1,9 m long.
The CONTECA meter is equipped with an 8-digit liquid crystal
display that can be turned on with a button, as it is normally off in
order to minimise battery usage. This display enables easy reading
of consumption values as well as a range of technical data to allow
appliance operating status evaluation and data logging.
Product range
7554 series
Heat meter
size 1/2 2 with union

DN 65 DN 200 flanged
Code 755010
Touch-Screen controller
Code 755055/56 M-Bus interface - Remote transmission interface
7558 series
Additional options
The CONTECA meter is able to acquire three additional pulse

inputs and two additional alarm-status digital inputs, and is
designed for centralised remote transmission (max.
250 modules) in M-Bus mode.
Standard installation
24 V (ac) - 50 Hz - 1 W
in accordance with M-Bus method
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN
Classe ambientale: Temp. amb. 545C, E1, M1

Riscaldamento: H :1090C H : 380 K
Alimentazione: 24 V (ac) - 50 Hz - 1 W IP 54
Senso di flusso: ritorno
K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
Utente
directive 2004/22/CE EN1434
Numero di serie
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Electric supply:
Data transmission:
Anti-tamper protection
Advanced control software
Conformity:
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Technical data
Temperature probes
Flow probe length
Return probe length
Probe type
Temperature range limits
Temperature difference limits
Measurement sensitivity
m
m
1,9
1,9
NTC
1090 (THERMIE) - 225 (REFRIGERATION UNIT)
380 (THERMIE) - 320 (REFRIGERATION UNIT)
0,05
C
K
C
Positive displacement portion

Dimensions/Connection
Body
Type of hydraulic connection
Nominal pressure
Maximum temperature of the medium
Assembly
Pulse output
Permanent flow rate
Minimum flow rate
Maximum flow rate
PN
Qp
Qi
Qs
1/22
Brass
Male with union ISO 228
Threaded PN 10
bar
C
DN 65DN 200
Steel FE510
Flanged PN 16 EN 1092-1
Flanged PN 16
90
normally horizontal
class OA-OC in accordance with E1434-2
see table 1 and 2
see table 1 and 2
see table 1 and 2
l/h
l/h
l/h
Microprocessor calculation unit

Metrological specifications
Centralised transmission
Ambient temperature range limits
Ambient classification
Thermie/refrigeration measurement unit
Electric supply
Protection class
Pulse inputs
in compliance with EN 1434-1 - MID 2004/22/CE

in M-Bus mode
545
MID 2004/22/CE E1-M1
8-digit display
24 V (ac) - 1 W - 50 Hz
In accordance with DIN 40050: IP 54
class IB in accordance with EN 1434-2
C
kWh
The CONTECA heat meter is supplied with accessories for installation, probe positioning and subsequent lead sealing.
TAB. 2 - Flow rate limits (m3/h) - Connection from DN 65 to DN 200:
2 sleeves, 1/2, to be welded, with brass pocket and 1 lead sealing kit
TAB. 1 Flow rate limits Connections from 1/2 to 2:

2 Y pockets (the flow pocket is fitted with filter mesh)
Connect. Meas. type
Single jet
1/2
Single jet
3/4
Multi jet
1
Multi jet
1 1/4
Multi jet
1 1/2
Multi jet
2
Code
755404
755405
755406
755407
755408
755409
Q p (mc/h)
1,5
2,5
3,5
6
10
15,5
Q i (l/h)
30
50
70
120
200
3000
Qs (mc/h)
1,5
2,5
3,5
6
10
15,5
Code
755410
755411
755412
755413
755414
755415
Connect.
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
DN 125
DN 150
DN 200
Meas. type Q i (mc/h)

Woltmann
1,0
1,4
Woltmann
2,0
Woltmann
3,5
Woltmann
4,5
Woltmann
8,0
Woltmann
Q p (mc/h)
25,
45,
70,
100,
150
250,
Qs (mc/h)
50,
80,
120,
200,
300
500,
Dimensions
165
147
165
147
40
40
PN

K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
Utente
88
1/2
M07 1259
07185865
Utente
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
755810
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
PN
Numero di serie
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
755810

K=
l/imp.
PUSH
120
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
120
PUSH
1/2
B
Code
755404
755405
755406
755407
755408
755409
A
1/2"
3/4"
1"
1 1/4"
1 1/2"
2"
B
110
130
260
260
300
300
C
18
18
43
43
46
57
D
108
108
159
159
185
199
E
80
80
102
102
136
166
F
190
226
358
378
438
458
H
44
51
60
73
80
90
G
59
69
87
99
109
126
Weight (Kg)
2,8
3,2
5,2
5,5
8,5
9,5
Code
755410
755411
755412
755413
755414
755415
A
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
DN 125
DN 150
DN 200
B
200
225
250
250
300
350
C
85
95
105
118
135
162
D
205
245
255
278
312
368
E
200
200
225
270
300
375
F
34
34
25
17
17
17
Weight (Kg)
12
16
20
23
38
55
Pre-installation guidelines
It is good practice to provide shut-off valves upstream and downstream of the meter in order to facilitate installation and maintenance, if
required.
Upstream from the flow rate gauge, it is necessary to fit a filtering device in order to protect the gauge.
From diameter 1/2 to diameter 2, this filter is already inside the flow temperature pocket.
After installation, it is good practice to wash the pipes and carry out a pressure test.
After washing and before installing the temperature probes, it is wise to check the mesh filter saturation level.
After completing the hydraulic installation you can install the electric/electronic parts.
When work has been completed, qualified technicians will lead seal the electronic module and the temperature probes.
Hydraulic installation diagrams

Normally the flow rate gauge should be installed on the return pipe.
The hydraulic diagrams given below show:
a) Positioning the gauge
The flow rate gauge should preferably be installed in a horizontal position with the turbine axis vertical, respecting the flow direction indicated by
the arrow on the body, and so that it is in standby when there is no service.
b) Positioning the probes
The temperature probes (by means of the pocket or sleeve according to the DN) must be positioned on the corresponding flow/return pipes.
The corresponding flow and return pipes are understood to be the ones involved with the same flow rate when the flow has started.
1) Diagram of system with metering on manifold with several stages.
PUSH
PUSH
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
Utente
Utente
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
Utente
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
M07 1259
07185865
THERMIE
G
System
system
3) Diagram of user circuit in system with 4 pipes.
2) Diagram of user circuit - adjustment with 3-way zone valves.
REFRIGERATION
UNIT
system
kWh
kWh
Heating unit
R.U.
Maintenance work
H.U.
Metering variants (systems with 4 pipes)

The CONTECA system is able, after the software has been activated
(see refrigeration unit option code 755810), to keep separate records
of the thermie and refrigeration units. The CONTECA system also
makes it possible to keep a record of thermie and refrigeration units
in a four-pipe distribution system.
Filter cleaning
Sometimes it will be necessary to clean the filter installed in the
flow circuit in a suitable position for the protection of the flow
rate gauge.
For a 7554 series complete meter with the addition of just 1 pulse
positive displacement meter code 75591. of 2 pockets code
75590. and of 2 probes code 75593. it is possible to take two
complete and separate thermie/refrigeration unit measurements.
By observing the instantaneous flow rate and thermal gradient

values (flow rate significantly reduced in relation to the nominal user
value and thermal gradient significantly increased), it is easy to
work out whether the filter is saturated and then clean it as
necessary.
DN 200
DN 150
DN 125
DN 100
DN 80
DN 65
2"
1 1/2"
1 1/4"
1"
1/2"
p (m w.g.)
3/4"
Positive displacement meter + pockets for probe (if threaded connection)

p (kPa)
4,5
4
3,5
3
45
40
35
30
2,5
25
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
18
16
14
12
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
9
8
7
6
0,5
50
20
10
0,45
0,40
0,35
0,30
4,5
4
3,5
3
0,25
2,5
0,25
2
1
500
250
300
350
400
450
200
120
140
160
180
100
60
70
80
90
50
30
35
40
45
25
20
12
14
16
18
7
8
9
10
3
3,5
4
4,5
2,5
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
0,5
0,1
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
Q (m3/h)
The dotted red line indicates the head loss (P=2 m. w.g.) for threaded connections and (p=2 m. w.g.) for flanged connections referring to
the permanent flow rate (Qp).
CONTECA meter electrical connections
A
Mass meter Thermie/Refrigeration units
m3
m3
IMP
FT
HW (domestic hot water) meter

DCW (domestic cold water) meter
Generic pulse meter:
- gas
- electric
- technological or dual water
Flow temperature probe
RT
RT Return temperature probe
FT2
2nd flow temperature probe (16 17)
RT2
2nd return temperature probe (15 16)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
PUL
Return
Flow temp. probe
m3
Return temp. probe
m3
III Pulse
II Pulse
Heat./Cond
I Pulse
Meter
Zone valve status
Polarised cable
Rx
24 V (a c)
When mounting in a box or directly on a wall,

use the screws provided in the package,
fixing them in the curved slots that in order to
level the device correctly ( A ).
Tx
Flow
RT
FT
Heating probes
(for systems with 2 pipes)
The CONTECA heat meter features various metering configurations referring to two-pipe or four-pipe and aggregated pulse acquisition systems
that determine set connection positions.
Two-pipe system
1) Thermie and/or refrigeration unit metering
6
7 Zone valve status*
Four-pipe system
6 - 7 Heating zone valve status*
9 - 10 Mass meter
7 - 8 Cooling zone valve status*
19 - 20 Flow temperature probe (FT)

18 - 19 Return temperature probe (RT)
9 - 10 Heating mass meter

10 - 11 Cooling mass meter
19 - 20 Heating flow temperature probe (FT)
2) Pulse acquisition (Type OA-OC)

2.1) A single pulse meter
10 - 11 DHW or DCW
18 - 19 Heating return temperature probe (RT)

16 - 17 Cooling flow temperature probe (FT2)
(Ist pulse consumption)
15 - 16 Cooling return temperature probe (RT2)

2) Pulse acquisition
2.2) Two pulse meters

2.1) A single pulse meter
10 - 11 DHW
12 - 13 DCW
(IInd pulse consumption)
12 - 13 DHW or DCW

2.2) Three pulse meters
10 - 11 DHW
12 - 13 DCW
13 - 14 Generic
(IIIrd pulse consumption)
*connection obligatory for certification
12 - 13 DHW
13 - 14 DCW
Centralised power supply 24 V (ac)
3 - 5
Polarised transmission bus
The heat meter is equipped with a liquid crystal display.

The display is activated by pressing the button on the front .
By repeatedly pressing the button briefly it is possible to scroll
through the various information windows.
In order to extend the battery life, the display is switched off 30 s
after the probe button was last pressed.
PUSH
3 Tx (Transmission)
5 Rx (Reception)
For the transmission bus, use an unshielded 2 x 1 mm2
FROR 450/750 2x1 CEI 20-2211 IMQ cable (our code 755855/N).
Note: The transmission polarity must be fully observed.
Energy pulse outputs, code 755881/755882
Heating - Energy (Thermie)
Cooling - Energy (Refrigeration units)
1 - 2
User information cycle
Data centralisation
In the case of centralised data transmission via bus the following
connection plan must necessarily be carried out:
21 - 22 Remote refrigeration unit totaliser output (kWh) (Type OC)
Carrier medium volume
21 - 23 Remote thermie totaliser output (kWh) (Type OC)
Output relay code 755871

Relay 8 A - 230 V (ac) - 50 Hz
2nd pulse consumption
3rd pulse consumption
1st pulse consumption
Output specifications:
1 IMP = 1 kWh - open collector contact
Pulse duration: 120 ms
Max. frequency = 1 Hz
These outputs can be connected to our code 755890 (remote energy

totaliser) or a general supervisor.
24 - 25 N/O
Flow rate
25 - 26 N/C
7 - 8
General status and/or alarm input
Flow temperature
Operating information
The accumulated energy amounts are retrieved in a non-volatile
memory device (EEPROM) each time the units of measurement are
completed (1 kWh) and, at the same time, this increase causes the
display to be updated (see User information cycle).
- When the electricity mains is connected (24 V (ac)), the following
occurs:
- display always on
- metering always enabled
- If the electricity mains is not connected, the following occurs:
- display off but can be activated for 20 seconds each time the
PUSH button is pressed.
Tamper
Bus network address
- Help the cables to pass through by breaking and shaping the

plastic partition in the cable fairlead.
The basic function of the partition is to protect the electronics
card from dust and jets of water.
Thermal gradient
CKSUM
- Each 7554 series device is supplied with an anti-tamper lead

sealing kit for the temperature probes and for the plastic
electronics box.
Return temperature
Segment test
Notes: - If centralised data transmission is used, the 24 V (ac)

electricity supply line should be used solely for that purpose
and not directly controlled by the user.
Power
Privileged to connect the ON/OFF status of the zone valve.

For the ON times an internal register is increased by the
hours of opening.
6 - 7
Digital inputs
The digital inputs must have no potential (class IB)
Test instructions
The 7554 series calculator is equipped with a quick output
test feature, located inside the plastic container.
In order to access this, remove the seal and take out the
fixing screws.
The electronics card on the deepest level has a button on
the very edge of the right-hand side (fig. 1) which can be
used to select the technical menu.
The pulse input can be simulated by connecting pins 9 - 10 (fig. 3).

The maximum input frequency is 1 Hz.
(fig. 3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
m3
PUL
Return
Flow temp. probe
m3
III Pulse
II Pulse
Heat./Cond
I Pulse
Meter
Polarised cable
Rx
24 V (ac)
F
Tx
Return temp. probe
(fig. 1)
Flow
RT
FT
Heating probes
(for systems with 2 pipes)
The probes, which are absolutely inseparable from the electronics circuit,
may be placed in a thermostatic bath, observing the temperature range
1090C and taking into account a T of between 380 K.
Use the button (push) on the display front panel to scroll
through the screens. The unit of measurement for the
energy - test is Wh (fig. 2).
The energy increases on the basis of the following equation:

E =
TV0,277769810-3 [Wh]
= heat coefficient [kJ/m3K]
(fig. 2)
d - Date (DD.MM.YY)
t - Time (hh.mm)
E1+ - Thermie - Test
T = temperature variation [K]

V = volume variation [ l ]
V = NP
where N = number of pulses
P = pulse value for each litre
If the errors, after the metrological checking of the CONTECA meter
in the 7554 series, are greater than the max. permitted value, the product
should be sent to the Caleffi S.p.A. head office; 28010 Fontaneto dAgogna;
S.R. 229 n 25; ITALY, for metrological requalification.
E1- - Refrigeration units - Test
Operating specifications
1) The software used to control the metering process, in order to avoid unnecessary action or unwanted metering procedures, operates on the
principle that consumption processing depends on a specific flow temperature value (FT).
The thermie cycle is activated for a FT value >22C (factory set).
The refrigeration unit cycle is activated for a FT value <15C (factory set).
The set values may be modified by an authorised technician on request.
2) The software used to control the metering process also operates on the principle that consumption processing depends on the presence
of a minimum temperature difference in order to further safeguard against unnecessary measurements or minimal unwanted metering
deriving from natural dispersion. At the time of factory setting, a dead band of 0,4 K (factory set) is therefore defined.
3) The software used to control the metering process also works on the principle that the flow rate gauge is installed on the return pipe.
Authorised technicians can, on request, adapt the configuration set so as to position the gauge on the flow pipe.
DATA CENTRALISATION
Architecture of centralisation
- It is understood that every individual may have a specific idea
relating to the complexity of the system and personal
expectations.
- It is also understood, for this very reason, that in general there is
no divine law governing the drafting of a particular architecture.
It is therefore true to say that an increase in the number of users,
combined with the application of a centralised system, will
necessarily increase the complexity of this system.
In order to distinguish between a normal system and a
complex system, you could argue that a centralised system with
over 25 users could be a complex system which, for many
obvious management-related reasons, practically requires
continuous monitoring.
Therefore, if the distinction made can, in principle, be perceived
as correct, you can establish the following:
WORKS for a NORMAL SYSTEM

- Metering system
- Laying down central power supply
- Laying down transmission bus (code 755855/N)
- Using FAST INTERFACE (code 755055) alternatively:
- Using FAST/REMOTE INTERFACE (code 755056)
- Using modem (code 755845 - 755846)
WORKS for COMPLEX SYSTEMS (25 users or more)
- Metering system
- Laying down central power supply
- Laying down transmission bus (code 755855/N)
- Using CONTECA controller (code 755010)
- Using GSM modem (code 755846)
- Using data breakdown software (code 755830)
and as an option
- Individual user control (code 755871)
(A) Controller (max no. of 250 users)
PUSH
Utente
2008
M08 1259
Numero di serie
GSM
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
M08 1259
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
755846
755010
PUSH
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
2008
76072
Anno di produzione
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
76072
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
Utente
CALEFFI
230 V ~
PUSH
Utente
Controller
2008
M08 1259
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
Remote acquisition
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
M08 1259
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
2008
76072
Anno di produzione
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
76072
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
PUSH
Utente
(B) Interface Fast (max no. of 30 users)
PUSH
PUSH
Anno di produzione
Utente
2008
M08 1259
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
M08 1259
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
2008
76072
Anno di produzione
Utente
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
76072
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
Data
centralisation
Le
soluzioni
(A), (B) e
(C)
di centralizzazione
solutions
(A), (B) and
dei
datialternatives
sono una in
(C) are
to
alternativa
one anotheralle altre.
755055
FAST
FAST-TELE
AQUAPRO
Cod. 755055
Cod. 755056
Cod. 755060
Cod. 755500
Contatti Rel 4 x 8 A - 250 V
Sonde temp. 0 90C
Tamb. : 545C
Attenzione:
Componenti in tensione
IP 54
Alimentazione elettrica: 230 V (ac) - 50 Hz - 10 W
Togliere lalimentazione prima di

aprire la scatola
76049
24 V ~
230 V ~
Local acquisition
Fast
Bus transmission line 2-way x 1 mm2 (755855/N)
24 V ~ centralised electric supply line
PUSH
PUSH
755810
Anno di produzione
2008
M08 1259
PN

K=
l/imp.
Numero di serie
Utente
76072
76072
M08 1259
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
2008
Utente
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
CALEFFI S.p.A.
M08 1259
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
2008
Utente
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
76072
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
N.B.:
The transmission bus code 755855/N is a 2-way device (section
2 x 1 mm2). The controller allows a maximum of 250 users.
The laying methods are in accordance with tree distribution (star).
The maximum length of each individual section is 1200 m.
It is possible to lay up to a maximum of 4 separate sections,
using code 755005.
LN
7554..
76072
755810
Anno di produzione
2008
M08 1259
PN

K=
l/imp.
Numero di serie
Utente
CALEFFI S.p.A.
M08 1259
Numero di serie
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
2008
Utente
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
M08 1259
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
2008
Utente
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
PUSH
76072
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
PUSH
76072
PUSH
L2
LB
PUSH
Anno di produzione
Utente
2008
Numero di serie
M08 1259
CALEFFI S.p.A.
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
M08 1259
M08 1259
PUSH
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
2008
76072
Anno di produzione
Utente
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
2008
76072
Anno di produzione
Utente
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
76072
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
4a Section
3a Section
2 Section
1 Section
LA
Controller
cod. 755010
L1
LA + LB + ... + LN + L1 + L2 < 1.200 m
ELECTRIC-ELECTRONIC OPTIONS
controller
755871 OUT device
- Electric supply:
230 V (ac) 10% - 50 Hz - 60 W.
- Ambient conditions 1035C
with no dust.
- Maximum number of users:
250.
In centralised transmission and CONTECA controller mode (code

755010 ) the heating / cooling function can be activated /
deactivated remotely via SMS for every individual user.
Relay out specifications: 8 A - 230 V (ac) - cos = 1.
Includes:
- 1 touch-screen CPU
- 1 wall-mounting bracket
MANAGER version - connection in SERIES

Residences and hotels are particularly suitable types of users.
The controller has the following

feratures:
- 1 touch-screen LCD monitor for
viewing consumption and user
data.
- 1 RS232 port
- 1 RS485 port
- 2 USB ports
- 1 LAN port
Terminal 25 - 26
PUSH
Utente
SERIES
7554 . .
755871
739107
F N
BUS line
~ 24V (ac)
123456
646002
USER version - connection in PARALLEL

Holiday homes are a particularly suitable application.
Terminal 25 - 26
PUSH
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
Numero di serie
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Activating remote transmission via modem makes it possible to

transfer the log files, over a telephone line, onto a remote personal
computer.
Anno di produzione
Numero di serie
CALEFFI
Utente
Utente
PARALLEL
7554 . .
755846
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
External 56K analogue modem includes:

- 230 V (ac) - 50 Hz - 10 W power supply unit
- Telephone cable
- Serial cable
- Quick start guide for the installation of the drivers with CD-ROMs.
- RS232C serial port interface / Standard V.92
Anno di produzione
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
external 56 K analogue modem
PUSH
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
Utente
The function of the controller is to acquire, via bus, all the totalised
values of the individual users (thermie / refrigeration units / mass / hours
of opening of the zone valve), consumer operating status (ON/OFF),
totalised values from the additional pulse meters (domestic cold/hot
water) and operational diagnostics.
All the above-described totalised values are recorded on a daily basis
in log files that are useful for consumption analysis and cost breakdown.
The remote transmission and print software for consumption data is
supplied with the product.
755845
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
7550 CONTECA
755871
739107
Digital GSM modem
The modem is supplied with an activation request module. It the

customers responsibility to activate the SIM card. Activating
remote transmission via modem makes it possible to transfer the
log files, over a telephone line, onto a remote personal computer
and to send activation / deactivation SMS messages.
~24V (ac)
123456
BUS line
The GSM modem is a dual-band GSM900/1800 device which is

capable of managing AT Modem commands. It is an external
device and includes:
- Power supply unit with input 230 V (ac) 50 Hz - 3 VA / Output 8-30 V (dc)
- Mini Sim card reader (Sim card NOT supplied)
- FME-F antenna connector for antenna cable
- Antenna cable: standard length 2 m
- 9-pole sub-D female connector V.24/V.28 for RS 232C serial
port output
Operating specifications:
- Dual-Band GSM900 and GSM1800
- GSM compatible phase 2/2+
Output power:
- Class 4 (2W) GSM900
- Classe (1W) GSM1800
SMS specifications:
- Point to Point Mobile Originated
- Point to Point Mobile Terminated
- SMS Cell Broadcast
F N
646002
In this regard, entering a database of enabled phone numbers for

a specific user on the controller is the users security code. It is
possible to add up to 3 enabled cellphone numbers.
ID
TEL. 1
TEL. 2
TEL. 3
1
2
3
....
Any change in the enabled phone numbers can only be made by
technical personnel authorised by the system manager
(Administrator - Service - Certifier).
755830
75588.
Software for the breakdown of

costs relating to heat consumption
The software can be used to transfer or manage log

files containing consumption data; these log files are
transferred as necessary onto an office PC to produce
a printout of consumption and heating cost breakdown
(thermie and refrigeration units), as well as any
additional
consumption
(domestic
water/electricity/gas).
The reports are generated in Windows.
Pulse output
The pulse output can be used to transfer the thermie and/or

refrigeration unit energy values to a generic acquirer. The pulse
weighs 1 kWh.
The pulse output with no potential is an open collector with pulse
period 120 ms - Vmax 24 V (dc).
Code
755881 Single pulse output - THERMIE

755882 Double pulse output - THERMIE/REFRIGERATION UNITS
N.B.: A comprehensive installation and user guide manual is an aid

to performing the various operational steps.
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
Utente
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
Terminal 21 - 23 Thermie
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Terminal 21 - 22 Refr. units
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
Utente
755881
755882
7554 . .
7554 . .
Consumption certification
The natural difficulties in starting up a centralised system
suggest it is wise to rely on a competent SERVICE, monitoring
the first year of operation and then hopefully confirming this
service for future years.
Monitoring acquisition
sheet
Relying on a competent service means:

- Having installed a centralized transmission system (controller code
755010 and modem, GSM code 755846).
- Formally providing the service company with consent for the
processing of your personal data.
and therefore:
- On request, Caleffi (via a regional service) offers FREE
monitoring of consumption data for the first year of
operation.
- Caleffi sends monthly reports on the CERTIFIED consumption
to the administration manager of the complex.
At the end of the first year of operation, Caleffi, through its own
regional services, offers product service and consumption
certification contractors in times and manners to be defined.
The CONTECA system offers many options: some are dictated by the
plant engineering system (thermie/refrigeration units), others are
suggested by the presence of a central transmission bus (pulse
aggregation for other consumption data), others are for management
(user status) with user enabling/disabling.
755810
Refrigeration unit metering
The CONTECA meter, once the software module has been

activated, is able to keep a record of the thermie and
refrigeration units in separate registers through the evaluation
of the thermal gradient inversion, both for current values and for
log files.
755890
Remote energy totaliser
Electronic 8-digit LCD totaliser equipped with cover plate for

three-slot recessed electric box.
Lithium battery: duration 8 years - max. frequency 20 Hz
Suitable for pulse outputs code 75588..
Cable length (2x1 mm2) not supplied by us: max. 150 m.
CALEFFI
23 Thermie
22 Refrigeration
units
ENERGIA kWh
755825
0V
21
Pulse input acquisition generic
The CONTECA module can, through the application of

Hardware/Software code 755825, acquire an additional pulse
input (as well as the 2 already dedicated to DHW and DCW).
Sometimes, and normally when there is a controller (code 755010, it
is beneficial to use the bus to transfer the user data in terms of
consumption (gas meter / electricity meter). The generic pulse
input must have no potential (no voltage, maximum frequency
1 Hz). Class IB. Residences and hotels are particularly suitable
types of users.
7554 series
CONTECA direct heat meter conforming to directive 2004/22/CE (MID) for use in heating and air-conditioning systems, with
the following characteristics: hot water positive displacement meter with magnetic joint (maximum temperature 90C), with
pulse output, NTC temperature probe, 8-digit data display, temperature range 1090C, protection class IP 54, transmission via
TWO-WAY bus in accordance with M-bus mode, electric supply 24 V (ac) 50 Hz - 1 W. Designed for remote activation of user
services. Options: 3 additional pulse inputs - 2 voltage-free digital inputs for status/alarm - 1 relay output.
Code 755010
Compact touch-screen CONTECA controller, equipped with RS232 - RS485, USB and LAN ports, with user monitoring
function (max. 250) and daily logging of consumption data. Enabled for SMS message alarm and remote activation
management, and for automatic transmission of data via email and FTP server. Electric supply 230 V (ac).
Code 755055/755056
HW-SW interface for consumption data acquisition via digital transmission, in M-Bus mode. Electric supply 230 V (ac) 50 Hz - 5 VA. Includes software. Maximum number of users: 30. Code 755056 is designed for transmission via
analogue/digital modem code 755845/755846. Ambient temperature range 1035C. Dimensions: width 160 mm x height
125 mm x depth 40 mm.
7940 series
User domestic water cut-off for centralised system with user module featuring direct local reading meter, consisting of:
1/2 (3/4) direct reading positive displacement meter, BALLSTOP ball shut-off valve with incorporated check valve, ball
shut-off valve with male terminal, fixing screws and collars.
7941 series
User domestic water cut-off for centralised CONTECA system consisting of: 1/2 (3/4) positive displacement meter
with pulse output (K=10), BALLSTOP ball shut-off valve with incorporated check valve, ball shut-off valve with male
terminal, fixing screws and collars.
7930 - 7931 series
User domestic water cut-off for centralised CONTECA system. 7930 series with direct local reading meter.
7931 series with positive displacement meter with pulse output (K=10). Consist of: pair of BALLSTOP ball shut-off
valves with incorporated check valve, pair of 1/2 (3/4) positive displacement meters with/without pulse output,
thermostatic mixing valve, fittings.
Code 755810
Refrigeration unit metering. Upon activation of the software module, CONTECA is able to keep a record of the thermal
units and refrigeration units, on the evaluation of the temperature difference reversal, in separate registers for both the
current values and for the logged files.
Code 75588.
The single pulse output code 755881 or the double pulse output code 755882 can be used to transfer the thermie and/or
refrigeration unit energy values to a generic acquirer. The pulse weighs 1 kWh. The pulse output with no potential is
open collector with pulse time 120 ms - Vmax 24 V (dc).
Code 755890
Electronic 8-digit LCD totaliser equipped with cover plate for three-slot recessed electric box. Lithium battery: duration
8 years - maximum frequency 20 Hz. Suitable for pulse outputs code 75588.. Cable length (2x1 mm2) not supplied by us:
maximum 150 mm.
CERTIFICATION OF EVALUATION PROCEDURE FOR CONFORMITY TO

DIRECTIVE 2004/22/EC (MID directive)
CONTECA 7554 series

With reference to CONTECA 7554 series heat
meters, please note that the procedure for
conformity to the requirements of directive
2004/22/EC, better known as the MID (Measuring
Instruments Directive), has been completed.
This directive has been made binding in Italy by
means of Italian Law Decree N 22 dated 2nd
February 2007, which makes it obligatory to
use only meters that conform to the MID within
the Italian market.
Typical examination certificate (in accordance

with form B - MID directive)
Certificate of conformity for production process (in

accordance with form D - MID directive)
CALEFFI
Motorised zone valves

Z-one
CALEFFI
series 642 - 643
01115/04 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The zone valves allow the automatic shut-off of circuits in heating
and air conditioning systems.
The series 642 (two-way) and 643 (three-way) zone valves are
equipped with a spring return actuator with a synchronous motor
and auxiliary microswitch. They are therefore extremely versatile
and suitable for use in both heating and air conditioning systems.
The actuator is fitted with a mechanism for rapidly clipping it onto
the body of the valve which also makes it easy to remove.
Product range
Series 642 Two-way motorised zone valve
Series 643 Three-way motorised zone valve
sizes: 1/2; 3/4 and 1

sizes: 1/2; 3/4 and 1
Dimensions
Valve body
Materials: - body:
- paddle stem:
stainless steel
- paddle:
EPDM
Medium:
Temperature range:
Peak temperature of fluid:
Connections:
water, gycol solutions

30%
0 90C
110C
16 bar
1/2, 3/4, 1 F
( NC)
(NC) A
B (NA)
AB
Actuator
Materials: - base and cover:
PC G10
Synchronous motor:
Normally closed
Supply:
230 V - 50 Hz
Power consumption:
6,5 W; 7 VA
Opening time:
70 75 s
Closing time:
57 s
Microswitch contacts rating:
0,8 A
Protection class:
IP 40
40C
Complies with Directives: 73/23/EC and 89/336/EC
Length of power cable:
95 cm
A
B
Code
642042 1/2 78
642052 3/4 78
642062 1
88
W eight (kg)
24
24
24
90
94
94
0,97
0,98
1,10
Code
643042 1/2 78
643052 3/4 78
643062 1 88
Weight (kg)
31,5 90,5 1,03

31,5 94,5 1,05
46,5 94,5 1,20
Operating principle
With the electrical supply off, the actuator keeps the valve in the
closed position. When an ambient temperature thermostat or other
electrical device switches the supply on, the actuator moves the
paddle into the open position.
When the supply is turned off, the valve closes again due to the
action of a return spring.
Auxiliary microswitch
The actuator is fitted with a microswitch to operate devices such as,
for example, a circulating pump. The microswitch comes on when
the valve is 60% open.
Valve operating states

2 way
3 way
With supply off
Passage A closed
A closed
B open
AB open
With supply on
Passage A open
A open
B closed
AB open
Opened manually
Passage A open
A open
B open
AB open
Manual opening
The valve can be opened manually by moving
the lever to lock open position. When the
power is re s t o red the manual control is
automatically overridden.
Clip on actuator
A rapid clip-on system makes it easy to
remove it from the body of the valve for
maintenance or replacement operations.
Warning: the actuator can only be used
with valve bodies 642 and 643 series.
Operation
The actuator is fitted with a special mechanism for gradual
movement of the valve paddle which prevents judder and vibration
due to the inertia of the gearmotor.
Flow curves
642 series
2-way zone valve
P (mm w.g.)
1/2
3/4
1 P ( kPa)
4000
40
30
3000
2000 1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
(NC)A
20
18
16
14
12
900
800
700
9
8
7
600
400
10
500
200
5
300
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
40
0,4
30
0,3
18
16
14
12
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
100
50
2
1
0,5
20
0,2
0,1
10
G (l/h)
1/2
P (mm w.g.)
3/4
1 P ( kPa)
4000
643 series
3-way zone valve
40
3000
30
2000 1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
(NC )A
18
16
14
12
B (NA )
AB
20
10
900
800
700
9
8
7
600
400
300
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
0,9
0,8
70
0,7
60
0,6
40
0,4
30
0,3
18
16
14
12
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
500
200
100
50
20
2
1
0,5
10
0,2
0,1
G (l/h)
Connection
1/2
3/4
1
AB
Kv (m /h)
(2-way) (3-way)
2,5
2,5
4,5
4,5
6
6
3
Max. differential pressure (kPa)

210
150
100
Installation
Removal of the actuator
- The valve can be fitted either vertically or horizontally, with the actuator in
any position, except upside down.
1. Set the lever on the side of the actuator to the open

position (or to manual opening).
2. Press the open button on the side of the actuator
and remove the actuator.
360
- When installed inside a casing it is important to ensure that there is

adequate ventilation inside the casing itself.
- The three-way valve cannot be transformed into a two-way valve and vice
versa.
- When zone valves are installed, the correct direction of flow must be
observed as shown in the diagrams below.
- Two-way zone valves can be installed on both the flow and return sides;
the direction of flow indicated by the arrow on the body of the valve must
be observed.
Fitting of the actuator
2-way
(with the power off, passage
A is closed)
2-way installed on the flow side
1. Set the lever on the side of the actuator to the open

position (or manual opening).
2. Check that the actuator is correctly positioned with
respect to the valve as determined by the different
dimensions of the operating stem and the locking pin.
3. P ress the open button fully down. Clip on the
actuator and release the button.
(NC)
2-way installed on the return side
3-way
(with the power off, passage
A is closed)
3-way installed on the flow side with

diverter position and ON/OFF services
L
N
230 V / 50 Hz
Thermostat
(NC)
A
AB
B (NO)
AB
M
3-way installed on the return side with
mixer position and ON/OFF services
A
AB
AB
1 Brown
2 Blue
3 Grey
4 Orange
5 Yellow/Green
diagram
Application
Shut-off valve
RT
Manual valve
Electric pump
RT
Room thermostat
Check valve
Insulated manifold
Adjustable differential
by-pass
Zone system
RT
RT
CHILLER
Two-pipe system
Series 642
Two-way motorised zone valve. Threaded connections 1/2 F (from 1/2 to 1). Brass body. Valve stem in EPDM.
Cover in reinforced polycarbonate. Temperature range: 0 90C. Peak temperature of fluid: 110C. Maximum working
pressure: 16 bar. Maximum differential pressure: 210 kPa (1/2: 210 kPa, 3/4: 150 kPa, 1: 100 kPa). Maximum percentage
of glycol: 30%. Actuator: Voltage 230 V (ac). Power consumption: 6,5 W; 7 VA. Maximum ambient temperature: 40C.
Opening time: 70 75 s. Closing time: 5 7 s. Fitted with auxiliary microswitch, contacts rating: 0,8 A. Protection class: IP 40.
Series 643
Three-way motorised zone valve. Threaded connections: 1/2 F (from 1/2 to 1). Brass body. Valve stem in EPDM.
Cover in reinforced polycarbonate. Temperature range: 0-90C. Peak temperature of fluid: 110C. Maximum working
pressure: 16 bar. Maximum differential pressure: 210 kPa (1/2: 210 kPa, 3/4: 150 kPa, 1: 100 kPa). Maximum percentage
of glycol: 30%. Actuator: Voltage 230 V (ac). Power consumption: 6,5 W; 7 VA. Maximum ambient temperature: 40C.
Opening time: 70 75 s. Closing time: 5 7 s. Fitted with auxiliary microswitch, contacts rating: 0,8 A. Protection class: IP 40.
CALEFFI
H t t p : / / w w w. c a l e ffi.com E-mail: info@caleffi.it
Ice detection and control system
CALEFFI
series 605
01117/04 GB
Function
The control unit detects the presence of ice and snow by a sensor
that measures outside temperature and relative humidity.
There are two types of sensor:
- code 605010 and 605020 suitable for open spaces such
as garages, parking places, steps, footpaths or loading ramps;
- code 605030 used for gutters, flat roofs or dish antennas.
Once the risk of ice formation has been detected, the unit is
capable of switching on heating devices for the surfaces at risk.
Product range
Code
Code
Code
Code
605000
605010
605020
605030
Control unit for detecting ice/snow

Temperature and relative humidity sensor for open outdoor areas with 6 metre cable
Temperature and relative humidity sensor for open outdoor areas with 20 metre cable
Temperature and relative humidity sensor for gutters, flat roofs and dish antenna with 6 metre cable
Control unit
Sensors
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Outlet terminal:
Insulation test:
Protection class:
230 V 6% - 50 Hz
10 VA
230 V - 6 A -- with zero voltage
50 C
4 kV
II (after proper installation
on the bar to DIN 43880

Protection class:
Cable length:
-30 80C
IP 68
- 605010: 6 m
- 605020: 20 m
- 605030: 6 m
all extendable up to 50 m
The cable used is oil sealed of the type SL-Y11Y to DIN VDE
0472/9.21 Abs. 8036.
Dimensions
40
30
60
90
1 - Temperatura minima
2 - Durata attivazione
4
5
TEMPERATURA
1
5
+
UMIDITA
RISCALDAMENTO
RETE
Code
605000
A
107
C
B
88
C
60
Weight (kg)
0,38
Code
A
605010 68
605020 68
B
5
5
-2
-3
-1
T50
6(2)A
230V 10VA 50 Hz
TEST
-5
CALEFFI
0
50
-10
C
B
-25
-15
-20
G
C
31
31
D
E
F
51 55 67
51 55 67
G
24
24
Code
605030
A
150
B
16
C
32
Sensor functioning
Control unit functions
10
The sensors measure ambient temperature and relative humidity.

code 605010 and 605020
-15
-20
-25
-10
40
-5
30
60
90
CALEFFI
0
code 605030
50
1 - Minimum temperature
2 - Operating time
TEST
T50
6(2)A
230V 10VA 50 Hz
-1
-2
-3
TEMPERATURE
TFTFFF FF
4
1
5
+
HUMIDITY
HEATING
POWER
SH L L N
1. Minimum working temperature

The temperature setting range is from -5 to -25C. Recommended:
-15C. The selector is for setting the temperature at which the unit
stops functioning temporarily.
2. Heating time
Setting range: from 30 to 90 minutes.
The time set is the minimum that the heating will operate for (outlet
SH on the terminal board).
3. Temperature
The LED comes on if the sensor detects a temperature lower than
that set with selector 4. If this occurs, the sensor is ready to
measure the relative humidity as indicated in the paragraph
Sensor Functioning.
4. Maximum working temperature
The temperature setting range is from -3 to +5C. Recommended: +4C.
The selector is for setting the temperature at which the unit stops
functioning temporarily.
5. Sensitivity of relative humidity sensor
Setting range: from 1 to 5. Recommended: 4.
The sensitivity of the ice and snow detection system is lowest when
set on 1. This means that the sensor must be very wet to detect the
presence of humidity. On position 5, instead, it is very sensitive.
Two heat sensors are located inside the sensor units completely
embedded in protective polymer:
- an NTC which measures temperature;
- a hybrid PTC with a metallic electrode (more reliable than sensors
that are normally used which can become dirty, corroded or short
circuit) which measures relative humidity.
The sensors function in combination with the control unit as follows:
1) the sensor detects a temperature lower than that set with
selector 4;
2) the sensor itself heats to melt ice or snow that may be present;
3) after 4 minutes the sensor measures the relative humidity as a
function of the change in the consumption of current;
4) if the relative humidity measured is higher than the value set by
selector 5, the heating is switched on because two determining
conditions are both met (low temperature and high relative
humidity);
5) the heating remains on for the time set using selector 2.
6) the sensor repeats the following two checks of the environment
5 minutes before the heating is switched off:
a) if the conditions are the same, the heating remains on for
another cycle;
b) if the temperature or the relative humidity have returned to
normal levels the heating switches off at the end of the period
set using selector 2.
Table of control unit and heating operation
6. Humidity
The LED flashes when the humidity is higher than the value set with
selector 5; it only flashes if the LED 3 Temperature is on.
Temperature
Control unit state
Heating state
outside the range

15C +4C
temporarily
off
off
within range
15C e +4C
with low RH%
on
off
within range
15C e +4C
with high RH%
on
on
7. Heating
The LED comes on when the heating is switched on.
8. Power
The LED is green and comes on when power is supplied to the
regulator.
9. Heating sensor
The LED is red and comes on when the sensor for measuring the
relative humidity is operating.
Wiring diagram of the detector system

-15
-25
10. Test button

The test button is used to switch the heating on regardless of the
real ambient conditions (LED 7 on). If a yellow LED (No. 6) starts to
flash during the test period, then a fault has occurred in the
humidity sensor.
50
-20
-10
40
-5
30
60
90
CALEFFI
0
-2
-3
TEST
T50
6(2)A
230V 10VA 50 Hz
-1
2 - Operating time
4
5
TEMPERATURE
TFTFFF FF
1
5
+
HUMIDITY
HEATING
code 605010
605020
POWER
SH L L N
230 V
heating
control
code 605030
Installation
Warning: a control unit can be connected to one sensor only.
Instructions for the 605010 and 605020 code sensor installation.
Instructions for the 605030 code sensor installation
The cable enters the bottom part of the sensor.
Position the sensor at the

centre of the gutter using the
screws supplied (warning the
thread of the screws must not
be longer than 10 mm). The
sensor must be fitted on the
drilled metal support supplied
which is clipped into the gutter
or surface to be controlled,
preferably close to the outlet of
the gutter itself.
The sensor must be fitted in a special embedded brass housing

supplied with it (see diagram) which allows easy fitting and
replacement if necessary.
Heating cable
It is recommended that the sensor is

located where low temperatures and
humidity are most probable such as in
shaded places.
Sensor
The sensors must be installed as

illustrated in figures 1 and 2 so that the
surface of the sensor is flush with the
surface of the ground.
If the sensor is fitted on ramps or sloping
surfaces they must be positioned
horizontally so that snow or melted water
is trapped by them.
Adhesive clip
Gutter sensor
Clip
Heating cable
If it is fitted on a dish antenna, it

should be fitted horizontally on
the lower flat part. The heating
cable must be fitted on the back
of the dish and fixed with the
adhesive clip (607120 code).
Heating cable
Sensor
Warning:
too
much
mechanical pressure on the
surface of the sensor may
damage it.
Ramp heating using

heating cable
Ramp heating using

underfloor radiant panels
It is recommended that the sensor

is positioned where the
tyre treads pass
40
60
40
80
20
100
60
152 series
Temperature
regulating unit
80
20
100
CALEFFI
25% 50%
100%
80%
19
20
18
16
15
21
55%
17
12
50
13
23
22
14
24
WATCH
60
70
40
80
30
90
12
11
-25%
+25%
-50%
-15
10
50
4
5
-20
-25
-10
30
-2
-3
-15
40
-5
30
60
90
CALEFFI
0
-2
-3
TEST
T50
6(2)A
230V 10VA 50 Hz
Sensor
4
1
5
+
HUMIDITY
HEATING
POWER
SH L L N
4
5
1
5
+
UMIDITA
RISCALDAMENTO
RETE
40
60
20
Heating cable
TEST
T50
6(2)A
230V 10VA 50 Hz
-1
TEMPERATURA
40
TFTFFF FF
50
-10
2 - Operating time
4
5
TEMPERATURE
-25
90
-1
-20
60
CALEFFI
559 series
Sepcoll
163 series
Thermostatic
regulating
unit
40
-5
80
60
20
80
230 V
pump control
-15
50
-20
-25
-10
40
-5
30
60
90
-2
-3
TEST
T50
6(2)A
230V 10VA 50 Hz
CALEFFI
0
-1
4
5
TEMPERATURA
1
5
+
UMIDITA
RISCALDAMENTO
RETE
Code 607100
Universal fitting
for heating cable
-15
Clips
-25
Gutter sensors
Heating cable
50
-20
-10
40
-5
30
60
90
CALEFFI
0
-2
-3
TEST
T50
6(2)A
230V 10VA 50 Hz
-1
2 - Operating time
4
5
TEMPERATURE
TFTFFF FF
1
5
+
HUMIDITY
HEATING
POWER
SH L L N
230 V
heating
control
Code 605000
Control unit for detecting ice. Power: 230 V. Rated output: 10 VA. Maximum ambient temperature: 50C. Protection class II.
Code 605010
Sensor for outdoor areas. 6 metre cable extendable to 50 m. Protection class: IP 68. Working temperature range: -30C to 80C.
Code 605020
Sensor for outdoor areas. 20 metre cable extendable to 50 m. Protection class: IP 68. Working temperature range: -30 to 80C.
Code 605030
Sensor for gutters, roofs, and dish antennas. 6 metre cable extendable to 50 m. Protection class: IP 68. Working temperature
range: -30 to 80C.
CALEFFI
Radio wave temperature control

systems
CALEFFI
740 series
01118/05 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
Over the last decade, technology has entered our homes with increasingly more
advanced audio/video systems and electrical appliances.
The new frontier is represented by the evolution of technical systems owing to
legitimate expectations of more comfortable, safer and more flexible household
systems.
Household automation via the development of the RADIO SYSTEM permits easily
integrating household management and control products and services.
Within this framework, the radio wave temperature control system is a significant
application:
-
easy to adjust temperature room by room

straightforward installation
modular integration
full freedom with interior decoration
Product range
740 series Radio wave temperature control
740204 code Power bar
740000 code Radio chrono-thermostat

740201 code Radio thermostat
740100
740101
740104
740202
code
code
code
code
Wall-mounting receiver
Concealed receiver
1 channel
1 channel
2 channels
8 channels
740102 code
740103 code
740112 code
740113 code
4 channels
6 channels
8 channels
Timer + wall-mounting receiver kit

Timer + concealed receiver kit
Timer + wall-mounting receiver + servomotor kit 646002 code
Timer + concealed receiver + servomotor kit 646002 code
Typical installations
230 V
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
t2
ON
H2O
- t1
- t2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
1 2 3 4 5 6
CALEFFI
t1/t2/t
ON OFF
H2O
- t1
- t2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
ON
ON
ON
230 V
RESET
356
t3
CALEFFI
1
RESET
Mod. Dep.
t2
CALEFFI
t1
t1/t2/t
OFF
t3
1 channel
1 channel
1 channel
1 channel
Weekly digital chrono-thermostat with radio transmitter
(740000 code)
Power supply:
2 x 1,5 V alkaline penlight
Operating time:
1 year
Frequency:
868,35 MHz
Maximum range in free air:
120 m
Antenna:
integrated
Contact capacity:
5 (2) A / 250 V
Installation:
wall mounting
Protection rating:
IP 30
Insulation class:
III
Control input for telephone programmer code 739000
Temperature levels:
2 + antifreeze
Reference standards:
Wall-mounting receiver:
Power supply:
Contact capacity:
Output type:
Reception frequency:
Protection rating:
Insulation class:
Recess-mounting receiver
for plastic consumer box:
Power supply:
Contact capacity:
Output type:
Protection rating:
Insulation class:
LVD EN 60 730-1
EMC EN 301 489-3
RADIO EN 300 220-3
Dimensions:
120 x 80 x 18 mm
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1/t2/t
ON OFF
H2 O
t1
t2
- t1
- t2
CALEFFI
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Programming: minimum 30 min

Manual function - Temporary function - Receiver coupling test function
- ON/OFF operation with adjustable differential from 0,2 to 0,7C.
Dimensions:
132 x 90 x 25 mm
1 channel (740100 code)

2 channels (740104 code)
ON
230 V - 50-60 Hz
5 (2) A / 250 V
free contact on switching
868,35 MHz
IP 30
II
130 m
CALEFFI
1
RESET
LVD EN 60 730-1
EMC EN 301 489-3
RADIO EN 300 220-3
Dimensions:
60 x 60 x 44 mm
1 channel (740101 code)

230 V - 50-60 Hz
5 (2) A / 250 V
N/O free contact
IP 30
II
max 120 m
ON
RESET
Dimensions:
76 x 81 x 40 mm
Thermostat with radio transmitter (740201 code)

Power supply:
2 x 1,5 V alkaline penlight
Operating time:
1 year
Frequency:
868,35 MHz
130 m
Operation: ON/OFF with differential that can be set from 0,3C to 0,6C
Protection rating:
IP 30
ON
CALEFFI
8-channel wall-mounting receiver (740202 code)

Power supply:
Input:
Max bus length:
Reception frequency:
Signal range in free air:
Protection rating:
Insulation class:
18 V (via control bar)

1 VA
100 m (2 x 0,5 mm2)
868,35 MHz
max 120 m
IP 30
II
Dimensions:
132 x 90 x 25 mm
ON
CALEFFI
1
RESET
LVD EN 60 730-1
EMC EN 301 489-3
RADIO EN 300 220-3
Power supply:
Input:
Output type:
230 V - 50-60 Hz
5,5 VA maximum (8 outputs)
relay with single-pole switchover contact
- Polarized N/O-N/C - 8 (2) A / 250 V
Auxiliary output type:
relay with single-pole switchover contact
potential-free N/O-N/C-COM - 8 (2) A / 250 V
Maximum total load 8 outputs:
16 A
Protection rating:
IP 52 (with rubber cable clamps)
Insulation class:
II
4 outputs + aux (740204 code)

Power bar:
Dimensions:
250 x 43 x 76 mm
1 - LED
Power supply 230 V present
2 - LED
Bus fault
3 - LED 18 Channel status
4 - LED
Pump status
Operational/functional characteristics
Relay output
Master function
Each relay output of the power bar has a double switchover.
The MASTER function is the authority of a temperature control

device to define periods of attenuation for itself and for the other
devices (slaves) associated with it.
N
L
The MASTER function can be performed only by the radio

chrono-thermostat (740000 code).
It is therefore possible to pilot both a two-wire and a 3-wire generic

valve.
- PUMP CONTROL
The pump control permits starting up the pump when there is an
active channel (zone) and stopping the pump when all the channels
are OFF.
Since thermo-electric actuators, characterised by a starting lag
(delay), are often installed, pump starting can be programmed in
the receiver as:
R - Delayed (120 s)
or
I - Instantaneous
After making this first distinction, the other temperature control

devices can, in the self-learning phase, be associated with a
specific master or remain completely independent.
All the devices associated in the learning phase are independent in
comfort operation as regards their temperature settings. The
temperature setting can be selected on the thermostat knob.
During attenuation, controlled by the master chrono-thermostat with
its clock function, the crossed devices check that the attenuation
setting selected on the master chrono-thermostat is observed.
FRONT PANEL OF 8-CHANNEL RECEIVER

ON - Power on
ON
It is nevertheless possible to combine more than one master in a

temperature control system.
The decision to have a temperature control system with a number
of master chrono-thermostats that interact with the 8-channel
receiver may be made in order to have 2 or more entirely separate
and independent zones as regards both time and temperature
levels.
- 3-level bus signal indicator lights
Lastly, all the devices (thermostats and chrono-thermostats too)

that are not combined with a master device act independently
according to their temperature settings.
The association criterion must follow the proper path:
Channel status LED

Keys for manual channel overside
Configuration RESET key
Pump status LED
RESET
temperature control device

receiver
control bar
valve servocontrol
In this connection it is possible, on the front of the receiver, to pin
the combined service channel by channel.
Radio systems - architecture

The modularity and ease of transmitter/receiver coupling make various operational architectures possible.
The modular implementation makes it easy, even in the future, to add on new temperature control devices.
All this is possible until the capacities of the receiver and differentiated outputs (power bar relay) are fully saturated.
The following suggestions are by no means exhaustive.
1) Temperature control of a single zone (consumer plumbing boxes made of metal).
740000 code
Receiver terminal board
740100 code
2) Temperature controls of a single zone (consumer plumbing box made of plastic).
740000 code
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
t2
230 V
t1/t2/t
ON OFF
H2O
- t1
- t2
t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
ON
RESET
Mod. Dep.
.peD .doM
CALEFFI
653
356
740101 code
IFFELAC
The distinction between wall-mounting receiver (740100 code) and concealed receiver (740101 code) depends on the type of material
(metal - plastic) of the plumbing box.
N.B. The metal boxes have the property of shielding the radio signals.
Note: For both solutions it is possible to supply a complete pre-wired kit.
740102 code - Timer + wall-mounting receiver
740112 code - Timer + wall-mounting receiver + servomotor 646002 code
740103 code - Timer + concealed receiver
740113 code - Timer + concealed receiver + servomotor 646002 code
3) Temperature control of two completely independent zones
With the same 2-channel wall-mounting receiver (740104 code) it is possible to have two setups.
- Each zone is governed by its own chrono-thermostat with its own time settings and levels of comfort and attenuation settings.
- The system pump is activated when required by a zone.
740000 code
- The system pump is stopped if no zone requires the temperature

control service.
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1/t2/t
ON OFF
H2O
t1
t2
- t1
- t2
t3
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
740104 code
Mod. Dep.
356
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
ON
ON
CALEFFI
1
RESET
N L
NC NA C NC NA C
A B
230 V
740000 code
1 2 3 4 5 6
230 V
L
N
t1/t2/t
ON OFF
H2O
t1
t2
- t1
- t2
t3
CALEFFI
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
4) Main zone temperature control with chrono-thermostat

Secondary zone temperature control with thermostat
The type of system is identical to that of example 3.
30
740201 code
In this example, the chrono-thermostat 740000 code, according to

its programming, determines the comfort and attenuation times for
both zones.
In periods of comfort zone 1 is temperature controlled according to the
first temperature setting and zone (2) is governed according to the
temperature setting selected on the radio thermostat (740201 code).
In periods of attenuation zone 1 and zone 2 are temperature
controlled according to the attenuation temperature setting of the
chrono-thermostat.
25
10
15
20
ON
CALEFFI
740104 code
Mod. Dep.
356
CALEFFI
ON
ON
SET 1
SET 2
CALEFFI
1
RESET
SET ATTEN.
230 V
COMFORT
740000 code
COMFORT
ATTENUAT.
t
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
t2
t1/t2/t
ON OFF
H2O
- t1
- t2
t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
5) Consumer temperature control with associated subzones
This setup, which provides room-by-room temperature control, is especially suited for panel heating systems where each loop is controlled by
a thermo-electric actuator (6560 series).
The control bar permits having electrical voltage all concentrated inside the consumer plumbing module.
1 2 3 4 5 6
5a Zone
740201 code
8-channel receiver (740202 code)
30
The 8-channel receiver acquires the ON/OFF operating information

from the single zone/subzone temperature control elements by
radio and, via the 2-way bus, transfers operation to the
corresponding output relays inside the control bar, turning the
relevant electric valve(s) on/off.
t1/t2/t
ON
15
20
ON
25
25
25
25
15
20
10
15
ON
- t1
- t2
10
ON OFF
H2O
t3
10
t2
10
t1
4a Zone
740201 code
30
3a Zone
740201 code
30
2a Zone
740201 code
30
1a Zone
740000 code
15
20
ON
20
CALEFFI
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
T1
CALEFFI
T2
CALEFFI
T3
CALEFFI
T4
T5
The control bar has three variants:

740204 code - 4 relays
ON
ON
Day
Ok
Reset
Prog
CALEFFI
1
740202 code
RESET
230 V
Under the control of a single relay it is possible to associate one

or more electrical valves (this is particularly suited to control a
room served by 2 - 3 floor loops where there is a single thermostat
or chrono-thermostat.
740208 code
The number of electric valves that can be associated is determined by

the saturation of the intensity of the current 5 (2) A of the contacts of the
single relay.
In the case of thermo-electric actuator (series 6560), devices with a
high input especially at start-up, the maximum number of controls
that can be associated with the same relay (channel) is:
40
60
20
80
45
CALEFFI
50
55
40
60
20
80
3
2
bar
4
5
1
656102 code - 230 V - max 4

656104 code - 24 V - max 2
Example of coupling
- Chrono-thermostat defined as master of devices T2 - T3 - T4 - T5
- Chrono-thermostat associated with channel 1 / T2 channel 2 / T3 channel 3 / T4 channel 4 / T5 channel 5.
RICEIVER
CONTROL BAR
1Channel 2Channel 3Channel 4Channel 5Channel
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
5 6
C A N C A N C A N C A N C A N
...
8Channel Pump
C A N L N
BUS
V1
Power supply 18 V
Power bar
V1 and V2 valves associated with channel 1

2
V3 and V4
V5 valve associated with channel 3

V6
4
5
V7
V2
V3
V5
V6
V7
V4
230 V
Diagram 5
Alternative solutions
Referring to diagram 5, which considers a single temperature
control device as master and all the others as slaves, we can see
how the user can reconfigure some devices either as masters of
themselves or of other devices.
It is likewise possible to suspend the master function temporarily.

The phase of personalization guided by audible and visual signals
is characterised by the self-learning function and permits these
modifications easily even by NON specialized personnel.
It is thus possible to split a large zone (consumer) into several

zones with or without associating the other temperature control
devices.
Tx-Rx SELF-LEARNING procedure
MASTER setup
The self-learning function is necessary in the phase of the

first installation to couple each transmission device
(chrono-thermostat/thermostat) with a specific channel of the
receiver.
This function is only active on the chrono-thermostat.

Remember that this function is used to combine a set of devices
that are already coupled (transmitter/receiver channel) with a main
device (MASTER) that, for the entire set, will modulate the periods
of comfort and attenuation.
- Press the TEST key on the thermostat or chrono-thermostat for at

least 4 seconds.
- Press the MASTER key on the chrono-thermostat until the display

shows
- By keeping the button pressed on the receiver for the channel

where you want to save the transmitter (e.g. channel 1), coupling
is performed.
MASTER
The channel LED blinks
- When the MASTER radio signal reaches the receiver, the channel
LEDs will show the current situation according to the following
logic
1) LED blinking
Channel under the domain of the active master
to confirm acquisition.
2) LED off
Channel free and not in the domain of the active master
- Turn off the TEST function on the thermostat or chrono-thermostat.

And then proceed in the same way to couple the other devices.
Any outputs on which the transmitting device defined master has

already been self-learned, it starts blinking since a self-learned
chrono-thermostat is already master of itself.
Note: When receiving a test signal the channel LED may be in the
following three conditions:
1) LED on steady
The channel is already occupied by another device
2) LED blinking
Channel learned by the device at that time in the test phase
3) LED off
The channel is free of devices
Signal diagnostics
During the self-learning procedure the receiver supplies the quality
of the signal at visual and audible level by progressively
illuminating the three LEDs accompanied by a beep.
LED 1 + LED 2 + LED 3 on - high power
LED 1 + LED 2 on - medium power
LED 1 on - low power
The visual-audible sequence is repeated cyclically every 3 seconds.
740000 code
Digital chrono-thermostat, with weekly programming and radio transmitter (transmission frequency 868,35MHz) with max
range 130 m in free air - 2 temperature levels + antifreeze - telephone control input - test function in couplings with the receiver.
740100 code
Wall-mounting radio receiver - 1 channel - with indication of RF signal level.
740101 code
Concealed radio receiver - 1 channel - with indication of RF signal level.
740104 code
Wall-mounting radio receiver - 2 channels - with pump activation and indication of RF signal level.
740201 code
Analog thermostat with radio transmitter (transmission frequency 868,35MHz) with max range 130 m in free air - test
function in coupling with the receiver - summer winter control.
740202 code
Wall-mounting radio receiver - 8 channels - with pump activation - equipped with control bus, reprogrammable non-volatile
memory for coupling and assigning to master - manual forcing of channel output status - three-level test signal visual and
audible indicator.
740204 code
Power bar with 4 channels with pump activation, channel status indicator light, dialogue on 2-wire bus equipped with
anchor slides on bottom of consumer plumbing box. Power supply 230 V.
740206 code
740208 code
CALEFFI
Heating cable
with constant power consumption
6065 series
CALEFFI
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01119/06 GB
Function
The heating system is generally composed of a heating cable and
a thermostat connected to the normal electric mains. It is used for
ice control and snow removal from ramps, steps, pedestrian
crossings and ramps for otherwise-abled persons. The heating
power released by the constant power consumption cable, on the
contrary to the self-regulating type, is independent of the
temperature. This feature ensures simple calculations for correct
sizing, low costs and ease of installation; in addition, it can also be
used to maintain temperature levels in rooms.
Product range
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Materials: - conductor:
- insulation:
- protection sheathing:
- outer coating:
- earth conductor:
606523
606532
606545
606568
606596
606512
coil
coil
coil
coil
coil
coil
of
of
of
of
of
of
122,9
131,9
145,4
168,1
196,4
120,1
m
m
m
m
m
m
Performance
double made of copper alloy
XLPE (cross-linked polymer)
aluminium
PVC with high tensile
strength and waterproofing
copper
Electric supply:
230 V (ac)
Power consumption:
28 W/m
Insulation resistance:
>500 M
Maximum adjustment temperature:
90C
Maximum temperature tolerated by the cable:
160C
Outside diameter:
7,5 mm
Minimum bendings radius:
5 times the diameter of the cable
Operating principle
The heating cable with constant power consumption is composed of a double copper alloy conductor with a earth conductor, XLPE
(cross-linked polymer) insulation and PVC outer coating. The cable is the resistive type, where the live conductor generates heat by the Joule
effect. The heating cable is supplied already terminated and ready for installation.
COLD CABLE
HOT CABLE
This is comprehensive of 10 metres of cold cable (that is the portion of non-resistive cable that ensures simple passage of current) with the
possibility of reducing it by cutting off the excess. The section is identifiable thanks to asterisks marked on the outer coating.
The joint between the hot cable and cold cable is marked with the word SPLICE, where the hot cable starts.
Sizing
The heating cable is supplied in coils of a fixed length and cannot be shortened or joined to another heating cable.
Depending on the location and pitch between the turns it is possible to determine the power per square metre to
supply.
The following table gives the average operating powers according to the situation:
Type of installation
Plain only ice
Plain ice plus snow
Mountain (above 800 metres) only ice
Mountain (above 800 metres) ice plus snow
Necessary power
180 W/m2
200 W/m2
200 W/m2
240 W/m2
The second table gives the surface area it is possible to control with each section of heating cable according to the required parameters.
The centre distance between the turns (pitch) depends on the power to install per square metre and can be obtained from the last row in the table.
Code
606523
606532
606545
606568
606596
606512
Length
Power
22,9 m
31,9 m
45,4 m
68,1 m
96,4 m
120 m
640 W
890 W
1270 W
1900 W
2700 W
3400 W
Nominal
resistance
82,6
59,4
41,6
27,8
19,6
15,6
Input
2,91 A
4,04 A
5.78 A
8,63 A
12,27 A
15,45 A
Cover
180 W/m2
3,55 m2
4,94 m2
7,03 m2
10.55 m2
14,94 m2
18,60 m2
(pitch:
155 mm)
200 W/m2
3.20 m2
4.46 m2
6.34 m2
9.52 m2
13.47 m2
16.77 m2
(pitch:
140 mm)
240 W/m2
2,66 m2
3,71 m2
5,28 m2
7,93 m2
11,23 m2
13,98 m2
(pitch:
115 mm)
Installation and laying

The heating cables are normally laid in the concrete at a depth of approximately 50 mm from the surface. The cable is anchored on arc welded
netting for reinforcement as normally used in the building trade. The cable is secured with clamps or ties, laying them out in a coil on the
surface.
A
6(2)
Hz
50
FI
LEF
CA
3
0
-1
FI
LEF
CA
3
-2
A
-3
UR
AT
ER
MP
TE
Control unit
0 10VA
T50V
23
1773
0
T5
TE
RE
Hz
50
A
)A
0V
TO m
23 6(2
EN 20
AM =
LD24V
CA
RIS
230 V
+
1
IDIT
UM
5
60
D.
MO
Relay
The hot portion of cable must always be completely sunk into the concrete and never installed in ducts or other construction components.
To avoid overheating or malfunctioning, lay the cable avoiding abnormal overlapping or crossovers. It is essential to protect the heating cable
from any deformation where there are crossovers of the expansion joints by using an omega section at the joint, without using ducting. It will
be possible to lay the surface finish once the heating circuits have been made.
Do not tread on the cable during the phase of laying and anyhow avoid causing any kind of damage when casting the concrete. Cast the
concrete in the same direction in which the cable runs to avoid altering its layout. If asphalt is used, the temperature of the casting must not
exceed 160C.
Electrical tests
It is necessary to check that the electrical magnitudes of continuity, insulation and input do not change when laying, so they will be checked before
and after casting the concrete slab and marked on a specific card supplied in the package that will be kept in the junction box for future checks.
Do not power up the heating cable until the concrete has completely dried, which is normally 6-8 weeks after laying. Although the cable can be
used by connecting it directly to the electric mains via a switch, to avoid wasting power it is recommended to use a thermostat or an ice control
unit that will automatically switch on only when operation is actually necessary.
ACCESSORIES
WATERTIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR code 607200
Function
The fitting enables connecting the heating cable to the supply

mains and its use is recommended if the cable crosses sections
subject to high levels of humidity or immersed in water, thanks to
the fittings high protection class.
Voltage:
Max voltage:
Max contact capacity:
Protection class:
230 V (ac)
450 V (ac)
32 A
IP 68
CONTROL UNIT FOR DETECTING ICE/SNOW code 605000
Function
The control unit detects the presence of ice and snow by a sensor that measures
outside temperature and relative humidity.
There are two types of sensor:
- code 605010 and 605020 suitable for open spaces such as entrances to garages,
parking places, steps, footpaths or loading ramps;
- code 605030 used for gutters, flat roofs or dish antennas.
Once the risk of ice formation has been detected, the unit is capable of switching
on heating devices for the surfaces at risk.
Control unit
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Output terminal:
Insulation test:
Protection class:
Sensors
230 V 6% - 50 Hz
10 VA
230 V - 6 A -- with zero voltage
50C
4 kV
II (after proper installation
on the bar to DIN 43880)

Protection class:
Cable length:
-30 80C
IP 68
- 605010: 6 m
- 605020: 20 m
- 605030: 6 m
all can extendable up to 50 m (greater distances on request)
The cable used is oil sealed of the type SL-Y11Y to DIN VDE
0472/9.21 Abs. 8036.
6065 series
Heating cable with constant power consumption to control ice and remove snow off ramps, steps and pedestrian
crossings. Double copper alloy conductor, copper earth conductor. Nominal voltage 230 V (ac). Power consumption
28 W/m. Insulation resistance >500 M. Maximum temperature adjustment 90C. Maximum temperature tolerated 160C.
Outside diameter 7,5 mm. Maximum installable length 120 m.
SIZING SHEET FOR RAMPS, STEPS AND PEDESTRIAN PASSAGEWAYS
NAME:
DATE:
SITE REF.:
TELEPHONE:
FAX:
E-MAIL:
TOTAL
WHEEL BASE
SURFACE TO HEAT
m2
HEATING TOTAL AREA WHEEL BASE ONLY
m2
................
m
................
................
................
TYPE AND SIZE OF CONCRETE SLAB (GIVE DIMENSIONS IN SPACES PROVIDED)

CONCRETE
BED OF SAND
WITH SELF-LOCKING ELEMENTS
CONCRETE
................
................
mm
Reinforcement
................
mm
................
mm
................
mm
SELF-LOCKING ELEMENTS
Heating cable
mm
SAND BED
Reinforcement
EARTH
Heating cable
EARTH
MINIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (MINIMUM VALUE -40C)

REQUIRED TYPE OF PROTECTION
OTHER
PLACE
ICE ONLY
PLAIN
ICE PLUS SNOW
MOUNTAIN (above 800 m)
Space for stating the surface area to heat with related distances:
We reserve the right to change our products and their relevant technical data contained in this publication at any time and without prior notice.
CALEFFI

CALEFFI
series 155
01120/04 GB
Function
correct system flow for either heating and cooling. The unit is
delivered with all the required components for a regulating circuit.
embedded wall box.
4-way mixing valve, servomotor, electronically-regulated pump,
flow temperature sensor, return temperature sensor, outside
temperature sensor, limit control sensor for relative humidity,
temperature controller, flow temperature gauge, unions for
connecting to the manifolds and to the primary circuit.
The unit is supplied in a manifold box preassembled with
manifolds.
Product range
Temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling, in manifold box preassembled with manifolds
- Hydraulic seals:
- Mixing valve:
-
Medium:

- Connections to the manifold:
- Primary circuit connections:
Pump
G-MS 58 brass
EPDM
4-way
30%
5 60C
6 bar
0 60C
1 1/2 with union connection
1 F with union
Servomotor
-
Electrically powered:
Rating:
Cycle time:
Torque:
230 V - 50 Hz
1,3 VA
210 s
6 Nm
Electronic pump:
Total consumption:
Max. flow rate:
Ambient temperature:
Protection class:
UPE 25-60
~ 110 W
3.5 m3/h
95%
0 40C
IP 42

Operating at max. speed.
H (m w. g.)
Code 1556 . 2
Code 151000
Factory setting:
proportional
head regulation.
5
4
3
2
1
0
4
5
G (m3/h)
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
18
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
30
24
32
22
34
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
13 outlets
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
100%
80%
25%
50%
100%
80%
50%
25%
50%
50%
17
16
CALEFFI
15
21
12
40
13
23
22
14
WATCH
12
11
45
CALEFFI50
50
35
55
30
60
+25%
-50%
10
20 30 20
10
60
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI50
70
40
80
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
20
0
40
60
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
70
40
80
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
20
0
40
60
10
-25%
REGOLATORE
DIGITALE TRE PUNTI
2
6 4
Zu
CALEFFI
2
6 4
Zu
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
270-410
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Zu
CALEFFI
450
2
6 4
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
24
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
28
26
19
20
10 outlets
1200
6 outlets
1000
800
Dimensions
320
50
150-190
Code
Outlets
A
1556E2
5
655
1556F2
6
705
1556G2
7
755
1556H2
8
805
1556I2
9
885
1556L2
10
935
1556M2
11
985
1556N2
12
1035
1556O2
13
1085
1
11
CALEFFI
26
26
19
19
20
20
18
18
16
21
22
14
23
23
13
WATCH
WATCH
12
99
24
24
30
30
32
32
22
22
34
34
15
11
11
11
50
40
60
45
70
50
40
35
80
55
30
90
60
-25%
-25%
+25%
+25%
-50%
-50%
00
10
20 30 20
10
60
22
10
SYSTEM
FLOW
7
7
66
28
28
24
24
17
12
4
55
10
7
SYSTEM
RETURN
4
4 2
8 6
Zu
16
22
24
BOILER
FLOW
CALEFFI
Temperature controller for heating and cooling

Electronic pump UPE 25-60
Four-way mixing valve
Servomotor
Outside temperature sensor
Room thermostat and indoor sensor (optional)
Limit control sensor for max. relative humidity RH%
Connection point for remote transmission
20
18
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
BOILER
RETURN
Hydraulic diagram
SF
4-way mixing valve
M
SR
667 series flow distribution manifold,

equipped with micrometric valves
for calibrating individual circuits.
666 series return distribution

shut-off valves on individual circuit
Variable speed pump
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
5996 series head units with automatic

air vent and discharge valve.
CALEFFI
For more information see technical

brochure
01044 GB
BR
10
8
6
4
2
0
Servomotor
Automatic by-pass
BF
10
8
6
4
2
0
Temperature gauge
10
8
6
4
2
0
14
26
19
18
30
24
32
22
34
16
15
21
28
17
12
13
23
22
14
WATCH
12
24
10
CALEFFI
20
13
11
40
45
50
35
55
30
60
-25%
11
+25%
10
-50%
12

10) Start or stop cooling selector. If the outside temperature

is higher than the set value, the cooling function is activated.
The characteristic curve is determined taking into account the
following parameters:
a)
Max flow temperature set on controller (item 9 PCB).

b)
Min flow temperature set on printed circuit board (item 5

PCB). Factory setting: 20C.
c)
Min outside temperature set on printed circuit board

(item 1 PCB). Factory setting: -10C.
d)
Outside temperature limit for heating start in summer,

set on printed circuit board (item 3 PCB).
2)
The LED is lit in the cooling function.
3)
The LED is lit in the heating function.
4)
Pump operating (ON): LED lit continuously.
5)
Mixing valve closing: LED lit. The LED is lit continuously

when the controller is in the non-operative phase of
regulation, for example with TOutside between 18C and 24C
(see characteristic curve).
6)
7)
8) Function selector, six different functions possible:

a)

remains on. The frost protection function remains active.
b)

c)

d)

comfort or set-back modes, determined by the two-channel
analogue clock, red indicator for heating times, blue
indicator for cooling times (item 14).
e)
f)
9)
Controller de-activated (pump ON - mixing valve ON).

This function guarantees heating to the maximum
temperature value set on the printed circuit board (PCB).
Summer function. Cooling is activated if required by the
ambient conditions (TOutside greater than the value set at
point 10) and dependant on the clock settings.This activation
takes place after ten minute if the outside temperature is more
than 1C above the set value. With the exclusion of heating, the
frost protection function remains active.
Note: Normally, with the clock programme, the changeover from
heating to cooling takes place after the outside temperature
has been higher than the set value for at least half an hour. This
selector position can therefore be used to effect a changeover
to cooling.
flow temperature, corresponding to the minimum
outside design temperature.

factory set values.
X Axis- Outside temperature - TX
Y Axis- Flow temperature - TY
Calculation of slope change points
Thus: X = 18 - (-10) = 28C.
Thus: Y = 45 - 20 = 25C.
X = Tmax X - 25% X = 18 - 0,25 28 = 11C
Y = Tmin Y + 55% Y = 20 + 0,55 25 = 33,75C
X = Tmax X - 50% X = 18 - 0,5 28 = 4C
Y = Tmin Y + 80% Y = 20 + 0,8 25 = 40C
Point E is the cooling starting point, whose characteristic curve has
the same slope as section A-C.
Point E given by the intersection between: TX = value set in item 10
(24C) and TY = Tmin Y (20C).
60
25%
The LED is lit when there is a risk of condensation forming

in the cooling function (the mixing valve is closed). In the
heating function, this lights up intermittently during the
screed drying phase.
TFLOW (C)
1)
55
50%
Also enables optimisation of the standard configuration set at

the factory, allowing personal control of the operation of
the system.
criteria given by the characteristic curve.
circuit board (item 6 PCB) the controller will recalculate the new
characteristic curve. The maximum set temperature, however,
remains active. This selector also determines the characteristic
cooling curve, as it uses the inclination of the first line of the
curve, constructed for the heating (see characteristic curve graph).
50
B (-10;45)
45
D (4;40)
80%
40
55%
35
C (11;33,75)
30
25
E (24;20)
20
A (18;20)
15
10
5
35
30
25
20
15
10
Preparatory phase
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
Passive phase
11)

Range of adjustment from -25% to +25%.
Factory setting: correction = 0%.
temperature will be as follows: +25% Y = 0,25 25 = 6,25C.

The surface of the printed circuit board (PCB) identifies the following
functions:
14
N
16
17
4(2)A
PS
4(2)A
MA
4(2)A
MC
2501
230 V AC
4VA
230V AC
10A max
-10
OPEN
-10
-15
SM
18
60
30
65
22
4,5
20
40 35
UR
65 1,5
6
max
NZ
100
RF(%)
40
35
30
4
10
50
DIP
6,25C
45
55
0 14
KA
A
50
-20 -20
-5
KA
4(2)A
55
12
SR
CLOSE
ON
4(2)A
15
SE
N
CLOSE
C
F
11
PUMP
OPEN
TA1
TA
MXING PUMP
INLET
1 2 3 4
TFLOW (C)
L
LP
13
AMBIENT
THERMOSTAT
T 40
DIGITAL
CONTROLLER t Typ 2125
25
20
1)
Minimum outside temperature (Tmin X), adjustable from -5C

to -20C, to which the set maximum flow temperature
corresponds (Tmax Y). Factory setting: -10C.
2)

0C to -20C. Factory setting: -15C.
comfort mode.
15
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
12)

Range of adjustment from 0% to -50%.
selected in the set-back range (blue indicator).
temperature will be as follows: -25% Y = -0,25 25 = -6,25C.
The characteristic curve is thus moved downwards by 6,25C.
In addition, if, following this move, the flow temperature has to
be lower than the minimum heating start temperature (Tmin Y),
the following state will be obtained:
circulator OFF and mixing valve closed.
60
55
4)
6,25C
40
35
30
25
20
15
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
13)Daily or weekly analogue clock, used to select the heating or

cooling phases required with:
the red indicators for heating comfort and set-back, the blue
indicators to start and stop cooling, white indicator for heating and
cooling with the same time programme.
Factory configuration: daily mode, minimum selection interval 15 min..
The changeover from daily to weekly mode, with a 60 min. minimum
raise the outer ring and move the drive ring to the required position;
to do this, turn the pointer clockwise until the innermost notch
coincides with one of the outer notches.
ON
16C limited
flow temperature
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
Free flow
temperature
DIP
Screed
drying
1 2 3 4
ON
DIP
d
-7
21
1 2 3 4
23
ON
24
1 2 3 4
12
ON
1 2 3 4
22
Reposition
the
outer
ring,
making sure that the reference day
shown on it falls in the operating
sector of the switching point.
Selection microswitch for screed setting drying program.

Factory setting: OFF (1234).
The program has a duration of seven days: during the first three
remaining four days, the flow temperature is raised and maintained
at the maximum temperature value set at point 9 on the front panel.
The activation of this program is displyed by the flashing LED
The frequency of flashing indicates the number of drying days
which have passed: one pulse every 8 seconds indicates
day 1, two pulses every 8 seconds indicates day 2, etc. If the
electricity has to be switched off in this phase, the controller will
start its drying cycle again from the beginning. The front panel
LED, point 1, continuously lit, indicates the end of the drying
program. At this point the microswitch should be turned to OFF.
Note: In manual mode
the screed drying procedure cannot be
activated. When cooling, this series of microswitches has the
function of limiting the minimum temperature transmitted to the
panel. This minimum temperature depends on the characteristics
of the system and the type of air conditioning adopted. The
different activation configurations are shown below.
Factory configuration: 16C.
DIP
45
ON
50

limit, (Tmax X), adjustable from 14C to 22C.
Factory setting: 18C. An outside temperature higher than the set
value will cause the following state: circulator OFF and mixing valve
closed. An outside temperature 4C higher than the set value will cause
activation of the cooling, if this outside temperature is greater than the
value set on the front panel, item 10. If this temperature is lower, cooling
will start following a preparatory phase, where Tflow equals the
setTminY as at item 5 of the printed board circuit.
Example:
TO set on front panel=24C,
TO set on PCB= 18C; TminY = 20C.
Activation will take place: at TO = 22C (18+4) = preparatory phase
at TO = 24C following the characteristic curve.
1 2 3 4
TFLOW (C)
3)
14C limited
flow temperature
20
DIP
DIP
18
19
12C limited
flow temperature
17
16
15
DIP
DIP
14
10C limited
flow temperature
13
10
12
11
5)

(Tmin Y).
6)

In case a higher value has been set at point 7 of the front panel,
7) NZ
Neutral zone regulation selector.

If the flow temperature variation remains within the temperature
value selected in the neutral zone, the mixing valve remains
inactive.
When cooling, the neutral zone automatically takes the value 1,5C.
8) RF(%) Return sensor regulation selector.

This selector is used to optimise the system output accordign to
the difference in temperature between flow and return (T).
TY = (Tflow set Y - Tmin Y)
T = TY 0,3.
Treturn Y = Tflow set Y - T
Tcalculated flow = Tflow set Y + RF% (Treturn set Y - Treturn Y)
Humidity sensor control

At the start of each cooling season, the operating condition of the
sensor should be checked by placing a damp pad on its surface;
this operation should cause the mixing valve to close and the yellow
LED, point 1 on the front panel, to light.
Positioning humidity sensor
The humidity sensor must be positioned at the point where there is
most risk of the formation of condensation, depending on the
characteristics of the system. It must be positioned with the printed
part upward, according to the diagrams shown below.
Lower side: sited on the cooling surface
through the suitable holes on the sensor.
Example with factory setting values:

Flow temperature calculated on the characteristic curve:
Thus:
TY = (40 - 20) = 20C

T = 20 0,3 = 6C
Treturn set Y = 40 - 6 = 34C.
If the return temperature measured (Treturn Y) is
Treturn
it upwards or downwards, to restore the return temperature to
that set.
If Treturn Y = 30C
Tcalculated flow = 40C + 0,8 (34-30) = 43,2C
This continuous comparison prevents room overheating
caused by gratuitous heat sources modifying the heating load.
There is no effect on the cooling function.
CALEFFI
28
28
3032
3032
2426
2426
19
19
20
20
18
18
17
16
22
22
60
13
23
22
14
24
24
WATCH
WATCH
12
11
11
30
90
90
-25%
-25%
+25%
+25%
-50%
-50%
00
10
20 30 20
1060
22
8
7
4
55
TFLOW (C)
7080
7080
4050
10
34
34
15
21
12
99
4 2
8 6
Zu
60
55
50
45
40
Treturn: 34C
35
30
25
20
15
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)

It can be used to shut down the pump of the primary circuit or
the boiler.
10) UR
Relative humidity sensor wiring. This sensor is used to

detect the limiting value of relative humidity to prevent
condensation on the cooling surface.
This is calibrated for RH= 80 - 85%. When the calibrated value
is reached, this will cause the following state: mixing valve
closed, pump ON.
If various zones at risk of condensation are to be controlled, the
humidity sensor must be connected to a suitable interface kit
(transformer, converter and humidity sensor). Up to 12 converters
plus sensor can be connected to a single transformer.
parameters below.
- Minimum flow temperature on the characteristic curve, which can
be selected through the microswitch (point 4 on the back panel).
- Sensor controlled maximum RH% limit.
- Room temperature controlled through room thermostat (code 151000).
N.B.: When installing the RH% limit sensor according to the
diagrams, as indicated, possible formation of condensation on the
surface is anticipated. In areas where the max RH% limit sensor
is installed, adequate ventilation must always be present.
11) SE
Outside sensor wiring. Connect the outside sensor using

2-core cable (2x0,75) to the connector provided on the unit.
RH side
terminal strip
SE
12) SR
Connector
LH side
termial strip
Outside sensor
Connecting
wiring
17) KA Chiller activation wiring. This activation takes place in the

same way as in point 16.
Boiler circuit open
C
F
KA
KA
Chiller circuit open
Return sensor wiring. Factory fitted.

20
18
CALEFFI
22
16
24

10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
26
24
19
20
18
16
21
22
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
30
32
34
15
22
14
23
13
WATCH
12
11
50
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
70
40
80
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
40
60
20
10
80
100
4
5
CALEFFI
14) PS
Pump shut-down variant. Sometimes the temperature

regulating unit is installed in a system where there may be
one or more users with different usage requirements. In this case,
for users requiring ON/OFF operation, it may be necessary to
shut down the unit circulator.
normal wiring.
2
6 4
CALEFFI
24
28
17
12
Zu
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Pump shut-down wiring
RH side
terminal strip
User auxiliary contact

6
PS
MA
MC
Brown
Unit 155 pump
Pump shut-down variant
Table of sensor resistance values*

C
Ohm
-15 11.382
-12 9.912
-10 8.933
-6 7.439
-3 6.492
-2 6.206
0 5.632
C
0
2
4
6
8
10
15
Ohm
5.632
5.187
4.742
4.347
4.000
3.553
2.971
*excluding max RH% limit sensor
16) C
Summer - winter circuit changeover valve wiring.
F
This connection enables the 3-way valve to be activated
automatically for hydraulic deviation between the boiler circuit
and the chiller circuit. This takes place after the outside
temperature has risen above the value set at point 3 for at least
half an hour.
Ten minutes later, the regulating unit pump is activated.
Safety
C
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Ohm
2.431
2.000
1.655
1.376
1.150
966
815
C
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
Ohm
690
587
501
430
370
319
276
C
90
95
100
Ohm
240
209
183
If the flow or outside sensor shows an ohm resistance value outside

its working range (damaged or disconnected sensor), the following
Safety thermostat code 150025 (optional)

55C 3C
Protection level:
IP 55
Contacts rating:
10 A - 240 V
Cable length:
0,55 m
Use of safety thermostat

The safety thermostat has a special snap on
connector. It can be used to stop the boiler and
protect the panel circuits from dangerous
overheating.
It prevents hot water from entering the panel circuits directly

when cooling in the absence of automatic summer-winter
changeover as at point 16.
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
26
24
19
20
18
16
21
22
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
30
32
34
15
22
14
50
23
13
WATCH
12
24
28
17
12
11
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
70
40
80
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
40
60
20
10
80
100
4
5
2
6 4
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Zu
CALEFFI
CALEFFI

When the selector (point 6 on the front panel) is positioned on
, there are two types of intervention:
or

When this value is reached, it will return to the inactive status.
Anti-seize function
If the pump remains inactive for twenty four hours, the following
program automatically comes into operation, with:
mixing valve open for 30 seconds,
mixing valve closed for 30 seconds,
pump ON for 60 seconds.
When this function is operating, it cannot be interrupted.
Manual control
Disconnect the wires on the back of the PCB on the right at the
positions MA, marked No. 2 and
2 Zu
6 4
MC No. 3.
8
Operation of the room thermostat

Depending on the time periods for comfort and set-back selected
on the clock and the room temperature setting, it will read the actual
room temperature. On the basis of this parameter, it will make any
necessary modification to the characteristic curve (A) for the
purpose of accelerating operation and preventing excessive
heating and cooling of the room.
A difference of 1C in the room temperature causes a move of the
characterisitc curve equal to 7C of the outside temperature, with
For example, if Troom set = 20C and Troom measured = 19C, than the
difference of 1C will cause a movement of the characteristic curve
of 7C towards the left (B). The flow temperature will consequently
be raised. In the case of a negative difference, the movement will
take place on the curve C.
This behaviour is applicable for a maximum difference of 3C in the
room temperature.
remains active.
reduced by 2C, thus defining Tset set-back.
Whenever the measured room temperature falls below Tset set-back,
the initial characteristic curve (A) will be restored with the set-back
correction set at point 12 on the front panel.

TFLOW (C)

60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
n 2
n 3
MA
MC
RH side
terminal strip
20
15
10
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
TOUTSIDE (C)
Press on the screw on the protective cover and turn it to the position
desired.

Install the room thermostats and connect by sheathed 2-core cable
(2 x 0,75) to the terminal strip of the regulator PCB, as shown in the
diagram below.
Options
The regulating unit can be

supplemented
with
a
room
thermostat, able to adjust the
value of the flow temperature
makes it possible to take account
of gratuitous heat gains, by
refining the value of the flow
temperature, with optimum results
in terms of comfort and energy
saving. In cooling conditions, the
setting on the thermostat should
be increased by 2C.
TA1
TA
TA 1
TA
LH side
terminal strip
Room thermostat, code 151000.
Room thermostat
20
18
CALEFFI
16
22
24
WARNING - if the connecting cable between the thermostat

and the control unit is not sheathed, it must be run in its own
ducting. The maximum length is 150 m.
Application diagram
0
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
Pump
Lockshield valve
Variable speed pump
Shut-off valve
Zone valve
Clock
Thermostatic valve
20
18
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
26
24
19
20
18
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
22
Thermostat/humidistat
TH
24
30
32
17
16
22
34
15
21
12
22
14
23
13
WATCH
12
24
28
16
TH
11
50
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
70
40
80
30
90
-25%
+25%
-50%
40
60
20
10
80
100
4
5
2
6 4
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Zu
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Code 1556.2
Temperature regulating unit preassembled with manifold for radiant panels in box. Primary circuit connections: 1" F with
union. Manifold outlets: 3/4 M. Brass body. EPDM hydraulic seals. Maximum working pressure: 6 bar. Ambient
temperature: 0 to 40C. Setting temperature range: 5 to 60C (factory setting: 45C). Complete with: 4-way mixing valve;
mixing valve servomotor, with the following specification: electrical supply: 230 V 50 Hz. Rating: 1,3 VA. Cycle time: 210 s.
Torque: 6 Nm; electronic pump: UPE 25-60. Maximum flow rate: 3,5 m3/h. Protection class: IP 42; temperature controller
with with daily/weekly clock; flow temperature sensor; return temperature sensor; outside temperature sensor. Limit
control sensor for relative humidity. Flow pocket temperature gauge, scale 0 60C; flow manifold, 5 outlets (5 to 13)
complete with regulating valves; return manifold, 5 outlets (5 to 13) complete with shut-off valves suitable for
thermoelectric heads; head unit with air vent valve and drain valve; box in sheet steel, RAL 9010 white colour, depth
adjustable from 150 to 190 mm, complete with floor supports with height adjustable from 270 to 410 mm.
Code 151000
CALEFFI
Thermostatic regulating unit for underfloor

radiant panels for 559 series Sepcoll
series 163
CALEFFI
01121/04 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The thermostatic regulating unit is designed for maintaining the
temperature set for the flow fluid constant in a low temperature
circuit for underfloor radiant panels.
This unit has been specially designed for use with both the external
and wall embedded versions of the series 559 series
separator/distribution manifolds.
It comes supplied with a three-way thermostatic mixing valve with
built-in temperature sensor, a three-speed pump, a safety
thermostat, a differential by-pass valve, flow and return temperature
gauges and secondary circuit shut-off valves.
Supplied complete with preformed insulation shell.
Product range
Code 163600 External thermostatic regulating unit for radiant panels for Sepcoll. Flow upwards, flow on right hand side
Code 163610 External thermostatic regulating unit for radiant panels for Sepcoll. Flow upwards, flow on left hand side
Size 1
Size 1
Three-way thermostatic valve
Materials: - Body:
- Internal cartridge:
- Springs:
- Seals:
Safety thermostat
brass EN 12164 CW614N,
chemically nickel plated
stainless steel
EPDM
By-pass
Materials: -
Set temperature:
Protection class:
Contacts rating:
Wiring diagrams
55C
IP 55
10 A/ 240 V
L
230 V
N
Safety
thermostat
Ambient
thermostat
Pump
Body:
Springs:
Obturator:
Seals:

stainless steel
EPDM
EPDM
Shut-off valves
Materials: - Body:
- Seals:

EPDM
Performance
Medium:
Accuracy:
Primary inlet max. temperature:
By-pass setting range:

30%
25 55C
2C
85C
10-60 kPa (1- 6 m w.g.)
Connections: - primary circuit:

- secondary circuit:
- connection centre distance:
1 F with union
1 F
90 mm
Three-speed pump:
Material: - Body:
UPS 25/60
GG 15/20 cast iron
Electric supply:
Max. relative humidity:
Protection class:
Pump connections:
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with union
Head available at the regulating

unit connections
Power consumption
H (m w.g.)
5
UPS 25-60
P
(W)
n
(r.p.m.)
0,40
90
1800
0,30
65
1100
0,20
45
700
1
0
(A)
Speed
0,5
1,5
2,5
G (m3/h)
Dimensions
code 163610
code 163600
40
60
20
80
40
60
20
80
60
20
80
80
40
40
60
20
Material:
Thickness:
20 mm
Density: - inner part
30 Kg/m3
- outer part
50 Kg/m3
0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C
0,045 W/(mK)
Coefficient of resistance to the diffusion of vapour (DIN 52615): > 1.300
Temperature range:
0 100C
B2 class
Insulation technical specification
SYSTEM
RETURN
SYSTEM
FLOW
Code
163600
95
90
77
460
320
140
163610
95
90
77
460
320
140
Hydraulic diagram
8
SR
40
80
60
20
80
SF
40
60
20
A
C
6
3
4
ST
5
2
2
BOILER
RETURN
BOILER
FLOW
Three-way thermostatic valve with built-in temperature sensor
Three-speed UPS 25-60 pump
Safety thermostat
Wiring box
Secondary circuit shut-off valves
BR
Shut-off valve
Temperature gauge
By-pass valve
Safety probe
BF
ST
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Safety thermostat
3-way thermostatic valve
Operating principle
The regulating element of the three-way thermostatic valve is a

temperature sensor, which is completely immersed in the outlet
chamber of mixed water. It continuously regulates the correct
proportions of hot water from the boiler and of return water from the
panel circuit by expanding or contracting.
It regulates these flows by means of a shutter which slides in a
special cylinder located between the hot water and the water
returning from the panel circuit passage seats.
Even if the thermal load of the secondary circuit or the temperature
of the water coming from the boiler changes, the mixing valve will
automatically regulate the flow of water to provide water at the
temperature that has been set.
Reduced pressure loss

The three way mixing valve is fitted with a special shutter which
operates in special seatings where the water passes.
It therefore guarantees high flow rates with reduced obstruction,
while maintaining accurate temperature regulation.
The internal cartridge which contains all the regulation components
is pre-assembled in a single unit and can be easily inspected for
cleaning or replacement if required without the need to remove the
valve body from the piping.
Anti-stick surfaces
All the functional parts, such as the shutter, the seatings and guides
have chemically nickel plated surfaces. This surface treatment
reduces the wear of moving parts to a minimum and guarantees
high performance and long life.
Low heat inertia thermostat sensor

The element that is sensitive to temperature change, the engine
of the three-way thermostatic valve, has low thermal inertia; it
therefore reacts quickly to changes in the temperature and
pressure of the inlet water which allows the valve to respond
rapidly.
Temperature regulation and lock device

The temperature can be set between minimum and maximum with
one turn of the control knob (360). There is also a tamper-proof
device for locking the temperature set.
Installation
Configuration with
Sepcoll served
from the right
Thermostatic
regulating unit
code 163610
04
04
06
02
08
Configuration with
Sepcoll served
from the left
40
06
40
60
20
02
08
80
60
20
80
Thermostatic
regulating unit
code 163600
T T
Thermostatic
regulating unit
code 163600
Thermostatic
regulating unit
code 163610
04
04
06
02
08
40
06
02
08
40
60
20
80
60
20
80
Temperature setting
Cartridge replacement
The temperature is set to the desired temperature by using

the graduated adjustment knob fitted on the three-way
thermostatic valve.
The internal cartridge containing all the regulation components

can be inspected and replaced if necessary without the need
to remove the valve from the piping.
Position
Min
Max
Temp. (C)
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
58
Reference: Tboiler = 70C
1) Close the hot and cold inlet shut-off valves

2) Remove the internal cartridge for inspection or replacement
by turning the nut as shown.
Locking the setting

Set the knob on the desired
number, remove the screw on
the top, pull the knob off and
push it back on so that the
groove on the inside fits over
the ridge on the knob holder.
1 MIN
MA
The differential by-pass valve is used to control the head in
the secondary circuit. When the differential pressure set for
the valve is reached, the valve opens and allows fluid to pass
between the flow and return of the circuit, limiting the
differential pressure at the value set.
If the individual circuits to panels are shut-off by automatic
two way on/off or modulating valves, the valve prevents
excessive fluid velocities and the pump from overheating.
3) Replacement cartridges come complete with adjustment

knobs.
By-pass flow curves
p (m w.g.)
(kPa)
Setting positions
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0,5
1,5
2
3
G (m /h)
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
4) Open the shut-off valves again and set the mixing valve at
the temperature desired.
Accessories
738107
Battery powered ambient chrono-thermostat. With self-learning programme, weekly clock
programming, telephone input connection, Three temperature levels.
Minimum programme periods of 30 minutes.
Size: (w x h x d) 120 x 90 x 20 mm.
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
-t1
-t2
-t3
CALEFFI
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
-t1
-t2
-t3
t
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
40
40
60
20
80
40
60
20
80
40
60
20
80
60
20
80
Pump
Lockshield valve
Variable speed pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
t
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
40
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
40
60
20
CALEFFI
80
60
20
80
Pump
Lockshield valve
Variable speed pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
Code 1636 . .
Thermostatic regulating unit for underfloor radiant panels for the Sepcoll 559 series. Configuration with flow upwards and
flow on the right hand side (or flow on left hand side). Connections to the primary circuit 1F union. Connections to the
secondary circuit 1 F. Centre distance of connections to the primary and secondary circuits 90 mm. Setting temperature
range: 25 55C. Accuracy: 2C. Primary inlet maximum temperature: 85C. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar.
Complete with: three-way thermostatic valve with built-in sensor. Body and internal cartridge in brass with chemically
nickel plated sliding surfaces. Springs in stainless steel. EPDM seals. Safety thermostat set at 55C, protection class:
IP 55. Three-speed pump: UPS 25-60, power supply: 230 V-50 Hz, Maximum ambient temperature: 80C, protection
class: IP 44. Temperature gauge scales: 0C to 80C. Differential by-pass valve, brass body, stainless steel spring,
pressure range: 10 to 60 kPa. Shut-off valves on secondary circuit. Insulation in preformed closed cell expanded PEX.
CALEFFI
Modulating digital controller
CALEFFI

RE
IS
161 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01122/08 GB
Function
The controller can be used with three-point motorized mixing valves
with rotation times ranging between 30 and 240 seconds.
It performs both set point and modulating regulation. In the
modulating mode, the controller automatically varies the flow
temperature depending on the actual value of the system
return temperature. This is detected to indicate the instantaneous
ambient load. This reduces system operating times and power
overloads.
The controller is equipped with flow and return temperature probes
and a wiring box for an easy use when mounted on the wall. It can
also be connected from the back by means of a standard recessed
electrical box.
Product range
Code 161000
Code 150050
Code 150051
Code 150052
Modulating digital controller for heating and cooling, with flow/return probes and contact probe holder
Max. relative humidity probe
Converter
Transformer
Relative humidity control components (optional)
Controller
- Three point type
- Electric supply:
- Protection class:
- Control temperature rage
Max. relative humidity probe

- Electric supply:
- RH% limit:
230 V - 50 Hz
IP 40
778C
Flow/return temperature probes

NTC type
Control range:
Time constant:
Response:
Beta value:
Two-wire cable with connection:
Cable length:
-10125C
2,5 s
10.000 at 25C
25/85C 3977 1,5%
1/8 M
1m
Dimensions
24 V - 50 Hz
8085%
Converter
- Electric supply:
- Microswitch contact rating:
- Max. ambient temperature:
- DIN bar clamps
24 V - 50 Hz
6 / (2) A (230 V)
50C
Transformer
- Electric supply:
- Power consumption:
- Max. ambient temperature:
- DIN bar clamps
230 V - 50 Hz
10,5 VA
50C
Dimensions
E
D
A
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
150051
Convertitore
150052
Trasformatore
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
V
DE
AC
50Hz
24V~
24V
1 2 3
A
133
LN
4 5 6
~ ~
1
A
1 - when installing in a recessed junction box do not use the cable gland socket
Code
161000
230V
B
129
C
90
D
35
E
42
Weight (kg)
0,31
Code
150051
A
54
A
B
89
Weight (kg)
0,12
Code
150052
A
54
B
89
Weight (kg)
0,38
Digital controller
2
Operating principle
3
The controller receives the activation signal from the ambient

thermostat to start the pump and operate the mixing valve.
The controller operates the mixing valve according to two logic
approaches, depending on whether the return probe is on or off.
Set point regulation: return probe off. Selector 6) OFF.
using the selector 5) for both heating and cooling. The setting is
Modulating regulation: return probe on. Selector 6) ON.

temperature measured by the return probe RT. This keeps under
control the actual thermal efficiency of the slab and as a
consequence the ambient thermal load. This thermal response time
of the system is thus reduced to a minimum.
10
11
12
Example:
FTset = 40C
RTset = 40 - 0,35 (40 - 20) = 33C
The new FT value calculated is shown on the display 1) highlighted
a side bar.
1) Three-digit LCD showing: measured or calculated temperature

and settings of the delays programmed in the system.
Temperature range displayed: 099C with 0,1C resolution.
2) Controller function selector ON/OFF.
5) Selector for setting flow temperature.
Temperature range 778C
Factory setting:
- heating: max. 50C
- cooling: min. 14C
6) Return probe switch.
Probe off: OFF
Probe on: ON
Factory setting: ON
7) Pump operating (ON): LED permanently on.
8) S.T. LED safety temperature. Continuously ON when the limit
indicated by the safety thermostat or safety humidostat is
reached. Also continuously ON in case of flow/return probe
malfunction (see flow/return probe paragraph).
9) Heating/cooling function exchange switch
10) Trimmer for maximum impulse duration on the valve.
Adjustable 0,26 s. Factory setting: 2,5 s.
Calculation of impulse value:
Tpulse. (s) =
Rotation time of actuator (s)

40
Each time the FT is

calculated, the measured FT is displayed for 5 s, after which the new
calculated FT is shown.
Changes to FT stop when the RT reaches the RTset.
The return probe is switched off during the cooling function.
Curve correction with return probe
FT;RT
(C)
Flow temperature
limit
50
ed
lat
u
alc
45
FT
Design flow
temperature
40
FT
Flow
temperature
FT Set
d
te
ula
35
FT
lc
Ca
RT Set
Design return
temperature
30
25
20
Example:
Tactuator rotation = 120 s
Tpulse = 120/40 = 3 s
11) Trimmer for time delay in reading return probe.
Adjustable 1360 s. Factory setting: 20 s.
12) Trimmer of valve-motor mechanical delay recover.
Adjustable 130 s. Factory setting: 5 s.
50%
100%
150%
Design thermal
load %
Display
- Flow temperature set using the selector 5). The flow temperature
measured appears after 5 s.
- Measured flow temperature, with return probe off.
- Calculated flow temperature, with return probe on.
- Maximum duration of the impulse on the valve, selected using the
trimmer 10). Displayed for 5 s.
- Delay time for acquiring the return temperature, selected using the
trimmer 11). Displayed for 5 s.
- Valve-motor mechanical delay recover, selected using the trimmer
12). Displayed for 5 s.
Back panel
CALEFFI
M 230 V~ 5060 Hz
~
5(2) A / 250 V~

If the safety thermostat trips, on detecting a higher flow temperature
than the setting, the following state comes into operation: pump
OFF, mixing valve closed. The thermostat contact is N/C; if the
connection is missing, the controller is off.
The controller is equipped with an auxiliary microswitch which can
be used to control other equipments.
Example:
For Heating, to switch the boiler on or off.
N/O contact - Pump off - ambient thermostat OFF or safety
thermostat on (boiler off).
N/C contact - Pump on - ambient thermostat ON (boiler on).
For Cooling, to switch the chiller unit on or off.
N/O contact - Pump off - ambient thermostat OFF or RH% limit probe
on (chiller unit off).
N/C contact - Pump on - ambient thermostat ON (chiller unit on).
Contact rating: 5 / (2) A (230 V).
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
7
SA
SR TA
Flow/return probe
The flow/return temperature probes are the NTC type. If the probes
detect ohmic resistance indicating a short circuit, the following
operating state is set:
pump OFF, mixing valve closed, LED 8) permanently on.
9 10 11 12
TS
230 V~ IN OUT
Opens Closes
*
13 14 15
16 17 18
Table of probe resistance values

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
*When there is a safety thermostat, eliminate the jumper

The terminals for the various electrical connections are located on
the back panel.
Electric supply
1 Supply 230 V~ Live
2 Supply 230 V~ Neutral
3 Ground/Earth
Pump control
4 Ground/Earth
5 Pump control 230 V~ Live
6 Pump control 230 V~ Neutral
Mixing valve control (TRIAC: contact rating 1 A (230 V))
8 Common C
Auxiliary microswitch (contact rating relay 5 / (2) A)
10 Auxiliary outlet N/O
11 Auxiliary common outlet C
12 Auxiliary outlet N/C
Flow/return probe
13 Flow temperature probe
14 Common C
15 Return temperature probe
16 Ambient thermostat contact
17 Common C contact for ambient thermostat / common C
contact for safety thermostat and humidity probe converter
18 Contact for safety thermostat and humidity probe converter.
C
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
97.060
72.940
55.319
42.324
32.654
25.396
C
10
15
20
25
30
35
19.903
15.714
12.493
10.000
8.056
6.530
C
40
45
50
55
60
65
5.327
4.370
3.603
2.986
2.488
2.083
C
70
75
80
85
90
95
1.752
1.480
1.255
1.070
915
787
C
100
105
110
115
120
125
680
592
517
450
390
340
Flow temperature limit for heating and cooling

set with the controller.
Dip switches are located on the bottom of the controller in order to
set different limit temperatures.
Factory setting:
- heating max. 50C
- cooling min. 14C
Table of limit temperature-dip switch positions

setting
Limit
Limit
0 0 0
50
14
0 0 1
54
13
0 1 0
58
12
0 1 1
62
11
1 0 0
66
10
1 0 1
70
9
1 1 0
74
8
1 1 1
78
7
ON
Position 1
Position 0
1 2 3


When the controller is used for cooling, the relative humidity probe
must be used. The function of this probe is to detect the maximum
relative humidity limit in order to prevent the formation of
condensation in the cooling slab.
It is set for RH = 8085%. When this level is reached, the following
operating state is set: pump ON, mixing valve closed.
Connection of the humidity probe
The humidity probe is connected to the controller through a special
transformer and converter.
Testing the humidity probe

The functioning of the probe must be checked at the start of each
switch on the red LED point 8 on the front of the control panel.
Location of the humidity probe
The humidity probe is located at the point where humidity is most
following diagrams.
E
Safety
thermostat
150051
150052
Convertitore
Trasformatore
V
DE
ST
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Upper side: carbon
LN
Lower side: placed on the cooling surface

AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
AC 230V 50Hz
10,5VA
T50
24V
24V~
~ ~
1 2 3
4 5 6
Layouts for the correct positioning of the max RH% limit probe.
The probe should be fixed to the manifold installed in the zone
where the RH% relative humidity has not to exceed the safety limits.
Fix the probe by inserting the two straps through the holes.
230 V
Room
thermostat
RT
Regulator
cod. 161000
13 14 15
16 17 18
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
7
SA
SR TA
230 V~ IN OUT
9 10 11 12
TS
Opens Closes
In order to control different zones that are at risk of condensation

forming, the humidity probe should be connected to a special
interface kit (transformer, converter and humidity probe). Up to
12 converters and probes can be connected to a single transformer.
Example of connection with multiple sensors on different manifolds
TRANSFORMER
cod. 150052
10
L
N
CONVERTER
cod. 150051
CONVERTER
cod. 150051
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
230 V
Terminal board
24 V
RH% SENSOR
cod. 150050
RH% SENSOR
cod. 150050
17
ST
18
N.B.: The RH% limit probe is used to forestall any formation of

condensation. In areas with cooling, adequate air treatment
must always be present.
Example of connection to different zone valves

TRANSFORMER
cod. 150052
10
L
N
The maximum thermal energy that the panel can produce can be
reached by controlling the parameters below.
front panel.
- Maximum relative humidity RH% limit, controlled through the
relative humidity probe.
- Room temperature, controlled by the room thermostat
- Room temperature and relative humidity, controlled by a fan coil
or dehumidifier.
CONVERTER
cod. 150051
CONVERTER
cod. 150051
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
Accessories
230 V
738
24 V
R1
R2
Rel NC
RH% SENSOR
cod. 150050
Ambient digital chrono-thermostat,

battery operated.
Weekly programming.
Three temperature levels + antifreeze.
Protection class. IP 30
RH% SENSOR
cod. 150050
TA
TA
R1
Terminal board
R2
16
17
18
ST
Code
738107
124 x 90 x 21 mm
p (kPa)
5000
50
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
45
40
35
30
25
1000
900
20
DN
12
5
Three-way butterfly mixing valve,

threaded connections.
Heavy series.
p (mm w.g.)
1
11
/4
11
/2
2
-D
N5
21
0
/2
DN
65
DN
80
DN
10
0
610
3/
4
Mixing valves
18
16
14
12
9
8
7
6
450
400
350
300
250
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
500
200
180
10090
0,90
0,80
0,70
0,60
200
120
140
160
180
100
60
70
80
90
35
40
45
50
30
20
25
12
14
16
18
10
6
7
8
9
3,5
4
4,5
2,5
0,5
G (m3/h)
2 1/2
1
1 1/4 1 1/2
2
72
11,9
16,8
30
45
DN 65 DN 80 DN100 DN 125
72
140
183
340
3/4
7,5
DN 50
45
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
1600
1400
1200
1000
900
DN
12
5
2000
1800
45
40
35
30
25
2
-D
N5
21
0
/2
DN
65
DN
80
DN
10
0
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
3/
4
1
11
/4
11
/2
Four-way butterfly mixing valve,

Heavy series.
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
0,5
0,6
0,35
0,40
0,45
50
0,7
0,8
0,9
80
70
60
Kv (m3/h)
Kv (m3/h)
611
450
400
350
300
250
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
200
180
10090
0,90
0,80
0,70
0,60
200
120
140
160
180
100
60
70
80
90
50
35
40
45
30
25
20
10
12
14
16
18
6
7
8
9
0,5
3,5
4
4,5
2,5
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
0,7
0,8
0,9
0,6
0,5
0,3
50
0,35
0,40
0,45
80
70
60
G (m3/h)
3/4
7,8
DN 50
53
1
1 1/4 1 1/2
2
2 1/2
12,3
18,5
30
53
80
DN 65 DN 80 DN100 DN 125
80
140
230
410
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
1000
900
20
DN
12
5
1600
1400
1200
45
40
35
30
25
11
/2
2
-D
N5
21
0
/2
DN
65
DN
80
DN
10
0
2000
1800
1
11
/4
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
18
16
14
12
10
800
700
600
9
8
7
6
450
400
350
300
250
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
500
200
180
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
160
140
120
10090
0,90
0,80
0,70
0,60
80
70
60
200
120
140
160
180
60
70
80
90
100
50
25
35
40
45
30
20
12
14
16
18
6
7
8
9
10
2,5
3,5
4
4,5
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
0,7
0,8
0,9
0,5
0,6
0,5
0,35
0,40
0,45
50
0,3
Three-way sector mixing valve,

flanged connections.
Body PN 6.
To be coupled with flat counterflange
EN 1092-1.
Heavy series.
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
160
140
120
3/
4
Three-way sector mixing valve,

Heavy series.
10
9
8
7
6
Kv (m3/h)
Kv (m3/h)
612
20
18
16
14
12
800
700
600
500
Four-way butterfly mixing valve,

Body PN 6.
EN 1092-1.
Heavy series.
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
160
140
120
0,3
Three-way butterfly mixing valve,

Body PN 6.
EN 1092-1.
Heavy series.
10
800
700
600
G (m3/h)
Kv (m3/h)
Kv (m3/h)
3/4
7,2
DN 50
42
1
1 1/4 1 1/2
2
2 1/2
11,9
16,5
30
42
62
DN 65 DN 80 DN100 DN 125
62
123
172
340
6370
Actuator for mixing valves 610-611-612 series
from 3/4 to 1 1/2.
With adapter.
1 = clockwise rotation (CW)

2 = counter clockwise rotation (CCW)
3 = common
1 2 3 4 5 6
4 = common
5 = N/C contact
6 = N/O contact
CW
6370
Electric supply
Actuator for mixing valves 610-611-612 series

from 2 to 5.
With adapter.
1 = clockwise rotation (CW)

2 = counter clockwise rotation (CCW)
3 = common
M
4 = common
5 = N/C contact
6 = N/O contact
1 2 3 4 5 6
230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac)

4,5 VA
1 A (230 V)
IP 42
180 s (90 rotation)
35 Nm
50
1
1/
1 4
1/
2
2
3.000
2.000
30
20
10
500
300
200
100
Kv (m3/h)
1 1/4
14
10
1.000
1 1/2
19
G (m3/h)
2
25
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
50
3.000
/4
5.000
2.000
11
Three-way motorized ball valve, with manual

opening. T drilling, reduced bore.
p (kPa)
6371
CCW
5.000
Three point type

Electric supply:
230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac)
16 bar
110C
Auxiliary microswitch contact rating: 3 A (230 V)
Protection class:
IP 44
Operating time:
90 s
p max: 1 1/4, 1,2 bar; 1 1/2, 1 bar; 2, 0,9 bar
p (mm w.g.)
3/
Three-way motorized piston valve, with manual

opening.
Full bore.
The valve can be transformed into a two-way
valve by blanking off the central third way.
CCW
L
N
636
CW
0,5
Three point type

Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Microswitch contact rating:
Protection class:
Operating time:
Dynamic torque:
11
/
2 2
CCW CCW
L
N
50
230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac)

3 VA
1 A (230 V)
IP 42
60 s (90 rotation)
15 Nm
20
Three point type

Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Operating time:
Dynamic torque:
Electric supply
30
20
100
1
20
50
200
10
300
500
10
1.000
0,5
Three point type

Electric supply:
230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac)
40 bar
p max:
6 bar
-10100C
55C
Power consumption:
3/4 and 1: 3 VA
1 1/42: 5 VA
Auxiliary microswitch contact rating:
1 A (230)
Protection class:
IP 65
Operating time:
60 s (90 rotation)
Dynamic torque:
- 3/4 and 1: 15 Nm
- 1 1/4 2:
20 Nm
G (m3/h)
Kv (m3/h)
3/4
6,5
1
9,8
1 1/4
17,7
1 1/2
30
2
39,2
Application diagram
Shut-off valve
1
2
3
4
L/MIN
Pump
CALEFFI
CAMERA
Temperature probe
1
2
Pressure gauge
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
HOBBY
CAMERA
1
2
L/MIN
CALEFFI
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
Temperature gauge
CALEFF
BAGNO
WC
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
Safety thermostat
1
2
3
4
L/MIN
CALEFFI
1
2
1
2
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
V
DE
LN
CALEFFI
150051
150051
Convertitore
Trasformatore
AC
50Hz
Convertitore
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
230V
24V
24V~
~ ~
1 2 3
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
24V~
4 5 6
1 2 3
4 5 6
ST
S/W
CAMERA
1
2
HOBBY
1
2
L/MIN
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFF
150052
1
2
4
L/MIN
CALEFFI
220 - 240 V 50 Hz
ST
HOBBY
CAMERA
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
BAGNO
WC
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
CALEFFI
CAMERA
Code 161000
Modulating digital controller for heating and cooling. Complete with flow/return probes and contact probe holder. Three point type.
Electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz. Protection class IP 40. Control temperature range 778C. Complete with NTC flow/return probes.
Working temperature range -10125C. Time constant 2,5 s. Response 10.000 at 25C. Beta value 25/85C 3977 1,5%.
Two-wire cable with 1/8 M connection, length 1 m.
Code 150050
Maximum relative humidity probe. Electric supply 24 V 50 Hz. RH% limit: 8085%.
Code 150051
Converter. Electric supply: 24 V - 50 Hz. Microswitch contact rating (TRIAC) 1 A (230 V). Maximum ambient temperature 50C.
DIN bar clamps.
Code 150052
Transformer. Electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz. Power consumption 10,5 VA. Maximum ambient temperature 50C. DIN bar clamps.
610 series
Three-way butterfly mixing valve with manual control. Heavy series. Threaded 3/4 F connections (3/42 1/2). Cast iron body
and rotor. Aluminium cover and handle. NBR seals. Working temperature range 2110C.
Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Can be motorized.
610 series
Three-way butterfly mixing valve with manual control. Heavy series. Flanged DN 50 connections (from DN 50 to DN 125). To be
coupled with counterflange EN 1092-1. Cast iron body and rotor. Aluminium cover and handle. NBR seals. Working temperature
range 2110C. Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Can be motorized.
611 series
Four-way butterfly mixing valve with manual control. Heavy series. Threaded 3/4 F connections (3/42 1/2). Cast iron body
and rotor. Aluminium cover and handle. NBR seals. Working temperature range 2110C. Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Can
be motorized.
611 series
Four-way butterfly mixing valve with manual control. Heavy series. Flanged DN 50 connections (DN 50DN 125). To be coupled
with counterflange EN 1092-1. Cast iron body and rotor. Aluminium cover and handle. NBR seals. Working temperature range
2110C. Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Can be motorized.
612 series
Three-way sector mixing valve with manual control. Heavy series. Threaded 3/4 F connections (3/42 1/2).
Cast iron body and rotor. Aluminium cover and handle. NBR seals. Working temperature range 2110C. Maximum working
pressure 6 bar. Can be motorized.
612 series
Three-way sector mixing valve with manual control. Heavy series. Flanged DN 50 connections (from DN 50 to DN 125). To be
coupled with counterflange EN 1092-1. Cast iron body and rotor. Aluminium cover and handle. NBR seals. Working temperature
range 2110C. Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Can be motorized.
636 series
Three-way motorized piston valve. Three-way with manual opening. Full bore. 1 1/4 F connections (from 1 1/4 to 2). Brass body.
Stainless steel stem. Self-extinguishing ABS motor cover. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Maximum working temperature
110C. Three point type actuator. Electric supply 230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac). Power consumption 3,7 VA. Operating time 90 seconds.
Protection class IP 44. Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Auxiliary microswitch contact rating 3 A (230 V).
637 series
Three-way motorized zone ball valve with manual opening and T drilling. Threaded 3/4 F connections (from 3/4 to 2).
Nickled brass body and ball. PTFE seals. Working temperature range -10100 C. Maximum working pressure 40 bar. Maximum
differential pressure 6 bar. Actuator: Electric supply 230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac). Power consumption 3 VA (3/41);
5 VA (1 1/42). Dynamic torque 15 Nm (3/4 and 1: 15 Nm - 1 1/42: 20 Nm). Operating time 60 seconds (rotation 90).
Protection class IP 65. Maximum ambient temperature 55C. Auxiliary microswitch contact rating 1 A.
6370 series
Actuator for mixing valves from 3/4 (from 3/4 to 5). Three point type regulation. Electric supply 230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac). Power
consumption 3 VA (3/41 1/2); 4,5 VA (25). Dynamic torque 15 Nm (3/41 1/2: 15 Nm - 25: 35 Nm). Operating time
60 seconds (3/41 1/2: 60 s, 25: 180 s). Protection class IP 42. Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Auxiliary microswitch
contact rating 1 A.
We reserve the right to make changes and improvements to the products and related data in this publication, at any time and without prior notice
CALEFFI
DISCALD
DIRT deaerator-dirt separator
CALEFFI
546 series
01123/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
Deaerators-dirt separators are used to continuously eliminate the
air and dirt contained in the hydraulic circuits of heating and
cooling systems. The air discharge capacity of these devices is
very high. They are capable of automatically removing all the air
present in the system down to micro-bubble level. At the same time
they separate dirt and impurities contained in the water within the
circuit and collect them in the lower part of the valve body, from
which they may be expelled.
The circulation of fully deaerated water enables the equipment to
operate under optimum conditions, free from any noise, corrosion,
localised overheating or mechanical damage.
Flanged and weld-end deaerators-dirt separators are supplied
complete with hot pre-formed shell insulation to ensure perfect
thermal insulation when used in both hot and chilled water systems.
Patented.
Reference documentation:
- Tech. broch. 01060 DISCAL deaerator 551 series
- Tech. broch. 01137 DIRTCAL dirt separator 5462 series
Product range
546
546
546
546
series
series
series
series
DISCALDIRT
DISCALDIRT
DISCALDIRT
DISCALDIRT
deaerator-dirt
deaerator-dirt
deaerator-dirt
deaerator-dirt
separator
separator
separator
separator
with
with
with
with
olive connections
threaded connections
flanged connections and pre-formed insulation
weld ends and pre-formed insulation
size 22 with nuts for copper pipe

sizes 3/4 and 1
sizes DN 50DN 150
sizes DN 50DN 150
series
Materials
Body:
Dirt separation chamber:
Automatic air vent body:
Internal element:
Float:
Float guide:
Stem:
Float lever:
Spring:
Hydraulic seals:
Drain cock:
Drain valve:
Performance
Medium:
Particle separation rating:
Connections
Main:
Drain:
546 threaded
546 flanged and weld ends

PA66G30
PP
stainless steel
stainless steel
EPDM
-

stainless steel
PP
stainless steel
stainless steel
EPDM

50%
10 bar
0110C
up to 5 m

50%
10 bar
0110C
up to 5 m
with compression ends for 22 mm copper pipe;

3/4, 1 F
DN 50DN 150 flanged PN 16

to be coupled with counterflanges
EN 1092-1
DN 50DN 150 weld ends
1 F
hose connection

Inner part
Material:
Thickness:
External cover
Material:
Thickness:

DN 50DN 100; 60 mm
DN 125DN 150; 50 mm
Density:
- inner part:
30 kg/m3
- outer part:
80 kg/m3
- at 0C:
0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C:
0,045 W/(mK)
>1.300
0100C
class B2

0,7 mm
class 1
Dimensions
B
C
F
C
Code
38552
38552
F
C
F Mass (kg)
546002 22 127 55 128 141 325
3,0
Code
Code
Code
546052 DN 50 350 55
374
775
169 300
18
546053 DN 50 260 55 374 775
169 300
13
546062 DN 65 350 55
374
775
169 300
19
546063 DN 65 260 55 374 775
169 300
13
546082 DN 80 466 55
436
912
219 370
33
546083 DN 80 366 55 436 912
219 370
25
546102 DN 100 470 55
436
912
219 370
35
546103 DN 100 366 55 436 912
219 370
25
546122 DN 125 635 55
541 1245 324 480
82
546123 DN 125 525 55 541 1245 324 480
70
546152 DN 150 635 55
541 1245 324 480
85
546153 DN 150 525 55 541 1245 324 480
70
G Mass (kg)
G Mass (kg)
F Mass (kg)
546005 3/4 105 55 128 141 325
2,9
Dimensions
DN 50
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100
DN 125
DN 150
546006 1 105 55 128 141 325
2,9
Volume (l)
13,6
13,8
28,6
29,6
85
87
Operating principle
The deaerator-dirt separator uses the combined action of several

physical principles. The active part consists of an assembly of
concentric metal mesh surfaces. These elements create the
whirling movement required to facilitate the release of
micro-bubbles and their adhesion to these surfaces.
The bubbles, fusing with each other, increase in volume until the
hydrostatic thrust is such as to overcome the adhesion force to the
structure. They rise towards the top of the unit from which they are
released through a float-operated automatic air release valve.
The impurities in the water, colliding with the metal surfaces of the
internal element, are separated out and fall to the bottom of the
valve body.
The particular construction of the DISCALDIRT allows it to be

maintained and cleaned without removing the device from the
system. Note the following:
The moving parts that control the air venting are accessed simply
by removing the upper cover (1).
The deaerator-dirt separator automatic air vent, located at the top
of the device, is equipped with a long chamber for float movement
(2). This feature prevents any impurities in the water from reaching
the seal seat.
Simply unscrew the top part of the casing (3) to clean the entire air
venting system.
Flanged and weld-end deaerators-dirt separetors are equipped
with a cock (4) that has the dual function of releasing large
quantities of air when the system is being filled and of removing the
impurities that float on top of the water.
2
2
2 3
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
When checking the internal element of threaded deaerators-dirt

separators,
simply unscrew the large dirt collection chamber (5) to 2
2
which the internal element is fixed, so that it can be removed for
3
5 3
cleaning.
Threaded versions of DISCALDIRT have a collection chamber

equipped with a shut-off cock and hose attachment with plug (6),
while flanged and weld-end versions have a ball shut-off valve (7). 4
This 6means impurities can even be expelled while the system is in
operation.
6
7
7
Insulation
Flanged and weld-end DISCALDIRT
devices are supplied complete with
hot pre-formed shell insulation.
This system ensures not only perfect
thermal insulation, but also the
tightness
required
to
prevent
atmospheric water vapour from
entering the unit. For this reason, this
type of insulation may also be used in
cooling water circuits as it prevents
condensation from forming on the
surface of the valve body.
DN 150
DN 125
DN 100
DN 80
DN 65
400
DN 50
p (mm w.g.)
22 - 3/4
p (kPa)
4
350
3,5
300
250
2,5
200
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
100
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
50
0,5
45
40
0,45
0,4
35
0,35
30
0,3
25
0,25
20
0,2
200
180
140
160
120
60
70
80
90
100
50
25
35
40
45
30
18
20
14
16
12
10
7
8
9
3,5
4
4,5
2,5
1,8
0,5
1,4
1,6
0,12
1,2
12
10
0,7
0,8
0,9
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,6
18
16
14
0,1
DN
22-3/4
Kv (m3/h)
16,2
DN
Kv (m3/h)
DN 80
180
1
28,1
DN 50
75
DN 65
150
DN 100 DN 125
280
450
DN 150
720
The maximum recommended speed of the

medium to the device connections is 1,2 m/s.
The following table shows the maximum flow
rates in order to meet this requirement.
DN
l/min
m3/h
DN
l/min
m3/h
1
22-3/4
35,18
22,7
2,11
1,36
DN 80
361,5
21,69
DN 50
141,20
8,47
DN 65
238,72
14,32
DN 100 DN 125
980
564,8
58,8
33,69
DN 150
1436,6
86,2
G (m3/h)
Boiler micro-bubbles
The amount of air which can remain dissolved in a

water solution is a function of pressure and
temperature. This relationship is governed by Henrys
Law and the graph below allows the physical
phenomenon of the air content release of the fluid to be
quantified.
As an example, at a constant absolute pressure of
2 bar, if the water is heated from 20C to 80C, the
amount of air released by the solution is equal to 18 l
per m3 of water. According to this law it can be seen
that the amount of air released increases with
temperature rise and pressure reduction. The air
comes in the form of micro-bubbles of diameters in the
order of tenths of a millimetre.
In heating and cooling systems there are specific
points where this process of formation of
micro-bubbles takes place continuously: in the boiler
and in any device which operates under conditions of
cavitation.
Micro-bubbles are formed continuously on the surface separating

the water from the combustion chamber due to the fluid
temperature.
Combustion chamber
This air, carried Flame temperature
1000C
wall
by the water,
collects in the
Boundary layer
critical points of
FLAME
WATER
the circuit from
where it must be
Micro-bubbles
removed. Some
Wall temperature
Boundary layer
of this air is 160C
temperature 156C
reabsorbed in
Average water
the presence of
temperature 70C
colder surfaces.
4 bar
5 bar
6 bar
7 bar 8 bar
100
120
50
45
Pressure
Absolute pressure
55
40
2 bar
35
30
25
1 bar
20
15
10
5
0
0
20
40
60
80
140
160
180
Water temperature C
Velocity
Micro-bubbles develop where the fluid velocity is very high with the
corresponding reduction in pressure.
These points are
typically
the
pump impeller
and
the
regulating valve
seating. These
Implosions
Seat-obturator
air and vapour
distance
Cavitation
micro-bubbles,
micro-bubbles
the
formation
which
is
of
Pressure
Velocity
enhanced
in
the
case
of
non de-aerated
Fluid vapour
pressure
may
water,
subsequently
implode due to
the
cavitation
phenomenon.
Graph: Solubility of air in water
3 bar
Cavitation and micro-bubbles
80
60
40
20
1000
500
210
250
150
105
50
63
35
20
16
WORKING ZONE
DIRTCAL
DIR
TCAL
CARTRIDGE FILTERS
SPECIAL STRAINERS
Tests in a specialized laboratory

Y-STRAINERS
TNO - Science and Industry (NL)
Comparison of head losses: deaerator-dirt separator Y-STRAINERS

p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
45
40
35
30
25
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
Installation
DISCALDIRT devices may be used in both heating
and cooling circuits, to guarantee progressive
elimination of impurities and air which form
continuously. They should preferably be installed after
the boiler, on the pump suction side, as this is where
most of the micro-bubbles form.
DISCALDIRT deaerators-dirt separators must be
installed in a vertical position.
It is recommended that the air vent cap is replaced with
a Caleffi 5620 series hygroscopic safety cap if the
device is installed in a location that cannot be
inspected.
CHILLER
0,5
4500
4000
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
0,1
5000
3500
3000
2500
1800
2000
1600
1400
1200
200
10
0,2
DISCALDIRT curve
3/4 - Kv=16,2
18
16
14
12
1000
20
3
2,5
900
50
180
160
140
120
800
100
10
4.5
4
3,5
Y-strainer curve
3/4 - Kv=8
700
200
450
400
350
300
250
9
8
7
6
600
500
900
800
700
600
450
1000
500
A normal Y strainer performs its function via a metal

mesh selected for the size of the largest particle. The
medium therefore has a consequent initial loss of head
that increases as the degree of clogging increases.
Whereas, the dirt separator carries out its action by the
particles striking the internal element and subsequently
dropping into the collection chamber. The consequent
head losses are greatly reduced and are not affected
by the amount of impurities collected.
The graph alongside shows a comparison of the
differences in head loss between the two types of
device.
Efficiency
50 passages (1 m/s)
100
400
Reduced head losses
Efficiency
50 passages (0,5 m/s)
.100%)
350
The Caleffi DISCALDIRT deareator-dirt separator,

thanks to the special design of its internal element, is
able to completely separate the impurities in the circuit
down to a minimum particle size of 5 m.
The graph alongside, summarising the tests carried out
in a specialised laboratory (TNO - Science and
Industry), illustrates how it is able to quickly separate
nearly all the impurities. After only 50 recirculations,
approximately one day of operation, up to 100% is
effectively removed from the circuit for particles of
diameter greater than 100 m and on average up to
80% taking account of the smallest particles. The
continual passing of the medium during normal
operation of the system gradually leads to complete
dirt removal.
Initial quantity
10
3) It increases as the number of recirculations

increases. The medium in the circuit, flowing through
the dirt separator a number of times during
operation, is subjected to a progressive action of
separation, until the impurities are completely
removed.
Separated quantity
300
2) It increases as the speed decreases. If the speed

decreases, there is a calm zone inside the dirt
separator and the particles separate more easily.
250
1) It increases as the size and mass of the particle

increase. The larger and heavier particles drop
before the lighter ones.
Efficiency (%)
The capacity for separating the impurities in the

medium circulating in the closed circuits of the systems
basically depends on three parameters:
Particle separation rating - Deaerator-dirt separator efficiency
Particle
dimensions
(m)
Separation efficiency
G (l/h)
Application diagram
P
T
F
A
Sensor pocket
AUTOFLOW
Control pocket
Safety valve
Flow meter
Gas filter
Backflow preventer
Pump
Ball valve
BALLSTOP
T
Temperature gauge
Pressure switch
Shut-off valve
Temperature probe
Safety thermostat
Gas regulator
Y-strainer

A
Regulator
F
Fuel shut-off valve
Flow switch
Expansion vessel
Zone valve
3-way valve
DISCALDIRT 546 series
Deaerator-dirt separator. Connections with compression ends for 22 mm copper pipe and 3/4 connections (and 1) F. Brass
dirt separation chamber and body. Brass automatic air vent body. PA66G30 internal element. PP float. Brass float guide and
stem. Stainless steel float lever and spring. EPDM hydraulic seals. Brass drain cock. Medium water and non-dangerous glycol
solutions excluded from the guidelines of EC directive 67/548; maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure
10 bar. Working temperature range 0110C. Particle separation rating down to 5 m. Drain: with hose connection.
DISCALDIRT 546 series

Deaerator-dirt separator. Flanged connections DN 50 (from DN 50 to DN 150) PN 16, to be coupled with counterflanges
EN 1092-1. Weld end connections DN 50 (from DN 50 to DN 150). Drain valve 1 F. Epoxy resin coated steel body. Brass
automatic air vent body. Stainless steel internal element. PP float. Brass float guide and stem. Stainless steel float lever and
spring. EPDM hydraulic seals. Brass drain valve. Medium: water and non-dangerous glycol solutions excluded from the guidelines
of EC directive 67/548; maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Working temperature range
0110C. Particle separation rating down to 5 m. Closed cell expanded PE-X shell insulation and embossed unfinished aluminium
external cover. Working temperature range 0100C.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.p.A. S.R.229, N.25 28010 Fontaneto dAgogna (NO) Italia Tel. +39 0322 8491 Fax +39 0322 863305
www.caleffi.it info@caleffi.it
DISCALA
AIR high-performance
automatic air vent
CALEFFI
551 series
cert. n 0003
01124/06 GB
ISO 9001
Function
DISCALAIR devices are able to release large quantities of air that has formed in the
hydraulic circuits of heating and air conditioning systems, even against substantial
pressure values.
This venting capacity is due to the particular geometry of the venting
mechanism, identical to that of the DISCAL deaerators 551 series.
This prevents the appearance of negative phenomena that might prejudice the
working life and performance of the heating system, such as:
- corrosive processes caused by oxygen;
- air pockets in the heating elements;
- cavitation in the circulating pumps.
Product range
Code 551004 High-performance automatic air vent
size 1/2 F
Dimensions

Temperature range:
Connections:

50%
Medium:

PP
stainless steel
stainless steel
EPDM
10 bar
10 bar
0110C
Materials: - body:
- cover:
- float:
- float guide:
- obturator stem:
- float lever:
- spring:
- hydraulic seals:
1/2 F
Code
551004
A
1/2"
B
115
C
35
D
55
Weight (kg)
0,62
Operating principle
Installation
to drop so that the obturator opens. This action, and therefore
correct valve operation, is ensured as long as the water pressure
remains under the maximum discharge pressure.
DISCALAIR automatic air vent 551 series must

be installed in a vertical position.
We recommend installing a shut-off valve

upstream of the DISCALAIR device to simplify
any maintenance operations.
During operation the upper cap must be

loosened in the normal version, whereas it must
be completely tightened in the hygroscopic
version.
The installation of the valve in places subject to

freezing is not recommended; if this is the case,
the atuomatic deaerator Caleffi MAXCAL 501
series should be used.
It is recommended that the venting valve cap

be replaced by the Caleffi AQUASTOP
hygroscopic safety cap code R59681 in all
cases where inspection is not possible.
High discharge pressure
The valve is able to release large quantities of air up to a pressure
of 10 bar, thanks to the particular internal geometry used in its
design.
The operating principle is based on the properties
of the cellulose fibre disks forming the retaining
cartridge. These disks increase their volume by
50% when they come into contact with water, thus
closing the valve. This avoids any damage in the
event of water leakage.
Discharge capacity in the phase of filling the system
Maintenance
Nl/s
Operating chamber
The valve body is made in such a way as to have a long chamber
for movement of the float controlling the obturator.
This characteristic prevents impurities in the water from reaching
the seal housing.
The DISCALAIR automatic air vent is designed to

enable the inspection of the internal mechanism.
Access to the moving parts that control the air
outlet is obtained by simply removing the upper
cover. The body moreover can be separated from
the lower part connected to the pipe.
1,5
1,4
1,3
1,2
1,1
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
3,5
4,5
5,5
6,5
7,5
8,5
9,5
10
bar (air)
DISCALA
AIR 551 series
High-performance automatic air vent. 1/2 F connections. Brass body and cover. PP float. Brass float guide. Stainless
steel float lever and spring. Brass obturator stem. EPDM hydraulic seals. Medium water and glycol solutions; maximum
percentage of glycol 50%. Temperature range 0110C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum discharge
pressure 10 bar.
Code R59681
Hygroscopic safety cap. Brass body. EPDM hydraulic seals. Cellulose fibre disks seal cartridge; fibre volume increase
on contact with water 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum working temperature 110C.
CALEFFI
Pre-adjustable automatic filling unit

assemblies for high flow rates
series 554 - 574
CALEFFI
01125/05 GB
Function
reducing valve with compensating seat, an inlet strainer, an
upstream shut-off valve with built-in check valve and a downstream
shut-off valve.
It is installed in the water supply pipework in sealed heating
systems and its main function is to maintain the system pressure
stable at a set value, automatically topping up with water, as
required.
This product has the characteristic of being pre-adjustable,
which means that it can be adjusted at the required pressure
value before the system filling phase.
A pre-assembled version is also available, complete with upstream
backflow preventer and shut-off valve.
- Tech. broch. 01085 Pressure reducing valves, series 5350
- Tech. broch. 01022 Backflow preventer, series 574
- Tech. broch. 01021 Ballstop ball valve with built-in check valve
Product range
Code 554040 Pre-adjustable automatic filling unit assembly for high flow rates, with pressure gauge connection and setting indicator
Size 1/2
Code 5541 . 0 Pre-adjustable automatic filling unit assembly for high flow rates, with pressure gauge and setting indicator
Sizes 1/2, 3/4
Code 574001 Charging unit with pressure gauge, complete with BA type backflow preventer, series 574, strainer and shut-off valve
Size 3/4
Materials (554040 - 5541.0 codes only)

Body:
Cover:
Control spindle:
Moving parts:
Seals:
Filter:
Shut-off valves:
Performance
Max. pressure upstream:
Pressure setting range:
Factory setting:
Filter mesh size :
Medium:
Connections
Inlet:
Outlet:
Pressure gauge:
554040 - 5541 . 0
574001

EN 12165 CW602N
PA 66 G 30
stainless steel
EN 12164 CW602N
NBR
stainless steel
brass EN 12165 CW617N, chrome-plated

EN 12165 CW602N
16 bar
1 6 bar
3 bar
60C
0 10 bar
0,51 mm
water
10 bar
1 6 bar
3 bar
60C
0 10 bar
0,40 mm
water
1/2, 3/4 F
1/2, 3/4 F
1/4 F
3/4 F
3/4 F
-
stainless steel
EN 12164 CW602N
NBR
stainless steel
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Dimensions
CALE
FFI
CALEFFI
E
D
Code
554040/140
554150
A
1/2
3/4
B
112
112
C
204
232
Weight (kg)
1,72
1,9
Code
574001
554 series
A
3/4
B
112
C
30
D
505
Weight (kg)
6,1
Non-stick materials
The central support 1 containing
the moving parts, is made of a
plastic material with a low
adhesion coefficient. This solution
minimises the possibility of
limescale formation, the main
cause of eventual malfunctions.
The 554 series filling unit assembly consists of:

- Pressure reducing valve, series 5350
- Ball valve with built-in check valve, series 3230
- Shut-off ball valve
2
1
Pre-adjustment
554 series filling unit assemblies are
provided with an adjustment knob
and a calibration pressure indicator
which is visible from both sides. This
pressure indicator has an incremental
movement, so that the pressure can
be adjusted continuously, with the
value being displayed at 0,5 bar
increments.
The system pressure can thus be
pre-set to the required value even
before the reducer is installed.
High pressures
The zone exposed to the upstream pressure is constructed in such
a way that it can operate at high pressure. Thanks to the PTFE antiextrusion rings 2 on the compensanting piston, the valve can be
used in continuous service with upstream pressures of up to 25 bar.
Removable self-contained cartridge

The cartridge, which includes the diaphragm, filter, seat, obturator
and compensating piston, is pre-assembled as a self-contained
unit with the cover, and can easily be removed for inspection and
maintenance purposes.
4
6
2
8
0
10
bar
Code 574001
Installation
The filling unit is a device placed between the heating system and
the public mains or the internal water supply system.
In order to prevent potentially polluted water, (which may be
hazardous to human health), from flowing back from the heating
system, it is always advisable to install a pre-assembled kit with
backflow preventer.
1. Filling unit can be installed in either vertical or horizontal

pipework. However, the unit must not be installed upside down.
CALEFF
I
CALEFF
I
574001 code filling unit assembly consists of:
CALEFF
I
- Controllable, reduced pressure zone backflow preventer, BA

type, series 574
- Pre-adjustable pressure reducing valve, series 5350
- Shut-off ball valves
- Y-strainer, series 577
2. The special method of mechanical pre-adjustment with pressure

setting indicator makes it possible to set the unit to the required
value in the system before the beginning of the filling phase.
3. When the system is being commissioned, the unit is normally
calibrated at a pressure no lower than the hydrostatic pressure
plus 0,3 bar.
4. During filling, the internal mechanism will automatically
regulate the pressure until it reaches the required value, without
the need to oversee the filling operation itself.
5. Given the pre-calibrating function, the presence of the
downstream pressure gauge is not essential.
6. When the system is filled, the shut-off valve can be closed. In
order to restore the automatic top-up condition, merely re-open
the valve. The pressure in the system will gradually return to the
set pressure.
Maintenance
For inspection, cleaning or replacement of the complete regulating
cartridge:
1) Isolate the reducer.
Series 574
BA type controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer

series 574, designed in compliance with the EN 12729 European
standard - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable
water. Controllable backflow preventer with reduced pressure zone.

Family B - Type A.
BA type backflow preventer can be installed to prevent pollution from
types of water classified up to the category 4 in accordance with the
EN 1717 standardProtection against pollution of potable water in
water installations and general requirements of devices to prevent

pollution by backflow.
The types of water contained in water systems are classified in this
standard according to the degree of risk to health.
Category 4 Fluid that presents a significant health hazard due to
concentrations of toxic substances.
2) The special construction of the

regulating unit requires no
adjustment of the calibrated
pressure, which can be left at
the set value.
3)Remove the upper cover, using
a suitable spanner. The upper
cover is integral with the internal
regulating cartridge.
4) Carry
out
the
essential
operations of checking and
cleaning the filter.
5)The
whole
self-contained
cartridge can be refitted or
replaced with a spare. When the
cartridge is screwed back into
the valve body the pressure
indication windows will return to
the original position.
6) Reopen the shut-off valves.
The pressure will return to the
original set valve.
Application diagram
IFFELAC
IFFELAC
AC
IFFEL
IFFELAC
F
A
Shut-off valve
Pump
Ball valve
Autoflow
3-way valve
Fuel shut-off valve

Pressure switch
Flow meter
Check valve
Sensor pocket
Control pocket
Temperature gauge
Temperature probe
Safety thermostat
Safety valve
Gas filter
Gas regulator
Flow switch
Controller
Zone valve
Expansion vessel
Air separator
Series 554
Pre-adjustable automatic filling unit assembly. 1/2F (1/2 and 3/4) threaded connections. Body and moving parts in
dezincification resistant alloy. Maximum working temperature 60C. Maximum inlet pressure 16 bar. Pressure setting
range 1 - 6 bar. Consisting of: pressure reducing valve with compensating seat, cover in PA 66 G 30, filter in stainless
steel, siliding surfaces in anti-scaling material, diaphragm and seals in NBR, removable for maintenance operations,
pressure setting indicator for the device pre-adjustment, pressure gauge scale 0 - 10 bar (version with pressure gauge),
1/4F pressure gauge connection (version with pressure gauge connection); upstream shut-off ball valve with built-in
check valve, chrome plated; downstream shut-off ball valve, chrome plated.
Code 574001
Charging unit with backflow preventer. 3/4 F connections. Maximum working temperature 60C. Maximum working
pressure 10 bar. Consisting of: pressure reducing valve with compensating seat, body and moving parts in dezincification
resistant alloy, cover in PA 66 G 30, seals in NBR, pressure setting range 1 - 6 bar, complete with strainer; downstream
pressure gauge scale 0 - 10 bar; BA type controllable reduced pressure zone backflow preventer, complying with EN
12729, body in dezincification resistant alloy, diaphragm and seals in NBR, discharge tundish with fixing collar for the
discharge piping; shut-off ball valve in brass; backflow preventer Y-strainer.
CALEFFI
Manifolds in composite specifically

designed for radiant panel systems
CALEFFI
670 series
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01126/05 GB
Function
Manifolds in composite are used to control and distribute the fluid
in the circuits of floor radiant panel systems.
This particular series of manifolds, made in a specific composite
material for use in air-conditioning systems, is composed of: flow
manifold, with flow meters and built-in balancing valves; return
manifold, with shut-off valves fitted for thermo-electric actuator; end
fittings with automatic air vent valves and filler/drain cocks; ball shut-off
valves; liquid crystal digital thermometers, on the flow and return
manifolds.
They are supplied pre-assembled in a special box with reduced
depth and height-adjustable supports to facilitate installation and
plumbing connections.
Reference documents
Tech. Broch. 01042 Thermo-electric actuator
Product range
670 series
Manifolds in composite specifically designed for radiant panel systems, pre-assembled in box
Size 1
Materials:
Flow manifold
- body:
Flow-rate balancing valve
- obturator:
- flow meter body:
- spring:
- hydraulic seals:
- balancing unit cover:
Return manifold
- body:
Shut-off valve
- obturator:
- obturator stem:
- spring:
- hydraulic seals:
- control knob:
End fittings
- body:
- air vent valve body:
- filler/drain cock body:
- air vent valve seal:
- hydraulic seals:
PA66GF
PSU
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
PA66GF
EPDM
stainless steel
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
PA66GF
PA66GF
silicone rubber
EPDM
Ball shut-off valves

- valve body:
- union seals:
- control lever:

EPDM
PA66GF
Performance
Medium:
Max. cold hydraulic test pressure:
Max. air vent valve discharge pressure:
Temperature range:

30%
4 bar
6 bar
6 bar
5-60C
Flow meter scale:

Accuracy:
1-4 l/min
10%
Liquid crystal digital thermometer scale
24-48C
Manifold connections
- main:
- outlets:
1 F
3/4 x coupling with adapter code 675850
Dimensions
30
70
195
BAGNO
CUCINA
ENTRATA
PRANZO
C. MATRIM.
255
550
CAMERA
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
4
L/MIN
BAGNO
4
L/MIN
CUCINA
ENTRATA
3
L/MIN
PRANZO
C. MATRIM.
CAMERA
91
65
43
270-410
48
110
80-120
50
A
B
Code
Nr. outlets
A
B (Wall box width)
Weight (kg)
6706C1
3
300
600
14,8
6706D1
4
350
600
15,0
6706E1
5
400
600
15,2
6706F1
6
450
600
15,4
6706G1
7
500
800
19,4
6706H1
8
550
800
19,6
6706I1
9
600
800
19,8
6706L1
10
650
800
20,0
12
BAGNO
CUCINA
ENTRATA
PRANZO
C. MATRIM.
CAMERA
4
C
9
11
10
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
50
CUCINA
ENTRATA
PRANZO
C. MATRIM.
CAMERA
Pre-assembled unit complete with:

1) Flow manifold with flow meters and built-in flow rate balancing valves
2) Return manifold with built-in shut-off valves fitted for thermo-electric actuator
3) End fittings with automatic air vent with hygroscopic cap, discharge valve and filler/drain cock
4) Pair of ball shut-off valves
5) Liquid crystal digital thermometers on the flow and return manifolds
6) Adhesive labels indicating the rooms
7) Pair of brackets fastening to the box
8) Box with adjustable height and depth
9) Coupling adapter with clip 675850 code
10) Template for cutting pipe 675002 code
Accessories
11) 680 series single and multi-layer plastic pipe fitting with self-adjustable diameter
12) 656 series thermo-electric actuator
13) Push-fit thermometer for panel circuit 675900 code
7
13
Specific plastic material
The manifolds are made with a specifically selected polymer for heating and cooling system applications. The basic characteristics for this use are:
-
high strain resistance while maintaining good ultimate elongation

good resistance to crack propagation
very low moisture absorption, for constant mechanical behaviour
high abrasion resistance due to medium constant flow
performance stability to temperature changes
compatibility with the glycols and additives used in the circuits
These basic material characteristics, combined with the appropriate shaping of the most highly stressed areas, enable a comparison with the
metals typically used in the construction of distribution manifolds.
Return manifold
The return manifold is equipped with built-in shut-off valves. Using
the shut-off valve with a manual knob, the flow rate to the single
circuits can be reduced so much as to shut off the circuit
completely. The valve is equipped with a stainless steel control
stem in a single piece, with a double O-ring seal. The rubber
obturator is specially shaped to minimize the losses of head and
the noise produced by the flow of the medium, preventing the seal
seat from possibly sticking.
The valves are fitted to accommodate thermo-electric actuator in order
to automate their action upon receiving a signal from an ambient
thermostat.
Flow manifold
The flow manifold is equipped with flow meters and built-in flow rate
balancing valves.
Using the balancing valve with the special tapered obturator, the
flow rate to the single circuits can be adjusted accurately as
required, with the setting being read off the single flow meter with a
scale of 1-4 l/min. This simplifies and speeds up the operation of
calibrating the circuit, with no need for reference graphs. After
balancing, the valve can be locked in position by means of its
tamper-proof cover.
This valve makes it possible to seal off the single circuit should this
be necessary.
Modular manifolds
The manifolds and end fittings
are modular thanks to the
threaded connections with
O-ring seals and lock clips
preventing unscrewing. With
this connection system, the
operation of assembling the
various components is simplified
and the hydraulic seal is fully
assured.
Replaceable components
The headworks of the balancing valve with flow meter and of the
shut-off valve can be removed and replaced with spare parts.
End fitting
The end fitting is equipped with an automatic air vent with hygroscopic
safety cap, discharge valve and filler/drain ball cock.
The automatic air vent is equipped with a removal mechanism air with
a silicone rubber obturator. The vent mechanism is connected to the
valve body by a fixing clip, making any inspection and maintenance
work easier.
The hygroscopic safety plug anyhow prevents water leaking to
protect the installation. The manual discharge valve speeds up the
operation of filling the circuit, done by using the drain/filler ball cock.
Panel circuit outlets

The outlet connections of the single panel circuits are designed to
use a special coupling adapter that can be removed with a fixing
clip. The brass adapter has a double O-ring seal and a hexagon on
its surface. The pipe fitting is
connected straight onto the
threaded side. With this
particular connection system,
the fitting with the adapter can
be tightened onto the piping
outside the box and then
coupled on the manifold body
later, making the plumbing
installation simpler and more
practical.
Digital thermometers
A liquid crystal digital thermometer is fitted on the flow and return
manifold body, on both sides, with a temperature range of 24-48C.
The liquid crystals automatically light up green at the measured
temperature, making it easy to read even when there is poor lighting.
This thermometer is calibrated to display the actual temperature of
the medium, which is essential to evaluate the systems thermal
load and operating conditions.
Room identification
On the manifold body, at the outlet of
each panel circuit, there is a special
surface for affixing an adhesive label
identifying the corresponding room.
Thermometers for loop piping

As an accessory, a special spirit
thermometer with a scale of
5-50C is available, equipped
with a push-fit plastic body, for
the single loop piping, with an
outside diameter from 15 to 18 mm.
This thermometer, installed on
the return line, measures the
actual temperature of the
medium returning from the
circuit making it possible to
check the state of the single
panels heat transfer accurately.
Bracketing
The manifolds have holes to
secure them on brackets to allow
housing them in boxes.
The manifolds are reversible, in
that they can be positioned with
the entry from the right or left.
The return manifold, located at
the top, is installed at an angle
on purpose in order to make it
easier for the panel circuit pipes
to pass through, up to 20 mm in
diameter.
The manifolds can thus be
bracketed in a box just 80 mm
deep, allowing for installation in
thin walls.
Shut-off valves
The ball shut-off valves on the
flow and return of the circuits are
the union-type with a flat-seat
seal made of EPDM.
Box
The manifolds are supplied bracketed in a recess-mounting plate
box with an adjustable depth from 80 to 120 mm. The box,
specifically designed to be used with radiant panel systems, is
equipped with floor supports that are adjustable in height from
270 to 410 mm, the height being chosen according to the thickness
of the slab. With these supports, the pipe passageway is clear of
obstruction; a double curtain wall then enables the plastering to be
done directly and the correct fitting of frame and cover. The back wall
of the box has grooves and holes to secure the manifold brackets;
the side and top walls have holes for the main pipes to pass through.
The cover is opened and closed using a special handle with a
push-fit clamp, without using any keys or tools.
The box is also customizable for connecting the main pipes coming
in from the top.
In order to determine the hydraulic characteristics of the circuit, it is necessary to calculate the total loss of head suffered by the flow of medium
on passing through the devices forming the manifold assembly and the radiant panel circuits.
PBall V
PR Man.
PSV
PTot.
BAGNO
CUCINA
ENTRATA
PRANZO
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
PLoop
PBV
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
PBall V
GLoop
BAGNO
CUCINA
ENTRATA
GTot.
PRANZO
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
PF Man.
PTot.

PBV
= Localized loss at loop balancing valve

(loop flow rate)
PTot.
PBV
PLoop
PSV
PLoop = Loop loss (loop flow rate)

PBall V
PBall V
PF. Man.
GLoop
PSV
PR Man.
= Localized loss at panel circuit

shut-off valve (loop flow rate)
PF. Man. = Distributed loss of the flow manifold

(total flow rate)
GTot.
GTot.
PR. Man. = Distributed loss of the return manifold

(total flow rate)
PBall V. = Ball valve loss (total flow rate)
PTot. = PBV +PLoop + PSV + PF Man. + PR Man. + PBall V x 2
(1.1)
P (kPa)
10
600
450
400
350
4,5
4
3,5
300
2,5
250
2,5
0,3
25
0,25
0,2
450
0,1
500
400
350
300
250
180
200
160
140
120
90
100
80
50
25
20
70
0,12
60
12
10
45
0,18
0,16
0,14
40
18
16
14
50
20
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
45
40
35
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,5
30
0,3
25
0,25
18
16
14
0,18
0,16
0,14
12
0,12
0,2
10
G (l/h)
G (l/h)
Kv
1,00
2,40
Flow rate balancing valve fully open

Shut-off valve
Kv0,01
100
240

0,1
4000
30
0,5
1,2
90
80
70
3500
0,45
0,4
0,35
120
100
3000
0,6
35
20
60
45
40
35
30
50
0,9
0,8
0,7
1,8
1,6
1,4
2500
1,2
90
80
70
180
160
140
1800
120
100
200
2000
1,8
1,6
1,4
1600
180
160
140
500
1400
250
1200
300
200
9
8
7
900
4,5
4
3,5
10
900
800
700
1000
450
400
350
P (kPa)
1000
800
600
500
P (mm w.g.)
700
9
8
7
600
900
800
700
500
P (mm w.g.)
1000
Flow or return manifold 36 outlets

Ball valve
Kv
16,0*
12,0*
16,5*
Kv0,01
1600*
1200*
1650*
* Average value
Example of calculation of total loss of head

Supposing we need to calculate the loss of head of a manifold with three outlets with the following characteristics:
The pipes of the three loops have the following characteristics of flow rate and loss of head:
Circuit 1
P1 = 10 kPa
G1 = 120 l/h
Circuit 2
P2 = 15 kPa
G2 = 150 l/h
Circuit 3
P3 = 7 kPa
G3 = 80 l/h
(1.2)
We calculate each term of the formula (1.1), using the relationship:

P = G2/Kv0.012
G = flow rate in l/h
It should be stressed that the calculation of PTot. must be made taking account of the circuit in which there are the greatest head losses
distributed along the entire loop of the panel piping.
It follows that:
PBV
PLoop
PSV
PF Man.
PR Man.
PBall V
=
=
=
=
=
=
1502/1002 = 2,25 kPa

15 kPa
1502/2402 = 0,39 kPa
3502/16002 = 0,05 kPa
3502/16002 = 0,05 kPa
3502/16502 = 0,04 kPa
} Values obtained by disregarding variations due to flow rate to each branch circuit
By means of (1.1) adding up all the calculated terms, we have:

PTot.= 2,25 + 15 + 0,39 + 0,05 + 0,05 + 0,04 = 17,64 kPa
Note:
Because of the low head losses for the ball valves and the manifolds, the three terms relating to them can be neglected.
In general, the total head loss is reasonably approximate to that of the branched circuit of the panel.
Using balancing valves with flow meter

The balancing valves in the flow manifold make it possible to balance each single circuit of the panels to obtain the actual design flow rates.
Considering the following data:
- flow rate of medium that must flow through each circuit
- head loss that for this flow rate is generated in each circuit:
PCircuit = PLoop + PSV (PShut-off valve)
SV
- available head on the panel circuit or predetermined head:

HPredetermined PCircuit + = PBV + PLoop + PSV
PCircuit
disadvantaged
Referring to the diagram alongside, the balancing valve must, for the
loop flow rate, provide an additional head loss equal to the difference
PBV (PBalancing valve).
PTot.
HPredetermined PCircuit +
disadvantaged
BV
PBV
Flow rate adjustment and reading

Raise the block cover with the aid of a screwdriver and turn it over onto the flow meter. Adjust the flow rate of the single panels by turning the
flow meter body that acts on the built-in balancing valve.
The flow rate must be read off the graduated scale, expressed in l/min, printed on the flow meter.
After making all the adjustments, reposition all the knobs and hook them in their seat to prevent tampering.
670 series
Manifold in composite specifically designed for radiant panel systems with 3 (from 3 to 10) outlets. Body of PA66GF. Seals
of EPDM. Head connections: 1 F threaded. Outlet connections: 3/4 M. Media: water and glycol solutions. Maximum
percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum working pressure 4 bar. Temperature range 5-60C. Maximum automatic air vent
discharge pressure 6 bar.
Complete with:
- Flow manifold with flow-rate balancing valves and flow meter with graduated scale 1-4 l/min.
Accuracy 10%.
- Return manifold with shut-off valves fitted for thermo-electric actuator.
- Pair of end fittings with automatic air vent with hygroscopic cap, discharge valve, filler/drain cock.
- Pair of ball shut-off valves, brass body. Union seals made of EPDM.
- Liquid crystal digital thermometers on the flow and return manifolds. Scale 24-48C.
- Adhesive labels indicating the rooms.
- Pair of fixing brackets.
- Box made of painted sheet steel with clamp; adjustable depth of from 80 to 120 mm; with floor supports that are
adjustable from 270 to 410 mm.
- Coupling adapter with clip 675850 code for manifold outlet and pipe fitting connection 680 series.
- Template for pipe cutting 675002 code.
Accessories
675
Coupling adapter with clip code 675850 for manifold outlet 670 series
and pipe fitting connection 680 series.
Size: 3/4 M - 18-clip coupling.
Technical and construction specifications

Materials: - body:
- seal:
- clip:

double O-ring of EPDM
stainless steel
Medium:
Temperature range:
Connection:

30%
10 bar
0-100C
5-60C (coupled in the manifold 670)
3/4 M - 18-clip coupling
680
Single and multi-layer plastic pipe fitting with self-adjustable diameter.

Size 3/4.
Technical and construction specifications

Materials: -
adapter:
nut:
pipe clenching ring:
seals:
dielectric seal ring:
Medium:
Temperature range:
Connection:

PA66GF
EPDM
EPDM
30%
10 bar
5-80C (PEX)
5-50C (Multi-layer)
3/4
1
2
3
4
Pipe-fitting coupling flexibility
This fitting has been specifically designed in order to adjust to several pipe diameters. The great
variety of plastic pipes, single and multi-layer, on the market and the breadth of permissible tolerances
have made it necessary to design a specific fitting.
Keeping the nominal dimensions of the fittings currently on the market, the new construction
solution makes it possible to use the same fitting for pipes with differences on their outside
diameter of up to 2 mm and on their inside diameter of up to 0,5 mm.
Pull-out resistance
This fitting opposes high resistance to pipe pull-out. Its special tightening system makes it
suitable for all applications, ensuring a perfect hydraulic seal.
Low head losses
The internal profile of the adapter (1) is shaped to obtain a Venturi effect as the medium flows.
It permits having a head loss 20% lower than that corresponding to passages of the same
diameter.
Dielectric seal ring
The fitting is equipped with a rubber insulating element (2) to prevent contact between the
aluminium in the multi-layer pipe and the brass of the fitting. This prevents any galvanic
corrosion generated by two different metals.
Double O-ring seal
On the adapter there are two O-ring seals (3) (4) made of EPDM in order to avoid potential
leaks even at high working pressures.
Piping (mm)
inside outside
Code
680502
680503
680500
680501
680506
680515
680517
680524
680526
680535
680537
680544
680546
680555
680564
680505
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
7,5- 8
8,5- 9
9,5- 9,5
1 9,5-10
1 9,5-10
10,5-11
10,5-11
11,5-12
11,5-12
12,5-13
12,5-13
13,5-14
13,5-14
14,5-15
15,5-16
17
12-14
12-14
14-16
12-14
14-16
14-16
16-18
14-16
16-18
16-18
18-20
16-18
18-20
18-20
18-20
22,50
6561
Tech. brosch. 01042
Normally closed.
Code

- colour
230
224
Normally closed.
656112
656114
Voltage (V)
230
224
Normally closed
Electric supply:
Starting current:
Working current:
- 24 V (dc)
1A
230 V (ac) = 13 mA
24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc) = 140 mA
Power consumption:
3W
Auxiliary microswitch contacts rating (code 656112/114): 0,8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
CE
50C
Operating time:
80 cm
Approval:
230 V
(ac)
- 24 V
(ac)
675
695
Push-fit thermometer for panel piping,

code 675900.
System test pump

code 695000.
Comprehensive of
pressure gauge and
hose for connecting
to the system.
Technical and constructional specifications

Material:
RAL 9010 white
version with micro: RAL 9002 grey
Voltage (V)
656102
656104
Code
- body:
Thermometer fluid:
Thermometer scale:
Range of use of pipe outside (e) diam.:
Conducting paste supplied in package

PA6GF
alcohol
5-50C
60C
from 15 to 18 mm
Materials: - body:
- piston:
- control lever:
Water content:
Hose connection:
Hose length:
bronze
brass
galvanized steel
50 bar
12 l
0-60 bar
1/2
1,5 m
680 series
Self-adjustable diameter fitting for single and multi-layer plastic pipes with internal profile having a Venturi effect to limit head
losses. Size 3/4 F. Nut and adapter made of brass, seals of EPDM, dielectric seal ring of EPDM, pipe clenching ring of PA66GF.
Media: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Temperature range
5-80C (PEX); 5-50C (Multi-layer).
675 series
Push-fit thermometer for panel piping. Range of use of pipe outside diameter: from 15 to 18 mm. Body of PA6GF. Thermometer
fluid: alcohol. Thermometer scale 5-50C. Maximum working temperature 60C.
6561 series
Thermo-electric actuator. Normally closed (Normally closed with auxiliary microswitch). Electric supply 230 V (ac); 24 V (ac);
24 V (dc). Starting current 1 A. Working current 13 mA (230 V (ac)), 140 mA (24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)). Power consumption 3 W.
Protection class IP 44 (in vertical position). Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Operating time from 120 to 180
seconds. Length of supply cable 80 cm.
695 series
System test pump with 0-60 bar pressure gauge and 1,5 m hose. Hose connection of 1/2. Maximum working pressure:
50 bar. Water content: 12 l.
Application diagram
a
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
-t1
-t2
-t3
td
CALEFFI
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
50
40
30
20
10
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
BAGNO
CUCINA
PRANZO
50
ENTRATA
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
40
30
20
10
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
1
2
CUCINA
1
2
ENTRATA
1
2
PRANZO
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
-t1
-t2
-t3
td
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
50
40
30
20
10
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
BAGNO
CUCINA
PRANZO
50
ENTRATA
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
40
30
20
10
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
1
2
CUCINA
1
2
ENTRATA
1
2
PRANZO
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
a
40
40
60
20
40
60
20
80
60
Pump
Thermostatic valve
Lockshield valve
80
80
60
20
40
40
60
20
80
01
40
40
01
60
20
80
20
40
60
20
80
80
60
20
80
Shut-off valve
Clock
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.P.A. I 28010 FONTANETO DAGOGNA (NO) S.R.229, N.25 TEL.INT. +39 0322 8491 R.A. FAX +39 0322 863723
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve

for solar systems
2521 series
CALEFFI
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01127/06 GB
Function
The thermostatic mixing valve is used in systems for the production
of domestic hot water.
It is designed to maintain the set temperature of the mixed water
supplied to the user when there are variations in the temperature
and pressure conditions of the incoming hot and cold water or in
the flow rate.
This particular series of mixing valves can function continuously at
the high temperatures of the incoming hot water from the solar
storage tank.
Product range
Code 252140/50 Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve for solar systems
Code 252153
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve with inlet check valves for solar systems
sizes 1/2, 3/4

size 3/4

- shutter:
PSU
- springs:
stainless steel
- seal components:
EPDM
Setting range:
Accuracy:
3065C
2C

Min. working pressure (dynamic):
100C
Max. inlet pressures ratio (H/C o C/H):
2:1
Min. temperature difference between hot water at inlet

and mixed water at outlet for optimum performance:
Min. flow rate to ensure stable temperature:
15C
5 l/min
Connections: - standard version:

- 1/2 and 3/4 M with union
- with check valves version:
- 3/4 M with union
14 bar
5 bar
0,2 bar
Dimensions
C
HOT
MAX 7
MIN
MAX 7
E
A
A
1/2
3/4
MIN
MIX
MIX
Code
252140
252150
COLD
COLD
HOT
B
67
67
C
134
134
D
152
152
A
E
86,5
86,5
F
65,5
65,5
Weight (kg)
1,11
1,12
Code
252153
A
3/4
B
71,5
C
143
D
156,5
E
91
F
65,5
Weight (kg)
1,21
Solar systems - high temperatures

In solar systems with natural circulation in the primary circuit and storage tank with heating jacket, the temperature of the water in the storage
tank can vary considerably depending on the degree of solar radiation and can reach very high temperatures over long periods.
In summer, and if there is little water usage, the hot water at the storage tank outlet can actually reach temperatures around 98C before the
pressure and temperature safety valves are actuated.
At these temperatures, the hot water cannot be used directly, because of the danger of scalding. Water temperatures over 50C can cause
burns very quickly. For example, at 55C, partial burn occurs in about 30 seconds, whereas at 60C partial burn occurs in about 5 seconds.
Consequently, the thermostatic mixing valve
installed must be able to:
reduce the temperature of the water supplied
through the hot water system to a lower value
than to the storage tank, i.e. a value usable by
the user. For reasons of safety, we advise
adjusting the temperature of the mixed water
supplied to the user to a value not higher than
50C
maintain a constant temperature in the mixed
water when there are variations in the inlet
temperatures and pressures.
maintain function and efficiency over time, without
being affected by the continuous high temperature
of the hot water at the inlet.
ensure that water is stored at high temperature
for longer periods, and supplied to the water
system at a lower temperature.
Operating principe
The controlling element of the thermostatic mixing valve is a temperature sensor fully immersed in the mixed water outlet passage which, as it
expands or contracts, continuously establishes the correct proportion of hot and cold water entering the valve.
The regulation of these flows is by means of a piston sliding in a
cylinder between the hot and cold water passages.
Even when there are pressure drops due to the drawing off of hot or
cold water for other uses, or variations in the incoming temperature,
the mixer automatically regulates the water flow to obtain the set
temperature.
The materials used in the construction of
the mixing valve eliminate the problem of
jamming caused by lime deposits. All
the working parts such as shutter, seats
and slide guides are made of a special
anti-scale material, with a low friction
coefficient, guaranteeing that the
performance will be maintained over the
long term.
HOT
High heat resistance

The internal flow regulation components
are designed to maintain performance of
the mixing valve with inlet hot water
temperatures up to 100C, in continuous
operation.
COLD

The control knob permits temperature
setting between minimum and maximum
in one turn (360). It also has a
tamper-proof system to lock the
temperature at the set value.
Versions with check valves
MIXED
p (bar)
p (m w.g.)
10
0,5
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,5
Commissioning
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
50
1
20
10
0,2
1,0
15
0,5
1,5
Check vales
installed to prevent undesirable fluid backflow.
The thermostatic mixing valves are also available in versions with
incorporated check valves at the hot and cold inlets.
The temperature is set at the desired value by means of the knob
Kv = 2,6 (m3/h)
Use
2521 series thermostatic mixing valves are typically installed at the
outlet of hot water storage tanks in solar systems, to ensure constant
temperature of the mixed water supplied to the user.
2521 series thermostatic mixing valves, because of their flow
characteristics, can be installed to control the temperature for both
single consumers (e.g., washbasin, bidet, shower) and for multiple
consumers. In order to guarantee the delivery of mixed water at the
set temperature, the thermostatic mixing valves must have a
minimum flow rate of 5 l/min.
Installation
Before installing mixing valve, the pipework must be flushed out to
ensure that there are no circulating impurities to harm the system.
We recommend always installing filters of sufficient capacity at the
inlet of the water system.
2521 series thermostatic mixing valves must be installed according
to the installation diagrams shown on the instructions sheet or this
leaflet.
2521 series thermostatic mixing valves can be installed in any position,
horizontally or vertically.
The following are indicated on the body of the mixing valve:
hot water inlet, indicated with the colour red and the word HOT
cold water inlet, indicated with the colour blue and the word COLD
mixed water outlet with the word MIX.

Position
T (C)
Min.
Max.
27
32
38
44
49
53
58
63
67
Locking the setting

After setting the temperature, the
setting can be locked at the desired
value using the control knob.
In order to do this, unscrew the lock
screw on the upper part of the
control knob, remove the knob and
put it back on so that the internal
reference couples with the
protrusion on the knob carrier ring
nut.
1 MI N
MA
Application diagrams - System with thermal integration

Shut-off valve
T

Tundish
Check valve
T/P safety valve
2
HOT
1
MIN
CALEFFI
Temperature gauge
MAX 7
COLD
Expansion vessel
T
Automatic
diverting valve
T
Thermostat
Pump
Normally closed
valve
Safety valve
System with thermal integration and recirculation
HOT
1
MIN
CALEFFI
MAX 7
COLD
Normally closed
valve
Code 2521.0
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve, for solar systems. 1/2 (or 3/4) M connections with union. Dezincification resistant
alloy body. Chrome plated. Shutter, regulator seats and slide surfaces made of plastic, scale-resistant material with high
heat resistance. EPDM seals. Stainless steel springs. Maximum inlet temperature: 100C. Setting range from 30C to
65C. Maximum working pressure: 14 bar. Accuracy: 2C. Provided with tamper-proof setting lock.
Code 252153
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve, for solar systems. Complete with check valves at the inlets. 3/4 M connections with
union. Dezincification resistant alloy body. Chrome plated. Shutter, regulator seats and slide surfaces made of plastic,
scale-resistant material with high heat resistance. EPDM seals. Stainless steel springs. Maximum inlet temperature:
100C. Setting range from 30C to 65C. Maximum working pressure: 14 bar. Accuracy 2C. Provided with tamper-proof
setting lock.
CALEFFI
Direct supply unit

for Sepcoll 559 series
CALEFFI
163 series
01128/05 GB
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
Function
The direct supply unit supplies the circuits of the high-temperature
heating system or air-conditioning system directly from the outlets
of a hydraulic separator/manifold.
This unit has been specifically designed for use with both the external
and concealed versions of the separator/distribution manifolds 559
series.
The unit is supplied complete with pre-formed insulation shells,
three-speed pump, differential by-pass valve, flow and return
temperature gauges on secondary circuit and pressure gauge on
the primary inlet, shut-off valves on secondary circuit.
Product range
163620 code Direct supply unit for Sepcoll. Upward flow, right side flow
163630 code Direct supply unit for Sepcoll. Upward flow, left side flow
Size 1
Size 1
Wiring diagram
By-pass
Materials: -
body:
spring:
obturator:
seals:

stainless steel
EPDM
EPDM
L
230 V
N
Ambient
thermostat
Shut-off valves
Materials: - body:
- seals:

EPDM
Connecting pipes
Materials: - body:
- seals:

non-asbestos fibre
Performance
Medium:
Max. inlet temperature on primary:
- connection centre distance:

30%
100C
10 bar
10-60 kPa (1-6 m w.g.)
0-80C
10 bar
1 F with union
1 F
90 mm
Pump
Three-speed pump:
Material: - body:
model UPS 25/60

cast iron GG 15/20
Electric supply:
Max. ambient humidity:
Protection class:
Pump connections:
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with union
Head available at the

unit connections
Power consumption
H (m w.g.)
6
5
UPS 25-60
P
(W)
n
(r.p.m.)
0,40
90
1800
0,30
65
1100
0,20
45
700
3
2
1
0
(A)
Speed
1
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
3,5
Q (m3/h)
Dimensions
Code 163630
Code 163620
40
60
20
80
40
60
20
80
60
20
80
80
40
40
60
20
Insulation technical specifications

Material:
Thickness:
20 mm
Density: - inner part
30 Kg/m3
- outer part
50 Kg/m3
0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C
0,045 W/(mK)
of vapour (DIN 52615):
> 1.300
Temperature range:
0-100C
B2 class
SYSTEM
RETURN
SYSTEM
FLOW
Code
Weight (kg)
163620
95
90
77
460
320
140
7,5
163630
95
90
77
460
320
140
7,5
Hydraulic diagram
6
SR
40
SF
40
60
20
A
C
80
60
20
80
4
2
3
1
BOILER
RETURN
BOILER
FLOW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Three-speed pump UPS 25-60

Wiring box
Secondary flow temperature gauge
Secondary return temperature gauge
Secondary circuit shut-off valves
Pressure gauge
Insulation
BR
BF
Shut-off valve
By-pass valve
Temperature gauge
Pressure gauge
The differential by-pass valve is used to control
the total head in the secondary supply circuit.
When the set differential pressure value is
reached, the obturator opens and allows fluid
to pass from the flow to the return circuit,
keeping the pressure differential at the set
value.
If the individual circuits are shut off by
automatic two-way on/off modulating or
thermostatic valves, the valve prevents
overheating of the pump and excessive velocity
of the fluid.
By-pass hydraulic characteristics

Set positions
p (m w.g.)
(kPa)
80
70
7
6
60
50
40
3
2
30
20
1
0
10
0
0,5
1,5
G (m3/h)
Installation
Configuration with
Sepcoll supplied
from the right
Configuration with
Sepcoll supplied
from the left
40
40
60
80
80
20
60
20
20
80
60
80
20
60
40
40
Direct supply unit

163630 code
Direct supply unit

163620 code
T T
Direct supply unit

163620 code
Direct supply unit

163630 code
40
40
60
20
80
40
60
20
80
40
60
20
80
60
20
80
Application diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
-t1
-t2
-t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
C
50
40
30
20
10
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
BAGNO
CUCINA
PRANZO
C
50
ENTRATA
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
40
30
20
10
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
1
2
CUCINA
1
2
ENTRATA
1
2
40
60
40
60
20
80
60
80
4
2
80
40
40
60
20
80
01
40
40
01
60
20
80
20
40
60
20
80
60
20
PRANZO
CAMERA
40
20
C. MATRIM.
80
Pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
60
20
80
Lockshield
163620 / 163630 codes
Direct supply unit for Sepcoll 559 series. Configuration with upward flow and right side flow (or left side flow). 1 F union
connections on primary circuit. 1 F connections on secondary circuit. Centre distance between primary and secondary
circuit connections: 90 mm. Maximum temperature at inlet of primary circuit: 100C. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar.
Complete with: UPS 25-60 three-speed pump, 230 V - 50 Hz power supply, maximum ambient temperature: 80C,
protection class: IP 44; temperature gauge scale: 0-80C; pressure gauge: 0-10 bar; differential by-pass valve, brass
body, stainless steel spring, setting range: 10-60 kPa; shut-off valves on secondary circuit. With pre-formed insulation
shells in closed cell expanded PEX.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.P.A. S.R.229, N.25 28010 FONTANETO DAGOGNA (NO) TEL. 0322 8491 FAX 0322 863305
Http://www.caleffi.it E-mail: info@caleffi.it
Thermostatic mixing valve with

interchangeable cartridge for solar systems
CALEFFI
2523 series
01129/05 GB
Function
The thermostatic mixing valve is used in systems for the production
of domestic hot water.
and pressure conditions of the incoming hot and cold water or
in the flow rate.
This particular series of mixing valves has been designed specifically
for systems requiring high flow rates and can function continuously at
storage tank.
Product range
2523 series
Thermostatic mixing valve with interchangeable cartridge for solar systems
Sizes 1/2 - 3/4
Dimensions
Materials:- body:
- cartridge and shutter:
electroless nickel plated
- springs:
stainless steel
- seal components:
EPDM
30-65C
2C
MIN
MAX 7
110C
CALEFFI
2:1
Min flow rate to ensure stable temperature:
1/2: 6,7 l/min

3/4: 8,4 l/min
Max inlet pressures ratio (H/C or C/H):
Connections:
14 bar
5 bar
0,2 bar

Min working pressure (dynamic):
Setting range:
Accuracy:
C
B
1/2 and 3/4 M with union
Code
252340
252350
A
1/2
3/4
B
85
85
C
170
170
D
169
169
E
95
95
F
74
74
Weight (kg)
1,65
1,68
Solar systems - high temperatures

In solar systems with natural circulation in the primary circuit and storage tank with heating jacket, the temperature of the water in the storage
tank can vary considerably depending on the degree of solar radiation, and can reach very high temperatures over long periods.
In summer, and if there is little water usage, the hot water at the storage tank outlet can actually reach temperatures around 98C before the
pressure and temperature safety valves are actuated.
At these temperatures, the hot water cannot be used directly, because of the danger of scalding. Water temperatures over 50C can cause
burns very quickly. For example, at 55C, partial burn occurs in about 30 seconds, whereas at 60C partial burn occurs in about 5 seconds.
Consequently, the thermostatic mixing valve
installed must be able to:
reduce the temperature of the water supplied
through the hot water system to a lower value
than to the storage tank, i.e. a value usable by
the consumer. For reasons of safety, we advise
adjusting the temperature of the mixed water
supplied to the user to a value not higher than
50C.
maintain a constant temperature in the mixed water
when there are variations in the inlet temperatures
and pressures.
maintain function and efficiency over time, without
being affected by continuous high temperature of
the hot water at the inlet.
ensure that water is stored at high temperature for
longer periods, and supplied to the water system at
a lower temperature.
Operating principle
High heat resistance

The internal flow regulation components
are designed to maintain performance of
the mixing valve with inlet hot water
operation.
HOT
COLD
The controlling element of the thermostatic mixing valve is a

temperature sensor fully immersed in the mixed water outlet
passage which, as it expands or contracts, continuously
establishes the correct proportion of hot and cold water entering
the valve. The regulation of these flows is by means of a piston
sliding in a cylinder between the hot and cold water passages.
Even when there are pressure drops due to the drawing off of hot
or cold water for other uses, or variations in the incoming
temperature, the mixer automatically
regulates the water flow to obtain the
required temperature.
Interchangeable cartridge
The internal cartridge containing all the control components is
preassembled in a single body and can easily be inspected for
cleaning or replacement if necessary, without any need to take the
valve body out of the pipework.
Wearproof coating
All functional parts, such as the shutter, valve seats and guides, are
electroless nickel plated. This wearproof coating minimizes the risk
of scale forming and ensures performance is maintained over time.
Low-inertia thermostat
The most temperature-sensitive element, the engine of the
thermostatic mixer, has low thermal inertia; in this way it can quickly
react to changes in the conditions of inlet pressure and temperature,
shortening the valve response time.
The control knob permits temperature setting between minimum
and maximum in one turn (360). It also has a tamper-proof system
to lock the temperature at the set value.
MIXED
p (bar)
1/2
3/4
p (m w.g.)
1,5
15
1,0
10
Position
Min
Max
T (C)
25
29
33
39
43
48
52
58
65
0,5
0,3
0,2
Locking the setting
0,5
50
2
20
1
10
0,05

ensure stable operation
and an accuracy of 2C
1/2
3/4
Kv (m3/h)
4,0
4,5
1/2
3/4
Minimum
(l/min)
6,7
8,4
2
3
1 MIN
MA
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,5
0,1
Turn the knob onto the required number,

undo the locking screw, remove the knob
and put it back on so that the internal
reference couples with the protrusion on
the knob carrier ring nut.
Maximum*
(l/min)
82,0
92,0
* P = 1,5 bar
Use
2523 series thermostatic mixing valves are typically installed at the
outlet of hot water storage tanks in solar systems, to ensure constant
temperature of the mixed water supplied to the user.
2523 series thermostatic mixing valves, because of their flow
characteristics, can be installed in centralised systems with many
different user fittings or for controlling groups of fittings, such as
shower units, washbasin units, etc. In order to guarantee the
delivery of mixed water at the set temperature, the thermostatic
mixing valves must have a minimum flow rate of 6,7 l/min (1/2) and
8,4 l/min (3/4).
Replacing the cartridge

The internal cartridge containing all the control components can be
inspected and replaced if necessary, without any need to take the
valve body out of the pipework.
1) Close the shut-off valves on the hot and cold inlets. Set the
knob to the maximum value.
2) Remove the temperature adjustment knob after unscrewing the
lock screw on the top. Remove the plastic knob carrier ring nut.
3) Remove the internal cartridge for inspection or replacement with
a new one, using a suitably sized spanner.
4) Fit the knob carrier ring nut back on so that the position indicator
is visible.
5) The spare cartridge is supplied preset on the highest value.
Then put the control knob back on so that the word MAX align
with the position indicator.
By turning the knob clockwise it must be possible to make the
adjustment from the maximum to the minimum value.
Secure the knob with the lock screw.
6) Reopen the shut-off valves and adjust the mixing value onto the
required temperature.
Installation
Before installing the mixing valve, pipes should be flushed to remove
any impurities that could impair performance. We recommend always
installing filters of sufficient capacity at the inlet of the water system.
3a
3b
2523 series thermostatic mixing valves must be installed as shown

in the installation diagrams in this leaflet, taking account of the current
applicable regulations.
2523 series thermostatic mixing valves can be installed in any position,
The following are indicated on the body of the mixing valve:
hot water inlet, indicated with the colour red.
cold water inlet, indicated with the colour blue.
Check valves
installed to prevent undesired back flows.
Commissioning
The temperature is set at the desired value by means of the knob

Shut-off valve
T

Tundish
Check valve
T/P safety valve
T
Temperature gauge
2
1
MIN
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Expansion vessel
M AX 7
Automatic
diverting valve
T
Thermostat
Pump
Normally closed
valve
Safety valve
2
1
MIN
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
MAX 7
Normally closed
valve
2523 Series
Adjustable thermostatic mixing valve with interchangeable cartridge for solar systems. 1/2 (1/2 or 3/4) M connections with
union. Brass body. Chrome-plated. Electroless nickel plated brass shutter and cartridge. Stainless steel springs. Seals of EPDM.
Maximum inlet temperature 110C. Adjustment range from 30C to 65C. Maximum working pressure (static) 14 bar.
Maximum working pressure (dynamic) 5 bar. Accuracy 2C. Provided with tamper-proof setting lock.
CALEFFI
Temperature and pressure relief valve
CALEFFI
309 series
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01130/05 GB
General information
The temperature and pressure relief valves (TP) 309 series are made
by Caleffi S.p.A in compliance with the essential safety requirements
laid down by Directive 97/23/EC of the European Parliament and the
Council of the European Union for harmonisation of Member States
with regard to pressurised equipment.
Function
The TP relief valve controls and limits the temperature and pressure
of the hot water contained in a domestic storage heater and prevents
it from being able to reach temperatures of over 100C, with the
formation of steam.
On reaching the settings, the valve discharges a sufficient amount
of water into the atmosphere so that the temperature and pressure
return within the systems operating limits.
111 5
This particular series of valves is certified as conforming to the

performance requirements of the European standard EN 1490
(for settings of 4 - 7 - 10 bar).
Product range
309 series Temperature and pressure relief valve
Sizes 1/2 x 15 mm, 3/4 x 15 mm and 3/4 x 22 mm
Dimensions
EN 12165 CW602N
- stem:
- obturator and diaphragm:
EPDM
- spring:
steel EN 10270-1 SH
- control knob:
PA6GF
Materials: - body:
Discharge rating:
PN 10
- 1/2 and 3/4 15;
- 3/4 22;
Medium:
PED category:
Settings:
- temperature:
- pressure:
10 kW
25 kW
water
IV
Nominal pressure:
90C
3 - 4 - 6 - 7 - 10 bar
Connections: 1/2 M x 15 mm with compression fitting for copper pipe

3/4 M x 15 mm with compression fitting for copper pipe
A
F
Code completion ( . . )
Code 3094..
30 3 bar
40 4 bar
60 6 bar
70 7 bar 00 10 bar
Code 309542 Code 3095..

42 4 bar
30 3 bar 60 6 bar 70 7 bar 00 10 bar
Code
3094 . .
309542
3095 . .
A
1/2
3/4
3/4
B
15
15
22
C
40
43
43
D
102
99
99
E
88
91
91
F
39
39
39
Weight (kg)
0,253
0,261
0,310
Operating principle
The valve opens the outlet on reaching the settings for:
- temperature: the thermostat compound inside the temperature sensor 1) submerged in the hot
water storage heater, expands as the temperature increases. This expansion causes a thrust
pin to move and act on the obturator 2) opening the valve. The valve is set to open at
temperatures of over 90C.
- pressure: the obturator, opposed by a set spring, raises on reaching the pressure setting and
opens the outlet completely. The pressure setting is chosen according to the maximum
permissible pressure in the system.
As the temperature and pressure decrease, the opposite action occurs with the valve
subsequently reclosing within the set tolerances.
Certification
CE mark
309 series TP relief valves comply with the essential safety requirements of Directive 97/23/EC
concerning pressure equipment (also called P.E.D.). They are therefore classified as category IV
and are equipped with the CE mark.
Product certification in accordance with European Standard EN 1490
European Standard EN 1490: 2000, entitled Building valves - Combined temperature and
pressure relief valves Tests and requirements, describes the constructional and performance
specifications that TP relief valves must have.
Caleffi 309 series TP relief valves are certified by Buildcert (UK) to comply with the requirements
of the European Standard EN 1490 (for settings 4 7 10 bar).
Installation
Before installing a TP relief valve it is necessary for the sizing to be performed correctly by specialized technical personnel in accordance with
the current regulations for the specific applications. Any use other than the intended use is prohibited.
The TP relief valves must be installed by qualified technical personnel in accordance with current regulations.
The TP relief valve must be installed observing the direction of flow indicated by the arrow on the valve body.
Assembly
Plumbing system
TP relief valves must be installed on the top of the hot water storage
heater, making sure that the temperature sensor is correctly
submerged in the tank.
Make sure that there are no shut-off devices between the valve and
the storage heater.
TP relief valves can
be fitted vertically or
horizontally, but not
overturned.
This prevents debris
from
impairing
operation.
HOT WATER
STORAGE
HEATER
Correct installations
HOT WATER
STORAGE
HEATER
HOT WATER
STORAGE
HEATER
Correct installation
SOLAR
STORAGE
SOLAR
STORAGE
HOT WATER
STORAGE
HEATER
309 series
Temperature and pressure relief valve. Equipped with the CE mark in accordance with directive 97/23/EC. Threaded 1/2 M
connections on the inlet and 15 mm (3/4x 15 mm and 3/4x 22 mm) with compression fitting for copper pipe on the
outlet. Temperature setting 90C. Pressure setting 3 bar (available settings: 3-4-6-7-10 bar for 1/2, 4 bar for 3/4 x 15 mm,
3-6-7-10 bar for 3/4 x 22 mm). Valves with 4-7-10 bar setting certified to EN 1490 standard. Discharge rating: 1/2 x 15 mm:
10 kW, 3/4 x 15 mm: 10 kW, 3/4 x 22 mm: 25 kW. Medium: water. Nominal pressure: PN 10. Dezincification-resistant
alloy body. Brass stem. Obturator and diaphragm in EPDM. Steel spring. Control knob in glass-fiber re-inforced nylon.
CALEFFI
Motorised ball zone valves with

3-contact control
6442 - 6443 - 6444 series
CALEFFI
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01131/06 GB
Function
The motorised zone valves permit automatically shutting off the
medium in air-conditioning and plumbing systems.
The high level of hydraulic performance of this particular series of
valves combined with reduced dimensions and practical
installation make it especially suited to zone heating systems.
The motorised ball valves are used in the above-mentioned
systems mainly thanks to the following features:
- No seepage
- Short operating times (opening - closing valve)
- Operational capacity with high pressure differentials
- Low head losses
- Combination with any type of 3-contact control in order to have
complete control when opening and closing, due to the electrical
construction features.
Patent application No. MI 2005 A 001282
European directive conformity

CE mark directives 89/336 EC and 73/23 EC.
Product range
6442 Series
Motorised two-way ball zone valve with 3-contact control
Code 6443.. 3BY Motorised three-way ball zone valve, by-pass version, with 3-contact control
6444 Series
Motorised three-way ball zone valve, with telescopic by-pass tee, with 3-contact control
sizes 1/2, 3/4,1 M with union

Actuator
Valve body
Materials:
body
ball
ball seal
PTFE with O-Ring in EPDM
control stem seal
double O-Ring in EPDM
union seal
O-Ring in EPDM
Medium:
Temperature range:
Connections:

50%
10 bar
-5110C
10 bar
1/21 M with union
Materials: - protective shell:

- colour:
Synchronous motor
Electric supply:
grey RAL 9002
230 V ( 10%) - 5060 Hz

24 V ( 10%) - 5060 Hz
Power consumption:
4 VA
Auxiliary microswitch contacts rating:
0,8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
IP 44 (vertical control stem)
IP 40 (horizontal control stem)
Operating time (angle of rotation 90):
40 s
055C
Dynamic starting torque:
8 Nm
100 cm
2 230 V 4 24 V
Dimensions - Code completion ( . )
6442 series
2-way
E
G
B
C
Code
A
64424 . 1/2
64425 . 3/4
64426 . 1
B
60
60
60
C
117
117
126
E
95
95
95
D
60
60
60
F
88
88
88
H Weight (kg)
G
55 Es. 37 0,97
55 Es. 37 0,97
55 Es. 38 1,00
6443.. 3BY code
3-way by-pass
version
E
G
CALEFFI
B
C
E
95
95
95
D
Code
A
B
C
64434 . 3BY 1/2 60 117 60
64435. 3BY 3/4 60 117 60
64436. 3BY 1 60 126 60
F
88
88
88
H
G
I
55 Es. 37 59
55 Es. 37 59
55 Es. 37 63
Weight (kg)
1,1
1,1
1,3
E
D
D
Code
A
B
C
64444 . 1/2 60 117 60
64445 . 3/4 60 117 60
64446 . 1 60 126 60
E
95
95
95
F
88
88
88
H
G
I
Weight (kg)
55 Es. 37 4963 1,40
55 Es. 37 4963 1,40
55 Es. 38 4963 1,57
63
B
C
49
CALEFFI
6444 series
3-way with
telescopic
by-pass
Directions of flow and position indicator
Seals
The
valves
are
equipped with unions
with a flat seat with
EPDM O-Ring seal.
Removing the actuator reveals the slot on the top of the control
stem on which acts the pin of the actuator:
- it permits opening/closing the valve manually with a screwdriver.
- its position shows the direction of flow according to the position of
the ball, which is especially helpful when testing or checking the
system.
Here are three diagrams, one for each type of valve; the position
of the slot shows the direction of flow.
Actuator
Two-way valve 6442 series
ON/OFF mode
The valves can be used in ON/OFF mode with a single electrical
enabling signal for opening or closing given by the three-contact
thermostat/timer-thermostat or an ordinary switch.
Modulating mode
The electrical construction features of the actuator allow it to be
combined with any type of three-point regulator.
Drive transmission
Thanks to the tapered coupling
between the stem of the valve
(A) and the shaft of the
gearmotor (B), there is a constant
mesh of the two components.
This
permits
automatic
compensation of the mechanical
slack thanks to the force (C) on
the stem applied by the pressure
of the medium.
CALEFFI
Cam and limit microswitches

The cam (A) that works the
limit microswitches (B) can
move vertically and is
supported by a tapered
spring (C). In this way
the contact with the
microswitches is kept
constant compensating for
wear of the parts over
time.
Three-way valve with by-pass 6443.. 3BY code
CALEFFI
Valve actuator coupling

By means of a steel clip (D), the
coupling between the valve and
actuator is fast and easy
with a straightforward coupling
operation with automatic locking.
Three-way valve with by-pass tee 6444 series
The actuator is equipped with an auxiliary microswitch to be used,
for instance, to stop the pump on closing the valve and vice versa.
It turns on for an average valve opening value of 80%.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Telescopic three-way valve and tee with calibrated nozzle

The telescopic three-way valve with by-pass
tee 6444 series permits coupling with
manifolds with a main centre distance of
between 49 and 63 mm.
The by-pass tee is equipped with a
calibrated nozzle U6 (A) in order to create
losses of head equivalent to those of the user
circuit. This system permits keeping the
system flow rate constant and therefore the
head of the pump, both when the valve is
open and on by-pass.
All the valves are supplied with the slot/indicator in the horizontal
position.
Two-way zone valve 6442 series, sizes 1/2, 3/4 and 1
p (kPa)
4000
30
1800
1600
1400
1200
18
16
14
12
900
800
700
600
9
8
7
6
400
300
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
40
0,4
20
2000
10
1000
500
400
300
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
40
0,4
10
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
4000
40
3000
30
CALEFFI
2000 1800
16
18
14
12
1600
1400
1200
1000
900
800
700
9
8
7
600
400
300
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
60
0,6
500
10
Kv (m3/h) = 1,8
1800
0,5
2000
1600
1400
1200
1000
900
800
700
600
450
500
400
350
300
250
200
180
160
140
120
90
100
50
60
50
0,7
80
100
20
70
200
G (l/h)
9000
10000
8000
7000
6000
4500
4000
5000
3500
3000
2500
1800
2000
1600
1400
1200
900
1000
800
700
300
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
60
0,6
20
10
0,5
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
900
800
700
600
50
0,7
Kv (m3/h) = 1,2
G (l/h)
Three-way zone valve with by-pass code 6443.. 3BY

on by-pass operation, sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1
400
50
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
900
1000
800
700
600
500
40
45
350
300
Kv (m3/h) = 10,3
450
100
0,2
0,1
600
500
0,4
0,3
9
8
7
400
200
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
700
500
18
16
14
12
900
800
350
30
10
600
1200
1000
0,5
40
16
18
14
12
1600
1400
300
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
30
250
90
80
70
60
3000
2000 1800
180
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
40
200
180
160
140
120
50
4000
160
300
p (kPa)
5000
140
p (mm w.g.)
20
5
400
0,1
Three-way zone valve 6444 series on by-pass operation

equipped with nozzle U6, sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1
90
9
8
7
6
0,2
G (l/h)
120
900
800
700
600
40
45
10
0,3
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
500
0,1
30
18
16
14
12
100
18
16
14
12
1
0,5
300
9000
1800
1600
1400
1200
CALEFFI
30
CALEFFI
3000
50
20
20
40
10
50
0,2
p (kPa)
500
100
100
Kv (m3/h) = 10,3
4000
200
20
80
p (mm w.g.)
1000
200
G (l/h)
Three-way zone valve with by-pass code 6443.. 3BY

on open operation, sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1
2000
10000
8000
7000
6000
4500
5000
4000
3500
3000
2500
1800
2000
1600
1400
1200
900
800
1000
700
600
500
300
40
45
0,3
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
350
30
18
16
14
12
Kv (m3/h) = 11,1
18
16
14
12
0,5
10
1800
1600
1400
1200
9
8
7
6
50
20
30
350
100
40
3000
900
800
700
600
500
200
p (kPa)
4000
CALEFFI
1000
3000
p (mm w.g.)
70
2000
40
60
p (mm w.g.)
Three-way zone valve with by-pass tee 6444 series

on open operation, sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1
G (l/h)
Installation
USER
1. The two-way valve can be

installed either on the flow
pipe or on the return pipe.
1. Connection diagram for room thermostat (RT) and electric

supply.
The illustrated connection permits opening and closing the valve
according to the ambient thermostat signal.
ACTUATOR
OPEN
CLOSE
USER
2. The three-way valves with

by-pass and with by-pass
tee must be installed on
the flow pipe.
3. The valve must be

installed with the control
stem in the horizontal or
vertical position, never
overturned.
RT
Horizontal stem
Vertical stem
2. Pump disconnection diagram when no zone is in operation.

This diagram, using the auxiliary microswitch, permits turning off
the pump when the zone valve is closed.
If the pump has an input current greater than 0,8 A (170 VA) it is
necessary to use an intermediate contactor.
3b. In installations with chilled water, with the risk of

condensation, the actuator must be installed with
the control stem vertical.
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
356
C A L E F F I
356
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
4. The actuator can be

fitted on the valve body
in the two positions
shown. Fastening is with
a stainless steel clip.
Max
0,8 A
ACTUATOR
Max
0,8 A
5. In the box installation leave a gap

of at least 30 mm between the
actuator and frame for replacement,
if necessary, or maintenance.
OPEN
CLOSE
min. 30 mm
N
RT
CALEFFI
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
C A L E F F I
356
C A L E F F I
min. 30 mm
C A L E F F I
CALEFFI
Microswitches
The motor is equipped with limit microswitches that cut off the
electricity supply on reaching the valve open/closed positions.
The auxiliary microswitch turns on for an average valve opening
value of 80%.
6. To prevent reaching high temperatures, where

the zone valve is installed there should be
constant ventilation.
I
C
A
L E F F
I
C
A
L E F F
I
C
A
L E F F
I
C
A
L E F F
L
Max
0,8 A
OPEN
N
CLOSE
Wiring diagrams
In systems with zone control, action is taken to automatically cut off the circuits serving the heat exchanger terminal emitters, according to the
temperature reached in the room. This circuit closing can however cause changes in pressure and flow rate throughout the system so it is
essential to make sure these changes are kept under control within acceptable limits.
System with 6442 series two-way zone valves, differential by-pass valve and Autoflow
The system works with variable flow rate and it is necessary to keep the pressure differential generated by the zone valves closing under
control. This increase, which can reach unacceptable limits for the system to work properly, translates into an increase in the flow rate to the
circuits still open, with problems for the pumps and the boiler. It is therefore necessary to keep the pressure differentials under control by means
of differential by-pass valves or variable speed pumps. Installing the Autoflow however always limits the flow rate to the open circuits to the
nominal value.
Shut-off valve
RT
Thermostatic valve
Manual valve
Electric pump
Autoflow
RT
Room thermostat
Air vent valve
valve
System with code 6443.. 3BY three-way zone valve with by-pass
RT
CALEFFI
RT
CALEFFI
System with 6444 series three-way zone valves with by-pass tee and Autoflow
RT
CALEFFI
Autonomous system with 6444 series three-way zone valves with by-pass tee and Autoflow
RT
CALEFFI
RT
CALEFFI
6442 series
Motorised two-way ball zone valve with three-contact control. 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 1) connections with union. Brass body.
Chrome plated brass ball. Ball seal made of PTFE with O-Ring in EPDM. Control stem seal with double O-Ring in EPDM.
Union seals with O-Ring in EPDM. Medium water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum
working pressure 10 bar. Temperature range -5110 C. Maximum working differential pressure 10 bar.
Self-extinguishing polycarbonate actuator; grey RAL 9002; synchronous three-contact motor with auxiliary microswitch;
electric supply 230 V (or 24 V); power consumption 4 VA; dynamic starting torque 8 Nm. Auxiliary microswitch contacts
rating 0,8 A. Protection class IP 44 with control stem in vertical position, IP 40 with control stem in horizontal position.
Operating time (angle of rotation 90C) 40 s; ambient temperature range 055C.
Code 6443.. 3BY

Motorised three-way ball zone valve, by-pass version, with three-contact control. 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 1) connections with
union. Brass body. Chrome plated brass ball. Ball seal made of PTFE with O-Ring in EPDM. Control stem seal with double
O-Ring in EPDM. Union seals with O-Ring in EPDM. Medium water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol
50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Temperature range -5110 C. Maximum working differential pressure 10 bar.
electric supply 230 V (or 24 V); power consumption 4 VA; dynamic starting torque 8 Nm. Auxiliary microswitch contacts
rating 0,8 A. Protection class IP 44 with control stem in vertical position, IP 40 with control stem in horizontal position.
6444 series
Motorised three-way ball zone valve with telescopic by-pass tee with three-contact control. 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 1)
connections with union. Brass body. Chrome plated brass ball. Ball seal made of PTFE with O-Ring in EPDM. Control stem
seal with double O-Ring in EPDM. Union seals with O-Ring in EPDM. Medium water and glycol solutions. Maximum
percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Equipped with a calibrated nozzle (U6) on the third way,
to balance the system. Temperature range -5110 C. Maximum working differential pressure 10 bar. Centre distance
between the connections adjustable from 49 to 63 mm.
electric supply 230 V (or 24 V); power consumption 4 VA; dynamic take-off torque 8 Nm. Auxiliary microswitch contacts
capacity 0,8 A. Protection class IP 44 with control stem in vertical position, IP 40 with control stem in horizontal position.
CALEFFI
Motorised ball diverter valve

with 3-contact control
CALEFFI
6443 series
01132/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
The motorised diverter valves can be used to automatically divert
the medium in air-conditioning and hydraulic/domestic water
systems.
The exceptional hydraulic performance level of this particular
series of valves combined with reduced dimensions and practical
installation make the products especially suited to heating systems
and domestic hot water production systems.
The motorised ball valves are used in the above-mentioned
systems predominantly thanks to the following features:
- no seepage
- short operating times (valve opening - closing); available in
versions with operating times of 10 seconds and 40 seconds
- operation at high differential pressures
- low head losses
- compatibility with any type of 3-contact control for complete
control during the opening and closing phases, thanks to the
electrical construction features.
CE mark directives 89/336 EC and 73/23 EC.
Product range
6443 series Motorised three-way ball diverter valve with 3-contact control
Dimensions

PTFE with EPDM O-ring
two EPDM O-rings
EPDM O-ring
grey RAL 9002
Actuator
Protective shell:
Colour:
Materials
Valve body
Body:
Ball:
Ball seal:
Control stem seal:
Union seal:
sizes 1/2, 3/4 and 1
AB
Performance
Valve body
Medium:
Maximum differential pressure:
Connections:
Actuator
Synchronous motor
Electric supply:

50%
10 bar
-5110C
10 bar
1/21 M with union
230 V (10%) - 5060 Hz

24 V (10%) - 5060 Hz
Power consumption:
4 VA
(644346, 644356, 644357, 644366) 8 VA
0,8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
IP 44 (vertical control stem)
IP 40 (horizontal control stem)
Operating time (angle of rotation 90):
40 s
(644346, 644356, 644357, 644366) 10 s
055C
Dynamic torque:
8 Nm
100 cm
A
B
C
Code
644342
644344
644346
644352
644354
644356
644353
644355
644357
644362
644364
644366
A
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
1"
1"
1"
B
60
60
60
60
60
60
78
78
78
78
78
78
C
117
117
117
117
117
117
149
149
149
159
159
159
D
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
E
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
F
88
88
88
88
88
88
91
91
91
91
91
91
G
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
H
Ex.37
Ex.37
Ex.37
Ex.37
Ex.37
Ex.37
Ex.37
Ex.37
Ex.37
Ex.47
Ex.47
Ex.47
I El. Supply Op. Time (s)

58,5 230 V
40
58,5 24 V
40
58,5 230 V
10
58,5 230 V
40
58,5 24 V
40
58,5 230 V
10
73 230 V
40
73 24 V
40
73 230 V
10
78 230 V
40
78 24 V
40
78 230 V
10
Mass (kg)
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
1,4
1,4
1,4
1,7
1,7
1,7
6443 series, 3-way diverter version
Cam and limit microswitches

The cam (4) that controls the
limit microswitches (5) can
move vertically and is
supported by a tapered
spring (6). In this way, the
contact
with
the
microswitches
is
kept
constant, compensating for
wear of the parts over time.
The actuator is equipped with an auxiliary microswitch to be used,
for instance, to stop the pump on closing the valve and vice versa.
It shuts off for an average valve opening value of 80%.
Operating times
The actuator is available in two versions, with an operating time of
10 seconds or 40 seconds (with angle of rotation 90).

Removing the actuator reveals a slot in the top of the control stem on
which the actuator pin acts:
- this slot allows the valve to be opened and closed manually with a
screwdriver;
- its position indicates the position of the ball and therefore the
direction of flow. This is extremely useful in system testing and
checking procedures.
AB
Seals
The
valves
are
equipped with unions
which have a flat seat
with an O-Ring seal
made of EPDM.
The following diagram illustrates the direction of flow, in

accordance with the position of the slot.
6443 series three-way diverter valve
Flow diversion can be choked thanks to the electrical features of
the three-contact actuator.
Actuator
ON/OFF mode
The valves may be used in ON/OFF mode, with a single electrical
enabling signal for opening or closing provided by the
three-contact thermostat/timer-thermostat or an ordinary switch.
T DRILLING
ON/OFF operation via three-wire or modulating thermostat
controlled by a three-point controller
Rotation of 90
Modulating mode
The electrical construction features of the actuator allow it to be
combined with any type of three-point temperature controller.
Drive transmission
The taper coupling between the
valve control stem (1) and the
gearmotor shaft (2) allows
constant connection between the
two components. This provides
automatic compensation for
mechanical slack via the thrust
(S) exerted on the control stem by
the pressure of the medium.
Valve actuator coupling

By means of a steel clip (3), the
valve
and
actuator
are
connected quickly and easily,
simply by pushing the two parts
together until they click into place.
2
1
AB
AB
AB
AB
All the valves are supplied with the slot/indicator in the horizontal position.
Wiring diagrams
1/2 - 3/4
p (mm w.g.)
3/4
p (kPa)
5000
1800
1600
1400
1200
AB
18
16
14
12
B
AB
900
800
700
600
9
8
7
6
400
20
500
100
5
300
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
40
0,4
50
2
1
0,5
4500
0,2
RT
L
0,1
5000
4000
3500
3000
2500
1800
1600
2000
1400
900
1200
1000
800
700
600
450
400
500
350
300
250
180
200
100
10
160
0,3
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
140
30
18
16
14
12
120
20
Max
0,8 A
G (l/h)
2. Connection diagram - with on-off switch device

The illustrated connection makes it possible to open and close
the valve when the switch allows, using an intermediate relay
device.
Connection Kv (m3/h)
1/2
3,9
3/4
3,9
3/4
8,6
1
9,0
ACTUATOR
Max
0,8 A
M
CLOSE
Code
644342/44/46
644352/54/56
644353/55/57
644362/64/66
OPEN
200
ACTUATOR
10
OPEN
1000
40
30
CLOSE
2000
50
4000
3000
1. Connection diagram for room thermostat (RT) and electric

supply.
The illustrated connection makes it possible to open and close
the valve according to the signal provided by the 3-contact room
thermostat.
1. The three-way diverter valves may be used as zone valves as

indicated:
N.C. relay
230 V
b. on the return in the mixing

valve position (i.e. inlets A
and B and common outlet
AB) and ON/OFF mode
a. on the flow in the diverter

position (common inlet AB
and outlets A or B) and
ON/OFF mode
B
A
ACTUATOR
AB
Max.
0,8 A
AB
B
A
AB
Vertical stem
CLOSE
Horizontal stem
2b. In installations with chilled water, at risk of

condensation, the actuator must be installed with
the control stem in a vertical position.
3. The actuator can be fitted

onto the valve body in the
two positions indicated.
It is secured using a
flexible stainless steel clip.
2. The valve must be

installed with the control
stem in a horizontal or
vertical position, never
turned upside down.
3. Pump disconnection diagram when no zone is in operation.

This diagram, using the auxiliary microswitch, allows the pump to
be deactivated when the diverter valve used as a zone valve is
closed.
If the pump has a power consumption level over 0,8 A (170 VA),
an intermediate contactor must be used.
OPEN
USER
B
USER
ON-OFF SWITCH DEVICE
B
AB
RT
L
A
B
AB
B
AB
Microswitches
The motor is equipped with limit microswitches that cut off the
electricity supply on reaching the valve open/closed positions.
The auxiliary microswitch shuts off at an average valve opening
value of 80%.
Solar thermal system with three-way diverter valve (10 s)
If the water from the storage tank is at a lower temperature than required (and set on the thermostat) the
diverter valve sends the water to the boiler. Otherwise, the valve sends the water directly to the mixing valve.
Shut-off valve
Pump
Mixing valve
Temperature safety valve

Safety valve
Expansion vessel
Deaerator
Dirt separator
T
Manual valve
Diverter on the secondary
circuit for domestic hot water
Temperature gauge
B
BA
BALLSTOP
Temperature/Pressure
safety relief valve
T
Normally
closed valve
Thermostat
Heating/domestic hot water system with diverter valve (10 s)
Check valve
Y-filter
A
AB
B
Integrated system of solid-liquid/gas heat generators

When the solid fuel generator energy supply is not sufficient to keep the temperature of the medium at the desired value, the diverter valve
steps in to send the water into the circuit of the fluid/gas-fuelled boiler.
BA
Diverter on the
heating circuit
6443 series
Motorised three-way ball diverter valve with three-contact control. 1/2 M (from 1/2 to 1) connections with union. Brass body. Chrome
plated brass ball. PTFE ball seal with EPDM O-Ring. Control stem seal with double EPDM O-Ring. Union seals with EPDM O-Ring.
Medium water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Temperature range
-5110C. Maximum working differential pressure 10 bar.
Self-extinguishing polycarbonate actuator. Grey RAL 9002. Three-contact synchronous motor with auxiliary microswitch. Electric supply
230 V (or 24 V 10%) 5060 Hz. Power consumption 4 VA (8 VA for 10 s version). Dynamic torque 8 Nm. Auxiliary microswitch contact
rating 0,8 A. Protection class IP 44 with control stem vertical, IP 40 with control stem horizontal. Operating time (angle of rotation 90)
40 s (10 s). Ambient temperature range 055C.
CALEFFI
Automatic air vent and shut-off valve

for solar heating systems
250 series
CALEFFI
cert. n 0003
01133/07 GB
ISO 9001
Function
Automatic air vents are used in the closed circuits of solar heating systems to allow air contained in
the fluid to be released automatically by means of a valve operated by a float in contact with fluid in
the system.
The shut-off valves are on the contrary typically used in combination with the automatic air vent
valves to be able to cut them off after filling the circuit of solar heating systems.
These particular series of products have been specially made to work at high
temperature with a glycol medium.
Product range
Code 250031 Automatic air vent for solar systems
Code R29284 Shut-off valve for automatic air vent
size 3/8 M
sizes 3/8 M x 3/8 F
Technical specifications of 250 series valve
Technical specifications of valve code R29284
Materials: -
Materials: - body:
- ball:
- seals:
body:
cover:
control spindle:
alloy
UNI EN 12164 CW602N
float and conveyor:
seals:
Medium:

50%

-30180C
10 bar
5 bar
Connections:

Medium:

50%

-30200C
10 bar
Connections:
3/8 F x 3/8 M
3/8 M
Dimensions
Dimensions
Tmax = 180C / 360F

Pmax = 10 bar / 150 psi
Code
250031
A
3/8
B
97
C
55
D
11
Weight (kg)
0,32
Code
R29284
A
3/8
B
46
C
8,5
D
35
Weight (kg)
0,90
Operating principe
Maintenance
The accumulation of air bubbles in

the valve body causes the float to
drop so that the air vent valve
opens.
This phenomenon occurs, and
consequently the valve functions
correctly, as long as the water
pressure remains below the
maximum discharge pressure.
250 series automatic air vent is made to allow

checking of the internal mechanism.
Access to the moving parts that govern the air
vent is attained by simply taking off the top
cover.
A shut-off valve must be installed before the
250 series device in order to simplify any
maintenance work and for shutting off after the
phase of filling.
Tmax = 180C / 360F

Application diagram
Resistance to temperature
The high performance level of this series of automatic air vent
valves, required moreover in solar heating systems, is ensured by
using materials that are highly resistant to temperature. They allow
maintaining the functional features of the valve with glycol water
temperatures up to 180C.
Tmax = 180C / 360F

Tmax = 180C / 360F

Nl/s
Discharge capacity when the system is being filled

1,2
1,1
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
3,5
4,5
5,5
6,5
7 bar
(air)
Installation
Tmax = 180C / 360F
Tmax = 180C / 360F

Tmax = 180C / 360F

Tmax = 180C / 360F

250 series automatic air

vents must be installed in
vertical position, typically
on the top of the solar
heating system panels and at points in the circuit where air bubbles
gather that need to be discharged.
They must always be installed in combination with a shut-off valve.
This is necessary since the vent valves must be shut off after use to
remove the air in the phase of filling and starting up the system.
250 series
Automatic air vent for solar heating systems. 3/8 M threaded connections. Brass body and cover. Chrome plated. Float
in high resistance polymer. Seals in high resistance elastomer. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage
of glycol: 50%. Working temperature range: -30180C. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Maximum discharge
pressure: 5 bar.
Code R29284
Shut-off valve for automatic air vent for solar heating systems. 3/8 F x 3/8 M threaded connections. Chrome plated brass
body and ball. Seals in high resistance elastomer. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol:
50%. Working temperature range: -30200C. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar.
CALEFFI
Deaerators for solar thermal systems

DISCAL
CALEFFI
251 series
01134/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
ISO 9001 No. 0003
FM 21654
Function
Deaerators are used to discharge continuously air from the
hydraulic circuits of air-conditioning or solar thermal systems. The
air vent capacity of these devices is extremely high. They are able
to automatically remove all the air from the circuits, down to
micro-bubble level. The circulation of fully deaerated water allows
the systems to work under optimal conditions without any trouble of
noise, corrosion, local overheating and mechanical damage.
They are available in versions for installation to horizontal or vertical
pipes.
This particular series of deaerators has been specifically designed
to work at high temperature with glycol solutions, typical condition
of solar thermal systems.
Product range
251 series DISCAL Deaerator for horizontal pipes, for solar thermal systems. With drain
251 series DISCAL Deaerator for horizontal pipes, for solar thermal systems. Compact version
251 series DISCAL Deaerator for vertical pipes, for solar thermal systems. Compact version
sizes 1 and 1 1/4

size 3/4
sizes 3/4 and 1
Materials
Body:
Cover:
Float:
Internal element:
Float guide:
Obturator stem:
Performance
Medium:

stainless steel
EN 12164 CW602N
stainless steel
stainless steel
high-resistance elastomer
Float lever:
Spring:
Hydraulic seals:

50%
-30160C
10 bar
10 bar
Connections: - main
for horizontal pipes 3/4, 1 and 1 1/4 F

for vertical pipes 3/4 and 1 F
- drain
(version 1 and 1 1/4) 1/2 F (with plug)
Dimensions
C
Tmax = 160C / 320F

F
B
Code
251006
251007
A
B
Mass (kg)
1,80
2,36
Code
A
B C D
E
Mass (kg)
251003 3/4" 78 55 143 162
0,91
E
Code
251905
251906
Mass (kg)
2,05
2,05
System operation
The quantity of air that can remain dissolved in solution in the water
depends on the pressure and temperature.
This relationship is known as Henrys law, whose graph below
permits quantifying the physical phenomenon of releasing the air
contained in the medium.
In solar panel thermal systems with forced circulation it is

necessary to expel all the air in the medium during the phases of
starting up and operating the system.
The deaerator permits separating and expelling this air from the
medium continuously and safely.
This means that the circuit stays completely deaerated
automatically; any decrease in pressure due to the release of air is
compensated by a suitable filling unit.
By way of example: at the constant absolute pressure of 2 bar,

heating the water from 20C to 80C, the quantity of air released by
the solution is equal to 18 l per m3 of water.
In accordance with this law it may be noted how there is a greater
release of air from the solution as the temperature increases and
the pressure decreases. This air is in the form of micro-bubbles with
diameters in the order of tenths of a millimetre.
The micro-bubbles form continuously in the water of the solar
thermal systems on the top of the panels, that is at the points in the
circuit where the highest temperatures are reached.
This air is partly reabsorbed as the medium reaches the parts of the
circuit at a lower temperature, partly remaining in the medium and
therefore must be extracted.
Graph of solubility of air in water
Absolute pressure
55
3 bar
4 bar
5 bar
6 bar
7 bar 8 bar
50
45
40
2 bar
35
30
25
1 bar
20
automatic
filling
15
10
5
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
Water temperature C
Operating principle
The deaerator utilises the combined action of several physical
principles. The active part is composed of a set of metal screen
surfaces arranged like spokes (1). These elements create such
swirling motion as to facilitate the release of micro-bubbles and
their adhesion to the surfaces.
The bubbles, joining together, increase in volume until the
hydrostatic thrust is such as to overcome the force of adhesion to
the structure. They then rise towards
the top of the device from where they
are released by a float-operated
automatic air vent valve (2).
Air separation efficiency
Resistance to heat and high discharge pressure

The high performance of this series of deaerators, moreover
required in solar thermal systems, is guaranteed by the use of
particularly heat resistant materials.
They allow maintaining the functional features of the deaerator with
glycol water temperatures up to 160C. The internal geometry of
the deaerator has been designed to be able to discharge the air up
to a pressure of 10 bar.
DISCAL devices are capable of continuously removing the air

contained within a hydraulic circuit, with a high degree of separation
efficiency.
The amount of air which may be removed from a circuit depends on
various parameters: it increases as the circulation speed and
pressure values fall.
As illustrated on the graph below, after just 25 recirculations at the
maximum recommended speed, almost all the air artificially
introduced into the circuit is eliminated by the deaerator, with variable
percentages according to the pressure within the circuit.
The small amount which remains is then gradually eliminated during
normal system operation. In conditions where the speed is slower or
the temperature of the medium is higher, the amount of air separated
is even greater.
Facilitated maintenance operations

DISCAL devices are built so that maintenance and cleaning
procedures can be performed without having to remove the valve
body from the pipe.
Access to the moving parts controlling the air vent is attained
simply by removing the top cover.
Air introduced - Air removed - (%)

100
90
1 bar
2 bar
3 bar
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Tmax = 160C / 320F
Tmax = 160C - 320F

Pmax = 10 bar - 150 psi
1 1/4"
1"
3/4" - 1"
Vertical version
3/4"
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
4
350
3,5
300
250
2,5
200
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
100
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
50
0,5
45
40
0,45
0,4
35
0,35
30
0,3
25
0,25
20
Tmax = 160C / 320F

0,2
0,1
10
4,5
3,5
2,5
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
0,9
0,5
0,12
0,8
12
0,7
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,6
18
16
14
(m3/h)
Tmax = 160C / 320F
Size
3/4
3/4 - 1
1 1/4
28,1
48,8
Tmax = 160C / 320F

Vertical version
Kv (m3/h)
10
17
3/4
3/4 - 1
1 1/4
35,18
2,11
57,85
3,47
Tmax = 160C / 320F

The maximum recommended speed of the medium inside the pipe

is 1,2 m/s. The following table shows the maximum flow rates in
order to meet this requirement.
Size
Vertical version
22,7
1,36
22,7
1,36
Tmax = 160C / 320F

l/min
Kv (m3/h)
1200
Tme
(s)
25
No.
of
recirc.
1100
The deaerator must always be installed vertically and preferably:

- upstream of the pump where, due to the high speed of the medium
and the ensuing drop in pressure, the air micro-bubbles develop
more easily;
- on the return and in the bottom part of the solar thermal circuit, with
no formation of steam.
The flow direction of the medium is not important in DISCAL devices.
90
80
70
10
1000
20
900
800
700
600
Installation
400
15
V = 1 m/s - T = constant
10
500
400
300
200
100
Application diagram
Solar thermal system with thermal integration, with boiler and hot water storage
Shut-off valve
Cold water - Water mains

Hot tap water
Mixed tap water
Solar thermal circuit
Pump
Thermostatic mixing
valve
Air vent
T
Thermostat
Expansion vessel
Temperature gauge
BALLSTOP
Regulator
Safety valve
automatic
filling
Normally closed valve
DISCAL 251 series
Deaerator for solar thermal systems. Connections 1 (and 1 1/4) F for horizontal pipes, version with drain; 3/4 F, compact version.
Brass body, chrome plated. High-resistance polymer float. Stainless steel internal element, float lever and spring. Brass float guide.
Dezincification resistant alloy obturator stem. High-resistance elastomer hydraulic seals. Medium water and glycol solutions;
maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Working temperature range -30160C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum
discharge pressure 10 bar.
DISCAL 251 series
Deaerator for solar thermal systems. Connections 3/4 (and 1) F for vertical pipes, compact version. Brass body, chrome plated.
High-resistance polymer float. Stainless steel internal element, float lever and spring. Brass float guide. Dezincification resistant alloy
obturator stem. High-resistance elastomer hydraulic seals. Medium water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 50%.
Working temperature range -30160C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum discharge pressure 10 bar.
CALEFFI
High-performance automatic air vent

valves for solar heating systems
DISCALAIR SOLAR
CALEFFI
cert. n 0003
251 series
ISO 9001
01135/07 GB
Function
DISCALAIR devices are used in air-conditioning systems or in the phase of filling
and starting solar heating systems to discharge even large quantities of air that has
formed in the circuits. This function is performed even when there is considerable
pressure thanks to the special geometry of the discharge mechanism, which is
identical to the one on DISCAL 551 series deaerators.
This particular series of automatic air vent valves has been specifically designed to
work at high temperature with a glycol medium, which is typical of solar heating
systems.
Product range
Code 251004 High-performance automatic air vent valve for solar heating systems
size 1/2 F
Dimensions
- Materials: -
body
cover:
float:
float guide:
obturator stem:
EN 12164 CW602N
- float lever:
stainless steel
- spring:
stainless steel
- hydraulic seals:
Connections:
Tmax = 160C / 320F


50%
-30160C
10 bar
10 bar
Medium:
Temperature range:
Max discharge pressure:
1/2 F
Code
251004
A
1/2"
B
114,5
C
35
D
55
Weight (kg)
0,62
Operating principle
Maintenance
The accumulation of air bubbles in

the valve body causes the float to
drop so that the obturator opens.
This action, and therefore correct
valve operation, is ensured as
long as the water pressure
remains under the maximum
discharge pressure.
The DISCALAIR automatic air vent valve is

built to permit inspecting the internal
mechanism.
Access to the moving parts that govern the air
vent is attained by simply taking off the top
cover. The body moreover can be separated
from the bottom portion connected to the pipe.
A shut-off valve must be installed before the
DISCALAIR device in order to simplify any
maintenance work and for shutting off after the
phase of filling.
Tmax = 160C / 320F

Application diagram
Resistance to heat and high discharge pressure
The high performance of this series of automatic air vent valves,
moreover required in solar heating systems, is ensured by the use
of particularly heat resistant materials.
They allow maintaining the functional features of the valve with
glycol water temperatures up to 160C. The internal geometry of
the valve has been designed to be able to discharge the air up to
a pressure of 10 bar.
Tmax = 160C / 320F

Nl/s
Discharge capacity in the phase of filling the system

1,5
1,4
1,3
1,2
1,1
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
3,5
4,5
5,5
6,5
7,5
8,5
9,5
10
bar (air)
Installation
DISCALAIR series 251
automatic air vent valves
must
be
installed
vertically, typically on the
top of solar heating system panels and at points in the circuit where
bubbles of air that must be discharged gather.
They must always be installed in combination with a shut-off valve.
This is necessary since the vent valves must be shut off after use, to
remove the air in the phase of filling and starting up the system.
Tmax = 160C / 320F
Tmax = 160C / 320F

Tmax = 160C / 320F

Tmax = 160C / 320F

DISCALAIR SOLAR 251 series
High-performance automatic air vent valve for solar heating systems. Connections 1/2 F. Brass body, chrome plated. High
resistance polymer float. Stainless steel float lever and spring. Brass float guide. Dezincification resistant alloy obturator stem. High
resistance elastomer hydraulic seals. Medium water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Temperature range
-30160C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Maximum discharge pressure 10 bar.
CALEFFI
Circulation units
for solar heating systems
CALEFFI
cert. n 0003
255 - 256 series
ISO 9001
01136/07 GB
Function
Circulation units are used on the primary circuit of solar heating
systems to control the temperature of the hot water storage. The
pump inside the units is activated by the signal from the differential
temperature regulator. The units contain the functional and safety
devices for an optimal circuit control. Available with flow and return
connection and with return connection only.
Product range
Code 255056
Code 255156
Code 255166
Code 256056
Circulation unit for solar heating systems, flow and return connection, flow meter scale: 113 l/min
with Grundfos Solar 25-120 pump
Circulation unit for solar heating systems, return connection, flow meter scale: 113 l/min
Materials:
Body:
Temperature gauge:
Seals:
O-Rings:
Gaskets:
Insulating shell:

steel / aluminium
PTFE / EPDM
EPDM / Viton
AFM 34, asbestos free
EPP, thermal conductivity = 0,041 W/(mK)
Performance:
Medium:

50%

180C
10 bar
Safety relief valve temperature range:
-30160C
Safety relief valve factory setting:
6 bar
(for other factory settings, see 253 series)
Min. opening pressure for shut-off and check valve:
p: 2 kPa
(200 mm w.g.)
Adjustment range of flow meter: 113 l/min (code 255056 - 256056)
830 l/min (code 255156)
540 l/min (code 256166)
Max flow meter temperature:
120C
06 bar
0160C
Connections:
Hose connection:
Filling/drain connections:
size 3/4
size 3/4
size 1
size 3/4
Grundfos pump
Code 255056, 255156 and 256056
Code 255166
Body:
Power supply:
Max. pressure:
Max. temperature:
Protection class:
solar model 15-60

solar model 25-120
cast iron GG 15/20
230 V - 50 Hz
10 bar
110C
IP 42
Grundfos pump Solar 15-60 and Solar 25-120 hydraulic

characteristics
H (m w.g.)
(kPa)
12
120
11
10
100
UPS SOLAR 25-120
9
8
80
7
60
6
5
4
UPS SOLAR 15-60
3/4 F
3/4 M
with 13 mm hose connection
40
20
0
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
0
3,5
Q (m3/h)
Dimensions
B
A
2
8
8
2
4
5
1
0
12
10
80
60
120
140
160
10
80
20
60
120
40
140
20
100
120
140
60
120
40
140
20
160
9
1
100
120
140
160
160
11
5
F
160
80
100
40
1
60
20
5
0
80
100
40
7
100
20
4
5
80
60
40
3
5
4
3
2
1
0
3
5
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
A
E
F
E
D
C
Code
A
B
255056 3/4 90 130 405 245 520
255156 3/4 90 130 405 245 520
255166 1 90 130 405 245 520
Weight (kg)
7,00
7,25
9,50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Grundfos-Solar circulation pump

Safety relief valve for solar heating systems, 253 series
Filling/drain cock
Fitting connector with pressure gauge
Flow meter
Air vent
Pre formed insulation shell
Shut-off and check valve (on the back side of the temperature gauge)
Connection kit for expansion vessel (optional)
3/4 plug (to be used if no expansion vessel is installed)
B
A
Shut-off and check valve
2
The shut-off and check valves are built into the ball cocks of the temperature gauge
connectors.
4
5
1
0
To allow the medium to flow in both directions it is necessary to open the respective
ball cocks (B) to 45 with a 14 mm fixed spanner. The check valve is opened by the
ball, see figure (A). In normal system operation the ball cocks must be fully open.
80
60
100
40
120
20
140
160
5
4
3
2
1
0
A
A
14
B
Code
A
B
256056 3/4 130
C
405
D
555
E
200
Weight (kg)
5,00
Flow meter
Air separator
The flow meter has a built-in adjustable flow limiter.

The meter is available with three different ranges of 113 l/min,
830 l/min and 540 l/min depending on the version.
The flow meter must be fitted in a vertical position only.
The solar circulation unit, version with flow and return connection,
is equipped with an air vent separator on the flow line. The gases,
separated from the thermal carrier medium, are collected at the top
of the deaerator.
The collected gases must be evacuated from time to time (every
day after putting into operation and afterwards, depending on the
quantity of air, once a week or once a month) using the manual air
vent with a suitably sized screwdriver. To maintain optimal
efficiency of the solar heating system, afterwards, it is necessary to
vent the system every six months by using the deaerator.
Adjustable nut
Flow rate adjustment

Fitting 1/2 F
Graduation
Fitting 3/4 F
Accessories
Code
259012
259018
259025
259035
259050
259
257
Welded expansion vessel for solar heating

systems.
Diaphragm certified DIN 4807-3 standard.
Compatible with glycol solutions.
Max. diaphragm temperature: 100C.
System temperature range: -10120C.
Differential temperature regulator for solar

heating systems, with relay output.
Complete with box, contact probe and
immersion probe with pocket.
Box protection class: IP 65.
Electric supply: 230 V 6% - 50 Hz.
Power consumption: 1,45 VA.
Contacts rating on switch-over: 6 A (230 V).
T adjustment range: 220 K.
Hysteresis: 2 K ( 1 K).
Litres
12
18
25
35
50
Connections
Precharge (bar)
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
2,5
2,5
2,5
2,5
2,5
broch. 01143
Code
257020
257
broch. 01143
Thermostat for solar heating systems,

with relay output.
For thermal integration control
and diverter valves.
Complete with box, contact probe.
Electric supply: 230 V 6% - 50 Hz.
Adjustment temperature range: 2090C.
Hysteresis: 1 K.
255
Expansion vessel connection kit.
Consisting of: stainless steel hose,
automatic shut-off cock, wall bracket.
Max. cock working temperature: 110C.
Hose length: 500 mm.
Used on a bracket for expansion vessels
with a maximum capacity of 24 l.
Code
257030
Code
255001
Connections
3/4
257
255
System filling pump for
circulation units 255 and
256 series.
Code
255010
Connections
3/4
broch. 01143
Regulator and thermostat for solar heating

systems, with relay output.
Complete with box, 1 contact probe and 2
immersion probes with pocket.
Characteristics as codes 257020 and
257030.
Code
257040
2544
255-256
Male fitting, mechanical o-ring seal

for solar heating systems.
For soft (annealed) copper an hard
copper, brass, mild and stainless
steel pipes.
Black nickel plated nut.
Fastening bracket supporting boxes containing regulator and

thermostat, 257 series
Code
Connections
254458
254452
3/4 M x 18 mm
3/4 M x 22 mm
Code
255002
256002
for circulation unit 255 series

for circulation unit 256 series
Shut-off valve
Pump
Circulation unit with

differential temperature
regulator
Air vent valve

Expansion vessel
Temperature gauge
Safety relief valve
4
5
1
0
80
60
80
100
60
100
40
120
40
120
20
140
20
140
160
160
5
4
3
2
1
0
Circulation unit with differential temperature

regulator and thermostat
4
5
1
0
80
80
60
100
60
100
40
120
40
120
20
140
20
140
160
160
5
4
3
2
1
0
Double circulation unit with double differential

temperature regulator and solar panels with
different orientation
4
5
1
0
100
40
120
140
20
140
5
4
3
2
1
0
60
120
160
4
5
80
100
20
0
80
60
40
160
5
4
3
2
1
0
Code 255056
Circulation unit for solar heating systems. Connections 3/4 F. Flow and return connection. Brass body. Steel and
aluminium temperature gauge. PTFE and EPDM seals. EPDM and Viton O-Rings. AFM 34 gaskets, asbestos free.
EPP insulating shell. Medium water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working
temperature 180C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Safety relief valve temperature range -30160C. Safety relief valve
factory set at 6 bar. p minimum opening shut-off and check valve 2 kPa. Flow meter scale 113 l/min. Maximum flow
meter temperature 120C. Pressure gauge scale 06 bar. Temperature gauge scale 0160C. Filling/drain connections
with 13 mm hose connection. Grundfos Solar 15-60 pump. Cast iron body GG 15/20. Electric supply 230 V 50 Hz.
Maximum pressure 10 bar. Maximum temperature 110C. Protection class IP 42.
Code 255156
Code 255166
Circulation unit for solar heating systems. Connections 1 F. Flow and return connection. Brass body. Steel and aluminium
temperature gauge. PTFE and EPDM seals. EPDM and Viton O-Rings. AFM 34 gaskets, asbestos free.
Code 256056
CALEFFI
Dirt separators DIRTCAL
CALEFFI
5462 - 5465 - 5469 series
01137/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
In heating and air conditioning systems, the circulation of water
containing impurities may result in rapid wear and damage of
components such as pumps and control valves. It also causes
blockages in heat exchangers, heating elements and pipes,
resulting in a lower thermal efficiency of the system.
The dirt separator separates off these impurities, which are mainly
made up of sand and rust particles. These are collected in a large
collection chamber that requires low frequency cleaning
procedures, from which they can be removed even while the
system is in operation.
This device is capable of efficiently removing even the smallest
particles, with extremely limited head loss.
The threaded connection product is available in versions for
installation on horizontal or vertical pipes.
Flanged DIRTCAL dirt separators are supplied complete with hot
pre-formed shell insulation to ensure perfect thermal insulation
when used with both hot and chilled water.
- Tech. Broch. 01054 Automatic air vent MINICAL-VALCAL
5020 - 5021 - 5022 series
- Tech. Broch. 01031 Automatic air vent MAXCAL for heating,
air-conditioning and cooling systems. 501 series
Product range
5462
5465
5469
5469
series
series
series
series
DIRTCAL
DIRTCAL
DIRTCAL
DIRTCAL
dirt
dirt
dirt
dirt
separator
separator
separator
separator
for
for
for
for
horizontal pipes with threaded connections

sizes 3/4-2
horizontal pipes with flanged connections and pre-formed insulation
sizes DN 50-DN 150
vertical pipes with olive connections
size 22 with nuts for copper pipe
vertical pipes with threaded connections
sizes 3/4, 1
series
Materials:
Body:
Dirt collection chamber:
Top plug:
Internal element:
Hydraulic seals:
Drain cock:
Performance:
Medium:
Particle separation rating:
Connections:
Main:
Top:
Drain:
5462 - 5469 threaded
5465 flanged

PA66G30 (stainless steel, 5469 series)
EPDM

stainless steel
non-asbestos fibre (top plug)

50%
10 bar
0110C
down to 5 m

50%
10 bar
0110C
down to 5 m
3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2, 2 F

22 mm with compression ends for copper pipe
1/2 F (with plug)
hose connection
DN 50 - 65 - 80 - 100 - 125 - 150 flanged PN 16

to be coupled with counterflange EN 1092-1
3/4 M (with plug)
1 F


DN 125 and DN 150
Internal part
Material:
Thickness:
60 mm
Density:
45 kg/m3
0,023 W/(mK)
0105C
Internal part
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:
External cover
Material:
Thickness:

60 mm
30 kg/m3
80 kg/m3
- at 0C:
0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C:
0,045 W/(mK)
> 1.300
0100C
class B2

0,7 mm
class 1
Head covers
External cover
Material:
Thickness:
PS

0,7 mm
class 1
Dimensions
B
G
BI-DIRECTIONAL
Tmax 105C
Pmax 10 bar
Tmax 110C
Pmax 10 bar
Mass (kg)
1,95
1,95
Code
546905
546906
C
F
Code
546902
Mass (kg)
1,95
Code
A
B
546205 3/4 110
546206 1 110
546207 1 1/4 124
546208 1 1/2 124
546209 2 127
C
56
56
56
56
56
D
131,5
131,5
151,5
151,5
145,5
E
49
49
49
49
55
Mass (kg)
F
236,5 1,87
236,5 1,87
256,5 2,22
256,5 2,22
256,5 2,36
A
Code
546550 DN 50
546560 DN 65
546580 DN 80
546510 DN 100
546512 DN 125
546515 DN 150
B
350
350
466
470
635
635
C
1
1
1
1
1
1
D
425
425
500
500
600
600
E
620
620
740
740
900
900
F
G Mass (kg)
169 3/4"
13
169 3/4"
15
219 3/4"
23
219 3/4"
25
324 3/4"
52
324 3/4"
54
Dimensions DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 125 DN 150

Volume (l)
18
18
52
52
Operating principle
The dirt separator operating principle is based on the combined
action of a number of physical phenomena.
The internal element (1) is composed of a set of radial reticular
surfaces. The impurities in the water, on striking these surfaces, get
separated, dropping into the bottom of the body (2) where they are
collected.
In addition, the large internal volume of DIRTCAL slows down the
flow speed of the medium thus helping, by gravity, to separate the
particles it contains.
The collected impurities are discharged, even with the system
running, by opening the drain cock (3); this procedure can even be
performed while the system is in operation.
The dirt separator is designed in such a way that the direction in
which the medium is flowing inside it makes no difference.
3
3
Low head losses and performance maintained over time
The separating action of the dirt separator is based on using the
internal element with reticular surfaces in place of the ordinary
strainer. The screen, by its nature, offers little resistance to the flow
of the medium while
ensuring separation.
This occurs due to the
particles colliding with the
reticular surfaces and then
settling, not by filtration, an
action by which the
strainer, over time, gets
instead
progressively
clogged by the sludge it
removes.
The internal shape of the
body was also designed
to
offer
minimum
resistance to the passage
of the medium. All this is to
the benefit of performance,
i.e. the high capacity to
separate impurities and
the low head losses that
remain unaltered over
time.
Geometric structure and large dirt collection chamber

The geometrical structure of DIRTCAL is such that, the flow speed
inside it is slowed down to help separate the particles of impurities.
The dirt collection chamber has the following features:
- It is located at the bottom
of the device, at such a
distance
from
the
connections
that
the
collected impurities are not
affected by the swirling of
the flow through the
screen.
- It is large enough to offer
an increased amount of
collected
dirt,
which
means emptying/ discharging procedures are
required less often (in
contrast to strainers, which
need to be cleaned
frequently).
- It is easy to inspect, by
unscrewing it from the
valve body for any servicing
of the internal element
required in the event of
obstruction by fibres or
large particles of dirt.
Top connection
The connection on the top of the dirt separator can be
used to install an automatic air vent, code 502040
MINICAL for the threaded version (A), code 501500
MAXCAL for the flanged version (B).
Draining off with the system running

The dirt separator collection chamber is equipped with a shut-off
ball cock with special lever in the threaded version (C), and with a
shut-off ball valve with butterfly handle in the flanged version (D).
These valves can be used to drain off the impurities which have
collected at the bottom of the dirt separator, even with the system
in operation.
B
C
BI-DIRECTIONAL
Tmax 110C
Pmax 10 bar
Tmax 105C
Pmax 10 bar
Maintenance
Insulation
To carry out maintenance operation (in threaded

models for horizontal pipes) (E), simply use a 26 mm
hex wrench (1) to unscrew the dirt collection chamber
to which the internal element is fixed, in order to extract
it for cleaning purposes. For vertical pipe models (F),
only the dirt collection chamber may be unscrewed for
cleaning procedures, without the whole internal element
being removed.
Flanged
DIRTCAL
devices are supplied
complete with hot preformed shell insulation.
This system ensures not
only perfect thermal
insulation, but also the
tightness required to
prevent water vapour
entering the device from
the ambient.
For this reason, this type
of insulation may also be
used in chilled water
circuits as it prevents
condensation
from
forming on the surface
of the valve body.
DN 150
DN 125
DN 100
DN 80
DN 65
1 1/2"
2
DN 50
1 1/4"
p (mm w.g.)
400
1"
3/4"
22 - 3/4" - 1
Vertical version
p (kPa)
4
350
3,5
300
250
2,5
200
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
100
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
50
0,5
45
40
0,45
0,4
35
0,35
30
0,3
25
0,25
20
0,2
180
200
140
160
120
100
70
80
90
60
30
25
35
40
45
50
20
18
14
16
12
7
8
9
10
3,5
4
4,5
2,5
1,8
0,5
10
1,4
1,6
0,12
1,2
12
0,7
0,8
0,9
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,6
18
16
14
G (m3/h)
0,1
Sizes
3/4"
1"
Kv (m3/h)
16,2
Sizes
DN 50
DN 65
DN 80
DN 100 DN 125 DN 150
Kv (m3/h)
75,0
150,0
180,0
280,0
22 - 3/4 - 1
1 1/4" 1 1/2"
2"
Vertical version
28,1
17
48,8
63,2
450,0
70,0
720,0
The maximum recommended speed of the medium

inside the pipe is 1,2 m/s. The following table shows
the maximum flow rates in order to meet this
requirement.
Sizes 22-3/4"-1
1"
1 1/4"
1 1/2"
2"
l/min
22,7
35,18
57,85
90,36
136,6
m3/h
1,36
2,11
3,47
5,42
8,2
Sizes
DN 50
DN 65
DN 80 DN 100 DN 125 DN 150
l/min
141,20
238,72
361,5
564,8
980,0
1436,6
m3/h
8,47
14,32
21,69
33,89
58,8
86,2
80
60
40
20
1000
500
210
250
150
105
50
63
35
20
16
WORKING ZONE
DIRTCAL
CARTRIDGE FILTERS
SPECIAL STRAINERS
Tests in a specialized laboratory

Y-STRAINERS
TNO - Science and Industry (NL)
Comparison of head losses: DIRT SEPARATOR - Y-STRAINERS

p (mm w.g.)
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
90
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
45
40
35
30
25
0,5
0,2
Installation
The dirt separator should preferably be installed on the return circuit
upstream of the boiler. This enables it to intercept any impurities already
present in the circuit, particularly when it is first started, before they
reach the boiler.
The dirt separator should always be installed vertically and ideally
upstream of the pump. Use the specific versions designed for
installation on horizontal or vertical pipes.
The flow direction of the medium is not important in dirt separators.
CHILLER
0,1
5000
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
1800
2000
1600
1400
1200
900
800
1000
200
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
18
16
14
12
10
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
DIRTCAL curve
3/4 - Kv=16,2
700
20
3
2,5
180
160
140
120
600
50
10
4.5
4
3,5
Y-strainer curve
3/4 - Kv=8
500
100
450
400
350
300
250
450
200
9
8
7
6
400
500
p (kPa)
900
800
700
600
350
A normal Y strainer performs its function via a metal mesh

selected for the size of the largest particle. The medium
therefore has a consequent initial loss of head that
increases as the degree of clogging increases.
Whereas, the dirt separator carries out its action by the
particles striking the internal element and subsequently
dropping into the collection chamber. The consequent
head losses are greatly reduced and are not affected by
the amount of impurities collected.
The graph alongside shows a comparison of the
differences in head loss between the two types of device.
Efficiency
50 passages (1 m/s)
100
1000
Reduced head losses
Efficiency
50 passages (0,5 m/s)
.100%)
300
The Caleffi DIRTCAL dirt separator, thanks to the special

design of its internal element, is able to completely
separate the impurities in the circuit down to a minimum
particle size of 5 m.
The graph alongside, summarising the tests carried out in
a specialised laboratory (TNO - Science and Industry),
illustrates how it is able to quickly separate nearly all the
impurities. After only 50 recirculations, approximately one
day of operation, up to 100% is effectively removed from
the circuit for particles of diameter greater than 100 m and
on average up to 80% taking account of the smallest
particles. The continual passing of the medium during
normal operation of the system gradually leads to complete
dirt removal.
Initial quantity
3) It increases as the number of recirculations increases.

The medium in the circuit, flowing through the dirt
separator a number of times during operation, is
subjected to a progressive action of separation, until the
impurities are completely removed.
Separated quantity
10
2) It increases as the speed decreases. If the speed

decreases, there is a calm zone inside the dirt separator
and the particles separate more easily.
250
1) It increases as the size and mass of the particle increase.

The larger and heavier particles drop before the lighter
ones.
Efficiency (%)
The capacity for separating the impurities in the medium

circulating in the closed circuits of the systems basically
depends on three parameters:
Particle separation rating - Dirt separator efficiency
Particle
dimensions
(m)
Separation efficiency
G (l/h)
Application diagram
P
T
F
A
Shut-off valve
BI-DIRECTIONAL
Tmax 110C
Pmax 10 bar
Flow switch
Tmax 105C
Pmax 10 bar
Safety thermostat
Control pocket
Zone valve
Ball valve
Gas filter
Regulator
Pump
Gas regulator
Pocket
Safety valve
Expansion vessel
BALLSTOP
AUTOFLOW
Y strainer
Flow rate
metering device
Temperature sensor
Temperature gauge
Backflow preventer
3 way tap
P
Fuel shut-off
valve
Automatic
filling unit
Pressure switch
5462 series DIRTCAL
Dirt separator. Connections for horizontal pipes 3/4 F (from 3/4 to 2). Top connection 1/2 F (with plug). Drain with hose
connection. Brass dirt collection chamber and body. PA66G30 internal element. EPDM hydraulic seals. Brass drain cock.
Medium water and non-hazardous glycol solutions excluded from the guidelines of EC directive 67/548; maximum
percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Working temperature range 0110C. Particle separation
rating down to 5m. Patented.
5465 series DIRTCAL
Dirt separator. Flanged connections DN 50 (from DN 50 to DN 150), PN 16; can be coupled with counterflanges EN 1092-1.
Top connection 3/4 (with plug). Drain 1 F. Epoxy resin coated steel body. Stainless steel internal element. Hydraulic seals in
non-asbestos fibre. Medium water and non-hazardous glycol solutions excluded from the guidelines of EC directive 67/548;
maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Working temperature range 0110C. Particle
separation rating down to 5m.
Complete with:
- chrome plated brass drain valve
- rigid closed cell expanded polyurethane foam insulation for sizes up to DN 100 (closed cell expanded PE-X for DN 125
and DN 150) and embossed unfinished aluminium external cover. Working temperature range 0105C (0100C for
DN 125 and DN 150). Patented.
5469 series DIRTCAL
Dirt separator. Connections 22 with compression ends for copper pipe and 3/4 (and 1) F connections. Brass dirt
collection chamber and body. Steel internal element. EPDM hydraulic seals. Brass drain cock. Medium water and nonhazardous glycol solutions excluded from the guidelines of EC directive 67/548; maximum percentage of glycol 50%.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Working temperature range 0110C. Particle separation rating down to 5m.
CALEFFI
Automatic flow regulator

with adjustable cartridge
CALEFFI
118 series
cert. n 0003
01138/06 GB
ISO 9001
Function
Flow regulators maintain a constant flow rate as the upstream/downstream
pressure difference varies. They automatically balance the hydronic circuit and
ensure the design flow rate.
This particular series of devices is equipped with a special cartridge that can be
adjusted from the outside, with which the flow rate can be set on the desired
value directly, with no need to shut off the valve.
Product range
Series 118
Automatic flow regulator with adjustable cartridge
Code 118000 Cartridge adjustment key
sizes 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 1 1/4
Dimensions
Materials: -
body:
pressure port plugs:
adjustable cartridge:
hydraulic seals:

polymer with HNBR diaphragm
EPDM
2
5
4
3
2
p Range:
Flow rates:
Accuracy:
17210 kPa; 17400 kPa; 30400 kPa; 35400 kPa

0,105,00 m3/h
5%
Connections:
Pressure port connections:
1/21 1/4 F
1/4 F
25 bar
0100C
C

Temperature range:

50%
Medium:
B
A
Code
118141 1/2
118151 3/4"
1"
118161
118171 1 1/4
B
83
94
128
128
C
31
31
47
47
D
80
80
100
100
Weight(kg)
0,66
0,62
1,90
1,70
Operating principle
With reference to the drawing shown, p1 and p3 are the pressures in

the circuit. p = (p1-p3) is the total pressure difference between
upstream and downstream of the valve.
Pressure p2 is determined by the diaphragm in reaction to the
pressure p1 that acts on the upper chamber of the diaphragm.
Interacting with the spring, the difference (p1-p2) remains constant,
keeping a constant pA through the orifice (A).
The outcome is a constant flow rate through the valve irrespective of
changes in the upstream/downstream pressure difference.
By using the special key (code 118000) you act on the adjustment
mechanism and read off the desired position on the graduated
reference scale.
A double gauge, with a scale from 1 to 5 and decimal division from
1 to 9, permits making exact flow rate adjustments. Its colour
identifies the pressure range.
Depending on the range of flow rate, the cartridges are available in
various colours to permit easy identification. The same colours are on
the outside, on the adjuster screw and on the protection cover.
A
p2
p1
p1
p3
pawl
cartridge
Working range (Range p)
p end
GNom
p start
G Flow rate
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
Method of coding for 118 series flow regulator

For correct identification of the device, fill in the form giving series N, size, flow rate and
Full code:
SERIES
SIZE
FLOW RATE
AND p RANGE
SIZE
RANGE OF FLOW RATE AND RANGE p
The fifth digit indicates

the size:
SIZE
1/2
3/4
DIGIT
1 1/4
7
The last three digits indicate the available ranges of flow rate and the Range p,
with the corresponding cartridges.
Each cartridge is marked by a specific colour.
Body
size
Cartridge
size
p range
(kPa)
Flow rate range

(m3/h)
Cartridge
colour
Cartridge code
digit
1/2 - 3/4
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
20
20
20
20
20
17-210
17-210
35-400
35-400
30-400
0,10-0,40
0,15-0,60
0,14-0,60
0,24-0,90
0,40-1,30
Black
Green
Black
Green
Red
1YB
1YG
1GB
1GG
1YR
1 - 1 1/4
DN 40
17-400
1,05-5,00
Black
2YB
Flow-rate adjustment tables

Flow rate - codes 1YB and 1YG
- white pawl DN 15 (1/2) and
DN 20 (3/4)
Adjustment
position
17210 kPa
l/h
Black
Min (p)
(kPa)
100,0
107,8
115,6
124,4
131,2
139,0
146,8
154,6
162,4
170,2
178,0
185,8
193,6
201,4
209,2
217,0
224,8
232,6
240,4
248,2
256,0
263,8
271,6
279,4
287,2
295,0
302,8
310,6
318,4
326,2
334,0
341,8
349,6
357,4
365,2
373,0
380,8
388,6
396,4
404,2
412,0
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
l/h
Flow rate - codes 1GB and 1GG

- grey pawl DN 15 (1/2) and
DN 20 (3/4)
Green
Min (p) Rotation
(kPa)
157,0
168,3
179,6
190,9
202,2
213,5
224,8
236,1
247,4
258,7
270,0
281,3
292,6
303,9
315,2
326,5
337,8
349,1
360,4
371,7
383,0
394,3
405,6
416,9
428,2
439,5
450,8
462,1
473,4
484,7
496,0
507,3
518,6
529,9
541,2
552,5
563,8
575,1
586,4
597,7
609,0
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
1,0
1,1
1,2
1,3
1,4
1,5
1,6
1,7
1,8
1,9
2,0
2,1
2,2
2,3
2,4
2,5
2,6
2,7
2,8
2,9
3,0
3,1
3,2
3,3
3,4
3,5
3,6
3,7
3,8
3,9
4,0
4,1
4,2
4,3
4,4
4,5
4,6
4,7
4,8
4,9
5,0
Adjustment
position
35400 kPa
l/h
Black
Min (p)
(kPa)
137,9
149,8
161,8
173,7
185,6
197,6
209,5
221,4
233,3
245,3
257,2
269,1
281,1
293,0
304,9
316,9
328,8
340,7
352,6
364,6
376,5
388,4
400,4
412,3
424,2
436,2
448,1
460,0
471,9
483,9
495,8
507,7
519,7
531,6
543,5
555,5
567,4
579,3
591,2
603,2
615,1
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
38
38
38
38
39
39
39
40
40
40
41
41
l/h
Green
Min (p) Rotation
(kPa)
237,6
254,1
270,5
287,0
303,5
319,9
336,4
352,8
369,3
385,8
402,2
418,7
435,1
451,6
468,1
484,5
501,0
517,4
533,9
550,4
566,8
583,3
599,8
616,2
632,7
649,1
665,6
682,1
698,5
715,0
731,4
747,9
764,4
780,8
797,3
813,7
830,2
846,7
863,1
879,6
896,1
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
35
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
44
44
45
1,0
1,1
1,2
1,3
1,4
1,5
1,6
1,7
1,8
1,9
2,0
2,1
2,2
2,3
2,4
2,5
2,6
2,7
2,8
2,9
3,0
3,1
3,2
3,3
3,4
3,5
3,6
3,7
3,8
3,9
4,0
4,1
4,2
4,3
4,4
4,5
4,6
4,7
4,8
4,9
5,0
Flow rate - code 1YR

- white pawl DN 15 (1/2) and
DN 20 (3/4)
30400 kPa
l/h
Adjustment
position
Red
Min (p) Rotation
(kPa)
405,9
527,4
448,9
470,4
491,9
513,4
534,9
556,4
577,9
599,4
620,9
642,4
663,9
685,4
706,9
728,4
749,9
771,4
792,9
814,4
835,9
857,4
878,9
900,4
921,9
943,4
964,9
986,5
1008,0
1029,0
1051,0
1072,0
1094,0
1115,0
1137,0
1158,0
1180,0
1201,0
1223,0
1244,0
1266,0
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
34
34
35
35
36
37
38
38
39
40
41
42
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
58
59
60
61
62
64
1,0
1,1
1,2
1,3
1,4
1,5
1,6
1,7
1,8
1,9
2,0
2,1
2,2
2,3
2,4
2,5
2,6
2,7
2,8
2,9
3,0
3,1
3,2
3,3
3,4
3,5
3,6
3,7
3,8
3,9
4,0
4,1
4,2
4,3
4,4
4,5
4,6
4,7
4,8
4,9
5,0
Flow rate - code 2YB

- white pawl DN 25 (1) and
DN 32 (1 1/4)
17400 kPa
l/h
Adjustment
position
Black
Min (p) Rotation
(kPa)
1048,0
1203,4
1355,9
1505,6
1652,4
1796,3
1937,3
2075,4
2210,7
2343,0
2472,5
2599,1
2722,8
2843,6
2961,6
3076,6
3188,8
3298,1
3404,5
3508,0
3608,7
3706,4
3801,3
3893,3
3982,4
4068,6
4152,0
4232,4
4310,0
4384,7
4456,5
4525,4
4591,5
4654,6
4714,9
4772,3
4826,8
4878,4
4927,2
4973,0
5016,0
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
1,0
1,1
1,2
1,3
1,4
1,5
1,6
1,7
1,8
1,9
2,0
2,1
2,2
2,3
2,4
2,5
2,6
2,7
2,8
2,9
3,0
3,1
3,2
3,3
3,4
3,5
3,6
3,7
3,8
3,9
4,0
4,1
4,2
4,3
4,4
4,5
4,6
4,7
4,8
4,9
5,0

To correctly size the pump, you need to add, to the fixed head losses of the most disadvantaged circuit, the minimum pressure difference required
by the device. This value corresponds to the minimum p of the start of the working range, indicated in the tables.
Accessories
100
Code
100000
130 FLOMET
tech. broch 01041
Electronic flow rate and pressure differential

measuring station.
Supplied complete with shut-off valves and
It can be used to check operation in the
working range of Autoflow devices.
It can also be used to measure the flow
rate of balancing valves series 131, 135
and of the metering devices series 683.
Max differential pressure: 200 kPa.
Pair of fast-plug pressure/temperature test

port.
Max working pressure: 30 bar.
Working temperature range: -5130C.
1/4
100
Pair of fittings with fast coupling syringe for
connection of the pressure ports to the
measuring instruments.
Max working temperature: 110C.
Code
100010
1/4
Code
130000
130001
Supply 230 V (ac)

Battery operated
In heating and air-conditioning systems, the regulators are preferably installed on the circuit return pipe. Some typical installation examples are
given below.
To serve a number of heat emitters in line: radiators,

convectors, fan coils, air heaters, strips, etc...
To regulate the flow in each riser or secondary branch of a

system.
T.A.
2
5
4
3
5
3
5
4
5
4
3
2
3
2
T.A.
2
2
5
2
5
4
3
2
1
T.A.
2
1
5
4
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
To ensure the design flow rates (with both valve open and
valve closed) to the various zones of a system.
To ensure the design flow rate at each terminal emitter in very

large networks.
118 series
Automatic flow regulator with adjustable cartridge. 1/2 F connections (from 1/2 to 1 1/4), 1/4 F pressure port. Brass
pressure port plugs and body. Polymer adjustable cartridge with HNBR diaphragm. EPDM hydraulic seals. Medium: water and
glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 25 bar. Temperature range 0100C.
p range 17210 kPa (17400 kPa, 30400 kPa, 35400 kPa). Range of flow rate from 0,10 to 5,00 m3/h. Accuracy 5%.
CALEFFI
Thermostatic regulator
for domestic hot water recirculation circuits
116 series
CALEFFI
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01139/06 GB
Function
The thermostatic regulator is used for automatic balancing of
recirculation circuits in domestic hot water distribution systems, so
as to ensure that all parts of the network reach the required
temperature.
It is also equipped with a by-pass mechanism, either manual or
automatic with thermoelectric actuator, to be used in the event of
Product range
Thermostatic regulator for recirculation circuit
Thermoelectric actuator for 116 series
Thermoelectric actuator for 116 series
Dimensions
body:
adjustable cartridge:
springs:
hydraulic seals:
Performance:
Medium:
Factory set:
Accuracy:
Connections:
water
3565C
55C
2C
100C
10 bar
1 bar
1/23/4 F
1/4 F with plug
A
Pressure port connections:

PPS
stainless steel
EPDM
Materials: -
size 1/2- 3/4

230 V (ac)
24 V (ac)
116 series
Code 116002
Code 116004
Normally closed-ON/OFF
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Insulation:
Protection class:
Operating time:
Thermoelectric actuator
230 V (ac) 24 V (ac)

1,8 W
class II
IP 54
060C
150200 s
1m
Code
116040
116050
A
1/2
3/4
B
80
80
C
31
31
D
97
97
D
132
132
Weight (kg)
0,61
0,56
Graph for head loss
Operating principle
P (kPa)
On reaching the set temperature, the obturator,

governed by an internal thermostat, modulates
the closure of the hot water orifice, thereby aiding
circulation towards the other connected circuits.
If the temperature decreases there is the
opposite action and the orifice reopens.
Thanks to the special design of the
preassembled cartridge, the thermostat is not
directly in contact with the hot water in circulation.
This limits potential trouble with blockage due to
limescale.
The regulator is equipped with a mechanism that
allows circulation regardless of the thermostat
action, used to carry out thermal disinfection of
the circuit.
P (mm w.g.)
2000
20
1800
1600
1400
18
16
14
1200
12
9
8
7
10
1000
Thermostatic
operation 5K
900
800
700
By-pass
operation
600
500
450
400
350
4,5
4
3,5
300
250
2,5
200
1,8
1,6
1,4
180
160
140
120
1,2
100
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
50
450
400
500
350
300
250
180
160
200
140
120
80
90
100
70
60
40
35
30
25
18
16
45
50
G (l/h)
To correctly size the recirculation pump head, add the loss of head
of the valve to the loss of head of the most disadvantaged circuit.
1,4
Example
1,2
Set temperature (C)
1
Kv - (m3/h)
20
14
10
12
0,5
35
40
45
50
55
60
Recirculation circuit calculated for an average heat loss of 12 W/m

and a temperature difference of 2K between the starting point and
the most unfavourable delivery point, at the top of a riser 20 m. in
height. Thermostatic regulator located at the base of the riser.
65
0,8
0,6
Flow rate for the riser, which therefore passes through the
thermostatic regulator:
G = 12 20 0,860/2= 103 l/h
0,4
0,2
0
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
Water temperature (C)
System sizing
The thermostatic regulators are used for automatic balancing of the
various branches of domestic hot water recirculation circuits, so as
to ensure the required temperature in each section, to prevent the
growth of Legionella and limit heat losses.
The recirculation circuits are generally sized according to the flow
rate required for each branch, based on the allowed heat loss and
the corresponding decrease in temperature along the pipe.
Generally speaking, the maximum allowed temperature drop
between the point of departure from the heating plant and the point
of return to the latter is 5C.
According to the flow rate, determined using the various calculation
methods, it is possible to calculate the loss of head caused by
passage through the thermostatic regulator, using the graphs
provided below.
The curves for the loss of head are shown with:
- valve in thermostatic operating mode. In this case, reference is
made to an average aperture corresponding to 5K, between the
valve set temperature and the incoming water temperature,
bearing in mind the losses along the pipe. This value allows the
head required for the recirculation pump to be limited. It is also
always necessary to take care to ensure the minimum flow
rate required by the mixers in the heating plant.
- valve in by-pass operating mode. In this case, the valve obturator
is fully open and the minimum loss of head is produced during
Thermostatic regulator set temperature:

Treg = 55C.
The graph shows the loss of head of the valve, in thermostatic
operation:
preg = 6 kPa.
From calculations made based on the nominal flow rates, the loss
of head from the pipes in the circuit and from the circuit
components such as boiler, mixer, valves of the most
disadvantaged circuit can be found.
Let us suppose that this value is known:
pcircuit = 14 kPa
Pump head at nominal flow rate:
H = pcircuit+preg = 14 + 6 = 20 kPa.
20m
Installation
By-pass
Before fitting the thermostatic regulator, the pipes must be flushed

to ensure that none of the impurities in circulation will affect its
performance.
We recommend always installing filters of sufficient capacity at the
inlet of the water system.
The thermostatic regulator can be fitted in any position, vertical or
horizontal, provided it complies with the direction of flow indicated
by the arrow on the valve body.
The by-pass mechanism operates manually, simply by removing

the black protective cover.
By installing the thermoelectric actuator it is possible to govern the
mechanism automatically.
To ensure that the valve is in the open position while the system is
being put into service, the actuator is supplied in a normally open
(NO) position, and remains in this position until it is powered up
electrically for the first time.
Temperature setting
The regulator is supplied with a factory temperature setting of 55C.
The temperature is set at the desired value by turning the upper
screw with the control key. The graded scale shows the
temperatures to which the indicator can be set.
After adjustment, screw the black protective cover all the way down
to activate thermostatic operation.
Maintenance
The preassembled cartridge containing the control components
can be removed from the valve body for checking, cleaning or
replacement.
Checking temperature
The valve body is fitted with threaded connectors, which can be
used for pressure/temperature ports to check the temperature
reached and the loss of head.
nu
all eentu iidd o
m otta
meetnttteem
tn e rreep
o edd p
nu
all eentu iidd o
m otta
meetnttteem
tn e rreep
o edd p
116 series
Thermostatic regulator for domestic hot water recirculation circuits. Connections 1/2 and 3/4 F. Pressure port
connections 1/4 F with plug. Brass body. Adjustable PPS cartridge. Stainless steel springs. EPDM hydraulic seals.
Regulation temperature range 3565C. Factory setting 55C. Precision 2C. Maximum working temperature 100C.
Code 116002
Thermoelectric actuator for 116 series, normally closed-ON/OFF. Power supply 230 V (ac). Power consumption 1,8 W.
Insulation class II. Protection class IP 54. Ambient temperature range 060C. Operating time 150200 s. Power cable
length 1 m.
Code 116004
Thermoelectric actuator for 116 series, normally closed-ON/OFF. Power supply 24 V (ac). Power consumption 1,8 W.
Insulation class II. Protection class IP 54. Ambient temperature range 060C. Operating time 150200 s. Power cable
length 1 m.
CALEFFI
High-Style valves for designer heating systems

Convertible radiator valves and lockshields 400 series.
Thermostatic control heads 200 series
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
CALEFFI
01140/07 GB
Function
Convertible radiator valves and lockshields are typically used to
shut off and balance the flow rate of medium on the terminal
emitters of heating and air-conditioning systems.
Whereas thermostatic control head are used in automatically
regulating the ambient temperature on the set value: for this
purpose convertible radiator valves can be converted from manual
to thermostatic by simply replacing the control knob with the
thermostatic control.
The chrome-plating and special design of this series of
products make them particularly suited to the styling
requirements of designer heating systems.
Product range
VALVES
4001 Series
4003 Series
Convertible radiator valve and square lockshield, HIGH-STYLE, for designer heating systems
Convertible radiator valve with double right square and double left square lockshield,
HIGH-STYLE, for designer heating systems
4004 Series Convertible radiator valve with double left square and double right square lockshield,
HIGH-STYLE, for designer heating systems
Code 387127 Multipurpose wrench for unions
Size 1/2 radiator x 23 p.1,5 piping*

from 3/8 to 1
*Connectable with mechanical fittings series 437 - 447 - 681 - 679

THERMOSTATIC CONTROL HEAD
Code 200015 - Thermostatic control with built-in sensor with liquid-filled element, HIGH-STYLE, for designer heating systems. Scale of adjustment
05 corresponding to 028C
- Tamperproof antitheft cap for use in public places
- Wrench for tightening tamperproof antitheft cap
Technical specifications of valves and lockshields

Materials: -
Body:
brass EN 12165 CW617N, high chrome finish
Control device upper port: brass EN 12164 CW614N
stainless steel
Spring:
stainless steel
Lockshield obturator
control stem:
- Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
- Control knob:
ABS, high chrome finish
- Knob cap:
PA, high chrome finish
- Lockshield knob:
high chrome finish
- Pipe-cover shell:
ABS, high chrome finish
Valve or lockshield connections:

Medium:
Max differential pressure with control fitted:
Temperature range:
- 1/2 x 23 p.1,5
30%
10 bar
1 bar
5100C
Control adjustment range scale, 200 series
0C
7C
12C
234
16C
20C
24C
28C
Technical specifications of control heads 200 series

Adjustment range:
Antifreeze trigger:
05
028C
~ 7C
50C
Dimensions
31
31
58
A
58
58
A
31
31
58
Code
Code
Weight (kg)
400100 23 p.1,5 1/2 32,5 5580 44 59 48,5
400300 23 p.1,5 1/2 31 5580 46,5 61 47
0,86
Weight (kg)
0,86
RH version
48
D
F
58
A
E
B
A
58
D
A
31
31
Code
Weight (kg)
400400 23 p.1,5 1/2 31 5580 46,5 61 47
0,86
LH version
48
58
A
58
58
A
48
Code
Code
Code
400100 + 20001.
23 p.1,5
1/2
32,5
400300 +20001.
23 p.1,5
1/2
31
400400+20001.
12
1/2
31
Code
400100 + 20001. 5580
Weight (kg)
Code
Weight (kg)
Code
Weight (kg)
106,5
48,5
0,55
400300 +20001.
5580
109
47
0,55
400412+20001.
5580
109
47
0,55
A
Code
20001. 30 p.1,5
Weight (kg)
80
48
52,5
35
36
0,21
Operating principle of
The control device of the

thermostatic valve is a proportional
temperature regulator, composed
of a bellows containing a specific
thermostatic medium.
As the temperature increases, the
medium increases in volume and
causes the bellows to dilate. As the
temperature decreases there is the
opposite process; the bellows
contracts due to the thrust of the
counter
spring.
The
axial
movements of the sensitive element
are transmitted to the valve actuator
by means of the connecting stem,
thereby adjusting the flow of
medium in the heating body.
Valve
shut

connection thread has a specially shaped
rubber ring (1). This system guarantees
the hydraulic seal with no need for further
sealing materials, such as PTFE tapes
etc.
A perfect hydraulic seal with the valve
body is on the other hand ensured by
the double O-Ring (2).
Valve and lockshield coupling with designer heating system
Valve
open
The
coupling
between
valve/lockshield and designer
heating system must be made
using the specific tailpiece with
sealing (1a), to be screwed
onto the radiator using the
code 387127 Caleffi union
wrench. On completing the
coupling, lock the valve to the
tailpiece by screwing the
socket head screw into the hole
shown.
1a
Valve
The stainless steel control stem (1) has an EPDM double seal
O-Ring (2) - (3). In this way the upper portion of the control device
upper port (4) can be replaced even with the system running.
The obturator (5) is shaped so as to optimize the hydraulic
characteristics of the valve during the progressive action of
opening or closing in thermostatic operation.
The wide passage between the seat and obturator causes reduced
head losses in manual operation.
Telescopic pipe-cover shell
A chrome-plated pipe-cover shell is supplied in the package for the

aesthetic requirement of covering the entire connection between
the valve/lockshield and piping.
The coupling between the shell and valve body is telescopic in
order to adjust the distances between the valves/lockshields and
the walling from where the piping comes.
The shell is lastly secured to the valve with its specific screw.
Lockshield
The hydraulic seal of the lockshield is ensured by using the
EPDM O-Rings on the control device upper port (1) and on the
control stem of the lockshield (2) while the O-Ring on the obturator
(3) enables
shutting off
2
1
3
the radiator
completely.
Interchangeable lockshield and valve control device upper ports
With the system already installed there could be the drawback of

having swapped over the delivery and return, causing
malfunctioning and noise.
To get round this problem
it is possible, with the
system empty, to swap
over the two control
device upper ports (A)
B
and (B) of the valves.
Convertible radiator valves with square connections,
high-style, with manual adjustment, code 400100.
p (mm w.g.)
Convertible radiator valves with double square connections,

high-style, with manual adjustment, code 400300/400400.
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
50
5000
50
2000
20
2000
20
1000
10
1000
10
500
500
200
200
100
100
100
G (l/h)
Kv0,01 = 200 l/h
G (l/h)
Kv0,01 = 127 l/h
Convertible radiator valves with square connections,

high-style, with thermostatic adjustment, proportional band
2K, code 400100 + 20010..
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
3000
2000
s-2K
1000
2000
0,1
1000
0,2
10
500
20
200
0,5
50
50
10
500
50
2000
0,1
1000
0,2
10
200
20
100
0,5
20
50
20
5000
Convertible radiator valves with double square connections,

high-style, with thermostatic adjustment, proportional band
2K, code 400300 + 20010. , 400400 + 20010..
p (mm w.g.)
30
20
3000
2000
p (kPa)
30
20
10
1000
500
500
200
200
100
100
10
s-2K
Kv0 01 = 60 l/h
High-style lockshields, square connections, code 400100.
lly
ta
to
2000
1000
20
2000
20
10
1000
500
200
100
100
500
p (kPa)
50
200
200
5000
500
High-style lockshields, double square connections,

code 400300, 400400.
p (kPa)
50
2000
1000
G (l/h)
P differential max = 1 bar
en
op
p (mm w.g.)
10
1
2
5
2
op
en
p (mm w.g.)
5000
100
50
10
G (l/h)
P differential max = 1 bar
to
ta
lly
Kv0,01 = 56 l/h
50
0,1
20
0,2
10
2000
20
0,1
1000
0,2
10
500
20
200
0,5
100
50
20
0,5
10
50
1 turn
2 turns
3 turns
4 turns
F.O.
Kv0,01 (l/h)
21
37
84
151
192
G (l/h)
Reg. pos.
1 turn
2 turns
3 turns
4 turns
F.O.
Kv0,01 (l/h)
2000
1000
500
0,5
200
100
100
50
20
10
Reg. pos.
50
0,1
20
0,2
10
10
20
0,1
2000
0,2
10
1000
20
500
50
200
0,5
50
G (l/h)
21
34
90
130
137
System sizing
For correct system sizing, the valves are normally selected by identifying the pressure drop in accordance with the flow on diagrams
s-2K as above (regulation with proportional band of 2K).
Valve conversion from manual to thermostatic
Before installing the thermostatic

control turn the knob into the fully-open
position (Pos. 5).
Operations to carry out before fitting the tamperproof cap

1. Turn the knob

to the fully open
position (Pos.5).
unlock the ring,
pressing it fully
towards the valve
body.
2.
Turn the knob

the
new
to
maximum open
position required
(e.g. Pos.3).
Turn
the
ring
anti-clockwise
up to the stop.
3. Re-lock the
ring. The valve
will now have a
temperature
range restriction
from 0 to the set
value.
2.
3. Re-lock the
ring. The valve
will now be
locked at the set
temperature.
1. Turn the knob to

the
fully
open
position (Pos.5).
unlock the ring,
pressing it fully
towards the valve
body.
Position the
valve at the
required
temperature
and turn the ring
clockwise up to
the stop.
1. Using a
fully towards the
valve body.
2. Turn the
knob to the fully
open position
and the ring
anti-clockwise,
up to the stop.
The RESET
arrows will
match up.
Tamperproof and antitheft cap

The tamperproof and antitheft version of the thermostatic control is obtained by fitting
the cap on the knob as shown hereunder. It is secured with two screws equipped with
a special head that can only be tightened by using the appropriate wrench.
3. Re-lock the
ring. The valve
will now no
longer have any
temperature
4001 Series
Square convertible radiator valve and lockshield HIGH-STYLE for designer heating systems, high chrome finish; valve
fitted for thermostatic and electro-thermal controls. Connections for piping 23 p.1,5. Connection to the radiator 1/2 M
with EPDM pre-seal nipples supplied. Brass body. ABS valve knob and PA cap, chrome-plated. Brass lockshield knob,
chrome-plated. Stainless steel obturator control stem and stainless steel valve spring. Brass lockshield obturator control
stem, chrome-plated. Valve with double seal on the control stem with EPDM O-Ring. Brass control device upper port,
chrome-plated ABS pipe-cover shells, chrome-plated. Allen wrench for tightening valve. Medium: water and glycol
solutions; Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Max differential pressure with control
fitted 1 bar. Temperature range 5100C.
4003 Series
Right double square convertible radiator valves valve and left double square lockshield HIGH-STYLE for designer heating
systems, high chrome finish; valve fitted for thermostatic and electro-thermal controls. Connections for piping 23 p.1,5.
Connection to the radiator 1/2 M with EPDM pre-seal nipples supplied. Brass body. ABS valve knob and PA cap,
chrome-plated. Brass lockshield knob, chrome-plated. Stainless steel obturator control stem and stainless steel valve
spring. Brass lockshield obturator control stem, chrome-plated. Valve with double seal on the control stem with EPDM
O-Ring. Brass control device upper port, chrome-plated ABS pipe-cover shells, chrome-plated. Allen wrench for
tightening valve. Medium: water and glycol solutions; Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum working pressure
10 bar. Max differential pressure with control fitted 1 bar. Temperature range 5100C.
4004 Series
Left double square convertible radiator valves valve and right double square lockshield HIGH-STYLE for designer heating
systems, high chrome finish; valve fitted for thermostatic and electro-thermal controls. Connections for piping 23 p.1,5.
Connection to the radiator 1/2 M with EPDM pre-seal nipples supplied. Brass body. ABS valve knob and PA cap,
chrome-plated. Brass lockshield knob, chrome-plated. Stainless steel obturator control stem and stainless steel valve
spring. Brass lockshield obturator control stem, chrome-plated. Valve with double seal on the control stem with EPDM
O-Ring. Brass control device upper port, chrome-plated ABS pipe-cover shells, chrome-plated. Allen wrench for
tightening valve. Medium: water and glycol solutions; Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum working pressure
10 bar. Max differential pressure with control fitted 1 bar. Temperature range 5100C.
Code 200015
-Thermostatic control for HIGH-STYLE convertible radiator valves or thermostatic radiator valves for designer heating
systems. Sensor incorporated with liquid-sensitive element. High chrome finish. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Max
differential pressure with control fitted 1 bar. Temperature range 5100C. Max ambient temperature 50C. Graduated
scale from 0 to 5 corresponding to a temperature adjustment range from 0 to 28C, with the possibility of locking and
limiting the temperature. Antifreeze trigger ~7C.
- Tamperproof antitheft cap for thermostatic control head, for use in public places, high chrome finish.
- Special wrench for tightening tamperproof antitheft cap, code 209004.
Code 387127
Multipurpose wrench. Can be used for unions from 3/8 to 1.
CALEFFI
Automatic flow regulator with

high-resistance polymer cartridge
CALEFFI
121 - 126 series
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01141/06 GB
Function
The Autoflow devices are automatic flow regulators capable of
maintaining a constant flow rate of the medium as the operating
conditions of the hydronic circuit change. They automatically
balance the hydronic circuit and ensure the design flow rate at each
terminal emitter.
In this particular series, the devices are equipped with an innovative
and exclusive regulator element made of high-resistance polymer,
selected for use in air-conditioning and plumbing systems.
With this new regulator, the devices provide silent operation,
accuracy in control, insensitivity to scale and a long service life.
The devices are available in both the version as a flow regulator and
in the version completed with a shut-off ball valve.
Product range
121 series Automatic flow regulator with high-resistance polymer cartridge and ball valve
126 series Automatic flow regulator with high-resistance polymer cartridge
sizes 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 1 1/4

sizes 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 1 1/4
series
Materials
Body:
Autoflow cartridge:
Spring:
Seals:
Ball:
Ball seat:
Control stem seal:
Lever:
Pressure port plugs:
121
126

stainless steel
EPDM
PTFE
PTFE
special zinc-plated steel
POM

stainless steel
EPDM
special zinc-plated steel
POM

50%
16 bar
0100C
15200 kPa
0,122,0 m3/h
10%

50%
16 bar
0100C
15200 kPa
0,122,0 m3/h
10%
1/21 1/4 F with union x F
1/21 1/4 F
1/4 F
1/4 F
Performance
Medium:
Maximum percentage of glycol:
p Range:
Flow rates:
Accuracy:
Connections
Dimensions
D
A
C
FI
LEF
CA
FFI
LE
CA
B
Code
121141 ...
121151 ...
121161 ...
121171 ...
A
1/2"
3/4"
1"
1 1/4"
B
156,5
159,5
218,5
220,5
B
C
50
50
96
96
D
50
50
66
66
E
100
100
120
120
F
1/4"
1/4"
1/2"
1/2"
Weight (kg)
1,00
1,00
1,85
1,87
Code
126141 ...
126151 ...
126161 ...
126171 ...
A
1/2"
3/4"
1"
1 1/4"
B
101
106
140
148
C
50
50
96
96
F
1/4"
1/4"
1/2"
1/2"
Weight (kg)
0,45
0,48
1,36
1,24
Circuit balancing
DYNAMIC CIRCUIT BALANCING
Modern heating and air-conditioning systems have to guarantee a high level of thermal comfort with a low consumption of energy. This means
supplying the system terminal emitters with the correct design flow rates, to produce balanced hydraulic circuits.
Unbalanced circuits
If a circuit is not
balanced,
the
hydraulic imbalance
between emitters
creates areas with
temperatures which
are not unifor m,
comfort, and higher
energy consumption.
Flow rate
50 %
17
140 %
22
24
180 %

using
manual
calibration valves.
per fectly and have
operating limitations
in the case of partial
closure by means of
the regulating valves.
The flow rate in the
open circuits does
not
remain
c o n stant at the
nominal value.
Flow rate
Flow rate
100 %
100 %
140 %
Regulating
valve
0%
100 %
120 %
Manual valve
FULL LOAD
PARTIAL LOAD

Flow rate
Flow rate
100 %
100 %
CALEF
FI
CALEF
FI
100 %
0%
CALEF
FI
Regulating
valve
100 %
CALEF
FI
CALEF
FI
100 %
CALEF
FI

hydraulic
circuit
a u t o m a t i c a l l y,
ensuring that each
ter minal
emitter
receives the design
flow rate.
Even in the case of
partial circuit closure
by means of the
circuits
remain
c o n stant at the
nominal value. The
system
always
guarantees
the
the highest energy
savings.
Autoflow
FULL LOAD
PARTIAL LOAD
Autoflow devices
Function
It is therefore necessary to refer to the p - flow rate diagram and a basic diagram illustrating the methods of operation and the effects of the
relevant variables.
The regulating element of these devices is a piston and a cylinder that has side apertures, of fixed and variable geometry, through which the
medium flows. These apertures are governed by the movement of the piston on which the thrust of the medium acts. A specially calibrated
spring counteracts this movement.
Autoflows are high performance automatic regulators. They regulate the flow rates selected within a very tight tolerance (approx. 10%) and
offer a wide range of operation.

remains in equilibrium without
compressing the spring and gives the
medium the maximum free flow area.
In practice, the piston acts as a fixed
regulator and thus the flow through the
AUTOFLOW depends solely on the
differential pressure.
FLOW RATE
G0
0,15 bar/15 kPa DIFFERENTIAL 2,0 bar/200 kPa

PRESSURE
Kv0,01 = 0,258 G0 Range p 15200 kPa

FLOW RATE
Control range
Final p
G0
Initial p
If the differential pressure is contained

within the control range, the piston
compresses the spring and gives the
medium a free flow area to permit
regular flow at the nominal rate for
which the AUTOFLOW is set up.

PRESSURE

In this case, the piston compresses the
spring fully and only leaves the fixed
geometry aperture for the medium to
pass through.
As in the first case above, the piston
acts as a fixed regulator. The flow rate
through the AUTOFLOW thus depends
FLOW RATE
G0

PRESSURE
Kv0,01 = 0,070 G0 Range p 15200 kPa
New polymer regulator
The flow-rate regulator element is made entirely of high-resistance
polymer, specially chosen for use in air-conditioning and plumbing
systems.
Its mechanical behaviour is excellent in a wide range of working
temperatures, it features high resistance to abrasion due to the
medium flowing continuously, it is insensitive to the deposit of scale
and is fully compatible with the glycols and additives used in circuits.
Exclusive design
The new regulator, thanks to its exclusive design, is able to
accurately regulate the flow rate in a wide range of operating
pressures. A special internal chamber acts as a damper for the
beating and vibration triggered by the flow of the medium, making
sure the device works quietly.
For these reasons it can be used in system circuits on both zone
outlets and directly at the terminal emitters.
Ball valve
The control stem of the ball valve has a blowout-proof stem and the
reversible closing lever is covered with vinyl. If there are any
insulated pipes, it can be changed with the extended lever series 117.
The internal regulator is assembled in the form of a self contained
cartridge so as to permit easy removal from the body for inspection
or replacement. It is equipped with a special automatic fixing system
with wire and an operating ring for fast and safe positioning without
using tools.
FI
LEF
CA
p (kPa)
d.
co
ge
Ran
I
LEFF
CA
18
150
Connecting the device

The body of the Autoflow device
is fitted with connections for the
pressure ports, which is useful
when checking operation in the
working range. In addition, the
cartridge plug contains a
connection to be able to use a
circuit drain valve.
p
=
/h
a
kP
FI
LEF
CA
d.
co
ge
Ran
I
LEFF
CA
18
150
p
=
m
a
kP
/h
Sizing the circuit with Autoflow

Sizing the circuit containing Autoflow is particularly easy to
accomplish. As illustrated by the diagrams, shown alongside by way
of example, the calculation of the loss of head for choosing the pump
is made by referring to the hydraulically most unfavourable circuit
and adding this value to the minimum differential pressure required
by the Autoflow. In the example the circuits have the same nominal
flow rate.
The Autoflow devices, located on intermediate circuits, automatically
absorb the excess differential pressure to ensure the corresponding
nominal flow rate.
As the regulating valves open or close, the Autoflow repositions itself
dynamically to maintain the nominal flow rate (50% load = circuits 3,
5, 7, 8 closed).
For more detailed information on sizing a system with Autoflow,
please refer to the 2nd volume of the Caleffi Handbooks and the
technical report Dynamic balancing of hydronic circuits. They give
theoretical calculations, numerical examples and notes on the
application of the above-mentioned devices in circuits.
Regulating valve
Autoflow
p circuit (flow + return)

extra p absorbed by Autoflow
at 50% load
p absorbed by Autoflow
at 100% load
H pump
minimum p requested by
Autoflow
p branch circuit
4
Terminal
Flow-rate tables
Code
121141
121151
121161
121171
Code
126141
126151
126161
126171
kv0,01 (l/h)
Minimum working
p (kPa)
1.690
1.773
1.800
1.850
15
15
15
15
kv0,01 (l/h)
Minimum working
p (kPa)
1.669
1.758
1.400
1.450
15
15
15
15

Given by the sum of two values:
1. The minimum working p of the Autoflow cartridge
2. The p required for the nominal flow rate to pass
through the valve body.
This value can be calculated according to the
values of kv0,01 stated above and referring to the
valve body only
p Range
(kPa)
15200
15200
15200
15200
p Range
(kPa)
15200
15200
15200
15200
Flow rates (m3/h)
0,12; 0,15; 0,2; 0,25; 0,3; 0,35; 0,4; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2
0,12; 0,15; 0,2; 0,25; 0,3; 0,35; 0,4; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2
0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0
0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0
Flow rates (m3/h)
0,12; 0,15; 0,2; 0,25; 0,3; 0,35; 0,4; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2
0,12; 0,15; 0,2; 0,25; 0,3; 0,35; 0,4; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2
0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0
0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6; 1,8; 2,0
Example
Autoflow 126 series dimension 1 with flow rate G0 = 1200 l/h and p Range 15200 kPa:
prequired = pAutoflow + pbody = 15 + (G0 /kv0,01)2 = 15 + (1200 /1400)2 = 15,7 kPa
Method of coding for Autoflow series 121 - 126

For correct identification of the device, fill in the form giving series No., size, flow rate and p.
2nd
3rd
5th
SERIES
1st
SIZE
5th
7th
SERIES
SIZE
2nd
8th
3rd
9th
6th
7th
8th
9th
Complete code
FLOW RATE
AND p RANGE
4th
1st
FLOW RATE - p RANGE
The first three

digits indicate
the series:
121
126
The fifth digit

indicates the size:
Size
1/2"
3/4"
1"
1 1/4"
Digit
Autoflow regulator and ball valve

Autoflow regulator
The last three digits indicate the flow rates available.
with p Range 15200 kPa

m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
0,12
0,15
0,20
M12
M15
M20
0,25
0,30
0,35
M25
M30
M35
0,40
0,50
0,60
M40
M50
M60
0,70
0,80
0,90
M70
M80
M90
1,00
1,20
1,40
1M0
1M2
1M4
1,60
1,80
2,00
1M6
1M8
2M0
Installation of Autoflow
In air-conditioning systems, AUTOFLOW devices must preferably be installed on the circuit return pipe.
Some typical installation examples are given below.

To regulate the flow rate in each riser or secondary branch

of a system.
T.A.
To ensure constant flow rates (in any valve position) in circuits

with traditional temperature control.
T.A.
T.A.
To guarantee the design flow rate (with valves open or

closed) to the various zones of a system.
To balance circuits used in air conditioning units.

To balance circuits for hot water distribution
To control the amount of water delivered and balance the


Nos. 04301, 04302, 04303 and the technical report
To limit the flow rate of hot water which can be delivered in

systems with instantaneous production or limited capacity
Accessories
120 FILTER Version
tech. broch. 01041
125 FILTER Version
Combination of filter
and ball valve.
Y-filter.
Brass body.
Stainless steel
filter cartridge.
25 bar
Temperature range:
0110C
Filter mesh :
1/2-1 1/4: 0,87 mm
Fitted for connecting pressure ports and drain valve.
Brass body.
Stainless steel filter cartridge.
Temperature range:
Filter mesh :
Code
Code
120141
120151
120161
120171
kv0.01 (l/h)
000
000
000
000
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1.687
1.725
1.665
1.723
Head losses
- The stated values of kv0,01 refer to the body of the device with filter.
tech. broch. 01041
25 bar
-20110C
1/2-1 1/4: 0,87 mm
Fitted for connecting pressure ports and drain valve.
125141
125151
125161
125171
kv0.01 (l/h)
000
000
000
000
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
0,688
0,705
1.410
1.494
Head losses
- The stated values of kv0,01 refer to the body of the device with filter.
130 FLOMET
100
Electronic flow rate and differential

pressure measuring station.
Supplied complete with hoses and
Can be used for checking the
correct operation of Autoflow
devices.
It can also be used for measuring
the flow rate of balancing valves
series 131, 135 and of the flow
metering device 683 series.
Max. differential pressure: 200 kPa.
Fast-plug pressure/temperature test ports for

automatic flow regulators.
Their special construction permits making
rapid and accurate measurements while
ensuring leaktightness.
Can be used for:
- checking the operation of Autoflow device;
- checking the degree of strainers clogging;
- checking the heat output of the emitter
terminals.
Cap cover facing available in:
- Red for upstream pressure
- Green for downstream pressure.
Brass body.
EPDM seals.
Code
130000
130001
tech. broch. 01041
supply 230 V
battery operated
Code
100000
1/4
117
Dual-purpose ball valve control handle:
- valve open/close control possible,
even when insulation is fitted thanks to
extended lever;
- memory stop position by means of
mechanically-locking selector.
Useful if you want to create a certain loss of head
in the user circuit and you want to keep it even
after subsequently closing and reopening the
valve.
100
Pair of fittings with fast-coupling syringe for
connection of pressure ports to measuring
instruments.
Code
100010
Code
Use
117000
117001
120, 121 series 1/2, 3/4

120, 121 series 1, 1 1/4
1/4
538
Drain cock
with hose connection.
Code
538201
538401
1/4
1/2
121 series
Automatic flow regulator and ball valve, Autoflow. Brass body. High-resistance polymer cartridge. Stainless steel spring. EPDM
seals. Chrome-plated brass ball. PTFE ball seat and stem seal. Zinc-plated steel lever. POM pressure port plugs. Medium:
water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Temperature range
0100C. Accuracy 10%. p Range 15200 kPa. Range of available flow rates: 0,122,0 m3/h. Connections 1/2 (3/4, 1
and 1 1/4) F with union x F.
126 series
Automatic flow regulator, Autoflow. Brass body. High-resistance polymer cartridge. Stainless steel spring. EPDM seals. POM
pressure port plugs. Medium: water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure
16 bar. Temperature range 0100C. Accuracy 10%. p Range 15200 kPa. Range of available flow rates: 0,122,0 m3/h.
Connections 1/2 (3/4, 1 and 1 1/4) F x F.
CALEFFI
Thermo-electric actuator with manual

opening and position indicator
6563 series
CALEFFI
cert. n 0003
ISO 9001
01142/06 GB
Function
The thermo-electric actuator, coupled with zone valves and distribution manifolds
for radiant panel systems and radiators, performs the function of making the
medium shut-off automatic with control by the room thermostat or another electrical
switch.
The thermo-electric actuator 6563 series is equipped with a control knob for manual
opening, valve opening/closing indicator and a device for returning to automatic
operation from the manual position when the electricity supply is restored.
Patent application No. MI 2005 A 000742.

CE mark in accordance with directives 89/336 EC and 73/23 EC.
-
Tech. broch.
Tech. broch.
Tech. broch.
Tech. broch.
01072 Zone valve 676 series

01044 Distribution manifolds for radiant panel systems 668 series
01065 Distribution manifolds for radiator systems 663 series
01126 Manifolds in composite specifically designed for radiant panel systems 670 series
Product range
Code 656302 Thermo-electric actuator with manual opening and position indicator
Code 656304 Thermo-electric actuator with manual opening and position indicator
Code 656312 Thermo-electric actuator with manual opening, position indicator and auxiliary microswitch
Code 656314 Thermo-electric actuator with manual opening, position indicator and auxiliary microswitch
- colour
electric supply 230 V (ac)

electric supply 24 V (ac) or 24 V (dc)
electric supply 230 V (ac)
electric supply 24 V (ac) or 24 V (dc)
Dimensions
(codes 656312/14) grey RAL 9002
Normally closed
Electric supply:
Starting current:
Working current:
230 V (ac) - 24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)

1A
230 V (ac) = 13 mA
24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc) = 140 mA
Power consumption:
3W
Auxiliary microswitch contacts rating (codes 656312/14): 0,8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
IP 40
CE
50C
Operating time:
80 cm
Code
6563..
A
M 30 x 1,5
B
76
C
42
Weight (kg)
0,18
Using the thermo-electric actuator
With no power, the device (actuator + valve), is normally closed.

With power, the valve opens thanks to the action of a wax
thermostatic expansion element governed directly by a PTC
resistor.
1. Normal operation of the control in automatic mode.

In automatic mode, the thermo-electric actuatorl opens the valve
when it is supplied with electricity.
The opening is displayed by the central disc raising on the top of
the knob and by the green circular indicator too.
The thermo-electric actuator 6563 series is equipped with an
automatic valve opening position indicator, a knob for opening the
valve manually and a mechanism for returning to automatic mode if
the electricity supply is restored.
The control knob for manual opening and the automatic return from
the manual to the automatic position is particularly useful when
testing or servicing the system if:
ON
- hydraulic tests need to be carried out without having necessarily

to connect and power up the controls.
- the knob is left on the manual position at the end of the tests. In
this case the control automatically goes back onto automatic
operation when the system is electrically put into operation.
2. Using the knob to open the valve manually:
Turn the knob on the top of the control anticlockwise until its limit
stop trips and the arrow symbols and
overlap.
To close the valve manually and restore automatic operation of
the device, turn the knob clockwise onto AUTO.
Note: On the series equipped with an auxiliary microswitch,
in the manual opening position the micro contact is closed.
OFF
3. Automatic return from the manual position to the automatic

one.
When the control in the manual position is powered, an internal
mechanism enables automatic release from this position and a
return to normal operation.
A few seconds after powering up, the knob will automatically
return to the AUTO position and the opening indicator will stay
on the open position.
ON
Valve in by-pass position
Installation
Electrical connections for

codes 656302, 656304.
- The thermo-electric actuator should be tightened by hand without

the use of tools.
1
0
- The thermo-electric actuator should not be dismantled for possible

repair. Such interference could lead to permanent damage.
- The actuator should always be fitted in a horizontal or vertical

position, never upside-down. In chilled water circuits, positions
which allow condensation to get into the actuator are not advisable.
- For the correct functioning of the actuator, the electrical circuit

should be sized on the basis of the starting current.
Electrical connections for codes 656312 and 656314

Wiring diagram with pump disconnection.
The auxiliary microswitch can be used to disconnect the pump
when the services do not need
any heat and the valves are
1
shut.
0
If the pump input exceeds
N
the capacity of the contacts
equal
to
0,8
A,
an
L
intermediate contactor should
be used.
- If it is necessary to control multiple zones with actuators in

parallel using the same thermostat, the possibility of including
an intermediate relay to prevent electrical overload should be
considered.
- In assemblies with zone valves or manifold in manifold boxes, a

space of at least 20 mm between the thermo-electric actuator and
the frame should be left for possible servicing or replacement.
Min. 20 mm
RT
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
BLACK
BLACK
BROWN
BLUE
CALEFFI
BROWN
BLUE
RT
The auxiliary microswitch turns on for an average opening value of

the thermo-electric actuator of 80%.
40
60
20
CALEFFI
80
CALEFFI
Coupling table
656302
656304
656312
656314
676
663
677
Recommendations for use

When thermo-electric actuators are to be installed on devices wich
automatically shut off the heating elements, it is always advisable to
use a differential by-pass to control over-pressure of the system
during the partial or total closure of the circuits:
678
666-668
For pre-assembled manifolds 668 series a differential by-pass

with a fixed calibration setting of 2500 mm w.g. is available,
code 668000; whereas for pre-assembled manifolds 663 series a
differential by-pass with a fixed calibration setting of 2000 mm w. g.
is available, code 663000.
670
CALEFFI
656302, 656304,
656312, 656314 +
code 668000
10
8
6
4
2
0
Table of hydraulic characteristics of control 6563 + valve body

Series
DN
kv0,01
(l/h)
pmax *
Zone valve (straight/by-pass)
370
1/21 370/100
370/100
12
12
12
Manifold for radiant panel

systems and radiators
663
666
668
670
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/4
1
25
25
25
25
* Maximum pressure differential assured by the servo control for regular operation
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
(m w.g.)
676
677
678
287
287
287
240
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
For centralised installations or installations with

rising pipes, a differential by-pass valve is available
with an adjustable setting of 1 to 6 m w.g., 519 series.
mH2O
1
2
3
4
5
6
Applications
The thermo-electric actuators with manual opening and
position indicator can be installed in the various types of
systems listed below:
RT
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
In systems with fan coils, if you want to fit them with valves to
shut off the medium automatically.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
In zone systems, requiring reduced overall dimensions and a

limited coefficient of the flow rate to the automatic regulating valve.
40
60
20
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
RT
CALEFFI
Mod.
357
In plumbing systems to adjust the temperature in water storage

heaters.
In radiant panel systems and radiators, if you want to:
- adjust the temperature in the single ambients heated by the
circuits branching out from the manifold.
CALEFFI
- shut off each circuit directly from the manifold, with less work and
expense to make the electrical connections.
CALEFFI
RT
C
50
40
30
20
10
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
BAGNO
CUCINA
PRANZO
C
50
ENTRATA
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
40
30
20
10
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
1
2
CUCINA
1
2
ENTRATA
1
2
PRANZO
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
Codes 656302/04
Thermo-electric actuator with manual opening and position indicator. Normally closed. Self-extinguishing polycarbonate
protective shell. RAL 9010 white colour. Supply voltage: 230 V (ac); 24 V (ac); 24 V (dc). Starting current: 1 A. Working current:
13 mA (230 V (ac)), 140 mA (24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)). Power consumption: 3 W. Protection class: IP 40. Made with double insulation.
Maximum ambient temperature: 50C. Operating time opening/closing from 120 to 180 s. Length of supply cable: 80 cm.
Codes 656312/14
Thermo-electric actuator with manual opening and position indicator. Normally closed with auxiliary microswitch.
Self-extinguishing polycarbonate protective shell. RAL 9002 grey colour. Supply voltage: 230 V (ac); 24 V (ac); 24 V (dc). Starting
current: 1 A. Working current: 13 mA (230 V (ac)), 140 mA (24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)). Power consumption 3 W. Auxiliary microswitch
contacts rating 0,8 A (230 V). Protection class: IP 40. Made with double insulation. Maximum ambient temperature: 50C.
Operating time opening/closing from 120 to 180 s. Length of supply cable: 80 cm.
CALEFFI
Differential temperature regulators

and thermostats
RE
IS
257 series
TERE
CALEFFI

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01143/07 GB
Function
The differential regulator acquires the temperature signals from the
probes installed at the panel outlet and in the boiler, calculates the
difference between the two temperatures and, by comparison with
the set value, commands the primary solar circuit circulation pump.
The thermostat controls the storage temperature and activates
thermal integration from alternative sources to solar energy (water
heaters, electricity, etc.). In addition, it can control the diverter
valves in solar panels with natural circulation in order to utilize the
albeit minimal available energy.
Product range
Code 257020
Differential temperature regulator for solar heating systems, with relay output. Complete with box, contact probe and
immersion probe with pocket.
Code 257030
Thermostat for solar heating systems, with relay output. For thermal integration control and diverter valves. Complete with box
and contact probe.
Code 257040
Regulator and thermostat for solar heating systems, with relay output. Complete with box, 1 contact probe and 2 immersion
probes with pocket.
Code 257010
Differential temperature regulator for solar heating systems with relay output. Complete with contact probe and immersion
probe with pocket.
Boxes
Dimensions:
Differential temperature regulator

Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Contacts rating on switch-over:
T adjustment range:
Hysteresis:
Insulation test:
Dimensions:
230 V 6% - 50 Hz
1,45 VA
6 A (230 V)
220 K
2 K ( 1 K)
50C
4 kV
3 DIN
Thermostat
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Contacts rating on switch-over:
Adjustable temperature range:
Hysteresis:
Alarm output contact:
Insulation test:
Dimensions:
230 V 6% - 50 Hz
1,45 VA
6 (2) A (230 V)
2090C
1K
50C
24 V / 20 mA
4 kV
3 DIN
- Code 257001:
- Code 257003:
Protection class:
Temperature probes
NTC type
Working range:
Two-wire cable
Length of cable:
4 DIN
6 DIN
IP 65
-20100C
2 m (can be extended to 200 m
in case of a cable with 0,5 mm2 cross-section)
Probe resistance values table

C
-20
-18
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
14616
13211
11958
10839
9838
8941
8132
7405
6752
6164
C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
C
5634 20
5155 22
4721 24
4329 26
3974 28
3652 30
3360 32
3094 34
2852 36
2632 38
2431
2247
2079
1925
1785
1657
1539
1430
1331
1239
C
40
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
1154
1004
938
876
819
767
718
673
631
592
C
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
556
522
491
462
434
409
386
364
343
324
C
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
100
306
290
274
260
246
233
221
210
199
189
A
Code
A
257020 122
B
47
D
C
D Weight (Kg)
200 112
1,2
C
B
C
B
C
B
Dimensions
A
Code
A
257030 122
B
47
D
C
D Weight(Kg)
200 112
1,4
A
Code
A
257040 160
B
47
D
D Weight(Kg)
C
200 112
1,83
Operation
-00
CALEFFI
50
40
20
60
70
30
80
C
90
Sonda
ON
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
T50
6(2)A
4
5
1
0
80
100
20
0
80
60
40
60
120
40
140
20
160
100
120
140
160
2
5
4
3
2
1
0
-00
Differential
temperature
regulator
CALEFFI
Probe
TF
1
TF
2
Differential temperature regulator

The differential temperature regulator, using the two probes,
measures the difference in temperature between probe (1) in the solar
panel and probe (2) in the boiler. The differential temperature value
can be read on the two digit display.
If the T detected value exceeds the set value, the output contact is
activated and may, for example, trigger the pump in the solar system
circulation unit.
It is recommended to set the T value between 5C and 8C, since
this value optimises operation while taking into account the heat loss
occurring within the solar system pipes. It also allow to activate the
circulator only when the available thermal energy is higher than the
consumed electricity.
Thermostat
50
SH
60
40
70
30
80
20
N L
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
SH
FROM / TO
BOILER
ON
Diff. Temp.
N L
90
TF
Thermostat
The thermostat, using the probe, measures the temperature of the
natural or forced circulation solar storage, according to the type of
application; should it be below the set value, the thermostat will
activate a contact powering the device connected to it. On solar
regulator systems, a value equal to or greater than 55C is set. It is
recommended to carry out periodic heat treatment to the hot water
storage to prevent any possible growth of Legionella.
1) Display indicating differential temperature or temperatures of

single probes
2) Selector for setting the differential temperature trigger value
3) Button to select the display of operating parameter
4) Connection to temperature probes
5) Electric supply
6) Actuating relay output
7) Selector for setting thermostat actuation temperature
8) Thermostat operation indicator LED
9) Probe fault alarm output
Assembly
The regulator and the thermostat are set up for assembly on a DIN bar,
in a box or in a wiring cabinet.
Components and accessories
257
257

Complete with contact probe and
immersion probe with 1/4 pocket.
Characteristics as for code 257020.
Box complete with DIN bar,

for 257 series regulator or thermostat.
Code
257001
Code
257010
257
257
Double box complete with DIN bar,

for 257 series regulator and thermostat.

Code
Code
257003
257000
150
257
Contact probe for 257 series regulator or

thermostat and for 1520 series regulator
(flow or return)
Length of cable: 2 m.
Thermostat for solar heating systems, with

relay output. For thermal integration control
and diverter valves.
Code
150009
Code
257002
150
150
Immersion probe for series 257 regulator or

thermostat and for series 1520 regulator.
Length of cable: 2 m.
Pocket for immersion probe code 150006.

Code
150029
1/4 M
150006
Example of connection between thermostat and natural circulation solar heating system.
The device controls the diverter valve according to the temperature detected in the solar water storage. If the temperature is not sufficient, the
domestic water is passed through the hot water storage controlled by the boiler.
Shut-off valve
Tundish
Check valve
T/P safety relief valve
2
HOT
70
80
COLD
MAX 7
60
MIN
20
CALEFFI
50
40
30
90
Temperature gauge
Expansion vessel
T
Automatic diverter valve

Diverter on the
secondary circuit
Pump
Safety relief valve
Normally
closed valve
Example of combined connection of thermostat and regulator to a forced circulation solar heating system.
The regulator controls the circulation unit pump according to the temperature detected on the solar panel and in the lower part of the water
storage. If the temperature detected in the upper part of the storage is insufficient, the thermostat integrates it by starting the pump.
Shut-off valve
Pump
Air vent
Expansion vessel
Safety relief valve
4
5
1
0
80
60
60
100
120
40
120
20
140
20
140
80
100
40
160
160
5
4
3
2
1
0
Code 257020
Differential temperature regulator for solar heating systems, complete with box, contact probe and immersion probe
with pocket. Electrical supply 230 V 6% - 50 Hz. Nominal power consumption 1,45 VA. Contact rating 6 A (230 V).
T adjustment range 220 K. Hysteresis 2 K ( 1 K). Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Insulation test 4 kV.
Dimensions 3 DIN. Box: Dimensions 4 DIN. Dimensions (w x h x d) 122 x 200 x 112 mm. Protection class IP 65.
Code 257030
Thermostat for solar heating systems. Complete with box and contact probe. Electrical supply 230 V 6% - 50 Hz.
Nominal power consumption 1,45 VA. Contacts rating on switch-over 6 (2) A (230 V). Adjustable temperature range
2090C. Hysteresis 1 K. Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Alarm output contact 24 V, 20 mA. Insulation test 4 kV.
Dimensions 3 DIN. Box: dimensions 4 DIN. Dimensions (w x h x d) 122 x 200 x 112 mm. Protection class IP 65.
Code 257040
Regulator and thermostat for solar heating systems. Complete with box, 1 contact probe and 2 immersion probes with
pocket. Regulator: electrical supply 230 V 6% - 50 Hz. Nominal power consumption 1,45 VA. Contacts rating on switch-over
6 A (230 V). T adjustment range 220 K. Hysteresis 2 K ( 1 K). Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Insulation test 4 kV.
Dimensions 3 DIN. Thermostat: electrical supply 230 V 6% - 50 Hz. Nominal power consumption 1,45 VA. Contacts
rating on switch-over 6 (2) A (230 V). Adjustable temperature range 2090C. Hysteresis 1 K. Maximum ambient
temperature 50C. Alarm output contact 24 V / 20 mA. Insulation test 4 kV. Dimensions 3 DIN. Box: dimensions 6 DIN.
Dimensions (w x h x d) 160 x 200 x 112 mm. Protection class IP 65.
CALEFFI
Pre-assembled distribution manifolds

for radiant panel systems
RE
IS
668...S1 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI
Cert. n 0003
01144/07 GB
Function
Distribution manifolds for radiant panel systems are used to
optimally distribute the heating fluid in floor heating system circuits
and ultimately improve the control of heat emission from the panels.
They are offered in a pre-assembled version comprehensive of:
flow meters to regulate and check the flow rate on the flow
manifold; manual shut-off valves designed for thermo-electric
actuator on the return manifold; end fittings comprehensive of
automatic air vent and multi-position valves to fill/drain the system;
differential by-pass kit to keep the head balanced as the flow rate
varies; pair of ball shut-off valves and brackets for box or wall
mounting.
Reference Documentation
- Tech. Brochure 01041 Automatic flow regulator with stainless
steel cartridge 120 - 125 - 103 series
- Tech. Brochure 01042 Thermo-electric actuator 6561 series
- Tech. Brochure 01142 Thermo-electric actuator with manual
opening and position indicator 6563 series
- Tech. Brochure 01054 Automatic air vent 5020 series
Product range
6686...S1 series Pre-assembled distribution manifold for radiant panel systems
6687...S1 series Pre-assembled distribution manifold for radiant panel systems
Materials
Flow manifold
Body:
Flow rate regulating valve
Headwork:
Obturator:
Flow meter body:
Spring:
Hydraulic seals:
Regulating unit cover:
Return manifold
Body:
Shut-off valve
Headwork:
Obturator stem:
Obturator:
Springs:
Seals:
Control knob:
Ball shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:
Control knob:

PSU
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
PA66GF
stainless steel
EPDM
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS

aluminium EN AB 46100
End fitting
Body:
Automatic air vent
Obturator stem:
Spring:
Seals:
Float:
Multi-position valve
Ball:
Control lever:
Hose connection:
Size 1
Size 1 1/4

stainless steel
EPDM
PP
PA66GF
Performance
Medium:
End fitting max. discharge pressure:
Temperature range:
Flow meter scale:
Accuracy:
Main connections:
Centre distance:
Outlets:
Centre distance:

30%
10 bar
2,5 bar
080C
15 l/min
15%
1, 1 1/4 F
195 mm
3/4 M 18
50 mm
1
2
1
2
1 o 1 1/4
CALEFFI
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFFI
59
1 o 1 1/4
195
108
Dimensions
CALEFFI
SOGGIORNO
CALEFF
25
3/4
50
L TOTAL
Code (1)
Code (1 1/4)
N outlets
L TOTAL
Weight (kg)
27
6686C5S1 6686D5S1 6686E5S1 6686F5S1 6686G5S1 6686H5S1

6687C5S1 6687D5S1 6687E5S1 6687F5S1 6687G5S1 6687H5S1
3
4
5
6
7
8
380
430
480
530
580
630
7,2
7,8
8,3
9,4
10,1
10,6
6686I5S1
6687I5S1
9
700
11,4
6686L5S1 6686M5S1 6686N5S1 6686O5S1

6687L5S1 6687M5S1 6687N5S1 6687O5S1
10
11
12
13
750
800
850
900
12,2
13,0
13,7
14,5
1 Flow manifold complete with flow meters and built-in flow rate
regulating valves
1
2
1
2
1
2
2 Return manifold with built-in shut-off valves suitable for thermo-electric

actuator
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
3 Flow end fitting with two-position ball valve, automatic air vent and
fill/drain hose connection
CALEFFI
HOBBY
CAMERA
WC
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
4 Return end fitting with three-position ball valve, by-pass connection

and fill/drain hose connection
5 Off-centre by-pass kit with fixed setting comprehensive of manifold
connecting pipe
6 Ball shut-off valves
7 Brackets for box or wall mounting
CALEFFI
CAMERA
HOBBY
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
Flow manifold
The flow manifold is equipped with flow meters and built-in flow rate
balancing valves.
Acting on the regulating valve with the special cone-shaped
obturator (1), the flow rate to the single circuits can be accurately
adjusted to the required value, just by reading the value on the
single flow meter with a scale of 15 l/min (2). This simplifies and
speeds up the operation of circuit calibration, with no need for
reference graphs. After adjustment, the valve can be locked open
by means of its tamper-proof cover (3), which also acts as a knob
for adjusting the flow rate.
This valve makes it possible to seal off the single circuit, should this
be necessary.
ALEFFI
Return manifold
The return manifold is equipped with manual shut-off valves (1), in
order to cut off the flow to the individual circuits.
They can also be fitted with a thermo-electric actuator (2) that,
when used with a room thermostat, maintains the ambient
temperature at the set values despite any thermal load variation.
The obturator stem (3) is made of ground stainless steel in order to
minimize friction and prevent dangerous encrustation.
The headwork (4) has a double EPDM O-Ring seal (5)-(6) on the
sliding stem.
The EPDM obturator (7) is shaped to optimize the hydraulic
characteristics of the valve, preventing any sticking in the sealing
seat after the circuit has been shut off. It minimizes the noise
caused by the medium flow, also during the progressive action of
opening or closing when operating with thermo-electric actuator.
1
5
ALEFFI
Replaceable components
The headwork of the regulating valve with flow meter can be removed
and replaced with spare parts.
Modular manifolds
The manifolds are modular
thanks to the threaded
connections with an O-ring seal.
The special machining of the
thread on these connections
enables perfect alignment
between the two coupled parts
once they are fully screwed in.
End fitting
Automatic air vent
The automatic air vent performs
the function of automatically
expelling the air accumulating in
the circuits of the air-conditioning
system. It is equipped with a
hygroscopic safety plug (1)
that prevents water getting out
to protect the installation.
Room identification
On the manifold body, at the
outlet of the single panel circuit,
there is a special seat to place
an adhesive label identifying the
corresponding room.
Manifold reversibility
The manifolds are reversible, so they can be positioned with the
entry from the right or left.
Thermometers for circuit piping

As an accessory, there is a special spirit
thermometer with a scale of 550C,
equipped with a push-fit plastic body,
for the single circuit piping, with an
outside diameter between 15 to 18 mm.
This thermometer, installed on the
return pipework, measures the actual
temperature of the medium returning
from the circuit making it possible to
check the proper heat exchange of
each single panel.
External shape of the manifolds and brackets

The casting process makes it possible to shape the manifold outer
geometry as needed.
In this way, recesses (1) have been made in correspondence with
the pipe passage coming down from the upper manifold, to allow it
to be partially housed, for the benefit of depth. This particular outer
shaping does not affect the head loss values, since the cross-sections
of the recesses (a) are the same as in correspondence with the
zones where the outlets (b)+(c) branch out and where the controls
(setting lockshield and shut-off valves) obstruct the medium flow.
The partial pipe housing in the manifold shaping is moreover

helped by the brackets, mounted with a precise slope in order to
obtain a 25 mm shift between the upper and lower manifolds.
As shown in the figure, at the time of installation, this offset makes
a perfect automatic match between the pipe position and the
manifold shape.
1
2
1
2
CALEFFI
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFFI
b
c
CALEFF
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
25 mm
End fittings with multi-position valves

The ball valves in the end fittings can be positioned to perform different functions.
Fill/drain
Closing
Filling the circuits.
Filling via the flow
manifold and
draining via the
return manifold:
both valves are in
the open position.
Operation with by-pass

Closing the
connection to the
filling and draining
valves. Both valves
are in the closed
position.
The automatic air
vent on the flow
manifold is always
connected and
cannot be
shut-off.
Normal operation.
The valve of the return
manifold is in the
position of connection
with the by-pass and
the valve of the flow
manifold is in the open
position.
In order to determine the hydraulic characteristics of the circuit, it is necessary to calculate the total loss of head suffered by the flow of fluid as
it passes through the devices forming the manifold assembly and the radiant panel circuits.
PBall v.
PF Man.
1
2
1
2
1
2
PBV
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
GTot.
CALEFFI
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFFI
PLoop
PTot.
PSV
CALEFF
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
GLoop
PR Man.
PBall v.
PBV
PTot.
PLoop
PTot.
PSV
PBV

= Localized loss at loop balancing valve
(loop flow rate)
PLoop = Loop loss (Loop flow rate)
PBall V.
GTot.
PF Man.
GLoop
PR Man.
PBall .V.
GTot.
PSV
= Localized loss at panel circuit shut-off

valve (loop flow rate)
PF Man. = Distributed loss of the flow manifold

(total flow rate)
PR Man. = Distributed loss of the return manifold

(total flow rate)
PBall V. = Ball valve loss
(total flow rate)
PTot. = PBV + PLoop + PSV + PF Man. + PR Man. + PBall V. x 2
(1.1)
0,45
0,4
0,35
30
0,3
25
0,25
0,5
0,2
450
0,1
1,2
50
20
90
80
70
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
45
40
35
0,45
0,4
0,35
30
0,3
25
0,25
18
16
14
0,18
0,16
0,14
12
0,12
0,5
0,2
10
500
400
350
300
250
180
200
160
140
120
90
100
80
50
25
20
70
0,12
60
12
10
45
0,18
0,16
0,14
40
18
16
14
120
100
G (l/h)
G (l/h)
Flow-rate regulating valve fully open (BV)

Panel circuit shut-off valve (SV)
Kv
1,85
2,50
Kv0,01
185
250

0,1
4000
0,6
45
40
35
35
20
60
30
50
0,9
0,8
0,7
3500
1,2
90
80
70
1,8
1,6
1,4
3000
120
100
2,5
180
160
140
2500
1,8
1,6
1,4
250
1800
180
160
140
300
200
2000
4,5
4
3,5
1600
2,5
450
400
350
1400
250
600
500
1200
300
200
900
4,5
4
3,5
9
8
7
1000
450
400
350
10
900
800
700
800
600
500
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
1000
700
9
8
7
600
10
900
800
700
500
p (kPa)
p (mm w.g.)
1000

Ball valve
Kv
21,0*
15,0*
47,5
Kv0,01
2100*
1500*
4750
* Average value
Example of calculation of total head loss

Supposing we need to calculate the head loss of a manifold with three circuits (loops) with the following characteristics:
The flow rate and head loss of the three loops are as follows:
Circuit 1
P1= 10 kPa
G1= 120 l/h
Circuit 2
P2= 20 kPa
G2= 250 l/h
Circuit 3
P3= 7 kPa
G3= 80 l/h
(1.2)
Each segment of the formula (1.1) is calculated using the following relationship:
P=G2/Kv0,012
G=flow rate in l/h

Kv0,01 = flow rate in l/h through the device, corresponding to a head loss of 1 kPa
It should be highlighted that the PTot. must be calculated taking into account the circuit with the greatest head losses, distributed along the
entire piping loop of the panel.
In our example, the relevant circuit is Nr. 2.
It follows that:
PBV
PLoop
PSV
PF Man.
PR Man.
PBall V.
=
=
=
=
=
=
2502/1852 = 1,82 kPa

20 kPa
2502/2502 = 1 kPa
4502/21002 = 0,04 kPa
4502/21002 = 0,04 kPa
4502/47502 = 0,01 kPa
} Values obtained by neglecting the changes due to the flow rate dispersed to each branch circuit
Using formula (1.1), adding up all the calculated terms, we obtain:
PTot.= 1,82 + 20 + 1 + 0,04 + 0,04 + 0,01 x 2 = 22,82 kPa
Note:
We can ignore the three terms for the head losses associated with the ball valves and manifolds because of their low values. In general, the total
head loss is fairly close to the branched circuit of the panel head loss.
Using the balancing valves with flow meter

The balancing valves in the flow manifold make it possible to adjust each individual circuit in the panels to obtain the design flow rates in each loop.
Considering the following data:

- medium flow rate across each circuit
- head loss generated in each circuit by this flow rate:
PCircuit = PLoop + PSV (PShut-off valve)
- available head on the panel circuit or predefined head:
HPredefined PCircuit + = PBV + PLoop + PSV
disadvantaged
BV
PTot.
Referring to the diagram alongside, for the loop flow rate the balancing
valve must provide an additional head loss equal to the difference PBV
(PBalancing valve).
PBV
PCircuit HPredefined PCircuit
+ disadvantaged
SV
Flow rate adjustment and reading

Raise the block cover with the aid of a screwdriver and turn it over onto the flow meter. Adjust the flow rate of the single panels by turning the
flow meter body acting on the built-in balancing valve.
The flow rate must be read off the graduated scale, expressed in l/min, printed on the flow meter.
After making all the adjustments, reposition and lock all the knobs in their seat to prevent tampering.
668S1 series
Pre-assembled distribution manifold for radiant panel systems with 3 (from 3 to 13) outlets. Brass body. EPDM hydraulic seals.
Main connections 1 (and 1 1/4) threaded F, centre distance 195 mm. Outlet connections 3/4 M 18, outlet centre
distance 50 mm. Medium: water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum working pressure
10 bar. Temperature range 080C. Maximum automatic air vent discharge pressure 2,5 bar.
Consisting of:
- Flow manifold with flow rate balancig valves and flow meter with graduated scale 15 l/min. Accuracy 15%.
- Return manifold, with shut-off valves suitable for thermo-electric actuator.
- Pair of end fittings comprehensive of automatic air vent with hygroscopic plug, fill/drain hose connection, multi-position
ball valves for coupling with the off-centre by-pass kit with fixed setting supplied in the package.
- Off-centre by-pass kit with fixed setting. Threaded connections 1 M x 3/4 M. Brass body and nuts. Copper gauged pipe.
PA obturator, stainless steel spring, EPDM seals, asbestos-free fibre gaskets. Differential pressure fixed setting 25 kPa.
- Adhesive labels indicating the rooms.
- Pair of ball shut-off valves, brass body. Union seals made of EPDM.
- Pair of fixing brackets.

17
10
13
14
12
1
2
1
2
CAMERA
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
11
16
1
2
1
2
4
L/MIN
CALEFFI
15
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
HOBBY
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
CAMERA
HOBBY
4
L/MIN
CAMERA
1
2
CALEFFI
WC
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
1. Flow manifold with flow meters and flow rate balancing valves,
667...S1 series
2. Return manifold with built-in shut-off valves suitable for thermo-electric
actuator, 666...S1 series
3. Flow end fitting with two-position ball valve, automatic air vent and
fill/drain hose connection, code 599674
4. Return end fitting with three-position ball valve, by-pass connection
and fill/drain hose connection, code 599675
5. Off-centre by-pass kit with fixed setting comprehensive of manifold
connecting pipe, code 668000S1
6. Automatic air vent, code 502043
7. Ball shut-off valve, 391...S1 series
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Brackets for mounting in a box or on a wall, code 658100

Strainer, 120 series
Autoflow, 120 series
Push-fit temperature gauge for panel piping, code 675900
Fitting for plastic or multilayer panel pipe, 680 series
Reduction, 3642..S1 series
Blind cap, code 386500
Thermo-electric actuator, 6561 series
Thermo-electric actuator with manual opening and position indicator,
6563 series
17. Box, 659 and 661 series
Off-centre by-pass kit with fixed setting, code 668000S1

Function
In radiant panel systems, the medium distribution circuits can be totally or partially shut off by closing the thermo-electric
valves in the manifolds. After reducing the flow rate, the differential pressure in the circuit may increase up to values able to
generate problems of noise, high medium speed, mechanical erosion and hydraulic unbalancing of the system itself.
The differential by-pass kit for manifolds performs the function of keeping the flow and return pressure of the manifold circuit
balanced when the flow rate varies.
This valve is suitable for quick coupling with the 668...S1 series manifolds, reducing the overall dimensions to a minimum.
Product range
Code 668000S1 Off-centre by-pass kit with fixed setting
Sizes 1 x 3/4
Dimensions
Materials
A
copper
PA
stainless steel
EPDM
asbestos free fibre
143
Nuts:
Gauged pipe 18 with folder:
Check valve obturator:
Spring:
Seals:
Gaskets:
Performance
Medium:
Temperature range:
Differential pressure fixed setting:
Connections:

30%
10 bar
0100C
25 kPa (2500 mm w.g.)
1 x 3/4 F with captive nut
B
C
Code
668000S1
A
3/4"
B
1"
C
25
Weight (kg)
0,160
Operating principle
The by-pass valve contains a non-return obturator integral with a counter spring.
When the fixed setting differential pressure value is reached, the valve obturator opens gradually.
In this way the flow is recirculated and, being proportional to the closure of the electrothermal valves, keeps the differential pressure constant
in the manifold circuit.
The off-centre by-pass kit has a fixed

setting that cannot be changed since it
has no accessible adjustment.
The small, compact size and offset
connections make this device
particularly easy to mount
after installing thermo-electric
valves on the manifold. In
addition, its installation does not
require any wider or deeper
zone boxes than the required
ones for normal manifolds.
By-pass differential pressure:
25 kPa (2500 mm w.g.)
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
10
20
0,2
2
2000
40
0,5
45
4000
0,1
4500
Off-centre by-pass kit installation on manifolds 668S1 series

To fit the differential by-pass on the manifolds, 668S1 series, it is necessary to carry out the following operations:
1) Close the multi-position valves (A and B) of both end fittings (flow and return).
2) Remove the hose attachment (C) from the multi-position valve of the upper manifold.
3) Remove the plastic plug (D) from the end fitting of the lower manifold.
4) Install the off-centre by-pass kit (E) code 668000S1 and move the multi-position valve levers back into by-pass operation position as shown
in figure 2.
2
1
2
1
2
CALEFFI
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
HOBBY
CAMERA
1
2
4
L/MIN
A
C
CALEFFI
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
SOGGIORNO
WC
1
2
A
O
CALEFFI
L/MIN
L/MIN
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
D
B
CALEFF
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
B
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
Code 668000S1
Off-centre by-pass kit with fixed setting. Threaded female connections 1 x 3/4 with captive nut. Brass nuts. Copper gauged
pipe. PA check valve obturator, stainless steel spring, EPDM seals, asbestos-free fibre gaskets. Medium: water and glycol
solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Temperature range 0100C. Differential pressure fixed setting 25 kPa.
Single and multi-layer plastic pipe fitting with self-adjusting diameter 680 series
Function
The self-adjusting fitting for single and multi-layer plastic pipes is a mechanical device that allows a safe and easy
connection of the radiant panel system pipes to the related manifolds.
Due to the specific requirements of this type of system, it has been designed to meet the need of having a versatile
connector, being adjustable for different pipe diameters.
Patented
Product range
6805 series . . Self-adjusting fitting for single and multi-layer plastic pipes
Materials
1) Adapter
2) Clenching ring
3) Nut
Nut:
Adapter:
Seals:
Electric insulating ring:
Twin cone:

EPDM
EPDM
PA 66 G50
Performance
Medium:

30%

10 bar
Temperature range:
580C (PE-X)
575C (Multi layer marked 95C).
Size 3/4
Code
680502
680503
680500
680501
680506
680515
680517
680524
680526
680535
680537
680544
680546
680555
680564
680505
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
inside
outside
7,518,0
8,519,
9, 9,5
9,510
9,510
10,511,
10,511,0
11,512,0
11,512,0
12,513,0
12,513,0
13,514,0
13,514,0
14,515,0
15,516,0
1716,0
1214
1214
1416
1214
1416
1416
1618
1416
1618
1618
1820
1618
1820
1820
1820
22,50
Pipe-fitting coupling flexibility
This fitting has been specifically designed in order to adjust to several pipe diameters.
The great variety of plastic pipes, single and multi-layer, on the market and the breadth of permissible
tolerances have made it necessary to design a specific fitting. Keeping the nominal dimensions of the
fittings currently on the market, the new construction solution makes it possible to use the same fitting for
pipes with differences on their outside diameter up to 2 mm and on their inside diameter up to 0,5 mm.
4
5
Pull-out resistance
This fitting opposes high resistance to pipe pull-out. Its special tightening system makes it suitable for all
applications, ensuring a perfect hydraulic seal.
Low head losses

The internal profile of the adapter (4) is shaped to obtain a Venturi effect as the medium flows. It permits
reducing the head losses about 20% less than the loss corrisponding to the passages of the same diameter.
Dielectric seal ring

The fitting is equipped with a rubber insulating element (5) to prevent contact between the aluminium in the multi layer pipe and the brass of
the fitting. This prevents any galvanic corrosion generated by two different metals.
Double O-Ring seal
On the adapter there are two O-Ring seals (6) (7) made of EPDM in order to avoid potential leaks even at high working pressures.
680 series
Self-adjusting diameter fitting for single and multi layer plastic pipes with internal profile having a Venturi effect to limit
head losses. Size 3/4 F. Brass cap and adapter, EPDM seals, EPDM dielectric ring, PA clenching ring. Medium: water and
glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Temperature range 580C (PE-X);
575C (Multi layer marked 95C).
Standard thermo-electric actuators
6561
broch. 01042
Thermo-electric actuator for manifolds.

Normally closed.
Code
656102
656104
230
224
Protective shell:
Colour:
(code 656102/04) white RAL 9010
(code 656112/14) grey RAL 9002
Performance
Normally closed
Electric supply:
Starting current:
Working current:
broch. 01042

Normally closed.
656112
656114
Materials
Voltage (V)
6561
Code
Voltage (V)
230
224
230 V (ac) - 24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)

1A
230 V (ac) = 13 mA
24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc) = 140 mA
3W
Power consumption:
Auxiliary microswitch contacts rating
(code 656112/114):
0,8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
CE
50C
Operating time:
opening and closing from 120 s to 180 s.
80 cm.
Thermo-electric actuators with manual opening and position indicator
6563
broch. 01142

Normally closed.
Code
656302
656304
230
224
Protective shell:
Colour:
Normally closed
Electric supply:
Starting current:
Working current:
broch. 01142
Voltage (V)
230
224
(code 656302/04) white RAL 9010
(code 656312/14) grey RAL 9002
Performance

Normally closed.
656312
656314
Materials
Voltage (V)
6563
Code
230 V (ac) - 24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)

1A
230 V (ac) = 13 mA
24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc) = 140 mA
3W
Power consumption:
Auxiliary microswitch contacts rating
(code 656312/14):
0,8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
IP 40
CE
50C
Operating time:
80 cm
The 6563 series thermo-electric actuator is equipped with a control knob for manual opening, valve opening/closing indicator and a device
for returning to automatic operation from the manual position when the electricity supply is restored.
automatic return from the manual to the
automatic position is particularly useful when
testing or servicing the system if:
having necessarily to connect and power up
the controls.
- the knob is left on the manual position at the end
of the tests. In this case the control
automatically goes back onto the automatic
operation when the system is electrically put
into operation.
Normal valve operation in

automatic mode
Using the knob to open the

valve manually
Automatic return from the

manual position to the
automatic one
Automatic flow rate regulators
broch. 01041
Combined ball valve and automatic flow regulator unit.

Factory set to automatically maintain the flow between 5% of the established value.
valve body from the pipe.
Suitable for use with pressure test ports to check operation.
Can be connected to a drain pipe. The ball valve has a control stem with anti-slip device and
vinyl-covered reversible closure handle. Male union connections.
With thermometer scale 080C, 40 mm
Range p: 14220 kPa
Accuracy: 5%
Code
120961
120961
120961
120961
120961
120961
120961
Flow rate m3/h
1L2
1L4
1L6
1L8
2L0
2L2
2L5
They
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1 F x 1 1/4 M
1,20
1,40
1,60
1,80
2,00
2,25
2,50
Code
120971
120971
120971
120971
120971
120971
120971
Flow rate m3/h
1L2
1L4
1L6
1L8
2L0
2L2
2L5
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
1,20
1,40
1,60
1,80
2,00
2,25
2,50
are available on request with other flow rates
120 STRAINER Version
broch. 01041
Combination Y strainer and ball valve.

valve body from the pipe. Can be used with pressure test ports to check amount of clogging
of strainer. Can be connected to a drain pipe to clean the strainer without removing it from the
body. The ball valve has a control rod with anti-slip device and vinyl-covered reversible
closure lever. Male pipe union connections.
With thermometer scale 080C, 40 mm
Maximum working temperature: 110C
Filter mesh : 0,87 mm
Code
120961 000
Code
1 F x 1 1/4 M
120971 000
1 1/4 F x 1 1/4 M
Manifolds
666...S1
Return manifold, with built-in shut-off

valves suitable for thermo-electric
actuator.
Materials
Code
666735S1
666745S1
666755S1
666765S1
666775S1
666785S1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
F
F
F
F
F
F
x
x
x
x
x
x
3
4
5
6
7
8
Return manifold
Body:
Outlets
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
M
M
M
M
M
M
Shut-off valve
Headwork:
Obturator stem:
Obturator:
Springs:
Seals:
Control knob:
PA66GF
stainless steel
EPDM
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
Flow manifold
Body:

Headwork:
Obturator:
Flow meter body:
PSU
Spring:
stainless steel
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
Regulating unit cover:
ABS
667...S1
Flow manifold, with flow meters and
built-in flow rate regulating valves.
Performance
Code
667735S1
667745S1
667755S1
667765S1
667775S1
667785S1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
F
F
F
F
F
F
x
x
x
x
x
x
3
4
5
6
7
8
Outlets
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
M
M
M
M
M
M
Medium:
30%
10 bar
Temperature range:
080C
Flow meter scale:
15 l/min
Accuracy:
15%
Main connections:
1 1/4 F
Outlets:
3/4 M 18
Centre distance:
50 mm
Shut-off valves
391...S1
391...S1

Female-male connections with union with O-Ring
seal. With thermometer scale 080C, 40 mm.

Female-male connections with union with O-Ring
seal. With thermometer connection.
Code
391167S1
391177S1
Connections
Code
Connections
391067S1
391077S1
1 x 1 1/4
1 1/4 x 1 1/4
1 x 1 1/4
1 1/4 x 1 1/4
End fittings
5996
5996
Flow end fitting complete with double

radial end fitting with two-position ball
valve, automatic air vent and fill/drain
hose connection.
Return end fitting complete with double

radial end fitting with three-position
ball valve, by-pass connection with plug
and fill/drain hose connection.
Code
Code
599674
1 1/4
599675
1 1/4
Automatic air vent
Brackets
5020
658
Automatc air vent with hygroscopic plug.

In hot stamped brass.
For manifolds end fittings 668...S1 series.
Pair of brackets for use with boxes,

659 series or directly on the wall.
With screws and plugs.
Code
Code
502043
1/2 M
658100
Reduction
Plug disc
386
3642..S1
Screw plug with nut,

for manifold outlets.
Reduction fitting.
Code
Code
386500
364276S1
3/4
1 F x 1 1/4 M
System test pump
Temperature gauge
675
695
Push-fit thermometer for panel piping.

Code 675900.
System test pump code

695000. Comprehensive
of pressure gauge and
hose for connecting to
the system.
Material
Materials
Body:
Thermometer fluid:
Range of use outside diam. (e) pipes:
Conducting paste supplied in package
PA6GF
alcohol
550C
60C
from 15 to 18 mm
Body:
Piston:
Control lever:
Water content:
Hose connection:
Length of hose:
Code
Code
675900
695000
bronze
brass
galvanized steel
50 bar
12 l
060 bar
1/2
1,5 m
Boxes
Code
659
661
Box for manifolds

668 and 668...S1 series.
Wall or floor installation
(with series 660).
Made of painted steel.
Adjustable depth
from 110 to 140 mm.
Box for manifolds.

668...S1 series.
Adjustable depth
from 110 to 150 mm.
With supports for installation
on floor.
Adjustable height
from 270 to 410 mm.
(h x w x d)
500
500
500
500
500
659043
659063
659083
659103
659123
x
x
x
x
x
1400
1600
1800
1000
1200
x
x
x
x
x
110140
110140
110140
110140
110140
Code
661043
661063
661083
661103
661123
660
(h x w x d)
500
500
500
500
500
x
x
x
x
x
1400
1600
1800
1000
1200
x
x
x
x
x
110 150
110 150
110 150
110 150
110 150
Floor installation kit

for box 659 series.
Consisting of:
- 2 supports height cm. 20,
- 2 side panels,
Code
660040
660060
660080
660100
660120
for
for
for
for
for
659043
659063
659083
659103
659123
Choice of box size, 659 or 661 series according to the number of outlets.
For max outlets no. 17+17

With Autoflow for max outlets no. 15+15

1
2
1
2
CALEFFI
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1000
800
600

1
2
1
2
1
2
1200

1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
GIORNO
WC
GIORNO
WC
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFF
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
CALEFFI
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
CALEFFI
SOGGIORNO
WC
WC
GIORNO
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Thermostatic mixing valve, adjustable

with knob and with anti-scald function
RE
IS
5217 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI
Cert. n 0003
01145/07 GB
Function
In some hot water distribution systems there is a need to protect the
most vulnerable people against scalding caused by hot water, such
as, for example, in hospitals, in nursing homes or in schools.
specially designed for these applications and installation upstream
the point of use.
These thermostatic mixing valves ensure high thermal performance.
They are able to accurately control the temperature of the mixed
water supplied to the user in case of variations in the inlet supply
pressure or temperature, or in the flow rate.
They are designed with a special anti-scald function which
immediately shuts off the flow of water discharging from the mixed
water outlet in the event of a failure of cold supply.
(Certified under standard NF 079 doc. 8 - Device of class 12 (1/2)
and class 20 (3/4), RU type, regulated by user).
Product range
Code 521714
Thermostatic mixing valve, adjustable with knob and with anti-scald function, complete with strainers
and check valves at the inlet
Thermostatic mixing valve, adjustable with knob and with anti-scald function, complete with strainers
and check valves at the inlet
Code 521713
Size 1/2
Size 3/4
Dimensions
Materials
Shutter:
Springs:
Sealing elements:
Knob:
EN 12165 CW602N,
chrome plated
PSU
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
10 bar
5 bar
3050C
2C

Performance
Temperature adjustment range:
Accuracy:
Body:

85C
Inlet temperature recommended for optimum system performance,
avoiding the build-up of limescale (according to NF079 doc. 8) 65C
Max. inlet pressures ratio (H/C or C/H):
2:1
Min. temperature difference between hot water inlet
and mixed outlet, to ensure anti-scald function:
15C
Min. flow rate for stable temperature:
Acoustic group:
Connections:
4 l/min (1/2)
6 l/min (3/4)
I
Code
521714
521713
A
1/2
3/4
B
62,5
67
C
125
134
D
E
126,5 81,5
127
82
F
45
45
(Kg)
0,58
0,81
Weight

In systems producing hot water with storage, in order to avoid the
dangerous infection known as Legionella, the hot water must be stored
at a temperature of at least 60 C. At this temperature it is certain that
the growth of the bacteria causing this infection will be totally
eliminated. At this temperature, however, the water cannot be used
directly.
As shown in the diagram opposite, temperatures of more than 50C
can cause burning very quickly.
For example, at 55C, partial burning will occur in approximately
30 seconds, while at 60C partial burning will occur in approximately
5 seconds.
This time may be reduced by 50% for children and elderly people.
In view of the above, it is necessary to use a thermostatic mixing valve
which can:
-
reduce the temperature at the point of use to a value lower than that
of the storage and make it suitable for sanitary use.
maintain the temperature constant while while the incoming
pressure and temperature conditions vary.
prevent the water temperature at the outlet from reaching values
above 50C.
have an anti-scald safety function in case of failure of the cold water
supply.
bacteria
as
the
conditions vary in the
containing the bacteria.
To
ensure
correct
thermal disinfection, it is
necessary to go up to
values of no less than
60C.
C
75
Full thickness
burns
70
65
Partial thickness
burns
60
55
Safety conditions.
Max. exposure time
at a specific
temperature
50
45
0,1
10
100
1.000
10.000
Seconds
Exposure time required to cause partial burns

70
60
50
40
30
Optimum temperature
20
10
Temperature
Adults
Children 0-5 years
70C
1s
65C
2s
0.5 s
60C
5s
1s
55C
30 s
10 s
50C
5 min
2,5 min
Operating principle
The thermostatic mixing valve mixes the hot and cold
water at the inlet so as to maintain the mixed water at a
constant set temperature at the outlet. A thermostatic
element is fully immersed in the mixed water pipe. It
contracts or expands, thus moving an obturator which
controls the hot or cold water passage at the inlet. If
there are changes in inlet temperature or pressure, the
internal element reacts automatically to restore the set
temperature at the outlet.
HOT
Code 521714
HOT
Anti-scald safety function

As a safety measure, in case of failure of the cold water
supply, the valve immediately shuts off the flow of mixed
water. This prevents dangerous burns.
This performance is guaranteed if there is a minimum
temperature difference between the inlet hot water and the
outlet mixed water of 15C (performance in compliance with
French standards NF 079 Doc. 8).
In case of failure of the hot water supply, the valve shuts off
the mixed water to prevent dangerous thermal shocks.
COLD
The materials used in constructing the mixing valve
were selected to eliminate seizing due to limescale
deposits. All functional parts have been made using a
special material with low friction coefficient, which
ensures over time performance.
COLD
Code 521713
MIXED
Thermal transient
p (bar)
521714
p (m w.g.)
521713
1,5
15
1,0
10
0,5
0,3
0,2
During transient, following rapid changes in pressure,

temperature or flow rate, the temperature increases
with respect to the initial set point and this increase
must be of limited duration to guarantee safety.
T(C)
< 0,5 s - max
60C
< 3 s - max
55C
0,1
2K
2K
Starting
temperature
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
5
50
20
10
0,5
5
0,5
0,2
0,05
Temperature
rise
Stabilisation
period
Stable
conditions
Time (s)
Kv (m3/h)
Code
521714
1/2
1,5
521713
3/4
1,85
Use
According to its flow characteristics, the Caleffi 5217 series thermostatic mixing
valves can be used for application at the point of use or for a limited number of
users, for example a bathroom. For this reason, the flow passing through the valve
is generally the same as through the final user, for example the tap of a basin,
shower, bidet, etc. To ensure a stable operation, a minimum flow rate of 4 l/min (1/2)
and 6 l/min (3/4) must be guarantee to the mixing valve. The system must always
be sized taking into account the current legislation on the nominal flow rate to each
user.
Public buildings, hospitals, nursery schools
In this type of application the risk of scalding is extremly high because of the nature
of the hot water users, who include children, old people, sick people.
In these installations, the two supply networks providing hot water from the boiler
and cold water may have different origins and operate at different pressures.
In case of failure of the cold water supply, the mixing valve is able to shut off the
supply of mixed water to prevent possible scalding.
Selecting the correct size mixing valve
If the design flow rate is known, taking into account simultaneous use of the sanitary
appliances, the dimensions of the mixing valve are chosen by checking the graph
provided to find the loss of head produced. In this case, it is necessary to check
the available pressure, the loss of head in the system downstream of the mixer and
the residual pressure to be guaranteed to user appliances.
Installation
Before installing the mixing valve, the connecting pipes should be washed to
remove any impurities that could impair performance.
We always recommend installing strainers of sufficient capacity at the inlet from the
public water network.
The 5217 series mixing valves are equipped with strainers on the hot and cold
water inlets.
The 5217 series thermostatic mixing valves must be installed as shown in the
installation diagrams on the instruction sheet or in this leaflet.
The 5217 series thermostatic mixing can be installed in any position, horizontally or
vertically.
The following marks are indicated on the mixing valve body:
hot water inlet, indicated by the letter H (Hot)
cold water inlet, indicated by the letter C (Cold)
mixed water outlet, indicated by the word MIX.
Check valves
In systems with thermostatic mixing valves, check valves should be installed to
prevent undesired flow return. 5217 series mixing valves are equipped with
check valves at the hot and cold water inlets.
Commissioning
In view of the special purpose of the thermostatic
mixing valve, it must be commissioned in accordance
with current regulations by qualified personnel using
appropriate temperature measurement equipped.
Use of a digital thermometer is recommended for
measuring the temperature of the mixed water.
Temperature setting
The temperature is set at the desired value using
the regulator knob. Given the particular use of this
type of mixing valve, the following table shows the
recommended maximum outlet water temperatures
to prevent scalding.
Appliance
Bidet
Shower
Wash basin
Bath tub
Tmax.
38C
41C
41C
44C
Point of use installation
Multiple use installation with distribution unit
Bathroom installation
5217 series
Thermostatic mixing valve adjustable with knob and with anti-scald function. Certified under standard
NF 079 doc. 8. 1/2 and 3/4 M connections. Dezincification resistant alloy body. Chrome plated. Shutter in PSU. Stainless
steel springs. EPDM seal elements. ABS knob. Maximum working temperature 85C. Adjustment range 3050C.
Accuracy 2C. Maximum working pressure (static) 10 bar. Maximum working pressure (dynamic) 5 bar. Maximum inlet
pressures ratio (H/C or C/H) 2:1. Complete with strainers and check valves at the inlets.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI S.P.A. I 28010 FONTANETODAGOGNA (NO) S.R. 229, N.25 TEL. +39 0322 8491 R.A. FAX +39 0322 863723
Direct heat meter

Conteca Solar - M-bus Transmission
RE
IS
75525 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01146/08 GB
Function
Conteca Solar is a direct heat energy meter especially suited for
measuring heat energy recovered from a solar source used for an
alternative management of the allocation of energy expenditures.
The device comprises an electronic calculator unit, a flow rate
volume meter and two temperature probes. The Conteca Solar
meter is extremely simple to install and needs no special
maintenance.
The Conteca Solar flow rate meter is the turbine type. The turbine
speed is measured by means of a high-resistance protected
magnetic joint. Thanks to the mechanism being in a vacuum there
is no condensation.
The mechanism block cap, made of non-magnetic material,
prevents all attempted tampering. The electronic technology and
the materials used enable precise and reliable measurements.
The temperature probes are high-precision Pt 100 that are easy to
seal for greater protection against tampering. The cables
connecting the flow and return probes to the calculator unit are
1,9 m long.
The Conteca Solar meter is equipped with an 8-digit liquid crystal
display that can be turned on with a button as it is normally off in
order to save battery charge. This display enables easy reading of
consumption and a range of technical data to permit evaluation of
the operating status of the device and log the data.
The Conteca Solar meter is fitted for centralised
teletransmission (max 250 modules) in M-Bus mode.
Product range
75525 series
Code 755000
Code 755055/56
7558 series
Heat meter
Controller
M-Bus interface - Teletransmission interface
Additional options
Performance:
Electric supply:
Long life storage battery:
Data transmission:
Antitamper protection
Conformity to standards:
24 V (ac) - 50 Hz - 1 W
5 years
using M Bus protocol EN 1434
EN 1434
50%
Size 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 with union
Technical data
Temperature probes
Flow probe length
Return probe length
Probe type
Temperature range limits
Temperature difference limits
Measurement sensitivity
m
m
T
1,9
1,9
Pt 100
5120
0115
0,05
C
K
C
Volumetric part
Dimensions/Connection
Body
Type of hydraulic connection
Nominal flow rate
Lower measurement range
Upper measurement range
Nominal pressure
Max. medium temperature
Installation
Pulse output
Qp
Qi
Qmax
PN
1/21
brass
male with union ISO 228
see table 1
see table 1
see table 1
threaded PN 10
120
normally horizontal
class OA-OC according to EN 1434-2
l/h
l/h
l/h
bar
C
Microprocessor calculator unit

Metrological specifications
Centralised transmission
Ambient temperature range limits
Ambient classification
Heat consumption indicator
Electric supply:
- (without centralisation)
- (with centralisation)
Protection class
Pulse inputs
in conformity with EN 1434-1

in M-Bus mode
545
MID 2004/22/CE E1 - M1
8 digit display
Incorporated battery, 5 year life
24V (ac) - 1W - 50 Hz
according to DIN 40050: IP 54
class IB according to EN 1434-2
C
kWh
Dimensions
TAB. 1 - Flow rate range (m3/h) - Connections from 1/2 to 1:
165
147
40
120
Code
755254
755255
755256
Code
755254
755255
755256
F
G
M07 1259
07185865
A
1/2"
3/4"
1"
B
110
130
260
B
B1
B1
190
230
378
C
18
21
45
D
96
96
185
E
80
80
102
F
44
51
60
G
59
69
82
H
59
69
87
The Conteca Solar heat meter is supplied complete with accessories for
installation, positioning of the probes and subsequent sealing.
Each Conteca Solar meter has n. 2 Y pockets (the flow pocket is fitted
with a mesh strainer).
Meas. type
Single jet
Single jet
Multi jet
Qi
0,12
0,20
0,35
Qp
1,5
2,5
3,5
Qmax
1,5
2,5
3,5
Guidelines for first installation

It is a good rule to have straight sections of piping immediately upstream and downstream from the meter.
Length upstream 4 diameters.
Length downstream 2 diameters.
It is a good rule to have shut-off valves upstream and downstream from the meter in order to facilitate installation and maintenance, if required.
In order to protect the meter, a strainer is fitted inside the temperature flow pocket.
After installation, it is a good rule to wash the pipes and carry out a pressure test.
After flushing and before securing the temperature probe, it is a good rule to check the state of clogging of the mesh strainer.
After installing the hydraulic part you can install the electric/electronic parts.
The default percentage of glycol set is 30%. If the percentage to be used is not 30%, the actual percentage must be notified when ordering.
Application diagram
Normally the hydraulic installation of the flow-rate meter is to be done on the return pipe.
- The hydraulic diagrams given below show:
a) the positioning of the meter so that it is at rest when there is no service.
The flow-rate meter must preferably be installed in a horizontal position with the turbine axis vertical and respecting the direction of flow
indicated by the arrow on the body.
b) the positioning of the probes
The temperature probes (by means of the pocket) must be positioned on the corresponding flow/return pipes. The corresponding flow and
return pipes are the ones involved with the same flow rate when the flow has started.
SYSTEM
FLOW
M07 1259
07185865
SYSTEM
RETURN
M07 1259
07185865
p (kPa)
1"
1/2"
p (m w.g.)
3/4"
Volume meter + pockets for probe
4,5
4
3,5
3
45
40
35
30
2,5
25
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
18
16
14
12
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
9
8
7
6
0,5
50
Qp
20
10
0,45
0,40
0,35
0,30
4,5
4
3,5
3
0,25
2,5
0,25
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
4,5
2
1
3,5
2,5
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,5
0,1
0,6
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
Q (m3/h)
Kv
1/2
3/4
2,5
4,2
5,9
Conteca Solar meter electrical connections
M07 1259
07185865
Cooling/Heating
mass meter
FT
RT
Return temperature probe
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
21 22 23 24 25 26
FT
M07 1259
07185865
Return Temp. probe
Flow
Flow Temp. probe
Volume meter
Rx
For mounting in a box or directly on a wall,

use the screws provided in the package,
fixing them in the curved slots that enable
levelling the device correctly ( A )
Tx
24 V (a c)
Return
RT
Data centralisation
In the case of centralised data transmission via bus, the
following connection plan must necessarily be carried
out:
1 - 2
Centralised power supply 24 V (ac)
3 - 5
Transmission bus

The display is activated by pressing the button on the front
.
In order to have a longer battery life, the display is switched off
30 s after last pressing the sensor button.
PUSH
3 Tx (Transmission)
5 Rx (Reception)
For the transmission bus, use shieldless cable

2 x 1 mm2 type FROR 450/750 2x1 CEI 20-22 I I IMQ
(our code 755855/N).

(Not active)
Energy pulse outputs, code. 755881
These outputs can be connected to our code 755890

(remote energy totalizer) or a general supervisor.
Output specifications:
1 IMP = 1 kWh - open collector contact
Pulse duration: 120 msec
Medium volume
1st supplementary consumption
21 - 23 Remote thermie totalizer output (kWh)

(Type OC)
- Help the cables to pass through by breaking

and shaping the plastic partition in the cable
fairlead.
The basic function of the partition is to protect
the electronic card from dust and from any
spray of water.
Return temperature
Temperature difference
- Each 75525 series device is supplied with a

kit of lead seals and wire to allow sealing of
both the temperature probes and the plastic
box containing the electronic components.
Flow temperature
Bus network address
- With centralised transmission it is

necessary and essential to have a power
supply of 24 V (ac) - 50 Hz - 1 W. To prevent
tampering on the device, this line must be
centralised and not under the direct control
of the user.
Power
Number of openings in the ABS shell

(Antitamper system)
Notes: - The heat meter is equipped with a storage

battery (life 5 years).
Flow rate
Check Sum
Segment test
ELECTRONIC OPTIONS
755881
Pulse output
The pulse output allows energy data to be transferred to

a generic data acquisition device.
The pulse weighs 1 kWh.
The pulse output with no potential is open collector
with pulse time 120 ms - Vmax 24 V (ac).
755890
Remote energy totalizer
Electronic 8 digit LCD totalizer equipped with cover plate for

three-slot wall-mounting electric box.
Lithium battery: life 8 years - max frequency 20 Hz
Suitable for pulse outputs code 755881.
Cable length (2x1 mm2) not supplied by us: max 150 m.
Code
755881
Single pulse output - THERMIE
CALEFFI
ENERGIA kWh
4
755881
75525
Acquisition card
(supervisor)
23 Thermie
3
0V
21
75525 series
CONTECA SOLAR direct dynamic heat meter for use in solar heating systems with the following characteristics: volume
meter for hot water with magnetic joint (Maximum temperature 120C) with pulse output; Pt100 temperature probe; data
visualised on 8 digit display; temperature range 5120C; protection class IP 54; transmission via TWO-WAY bus according
to M-bus mode; conformity to EN 1434; electric supply by battery 24 V (ac) in M-bus transmission mode.
CALEFFI
Temperature and pressure relief valve

for solar systems
RE
IS
309 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI
Cert. n 0003
01147/07 GB
General information
The temperature and pressure relief valves (TP) 309 series for solar
systems are made by Caleffi S.p.A in compliance with the essential
safety requirements laid down by Directive 97/23/EC of the European
Parliament and the Council of the European Union for harmonisation
of Member States with regard to pressurised equipment.
Function
The TP relief valve controls and limits the temperature and pressure
of the hot water contained in a solar domestic water storage heater
and prevents it from being able to reach temperatures of over
100C, with the formation of steam.
On reaching the settings, the valve discharges a sufficient amount
of water into the atmosphere so that the temperature and pressure
return within the systems operating limits.
111 5
This particular series of valves is certified as conforming to the

performance requirements of the European standard EN 1490
(for settings of 7 - 10 bar).
Product range
309 series Temperature and pressure relief valve for solar systems
EN 12165 CW602N chrome plated
EPDM
steel EN 10270-1 SH
PA6GF
Performance
Nominal pressure:
Medium:
PED category:
Settings:
Connections:
PN 10
- 1/2 15;
- 3/4 22;
- temperature:
- pressure:
10 kW
25 kW
water
IV
Discharge rating:
Stem:
Obturator and diaphragm:
Spring:
Control knob:
Dimensions
Materials:
Body:
Sizes 1/2 x 15 mm, 3/4 x 22 mm
90C
6 - 7 - 10 bar

A
F
Code completion ( . . )
Code 3094..
61 6 bar 71 7 bar 01 10 bar
Code 3095..
61 6 bar
71 7 bar 01 10 bar
Code
3094 . .
3095 . .
A
1/2
3/4
B
15
22
C
40
43
D
102
99
E
88
91
F
39
39
Weight (kg)
0,253
0,310
Operating principle
The valve opens the outlet on reaching the settings for:
- temperature: the thermostat compound inside the temperature sensor 1), submerged in the hot
water storage heater, expands as the temperature increases. This expansion causes a thrust
pin to move and act on the obturator 2) opening the valve. The valve is set to open at
temperatures of over 90C.
- pressure: the obturator, opposed by a set spring, raises on reaching the pressure setting and
opens the outlet completely. The pressure setting is chosen according to the maximum
permissible pressure in the system.
As the temperature and pressure decrease, the opposite action occurs with the valve subsequently
reclosing within the set tolerances.
Certification
CE mark
309 series TP relief valves for solar systems comply with the essential safety requirements of
Directive 97/23/EC concerning pressure equipment (also called P.E.D.). They are therefore classified
as category IV and are equipped with the CE mark.
Product certification in accordance with European Standard EN 1490
European Standard EN 1490: 2000, entitled Building valves - Combined temperature and pressure
relief valves Tests and requirements, describes the constructional and performance
specifications that TP relief valves must have.
Caleffi 309 series TP relief valves for solar systems are certified by Buildcert (UK) to comply with the
requirements of the European Standard EN 1490 (for settings 7 10 bar).
Installation
Before installing a TP relief valve it is necessary for the sizing to be performed correctly by specialized technical personnel in accordance with
the current regulations for the specific applications. Any use other than the intended use is prohibited.
The TP relief valves must be installed by qualified technical personnel in accordance with current regulations.
The TP relief valves must be installed observing the direction of flow indicated by the arrow on the valve body.
Assembly
Plumbing system
TP relief valves must be installed on the top of the solar hot water
storage heater, making sure that the temperature sensor is correctly
submerged in the tank.
Make sure that there are no
shut-off devices between
the valve and the storage
heater.
TP relief valves can be fitted
vertically or horizontally, but
not overturned.
This prevents debris from
impairing operation.
SOLAR
HOT WATER
STORAGE
SOLAR
HOT WATER
STORAGE
SOLAR
STORAGE
SOLAR
HOT WATER
STORAGE
SOLAR
STORAGE
SOLAR
HOT WATER
STORAGE
309 series
Temperature and pressure relief valve for solar systems. Equipped with the CE mark in accordance with directive 97/23/EC.
Dezincification-resistant alloy body. Brass stem. Obturator and diaphragm in EPDM. Steel spring. Control knob in glass-fiber
re-inforced nylon. Threaded 1/2 M connections on the inlet and 15 mm (and 3/4 M x 22 mm) with compression fitting
for copper pipe on the outlet. Temperature setting 90C. Pressure setting 6 bar (available settings: 6-7-10 bar).
Valves with 7-10 bar setting certified to EN 1490 standard. Discharge rating: 1/2 x 15 mm: 10 kW, 3/4 x 22 mm: 25 kW.
Medium: water. Category PED IV. Nominal pressure: PN 10.
CALEFFI
Balancing valve with flow meter

for solar thermal systems
RE
IS
258 series
TERE
CALEFFI
Cert. n FM 21654
01148/08 GB

Cert. n 0003
Function
The balancing valve is an hydraulic device that accurately regulates
the flow rate of heating medium supplied to the various circuits of
solar thermal systems.
This particular series of valves is equipped with a flow meter for a
direct reading of the regulated flow rate. The flow meter, housed in
a by-pass circuit on the valve body and that can be shut off during
normal functioning, allows a fast and easy balancing of circuits
without the need of differential pressure gauges or diagrams.
The balancing valve is equipped with a hot preformed shell
insulation to ensure a perfect thermal performance.
This particular series of valves has been specifically designed to
work with glycol solutions at high temperatures, typical conditions of
Product range
Balancing valves with flow meter for solar thermal systems
Flow rate ranges
Materials
Valve
Body:
Ball:
Ball control stem:
Ball seal seat:
Control stem guide:
Seals:

Flow meter
Body:
Headwork:
Obturator stem:
Springs:
Seals:
Flow meter float:
Indicator cover:

stainless steel
Performance
Medium:
Flow rate scale unit of measurement:
Accuracy:
Control stem angle of rotation:
Operating wrench:
size 3/4 and 1
Code
258503
258523
258603
Size
3/4
3/4
Flow rates (l/min)
27
728
1040
Dimensions

50%
10 bar
-30130C
CALEFFI
bar
l/min
10%
90
9 mm
258 series
3/4 and 1 F
Insulation
Material:
Thickness:
10 mm
30 kg/m3
- outer part:
50 kg/m3
0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C:
0,045 W/(mK)
> 1.300
0100C
class B2
Code
258503
258523
258603
A
3/4
3/4
1
B
83,5
83,5
85
C
45,5
45,5
47
D
145
145
158
Weight (kg)
0,74
0,74
0,96
Benefits of balancing solar thermal circuits
Operating principle
When a solar thermal circuit is properly balanced, it is ensured the

correct flow rate circulating through the system, depending on the
panel size.
The balancing valve is an hydraulic device that allows to regulate

the medium flow rate passing through.
The regulating action is made by a ball obturator (1), operated by
a control stem (2). The flow rate is controlled by means of a flow
meter (3) housed in a by-pass circuit, on the valve body, that can
be shut off during normal functioning. The flow rate value is
indicated by a metal sphere (4), sliding within a transparent guide
(5), marked alongside by a graduated scale (6).
1
3
7
6
4
3
5
4
Automatic
filling
Temperature
In solar thermal systems, the primary circuit thermal medium is a glycol solution operating at high temperature; for taking into account these
particular working conditions, the seals and the inner plastic components of the valve are made of highly temperature resistant materials.
Flow meter
The flow rate value is displayed
directly by a flow meter housed
in a by-pass circuit on the valve
body, automatically shut-off
during normal functioning.
The use of a flow meter greatly
simplifies the process of system
balancing, since the flow rate
can
be
measured
and
controlled at any time and there
is no need for differential
pressure gauges or reference
charts.
The provision of a flow meter also

means that it is not anymore
necessary to calculate valve settings at the system design stage.
The advantages of this solution can be explained as significant time
and cost saving, because the traditional balancing device
presetting, performed by qualified technicians, is a long and
difficult procedure.
Flow meter obturator

The obturator (1) opens and shuts the circuit between the flow
meter and the valve. The obturator can be easily opened by pulling
the ring (2), and is
closed automatically,
1
after completion of the
procedure,
by
the
internal spring (3). The
spring and the EPDM
4
3
2
seal (4) guarantee over
time a perfect circuit
closure during normal functioning.
The operating ring (2) is made of a material with low thermal
conductivity to avoid burns if the flow meter is opened while hot
medium is passing through the valve.
Ball and magnet indicator
The ball (4) that indicates the flow rate value is
not in direct contact with the thermal medium
passing through the flow meter.
Thanks to an effective and innovative measuring
system, the ball slides up and down in a cylinder
(5) that is actually separate from the body of the
flow meter. The ball is moved by a magnet (6)
fixed to a float (7).
This means that the flow rate indication system
remains perfectly clean and provides reliable
readings over time.
5
7
6
4
Insulation
The valve can be completely closed and opened.

A slot on the obturator stem indicates the status of the valve.
When the control stem is turned fully clockwise and the slot lies
perpendicular to the Completely closed Completely open
axis of the valve, the
valve is fully closed (A).
When
the
control
stem is turned fully
anti-clockwise and the
slot lies parallel to the
valve is fully open (B).
A B
The 258 series balancing valve

is supplied complete with hot
pre-formed insulation. This
system ensures total thermal
insulation, which is especially
helpful in limiting heat losses in
outdoor installations, typical of

p (kPa)
3/4
p (mm w.g.)
3/4
Complete closing and opening of the valve
15.000
150
10.000
100
5.000
50
2.000
20
1.000
10
500
200
100
50
100
250
500
1.000
2.500
5.000
10.000
The flow rate is adjusted by carrying out the following operations:
A. With the aid of the indicator

(1), mark the reference flow
rate at which the valve has to
be set.
B. Use the ring (2) to open the

obturator that shuts off the
flow of medium in the flow
meter (3) under normal
3
2
G (l/h)
Code
258503 258523 258603
Size
3/4
3/4
Flow rates
(l/min)
27
7 28
10 40
Kv (m /h)
0,9
5,4
7,2
Kv valves fully open
Correction for media with different density

For fluids with a viscosity 3E, e.g. water/glycol solutions with density
different with respect to the water at 20C ( = 1 kg/dm3), to which the
upper diagram refers, it should be considered that:
- pressure drop (for sizing the pump) is determined by:
pactual = preference x glycol solution;
- variation in flow rate measurement remains within the specified
accuracy (10%) for glycol percentages up to 50%.
C.Keeping the obturator open, apply a wrench on the control stem

of the valve (4) to adjust the flow rate. It is indicated by a metal
ball (5) that runs inside a transparent guide (6) marked by a
graduated scale in l/min.
Installation
Install the balancing valve in such a way to ensure free access to
the flow meter obturator, control stem and flow rate indicator.
We recommend to install straight sections of pipe as shown in the
illustration below to ensure accurate flow measurement.
258 series
258 series
Pump
The valve can be installed in any position by respecting the flow

direction shown on the valve body. The valve can be installed either
2
3
4
5
6
7
10D
5D
6
5
4
3
3
D.After completing the balancing, release the ring of the flow meter
obturator that, thanks to an internal spring, will automatically go
back into the closed position.
Application diagrams - Flow rate adjustment an a single solar circuit
Shut-off valve
Pump
Deaerator
Air vent
Expansion vessel
Temperature gauge
Ballstop
Controller
Safety relief valve
2
Automatic
filling
Flow rate adjustment in two or more solar circuits
2
Automatic
filling
258 series
Balancing valve with flow meter for solar thermal systems. Threaded connections 3/4 (and 1) F x F. Brass body, chrome plated. Brass
ball. Brass control stem ball, chrome plated. High resistance elastomer seals. High resistance polymer control stem guide. Brass flow
meter body, chrome plated. Brass flow meter headwork. Brass flow meter obturator stem, chrome plated. Stainless steel flow meter
spring. High resistance polymer flow meter float. High resistance polymer flow indicator cover. High resistance elastomer seals.
Expanded closed cell PE-X pre-formed shell insulation. Medium water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Working temperature range -30130C. Flow rate scale unit of measurement l/min. Accuracy 10%.
Control stem angle of rotation 90.
CALEFFI
Balancing valve
with flow meter
CALEFFI
RE
IS
132 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654
01149/08 GB

Cert. n 0003
Function
The balancing valve is an hydraulic device that accurately
regulates the flow rate of heating medium supplied to system
terminals.
A correct balancing of hydraulic systems is essential to guarantee
the system operation according to its design specifications, high
thermal confort and low energy consumption.
This particular series of valves is equipped with a flow meter for a
direct reading of the regulated flow rate. The flow meter, housed in
a by-pass circuit on the valve body and that can be shut off during
normal functioning, allows a fast and easy balancing of circuits
without the need for differential pressure gauges or diagrams.
The balancing valve is equipped with a hot pre-formed shell
insulation to ensure a perfect thermal performance in case of use
both with hot and chilled water.
Product range
Balancing valve with flow meter
sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2 and 2
Flow rate ranges
Materials
Valve
Body:
Ball:
Ball control stem:
Ball seal seat:
Control stem guide:
Seals:
Flow meter
Body:
Headwork:
Obturator stem:
Springs:
Seals:
Flow meter float:
Indicator cover:
Code 132402 132512 132522 132602 132702 132802 132902

PTFE
PSU
EPDM
1/2
3/4
3/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
Flow
rates
27
513
728
1040
2070
30120
50200
(l/min)
Dimensions
stainless steel
EPDM
PSU
PSU
Performance
Medium:
Flow rate range unit of measurement:
Accuracy:
Control stem angle of rotation:
Operating wrench:
Size
CALEFFI
15
bar

50%
10 bar
-10110C
132 series
7
6
5
4
3
2
l/min
10%
90
1/21 1/4: 9 mm
1 1/2 and 2: 12 mm
1/22 F
Insulation
Material:
Thickness:
10 mm
30 kg/m3
- outer part:
50 kg/m3
0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C:
0,045 W/(mK)
> 1.300
0100C
class B2
Code
132402
132512
132522
132602
132702
132802
132902
A
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
B
83,5
83,5
83,5
85
88
91
96,5
C
45,5
45,5
45,5
47
50
56,5
62
D
145
145
145
158
163,5
171
177
Weight (kg)
0,80
0,74
0,74
0,96
1,19
1,47
2,00
Advantages of balanced circuits
Operating principle
Balanced circuits have the following principal benefits:
The balancing valve is an hydraulic device that allows to regulate

the medium flow rate passing through.
The regulating action is made by a ball obturator (1), operated by
a control stem (2). The flow rate is controlled by means of a flow
meter (3) housed in a by-pass circuit, on the valve body, that can
be shut off during normal functioning. The flow rate value is
indicated by a metal sphere (4), sliding within a transparent guide
(5), marked alongside by a graduated scale (6).
1. The system terminals operate correctly in heating, cooling and

dehumidification without waste of energy and provide a better
comfort.
2. The pumps run in their zone of highest efficiency, thus reducing
the risk of overheating and excessive wear.
3. Too high medium speeds, which can result in noise and
abrasion, are avoided.
4. The differential pressures acting on the regulation valves are
limited in value, thus preventing faulty operation.
3
15
1
7
6
5
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
Flow meter
The flow rate value is displayed
directly by a flow meter housed
in a by-pass circuit on the valve
body, automatically shut-off
during normal functioning.
The use of a flow meter greatly
simplifies the process of system
balancing, since the flow rate
can
be
measured
and
controlled at any time and there
is no need for differential
pressure gauges or reference
charts.
The provision of a flow meter
also means that it is not
anymore necessary to calculate
valve settings at the system
design stage.
The advantages of this solution
can be explained as significant
time and cost saving, because
the traditional balancing device
presetting,
performed
by
qualified technicians, is a long
and difficult procedure.
Flow meter obturator

The obturator (1) opens and shuts the circuit between the flow
meter and the valve. The obturator can be easily opened by pulling
the ring (2), and is closed automatically, after completion of the
procedure, by theinternal spring (3). The spring and the EPDM seal
(4) guarantee over time a perfect circuit closure during normal
functioning.
The operating ring (2) is made of a material with low thermal

conductivity to avoid burns if the flow meter is opened while hot
medium is passing through the valve.
Ball/magnet indicator
The ball (4) that indicates the flow rate value is
not in direct contact with the thermal medium
passing through the flow meter.
Thanks to an effective and innovative measuring
system, the ball slides up and down in a cylinder
(5) that is actually separate from the body of the
flow meter. The ball is moved by a magnet (6)
fixed to a float (7).
This means that the flow rate indication system
remains perfectly clean and provides reliable
readings over time.
5
7
6
4

p (kPa)
1/2
p (mm w.g.)
1 1/2
The 132 series balancing valve

is supplied complete with hot
pre-formed insulation. This
system ensures not only perfect
thermal insulation, but also
tightness to water vapour from
the environment towards the
inside. For these reasons, this
type of insulation can also be
used in chilled water circuits as
it
prevents
condensation
forming on the surface of the
valve body.
1 1/4
The valve can be completely closed and opened.

A slot on the obturator stem indicates the status of the valve.
When the control stem
is turned fully clockwise Completely closed Completely open
and the slot lies
perpendicular to the
valve is fully closed (A).
When
the
control
stem is turned fully
anti-clockwise and the
A B
slot lies parallel to the
valve is fully open (B).
3/4
Insulation
3/4
Complete closing and opening of the valve
15.000
150
10.000
100
5.000
50
2.000
20
1.000
10
500
200
100
50
100
250
500
1.000
2.500
5.000
The flow rate is adjusted by carrying out the following operations:

A. With the aid of the indicator
(1), mark the reference flow
rate at which the valve has to
be set.
1
25.000 50.000
10.000
B. Use the ring (2) to open the

obturator that shuts off the
flow of medium in the flow
meter (3) under normal
3
2
G (l/h)
Code
132402 132512 132522 132602 132702 132802 132902
Size
Flow
rates
1/2
3/4
3/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
27
513
728
1040
2070
30120 50200
Kv (m3/h)
0,9
2,5
5,4
7,2
13,1
(l/min)
27,8
46,4
Kv valves fully open
Correction for liquids with different densities

For fluids with a viscosity 3E, e.g. water/glycol solutions with density
different with respect to the water at 20C ( = 1 kg/dm3), to which the
upper diagram refers, it should be considered that:
- pressure drop (for sizing the pump) is determined by:
pactual = preference x glycol solution;
- variation in flow rate measurement remains within the specified
accuracy (10%) for glycol percentages up to 50%.
C.Keeping the obturator open, apply a wrench on the control stem

of the valve (4) to adjust the flow rate. It is indicated by a metal
ball (5) that runs inside a transparent guide (6) marked by a
graduated scale in l/min.
Installation
Install the balancing valve in such a way to ensure free access to
the flow meter obturator, control stem and flow rate indicator.
We recommend to install straight sections of pipe as shown in the
illustration below to ensure accurate flow measurement.
132 series
5
6
132 series
Pump
5D
10D
The valve can be installed in any position by respecting the flow

direction shown on the valve body. The valve can be installed either
2
3
4
5
6
7
D.After completing the balancing, release the ring of the flow meter
obturator that, thanks to an internal spring, will automatically go
back into the closed position.
The balancing valve with the flow meter should preferably be installed on the circuit return pipe.
To adjust the flow rate to each riser
To balance circuits serving air conditioning units
To adjust the flow rate to each terminal
To balance the by-pass branch of outside compensated

control circuits
To balance zone branches in circuits with three-way valves
To balance sanitary water distribution circuits
132 series
Balancing valve with flow meter. Threaded connections 1/2 (from 1/2 to 2) F x F. Brass body. Brass ball. Brass ball control
stem, chrome plated. PTFE ball seal seat. PSU control stem guide. Brass flow meter body and headwork. Brass flow meter
obturator control stem, chrome plated. Stainless steel flow meter springs. PSU flow meter float and indicator cover. EPDM
seals. With pre-formed shell insulation in expanded closed cell PE-X. Medium water and glycol solutions. Maximum
percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Working temperature range -10110C. Flow rate range unit of
measurement l/min. Accuracy 10%. Control stem angle of rotation 90.
CALEFFI
Manifolds for industrial radiant panel

systems
RE
IS
6509 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI
01150/08 GB

Cert. n 0003
Function
This series of stainless steel manifolds is provided for control and
distribution of the heating fluid in radiant panel systems that require
particularly high flow rates. For this reason they are mainly
indicated for industrial type applications, such as warehouses,
factories, large workshops, etc.
They are supplied in a pre-assembled version with 3 to 16 outlets
complete with: shut-off valves on the outlets giving the possibility of
cutting off the heating to different areas, pockets for temperature
gauges (supplied in the package) for controlling the radiant panel
heat exchange and cocks with hose connection for filling/draining
the circuit.
The use of stainless steel allows the manifolds to be used with
drinking water or aggressive fluids.
Product range
6509 series
Manifolds for industrial radiant panel systems
size 2
Dimensions
Manifold
Body:
40
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI

aluminium
350
Shut-off valves
Body:
Control lever:
stainless steel
105
Materials

50%

Temperature range:
10 bar
-10110C
080C
Main connections:
Manifold inner diameter:
Main connection centre distance:
Outlets:
Fill/drain cock:
2 M x 2 M
54 mm
350 mm
3/4 F
80 mm
hose connection
Inlet localized head loss coefficient :

Outlet localized head loss coefficient :
Kv (m3/h) shut-off ball valves:
CALEFFI
1,0
3,0
17
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
105
Medium:
Performance
3/4
Code outlets
650903
3
650904
4
650905
5
650906
6
650907
7
650908
8
650909
9
L
285
365
445
525
605
685
765
80
60
Weight (kg)
08,4
09,7
11,0
15,0
15,3
16,6
18,6
Codice
650910
650911
650912
650913
650914
650915
650916
deriv.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
L
845
925
1005
1085
1165
1245
1325
Weight (kg)
19,8
21,0
22,2
23,4
24,6
25,8
27,0
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
9
1
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Pre-assembled unit complete with:

1) Flow manifold complete with ball shut-off valves
2) Return manifold complete with ball shut-off valves
3) Pair of brackets, complete with insulating clamps
4) Fill/drain cocks with hose connection
5) Pair of temperature gauges
6) End fitting caps
CALEFFI
Accessories:
7) Three-piece 2 F x M union fitting, code 588091
8) 942 series sleeve
9) Fitting with self-adjusting diameter for plastic pipes,
DARCAL 681 series
Ease of installation
The manifold is supplied pre-assembled with fixing brackets, ready
for mounting directly on the wall.
Temperature gauges and fill/drain cocks

The manifold is supplied complete with pockets for temperature
gauges (1), included in the
package, for the control and
measurement of the flow and
2
return heating fluid and the
control of the radiant panel
heat exchange.
1
To make circuit filling and
draining easier, the cocks (2)
are built-in to the manifolds,
positioned centrally at the top
side.
Reversibility of connections
The manifold is reversible: the main connections can be positioned
with entry from the right or left by unscrewing and moving the end
fitting caps.
Stainless steel body

The stainless steel, the manifold is constructed with, gives a greater
compactness to the unit, not only with regard to the installation but
also in relation to its intended use (in industrial environments).
The stainless steel alloy brings further benefits since the manifold
can be used also with drinking water and aggressive fluids.
Low head losses

The underfloor systems for industrial applications usually are based
on higher heating fluid flow rates than those intended for civil use.
For this reason, the 6509 series manifold has been designed with
inner diameter an outlets that allow maximum flow through them
with reduced head losses.
Underfloor radiant panels and work environment

Comfort
The increased worker comfort makes it possible to reduce waste and margins of error and provides a general incentive to achieving optimum,
professional work standards.
The heating, based prevalently on the propagation of heat by irradiation (1a), avoids conditions of thermal stratification thanks to the lack of the upward
motion of the air, typical of ventilation systems (1b). This makes the temperature profile more adaptable to the room height (2a) and the needs of the
human body, with a greater presence of oxygen in the environment and the optimum relative humidity of the air.
Workers health
Radiant panel heating systems avoid the formation of air currents generated by ventilation systems (1b). These currents cause the movement
of particles, dust and ultra-fine substances (e.g. sawdust in carpentry workshops) that can create problems, especially with regard to workers
health (2b).
Energy Saving
The prevalent amount of heat yielded by radiant panel systems is from irradiation (1a). This makes it possible to keep the air at a lower
temperature whilst maintaining the same comfort level, thus reducing the flow temperature of the heating fluid. In an industrial context, if the
heating fluid temperatures are low then the heat generated by production processes can be re-used, thus reducing costs.
Maintenance
As there are no parts subject to wear in radiant panel systems, routine and non-routine maintenance costs (3b) are drastically reduced.
The system is tamper-proof and guaranteed free of possible breaks caused by moving loads (3a).
In ventilation systems, the micro-particles transported by the air currents and the excessive thermal gradients caused by the currents can also
cause problems for precision machining equipments (4b) and products (e.g. in the medical/pharmaceutical or food industries).
Zone control
In radiant panel systems, cutting the heating off to different areas is easy, thanks to the shut-off valves on the manifold (4a).
Accessories
681
588
Self-adjusting diameter fitting for

plastic pipes.
Chrome plated.
Three-piece straight union fitting.

Chrome plated.
Code
588091
Code
681687
681605
1
1
inside
outside
17,5
19,5
25
25
2 F x M with union
942
Sleeve.
Chrome plated.
Code
681
Fitting with self-adjusting diameter for
single and multilayer plastic pipes.
Temperature range:
580C (PE-X)
575C (Multi-layer marked 95C).
Chrome plated.
Patented.
Code
inside
681502
681500
681501
681506
681515
681517
681524
681526
681535
681537
681546
681555
681556
681564
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
7,5 8
1 9 9,5
9,5 10
19,5 10
10,5 11
10,5 11
11,5 12
11,5 12
12,5 13
12,5 13
13,5 14
14,5 15
15 15,5
15,5 16
942551
942561
3/4 M x 3/4
3/4 M x 1
695
System test pump.
With pressure gauge and
hose for connecting to
the system.
outside
12
14
12
14
14
16
14
16
16
18
18
18
18
18
14
16
14
16
16
18
16
18
18
20
20
20
20
20
Materials:
Body:
Piston:
Control lever:
Performance:
Water content:
Hose connection:
Length of hose:
bronze
brass
galvanized steel
50 bar
12 l
060 bar
1/2
1,5 m
Code
695000
1/2
6509 series
Manifolds for industrial radiant panel systems with 3 (from 3 to 16) outlets. Stainless steel body. Shut-off valves with
chrome plated brass body, aluminium control levers. Main connections 2 M. Outlet connections 3/4 F, centre distance
80 mm. Mediums: water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 50%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Temperature range -10110C.
Complete with:
- Flow and return manifolds complete with ball shut-off valves, fill/drain cocks with hose connection and pockets for
temperature gauges.
- Pair of brackets, complete with insulating clamps.
- Blind end plugs.
- Pair of temperature gauges.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
RE
IS
171 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01151/07 GB
Function
The temperature regulating unit is made to be used in radiant panel
systems in combination with distribution manifolds.
The modulating temperature regulating unit, comprehensive of
digital temperature regulator, controls the temperature of the
medium sent to the panels according to the actual thermal load.
In this particular series, the temperature is regulated by a dedicated
hydraulic unit equipped with a specific motorised three-way valve.
It is supplied with a removable differential by-pass kit for the
primary circuit.
This accessory is essential when there is a primary circuit
circulation pump and the radiator circuits or fan coils are controlled
by thermostatic or thermo-electric valves.
In case of connection with a Sepcoll or an hydraulic separator
without primary pump, the kit can be removed and the hydraulic
unit is connected directly.
Patent application No. MI2006A 001935.
- Tech. brochure 01144 Pre-assembled distribution manifolds
for radiant panel systems 668...S1 series
Product range
Modulating regulating unit, with UPS 25-60 pump
Modulating regulating unit, with UPS 25-80 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:

080C
010 bar
primary circuit:
to regulating unit:
panel circuit outlets:
outlet centre distance:
3/4 M
1 F with nut
3/4 M - 18 mm
50 mm
Panel circuit differential by-pass graph

p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
50
5000
45
4000
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
0,2
4500
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
Connections:
0,1
Shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:
10 kPa (1.000 mm w.g.)


POM
stainless steel
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)
Primary circuit differential by-pass setting:
Primary circuit by-pass kit

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:
Panel manifolds differential by-pass setting:
20
2078C
5100C
10 bar
0,5
Flow adapter unit

Body:

30%

Regulating unit with motorised three-way valve

Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
stainless steel
Seals:
EPDM
10
Code 1715.1
Code 1715.3
Digital controller
Head available at the regulating unit connections

H (m w.g.)
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
(kPa)
230 V - 50 Hz
3 VA
IP 40
50
(kPa)
80
UPS 25-80
70
Actuator
40
60
30
20
50
40
30
230 V - 50 Hz
50 s (rotation 120)
8 VA
0,8 A
IP 44
55C
self-extinguishing VO
1
0
10
0,5
1,5
2,5
20
1
0
10
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
G (m3/h)
3,5
G (m3/h)
Power consumption
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
Speed

NTC type
Working range:
Time constant:
Response:
UPS 25-60
5
4
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Auxiliary micro contact rating:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
H (m w.g.)
60
3
2
1
-10125C
2,5 s
10.000 at 25C
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
700
Insulation
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contacts rating:
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
Pump
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:

model UPS 25-60/UPS 25-80

cast iron GG 15/20
Electric supply:
Maximum ambient humidity:
Protection class:
Pump connections:

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0,038 W/(mK)
40C: 0,045 W/(mK)
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
>1300
0100C
Class B2
3
2
bar
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
1
2
3
1
2
3
13 outlets
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1200
9 outlets
1000
5 outlets
800
Dimensions
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CL
6
2.5
co
n fo r
m e n or m e ISP E
30
40
SL
50
20
60
10
70
C
CAMERA
HOBBY
HOBBY
CALEFFI
CALEFF
30
40
20
CALEFFI
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
CALEFF
CALEFFI
CAMERA
CALEFF
CALEFFI
CAMERA
50
60
10
70
0
80
270410
115
3/4
60
345
50
A
code
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFFI
80
700
CALEFFI
with ups 25-60 pump

with ups 25-80 pump
Panel outlets
A
110150
Flow manifold
equipped with
flow meters and
balancing valves
10
3
2
bar
1
0
1
2
CL
2.5
c on
f or m
30
e n o r m e I SP
40
20
ES L
SYSTEM
FLOW
50
60
10
70
0
80
CALEFFI
30
40
SYSTEM
RETURN
50
20
60
10
70
0
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
Return manifold
equipped with
shut-off valves.
6
2
1
2
4
L/MIN
CALEFFI
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
80
11
12
End fittings with

multi-position ball valves,
automatic air vent,
differential by-pass kit
BOILER BOILER
FLOW RETURN
1
2
3
4
Digital controller for heating

Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60
7
8
9
10
11
12
Adjustable drain cock

Safety thermostat
Flow and return temperature gauges with pocket
Pressure gauge
Primary circuit differential by-pass kit
Hydraulic diagram
Digital controller
SF
10
RT
Temperature gauge
5
9
Temperature probe
7
8
ST
RT
Room thermostat
ST
Safety thermostat
9
4
Ball shut-off valve
SR
Motorised three-way valve

Pressure gauge
Pump
12
11
11
BF
BR
Operating principle
SECONDARY
FLOW
The medium temperature is regulated

by a three-way mixing valve with a
sector obturator comprehensive of an
actuator managed by a specific
digital controller.
The controller receives the signal from
two probes, flow probe on the mixing
valve outlet and probe from the panel
circuit return, and it controls the
movement of the valve.
The flow in the valve is regulated by a
shaped obturator (1) that, by turning,
closes or opens the hot water flow port
(2) and the water returning port from
the circuit (3) to adjust the desired flow
temperature.
Even if the secondary circuit thermal
load or the inlet temperature from the
boiler change, the mixing valve
automatically adjusts the flow rates
until it obtains the optimal flow
temperature.
SECONDARY
RETURN
2
PRIMARY
INLET
PRIMARY
RETURN
Regulating unit body
The valve body, containing the thermal regulating device, is made
out of a single casting with connections to the primary and
secondary circuits. A specific internal channel carries the system
return medium to the regulating valve, making it possible for the unit
to be smaller in size and easy to connect.
Flow unit
The flow unit is made out of a single casting with the necessary
ports to connect with the functional components such as the safety
thermostat, temperature gauge, pressure gauge, drain valve and
flow temperature probe.
Reduced head losses

The three-way mixing valve is equipped with a special obturator acting
on calibrated water orifices. This ensures a high flow rate and a reduced
size, while maintaining accurate temperature control, with no swinging
due to sudden changes in thermal load.
The
actuator
is
electrically connected
through an external
plug-socket system with
a protective rubber cap.
This system does not
require opening the lid
to connect the cables.
In this way, replacing
the actuator (should this
ever be necessary) is
particularly easy to do.
30
Fully open
clo
se
clo
en
open
op
se
70
0
Regulating way - primary inlet
50
60
10
Manual opening
By removing the actuator, the valve can be opened-closed manually
by using a screwdriver.
Fully closed
40
20
C
80
Differential by-pass kit for primary circuit

Operation
The differential by-pass kit for the primary circuit enables
controlling the flow supplied to the heating elements connected
before the outlet to the panel circuit regulating unit.
Removable kit
In case of an hydraulic circuit connected to a Sepcoll or to an
hydraulic separator without primary pump, the kit can be removed and
the hydraulic unit is connected directly. The circuit shut-off valves,
equipped with nut connection, can be removed easily and used
directly on the unit.
Connection without hydraulic separator or SEPCOLL
Differential valve
The differential valve is used to control the head in the primary
distribution circuit. It aids the flow circulation towards the heating
elements and limits overpressure if there are thermostatic or
The differential valve has a fixed setting that cannot be changed.
It is preset to 10 kPa, mean value for the loss of head in the primary
circuit.
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
2000
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
1000
10
800
700
600

The by-pass kit permits hydraulic separation between the primary
and secondary circuits. This hydraulic separation optimizes the
operation of the secondary circuit at the panels thus preventing the
influence on the secondary circuit by any primary circuit flow rate
variation. In this case, the flow rate through the respective circuits
depends solely on the pump flow rate characteristics, preventing
reciprocal influence due to their coupling in series. Two possible
conditions of hydraulic balance are described here.
Secondary
Gs
2
20
10
Direct connection to hydraulic separator or SEPCOLL
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,2
0,1
500
0,5
900
Secondary
Gs
The component is typically sized in order to have the following

working rate:
G primary = G
secondary
(inlet to the mixing valve) + G heating elements
G primary maximum recommended: 1,5 m3/h
Gp Primary
Gp Primary
Digital regulator
2
Operation
The regulator receives the signal from the room thermostat to switch the
pump on and to control the mixing valve.
The regulator acts on the mixing valve following two operating logics,
depending on the state of activation of the return sensor.
In this case the flow temperature TM is kept constant at the value set
with the selector 5) in both heating and cooling. This setting is shown
on the display 1).
In this case the flow temperature TM is changed according to the
temperature measured by the return probe TR. In this way the actual
thermal efficiency of the slab is kept under control and, as a result,
the rooms thermal load as well. This minimizes the systems thermal
response times.
TRset = TMset - 35% (TMset - 20C)
TMcalculated = TMset + (TRset - TR)
Example:
TMset = 40C
TRset = 40 - 0,35 (40 - 20) = 33C
TMcalculated = 40 + (33 - TR)
The new value of TM calculated is shown on the display 1) with a
side bar.
10
11
12
At each update of the TM calculated, the TM measured is displayed

for 5 s, thereafter the new TM calculated is shown again.
The front panel identifies the following functions:
1) Three-digit LCD indicating: the measured or calculated

temperature and the settings of the delays programmed in the
system.
Temperature range displayed: 099C with resolution 0,1C.
TM modification stops when TR reaches TRset.
2) Regulator On/Off function selector.
3) Mixing on opening: LED on.
Curve correction graph with return probe
4) Mixing on closing: LED on.
5) Selector for setting the flow temperature.
Factory configuration: - heating: max 50C
TM;TR
(C)
Flow temperature
limit
50
te
6) Return probe selector.

Probe off: OFF
Probe on: ON
Factory configuration: ON
la
lcu
45
TM
Designed flow
temperature
40
Ca
TM
Flow
temperature
TM Set
ed
lat
7) Pump working (ON): LED on steady.

8) T.S. LED safety temperature. Continuously ON when the limit
signalled by the safety thermostat is reached. Continuously ON
even if the flow/return probe malfunction (see flow/return sensor
paragraph).
lcu
35
TM
Ca
TR Set
Return temperature
designed
30
25
9) Heating/cooling function switch, only with RH% control

components
20
50%
10) Trimmer for maximum pulse duration on the valve.

Adjustable 0,26 s. Factory configuration: 2,5 s.
Pulse value calculation:
100%
150%
Designed
thermal load %
Display
Tpulse (s) =
Actuator rotation time (s)

40
Example:
Tpulse = 120/40 = 3 s
11) Return probe reading delay time trimmer.
Adjustable 1360 s. Factory configuration: 20 s.
12) Valve-motor mechanical delay recovery trimmer.
The three-digit LCD displays the following parameters:

- flow temperature set with selector 5).
After 5 s the measured flow temperature appears.
- measured flow temperature, with return sensor off.
- calculated flow temperature, with return sensor on.
- maximum duration of pulse on the valve, selectable via trimmer 10).
Displayed for 5 s.
- return temperature acquisition delay time, selectable via trimmer 11).
Displayed for 5 s.
- valve-motor mechanical delay recovery, selectable via trimmer 12).
Displayed for 5 s
Back panel
CALEFFI
M 230 V~ 5060 Hz
~
5(2) A / 250 V~

than the setting, the following state comes into operation: pump OFF,
mixing valve closed. The thermostat contact is N/C; if the connection
fails, the regulator is not on.
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
7
SA
SR TA
230 V~ IN OUT
9 10 11 12
TS
Open Close
The regulator is equipped with an auxiliary microswitch that can be
used to control other devices.
13 14 15
1 2 3
16 17 18
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
On the back panel there are terminals for the electrical connections
of the various components.
Electric supply
1 Electric supply 230 V~ Live
2 Electric supply 230 V~ Neutral
3 Ground/Earth
Pump command
4 Ground/Earth
5 Pump command 230 V~ Live
6 Pump command 230 V~ Neutral
Mixer command
7 Valve command for opening
8 Common C
9 Valve command for closing
Example:
When Heating, to turn the water heater on/off.
N/O contact - Pump stationary - ambient thermostat OFF or safety
thermostat on (water heater off).
N/C contact - Pump on - ambient thermostat ON (water heater on).
Contact capacity: 5 A (230 V).
Flow/return probe
detect an ohmic resistance corresponding to short circuiting, the
following operating state comes into operation: pump OFF, mixing
valve closed, LED 8) on steady.
Sensor resistance values table
C
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
97.060
72.940
55.319
42.324
32.654
25.396
C
10
15
20
25
30
35
19.903
15.714
12.493
10.000
8.056
6.530
Flow/return probe
14 Common C
17 Contact for common C ambient thermostat / Contact for common C
safety thermostat
18 Contact for safety thermostat.
Accessories
738
Chrono-thermostat for ambient,
battery operated.
With self-learning program.
With phone programmer.
3 temperature levels + antifreeze.
30 minutes minimum programme.
Code
738107
124 x 90 x 21 mm
5.327
4.370
3.603
2.986
2.488
2.083
C
70
75
80
85
90
95
1.752
1.480
1.255
1.070
915
787
C
100
105
110
115
120
125
680
592
517
450
390
340

The regulator enables selecting the maximum flow temperature for
heating. For this purpose, the regulator base contains specific
dipswitches that enable setting different temperature limits.
Factory configuration:
10 Auxiliary output N/O
11 Auxiliary output common C
12 Auxiliary output N/C
C
40
45
50
55
60
65
- heating max 50C.
Dipswitch position-temperature limit table

Setting
Limit
Dipswitch maximum
0 0 0
50
0 0 1
54
0 1 0
58
0 1 1
62
1 0 0
66
1 0 1
70
1 1 0
74
1 1 1
78
ON
Position 1
Position 0
1 2 3
Pump
Variable speed pump
Three-way valve
Thermostatic valve
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
RT
Lockshield
Shut-off valve
co
n fo
rm e no rme IS PE S
Clock
RT
Room thermostat
Manual valve
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
RT
co
n fo
rm e no rme IS PE S
Code 1715..
Modulating temperature regulating unit. Connections to the primary circuit 3/4 M. Connections to the regulating unit 1 F with nut.
Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4 M - 18 mm. Primary circuit manifold outlet connections 3/4 M - 18 mm. Medium: water and
glycol solutions; Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Control temperature range 2078C. Temperature range at primary circuit inlet
5100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Panel manifolds differential by-pass setting 25 kPa. Primary circuit differential by-pass
setting 10 kPa. Temperature gauge scale 080C. Pressure gauge scale 010 bar. Complete with: flow manifold for panel system
with 5 outlets (from 5 to 13) with brass body, flow rate regulating valve with flow meter with a scale of 15 l/min; return manifold
for panel system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 13) with brass body, shut-off valve. Regulating unit with motorised three-way valve,
three-point actuator, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, protection class IP 44. Digital controller, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz,
comprehensive of probes measuring temperature of flow and return. Flow adapter unit with brass body. By-pass kit with brass body,
POM differential by-pass valve and stainless steel spring. Shut-off valves with brass body and chrome plated brass ball. Safety
thermostat: factory setting 55C 3C, protection class IP 55, contact rating 10 A / 240 V. Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60
(and UPS 25-80), protection class IP 44. Pre-formed PE-X shell insulation for primary circuit. Supplied preassembled in a painted plate
box with lock, depth adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, including floor supports adjustable in height from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI

CALEFFI
RE
IS
171 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01152/07 GB
Function
It is supplied with removable differential by-pass kit for the primary
circuit. This accessory is essential when there is a primary circuit
circulation pump and the radiator circuits or fan coils are controlled
by thermostatic or thermo-electric valves.
Product range
Modulating regulating unit for heating and cooling with UPS 25-60 pump
Modulating regulating unit for heating and cooling with UPS 25-80 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:
Connections:

080C
010 bar
primary circuit:
to regulating unit:
3/4 M
1 F with nut
3/4 M - 18 mm
50 mm

p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
50
45
4000
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
0,2
4500
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
5000
0,1
Shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:
10 kPa (1.000 mm w.g.)


POM
stainless steel
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:
20
778C
5100C
10 bar
0,5
Flow adapter unit

Body:

30%


Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
stainless steel
Seals:
EPDM
10
Code 1715.2
Code 1715.4
Digital controller

H (m w.g.)
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
(kPa)
230 V - 50 Hz
3 VA
IP 40
50
(kPa)
80
UPS 25-80
70
Actuator
40
60
30
20
50
40
30
230 V - 50 Hz
50 s (rotation 120)
8 VA
0,8 A
IP 44
55C
1
0
10
0,5
1,5
2,5
20
1
0
10
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
G (m3/h)
3,5
G (m3/h)
Power consumption
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
Speed

NTC type
Working range:
Time constant:
Response:
UPS 25-60
5
4
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
H (m w.g.)
60
3
2
1
-10125C
2,5 s
10.000 at 25C
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
700
Insulation
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contacts rating:
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
Pump
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:


cast iron GG 15/20
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0,038 W/(mK)
40C: 0,045 W/(mK)
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
>1300
0100C
Class B2
3
2
bar
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
4
L/MIN
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
12 outlets
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
3
4
L/MIN
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1200
8 outlets
1000
5 outlets
800
Dimensions
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CL
m e n or m e ISP E
SL
CALEFFI
150051
Trasformatore
30
Convertitore
AC
50Hz
230V
40
CALEFFI
CAMERA
HOBBY
HOBBY
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
CALEFF
30
40
20
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
CALEFF
CALEFFI
CAMERA
CALEFF
CALEFFI
CAMERA
50
60
10
70
0
80
270410
115
3/4
60
415
50
A
code
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFFI
70
10
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
50
60
20
700
V
DE
2.5
co
n fo r
CALEFFI
150052
with ups 25-60 pump

with ups 25-80 pump
Panel outlets
A
110150
Flow manifold
equipped with
flow meters and
balancing valves
10
3
2
bar
1
0
1
2
CL
CALEFFI
f or m
30
CALEFFI
150051
Trasformatore
e n o r m e I SP
40
ES L
20
60
70
C
SYSTEM
FLOW
50
10
0
150052
V
DE
2.5
c on
80
Convertitore
AC
50Hz
230V
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
T50
6(2)A
14
CALEFFI
30
40
20
SYSTEM
RETURN
50
CALEFFI
60
10
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
Return manifold
equipped with
shut-off valves.
13
1
2
4
L/MIN
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
70
0
80
11
End fittings with

automatic air vent,
12
BOILER BOILER
FLOW RETURN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Digital controller for heating and cooling

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Safety thermostat
Pressure gauge
Max. RH% control probe
Hydraulic diagram
Digital controller
SF
10
13
RT
T C
9
7
14
T C
Transformer/Convertor
Temperature gauge
ST
Temperature probe
Humidity % probe
9
4
6
SR
RT
Room thermostat
ST
Safety thermostat
2
Ball shut-off valve
12

Pressure gauge
11
11
Pump
BF
BR
Operating principle
digital controller.
closes or opens the hot water flow port
(2) and the water returning port from
temperature.
temperature.
SECONDARY
FLOW
SECONDARY
RETURN
2
PRIMARY
INLET
PRIMARY
RETURN
Flow unit
Reduced head losses

The
actuator
is
through an external
30
Fully open
clo
se
clo
en
open
op
se
70
0
50
60
10
Manual opening
Fully closed
40
20
C
80

Operation
Removable kit
Differential valve
distribution circuit. It aids the flow circulation towards the heating or
cooling elements and limits overpressure if there are thermostatic
or thermo-electric valves.
circuit.
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
2000
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
1000
10
800
700
600
Kit di by-pass circuito primario

Secondary
Gs
2
20
10
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,2
0,1
500
0,5
900
Secondary
Gs

working rate:
G primary = G
secondary
Gp Primary
Gp Primary
Digital regulator
2
Operation
on the display 1).
response times.
Example:
TMset = 40C
TRset = 40 - 0,35 (40 - 20) = 33C
side bar.
10
11
12


system.
The return probe is not active in the cooling function.

- cooling: min 14C
Probe off: OFF
Probe on: ON
TM;TR
(C)
Flow temperature
limit
50
te
la
lcu
45
TM
Designed flow
temperature
40
Ca
TM
Flow
temperature
TM Set
ed
lat

signalled by the safety thermostat or by the safety humidostat is
reached. Continuously ON even if the flow/return probe
malfunction (see flow/return sensor paragraph).
lcu
35
TM
Ca
TR Set
Return temperature
designed
30
25
9) Heating/cooling function switch

Tpulse (s) =

40
Example:
Tpulse = 120/40 = 3 s
20
50%
100%
150%
Designed
thermal load %
Display
Displayed for 5 s.
Displayed for 5 s.
Displayed for 5 s
Back panel
CALEFFI
M 230 V~ 5060 Hz
~
5(2) A / 250 V~
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
7
SA
SR TA
9 10 11 12
TS
230 V~ IN OUT
Open Close
13 14 15
1 2 3

heating and the minimum flow temperature for cooling. For this
purpose, the regulator base contains specific dipswitches that enable
setting different temperature limits.
16 17 18
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
Electric supply
3 Ground/Earth
Pump command
4 Ground/Earth
Mixer command
8 Common C
Flow/return probe
14 Common C
safety thermostat and humidity probe convertor
18 Contact for safety thermostat and humidity probe convertor.
Example:
When Cooling, to turn the refrigerating unit on/off.
N/O contact - Pump stationary - ambient thermostat OFF or RH%
limit probe on (refrigerating unit off).
N/C contact - Pump on - ambient thermostat ON (refrigerating unit on).
Flow/return probe
C
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
97.060
72.940
55.319
42.324
32.654
25.396
C
10
15
20
25
30
35
19.903
15.714
12.493
10.000
8.056
6.530
C
40
45
50
55
60
65
5.327
4.370
3.603
2.986
2.488
2.083
- heating max. 50C

- cooling: min. 14C.
C
70
75
80
85
90
95
1.752
1.480
1.255
1.070
915
787
C
100
105
110
115
120
125
680
592
517
450
390
340
Setting
Limit
Limit
Dipswitch maximum minimum
0 0 0
50
14
0 0 1
54
13
0 1 0
58
12
0 1 1
62
11
1 0 0
66
10
1 0 1
70
9
1 1 0
74
8
1 1 1
78
7
ON
Position 1
Position 0
1 2 3
Maximum temperature limit for cooling

When cooling, the flow temperature can be selected no higher than
25C.
Relative humidity control
When using the cooling regulator, it is necessary to use the specific
relative humidity probe. This probe has the task of measuring the
limit of relative humidity so as to prevent condensation in the
cooling slab.
It is set for RH=80 85%. On reaching the setting, it triggers the
following operating state: pump ON, mixer closed.
Humidity probe control
At the start of each cooling season, the operating state of the probe
must be checked by placing a moist wad of cotton wool on its
surface; this will cause the mixer to close and the red LED point 8
on the panel front to light up.
Positioning the humidity probe
Depending on the system characteristics, the humidity probe is
located where there is the greatest risk of condensation. It is placed
with the carbon portion upwards, as shown in the following
diagrams.
Top side: carbon
Bottom side: housed on the cooling surface
Steps for correctly positioning the max RH%

limit probe.
The probe is secured to the manifold installed in
the zone where you want to check that the relative
humidity RH% cannot exceed the safety values. It
is secured by means of the two clamps, using the
specific holes.
By controlling the following parameters it is
possible to reach the maximum heating power
delivered by the panel.
- Minimum flow temperature, selectable via
selector (5) on front panel.
- Relative humidity RH% limit point, checked with
- Ambient temperature, checked via ambient thermostat
- Temperature and relative humidity of the ambient air, checked via
fan coil or dehumidifier.
Caution: The RH% limit probe is used to prevent any condensation
from forming. In rooms where there is cooling, there must always be
suitable air treatment.
Humidity probe connection
The humidity probe is connected to the regulator by installing the

transformer and convertor in between.
If you want to monitor various zones at risk of condensation, the
humidity probe must be connected to a suitable interface kit
(transformer, convertor and humidity probe). Up to 12 convertors
plus probes can be connected to a single transformer.
Safety
thermostat
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
ST
150051
150052
Converter
Transformer
AC
50Hz
V
DE
LN
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
230V
24V
24V~
~ ~
1 2 3
4 5 6
Accessories
230 V
Room
thermostat
738
RT

battery operated.
3 temperature levels + anti-freeze.
30-minute minimum programme.
Controller
cod. 161000
13 14 15
16 17 18
13 14 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6
L
230 V~
IN OUT
7 8 9 10 11 12
SA
SR TA
TS
Code
Open Close
738107
124 x 90 x 21 mm
Application diagram
Pump
Lockshield
Variable speed pump
Shut-off valve
Three-way valve
Clock
Thermostatic valve
S/W
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
co
nf o
rme
P ES
no r me I S
CALEFFI
TH Thermostat/Humidostat
TH
Code 1715..
Modulating temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling. Connections to the primary circuit 3/4 M. Connections to the
regulating unit 1 F with nut. Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4 M - 18 mm. Medium: water and glycol solutions; Maximum
percentage of glycol 30%. Control temperature range 778C. Temperature range at primary circuit inlet 5100C. Maximum
working pressure 10 bar. Panel manifolds differential by-pass setting 25 kPa. Primary circuit differential by-pass setting 10 kPa.
Temperature gauge scale 080C. Pressure gauge scale 010 bar. Complete with: flow manifold for panel system with 5 outlets
(from 5 to 12) with brass body, flow rate regulating valve with flow meter with a scale of 15 l/min; return manifold for panel
system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 12) with brass body, shut-off valve. Regulating unit with motorised three-way valve, three-point
actuator, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, protection class IP 44. Digital controller, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, comprehensive of
probes measuring temperature of flow, return and relative humidity. Flow adapter unit with brass body. By-pass kit with brass body,
POM differential by-pass valve and stainless steel spring. Shut-off valves with brass body and chrome plated brass ball. Safety
thermostat: factory setting 55C 3C, protection class IP 55, contact rating 10 A / 240 V. Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60
(and UPS 25-80), protection class IP 44. Pre-formed PE-X shell insulation for primary circuit. Supplied preassembled in a painted
plate box with lock, depth adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, including floor supports adjustable in height from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI

with distribution kit for primary circuit
CALEFFI
RE
IS
171 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01153/07 GB
Function
The temperature regulating unit with the distribution kit for the primary
circuit is made to be used in mixed systems: radiant panels and
radiators or fan coils, in combination with distribution manifolds for
radiant panels.
The function of the kit is to distribute a portion of the medium
flowing from the primary boiler circuit to the heating elements.
It is supplied with manifolds with built-in shut-off and balacing
valves and a differential by-pass kit for the primary circuit. This
accessory is essential when there is a primary circuit circulation
pump and the radiator circuits or fan coils are controlled by
Product range
Modulating regulating unit with distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-60 pump
Modulating regulating unit with distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-80 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:

Connections:

stainless steel
EPDM
stainless steel
ABS
p (kPa)
50
5000
4500
45
4000
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
0,2
p (mm w.g.)

EPDM
3/4 M
1 F with nut
3/4 M - 18 mm
50 mm
0,1
Return manifold
Body:
Shut-off valve
Stem:
Obturator and seals:
Springs:
Control knob:
primary circuit:
to regulating unit:
- primary circuit manifold outlets: 3/4 M - 18 mm

- outlet centre distance:
50 mm
Primary circuit distribution manifolds

Flow manifold
Body:
Obturator:
Hydraulic seals:
080C
010 bar
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
Shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:
10 kPa (1.000 mm w.g.)

27 mm

POM
stainless steel
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)

Primary circuit manifold inside diameter:

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:
20
2078C
5100C
10 bar
0,5
Flow adapter unit

Body:

30%


Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
stainless steel
Seals:
EPDM
10
Code 1715.1 003

Code 1715.3 003
Digital controller

H (m w.g.)
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
(kPa)
230 V - 50 Hz
3 VA
IP 40
50
(kPa)
80
UPS 25-80
70
Actuator
40
60
30
20
50
40
30
230 V - 50 Hz
50 s (rotation 120)
8 VA
0,8 A
IP 44
55C
1
0
10
0,5
1,5
2,5
20
10
0,5
1,5
2,5
G (m3/h)
3,5
G (m3/h)
Power consumption
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
Speed

NTC type
Working range:
Time constant:
Response:
UPS 25-60
5
4
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
H (m w.g.)
60
3
2
1
-10125C
2,5 s
10.000 at 25C
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
700
Insulation
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contacts rating:
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
Pump
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:


cast iron GG 15/20
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0,038 W/(mK)
40C: 0,045 W/(mK)
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
>1300
0100C
Class B2
3
2
bar
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
1
2
3
1
2
3
12 outlets
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1200
8 outlets
1000
5 outlets
800
Dimensions
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CL
6
2.5
co
n fo r
m e n or m e ISP E
30
40
SL
50
20
60
10
70
C
CAMERA
HOBBY
HOBBY
CALEFFI
CALEFF
3/4
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
700
CALEFFI
30
40
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
CALEFF
CALEFFI
CAMERA
CALEFF
CALEFFI
CAMERA
50
20
60
10
70
C
80
270410
129 105
415
50
code
with ups 25-60 pump

with ups 25-80 pump
Radiator outlets
Panel outlets
A
110150
10
3
2
Flow manifold
equipped with
flow meters and
balancing valves
bar
1
0
6
CL
2.5
c on
f or m
30
e n o r m e I SP
40
20
ES L
SYSTEM
FLOW
50
60
10
70
0
80
1
2
3
CALEFFI
30
50
CALEFFI
60
C
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
Return manifold
equipped with
shut-off valves.
SYSTEM
RETURN
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
70
0
40
20
10
1
2
4
L/MIN
80
12
BOILER
FLOW
11
13
BOILER
RETURN
1
2
3
4
Digital controller for heating

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
End fittings with

automatic air vent,

Safety thermostat
Pressure gauge
Distribution manifolds with built-in valves for primary circuit
Hydraulic diagram
Digital controller
SF
10
RT
Temperature gauge
5
9
Temperature probe
7
8
ST
RT
Room thermostat
ST
Safety thermostat
9
4
Ball shut-off valve
6
12
11
SR
BF

Pressure gauge
Pump
11
BR
12
13
Operating principle
SECONDARY
FLOW

digital controller.
closes or opens the hot water flow ports
(2) and the water returning ports from
temperature.
temperature.
SECONDARY
RETURN
2
PRIMARY
INLET
PRIMARY
RETURN
Flow unit
Reduced head losses

The
actuator
is
through an external
30
Fully open
clo
se
clo
en
open
op
se
70
0
50
60
10
Manual opening
Fully closed
40
20
C
80
Distribution and differential by-pass kit for primary circuit

Operation
The distribution and differential by-pass kit for the primary circuit
enables controlling the flow supplied to the heating elements
connected before the outlet to the panel circuit regulating unit.
It is composed of distribution manifolds with built-in regulating and
shut-off valves, and the differential by-pass kit for the primary circuit.

The distribution manifolds are equipped with:
- flow rate regulating valves built into the flow manifold. In this way
it is possible to set the right flow rate and balance the various
connected circuits.
- shut-off valves built into the return manifold. The same circuits can
be automatically shut off by using the thermo-electric controls.
p (kPa)
10
800
700
600
9
8
7
6
400
350
300
250
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
0,2
p (mm w.g.)
2
20
0,5
5
10
0,1
2
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,1
0,2
10
Kv
5,40
4,10
Flow rate regulating valve fully open

Shut-off valve
Kv0,01
540
410
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
10
1000
900
800
700
600
500

p (kPa)
2000
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
16
14
12
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
45
40
35
30
25
20
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
80
70
60
2018
540
50
5,40
5 mm
0,5
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
10090
22
130
320
470
Differential valve
elements and limits overpressure if there are thermostatic or thermoelectric valves.
circuit.
180
160
140
120
F.O.
0,22
1,30
3,20
4,70
10
200
Kv (m3/h) Kv0,01 (l/h)
0,2
500450
Adjustment
position
2 turns
3 turns
4 turns
5 turns
0,1
p (mm w.g.)
1000900
Hydraulic characteristics of flow rate regulating valve

The by-pass kit permits hydraulic separation between the primary and secondary circuits. This hydraulic separation optimizes the operation of
the secondary circuit at the panels thus preventing the influence on the secondary circuit by any primary circuit flow rate variation. In this case,
the flow rate through the respective circuits depends solely on the pump flow rate characteristics, preventing reciprocal influence due to their
coupling in series. Two possible conditions of hydraulic balance are described here. The component is typically sized in order to have the
following working rate:
G primary = G secondary (inlet to the mixing valve) + G heating elements
Secondary
Secondary
Gs
Gs
Gp
Gp
Primary
Primary
Digital regulator
2
Operation
on the display 1).
response times.
Example:
TMset = 40C
TRset = 40 - 0,35 (40 - 20) = 33C
side bar.
10
11
12


system.
TM;TR
(C)
Flow temperature
limit
50
te

Probe off: OFF
Probe on: ON
la
lcu
45
TM
Designed flow
temperature
40
Ca
TM
Flow
temperature
TM Set
ed
lat

signalled by the safety thermostat is reached. Continuously ON
even if the flow/return probe malfunction (see flow/return probe
paragraph).
lcu
35
TM
Ca
TR Set
Return temperature
designed
30
25
9) Heating/cooling function switch, only with RH% control

components
20
50%

100%
150%
Designed
thermal load %
Display
Tpulse (s) =

40
Example:
Tpulse = 120/40 = 3 s

Displayed for 5 s.
Displayed for 5 s.
Displayed for 5 s
Back panel
CALEFFI
M 230 V~ 5060 Hz
~
5(2) A / 250 V~

13 14 15 16 17 18
1
7
SA
SR TA
230 V~ IN OUT
9 10 11 12
TS
Open Close
13 14 15
1 2 3
16 17 18
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
Electric supply
3 Ground/Earth
Pump command
4 Ground/Earth
Mixer command
8 Common C
Flow/return probe
14 Common C
safety thermostat
18 Contact for safety thermostat.
Accessories
738
battery operated.
3 temperature levels + anti-freeze.
30-minute minimum programme.
Code
738107
124 x 90 x 21 mm
Example:
Flow/return probe
C
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
97.060
72.940
55.319
42.324
32.654
25.396
C
10
15
20
25
30
35
19.903
15.714
12.493
10.000
8.056
6.530
C
40
45
50
55
60
65
5.327
4.370
3.603
2.986
2.488
2.083
C
70
75
80
85
90
95
1.752
1.480
1.255
1.070
915
787
C
100
105
110
115
120
125
680
592
517
450
390
340

heating. For this purpose, the regulator base contains specific
dipswitches that enable setting different temperature limits.
- heating max 50C.

Setting
Limit
Dipswitch maximum
0 0 0
50
0 0 1
54
0 1 0
58
0 1 1
62
1 0 0
66
1 0 1
70
1 1 0
74
1 1 1
78
ON
Position 1
Position 0
1 2 3
Application diagram
RT
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
3
2
bar
1
2
1
2
1
2
Thermostatic valve
Shut-off valve
Manual valve
Clock
Room thermostat
RT
1
2
Lockshield
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CL
2.5
co
1
2
CALEFFI
Pump
nf o
rm e n or me I S PES
30
40
20
50
60
10
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
70
0
80
CALEFF
30
40
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
50
60
20
70
10
0
80
Code 1715.. 003
Modulating temperature regulating unit with distribution kit for primary circuit. Connections to the primary circuit 3/4 M.
Connections to the regulating unit 1 F with nut. Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4 M- 18 mm. Primary circuit manifold outlet
connections 3/4 M - 18 mm. Medium: water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Control temperature
range 2078C. Temperature range at primary circuit inlet 5100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Panel manifolds differential
by-pass setting 25 kPa. Primary circuit differential by-pass setting 10 kPa. Temperature gauge scale 080C. Pressure gauge scale
010 bar. Complete with: flow manifold for panel system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 12) with brass body, flow rate regulating valve
with flow meter with a scale of 15 l/min; return manifold for panel system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 12) with brass body, shut-off
valve. Regulating unit with motorised three-way valve, three-point actuator, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, protection class IP 40.
Digital controller, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, comprehensive of probes measuring temperature of flow and return. Flow adapter
unit with brass body. Primary circuit distribution manifolds with 3 outlets, brass body, flow rate regulating and shut-off valves.
By-pass kit with brass body, POM differential by-pass valve and stainless steel spring. Shut-off valves with brass body and chrome
plated brass ball. Safety thermostat: factory setting 55C 3C, protection class IP 55, contact rating 10 A / 240 V. Three-speed
circulation pump UPS 25-60 (and UPS 25-80), protection class IP 44. Pre-formed PE-X shell insulation for primary circuit. Supplied
preassembled in a painted plate box with lock, depth adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, including floor supports adjustable in height
from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI

CALEFFI

RE
IS
171 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01154/07 GB
Function
radiators or fan coils, in combination with distribution manifolds for
radiant panels.
flowing from the primary boiler circuit to the heating or cooling
elements.
It is supplied with manifolds with built-in shut-off and balacing
pump and the radiator circuits or fan coils are controlled by
- Tech. brochure 01144 Pre-assembled distribution manifolds for
radiant panel systems 668...S1 series
Product range
Code 1715.2 003
Code 1715.4 003
Modulating regulating unit for heating and cooling with distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-60 pump
Modulating regulating unit for heating and cooling with distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-80 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:

30%

Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
stainless steel
Seals:
EPDM
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)
Flow adapter unit

Body:

Primary circuit manifold inside diameter:
10 kPa (1.000 mm w.g.)

27 mm

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:

POM
stainless steel
Connections:

50
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
20
2000
45
4000
0,5
4500
10
stainless steel
EPDM
stainless steel
ABS
p (kPa)
5000
0,2
3/4 M
1 F with nut
3/4 M - 18 mm
50 mm
p (mm w.g.)

EPDM
primary circuit:
to regulating unit:
0,1
Return manifold
Body:
Shut-off valve
Stem:
Springs:
Control knob:
080C
010 bar

50 mm

Flow manifold
Body:
Obturator:
Hydraulic seals:
778C
5100C
10 bar

Shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:

Digital controller

H (m w.g.)
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
(kPa)
230 V - 50 Hz
3 VA
IP 40
Actuator
40
80
UPS 25-80
70
60
30
20
50
40
30
230 V - 50 Hz
50 s (rotation 120)
8 VA
0,8 A
IP 44
55C
1
0
0,5
10
1,5
2,5
20
1
0
10
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
G (m3/h)
3,5
G (m3/h)
Power consumption
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
Speed

NTC type
Working range:
Time constant:
Response:
50
6
4
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
UPS 25-60
5
(kPa)
H (m w.g.)
60
3
2
1
-10125C
2,5 s
10.000 at 25C
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
700
Insulation
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contacts rating:
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
Pump
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:


cast iron GG 15/20
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0,038 W/(mK)
40C: 0,045 W/(mK)
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
>1300
0100C
Class B2
3
2
bar
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
4
L/MIN
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
12 outlets
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
3
4
L/MIN
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1200
8 outlets
1000
5 outlets
800
Dimensions
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CL
CALEFFI
2.5
co
n fo r
CALEFFI
m e n or m e ISP E
30
40
20
60
10
150052
Trasformatore
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
WC
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
Convertitore
AC
50Hz
230V
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
700
V
DE
CALEFFI
HOBBY
70
0
150051
SL
50
3/4
CALEFF
30
40
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
CALEFF
CALEFFI
CAMERA
CALEFF
CALEFFI
CAMERA
50
20
60
10
70
C
80
270410
129 105
415
50
code
with ups 25-60 pump

with ups 25-80 pump
Radiator outlets
Panel outlets
A
1715E2 003
3
5
765
1715F2 003
3
6
815
1715G2 003
3
7
865
1715H2 003
3
8
915
110150
1715I2 003
3
9
985
1715L2 003
1715L4 003
3
10
1035
1715M2 003
1715M4 003
3
11
1085
1715N2 003
1715N4 003
3
12
1135
Flow manifold
equipped with flow
meters and
balacing valves
10
3
2
bar
1
0
1
2
CL
CALEFFI
2.5
c on
f or m
30
CALEFFI
e n o r m e I SP
40
60
70
150051
Trasformatore
V
DE
SYSTEM
FLOW
50
20
10
150052
ES L
80
Convertitore
AC
50Hz
230V
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
15
30
40
SYSTEM
RETURN
50
20
60
10
70
0
4
L/MIN
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
80
9
BOILER
FLOW
End fittings with

automatic air vent,
12
11
13
BOILER
RETURN
5
6
7
1
2
3
L/MIN
Return manifold
equipped with
shut-off valves.
14
1
2
3
4
CALEFFI
1
2
4
L/MIN
Digital controller for heating and cooling

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Safety thermostat
Pressure gauge
Hydraulic diagram
Digital controller
SF
10
14
RT
T C
9
7
15
T C
Transformer/Convertor
Temperature gauge
ST
Temperature probe
Humidity % probe
4
6
3
12
11
SR
2
RT
Room thermostat
ST
Safety thermostat
Ball shut-off valve
BF
11
12
13
Pressure gauge
BR
Pump
Operating principle
SECONDARY
FLOW

digital controller.
temperature.
temperature.
SECONDARY
RETURN
2
PRIMARY
INLET
PRIMARY
RETURN
Flow unit
Reduced head losses

The
actuator
is
through an external
30
Fully open
clo
se
clo
en
open
op
se
70
0
50
60
10
Manual opening
Fully closed
40
20
C
80

Operation
enables controlling the flow supplied to the heating or cooling
elements connected before the outlet to the panel circuit regulating
unit.
shut-off valves, and the differential by-pass kit for the primary circuit.
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
10090
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
45
40
35
30
25
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
0,5
2018
0,2
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
16
14
12
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
20
Kv
5,40
4,10

Shut-off valve
Kv0,01
540
410
p (kPa)
2000
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
1000
10
900
800
700
600
500

p (mm w.g.)
10
0,1
2
0,5
0,1
0,2
10
Differential valve
cooling elements and limits overpressure if there are thermostatic or
circuit.
180
160
140
120
540
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
200
50
5,40
5 mm
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
22
130
320
470
20
400
350
300
250
500450
F.O.
0,22
1,30
3,20
4,70
0,5
10
9
8
7
6
Kv (m3/h) Kv0,01 (l/h)
10
p (kPa)
800
700
600
Adjustment
position
2 turns
3 turns
4 turns
5 turns
0,2
p (mm w.g.)
1000900
0,1

connected circuits.
be automatically shut off by using the thermo-electric controls.

Secondary
Secondary
Gs
Gs
Gp
Gp
Primary
Primary
Digital regulator
2
Operation
on the display 1).
response times.
Example:
TMset = 40C
TRset = 40 - 0,35 (40 - 20) = 33C
side bar.
10
11
12


system.
The return probe is not active in the cooling function.
3) Mixer on opening: LED on.

4) Mixer on closing: LED on.
- cooling: min 14C
Probe off: OFF
Probe on: ON
TM;TR
(C)
Flow temperature
limit
50
te
la
lcu
45
TM
Designed flow
temperature
40
Ca
TM
Flow
temperature
TM Set
ed
lat

signalled by the safety thermostat or by the safety humidostat is
reached. Continuously ON even if the flow/return sensors
malfunction (see flow/return sensor paragraph).
lcu
35
TM
Ca
TR Set
Return temperature
designed
30
25
9) Heating/cooling function switch

Tpulse (s) =

40
Example:
Tpulse = 120/40 = 3 s
20
50%
100%
150%
Designed
thermal load %
Display
Displayed for 5 s.
Displayed for 5 s.
Displayed for 5 s
Back panel
CALEFFI
M 230 V~ 5060 Hz
~
5(2) A / 250 V~
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
7
SA
SR TA
9 10 11 12
TS
230 V~ IN OUT
Apre Chiude
13 14 15
1 2 3

heating and the minimum flow temperature for cooling. For this
purpose, the regulator base contains specific dipswitches that enable
setting different temperature limits.
16 17 18
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
Electric supply
3 Ground/Earth
Pump command
4 Ground/Earth
Mixer command
8 Common C
Flow/return probe
14 Common C
safety thermostat and humidity probe convertor
18 Contact for safety thermostat and humidity probe convertor.
Example:
When Cooling, to turn the refrigerating unit on/off.
N/O contact - Pump stationary - ambient thermostat OFF or RH%
limit probe on (refrigerating unit off).
N/C contact - Pump on - ambient thermostat ON (refrigerating unit on).
Flow/return probe

C
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
97.060
72.940
55.319
42.324
32.654
25.396
C
10
15
20
25
30
35
19.903
15.714
12.493
10.000
8.056
6.530
C
40
45
50
55
60
65
5.327
4.370
3.603
2.986
2.488
2.083
- heating max 50C

- cooling: min 14C.
C
70
75
80
85
90
95
1.752
1.480
1.255
1.070
915
787
C
100
105
110
115
120
125
680
592
517
450
390
340
Setting
Limit
Limit
Dipswitch maximum minimum
0 0 0
50
14
0 0 1
54
13
0 1 0
58
12
0 1 1
62
11
1 0 0
66
10
1 0 1
70
9
1 1 0
74
8
1 1 1
78
7
ON
Position 1
Position 0
1 2 3
Maximum temperature limit for cooling

When cooling, the flow temperature can be selected no higher than
25C.
cooling slab.
It is set for RH=80 85%. On reaching the setting, it triggers the
diagrams.
Top side: carbon
Steps for correctly positioning the max RH%

limit probe.
The probe is secured to the manifold installed in
the zone where you want to check that the relative
humidity RH% cannot exceed the safety values. It
is secured by means of the two clamps, using the
specific holes.
By controlling the following parameters it is
possible to reach the maximum heating power
delivered by the panel.
- Minimum flow temperature, selectable via
selector (5) on front panel.
- Relative humidity RH% limit point, checked with
- Ambient temperature, checked via ambient thermostat
Humidity probe connection
The humidity probe is connected to the regulator by installing the

transformer and convertor in between.
If you want to monitor various zones at risk of condensation, the
humidity probe must be connected to a suitable interface kit
(transformer, convertor and humidity probe). Up to 12 convertors
plus probes can be connected to a single transformer.
Safety
thermostat
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Convertitore
Trasformatore
AC
50Hz
V
DE
LN
ST
150051
150052
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
230V
24V
24V~
~ ~
1 2 3
4 5 6
Accessories
230 V
Room
thermostat
738
RT

battery operated.
3 temperature levels + antifreeze.
30 minutes minimum program.
Controller
cod. 161000
13 14 15
16 17 18
13 14 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6
L
230 V~
IN OUT
7 8 9 10 11 12
SA
SR TA
TS
Code
Open Close
738107
124 x 90 x 21 mm
Application diagram
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
MIN
BBY
Pump
Lockshield
Three-way valve
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
Manual valve
E/I
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
3
2
bar
1
2
230V
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
2.5
rm e n or me I S PES
30
40
50
60
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
70
0
Convertitore
AC
50Hz
TA
nf o
20
10
V
DE
TH
CL
co
CALEFFI
150051
Trasformatore
1
2
CALEFFI
150052
CALEFFI
80
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
T50
6(2)A
CALEFF
30
40
20
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
50
60
10
70
0
80
Code 1715.. 003
Modulating temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling with distribution kit for primary circuit. Connections to the primary circuit
3/4 M. Connections to the regulating unit 1 F with nut. Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4 M - 18 mm. Primary circuit manifold outlet
connections 3/4 M - 18 mm. Medium: water and glycol solutions; Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Control temperature range
778C. Maximum temperature at primary circuit inlet 100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Panel manifolds differential by-pass setting
25 kPa. Primary circuit differential by-pass setting 10 kPa. Temperature gauge scale 080C. Pressure gauge scale 010 bar. Complete with:
flow manifold for panel system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 12) with brass body, flow rate regulating valve with flow meter with a scale of
15 l/min; return manifold for panel system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 12) with brass body, shut-off valve. Regulating unit with motorised
three-way valve, three-point actuator, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, protection class IP 44. Digital controller, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz,
comprehensive of probes measuring temperature of flow, return and relative humidity. Flow adapter unit with brass body. Primary circuit
distribution manifolds with 3 outlets, brass body, flow rate regulating and shut-off valves. By-pass kit with brass body, POM differential
by-pass valve and stainless steel spring. Shut-off valves with brass body and chrome plated brass ball. Safety thermostat: factory setting
55C 3C, protection class IP 55, contact rating 10 A / 240 V. Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60 (and UPS 25-80), protection class
IP 44. Pre-formed PE-X shell insulation for primary circuit. Supplied preassembled in a painted plate box with lock, depth adjustable from
110 to 150 mm, including floor supports adjustable in height from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI
Set point temperature regulating unit
CALEFFI
RE
IS
172 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01155/07 GB
Function
systems, in combination with distribution manifolds. The set point
regulating unit performs the function of keeping the flow
temperature constant, at the set value, for the medium distributed
in a low temperature system for floor radiant panels.
In this particular series, the temperature is regulated by a specific
hydraulic unit equipped with a thermostatic three-way valve with a
built-in sensor.
primary circuit. This accessory is essential when there is a primary
circuit circulation pump and the radiator circuits are controlled by
Product range
Pre-assembled set point regulating unit with manifolds and box, with UPS 25-60 pump
Pre-assembled set point regulating unit with manifolds and box, with UPS 25-80 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:
primary circuit:
to regulating unit:
3/4 M
1 F with nut
3/4 M - 18 mm
50 mm

p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
45
4000
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
4500
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
Connections: -
080C
010 bar


20
Shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:
10 kPa (1.000 mm w.g.)
0,5

POM
stainless steel
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:
2555C
2C
90C
10 bar
0,2
Flow adapter unit

Body:

Accuracy:
0,1
Regulating unit with thermostatic three-way valve

Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
PSU
Seals:
EPDM

30%
10
Code 1725.1
Code 1725.3
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contact rating:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
H (m w.g.)
(kPa)
50
UPS 25-60
5
(kPa)
H (m w.g.)
60
80
UPS 25-80
70
60
6
4
Electrical connection diagram
40
Unit
pump
Room
thermostat
RT
L
N
ST
User side
0,5
30
20
40
30
10
20
1,5
2,5
10
1
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
G (m3/h)
3,5
G (m3/h)
Power consumption
Speed
Safety
thermostat
3
2
1
Pump
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
700
Insulation
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:

cast iron GG 15/20
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0,038 W/(mK)
40C: 0,045 W/(mK)
Coefficient of resistance
to the diffusion of water vapour (DIN 52615):
Dimensions
4 outlets
7 outlets
1
2
1
2
nf o
rm
e n o r me IS P
Panel outlets
A
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
11 outlets
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
13 outlets
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
ES L
BAGNO
with ups 25-60 pump

with ups 25-80 pump
1
2
co
code
50
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
CALEFFI
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
CALEFFI
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
CALEFFI
>1300
0100C
Class B2
c on
for m
ES L
e no r m e I S P
Flow manifold
equipped with
flow meters and
balancing valves
SYSTEM
FLOW
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
2
1
CALEFFI
Return manifold
equipped with
shut-off valves.
SYSTEM
RETURN
5
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
WC
SOGGIORNO
End fittings with multi-position

ball valves, automatic air vent,
BOILER
FLOW
CAMERA
BOILER
RETURN
1 Thermostatic three-way mixing valve with built-in sensor

2 Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60
Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-80.
3 Adjustable drain cock
4 Safety thermostat
5 Flow and return temperature gauges with pocket
6
7
8
9
Pressure gauge
Electrical wiring case
Hydraulic diagram
RT
Manual drain cock
SF
Temperature gauge
6
9
5
3
Room thermostat
ST
Safety thermostat
ST
Ball shut-off valve
2
1
SR
RT
Thermostatic three-way valve

Pressure gauge
Pump
8
7
BF
BR
Operating principle
SECONDARY
FLOW
The regulator element inside the

thermostatic
three-way
valve
consists of a temperature sensor (1)
fully immersed in the mixed water
outlet chamber. By expanding and
contracting, it continuously ensures
a correct proportioning of hot water,
coming from the boiler, and water
returning from the panel circuit.
The water intake is regulated by a
shaped obturator (2) that slides
inside a special cylinder placed
between the hot water flow (3) and
the water returning from the circuit
(4).
Even if the thermal load of the
secondary circuit or the inlet
temperature from the boiler change,
the mixing valve automatically
adjusts the flow rates until it obtains
the set temperature.
SECONDARY
RETURN
The valve body, containing the temperature regulating
device, is made out of a single casting with connections to
the primary and secondary circuits. A specific internal
channel carries the system return medium to the regulating
valve, making it possible for the unit to be smaller in size and
easy to connect.
Reduced head losses

The three-way mixing valve is equipped with a special
obturator that acts on calibrated water orifices. This ensures
a high flow rate and a reduced size, while maintaining
accurate temperature control.
1
PRIMARY
INLET
PRIMARY
RETURN
Flow unit
The flow unit is made out of a single casting with the
necessary ports to connect with the functional components
such as the safety thermostat, temperature gauge, pressure
gauge and drain valve.
The materials used for the mixing valve construction
eliminate potential sticking due to scale. All functional parts,
such as the obturator, valve seats and guides, have been
made using a special material with low friction coefficient,
which ensures performance over time.
30
40
20
Low inertia thermostat sensor

The temperature-sensitive element, the engine of the
thermostatic three-way valve, has low thermal inertia; in this
way it can quickly react to changes in the conditions of inlet
pressure and temperature, shortening the valve response
time as the thermal load changes.
50
60
10
70
C
80

The control knob is used to adjust temperature in a full turn
(360) between min. and max. It also has tamper protection
for locking the temperature at the set value.
Adjustment locking
Turn the knob onto the
required number, unscrew
the upper screw, remove the
knob and put it back on so
that the internal reference
couples with the protrusion
on the knob carrier ring nut.
35
40
30
25
MI N
MA

Operation
Removable kit
Differential valve
circuit.
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
2000
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
1000
10
800
700
600

Secondary
Gs
2
20
10
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,2
0,1
500
0,5
900
Secondary
Gs

working rate:
G primary = G
secondary
Gp Primary
Gp Primary
Pump
Variable speed pump
Three-way valve
Thermostatic valve
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
RT
Lockshield
Shut-off valve
co n
f
o rme
ES
norm e IS P
Clock
RT Room thermostat
Manual valve
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
RT
co n
f
o r me
ES
norm e IS P
Code 1725.1
Set point temperature regulating unit. Connections to the primary circuit 3/4 M. Connections to the regulating unit 1 F with
nut. Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4 M - 18 mm. Medium: water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol
30%. Adjustment temperature range 2555C. Maximum temperature at primary circuit inlet 90C. Maximum working
pressure 10 bar. Panel manifolds differential by-pass setting 25 kPa. Primary circuit differential by-pass setting 10 kPa.
Temperature gauge scale 080C. Pressure gauge scale 010 bar.
Complete with: flow manifold for panel system with 3 outlets (from 3 to 13) with brass body, flow rate regulating valve with
flow meter with a scale of 15 l/min; return manifold for panel system with 3 outlets (from 3 to 13) with brass body, shut-off
valve. Regulating unit with thermostatic three-way valve with brass body and headwork, PSU obturator and EPDM seals. Flow
adapter unit with brass body. By-pass kit with brass body, POM differential by-pass valve and stainless steel spring.
Shut-off valves with brass body and chrome plated brass ball. Electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz. Safety thermostat: factory setting
55C 3C, protection class IP 55, contact rating 10 A / 240 V. Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60 (and UPS 25-80),
protection class IP 44. Pre-formed PE-X shell insulation for primary circuit. Supplied preassembled in a painted steel box with lock,
depth adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, including floor supports adjustable in height from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI
Set point temperature regulating unit
CALEFFI

RE
IS
172 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01156/07 GB
Function
The temperature regulating unit with the distribution kit for the
primary circuit is made to be used in mixed systems: radiant panels
and radiators, in combination with distribution manifolds for radiant
panels.
The set point regulating unit performs the function of keeping the
flow temperature constant, at the set value, for the medium
distributed in a low temperature system for floor radiant panels.
built-in sensor.
flowing from the primary boiler circuit to the heating emitters.
It is supplied with manifolds with built-in shut-off and balancing
pump and the radiator circuits are controlled by thermostatic or
Product range
Code 1725.1 003 Pre-assembled set point regulating unit with manifolds and box, distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-60 pump
Code 1725.3 003 Pre-assembled set point regulating unit with manifolds and box, distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-80 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:
stainless steel
EPDM
stainless steel
ABS

50 mm
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
4500
45
4000
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
3/4 M
1 F with nut
3/4 M - 18 mm
50 mm
Return manifold
Body:
Shut-off valve
Stem:
Springs:
Control knob:
primary circuit:
to regulating unit:

Flow manifold
Body:
Obturator:
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM
Connections: -
080C
010 bar
20


0,5
Shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:
10 kPa (1.000 mm w.g.)

27 mm
10

POM
stainless steel
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)

Primary circuit manifold inner diameter:

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:
2555C
2C
90C
10 bar
0,2
Flow adapter unit

Body:

Accuracy:
0,1

Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
PSU
Seals:
EPDM

30%
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contacts rating:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
H (m w.g.)
(kPa)
50
UPS 25-60
5
(kPa)
H (m w.g.)
60
80
UPS 25-80
70
6
4
Electrical connections diagram
40
Unit
pump
Room
thermostat
User side
RT
L
N
ST
30
20
50
40
30
60
10
0,5
1,5
2,5
20
1
0
10
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
G (m3/h)
3,5
G (m3/h)
Power consumption
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
Speed
Safety
thermostat
3
2
1
Pump
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
700
Insulation
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:

cast iron GG 15/20
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
closed cells expanded PE-X

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0,038 W/(mK)
40C: 0,045 W/(mK)
Coefficient of resistance
to the diffusion of water vapour (DIN 52615):
>1300
0100C
Class B2
3
2
1
2
bar
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
4
L/MIN
1
2
3
1
2
12 outlets.
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
SOGGIORNO
WC
3
4
L/MIN
1
2
3
1
2
1200
8 outlets.
1000
5 outlets.
800
Dimensions
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
SOGGIORNO
WC
6
CL
2.5
co
nf o
rm
30
e n o r me IS P
40
20
ES L
50
60
10
CALEFFI
70
C
CAMERA
CALEFFI
30
40
20
WC
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFFI
BAGNO
CALEFFI
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
CALEFF
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
50
60
10
70
0
80
270410
129 105
BAGNO
CALEFF
MAX 7
MIN
3/4
HOBBY
BAGNO
80
700
HOBBY
50
405
code
110150
with ups 25-60 pump 1725C1003 1725D1003 1725E1003 1725F1003 1725G1003 1725H1003 1725I1003 1725L1003 1725M1003 1725N1003
with ups 25-80 pump
1725L3003 1725M3003 1725N3003
Radiator outlets
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Panel outlets
A
3
655
4
705
5
755
6
805
7
855
8
905
9
975
10
1025
11
1075
12
1125
3
2
1
0
6
CL
10
2.5
c on
f orm
30
e no r m e I SP
40
20
E SL
SYSTEM
FLOW
50
60
10
70
0
Flow manifold
equipped with flow
meters and
balancing valves
bar
80
1
2
1
2
CALEFFI
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
Return manifold
equipped with
shut-off valves.
2
MAX 7
MIN
30
40
60
70
C
80
SYSTEM
RETURN
50
20
10
CALEFFI
BOILER
FLOW
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC

BOILER
RETURN
CAMERA
1. Thermostatic three-way mixing valve with built-in sensor

2. Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60
Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-80.
3. Adjustable drain cock
4. Safety thermostat
5. Flow and return temperature gauges with pocket
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Pressure gauge
Primary circuit distribution manifolds with built-in valves
Plumbing diagram
RT
Manual drain valve
SF
6
Temperature gauge
10
5
RT
Room thermostat
ST
Safety thermostat
3
4
ST
Ball shut-off valve
SR

Pressure gauge
Pump
BF
BR
Operating principle
SECONDARY
FLOW
The regulator element inside the

thermostatic
three-way
valve
consists of a temperature sensor (1)
fully immersed in the mixed water
outlet chamber. By expanding and
contracting, it continuously ensures
a correct proportioning of hot water,
coming from the boiler, and water
returning from the panel circuit.
The water intake is regulated by a
shaped obturator (2) that slides
inside a special cylinder placed
between the hot water flow (3) and
the water returning from the circuit
(4).
Even if the thermal load of the
secondary circuit or the inlet
temperature from the boiler change,
the mixing valve automatically
adjusts the flow rates until it obtains
the set temperature.
SECONDARY
RETURN
The valve body containing the temperature regulating device
is made out of a single casting with connections to the
primary and secondary circuits. A specific internal channel
carries the system return medium to the regulating valve,
making it possible for the unit to be smaller in size and easy
to connect.
Reduced head losses

1
PRIMARY
INLET
PRIMARY
RETURN
Flow unit
such as the safety thermostat, temperature gauge, pressure
gauge and drain valve.
30
40
20
Low-inertia thermostat sensor

50
60
10
70
C
80

Adjustment locking
35
40
30
25
MI N
MA

Operation
The distribution and differential by-pass kit for the primary
circuit enables controlling the flow to the heating elements
connected before the outlet to the regulating unit for the
panel circuit.
It is composed of distribution manifolds with regulating and
shut-off valves and the differential by-pass kit for the primary
circuit.
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
45
40
35
30
25
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
0,5
2018
0,2
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
16
14
12
Kv
5,40
4,10

Shut-off valve
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
20
10
0,2
2
0,5
0,1
0,1
10
Kv0,01
540
410

- Kv0.01 = flow rate in l/h for a loss of head of 1 kPa
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
2000
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
1000
10
900
800
700
600
500
10090
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
Differential valve
The differential valve is used to control the head in the
primary distribution circuit. It aids the flow circulation towards
the heating or cooling elements and limits overpressure if
there are thermostatic or thermo-electric valves.
The differential valve has a fixed setting that cannot be
changed. It is preset to 10 kPa, mean value for the loss of
head in the primary circuit.
180
160
140
120
540
20
200
50
5,40
5 mm
0,5
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
22
130
320
470
10
400
350
300
250
0,22
1,30
3,20
4,70
9
8
7
6
500450
F.O.
10
800
700
600
Kv (m3/h) Kv0,01 (l/h)
0,2
p (kPa)
Adjustment
position
2 turns
3 turns
4 turns
5 turns
p (mm w.g.)
1000900
0,1

- flow regulating valves built into the flow manifold. In this way
it is possible to set the right flow rate and balance the
various connected circuits.
- shut-off valves built into the return manifold. The same circuits
can be automatically shut off by using the thermo-electric
actuators.

The by-pass kit permits hydraulic separation between the primary and secondary circuits. This hydraulic separation optimizes the
operation of the secondary circuit at the panels thus preventing the influence on the secondary circuit by any primary circuit flow
rate variation. In this case, the flow rate through the respective circuits depends solely on the pump flow rate characteristics,
preventing reciprocal influence due to their coupling in series. Two possible conditions of hydraulic balance are described here.
The component is typically sized in order to have the following working rate:
Secondary
Secondary
Gs
Gs
Gp
Gp
Primary
Primary
Application diagram
Pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
RT Room thermostat
Manual valve
Lockshield
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
3
2
bar
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
RT
1
2
L/MIN
CALEFFI
L/MIN
L/MIN
CL
6
2.5
co n
fo
SL
rm e no r m e I S P E
30
40
20
50
60
10
CALEFFI
MAX 7
CALEFFI
30
MIN
BAGNO
WC
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
80
40
20
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
50
60
10
70
0
80
HOBBY
CAMERA
70
0
Code 1725.. 003
Set point temperature regulating unit with distribution kit for primary circuit. Connections to the primary circuit 3/4 M.
Connections to the regulating unit 1 F with nut. Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4 M - 18 mm. Primary circuit manifold
outlet connections 3/4 M - 18 mm. Medium: water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Adjustment
temperature range 2555C. Maximum temperature at primary circuit inlet 90C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Panel
manifolds differential by-pass setting 25 kPa. Primary circuit differential by-pass setting 10 kPa. Temperature gauge scale
080C. Pressure gauge scale 010 bar.
Complete with: flow manifold for panel system with 3 outlets (from 3 to 12) with brass body, flow rate regulating valve with
flow meter with a scale of 15 l/min; return manifold for panel system with 3 outlets (from 3 to 12) with brass body, shut-off
adapter unit with brass body. Primary circuit distribution manifolds with 3 outlets, brass body, flow rate regulating and
shut-off valves. By-pass kit with brass body, POM differential by-pass valve and stainless steel spring.
Shut-off valves with brass body and chrome plated brass ball. Electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz. Safety thermostat: factory setting
55C 3C, protection class IP 55, contacts rating 10 A / 240 V. Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60 (and UPS 25-80),
protection class IP 44. Pre-formed PE-X shell insulation for primary circuit. Supplied preassembled in a painted steel box with
lock, depth adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, including floor supports adjustable in height from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI
Outside compensated temperature

regulating unit
RE
IS
174 series
TERE
CALEFFI

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01157/08 GB
Function
The outside compensated temperature regulating unit,
complete with temperature digital regulator, controls the
temperature of the medium sent to the panels, with a
compensation depending on the outside and inside
temperature and the actual thermal load.
In this particular series, the temperature is regulated by a
dedicated hydraulic unit equipped with a specific motorised
three-way valve.
circuit circulation pump and the radiator circuits or fan coils are
controlled by thermostatic or thermo-electric valves.
Product range
Code 1745.1 Outside compensated temperature regulating unit, with UPS 25-60 pump
Code 1745.3 Outside compensated temperature regulating unit, with UPS 25-80 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:

Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
stainless steel
Seals:
EPDM

2090C
5100C
10 bar
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)
10 kPa (1.000 mm w.g.)
Flow adapter unit

Body:

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:


POM
stainless steel
Connections: -
080C
010 bar
primary circuit:
to regulating unit:
3/4 M
1 F with nut
3/4 M - 18 mm
50 mm

p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
20
10
0,2
2
2000
45
4000
0,5
4500
0,1
Shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:

30%
Digital controller

H (m w.g.)
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
(kPa)
230 V - 50 Hz
5,5 VA
IP 40
50
(kPa)
80
UPS 25-80
70
Actuator
40
60
30
20
50
40
30
230 V - 50 Hz
50 s (rotation 120)
8 VA
0,8 A
IP 44
55C
1
0
10
0,5
1,5
2,5
20
1
0
10
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
G (m3/h)
3,5
G (m3/h)
Power consumption
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
Speed

NTC type
Working range:
Two-wire cable
UPS 25-60
5
4
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
H (m w.g.)
60
3
2
1
-20100C
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
1000
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contact rating:
Insulation
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:
Pump
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:

cast iron GG 15/20
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0,038 W/(mK)
40C: 0,045 W/(mK)

230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
>1300
0100C
class B2
5 Outlets
Optimiser
9 Outlets
13 Outlets
1200
1000
Optimiser
800
Dimensions
Optimiser
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CL
6
2.5
co
n fo r
m e n or m e ISP E
30
40
SL
50
60
20
CALEFFI
CAMERA
HOBBY
HOBBY
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
700
SOGGIORNO
CALEFF
30
40
20
CALEFF
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CAMERA
CALEFF
CALEFFI
CAMERA
50
60
10
70
0
80
270410
115
3/4
60
345
50
A
code
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFFI
70
10
with pump ups 25-60

with pump ups 25-80
Panel outlets
A
110150
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Optimiser
11
Optimiser
10
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
1
0
30
e n o r m e I SP
40
ES L
SYSTEM
FLOW
50
60
10
70
0
80
8
9
6
15
2
30
40
60
70
C
12
1
2
3
4
L/MIN
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
Return manifold
equipped with
shut-off valves.
13
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI

differential by-pass kit and
fill/drain hose connection.
BOILER
FLOW
5
6
7
8
3
L/MIN
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
3
14
1
2
4
L/MIN
SYSTEM
RETURN
50
20
10
0
1
2
3
4
2.5
f or m
20
1
2
CL
c on
Optimiser
Flow manifold
equipped with flow meters
and balancing valves.
BOILER
RETURN
Digital temperature controller Optimiser

9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Safety thermostat
Pressure gauge
Remote control and room probe thermostat
Interface wire connection
Hydraulic diagram
14
15
Digital controller Optimiser
SF
11
RPT
5
Temperature gauge
8
9
10
Temperature probe
ST
RPT
ST
Room probe thermostat

Safety thermostat
4
Ball shut-off valve
SR
2
Pressure gauge
13
Pump
12
12
BF
BR

Operating principle
SECONDARY
FLOW

digital controller.
four probes, flow probe on the mixing
valve outlet, probe on the panel circuit
return, outside probe and room probe.
It controls the valve movement.
temperature.
temperature.
SECONDARY
RETURN
2
PRIMARY
INLET
PRIMARY
RETURN
Manual opening
Fully closed
Reduced head losses
Fully open
op
open
en
clo
clo
se

se
The actuator is electrically
connected through an
external plug-socket system
with a protective rubber
cap. This system does not
require opening the lid to
connect the cables.
In this way, replacing the
actuator (should this ever be
necessary) is particularly
easy to do.
MAX 0,8 A
COMMON
30
40
20
N
L
50
60
10
230 V
CLOSES
ACTUATOR
OPENS
The actuator is equipped
with
an
auxiliary
microswitch that can be
used to switch on the
generator.
Mixing valve fully closed:
contact OFF.
Start opening mixing
valve: contact ON.
Flow unit
thermostat, temperature gauge, pressure gauge, drain cock and
70
0
80

Operation
Removable kit
Differential valve
circuit.
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
2000
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
1000
10
800
700
600

Secondary
Gs
2
20
10
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,2
0,1
500
0,5
900
Secondary
Gs

working rate:
G primary = G
secondary
Gp Primary
Gp Primary
Optimiser
Description of controls
1. The LED gives information on the status by means of a

multicoloured diode; the statuses it indicates are as follows:
- flashing green: controller initialisation
- fixed green: controller operating
- flashing green/red: controller operating with probe error
- flashing red: controller verification loop
- prolonged red: controller error
2. The mini-DIN connector, on the front of the panel, makes it
possible to view all the parameters managed by the control.
A Sub D 9-pole mini-DIN data transmission cable is used for the
connection to a PC. The cable and specific transmission
program are available as optionals.
3. The display shows the text in a clear way, giving all the information and menu points. All the values displayed are continuously refreshed.
The monitor light switches on automatically when a function is selected. If no other commands are given in 4 minutes, the monitor goes back
to the standard page and the light switches off.
4. The Select knob can be turned to the right (+) or left (-) to go to the different menu, function or value editing fields. Press the knob to select
any of the menu points.
Room temperature management
The remote control can be used to change the room temperature, either increasing it or decreasing it in relation to a standard reference value.
The change ( 5 K) is shown in the lines on the display, with increments of 0,5 K in relation to the reference values: comfort 20C; set-back
correction 18C. The actual room temperature is shown on the fourth line on the display.
5. Function keys:
-
Esc
Info
Set
Changes the display of the selected menu point and goes back to the previous menu level.
The changed data are not accepted and not recorded.
Displays brief information about the current menu point.
The change that has been made is recorded.
Remote control base

with room probe
Interface wiring box
Transmission interface
Optimiser
Optimiser
Optimiser
CALEFFI
Installation of the control on board the controller

The control front panel can also be installed on board the controller. In this case, the wiring box and the base containing the room probe are
no longer needed; the controller is no longer able to manage the room probe.
Optimiser
CALEFFI
Immediate comfort function

This makes it possible to change the comfort without changing the controller set parameters.
The second line of the display shows the standard correction value - 0 of the characteristic curve. This value can be increased to + 5 or reduced
to - 5 by turning the knob to the right or to the left respectively. Each single change corresponds to a 5% shift in the characteristic curve.
Example, referred to factory configuration: flow temperature-heating start-up T = 20C and flow T at outside min. temp. = 40C corresponds to
a temperature range T of 20 K (100%). The adjustment of the correction is +1; this means that the temperature of the mixing valve circuit 1
is raised by 1 K (5% of T), thus the flow temperature will be 41C.
Terminal board
L
Live
N
Neutral
La Mixing valve relay contact
a1 Mixing valve opening contact
a2 Mixing valve closing contact
N
Neutral output for mixing valve and pump
b0 Pump relay contact
b1 Pump contact
La a1 a2 N
Probe connections
Terminal board X
X1 Outside probe
X2 Common outside and room probes
X3 Room probe
X4 Flow probe
X5 Common flow and return probes
X6 Return probe
b0 b1
( (
230V~
L N
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
Activating the internal battery

The protective tab must be removed from the battery before setting the operating data.
Probe resistance table
C
-20
-18
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
14616
13211
11958
10839
9838
8941
8132
7405
6752
6164
5634
5155
4721
4329
3974
3652
3360
3094
C
-2
0
+2
+4
+6
+8
+10
+12
+14
C
+16
+18
+20
+22
+24
+26
+28
+30
+32
2852
2632
2431
2247
2079
1925
1785
1657
1539
1430
1331
1239
1154
1076
1004
938
876
819
C
+34
+36
+38
+40
+42
+44
+46
+48
+50
767
718
673
631
592
556
522
491
462
C
+52
+54
+56
+58
+60
+62
+64
+66
+68
434
409
386
364
343
324
306
290
274
C
+70
+72
+74
+76
+78
+80
+82
+84
+86
C
+88
+90
+92
+94
+96
+98
+100
260
246
233
221
210
199
189
Room probe thermostat resistance table

C
18
19
20
15720
15260
14800
C
21
22
23
14370
13940
13520
The remote control base must be positioned horizontally, following the usual
installation instructions for a normal room probe thermostat.
If this is not possible, the room probe thermostat function must be disabled by
positioning a jumper on terminal board X, contact x2=x3.
The controller automatically positions on the immediate comfort function.
Controller - remote control connection
The cables must be connected in

the same order as the polarisation
Optimiser
A B C D
Optimiser
CALEFFI
A B C D
Optimiser
Space for colour matching of cables

between interface and remote control
Probe connection
Dedicated raceway
must be used for the
connection of the
flow, return and outside
probes, the room probe
thermostat and controller.
If the connection cable shares
the raceway with other power
cables, shielded and earthed
cable must be used.
Any alteration to the wiring of
the controller could result in
electrical disturbance.
A reset must be done (i.e.
switching the controller's
power supply off for a few
seconds) whenever work is
done on the wiring.
Maximum distance between
remote control and controller:
100 m, with 4-pole cable of
0.5 mm2 section.
Commissioning - immediate start
Factory setting: characteristic curve for mixing valve circuit

Characteristic Set-back correction
curve
curve
50
40
40
25 % correction
30
30
20
30
Setting range
Setting range
Min. flow T
heating start
50
Max. flow T corresponding

to outside min. temp.
The controller is ready to start operating immediately using the factory configurations, for radiant panel systems.
20
25
20
15
10
Setting range
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
Setting range
Max outside T, end of heating
Min outside T corresponding to max flow
Main factory configurations

OT - average
= not active
Compensation RT
= Off (0%)
Structure gradient
= 100
=1
Mixing valve rotation time
= 240 s
IP correction value
= 20 K
max. blocking FT
= 55C
mOT constant
Optimisation
Slab drying
Set-back correction curve
Rotation correction
Neutral zone
=
=
=
=
=
=
100
not active
not active
-25%
290 s
2K
Automatic
T max
Off
Stand by
Comfort
Set-back correction
On
.
>
>>
#
Meaning
Off
Line choise
Selected value
Edited value
Probe resistance above
working range
Probe resistance below
working range
Value not available
Meaning
Meaning
Mixing valve opens/
or scroll menu up
Mixing valve stopped
Mixing valve closes/
or scroll menu down
Mixing valve fully open position
Mixing valve fully closed position
Measured value
Calculated nominal value
Details of functions
Adjustment of flow temperature in relation to the outside temperature
The calculated flow temperature depends on the quantities read by the probes: outside, flow, return probe, room probe thermostat and set curve.
Mixing valve and pump blocking safety system
Long shutdown periods, such as in the summer, could lead to mixing valve malfunctions or pump blocking.
To avoid this, the mixing valve and pump are operated automatically for 60 seconds every day.
Frost protection function - double control level
First level: the pump is switched on if the outside temperature is less than 4C or the room temperature less than 5C (room probe present).
It is switched off when the outside temperature exceeds 6C or the room temperature exceeds 7C.
Second level: if the flow or return temperature is less than 7C, the mixing valve is opened and the pump switched on.
When this temperature in the circuit is over 20C, the pump switches off and the mixing valve is closed.
Probe control
Outside temperature probe error
When the measured temperature range is less than -25C or greater than +40C, the following state automatically comes into operation: pump
off, mixing valve closed and the display will show the message < OT probe malfunction > and the red LED will flash. The frost protection
function, flow sensor and summer blocking safety system, however, remain enabled.
Flow temperature probe error
When the measured temperature range is less than 0C or greater than 110C, the following state automatically comes into operation: pump
off, mixing valve closed.
The display will show the message < FT probe malfunction > and the red LED will flash.
Optional probe recognition
If there are no optional probes (room t. and return t.), the controller will signal their absence with -X- .
When the probes are connected, the system recognises them automatically.
As these are corrective probes, no alarm state is signalled in the event of a malfunction.
Slab drying (for floors, wall and ceiling heating systems)
The new low-temperature systems have to be heated gradually, after a period of natural drying.
The automatic initial heating-drying program can be used for this. This program must be activated in Standby function.
The overall duration is seven days.
In the first three days, the flow temperature will be maintained at 25C. In the remaining four days, the flow temperature will be at the value set
at the max. blocking temperature menu point (menu structure level 4).
At the end of this procedure, the slab drying function must be switched off, otherwise the controller repeats the operation automatically.
If there is a break in the electricity during the drying, the program will restart automatically from the point when the break occurred.
Procedure:
Level 0
Select
> Configuration
> Desired mixing valve circuit
> Operativity
> Slab drying
Select
Select
Select
Set
CAUTION: when this procedure is set, check whether the max. blocking FT needs to be adjusted; the factory set is 55C
Comfort and set-back correction optimisation (manual or with self-learning)
Comfort optimisation and set-back correction (manual or with self-learning)
The room probe thermostat must be present for this operation.
The optimisation makes it possible to bring forward the activation of the change from set-back correction to comfort (in this function the FT is
set at the max. design specification), so as to reduce to a minimum the actual time necessary to reach the desired comfort level.
This function can operate in three ways:
= off;
= active;
A = self-learning.
Active:
Since the time of the bringing forward depends on a number of different system parameters (power, outside and room temperatures, heat
exchange, type of structure, etc.), a structure gradient reference coefficient must be set.
Some reference values are given below.
Structure gradient reference values
- Building with low heat loss:
400
- Factory configuration:
100
- Building with very high heat loss: 50
Self-learning :
In this case the bringing forward of the activation depends on the controller. The maximum suggested self-learning period is 10 days;
before the end of the 10 days it is necessary to go from operating state A = self-learning to the
= active operating state.
The resulting structure gradient coefficient will be entered automatically at the < constant > operating state menu point.
Average outside temperature
This function can be enabled when necessary. If enabled, the average outside temperature, known as OT ref., is calculated automatically and
recorded every hour. It is used to determine the flow temperature value. The calculation of the average OT ref. makes it possible to attenuate
the effect of sudden changes of outside temperature.
Effect of return temperature

If the return temperature probe is connected, the controller uses this value as an approximate parameter of the required actual thermal load.
The controller calculates the difference between the design return temperature (with an influence between 0 and 50%. Factory configuration: 0%)
and the actual measured value.
This difference is used to change the flow temperature.
For example, if the thermal load is less than the design value, there will be a final T between flow and return that is lower than the design value.
In this case the characteristic curve will be lowered.
If the actual thermal load is greater, then the characteristic curve will be raised.
Effect of room probe thermostat
If a room probe thermostat (code 151000) is connected, the actual room temperature will be read.
The user can set the desired comfort room temperature on the thermostat. In the set-back correction function, this value is automatically
reduced by 2 K.
During the Manual forcing to Tmax function, the effect of the room probe thermostat on the controller is not active. Depending on the
temperature difference between the actual measured value and the set value, the characteristic curve is moved to the right or left.
Work states
Standby
In this state, the controller remains inactive, keeping the mixing valve closed and the pump off.
The mixing valve and pump frost protection and anti-blocking function remains active.
Comfort
During the comfort function, the flow temperature is adjusted according to the measured outside temperature, following the set characteristic curve.
This curve is automatically corrected if a room probe thermostat or a return probe are present.
Set-back correction
During the set-back correction function, the nominal flow temperature is lowered, by means of a parallel downward shifting of the
characteristic curve. This shifting is settable with a parameter of between 0 and -50%.
Maximum temperature
This function guarantees heating to the maximum set temperature. This value, Tmax, can be set from 25C to 90C.
Standard indication and change of nominal value
On the display there is: day of week, date, time, curve correction, work state, room temperature or outside temperature.
Remote control
Example:
Fri 23. Apr

Corr. Room
Comfort
T- room
Control on controller
22:41
+0.0K
+23.9C
Fri 23. Apr

22:41
Corr. comf.
+0
Frost protection
OT
+5.3C
Operation with programming of time bands

10 programs are available, with a total of 13 configurable setting points (SP).
Factory configuration: program 1 (2 setting points); program 2 (5 setting points). All programs are editable.
Factory configuration program 1:
Setting points identical every day
SP point
Time
Action
Active on
06:00
Comfort
Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat Sun
22:00
Set-back correction
SP point
Time
Action
Active on
05:00
Set-back correction
07:00
Comfort
09:00
Comfort
22:00
Set-back correction
23:30
Standby
Factory configuration, program 2:

5 setting points with different options each day.
For a detailed description of the different functions, refer to the commissioning manual
Pump
Variable speed pump
Tree-way valve
Thermostatic valve
Lockshield valve
Shut-off valve
Optimiser
Clock
RT
RT
Room thermostat
Manual valve
Optimiser
Optimiser
CALEFFI
c on
f or me
PE
nor me I S
SL
Optimiser
Optimiser
RT
Optimiser
CALEFFI
c on
f or me
PE
nor me I S
SL
Code 1745..
Outside compensated temperature regulating unit. Connections to primary circuit 3/4" M. Connections to regulating unit
1" F with nut. Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4" M - 18 mm. Medium: water and glycol solutions; maximum
percentage of glycol 30%. Control temperature range 2090C. Primary inlet temperature range 5-100C. Maximum
working pressure 10 bar. Panel manifold differential by-pass setting 25 kPa. Primary circuit differential by-pass setting
10 kPa. Temperature gauge scale 080C. Pressure gauge scale 010 bar. Complete with: flow manifold for panel system
with 5 outlets (from 5 to 13) with brass body, flow rate regulating valve with flow meter with a scale of 15 l/min; return
manifold for panel system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 13) with brass body, shut-off valve. Regulating unit with motorised
three-way valve, three-point actuator, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, protection class IP 44. Digital controller, electric
supply 230 V - 50 Hz, complete with probes for measuring outside, room, flow and return temperature. Management of
controller and room temperature with remote control. Flow adapter unit with brass body. By-pass kit with brass body, POM
differential by-pass valve and stainless steel spring. Shut-off valves with brass body and chrome plated brass ball. Safety
thermostat: factory setting 55C 3C, protection class IP 55, contact rating 10 A/240 V. Three-speed circulation pump
UPS 25-60 (and UPS 25-80), protection class IP 44. Pre-formed PE-X shell insulation for primary circuit. Supplied
preassembled in painted steel box. Closure with a push-fit clamp. Depth adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, including floor
supports adjustable in height from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI
Outside compensated temperature regulating unit

RE
IS
174 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
CALEFFI
01158/08 GB
Function
and radiators or fancoils, in combination with distribution manifolds
for radiant panels.
The outside compensated temperature regulating unit,
complete with temperature digital regulator, operates on the
medium temperature, supplied to the panels, with a
compensation depending on the outside and inside
hydraulic unit equipped with a motorised three-way valve.
valves and a differential by-pass kit for the primary circuit.
This accessory is essential when there is a primary circuit
circulation pump and the radiator circuits are controlled by
Product range
Code 1745.1 003 Outside compensated temperature regulating unit with distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-60 pump
Code 1745.3 003 Outside compensated temperature regulating unit with distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-80 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:

Connections: -

080C
010 bar
primary circuit:
to regulating unit:
3/4 M
1 F with nut
3/4 M - 18 mm
50 mm

50 mm
stainless steel
EPDM
stainless steel
ABS
50
45
4000
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
4500
20
p (kPa)
5000
0,5

EPDM
p (mm w.g.)
0,2
Flow manifold
Body:
Obturator:
Hydraulic seals:
Return manifold
Body:
Shut-off valve
Obturator stem:
Springs:
Control knob:
10 kPa (1.000 mm w.g.)

27 mm
0,1
Shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:

POM
stainless steel
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)

10

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:
2090C
5100C
10 bar
Flow adapter unit

Body:

20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)

Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
stainless steel
Seals:
EPDM

30%
Digital controller

H (m w.g.)
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
(kPa)
230 V - 50 Hz
5,5 VA
IP 40
50
(kPa)
80
UPS 25-80
70
Actuator
40
60
30
20
50
40
30
230 V - 50 Hz
50 s (rotation 120)
8 VA
0,8 A
IP 44
55C
1
0
10
0,5
1,5
2,5
20
1
0
10
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
G (m3/h)
3,5
G (m3/h)
Power consumption
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
Speed

NTC type
Working range:
Two-wire cable
UPS 25-60
5
4
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
H (m w.g.)
60
3
2
1
-20100C
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
1000
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contact rating:
Insulation
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:
Pump
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:

cast iron GG 15/20
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0,038 W/(mK)
40C: 0,045 W/(mK)

230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
Dimensions
Optimiser
outlets
outlets
Optimiser
Optimiser
CALEFFI
1
2
1
2
code
CALEFF
Panel outlets
A
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
fo r m
E SL
e n or me IS P
HOBBY
Radiator outlets
1
2
4
L/MIN
c on
with pump ups 25-60

with pump ups 25-80
outlets
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFF
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
CALEFFI
>1300
0100C
class B2
Optimiser
Flow manifold
equipped with flow meters
and balancing valves.
Optimiser
CALEFFI
co
n fo r
m e n or m e IS PE
SL
SYSTEM
FLOW
Return manifold
equipped with
shut-off valves.
SYSTEM
RETURN

differential pressure control
by-pass kit and fill/drain hose
connection.
BOILER
FLOW
Optimiser
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BOILER
RETURN
Digital temperature controller Optimiser

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Safety thermostat
Pressure gauge
Hydraulic diagram
15
RPT
16
SF
11
Temperature gauge
Temperature probe
8
9
10
RPT
ST
ST
Safety thermostat
Ball shut-off valve
4
6
7
3
13
12
SR
2
Pressure gauge
Pump
BF
12
BR
13
14
Operating principle
SECONDARY
FLOW

digital controller.
four probes, flow probe on the mixing
valve outlet, probe on the panel circuit
return, outside probe and room probe.
temperature.
temperature.
SECONDARY
RETURN
2
PRIMARY
INLET
PRIMARY
RETURN
Manual opening
Fully closed
Reduced head losses
size, while maintaining accurate temperature control, with no variations
Fully open
op
open
en
clo
clo
se

se
external plug-socket system
with a protective rubber
cap. This system does not
require opening the lid to
connect the cables.
actuator (should this ever be
necessary) is particularly
easy to do.
MAX 0,8 A
COMMON
30
40
20
N
L
50
60
10
230 V
CLOSES
ACTUATOR
OPENS
with
an
auxiliary
microswitch that can be
used to switch on the
generator.
contact OFF.
Start opening mixing
valve: contact ON.
Flow unit
thermostat, temperature gauge, pressure gauge, drain cock and
70
0
80

Operation
enables controlling the flow supplied to the heating elements
shut-off valves and the differential by-pass kit for the primary circuit.
10090
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
45
40
35
30
25
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
0,5
2018
0,2
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
16
14
12
2
20
0,5
5
0,1
2
10
Kv
5,40
4,10

Shut-off valve
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,1
0,2
10
Kv0,01
540
410

p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
2000
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
10
1000
900
800
700
600
500
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
180
160
140
120
Differential valve
circuit.
200
50
540
20
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
5,40
5 mm
0,5
400
350
300
250
500450
F.O.
22
130
320
470
10
9
8
7
6
0,22
1,30
3,20
4,70
10
800
700
600
Kv (m3/h) Kv0,01 (l/h)
0,2
p (kPa)
Adjustment
position
2 turns
3 turns
4 turns
5 turns
0,1
p (mm w.g.)
1000900

connected circuits.
be automatically shut off by using the thermo-electric actuators.

Secondary
Secondary
Gs
Gs
Gp
Gp
Primary
Primary
Optimiser

multicoloured diode; the statuses it indicates are as follows:
- prolonged red: controller error
A Sub D 9-pole mini-DIN data transmission cable is used for the
program are available as optionals.
The change ( 5 K) is shown in the lines on the display, with increments of 0,5 K in relation to the reference values: comfort 20C; set-back
correction 18C. The actual room temperature is shown on the fourth line on the display.
5. Function keys:
-
Esc
Info
Set
Displays brief information about the current menu point.
Remote control base

with room probe
Optimiser
Optimiser
Optimiser
CALEFFI

no longer needed; the controller is no longer able to manage the room probe.
Optimiser
CALEFFI

The second line of the display shows the standard correction value - 0 of the characteristic curve.
This value can be increased to + 5 or reduced to - 5 by turning the knob to the right or to the left respectively.
Each single change corresponds to a 5% shift in the characteristic curve. Example, referred to factory configuration: flow temperature-heating
start-up T = 20C and flow T at outside min. temp. = 40C corresponds to a temperature range T of 20 K (100%).
The adjustment of the correction is +1; this means that the temperature of the mixing valve circuit 1 is raised by 1 K (5% of T), thus the flow
temperature will be 41C.
Terminal board
L
Live
N
Neutral
N
b1 Pump contact
La a1 a2 N
Probe connections
Terminal board X
X1 Outside probe
X3 Room probe
X4 Flow probe
X6 Return probe
b0 b1
( (
230V~
L N
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
Activating the internal battery

The protective tab must be removed from the battery before setting the operating data.
C
-20
-18
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
14616
13211
11958
10839
9838
8941
8132
7405
6752
6164
5634
5155
4721
4329
3974
3652
3360
3094
C
-2
0
+2
+4
+6
+8
+10
+12
+14
C
+16
+18
+20
+22
+24
+26
+28
+30
+32
2852
2632
2431
2247
2079
1925
1785
1657
1539
1430
1331
1239
1154
1076
1004
938
876
819
C
+34
+36
+38
+40
+42
+44
+46
+48
+50
767
718
673
631
592
556
522
491
462
C
+52
+54
+56
+58
+60
+62
+64
+66
+68
434
409
386
364
343
324
306
290
274
C
+70
+72
+74
+76
+78
+80
+82
+84
+86
C
+88
+90
+92
+94
+96
+98
+100
260
246
233
221
210
199
189

C
18
19
20
15720
15260
14800
C
21
22
23
14370
13940
13520
The remote control base must be positioned horizontally, following the usual
installation instructions for a normal room thermostat.
If this is not possible, the room thermostat function must be disabled by
positioning a jumper on terminal board X, contact x2=x3.
The controller automatically positions on the immediate comfort function.
The cables must be connected in

the same order as the polarisation
Optimiser
A B C D
Optimiser
CALEFFI
A B C D
Optimiser
Space for colour matching of cables

between interface and remote control
Probe connection
Dedicated raceway
connection of the
flow, return and
outside probes, the room
thermostat and controller.
cable must be used.
done on the wiring.
0.5 mm2 section.
Factory setting: characteristic curve for mixing valve circuit

curve
curve
50
40
40
25 % correction
30
30
20
30
Setting range
Setting range
Min. flow T
heating start
50

The controller is ready to start operating immediately using the factory configurations, for radiant panel systems.
20
25
20
15
10
Setting range
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
Setting range
Max outside T, end of heating
Min outside T corresponding to max flow
Main factory configurations

OT - average
= not active
Compensation RT
= Off (0%)
Structure gradient
= 100
=1
Mixing valve rotation time
= 240 s
IP correction value
= 20 K
max. blocking FT
= 55C
mOT constant
Optimisation
Slab drying
Set-back correction curve
Rotation correction
Neutral zone
=
=
=
=
=
=
100
not active
not active
-25%
290 s
2K
Automatic
T max
Off
Stand by
Comfort
Set-back correction
On
.
>
>>
#
Meaning
Off
Line choise
Selected value
Edited value
working range
working range
Value not available
Meaning
Meaning
Mixing valve opens/
or scroll menu up
Mixing valve closes/
or scroll menu down
Measured value
The calculated flow temperature depends on the quantities read by the probes: outside, flow, return probe, room thermostat and set curve.
Probe control
Procedure:
Level 0
Select
> Configuration
> Operativity
> Slab drying
Select
Select
Select
Set
Comfort and set-back correction optimisation (manual or with self-learning)
= off;
= active;
A = self-learning.
Active:
400
100
Self-learning :

and the actual measured value.
This difference is used to change the flow temperature.
In this case the characteristic curve will be lowered.
If the actual thermal load is greater, then the characteristic curve will be raised.
If a room probe thermostat (code 151000) is connected, the actual room temperature will be read.
reduced by 2 K.
Work states
Standby
In this state, the controller remains inactive, keeping the mixing valve closed and the pump off.
The mixing valve and pump frost protection and anti-blocking function remains active.
Comfort
Set-back correction
Maximum temperature
On the display there is: day of week, date, time, curve correction, work state, room temperature or outside temperature.
Remote control
Example:
Fri 23. Apr

Corr. Room
Comfort
T- room
22:41
+0.0K
+23.9C
Fri 23. Apr

22:41
Corr. comf.
+0
Frost protection
OT
+5.3C

SP point
Time
Action
Active on
06:00
Comfort
22:00
Set-back correction
SP point
Time
Action
Active on
05:00
Set-back correction
07:00
Comfort
09:00
Comfort
22:00
Set-back correction
23:30
Standby

For a detailed description of the different functions, refer to the commissioning manual
Application diagram
RT
Optimiser
Lockshield
Thermostatic valve
Shut-off valve
Manual valve
Clock
Room thermostat
Optimiser
Pump
RT
Optimiser
CALEFFI
3
2
bar
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CL
2.5
co
1
2
nf o
SL
rm e n o r me IS PE
30
40
20
50
60
10
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
70
0
80
CALEFF
30
40
20
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
50
60
10
70
0
80
Code 1745.. 003
Outside compensated temperature regulating unit with distribution kit for primary circuit. Connections to primary circuit
3/4" M. Connections to regulating unit 1" F with nut. Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4" M - 18 mm. Primary circuit
manifold outlet connections 3/4" M - 18 mm. Medium: water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 30%.
Control temperature range 2090C. Primary inlet temperature range 5-100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Panel
manifold differential by-pass setting 25 kPa. Primary circuit differential by-pass setting 10 kPa. Temperature gauge scale
080C. Pressure gauge scale 010 bar. Complete with: flow manifold for panel system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 12) with
brass body, flow rate regulating valve with flow meter with a scale of 15 l/min; return manifold for panel system with 5
outlets (from 5 to 12) with brass body, shut-off valve. Regulating unit with motorised three-way valve, three-point actuator,
electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, protection class IP 44. Digital controller, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, complete with probes
for measuring outside, room, flow and return temperature. Management of controller and room temperature with remote
control. Flow adapter unit with brass body. Primary circuit distribution manifolds with 3 outlets, brass body, flow rate
regulating and shut-off valves. By-pass kit with brass body, POM differential by-pass valve and stainless steel spring.
Shut-off valves with brass body and chrome plated brass ball. Safety thermostat: factory setting 55C 3C, protection
class IP 55, contact rating 10 A/240 V. Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60 (and UPS 25-80), protection class IP 44.
Pre-formed PE-X shell insulation for primary circuit. Supplied preassembled in painted steel box. Closure with a push-fit
clamp. Depth adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, including floor supports adjustable in height from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI
Motorised temperature regulating unit

for Sepcoll 559 series
RE
IS
164 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI
Cert. n 0003
01159/07 GB
Function
The motorised temperature regulating unit is configured for being
combined with an outside compensated or modulating temperature
regulator to control the flow temperature in heating and
This unit is specially made for connection to the Sepcoll 559 series
separator/manifold, either in the exposed or concealed versions.
Supplied complete with motorised three-way mixing valve, three-speed
pump, safety thermostat, differential by-pass valve, flow and return
temperature gauges, secondary circuit shut-off valves.
Supplied complete with pre-formed insulation shell, suitable for
heating and cooling.
Product range
Code 164600 Motorised temperature regulating unit for Sepcoll. Flow upwards, supply on right hand side
Code 164610 Motorised temperature regulating unit for Sepcoll. Flow upwards, supply on left hand side
Size 1
Size 1
Materials
Safety thermostat
Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
Seals:
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contacts rating:

stainless steel
EPDM
Performance
By-pass valve
Body:
Spring:
Obturator:
Seals:

stainless steel
EPDM
EPDM
Medium:

EPDM
Actuator
Three-point type
With auxiliary microswitch
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
230 V - 50 Hz
50 s (120 rotation)
8 VA
0,8 A (230 V)
IP 44
55C

30%

Shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:
Seals:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
5100C
10 bar
1060 kPa (16 m w.g.)
Temperature gauges scale:

Connections:
- primary circuit:
- connections centre distance:
080C
1 F with union
1 F
90 mm
Dimensions
Pump
Model UPS 25-60
Cast iron GG 15/20
230 V-50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
Code 164600
Code 164610
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:
Three-speed pump:
Material: - Body:
40
40
60
20
80
60
20
80
80
4
3
40
1
0
0,5
Speed
1,5
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
30
0,40
90
1800
20
0,30
65
1100
0,20
45
700
10
1
(A)
50
UPS 25-60
3
60
Power consumption
H (kPa)
60
20
80
H (m w.g.)
40
40
60
20
Head available at the unit connections
Q (m3/h)
Insulation
Material:
Thickness:
Density:

20 mm
- internal part 30 kg/m3
- external part 50 kg/m3
Heat conductivity (DIN 52612):
- at 0C 0,038 W/(mK)
- at 40C 0,045 W/(mK)
> 1.300
Temperature range:
0100C
Class B2
SYSTEM
RETURN
SYSTEM
FLOW
A
C
Code
Weight (kg)
164600
95
90
77
460
320
140
9,0
164610
95
90
77
460
320
140
9,0
Hydraulic diagram
SR
2
40
40
60
20
80
60
20
SF
80
4
2
ST
3
1
9
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
MAX 0,8 A
N
L
230 V
COMMON
CLOSE
OPEN
ACTUATOR
EXTERNAL PLUG-IN SOCKET
1
BOILER
RETURN
BOILER
FLOW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Three-speed pump UPS 25-60

Electrical wiring box
Secondary flow temperature gauge
Secondary return temperature gauge
Shut-off valves on secondary circuit
Insulation
BR
Shut-off valve
BF
ST
Safety thermostat
Temperature gauge
System pump
Pressure gauge
By-pass valve
Actuator
Mixing valve
The mixing valve is a three-way type with a sector obturator. The
internal regulating element is made entirely of stainless steel so as
to minimize wear on the moving parts and ensure performance is
maintained over time.
The obturator and the valve body are sized so as to ensure a high
flow rate with reduced overall dimensions while permitting accurate
regulation of the water flows. Thus providing the best conditions for
precise adjustment of the temperature of the mixed water sent to
the system.
Actuator
The actuator is a three-point type so it can
easily be combined with the most widely
used temperature regulators, both outside
conpensated and modulating.
The actuator is moreover equipped with an
auxiliary microswitch that can be used to
shut down the boiler or the chiller unit when
the valve is closed.
The microswitch contacts are closed when
the valve is approximately 20% open.
The actuator can be fitted on the valve
body in the two shown positions. Fastening
is done with a stainless steel clip.
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
MAX 0,8 A
CLOSE
OPEN
ACTUATOR
M
2
N
L
230 V
COMMON

L
N
230 V
COMMON
1
OPEN
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
3
CLOSE
MAX 0,8 A
ACTUATOR
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
Manual opening
The electrical connection
of the actuator consists of
an
external
plug-in
socket system, which
does not require the
cover to be opened for
the supply cable to be
connected.
This solution is particularly
useful if the actuator
needs to be replaced. An efficient rubber protective cover
safeguards the connection system.

Fully closed
Fully open
op
clo
se
open
en
clo
se
Using the safety thermostat

The safety thermostat, equipped with a
special quick-coupling connector, can be
used to shut down the boiler and protect the
panel circuit from dangerously high
temperatures.
Accessories
161
broch. 01122
Digital controller for heating and

cooling complete with f/r probes.
Control temperature range: 778C.
Electric supply: 230 V - 50 Hz.
Sensor connection: 1/8 M.
Length of probe cable: 0,55 m.
Actuator electrical connection diagram
M
2
MAX 0,8 A
1520
controller complete with flow probe
and outside probe.
Setting range: 2090C.
N
COMMON
230 V
COMMON
CLOSE
OPEN
ACTUATOR
Installation - Exposed Sepcoll
Configuration with
sepcoll supplied from
right-hand side
Configuration with
sepcoll supplied from
left-hand side
M
2
CLOSE
OPEN
N
L
MAX 0,8 A
N
L

L
230 V
COMMON
COMMON
CLOSE
OPEN
3
CLOSE
OPEN
MAX 0,8 A
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
ACTUATOR
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
3
CLOSE
OPEN
L
N
MAX 0,8 A
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
ACTUATOR
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
3
CLOSE
OPEN
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
COMMON
COMMON

L
230 V
230 V
230 V
MAX 0,8 A
ACTUATOR
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
Concealed Sepcoll
code 164610
code 164610
Code 163630
Code 164610
4
N
230 V
6
8
COMMON
1
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
3
CLOSE
OPEN
MAX 0,8 A
ACTUATOR
01
The differential by-pass valve is used to control the total head of

water in the secondary supply circuit. When the set differential
pressure value is reached, the obturator opens and allows fluid to
pass from the supply to the return circuit, keeping the pressure
differential at the set
value.
If
the
individual circuits are
shut off by automatic
two-way
on/off,
modulating
or
thermostatic valves,
the valve prevents
pump over-heating
and excessive fluid
velocity.
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
40
40
60
20
ACTUATOR
MAX 0,8 A
code 164600
code 164600
COMMON
230 V
230 V
N
L
230 V
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
ACTUATOR
COMMON
230 V
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
MAX 0,8 A
COMMON
MAX 0,8 A
CLOSE
COMMON
OPEN
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
ACTUATOR
N
L
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
MAX 0,8 A
ACTUATOR
CLOSE
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
ACTUATOR
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
code 164600
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
code 164600
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
code 164610
code 164610
80
60
20
80
By-pass hydraulic characteristics
p (m w.g.)
(kPa)
Setting positions
80
70
60
50
40
3
2
30
20
1
0
10
0,5
1,5
G (m3/h)
RT
C
50
40
30
20
30
20
20
10
10
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
BAGNO
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
40
30
20
10
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
40
30
CUCINA
50
40
CUCINA
PRANZO
C
50
1
2
ENTRATA
10
ENTRATA
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
PRANZO
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
RT
C
50
40
30
20
10
1
2
30
20
20
10
10
1
2
3
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
1
2
3
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
1
2
3
BAGNO
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
1
2
3
C
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
50
40
30
20
10
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
40
30
CUCINA
50
40
CUCINA
PRANZO
C
50
4
L/MIN
ENTRATA
ENTRATA
CAMERA
C. MATRIM.
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
ACTUATOR
OPEN
MAX 0,8 A
Pump
2
0
01
40
40
60
20
40
60
80
40
MAX 0,8 A
01
20
230 V
N
L
COMMON
COMMON
CLOSE
OPEN
60
20
80
80
60
20
80
RT Room thermostat
Thermostatic valve
Shut-off valve
Lockshield valve
Clock
PRANZO
CAMERA
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
ACTUATOR
230 V
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
CLOSE
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
C. MATRIM.
RT
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
10
8
6
4
2
0
CALEFFI
4
L
N
230 V
COMMON
1
OPEN
3
CLOSE
MAX 0,8 A
ACTUATOR
01
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
6
8
230 V ~ 10%
5060 Hz - 8 VA
IP 44 - Tamb. 055C
40
40
60
20
Pump
RT
80
60
20
80
Room thermostat
Variable speed pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
Lockshield valve
164 series
Motorised temperature regulating unit for SEPCOLL 559 series. Configuration with bottom-up flow and supply right side
(or supply left side). 1 F union connection to primary circuit. 1 F connection to secondary circuit. Centre distance
between primary and secondary circuit connections 90 mm. Maximum temperature at inlet of primary circuit 100C.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Complete with: Three-way mixing valve, brass body, stainless steel obturator;
Three-point actuator, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, protection class IP 44; Three-speed pump UPS 25-60, electric supply
230 V - 50 Hz, maximum ambient temperature 55C, protection class IP 44; Temperature gauge scale 080C; Differential
by-pass valve, brass body, stainless steel spring, setting range 1060 kPa; Shut-off valves on secondary circuit.
With pre-formed shell insulation in expanded closed cell PE-X.
CALEFFI
Multi-function compact unit

for temperature control, thermal disinfection and
distribution for sanitary water system
RE
IS
6005 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI
Cert. n 0003
01160/08 GB
Function
The multi-function unit is used in sanitary water systems to control the hot and cold
water delivered to user taps, serving a bathroom or a dwelling.
A high-performance adjustable thermostatic mixing valve keeps the hot water
temperature at the desired level and protects the user from the danger of scalding.
A flushing valve is used for the circuit thermal disinfection all the way to the tap, in
compliance with anti-Legionella regulations.
Product range
Cod.
Cod.
Cod.
Cod.
600500
600530
600540
600550
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
with
with
with
with
cold water circuit outlet kit

manifolds and box with 3 cold and 2 hot outlets
size 3/4
size 3/4 - outlets 23 p. 1,5
Performance
Materials
Mixing valve
Body:
Obturator:
Springs:
Sealing elements:
Cap:
Flushing valve
Control stem:
Obturators:
Control stem seal:
Manual control knob:
EN 1982 CB752S,
chrome plated
PSU
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
stainless steel
EPDM
EPDM
ABS
Cold water circuit outlet kit

Body:
brass EN 1982 CB753S, chrome plated
Shut-off valves with strainer and check valve
Body:
Check valve:
POM
Check valve spring:
stainless steel
Strainer:
stainless steel
Strainer seal:
EPDM
Control lever:
PA
Protective shell:
Colour:
Body:
Obturator stem:
Headwork:
Hydraulic seals:
Control knob:
Brackets:
Box
Material:
Colour:
Useful dimensions:
white RAL 9010

EPDM
PA6GF
stainless steel
impact-resistant PS - anti UV
white RAL 9010
560 x 330 mm, depth 80 mm
Multi-function unit
Medium:
drinking water
Setting range:
3050C
Factory set:
43C
Accuracy:
2C
10 bar
5 bar
85C
2:1
Min. temperature difference between inlet hot water and
outlet mixed water to ensure anti-scald performance:
15C
Min. flow rate for stable operation:
6 l/min
Performances to standards:
NF 079 doc.8, EN 1111, EN 1287
Connections:
inlet 3/4 M, outlet 3/4 M with union
Normally closed
Electric supply:
Starting current:
Working current:
Working power consumption:
Protection class:
Operating time for start of flushing:
Medium:
Temperature range:
Main connections:
Outlet connections:
230 V (ac)
1A
13 mA
3W
CE
50C
210 s
80 cm
drinking water
10 bar
5100C
3/4 F x M
23 p. 1,5 18
35 mm
Dimensions
90
Code 600500
MIX
CALEFFI
330
3/4
MIX
HOT
COLD
HOT
111
HOT
16
50
198
86
COLD
3/4
3/4
COLD
3/4
HOT
COLD
COLD
CALEFFI
COLD
17
560
Code
No. outlets
L
Weight (kg)
3/4
50
Legionella-danger of scalding
In systems producing hot water with storage, in order to avoid the
growth of the dangerous bacterium known as Legionella, the hot water
must be stored at a temperature of at least 60 C. At this temperature
it is certain that the bacterium growth will be totally eliminated. At this
temperature, however, the water cannot be used directly.
As shown in the diagram provided, temperatures of more than 50C
can cause scalds very quickly.
For example, at 55C, partial burning will occur in approximately
30 seconds, while at 60C partial burning will occur in approximately
5 seconds. On average, these times can be halved for children and
elderly people.
Therefore, it is necessary to use a thermostatic mixing valve able to:
- reduce the temperature at the point of use to a value lower than that
of the storage and make it suitable for sanitary use.
- maintain the temperature constant despite any variation of the
incoming pressure and temperature.
- prevent the water temperature at the outlet from reaching values
above 50C.
- have an anti-scald safety function in case of failure of the cold water
23 p.1,5
35
600530
2+3
325
4,6
600500
2,3
600540
3+4
360
4,8
600550
4+5
395
5,0

C
75
Full
thickness
burns
70
65
Partial
thickness
burns
60
55
Safety conditions.
Max. exposure time
at a specific
temperature
50
45
0,1
10
100
1.000
10.000
Seconds
supply.
To be more certain that there is no growth of Legionella, all sections of
the network must be subjected to thermal disinfection. Even in the
section downstream of the mixing valve, as far as the user tap, it must
be possible to flush the system at temperatures exceeding 60C. This
means by-passing the thermostatic mixing valve, which is set at lower
values, and activating another valve that allows the taps to be fed
directly with the hot water arriving from the distribution network.
Temperature
Adults
Children 0-5 years
70C
1s
65C
2s
0,5 s
60C
5s
1s
55C
30 s
10 s
50C
5 min
2,5 min
Reference documents
With regard to the prevention and control of Legionella, see the
National Regulations and applicable Code of Practice.
Applications
The temperature control and thermal disinfection unit is typically used
in systems serving hospitals, nursing homes, sports and shopping
centres, hotels, campsites and colleges. In these structures with their
collective use, it is more than ever necessary to control and prevent
legionnaires disease in a programmed manner, allowing thermal
disinfection to be carried out right up to the user tap if necessary.
bacteria as the conditions
vary in the temperature of
the water containing the
bacteria.
disinfection, it is necessary
to go up to values of no
less than 60C.
70
60
50
40
30
Optimum temperature
20
10
0
Hydraulic diagram
Operation with mixing
10
Flushing valve closed
12
Cold water valve open
OFF
MIX
CALEFFI
COLD
HOT
COLD
HOT
COLD
9
Operation with thermal disinfection
Flushing valve open
1) Anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve, adjustable with tamper-proof

block for the temperature setting
Cold water valve closed
2) Automatic flushing valve for thermal disinfection, for mixing valve

by-pass and simultaneous cold water inlet shut-off
ON
3) Ball shut-off valves with built-in strainers and check valves at the
hot and cold water inlets
4) Cold water circuit outlet kit
5) Distribution manifold with built-in shut-off valves with control knob

for hot water circuit
6) Distribution manifold with built-in shut-off valves with control knob
for cold water circuit
7) Stainless steel brackets
8) Water hammer arrester 525 series (optional)
9) Ventilated plastic box
10) Timer with programmable key, code 600200 ( optional)
The temperatures and corresponding disinfection times for the network must be chosen according to the type of system and the related intended
use. According to the requirements of the most advanced world legislation on this matter, the following criteria can generally be followed:
After turning the flushing valve control switch on (approx. 210 s), the user taps must be opened to carry out thermal disinfection using the hot water
from the distribution network.
The tap opening times and their disinfection frequency will depend on how the system is run and on applicable regulations.
HOT
COLD
HOT
COLD
MIX
COLD
In a traditional system,
comprising a mixing
valve and a flushing
valve connected by
pipes, this risk may still
exist. Part of the mixing
valve, as it is always in
contact with the cold
water, remains at a
temperature that does
not give the certainty of
complete disinfection of
all its parts.
HOT
MIX
CALEFFI
COLD
During thermal disinfection

flushing, the high temperature hot water heats the
monoblock
body
of
the
multifunction
unit
completely. In this way, even
the body of the mixing valve
itself is entirely disinfected,
making sure that there are
no areas that remain at
lower temperatures, where
there would be a risk of
Legionella formation.
Operating principle
1
MIXED
Flushing valve
The flushing valve, which can be activated
manually or automatically using a
thermo-electric actuator, allows the hot
water to pass directly to the unit outlet.
Using the control stem with double obturator
(2), it opens the by-pass on the hot water
inlet to the mixing valve and, at the same
time, shuts the cold water inlet off.
This prevents any mixing of hot and cold
water during the flushing operation, with the
taps open, as this would reduce the
temperature of the water sent to perform
thermal disinfection.
COLD
Monoblock unit
The valve body, containing the thermal regulating and by-pass
components, is made out of a single casting with connections to the
hot water inlet, the cold water inlet and the mixed water outlet.
A specific internal channel carries the hot water to the mixing valve
inlet and to the flushing valve, making it possible for the unit to be
smaller in size and easily connectable.
The materials used in constructing the mixing valve eliminate seizing
due to limescale deposits. All functional parts were made using a
special anti-scale material with low friction coefficient, which ensures
performances over time.
MIX
p (m w.g.)
BY-PASS
15
1,5
Kv MIX
(m3/h) : 1,75
Kv BY-PASS (m3/h) : 1,80
1,0
10
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,5
50
20
0,5
0,5
10
Shut-off valves
The hot and cold water inlet shut-off valves are fitted with stainless
steel strainers (4) with EPDM seals and check valves (5).
HOT
p (bar)
Control stem
The flushing valve control stem (3) is made of stainless steel with a
double O-ring seal in EPDM. In this way the upper portion of the
headwork can be replaced even with the system running.
COLD
0,2

As a safety measure, in case of failure of cold water supply, the valve
immediately shuts off the flow of hot water. This prevents dangerous
burns. This performance is guaranteed if there is a minimum
temperature difference between the inlet hot water and the outlet
mixed water of 15C (performance in compliance with French
standard NF 079 Doc. 8). In case of failure of hot water supply as well,
the valve shuts off the cold water passage and therefore mixed water
to prevent dangerous thermal shocks.
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
Mixing valve
The thermostatic mixing valve mixes the hot
and cold water at the inlet so as to maintain
the mixed water at a constant set
temperature at the outlet. A thermostatic
element (1) is fully immersed in the mixed
water pipe. It contracts or expands, moving
an obturator which controls the passage of
hot or cold water at the inlet. If there are
changes in inlet temperature or pressure, the
internal element reacts automatically to
restore the set temperature at the outlet.
Thermal transient
Use
According to its flow characteristics, the unit with thermostatic mixing valve can be
used for application with a limited number of users, for example a bathroom. For this
reason, the flow rate passing through the valve is generally the same as through the
final user, for example the tap of a basin, shower, bidet, etc. To ensure stable operation,
a minimum flow rate of 6 l/min must be guaranteed to the mixing valve. The system
must always be dimensioned taking into account the current legislation on the nominal
flow rate to each user.
Public buildings, hospitals, kindergartens
In this type of application, the risk of scalding is extremly high because of the nature of
the hot water users, who include children, old people, sick people.
In these installations, the two supply networks providing hot water from the storage
and cold water may have different origins and operate at different pressures.
In case of failure of cold water supply, the mixing valve is able to shut off the supply of
mixed water to prevent possible burns.
Head loss check in the mixing valve
appliances, the head loss produced by the mixing valve is checked using the graph
provided.
It is necessary to verify the available pressure, the head loss in the system downstream
of the mixing valve and the residual pressure to be guaranteed to user appliances.
Installation
Before installing the unit with the mixing valve, the pipes must be washed out to ensure
that no impurities in circulation will impair its performance.
We recommend always installing suitable strainers at the inlet of the water system.
The mixing valve unit is fitted with shut-off valves with strainers at the hot and cold
water inlets.
The mixing valve unit must be installed according to the diagram provided within the
instruction sheet or in this brochure.
The unit can be installed in any position, vertical or horizontal.
The following marks are indicated on the unit body:
hot water inlet, indicated by the word Hot
cold water inlet, indicated by the word Cold
mixed water outlet, indicated by the word MIX.
Check valves
In systems with thermostatic mixing valves, check valves shall be installed to prevent
undesired backflows. The mixing valve unit is fitted with check valves, incorporated in
the shut-off valves at the hot and cold water inlets.
Temperature setting
The temperature is set at the desired value
using the regulator screw. Temperature
adjustment can then be locked by means
of the tamper-proof locking nut.
1.
1. Using the cover for temperature

adjustment.
2. Temperature setting.
3. Adjustment locking using the locking
nut.
Manual opening
The flushing valve can be activated manually by means of the knob provided.
The operating knob can be removed, by unscrewing the locking nut, and
replaced by a thermo-electric actuator. This allows automatic operation of the
valve, controlled by a suitable switch or timer.
2.
During transient, due to rapid changes in pressure,

temperature or flow rate, the temperature increases
with respect to the initial set point and this increase
must be of limited duration to guarantee safety.
T(C)
< 0,5 s - max
60C
< 3 s - max
55C
2K
2K
Initial
temperature
Temperature
rise
Stabilisation
period
Stable
conditions
Time (s)
Commissioning
According to the special purpose of the thermostatic
mixing valve, it must be commissioned in accordance
to the current regulations by qualified personnel using
appropriate temperature measurement equipment.
We recommend using a digital thermometer for
measuring the temperature of the mixed water.
Recommended temperatures
Given the specific use of this type of mixing valve, the
following table summarizes the maximum water
temperatures at the tap to avoid scalding.
Appliance
Bidet
Shower/Washbasin
Bath
3.
Tmax
38C
41C
44C
The hot and cold water distribution manifolds are fitted with shut-off valves with operating knobs for
each circuit and identification labels for each of the appliances served.
This creates balanced distribution of water to the various user outlets, enabling the circuit supplying
each individual appliance to be shut off in order to carry out any maintenance.
Hydraulic characteristics of outlet

p (bar)
p (m w.g.)
1,0
10
3
Kv (m /h): 3
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,5
0,03
0,3
0,02
0,2
50
1
20
10
0,2
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,3
0,5
0,5
Manifold inner diameter: 20 mm
Box
The box is supplied with guards to be positioned on the sides where
no pipes pass, to ensure that no mortar falls inside the box itself when
it is fitted, dirtying the components.
This guard is supplied so that it can be fitted both on the shorter and
on the longer side, according to the position in which the box is fitted,
horizontal or vertical.
The cover allows recovery of 30 mm depth, caused by possible errors

in wall finishing.
The particular shape of the

ventilation holes in the cover
give the air flowing out a speed
and direction that ensure it will
flow away from the cover itself
quickly. This prevents the
formation of unaesthetic stains
on the wall.
12
MIX
12
12
MIX
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
COLD
HOT
COLD
HOT
COLD
HOT
COLD
HOT
COLD
COLD
1
12
MIX
MIX
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
COLD
HOT
COLD
HOT
COLD
HOT
COLD
HOT
COLD
COLD
HOT
HOT
12
12
MIX
COLD
HOT
CALEFFI
COLD
12
COLD
MIX
CALEFFI
COLD
COLD
CALEFFI
COLD
COLD
COLD
HOT
HOT
MIX
HOT
HOT
MIX
COLD
HOT
12
CALEFFI
COLD
COLD
COLD
Accessories
6002
525 ANTISHOCK
3641
broch. 01020
Water hammer arrester.

Brass body. Chrome plated.
Blind end plug.

Chrome plated.
Code
364151
3/4 M
5991
End fitting.
Chrome plated.
Code
525040
Timer with programmable key, settings from
1 to 12 minutes.
To operate the valves used to carry out
thermal disinfection of circuit sections, up to
the outlet taps.
Electric supply: 230 V (ac).
1/2
Code
599155
3642
5993
End fitting.
Chrome plated.
Code
Code
600200
364255
3/4 F x 1/2 F
Blind end plug.

Chrome plated.
Code
3/4 M x 1/2 F
599351
3/4 M
Series 6005
Multi-function compact unit for temperature control, thermal disinfection (cod. 600500).
Multi-function compact unit for temperature control, thermal disinfection and distribution for sanitary water system, pre-assembled
in box (cod. 600530 - 600540 - 600550).
Complete with:
Multi-function monoblock unit with anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve and flushing valve for thermal disinfection of the circuit.
Complete with shut-off valves, inspectable strainers and check valves at the hot and cold water inlets. Ready for direct
connection to the distribution manifolds. With cold water circuit outlet kit. Connections: inlet 3/4 M, outlet 3/4 M with union.
Dezincification-resistant alloy body. Chrome plated. Medium: drinking water.
Anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve, with performance in compliance with standard NF 079 doc.08, EN 1111 and EN 1287. With
tamper-proof block for the temperature setting. Obturator in PSU. Stainless steel springs. EPDM seal elements. ABS cap.
Maximum inlet temp. 85C. Adjustment range 30-50C. Accuracy 2C. Maximum working pressure (static) 10 bar. Maximum
working pressure (dynamic) 5 bar. Maximum inlet pressure ratio (H/C or C/H) 2:1. Flushing valve for mixing valve control by-pass
and simultaneous cold water inlet shut-off, manual or automatic with thermo-electric actuator. Stainless steel control stem with
double obturator in EPDM. Control stem seal with double O-Ring in EPDM. Manual control knob in ABS. Shut-off valves and outlet
kit with chrome plated brass body. Inspectable stainless steel strainers with EPDM seal. Check valves with POM body and
obturator and stainless steel spring.
Thermo-electric actuator. Normally closed. Electric supply 230 V (ac). Working power consumption 3 W. Starting current 1 A.
Working current 13 mA. Protection class IP 44 (in vertical position). Maximum ambient temperature 50C. Operating time for start
of flushing 210 seconds. Length of supply cable 80 cm.
Hot and cold water distribution manifolds fitted with shut-off valves with operating knobs for each circuit and identification labels
for each of the appliances served. With 2+3 hot and cold water outlets (or 3+4 or 4+5). Main connections 3/4 F, outlet
connections 23 p. 1,5 mm. Centre distance: 35 mm. Brass manifold body, chrome plated. Brass stem and headwork. EPDM
hydraulic seals. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar. Temperature range: 5100C. PA6GF knob. Stainless steel brackets.
Ventilated box. Colour white RAL 9010. Useful dimensions 560 x 330 mm, depth 80 mm.
Code. 525040
Water hammer arrester. Threaded connections 1/2 M. Brass body. Chrome plated. Very high resistance polymer piston.
Carbon steel spring. EPDM seals with anti-extrusion rings. Maximum working temperature 90C. Maximum working pressure
10 bar. Maximum water hammer pressure 50 bar.
Code. 600200
Timer with programmable key, settings from 1 to 12 minutes. To operate the valves used to carry out thermal disinfection.
Power supply 230 V (ac).
CALEFFI
Compact automatic charging unit assembly

with BA type backflow preventer
RE
IS
574 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI
01161/08 GB

Cert. n 0003
Function
The charging unit assembly is composed of a shut-off valve with an
inspectable strainer, a BA type controllable reduced pressure zone
backflow preventer and a pre-adjustable filling unit.
It is installed on the water inlet pipe in sealed heating systems and its
main function is to maintain the pressure of the system stable at a set
value, providing automatically a re-fill of the missing water.
This product has the peculiarity of being pre-adjustable. That means it
can be adjusted at a desired pressure value before the system filling
stage.
The backflow preventer is inserted to prevent the contaminated water
of the closed heating circuit from flowing back into the domestic water
supply network, in compliance with EN 1717 standard prescriptions.
The device is proposed complete with pre-formed shell insulation and
with a compact dimension design to make its hydraulic installation
easier.
- Tech. brochure 01022. Controllable reduced pressure zone backflow
preventer (BA type). 574-575-570 series.
Product range
Compact automatic charging unit assembly with BA type backflow preventer
Backflow preventer
Designation:
Certification:
Pressure ports:
Upstream filter mesh :
Materials
Backflow preventer
Body and cover:
Check valves:
Springs:
Diaphragm and seals:
Filling unit
Body:
Cover:
Obturator stem and moving parts:
Strainer:
Diaphragm and seals:
size 1/2
EN 12165 CW602N
PSU-POM
stainless steel
EPDM
PA66G30
stainless steel
NBR
Family B, Type A
EN 12729
upstream, intermediate, downstream
0,4 mm
Filling unit
Set pressure range:
Factory set:
Indicator accuracy:
Pressure gauge range:
Internal filter mesh :
0,24 bar
1,5 bar
0,15 bar
04 bar
0,28 mm
Connections:
1/2 M with union
Dimensions
Shut-off ball valve

Body:
EN 12165 CW602N
Ball:
Seals:
EPDM
Lever handle:
PA66G30
CALEFFI
EPS
33 kg/m3
Performance
Medium:
Acoustic group:
Insulation
Material:
Density:
Code 574011
drinking water
10 bar
65C
II
Code
A
574011 1/2
B
101,5
C
50
D
E
F
Weight (kg)
182 40-60 250
1,6
The charging unit assembly 574 series is

complete with:
1) Inspectable strainer
2) Ball shut-off valve
3) BA
type
controllable
backflow
preventer with reduced pressure zones
4) Pre-adjustable filling unit with pressure
gauge
5) Shut-off cock
6) Pre-formed shell insulation
10
40
Pre-adjustment
This model is provided with a pressure regulation
indicator, which facilitates setting operations.
The system charging
pressure may be set,
turning the regulating
2
screw, even before the
30
20
system
charging
phase begins.
50
CALEFFI
psi
bar
Manual/automatic opening and pressure gauge

The assembly is provided with a manual shut-off cock (5) in the
lower part that offers the possibility of closing the water supply to
the system after the filling is
completed. The pressure in the system
2
can be checked using the gauge
3
1
supplied in order to re-open the cock
4
whenever necessary to restore the
0
automatic charging, which will
gradually bring the pressure up to the
set value.
5
CALEFFI
Anti-stick materials
The components inside the assembly are made of plastic having a
low adherence coefficient. This solution reduces to a minimum the
chance of scale forming, the major cause of any malfunctions.
Removable cartridge and filter

The cartridge containing the
operation mechanisms, protected
by a strainer having a large surface
area, is removable. This peculiarity
makes it possible to perform
inspections, internal cleaning
operations and, if necessary,
cartridge replacement in an
extremely simple and functional
manner.
Shut-off valve and inspectable strainer upstream

The shut-off valve upstream (2) of the assembly, together with the
cock (5), makes it possible to shut off
the backflow preventer for cleaning,
checking and, if necessary, replacing
internal components.
The purpose of the inspectable strainer
(1) located upstream is to protect the
backflow preventer from any impurities
of the supply network that could
1
2
jeopardize its operation.
Insulation
The assembly is supplied complete with insulation, sized to limit
thermal losses and to prevent condensation forming on the surface.
Compact assembly
The assembly is designed compact and with reduced overall
dimensions in order to make hydraulic installation easier, above all
if space is limited. This condition is typical of small and
medium-size systems this product is designed for.
35
3,0
30
2,5
25
2,0
20
1,5
15
1,0
10
0,5
5
1
1,50
40
3,5
1,25
4,0
0,75
50
45
Charging flow rate 2,65 m3/h p 1,5 bar Ref. EN 1567
Flow rate
(m3/h)
p (m w.g.)
4,5
Simplified maintenance
When needed, any disassembly and maintenance work is easier to
perform thanks to the use of components easy to verify and replace
without having to disassemble the valve body from the pipe.
p (bar)
5,0
0,50
Corrosion-proof materials
The materials used to manufacture the backflow preventers must
be insensitive to corrosion caused by the contact with drinking
water. This is why they are made using
dezincification-resistant
alloy and stainless steel, as they are a guarantee to keep best
performance over time.
0,25
BA type controllable backflow preventer with reduced

pressure zones
Installation
CALEFFI
1. The backflow prevention valve unit must be installed horizontally,

respecting the direction of flow shown with an arrow on the valve
body. The discharge tundish to EN1717 standard must be connected
to the piping leading to the sewerage system.
CALEFFI
3
3
0
CALEFFI
2. The special mechanical preregulation system with pressure indicator

allows the assembly to be set to the desired system value before the
charging stage starts.
3. The valve is normally set to a pressure no lower than the value
obtained by adding the hydrostatic pressure and 0,3 bar.
4. During the charging stage, the internal mechanism will automatically
adjust the pressure by closing the supply when the set value is
reached, without having to watch the lengthy filling operation.
5. In view of the preregulation function, a pressure gauge downstream
of the equipment is not crucial.
6. Once the system is filled, the shut-off valve of the assembly can be
closed. To reinstate the automatic charging conditions, the valve just
has to be re-opened.
The system pressure value will gradually go back to the set value.
Use of backflow preventer according to European standards
To avoid backflows of water from the heating system, which is
potentially polluted and dangerous for human health, it is
indispensable to install a preassembled charging unit with a
backflow preventer.
The correct use of hydraulic backflow preventers is governed by
the European reference standard EN 1717: 2000 Protection
against pollution of potable water in water installation and

general requirements of devices to prevent pollution by
backflow.
The controllable backflow preventer with reduced pressure zones is
a BA type, certified according to European standard EN 12729 -
Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water.

Controllable backflow preventer with reduced pressure zones.
Family B - Type A. It may be used to protect against the risk of
contamination by waters classified up to Category 4 (heating
systems with reference to European standard EN 1717): Fluid
that presents a significant health hazard due to the presence of

one or more toxic or highly toxic substances or one or more
radioactive, mutagenic or carcinogenic substances.
Inspection and maintenance

Charging unit assembly
For the periodical cleaning, control
or replacement of the whole
cartridge you must:
1) Shut off the valve with the valve

upstream and by using a valve
downstream.
2) Open the bottom handle.
3) Fully undo the setting screw.

4) Remove the upper cap.
5) Take out the cartridge with some
pliers.
6) After inspection and eventual
cleaning of the body, the whole
unit can be reassembled or
replaced by a spare cartridge.
7) Reset the unit.
Application diagram
P
T
F
2
3
CALEFFI
Shut-off valve
Pump
Ball valve
Autoflow
3-way cock
P
Ballstop
Flow metering device
Temperature gauge
Temperature probe
Safety thermostat
Flow switch
Controller
Zone valve
Expansion vessel
Pressure switch
Inspection pocket
Gas strainer
Fuel shut-off valve

Pocket
Safety relief valve
Gas controller
Deaerator
Code 574011
Compact automatic charging unit assembly with BA type backflow preventer. Connections 1/2 M with union. Maximum
working temperature 65C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Medium water.
Complete with:
- Controllable backflow preventer with reduced pressure zones, BA type, compliant with EN 12729. Dezincification-resistant
alloy body, EPDM diaphragm and seals. Stainless steel spring. Complete with discharge tundish with collar for fixing to the
drain pipe;
- Pre-adjustable filling unit. Brass body, control stem and moving parts. Glass nylon cover. NBR seals.
Adjustment range 0,24 bar. Complete with cock, stainless steel strainer with mesh size 0,28 mm and check valve.
Pressure gauge with 04 bar scale;
- Dezincification-resistant alloy shut-off ball valve. Brass ball. EPDM seals. Glass nylon handle;
- Strainer upstream with mesh size 0,4 mm;
- EPS insulation, density 33 kg/m3.
CALEFFI
Anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve

for wash-hand basins
RE
IS
601-602 series
TERE

Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI
Cert. n 0003
01162/08 GB
Function
In certain sanitary hot water distribution systems, for example
hospitals, nursing homes, schools, sport centres etc., it is
necessary to protect vulnerable people from a risk of scalding with
hot water.
specifically designed for this type of application, for installation just
upstream of the basin tap. The mixing valves automatically maintain
the mixed water temperature constant, despite any variation in inlet
pressure or temperature or the actual flow rate drawn at the tap.
A special by-pass mechanism is used on the 602 series unit to
thermally disinfect the circuit all the way to the tap, in compliance
with anti-Legionella regulations.
Product range
601 series Anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve for wash-hand basins
602 series Anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve with by-pass, for wash-hand basins
Materials
Body:
Obturator:
Spring:
Sealing elements:
Cover:

stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
Performance
Medium:
Adjustment range:
Factory set:
Accuracy:
sizes 3/8 and 1/2

sizes 3/8 and 1/2
water
2550C
41C
2C
10 bar
5 bar
90C

Min. temperature difference between hot water
inlet and mixed outlet to guarantee the anti-scald function:
Min. flow rate for a stable operation:
Connections:
5:1
10C
4,5 l/min
Hot
Cold and mixed
3/8 F (captive nut)
3/8 - 10 olive
3/8 F (captive nut)
3/8 - 12 olive
3/8 F (captive nut)

1/2 - 15 olive
3/8 M (flat seat)

1/2 - 15 olive
1/2 M (flat seat)
1/2 M (flat seat)
Dimensions
B
B
A
601
602
Code
A
B
C D E E F G
Weight (kg)
601310/602310 3/8" 10 40 62 28 55 51 46 0,60/0,69
601312/602312 3/8" 12 40 62 28 55 51 46 0,60/0,69
Code
A
B
601415/602415 15 40
601
C
62
D
28
602
D
55
E
47
F
47
Weight (kg)
0,60/0,69
601
601
602
Code
A
B
C D E E F G
Weight (kg)
601333/602333 3/8" 3/8" 40 62 28 55 51 38 0,60/0,69
Code
A
B
601444/602444 1/2 40
C
62
D
28
Legionella - scalding risk
In systems that produce hot water for sanitary purposes with

storage, in order to prevent the growth of dangerous Legionella
bacteria, the hot water must be stored at a temperature of at least
60C. At this temperature it is certain that the growth of the bacteria
will be totally inhibited. At this temperature, however, the water
cannot be used directly. As shown in the diagram opposite,
temperatures of more than 50C can cause burns very quickly.
For example, at 55C, partial burn will occur in approximately
30 seconds, while at 60C partial burn will occur in approximately
5 seconds.
This time may be reduced by 50% for children and elderly people.
In view of the above, it is necessary to use a thermostatic mixing
valve which can:
- reduce the temperature at the point of use to a value lower than
that of the storage and make it suitable for sanitary use.
- maintain the temperature constant while the incoming pressure
and temperature conditions vary.
- prevent the water temperature at the outlet from reaching values
above 50C.
- have an anti-scald safety function in case of failure of the cold
water supply.
C
75
602
D
55
E
51
F
Weight (kg)
38 0,60/0,69
Full
thickness
burns
70
65
Partial
thickness
burns
60
55
Safety conditions.
Max. exposure time
at a specific
temperature
50
45
0,1
10
100
1.000
10.000
Seconds
The drawing alongside shows
the behaviour of Legionella
Pneumophila bacteria as the
conditions
vary
in
the
containing the bacteria.
disinfection, it is necessary to
go up to values of no less than
60C.

70
60
50
40
30
Optimum temperature
20
10
0
Temperature
Adults
Children 0-5 years
70C
1s
65C
2s
0,5 s
60C
5s
1s
55C
30 s
10 s
50C
5 min
2,5 min
Operating principle
The thermostatic mixing valve mixes the hot and cold water at the inlet so as to maintain constant the adjusted mixed water temperature at the
outlet. A thermostatic element is fully immersed in the mixed water port. It contracts or expands, moving an obturator which controls the
passage of the hot or cold water at the inlet. If there are changes in inlet temperature or pressure, the internal element reacts automatically to
restore the adjusted temperature at the outlet.
COLD
MIXED
Thermal disinfection - By-pass function
602 series mixing valves are equipped with a by-pass device which
allows to reach the delivery tap with the thermal disinfection, as
required by established legislation.
The by-pass provides total disinfection of the system and the
mixing valve itself, without the need for disassembly.
HOT
HOT
COLD
MIXED
HOT
In case of hot or cold water supply failure at the inlet, the obturator
closes the water port, thus shutting off the mixed water outlet. This
function is only guaranteed if there is a minimum temperature
difference of 10C between the hot water at the inlet and the mixed
water at the outlet.
HOT
Installation
p (bar)
p (m w.g.)
0,5
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,5
1
20
10
0,2
2
10
Before installing the mixing valve, the connecting pipes should be

flushed to remove any impurities that could impair the performance.
We recommend to install always strainers of adequate performance
at the water inlet from the hydraulic network.
601-602 series mixing valves are equipped with strainers at the hot
and cold water inlets.
601-602 series thermostatic mixing valves can be installed in any
position, horizontally or vertically.
The hot and cold water supplies must
be connected as shown on the valve
body (red dot for hot water - blue dot
for cold water - the mixed water output
is not marked).
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1,0
0,5
15
0,1
1,5
Kv (m3/h) = 0,8
Use
Check valves
601-602 series thermostatic mixing valves are designed for

installation underneath the wash-hand basin. For correct operation,
the minimum flow rate must be 4,5 l/min. The system must always
be sized to take into account current legislation about the nominal
flow rate to each user.

installed to prevent undesired back flows. 601-602 series
thermostatic mixing valves are equipped with check valves at the
hot and cold water inlets.
By-pass function
Cold
water
The temperature of the mixed

water can be set to the desired
value by turning the adjustment
screw.
Applying the cover, equipped
with
screws,
prevents
unauthorised persons tampering
with the setting.
Hot
water
The 602 series thermostatic

mixing valve is equipped with a
special by-pass mechanism to
provide thermal disinfection of
each individual tap.
After removing the protective
cover, turn the screw fully
anti-clockwise.
In this way, only the incoming
hot water will circulate,
independently of the thermostat
action.
By-pass
closed
By-pass
open
Application diagram
601 series
Anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve for wash-hand basins. Threaded connections 3/8 (and 1/2). Chrome plated brass body.
Brass obturator. Stainless steel spring. EPDM seal elements. ABS cover. Medium water. Adjustment range 2550C. Factory
set 41C. Accuracy 2C. Maximum working pressure (static) 10 bar; maximum working pressure (dynamic) 5 bar. Maximum
inlet temperature 90C. Maximum inlet pressure ratio (H/C or C/H) 5:1. Minimum temperature difference between the inlet hot
water and the outlet mixed water to ensure anti-scald performance 10C. Minimum flow rate for a stable operation 4,5 l/min.
602 series
Thermostatic mixing valve with by-pass, for wash-hand basins. Threaded connections 3/8 (and 1/2). Chrome plated brass body.
Brass obturator. Stainless steel spring. EPDM seal elements. ABS cover. Medium: water. Adjustment range 2550C. Factory
set 41C. Accuracy 2C. Maximum working pressure (static) 10 bar; maximum working pressure (dynamic) 5 bar. Maximum inlet
temperature 90C. Maximum inlet pressure ratio (H/C or C/H) 5:1. Minimum temperature difference between the inlet hot water
and the outlet mixed water to ensure anti-scald performance 10C. Minimum flow rate for a stable operation 4,5 l/min.
CALEFFI
Solar storage-to-boiler connection kit
CALEFFI
RE
IS
264 - 265 series

TERE

Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01163/08 GB
Function
The solar storage-to-boiler connection kits automatically control and
optimize the thermal energy contained in a solar water storage,
ensuring that domestic hot water is distributed throughout the
system at a controlled optimum temperature.
The kits come complete with anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve,
motorised diverter valve and thermostat with temperature probe for
the solar water storage.
They ensure that users always receive hot water at the set
temperature and switch the boiler on if the temperature of the water
coming from the solar storage falls below the set point.
The kits are available in two versions, for use with either modulating
or non-modulating boilers.
These compact kits are designed for quick and easy installation in
both new and existing systems.
They come complete with a pre-formed shell protective cover.
Product range
Code 264352 SOLARNOCAL Solar storage-to-boiler connection kit without thermal integration
Code 265352 SOLARINCAL Solar storage-to-boiler connection kit with thermal integration
Materials
Mixing valve
Body:

PSU
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
Obturator:
Springs:
Seals:
Control knob:
Diverter valve
Body:
Ball:
Ball seal:
Control stem seal:
Union seals:

PTFE with EPDM O-Ring
two EPDM O-Rings
non-asbestos fibre
Actuator
Protective shell:
Colour:
grey RAL 9002
Protective cover:
Material:
Thickness:
Density:
Reaction to fire (EN 13501-1):
Connections:
PVC
7 mm
1,29 kg/dm3
-5110C
class B2
- inlet and outlet:

3/4 M with union
- boiler connection (265 series):
3/4 M
Performance
Diverter valve
Max. differential pressure:
10 bar
10 bar
-5110C
size 3/4
size 3/4
Mixing valve
10 bar (static); 5 bar (dynamic)
3555C
Factory set:
43C
Accuracy:
2C
100C
2:1
Minimum temperature difference between the inlet hot water
and the outlet mixed water to ensure anti-scald performance: 10C
4 l/min
Actuator
Three-contact type
Electric supply:
230 V (ac)
Power consumption:
8 VA
0,8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
IP 44 (control stem in vertical position)
IP 40 (control stem in horizontal position)
Operating time:
10 s
055C
Dynamic torque:
6 Nm
1m
Thermostat
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Adjustable temperature range:
Factory set:
Box protection class:
230 V (ac)
10 (2+8) VA
3550C
45C
IP 65
Temperature probe
Working range:
-25110C
Time constant:
1 min
Response:
100 k at 25C
Two wire cable with 4,5 mm probe
L=2m
Maximum distance:
10 m with 2 x 0,25 mm2 cable
100 m with 2 x 0,5 mm2 cable
Dimensions
230 V - 5 VA - IP 65
230 V - 5 VA - IP 65
Code
264352
A
3/4"
B
90
C
87,5
D
45
E
131
Weight (kg)
2,3
A
B
Code
A
B
C
D
265352 3/4" 108,5 87,5 66,5
E
50
F
81
G Weight (kg)
45
2,3
High temperature and solar systems

In solar thermal systems with natural circulation in the primary
circuit and a water storage with heating jacket, the temperature of
the domestic water in the storage can vary considerably depending
on the degree of solar radiation and can reach very high
temperatures over long periods.
In summer, and if there is little water usage, the hot water at the
storage outlet can actually reach temperatures around 98C before
the temperature and pressure safety relief valves are actuated.
At these temperatures, the hot water cannot be used directly,
because of the danger of scalding for users.
Water temperatures over 50C can cause burns very quickly. For
example, at 55C, partial burn occurs in about 30 seconds,
whereas at 60C partial burn occurs in about 5 seconds.
It is therefore necessary to use a thermostatic mixing valve able to:
- reduce the temperature of the water distributed throughout the
domestic water system to a value lower than that in the storage
and suitable for the end user. For reasons of safety, it is
recommended to set the temperature of the mixed water
distributed to the users to values no higher than 50C;
- keep mixed water temperature constant despite variations in inlet
temperature and pressure;
- continue functioning over time without any loss in performance
and without problems due to the continuously high temperature of
the incoming water;
- enable the high temperature water in the storage to last longer, by
distributing it to the user circuit at a reduced temperature;
water supply.
Exposure time to cause partial burns

Temperature
Adults
Children 0-5 years
70C
1s
--
65C
2s
0,5 s
60C
5s
1s
55C
30 s
10 s
50C
5 min
2,5 min
USER
Integration with boiler
MODULATING
BOILER
NON
MODULATING
BOILER
Solar domestic water storages are normally installed in conjunction

with boilers or water heaters. In this way, boilers or water heaters
can be switched on to produce domestic hot water when solar
radiation is insufficient, therefore the thermal energy available
within the storage is low.
The following actions are necessary to control this type of system
automatically and ensure the correct distribution of domestic hot
water:
- install a motorised diverter valve between the solar water circuit
and the boiler or water heater;
- install a thermostat with a temperature probe positioned in the
solar water circuit, to operate the diverter valve depending on the
water temperature;
- switch the boiler or water heater on if the temperature of the solar
hot water is insufficient;
- connect the solar hot water circuit to the boiler or water heater
according to the functioning mode of the boiler or water heater,
which can be instant modulating, non modulating, or equipped
with its own storage.
264 series SOLARNOCAL

Operating principle
1) Diverter valve
2) Diverter valve actuator
3) Thermostatic mixing valve
4) Diverter valve control thermostat
5) Solar water storage temperature probe
A thermostatic anti-scald mixing valve, at the kit inlet, controls the

temperature of the water coming from the solar water storage.
The thermostat, by means of the probe positioned on the hot water
flow from the solar water storage, controls the diverter valve at the
kit outlet.
Depending on the temperature set, the valve diverts the water
towards the user circuit or activates the boiler circuit, without
thermal integration.
1
Cold
water
inlet
Hydraulic diagram
Inlet
from
boiler
BOILER
COLD
COLD
SOLAR
Inlet from
solar storage
User
outlet
BOILER
MIXED
USER
OUTLET
TSOLAR > 45C
SOLAR
USER
OUTLET
TSOLAR < 45C
265 series SOLARINCAL

Operating principle
1) Diverter valve
2) Diverter valve actuator
3) Thermostatic mixing valve
4) Diverter valve control thermostat
5) Solar storage temperature probe
The thermostat, by means of the probe positioned on the hot water

flow from the solar water storage, controls the diverter valve at the
kit inlet.
Depending on the temperature set, the valve diverts the water
towards the user circuit or activates the boiler circuit, with thermal
integration.
A thermostatic anti-scald mixing valve, at the kit outlet, constantly
controls the temperature of the water sent to the user.
Hydraulic diagram
Inlet
from
boiler
Outlet to
boiler
BOILER
BOILER
2
M
Cold
water
inlet
COLD
MIXED
Mixed
water
outlet
Inlet from
solar storage
SOLAR
TSOLAR > 45C
COLD
MIXED
SOLAR
TSOLAR < 45C
Mixing valve
High resistance to temperature
Internal control components are designed to maintain constant the
mixing valve performance with inlet hot water temperatures up to
100C, in continuous operation.
The materials used in constructing the mixing valve were selected
to eliminate seizing due to limescale deposits. All functional parts
have been made using a special anti-scale material with low friction
coefficient, which ensures over time performance.
As a safety measure, in case of failure of the cold water supply, the
valve immediately shuts off the flow of the hot water. This prevents
dangerous burns. This performance is guaranteed if there is a
minimum temperature difference between the inlet hot water and
the outlet mixed water of 10C. Also in case of failure of the hot
water supply, the valve shuts off the cold water port and thus the
outlet mixed water to prevent dangerous thermal shocks.
Diverter valve
Removing the actuator reveals a slot at the top of the control stem
on which the shaft of the actuator acts:
- this slot allows the valve to be opened and closed manually with
a screwdriver;
- the slot position allows to understand the flow direction
depending on the ball position. This is extremely useful for system
commissioning and checking.
Two diagrams follow here regarding the two valves types. As
visible, the slot position shows the flow direction.
264 series
Actuator
Drive transmission
A taper coupling allows a constant connection between the valve
control stem (A) and the output shaft of the gear actuator (B).
This provides automatic compensation for the mechanical slack
thanks to the thrust (C) of the fluid pressure on the control stem.
Valve-actuator coupling
An elastic steel fastener (D) allows the valve to be coupled to the
actuator quickly and easily, by a simple clutch operation with
automatic locking.
Cam and stop limit microswitches

A cam (A) operates the stop limit
microswitches (B). This cam,
which can move vertically, is
supported by a tapered spring
(C). This keeps the cam in
constant
contact
with
the
microswitches and compensates
for wear over time.
A
B
C
Max
0,8 A
CLOSE
The auxiliary microswitch closes at
an average valve aperture of 80%.
OPEN
265 series
Valves are initially delivered with the slot vertical.
Diverter-mixing valve coupling
Application
The diverter-mixing valve coupling on the Solarnocal and Solarincal

solar storage-to-boiler connection kits allows the mixing valve to
rotate through 360 to satisfy all the possible installation needs.
The kit comes complete with a special pre-formed protective cover.
Solar storage-to-boiler connection kits are generally installed near the

boiler, at the outlet from the solar hot water storage, to ensure a
constant temperature of the mixed water supplied to the user.
Given their flow characteristics, thermostatic mixing valves can be
installed to control water temperature both for single user points (e.g.
washbasins, bidets, showers) and for multiple users. To ensure that
the mixed water is supplied at the set temperature, a minimum flow
rate of 4 l/min must be ensured to the mixing valves.
Checking the head loss in the kit
If the design flow rate is known and taking into account the
simultaneous use of sanitary appliances, the head loss produced
by the kit can be checked using the diagram.
It is necessary to check the available pressure, the head loss in the
system downstream of the kit and the residual pressure to be
guaranteed to user devices.
Installation
Before installing the kits, the pipework must be flushed to ensure
that no circulating impurities can compromise their operation. It is
recommended to install always strainers of adequate performance
The kits must be fitted according to the installation diagram
provided in the instruction manual or in this brochure.
The kits can be installed in any position, vertically or horizontally.
They cannot, however, be installed with the actuator of the diverter
valve upside down.
Hydraulic characteristics of the 264 series

p (bar)
1,5
p (m w.g.)
15
3
Kv (m /h)
1,1
1,0
10
7,1
0,5
0,3
0,2
Check valves
installed to prevent undesired backflow. The kit with mixing valve
incorporates check valves on the hot and cold water inlets.
5
100
50
20
0,5
10
10
0,5
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,05
2
0,2
0,1

p (bar)
1,5
Commissioning
In view of the special applications for which the thermostatic mixing
valve is used, it must be commissioned according to current
regulations, by qualified technicians equipped with suitable
temperature measurement instruments. We recommend using a
digital thermometer for measuring the mixed water temperature.
The temperature is set to the
desired value by means of the
control knob on the thermostatic
mixing valve.
p (m w.g.)
15
Kv (m3/h)
1,0
10
1,40
1,55
0,5
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,5
Valve position indicator

The thermostat is equipped with a LED indicating the diverter valve
position, showing whether it is connected to the solar circuit or the
boiler.
The LED is a two colour type:
5
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
50
1
20
10
0,2
0,5
Green: solar circuit active
Red: boiler circuit active
5x20
315 mA T
35
50
ON
50
FUS
28087
28086
265 series Solarincal
TSET (C)
FUS
TSET (C)
5x20
315 mA T
70
35
50
ON
OFF
OFF
Com.
In 264 series kit its possible to set the temperature to a

value between 50 and 70C, above which the valve is
again deviated to the solar water circuit. In this way, the
diverter valve only operates when the solar water
storage is full of enough thermal energy, avoiding
excessive variations in the temperature of the
distributed hot water caused by the action of the
diverter valve.
264 series Solarnocal
Com.
Set temperature adjustment / Electrical

connections
The thermostat is adjusted in the factory to operate at a
temperature of 45C, thus diverting the water to the
boiler if the temperature falls below this set value. If
necessary, the thermostat trip value can be adjusted
between 35 and 50C, by turning the trimmer to suit the
needs of the system and boiler.
Probe
L
230 V (ac)
Factory set:
Probe
Diverter valve
ON: 45C
OFF: 60C
230 V (ac)
Factory set:
Diverter valve
ON: 45C
OFF: 45C
264 series Solarnocal
NON
MODULATING
BOILER
COLD
WATER
INLET
COLD
USER
265 series Solarincal
MODULATING
BOILER
MIXED
COLD
COLD
WATER
INLET
264 series
Solar storage-to-boiler connection kit without thermal integration. Inlet and outlet threaded connections 3/4 M with unions.
Medium drinking water.
Consisting of:
- Mixing valve: dezincification resistant alloy body, chrome plated; PSU obturator; stainless steel springs; EPDM seals; ABS
control knob. Maximum working pressure 10 bar (static), 5 bar (dynamic); adjustment temperature range 3555C; factory
set 43C; accuracy 2C; maximum inlet temperature 100C; maximum inlet pressures ratio (H/C or C/H) 2:1; minimum
temperature difference between the inlet hot water and the outlet mixed water to ensure anti-scald performance 10C;
minimum flow rate for a stable operation 4 l/min.
- Diverter valve: brass body, chrome plated; brass ball, chrome plated; PTFE ball seal with EPDM O-Ring; double EPDM
O-Ring control stem seal; non-asbestos fibre union seal. Maximum working pressure 10 bar; maximum differential pressure
10 bar; working temperature range -5110C.
- Actuator with protective shell in self-extinguishing polycarbonate; colour grey RAL 9002.
- Three-contact actuator with auxiliary microswitch; electric supply 230 V (ac); power consumption 8 VA; auxiliary microswitch
contact rating 0,8 A (230 V); protection class IP 44 with control stem in vertical position, IP 40 with control stem in horizontal
position; operating time 10 s; ambient temperature range 055C; dynamic torque 6 Nm; length of electric supply cable 1 m.
- PVC pre-formed shell protective cover. Temperature range -5110C.
- Thermostat: electric supply 230 V (ac); power consumption 10 (2+8) VA; adjustable temperature range 3550C; factory
set 45C; box protection class IP 65.
- Temperature probe: working range 0100C; time constant 1 min; response 100 k at 25C; two wire cable with 4,5 mm
probe, L = 2 m.
265 series
Solar storage-to-boiler connection kit with thermal integration. Inlet and outlet threaded connections 3/4 M with unions, boiler
connection 3/4 M. Medium drinking water.
Consisting of:
- Mixing valve: dezincification resistant alloy body, chrome plated; PSU obturator; stainless steel springs; EPDM seals; ABS
control knob. Maximum working pressure 10 bar (static), 5 bar (dynamic); adjustment temperature range 3555C; factory
set 43C; accuracy 2C; maximum inlet temperature 100C; maximum inlet pressures ratio (H/C or C/H) 2:1; minimum
temperature difference between the inlet hot water and the outlet mixed water to ensure anti-scald performance 10C;
minimum flow rate for a stable operation 4 l/min.
- Diverter valve: brass body, chrome plated; brass ball, chrome plated; PTFE ball seal with EPDM O-Ring; double EPDM
O-Ring control stem seal; non-asbestos fibre union seals. Maximum working pressure 10 bar; maximum differential pressure
10 bar; working temperature range -5110C.
- Actuator with protective shell in self-extinguishing polycarbonate; colour grey RAL 9002.
- Three-contact actuator with auxiliary microswitch; electric supply 230 V (ac); power consumption 8 VA; auxiliary microswitch
contact rating 0,8 A (230 V); protection class IP 44 with control stem in vertical position, IP 40 with control stem in horizontal
position; operating time 10 s; ambient temperature range 0-55C; dynamic torque 6 Nm; length of electric supply cable 1 m.
- PVC pre-formed shell protective cover. Temperature range -5110C.
- Thermostat: electric supply 230 V (ac); power consumption 10 (2+8) VA; adjustable temperature range 3550C; factory
set 45C; box protection class IP 65.
- Temperature probe: working range 0-100C; time constant 1 min; response 100 k at 25C; two wire cable with 4,5 mm
probe, L = 2 m.
CALEFFI
Solar storage-to-boiler thermostatic

connection kit
RE
IS
262 - 263 series

TERE
BS EN ISO 9001:2000
Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI
Cert. n 0003
01164/09 GB
Function
The solar storage-to-boiler connection kits automatically control and
optimise the thermal energy contained in the solar water storage,
ensuring that domestic hot water is distributed throughout the
system at a controlled optimum temperature.
They ensure that users always receive hot water at the set
temperature and switch the boiler on if the temperature of the water
coming from the solar storage falls below the set point.
The kits are available in two versions, to be coupled with various
boiler kinds, with storage or istantaneous.
Depending on the version, they are supplied complete with
thermostatic diverter valve, special thermostatic control device
designed to prevent boiler hunting and anti-scald thermostatic
mixing valve.
These compact kits are designed for quick and easy installation in
both new and existing systems.
They come complete with a pre-formed shell protective cover.
Product range
Code 262350 SOLARINCAL-T. Solar thermostatic connection kit to boilers with storage
Code 263350 SOLARINCAL-T PLUS. Solar thermostatic connection kit to instantaneous boilers
size 3/4
size 3/4
Materials
Body: - 262 series:
- 263 series:
Obturator:
Springs:
Seals:
Knob:

EN 1982 CB752S, chrome plated
PSU
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
Diverter valve and thermostatic control device

Body: - 262 series:
- 263 series:
EN 1982 CB752S, chrome plated
Obturator:
PSU
Springs:
stainless steel
Seals:
EPDM
Cover:
ABS
Union seals:
non-asbestos fibre
Protective cover
262 series Material:
Thickness:
Density:
Reaction to fire (EN 13501-1):
263 series Material:
Thickness:
Thermal conductivity:
Density:
Reaction to fire (UL 94):
Connections: - inlet and outlet:
- boiler:
PVC
7 mm
1,29 kg/dm3
-5110C
class B
EPP
15 mm
0,037 W/(mK) at 10C
0,045 kg/dm3
-5120C
class HBF
3/4 M with union
3/4 M
Performance
Medium:
drinking water
10 bar (static);
5 bar (dynamic)
100C
3555C
Factory set:
43C
Accuracy:
2C
2:1
Min. temperature difference between inlet hot water and
the outlet mixed water to ensure anti-scald performance:
10C
4 l/min
Performance to standards: NF 079 doc. 8, EN 15092, EN 1111, EN 1287
Thermostatic diverter valve
Max. differential pressure:
Factory set:
Accuracy:
10 bar
5 bar
100C
45C
2C
Thermostatic control device

Factory set:
Accuracy:
85C
30C
2C
Dimensions
A
Code
262350
A
3/4"
B
66,5
C
108,5
D
40
E
81
F Weight (kg)
42,5
1,75
Code
263350
A
3/4"
A
C
B
60
C
60
D
78
E
88,5
F Weight (kg)
45,5
1,85
High temperature and solar systems

In solar thermal systems with natural circulation in the primary
circuit and a water storage with heating jacket, the temperature of
the domestic water in the storage can vary considerably depending
on the degree of solar radiation and can reach very high
temperatures over long periods.
Water temperatures over 50C can cause burns very quickly. For
example, at 55C, partial burn occurs in about 30 seconds,
- reduce the temperature of the water distributed throughout the
- keep mixed water temperature constant despite variations in inlet
temperature and pressure;
- continue functioning over time without any loss in performance
and without problems due to the continuously high temperature of
the incoming water;
- enable the high temperature water in the storage to last longer, by
distributing it to the user circuit at a reduced temperature;
water supply.

Temperature
Adults
Children 0-5 years
70C
1s
65C
2s
0,5 s
60C
5s
1s
55C
30 s
10 s
50C
5 min
2,5 min
USER
Integration with boiler
MODULATING
BOILER
Solar domestic water storages are normally installed in conjunction

with boilers or water heaters. In this way, boilers or water heaters
can be switched on to produce domestic hot water when solar
radiation is insufficient, therefore the thermal energy available
within the storage is low.
The following actions are necessary to control this type of system
automatically and ensure the correct distribution of domestic hot
water:
- install a suitable thermostatic diverter valve between the solar
circuit and the boiler or water heater, to divert hot water
automatically in accordance with its temperature;
- switch the boiler or water heater on if the temperature of the solar
hot water is insufficient;
- connect the solar hot water circuit to the boiler or water heater
according to the functioning mode of the boiler or water heater,
which can be instant modulating or equipped with its own
storage.
262 series SOLARINCAL-T

Operating principle
1) Thermostatic diverter valve

2) Anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve
A thermostatic diverter valve, at the kit inlet, receives hot water

coming from the solar water storage.
Depending on the temperature set (factory set: 45C), the valve
diverts the water automatically and in a proportional manner
towards the user circuit or the boiler with storage circuit, with
thermal integration.
The valve modulates the flow rates to optimise the energy
contained in the solar storage and reduce boiler operation times to
a minimum.
A thermostatic anti-scald mixing valve, at the kit outlet, constantly
controls the water temperature sent to the user.
Inlet
from
boiler
Outlet
to boiler
Cold
water
inlet
Hydraulic diagram
BOILER
Mixed water
outlet
Inlet from
solar storage
BOILER
COLD
MIXED
SOLAR
COLD
MIXED
SOLAR
TSOLAR > 45C
TSOLAR < 45C
263 series SOLARINCAL-T P L U S

Operating principle
1) Thermostatic diverter valve

2) Thermostatic control device
3) Anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve
A thermostatic diverter valve, at the kit inlet, receives hot water

coming from the solar water storage.
Depending on the temperature set (factory set: 45C), the valve
diverts the water automatically and proportionally towards the user
circuit or the instantaneous boiler circuit, with thermal
integration.
The valve modulates the flow rates to optimise the energy
contained in the solar storage and reduce boiler operation times to
a minimum.
A specific thermostatic control device limits the boiler inlet
temperature to prevent it being switched on and off too often,
which leads to hunting and irregular operation.
An anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve, at the kit outlet, constantly
controls the water temperature sent to the user.
Outlet
to boiler
Inlet from
boiler
Cold
water
inlet
Hydraulic diagram
BOILER
Mixed water
outlet
BOILER
Inlet
from
solar storage
M
COLD
COLD
MIXED
SOLAR
TSOLAR > 45C
MIXED
SOLAR
TSOLAR < 45C
Operational flexibility
The kits are made using a single casting, so as to minimise their
overall size and make installation easier. They are supplied
complete with components used for control and operation,
designed for direct connection to the circuit without sections of
piping having to be fitted between the various devices.
Diverter
valve
Mixing valve

The internal control components of the diverter valve and the
mixing valve are designed to maintain constant performance with
inlet hot water temperatures up to 100C, in continuous operation.
The materials used when constructing the kit were selected to
eliminate seizing due to limescale deposits. All functional parts
have been made using a special anti-scale material with low friction
coefficient, which ensures over time performance.
T > 45C
T < 45C
Thermostatic control device

If used in conjunction with instantaneous boilers, the water
temperature at the boiler inlet may reach certain values (T>35C)
which prevent the boiler from modulating enough the thermal
power transferred to the medium. Low flow rates may lead to the
boiler being switched on and off too often, with consequent hunting
that prevents the boiler from operating efficiently.
The thermostatic control device in the 263 series limits the
occurrence of this phenomenon, as it keeps the water temperature
at the boiler inlet at a constant low value (T=30C) by mixing the
solar hot water coming from the diverter valve with the cold water at
the inlet.
This means the boiler always operates with a suitable
thermaldifference between the inlet and the outlet, resulting in
optimal management of the energy produced.
A special anti-scald thermostatic
mixing valve offering high thermal
performance is positioned at the
kit outlet in order to control the
temperature and protect the user.
The mixing valve keeps the
temperature of the hot water at
the kit outlet, supplied to the user,
at a constant level, even in the
event of variations in temperature
and pressure at the inlet or flow
rate requested.
Control
device
Diverter valve
The thermostatic diverter valve at
the kit inlet features a built-in
sensor, which is immersed directly
in the flow of hot water coming from
the solar storage. Through the
action of the thermostat controlling
obturator movement, the flow rate
is adjusted proportionally and
automatically, without the need for
external energy sources.
This means there is no need for
other temperature probes in the
circuit and electrical wiring
procedures.

As a safety measure, in case of failure of the cold water supply, the
valve immediately shuts off the flow of the hot water. This prevents
dangerous burns. This performance is guaranteed if there is a
minimum temperature difference between the inlet hot water and
the outlet mixed water of 10C. Also in case of failure of the hot
water supply, the valve shuts off the cold water port and thus the
outlet mixed water to prevent dangerous thermal shocks.
Thermal transient
During transient, following rapid changes in pressure, temperature
or flow rate, the outlet mixed water temperature increases with
respect to the initial set point and this increase must be of limited
duration to guarantee safety. The anti-scald mixing valve always
ensures that these conditions are respected.
T(C)
< 0,5 s - max
60C
< 3 s - max
55C
2K
2K
Initial
temperature
Temperature
rise
Stabilisation
period
Stable
conditions
Time (s)
Diverter-mixing valve coupling
Application
The diverter-mixing valve coupling on the Solarincal T storage-toboiler thermostatic connection kit allows the mixing valve to rotate
through 360 to satisfy all the possible installation needs.
The kit comes complete with a special pre-formed protective cover.
Solar storage-to-boiler connection kits are generally installed near the

boiler, on the pipe of the hot water coming from the solar storage, to
ensure a constant temperature of the mixed water supplied to the user.
Given their flow rate characteristics, thermostatic kits can be installed to
control water temperature both for single user points (e.g. washbasins,
bidets, showers) and for multiple users. To ensure that the mixed water
is supplied at the set temperature, a minimum flow rate of 4 l/min must
be ensured to the kits with thermostatic mixing valves.
Checking the head loss in the kit
If the design flow rate is known and taking into account the
simultaneous use of sanitary appliances, the head loss produced
by the kit can be checked using the diagram.
It is necessary to check the available pressure, the head loss in the
system downstream of the kit and the residual pressure to be
guaranteed to user devices.
Installation
Before installing the kits, the pipework must be flushed to ensure
that no circulating impurities can compromise their operation. It is
recommended to install always strainers of adequate performance
The kits must be fitted according to the installation diagram
provided in the instruction manual or in this brochure.
The kits can be installed in any position, vertically or horizontally.

p (bar)
1,5
Tsol > 45C
p (m w.g.)
15
Tsol < 45C
1,0
10
Kv (m3/h)
with Tsol > 45C = 1,3

with Tsol < 45C = 1,2
0,5
0,1
0,05
0,5
50
1
20
10
0,2
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,2
0,5
0,3

p (bar)
1,5
Tsol > 45C
p (m w.g.)
15
Tsol < 45C
1,0
10
Kv (m3/h)
with Tsol > 45C = 1,2

with Tsol < 45C = 1,1
0,5
0,1
0,05
0,5
50
1
20
10
0,2
5
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,2
0,5
0,3
Bracketing
The 263 series connection
kit is supplied complete
with a special wallmounting bracket.
This
simplifies
the
installation process and
makes connection easier
while ensuring a secure
support.
Check valves
In systems with thermostatic mixing valves, check valves shall be
installed to prevent undesired backflow. The kit with mixing valve
incorporates check valves on the hot and cold water inlets.
Commissioning
In view of the special applications for which the thermostatic mixing
valve is used, it must be commissioned according to current
regulations, by qualified technicians equipped with suitable
temperature measurement instruments. We recommend using a
digital thermometer for measuring the mixed water temperature.
The temperature of the mixed water
is set to the desired value by means
of the control knob on the
thermostatic mixing valve.
Temperature setpoint adjustment

The diverter valve is factory adjusted to operate at a temperature of 45C, diverting water to the boiler if the temperature falls below this setpoint
value. The set temperature value is fixed using a locking ring.
The 263 series thermostatic control device is factory set and fixed to keep constantly at 30C the temperature of the water at the boiler inlet.
Factory configurations
Diverter valve:
45C
Thermostatic control device: 30C
262 series Thermostatic Solarincal - natural circulation solar system
Shut-off valve
Discharge tundish
Check valve
Temperature gauge
Expansion vessel
T
Thermostat
Pump
MIXED
COLD
COLD
WATER
INLET
Safety relief valve
262 series Thermostatic Solarincal - forced circulation solar system
MIXED
COLD
Normally closed valve
COLD
WATER
INLET
263 series Thermostatic Solarincal-T Plus - natural circulation solar system
MODULATING
BOILER
MIXED
COLD
COLD
WATER
INLET
262 series
Solar thermostatic connection kit to boilers with storage. Inlet and outlet connections 3/4 M with union. Boiler connections 3/4 M.
Medium drinking water.
Complete with:
- Diverter valve with chrome plated brass body. PSU obturator; stainless steel springs; EPDM seals; ABS cover. Union seals in
non-asbestos fibre. Maximum working pressure 10 bar; maximum differential pressure 5 bar; maximum inlet temperature 100C;
factory set 45C; accuracy 2C.
- Anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve with dezincification resistant alloy body, chrome plated; PSU obturator; stainless steel
springs; EPDM seals; ABS control knob. Maximum working pressure (static) 10 bar, 5 bar (dynamic); temperature adjustment
range 35-55C; factory set 43C; accuracy 2C. Maximum inlet temperature 100C; maximum ratio between inlet pressures (H/C
or C/H) 2:1; minimum temperature differential between hot water inlet and mixed water outlet to ensure anti-scald performance
10C; minimum flow rate for stable operation 4 l/min.
Performance to standards: NF 079 doc. 8, EN 15092, EN 1111, EN 1287. Complete with a PVC pre-formed shell
protective cover.
263 series
Solar thermostatic connection kit to instantaneous boilers. Inlet and outlet connections 3/4 M with union. Boiler
connections 3/4 M. Medium drinking water.
Complete with:
- Diverter valve with dezincification resistant alloy body, chrome plated. PSU obturator; stainless steel springs; EPDM
seals; ABS cover. Union seals in non-asbestos fibre. Maximum working pressure 10 bar; maximum differential pressure
5 bar; maximum inlet temperature 100C; factory set 45C. Accuracy 2%.
- Thermostatic control device with dezincification resistant alloy body, chrome plated. PSU obturator; stainless steel
springs; EPDM seals; ABS cover. Union seals in non-asbestos fibre. Maximum inlet temperature 85C; factory set 30C;
accuracy 2C.
- Anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve with dezincification-resistant alloy body, chrome plated; PSU obturator; stainless
steel springs; EPDM seals; ABS control knob. Maximum working pressure (static) 10 bar, 5 bar (dynamic); temperature
adjustment range 35-55C; factory set 43C; accuracy 2C. Maximum inlet temperature 100C; maximum ratio
between inlet pressures (H/C or C/H) 2:1; minimum temperature differential between hot water inlet and mixed water
outlet to ensure anti-scald performance 10C; minimum flow rate for stable operation 4 l/min.
Performance to standards: NF 079 doc. 8, EN 15092, EN 1111, EN 1287. Complete with a EPP pre-formed shell
protective cover.
CALEFFI
Adjustable anti-scald thermostatic

mixing valve for solar thermal systems
RE
IS
2527 series
TERE
BS EN ISO 9001:2000
Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI

Cert. n 0003
01165/09 GB
Function
The thermostatic mixing valve is used in solar thermal systems for
the production of domestic hot water.
and pressure conditions of the incoming hot and cold water or in
the flow rate.
It is also fitted with an anti-scald safety function, which immediately
shuts off the hot water flow in case of a failure in the cold water
supply at the inlet.
This particular series of mixing valves can function continuously at
storage tank.
Product range
2527 series Adjustable anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve for solar thermal systems.
Complete with strainers and check valves at the inlets
Connections:
Performance
Adjustment range:
3555C
Accuracy:
2C
10 bar
5 bar
100C
2:1
Minimum temperature difference between the inlet hot water
and the outlet mixed water to ensure anti-scald performance: 10C
4 l/min
Performance to standards:
NF 079 doc. 8, EN 15092
EN 1111, EN 1287
Obturator:
Springs:
Seal components:
Control knob:

PSU
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
Materials
Body:
Dimensions
sizes 1/2 and 3/4
Code
252714
252713
A
1/2
3/4
B
62,5
67
C
125
134
D
E
126,5 81,5
127
82
F Weight (kg)
45
0,58
45
0,81
High temperature solar systems

In solar thermal systems with natural circulation in the primary circuit and a water storage with heating jacket, the temperature of the domestic
water in the storage can vary considerably depending on the degree of solar radiation and can reach very high temperatures over long periods.
Water temperatures over 50C can cause burns very quickly.
For example, at 55C, partial burn occurs in about 30 seconds,
reduce the temperature of the water distributed throughout the
keep mixed water temperature constant despite variations in inlet
temperature and pressure.
continue functioning over time without any loss in performance
and without problems due to the continuously high temperature
of the incoming water;
enable the high temperature water in the tank to last longer, by
distributing it to the user circuit at a reduced temperature.
have an anti-scald safety function in case of failure of the cold
water supply.

Temperature
70C
65C
60C
55C
50C
Adults
1s
2s
5s
30 s
5 min
Children 0-5 years

-0,5 s
1s
10 s
2,5 min
Operating principle
The thermostatic mixing valve mixes the hot and cold water at the
inlet so as to maintain the mixed water at a constant set temperature
at the outlet. A thermostatic element is fully immersed in the mixed
water outlet passage. It contracts or expands, moving an obturator
which controls the passage of hot or cold water at the inlet. If there
are changes in the inlet temperature or pressure, the internal
element automatically reacts to restore the set temperature at the
outlet.
Code 252713
HOT

Internal control components are
designed to maintain constant the mixing
valve performance with inlet hot water
operation.
COLD
The materials used in constructing the
mixing valve were selected to eliminate
seizing due to limescale deposits.
All functional parts have been made
using a special anti-scale material with
low friction coefficient, which ensures
over time performance.
As a safety measure, in case of failure of
the cold water supply, the valve
immediately shuts off the flow of the hot
water. This prevents dangerous burns.
This performance is guaranteed if there
is a minimum temperature difference
between the inlet hot water and the
outlet mixed water of 10C. Also in case
of failure of the hot water supply, the
valve shuts off the cold water port and
thus the outlet mixed water to prevent
dangerous thermal shocks.
Code 252714
MIXED
Commissioning
p (bar)
252714
p (m w.g.)
252713
1,5
15
1,0
10
0,5
0,3
0,2
In view of the special applications for which the

thermostatic mixing valve is used, it must be
commissioned according to current regulations, by
qualified technicians equipped with suitable
temperature measurement instruments.
We recommend using a digital thermometer for
measuring the mixed water temperature.
The temperature of the mixed water sent to the user
is set at the desired value using the control knob
with the graduated scale on the valve.
Kv (m3/h)
252714
1/2
1,5
252713
3/4
1,7
50
20
10
0,5
5
Code
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,5
0,05
0,2
0,1
Use
In view of their flow characteristics, the 2527 series thermostatic mixing valves can
be installed to control the temperature for individual user fittings (for example wash
basin, bidet, shower) or multiple user fittings.
To ensure stable operation, the mixing valve must be guaranteed a minimum flow
rate of 4 l/min. The system must always be sized in accordance with current
legislation regarding the nominal flow rate to each user fitting.
Selecting the mixing valve size

appliances, the size of the mixing valve is chosen by checking on the graph
provided the head loss produced. In this case, it is necessary to check the
available pressure, the head loss in the system downstream of the mixing valve and
the residual pressure to be guaranteed to the user appliances.
Thermal transient
During transient, following rapid changes in pressure,
temperature or flow rate, the outlet mixed water
temperature increases with respect to the initial set
point and this increase must be of limited duration to
guarantee safety. The anti-scald mixing valve always
ensures that these conditions are respected.
Installation
Before installing the mixing valve, the pipework must be flushed to ensure that no
circulating impurities can compromise its operation. It is recommended to install
always strainers of adequate performance at the water inlet from the hydraulic
network. The 2527 series mixing valve is equipped with strainers at the cold and
hot water inlets. The 2527 series thermostatic mixing valve must be fitted according
to the installation diagram provided in the instruction manual or in this brochure.
The 2527 series thermostatic mixing valve can be installed in any position, vertically
or horizontally.
The following marks are indicated on the valve body:
hot water inlet by the letter H (Hot)
cold water inlet by the letter C (Cold)
mixed water outlet by the word MIX
< 0,5 s - max
< 3 s - max
2K
2K
Starting
temperature
Temperature
rise
Stabilisation
period
Stable
conditions
Time (s)
Check valves
In systems with thermostatic mixing valves, check valves should be installed to
prevent undesired backflow. The 2527 series thermostatic mixing valve
incorporates check valves on the hot and cold water inlets, specific for solar hot
water high temperatures.

Shut-off valve
T

Discharge tundish
Check valve
Temperature gauge
Expansion vessel
T
Automatic diverter valve

T
Thermostat
Pump
Normally closed
valve
Safety relief valve
Normally closed
valve
2527 series
Adjustable anti-scald thermostatic mixing valve for solar thermal systems. Connections 1/2 (and 3/4) M with union.
Dezincification resistant alloy body. Chrome plated. Obturator in PSU. Stainless steel springs. EPDM seal elements. ABS
control knob. Maximum inlet temperature 100C. Adjustment range 3555C. Accuracy 2C. Maximum working pressure
(static) 10 bar. Maximum working pressure (dynamic) 5 bar. Maximum inlet pressures ratio (H/C or C/H) 2:1. Complete with
strainers and check valves at the inlets. Minimum temperature difference between the inlet hot water and the outlet mixed
water to ensure anti-scald performance 10C. Minimum flow rate for stable operation 4 l/min. Performance to standards
NF 079 doc. 8, EN 15092, EN 1111, EN 1287.
CALEFFI
Compact automatic flow rate regulator

with polymer cartridge
RE
IS
127 series
TERE
BS EN ISO 9001:2000
Cert. n FM 21654
CALEFFI
Cert. n 0003
01166/09 GB
Function
The AUTOFLOW devices are automatic flow rate stabilizers
capable of maintaining a constant flow rate of the medium as the
operating conditions of the hydraulic system change. They are used
to automatically balance the hydraulic system, guaranteeing the
design flow rate to each terminal.
This series of devices is fitted with an interchangeable flow rate
regulator, made of high resistance, scale resistant and low noise
polymer, for specific use in air-conditioning, hydraulic and domestic
water systems.
This special AUTOFLOW series is also supplied with a compact,
reduced size valve body for easy installation on individual terminals
or system zones.
Patent application no. MI2004A001549
Product range
127 series Compact automatic flow rate regulator, with polymer cartridge
Dimensions
Performance
Medium:

stainless steel
EPDM

50%
Materials
Body:
Autoflow cartridge:
Spring:
Seals:
sizes 1/2 and 3/4
16 bar
0100C
p range:
Flow rates:
Accuracy:
15200 kPa
0,121,6 m3/h
10%
Connections:
1/2 and 3/4 F
A
C
Code
127141
127151
A
1/2"
3/4"
B
74
74
C
41
41
Weight (kg)
0,24
0,25
Circuit balancing
Modern heating and air-conditioning systems have to guarantee a high level of thermal comfort with a low energy consumption. This means
supplying the system terminals with the correct design flow rates, to produce balanced hydraulic circuits.
Unbalanced circuits
In
case
of
an
unbalanced circuit,
the
hydraulic
umbalance between
emitters creates areas
with
temperatures
which
are
not
uniform,
and,
as
a
consequence,
comfort and higher
energy consumption.
Flow rate
50 %
17
140 %
22
24
180 %

using
manual
calibration valves.
perfectly and have
operating limitations
in case of partial
closure by means of
the regulating valves.
The flow rate in the
open circuits does
not remain constant
at the nominal value.
Flow rate
Flow rate
100 %
100 %
140 %
Regulating
valve
0%
100 %
120 %
Manual valve
FULL LOAD
PARTIAL LOAD

hydraulic
circuit
automatically,
by
ensuring to each
terminal emitter the
design flow rate.
Even in case of partial
circuit closure by
means
of
the
circuits
remain
constant
at
the
nominal value. The
system
always
guarantees
the
the highest energy
savings.
Flow rate
Flow rate
100 %
100%
100 %
Regulating
valve
0%
100%
100 %
Autoflow
FULL LOAD
PARTIAL LOAD
AUTOFLOW devices
Function
It is therefore necessary to refer to the p - flow rate diagram and to a basic diagram illustrating the operation methods and the relevant
variable effects.
Operating principle
The regulating element of these devices is composed of a cilinder and a piston with side fixed and variable geometry orifices, through which
the fluid flows. These orifices are governed by the piston movement, pushed by the medium thrust. A specially calibrated spring counteracts
this movement.
Autoflows are high performance automatic regulators. They regulate selected flow rates within a very tight tolerance (approx. 10%) and offer a
wide range of operation.

remains in equilibrium without
compressing the spring and gives
the fluid the maximum free flow area.
In practice, the piston acts as a fixed
regulator and thus the flow rate
through the AUTOFLOW depends
FLOW RATE
G0

PRESSURE
Kv0,01 = 0,258 G0 range p 15200 kPa

FLOW RATE
Control range
Final p
G0
Initial p
If the differential pressure is contained

within the control range, the piston
compresses the spring and gives the
medium a free flow area to permit
regular flow at the nominal rate for
which the AUTOFLOW is set up.

PRESSURE

In this case, the piston fully compresses
the spring and leaves only the fixed
geometry aperture for the medium to
pass through.
As in the first case above, the piston
acts as a fixed regulator. The flow rate
through the AUTOFLOW thus
depends solely on the differential
pressure.
FLOW RATE
G0

PRESSURE
Kv0,01 = 0,070 G0 range p 15200 kPa
New polymer regulator
The flow rate regulator is made entirely of high resistance
polymer, specially chosen for use in air-conditioning and
hydraulic systems.
Its mechanical behaviour is excellent in a wide range of
working temperatures, it features high resistance to the
abrasion caused by continuous medium flow, it is insensitive
to the deposit of scale and is fully compatible with glycols
and additives used in circuits.
Cartridge removal
The device is easy to remove for inspection or manual replacement
of the regulator, by unscrewing the cartridge locking nut from
the valve body.
Compact valve body with reduced dimensions
This special series of devices is also supplied with a compact,
simplified valve body for easy fitting on pipes and more costefficient installations.
Exclusive design
With its exclusive design, the new regulator is able to
accurately regulate the flow rate in a wide range of operating
pressures. A special internal chamber acts as a damper for
beating and vibrations triggered by the medium flow, allowing
low noise operating conditions to the device.
For these reasons it can be used in systems both on zone
branch circuits and directly at the terminals.
Sizing the circuit with AUTOFLOW

Sizing the circuit containing AUTOFLOW valves is
particularly easy to accomplish. As illustrated alongside by the
example diagrams, calculation of the loss of head in order to
choose the pump is made by referring to the hydraulically
most unfavourable circuit and by adding this value to the
minimum differential pressure required by the AUTOFLOW. In
the example the circuits have the same nominal flow rate.
The AUTOFLOW devices, located on intermediate circuits,
automatically absorb the excess differential pressure to ensure
the corresponding nominal flow rate.
As the regulating valves open or close, the AUTOFLOW
repositions itself dynamically to maintain the nominal flow rate
(50% load = circuits 3, 5, 7, 8 closed).
For more detailed information on sizing a system with
AUTOFLOW, please refer to the 2nd volume of the Caleffi
Handbooks and the technical report Dynamic balancing of
hydronic circuits. They give theoretical calculations,
numerical examples and notes on the application of the
Regulating valve
AUTOFLOW
p along the circuit (flow and return)
p absorbed by AUTOFLOW
at 100% load
Pump H
4
Terminal
extra p absorbed by AUTOFLOW

at 50% load
minimum p required by AUTOFLOW
p in branch circuit
Flow rate table

Code
Size
Minimum working
p (kPa)
127141
127151
1/2
3/4
15
15
p range
(kPa)
Flow rates (m3/h)
15200
15200
0,12; 0,15; 0,2; 0,25; 0,3; 0,35; 0,4; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2
0,12; 0,15; 0,2; 0,25; 0,3; 0,35; 0,4; 0,5; 0,6; 0,7; 0,8; 0,9; 1,0; 1,2; 1,4; 1,6

Equal to the minimum working p of the AUTOFLOW cartridge (15 kPa).
Example
AUTOFLOW 127 series size 3/4 with flow rate G0 = 1,200 l/h and p range 15200 kPa:
prequired = pAUTOFLOW = 15 kPa
Method of coding for AUTOFLOW 127 series

For proper identification of the device, fill in the form indicating: size, flow rate and p range.
2th
3th
4th
5th
{
SERIES
SERIES
1th
SIZE
5th
FLOW RATE
AND p RANGE 7th
2th
3th
7th
8th
9th
1 2 7 1
6th
1th
Complete code:
FLOW RATE AND p RANGE
SIZE
The first three digits

indicate the series:
127
The fifth digit indicates

the size:
Size
1/2"
3/4"
Digit
AUTOFLOW regulators
The last three digits indicate the available flow rate values.
8th
with p range 15200 kPa
9th
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
m3/h
digit
0,12
0,15
0,20
0,25
0,30
M12
M15
M20
M25
M30
0,35
0,40
0,50
0,60
0,70
M35
M40
M50
M60
M70
0,80
0,90
1,00
1,20
1,40
M80
M90
1M0
1M2
1M4
1,60
1M6
Applications of AUTOFLOW (
Installation of AUTOFLOW
In air-conditioning systems, AUTOFLOW devices should preferably be installed on the circuit return pipe.
Some typical installation examples are given below.

T.A.
T.A.
T.A.
To guarantee the design flow rates (with open or closed valve)

to the various zones of a system.
To ensure constant flow rates (in any valve position) in

circuits with traditional temperature control.
Applications of AUTOFLOW (
To balance sanitary water distribution circuits.
To control the amount of delivered water and balance the

To limit the hot water flow rate delivered in systems with

instantaneous production or limited capacity.

Nr. 04301, 04302, 04303 and the technical report
127 series
Compact automatic flow rate regulator, AUTOFLOW. Connections 1/2 (3/4) F x F. Brass body. High resistance polymer
cartridge. Stainless steel spring. EPDM seals. Medium water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%.
Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Working temperature range 0100C. p range 15200 kPa. Range of available flow rates
0,121,6 m3/h. Accuracy 10%.
CALEFFI

regulating unit for heating and cooling
RE
IS
174 series
TERE
CALEFFI
BS EN ISO 9001:2000
Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01167/09 GB
Function
The temperature regulating unit is made for use in radiant panel
The outside compensated temperature regulating unit, complete
with temperature digital regulator for heating and cooling,
controls the temperature of the medium sent to the panels, with
a compensation depending on the outside and inside
In this particular series, the temperature is regulated by a
dedicated hydraulic unit equipped with a specific motorised
three-way valve.
circuit circulation pump and the radiator circuits or fan coils are
In case of connection with a SEPCOLL or an hydraulic separator
- Tech. Brochure 01144
Preassembled distribution manifolds

Product range
Code 1745.2 Outside compensated temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling, with pump UPS 25-60
Code 1745.4 Outside compensated temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling, with pump UPS 25-80
Performance
Materials
Medium:

Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
stainless steel
Seals:
EPDM
Flow adapter unit
Body:

290C
5100C
10 bar
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)
10 kPa (1.000 mm w.g.)

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:

POM
stainless steel
Connections:
080C
010 bar
- primary circuit:
- to regulating unit:
- panel circuit outlets:
3/4 M
1 F with nut
3/4 M - 18 mm
50 mm

p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
20
10
0,2
2
2000
45
4000
0,5
4500
0,1
Shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:

30%
Digital controller
H (m w.g.)
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
(kPa)
230 V - 50 Hz
5,5 VA
IP 40
50
(kPa)
80
UPS 25-80
70
60
Actuator
40
230 V - 50 Hz
50 s (rotation 120)
8 VA
0,8 A
IP 44
55C
1
0
30
20
10
0,5
1,5
2,5
50
40
30
20
10
0,5
1,5
2,5
G (m3/h)
3,5
G (m3/h)
Power consumption
3
2
1
-20100C
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
Speed

NTC type
Control range:
Two-wire cable
UPS 25-60
5
4
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
H (m w.g.)
60
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
1000
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contact rating:
Insulation
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A/240 V
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0.038 W/(mK)
40C: 0.045 W/(mK)
>1300
0100C
class B2
Pump
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:

cast iron GG 15/20
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
Optimiser
9 outlets
13 outlets
1200
5 outlets
1000
Optimiser
800
Dimensions
Optimiser
CALEFFI
1
2
3
2
bar
1
2
5
0
1
2
L/MIN
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
SOGGIORNO
1
2
L/MIN
BAGNO
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CL
2.5
c on
1
2
1
fo r m
E SL
e n or me IS P
30
40
50
20
60
10
70
C
HOBBY
CAMERA
WC
HOBBY
CALEFFI
HOBBY
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
80
700
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
30
40
20
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
CALEFF
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
CALEFF
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
50
60
10
70
0
80
115
a
270410
3/4
60
50
345
code
with UPS 25-60 pump
with UPS 25-80 pump
Panel outlets
A
1745E2
5
695
1745F2
6
745
1745G2
7
795
1745H2
8
845
110150
1745I2
9
915
1745L2
1745L4
10
965
1745M2
1745M4
11
1015
1745N2
1745N4
12
1065
1745O2
1745O4
13
1115
Optimiser
a
11
Optimiser
CALEFFI
10
bar
Flow manifold equipped

with flow meters and
balacing valves
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
CL
2.5
c on
f or m
30
e n o r m e I SP
40
20
SYSTEM
FLOW
50
60
10
70
ES L
80
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
15
16
2
30
40
SYSTEM
RETURN
50
20
CALEFFI
60
10
Return manifold
equipped with
shut-off valves.
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
70
80
14
Optimiser
13
12
BOILER
FLOW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BOILER
RETURN
Heating and cooling controller Optimiser

Flow and return temperature gauges with pockets
Hydraulic diagram
14
16
End fittings with

automatic air vent,
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Safety thermostat
Pressure gauge
SF
11
15
RPT
10
ST

Temperature gauge
Temperature probe
Humidity % probe
SR
RPT
ST
Safety thermostat
Ball shut-off valve

Pressure gauge
13
Pump
12
12
BF
BR

Operating principle
SECONDARY
FLOW
The
medium
temperature
is
regulated by a three-way mixing
valve with a sector obturator
comprehensive of an actuator
managed by a specific digital
controller.
The controller receives the signal
from four probes, flow probe on the
mixing valve outlet, probe on the
panel circuit return, outside probe
and room probe.
The flow in the valve is regulated by
a shaped obturator (1) that, by
turning, closes or opens the hot
water flow ports (2) and the water
returning ports from the circuit (3) to
adjust the desired flow temperature.
temperature.
SECONDARY
RETURN
2
PRIMARY
INLET
to be smaller in size and easily to connect.
PRIMARY
RETURN
Manual opening
By removing the actuator, the valve can be opened-closed
manually by using a screwdriver.
Fully closed
Fully open
op
clo
se
open
en
se
Flow unit
The flow unit is made out of a single casting with the necessary ports
to connect with the functional components such as the safety
thermostat, temperature gauge, pressure gauge, drain cock and flow
temperature probe.
external
plug-socket
system with a protective
rubber cap. This system
does not require opening
the lid to connect the
cables.
actuator (should this ever
be
necessary)
is
30
40
20
MAX 0,8 A
230 V
50
60
10
COMMON
CLOSE
ACTUATOR
OPEN
with an auxiliary microswitch
that can be used to switch
on the generator.
contact OFF.
Start opening mixing valve:
contact ON.
clo
Reduced head losses

70
0
80

Operation
controlling the flow supplied to the heating or cooling elements
Removable kit
Differential valve
cooling elements and limits overpressure if there are thermostatic
or thermo-electric valves.
circuit.
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
2000
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
1000
10
800
700
600

and secondary circuits. This hydraulic separation optimises the
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
20
0,5
Secondary
10
0,1
500
0,2
900
Secondary
Gs
Gs

working rate:
G primary = G
secondary
Gp Primary
Gp Primary
Optimiser
multicoloured diode:
- prolonged red: controller error.
CALEFFI

A Sub D 9-pole mini-DIN data transmission cable is used for
program are available as optional extras.
The change (5 K) is shown in the lines on the display, with increments of 0.5 K in relation to the reference values: comfort heating 20C;
set-back correction 18C. Comfort cooling 22C or off. The actual room temperature is shown on the fourth line on the display.
Optimiser
5. Function keys:
Info
Set
+
Displays brief information relating to the current menu point.
Optimiser
Esc
Optimiser
Remote control base with

room probe
Optimiser
Optimiser
Optimiser
Optimiser
CALEFFI
Optimiser
CALEFFI
Optimiser

no longer needed; the controller is no longer able to manage this probe.
Optimiser
CALEFFI
Optimiser

Example: - flow temperature-heating start-up T = 20C
- flow T at outside min. temp. = 40C corresponds to a temperature range T of 20 K (100%).
- the adjustment of the correction is +1; this means that the flow temperature is raised by 1 K (5% of T), thus the flow temperature
will be 41C.
Immediate heating/cooling comfort function
The value can be modified by 0,5 K steps instead of 1K. The curve is therefore modified by 2,5% instead of 5%.
Heating terminal board

L
Line
N
Neutral
N
b1 Pump contact
La a1 a2 N
230 V~
L N
Probe connections
Terminal board X
X1 Outside probe
X3 Room probe
X4 Flow probe
X6 Return probe
b0 b1
( (
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
Heating / cooling terminal board
La a1 a2 N b0 b1 Lc c1 c2 N
d0 d1
230 V~
L
Live
N
Neutral
N
b1 Pump contact
Lc Heating/cooling circuit relay contact
c1 Heating control
c2 Cooling control
N
Heating/cooling circuit neutral output
d0 No-potential contact on Chiller activation outlet
d1 No-potential contact on Chiller activation inlet
Probes connection
Terminal board Y
y1 RH% probe
y2 RH% probe
y9 Summer-winter function connection for thermostats cod.151003
y1 y2 y3 y4 y5 y6 y7 y8 y9
Terminal board X
x1 Outside probe
x2 Common outside probe and optional room probe code 151000
x3 Room probe thermostat, optional, code 151000
x4 Flow probe
x5 Common flow and return probe
x6 Return probe 1
x9 Summer-winter function connection for thermostats cod.151003
x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9

C
-20
-18
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
14616
13211
11958
10839
9838
8941
8132
7405
6752
C
-2
0
+2
+4
+6
+8
+10
+12
+14
6164
5634
5155
4721
4329
3974
3652
3360
3094
C
+16
+18
+20
+22
+24
+26
+28
+30
+32
2852
2632
2431
2247
2079
1925
1785
1657
1539
C
+34
+36
+38
+40
+42
+44
+46
+48
+50
1430
1331
1239
1154
1076
1004
938
876
819
C
+52
+54
+56
+58
+60
+62
+64
+66
+68
767
718
673
631
592
556
522
491
462
C
+70
+72
+74
+76
+78
+80
+82
+84
+86
434
409
386
364
343
324
306
290
274
C
+88
+90
+92
+94
+96
+98
+100
260
246
233
221
210
199
189
15720
15260
14800
C
18
19
20
C
21
22
23
14370
13940
13520
The remote control base must be positioned horizontally, following the usual installation
instructions for a normal room probe thermostat. If this is not possible, the room probe
thermostat function must be disabled by positioning a jumper on terminal board X,
contact x2=x3. The controller automatically positions on the immediate comfort
function.

Optimiser
The wires must be connected in the same order as

the polarisation.
Optimiser
A B C D
Optimiser
Space for colour matching of cables between

interface and remote control
Optimiser

cooling slab.
It is set for RH = 8085%. On reaching the setting, it triggers the
diagrams.
Top side: carbon
CALEFFI
A B C D
Relative humidity probe
Probes connection
Dedicated raceway
connection of the
flow, return and
probe
thermostat
and
controller.
cable must be used.
done on the wiring.
0,5 mm2 section.
Steps for correctly positioning the max RH% limit probe.

The probe
is +secured to the manifold installed in the zone where
you want to check that the relative humidity RH% cannot exceed
the safety values. It is secured by means of the two clamps, using
the specific holes.
By controlling the following parameters it is possible to reach the
maximum heating power delivered by the panel.
- Minimum flow temperature, selectable via selector (5) on front panel.
- Relative humidity RH% limit point, checked with relative humidity
probe.
- Ambient temperature, checked via ambient thermostat.
Heating curve
curve
curve
50
40
40
25 % corrective
30
30
20
30
Setting range
Min. flow T
heating start
Setting range
50

The controller is ready to start operating immediately using the factory configurations, for radiant panel systems
20
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
Setting range
Setting range
Min. outside T, end of heating
Min. outside T corresponding to max. flow
Cooling curve
Setting range
30
20
Passive
time
band
10
0
40
30
Main factory configurations:

OT - average
= active
Compensation RT
= 25%
Structure gradient
= 100
=1
Mixing valve rotation time = 50 s
IP correction value
= 20 K
max. blocking FT
= 55C
mOT constant
= 100
Slab Drying
= not active
Set-back correction curve = -25%
Rotation correction
= 60 s
Neutral zone
=2K
Time programming
= see page 14 of
the manual
30
25
A. Factory set
Tmin. outside 25C
Tmax. outside 35C
Tmax. flow 18C
20 Tmin. flow 14C
B. Example
Tmin. outside 25C
Tmax. outside 40C
Tmax. flow 20C
Tmin. flow 14C
Setting range

OT - average
= active
Compensation RT
= off
Structure gradient
= 100
= Heat 1
= Heat/Cool 1-2
IP correction value
= 20 K
max. blocking FT
= Heat 55C
max. blocking FT
= Heat/Cool 14C
mOT constant
= 100
Slab drying
= not active
Rotation correction
= 60 s
Neutral zone
=2K
Time programming
= see page 14 of
the manual
Operating information given on the display
Tmax
Off
Stand by
Comfort
Set-back correction
On
.
>
>>
#
Automatic
Meaning
Off
Line choise
Selected value
Edited value
working range
working range
Value not available
Meaning
Mixing valve opens / or scroll

menu up
Meaning
Mixing valve closes / or scroll

menu down

Measured value
Probe control
Procedure:
Level 0
Select
> Configuration
> Operativity
> Slab drying
Select
Select
Select
Set

= off;
= active;
A = self-learning.
Active:
This funcion is not active in cooling mode
400
100
This funcion is not active in cooling mode.
Self-learning:

and the actual measured value. This difference is used to change the flow temperature.
In this case the characteristic curve will be lowered. If the actual thermal load is greater, then the characteristic curve will be raised.
If a room probe thermostat is connected, the actual room temperature will be read.
reduced by 2 K.
Work states
Standby
In this state, the controller remains inactive, keeping the mixing valve closed and the pump off. The mixing valve and pump frost protection and
anti-blocking function remain active.
Comfort
Set-back correction
Maximum temperature

On the display there is: day of week, date, time, curve correction, work state, room temperature.
Remote control
Example:
Fri 23. Apr

Corr. Room
Comfort
T- room
Fri 23. Apr

22:41
Corr. comf.
+0
Frost protection
T. room
-x-C
22:41
+0.0K
+23.9C

SP point
Time
Action
Active on
06:00
Comfort
22:00
Set-back correction
SP point
Time
Action
Active on
05:00
Set-back correction
07:00
Comfort
09:00
Comfort
22:00
Set-back correction
23:30
Standby

For a detailed description of the different functions, refer to the commissioning manual.
Application diagram
aa
Pump
Shut-off valve
Variable speed pump
Clock
Three-way valve
TH
Thermostatic valve
Outside probe
Lockshield valve
Optimiser
S/W
S/W Summer/Winter
Optimiser
Thermostat/Humidostat
TH
Optimiser
CALEFFI
1
2
bar
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
CL
SL
fo r m
e no r me I SP E
30
40
2.5
c on
50
CALEFFI
HOBBY
CAMERA
BAGNO
WC
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
60
20
70
10
80
CALEFFI
30
40
20
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
50
60
10
70
80
aa
Code 1745..
Outside compensated temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling. Connections to primary circuit 3/4 M.
Connections to regulating unit 1 F with nut. Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4M - 18 mm. Medium: water and glycol
solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Control temperature range 290C. Primary inlet temperature range
5100C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Panel manifold differential by-pass setting 25 kPa. Primary circuit differential
by-pass setting 10 kPa. Temperature gauge scale 080C. Pressure gauge scale 010 bar. Complete with: flow manifold
for panel system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 13) with brass body, flow rate regulating valve with flow meter with a scale of 15
l/min; return manifold for panel system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 13) with brass body, shut-off valve. Regulating unit with
motorised three-way valve, three-point actuator, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, protection class IP 44. Digital controller,
electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, complete with probes for measuring outside, room, flow and return temperature and relative
humidity. Management of controller and room temperature with remote control. Flow adapter unit with brass body.
By-pass kit with brass body, POM differential by-pass valve and stainless steel spring. Shut-off valves with brass body and
chrome plated brass ball. Safety thermostat: factory setting 55C 3C, protection class IP 55, contact rating 10A/240 V.
Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60 (and UPS 25-80), protection class IP 44. Pre-formed PE-X shell insulation for
primary circuit. Supplied preassembled in painted steel box. Closure with a push-fit clamp. Depth adjustable from 110 to
150 mm, including floor supports adjustable in height from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI
RE
174 series
IS

regulating unit for heating and cooling,
TERE
CALEFFI
BS EN ISO 9001:2000
Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01168/09 GB
Function
and radiators or fancoils, in combination with distribution manifolds
for radiant panels.
The outside compensated temperature regulating unit, complete
with temperature digital regulator for heating and cooling,
operates on the temperature of the medium, supplied to the
panels, with a compensation depending on the outside and
indoor temperature and the actual thermal load.
hydraulic unit equipped with a motorised three-way valve.
flowing from the primary boiler/chiller circuit to the heating or
cooling elements.
pump and the radiator or fan coil circuits are controlled by
- Tech. Brochure 01144 Pre-assembled distribution manifolds for
Product range
Code 1745.2 003 Outside compensated temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling with distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-60 pump
Code 1745.4 003 Outside compensated temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling with distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-80 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:



stainless steel
EPDM
stainless steel
ABS
- primary circuit manifold outlets:

3/4 M - 18 mm
50 mm
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
4500
45
4000
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
0,2

EPDM
3/4 M
1 F with nut
3/4 M - 18 mm
50 mm
Return manifold
Body:
Shut-off valve
Obturator stem:
Springs:
Control knob:
0,1
Flow manifold
Body:
Obturator:
Hydraulic seals:
- primary circuit:
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
Connections:
080C
010 bar
Shut-off valves
Body:
Ball:
10 kPa (1.000 mm w.g.)

27 mm

POM
stainless steel
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)

20

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:
0,5
290C
5100C
10 bar
10
Flow adapter unit

Body:

30%


Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
stainless steel
Seals:
EPDM
a
Digital controller
H (m w.g.)
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
(kPa)
230 V - 50 Hz
5,5 VA
IP 40
230 V - 50 Hz
50 s (rotation 120)
8 VA
0,8 A
IP 44
55C
1
0
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contact rating:
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:
Optimiser
0,5
Optimiser
20
1,5
2,5
50
40
30
20
10
0,5
1,5
2,5
3,5
G (m3/h)
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
Speed
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
3
2
1
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
1,04
0,92
0,63
245
210
140
2450
1500
1000
Material:
Thickness:
- outer part:

15 mm
30 kg/m3
50 kg/m3
0C: 0,038 W/(mK)
40C: 0,045 W/(mK)
>1300
0100C
class B2
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
8 outlets
12 outlets
Optimiser
CALEFFI
30
Insulation
5 outlets
3
2
1

cast iron GG 15/20
Dimensions
60
10
Speed
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:
70
Power consumption
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A/240 V
Pump
80
UPS 25-80
G (m3/h)
-20100C
Safety thermostat
40

NTC type
Control range:
Two-wire cable
50
(kPa)
Three-point type
Electric supply:
Operating time:
Power consumption:
Protection class:
Protective cover:
UPS 25-60
5
4
Actuator
H (m w.g.)
60
1
2
1
2
c on
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
fo r m
E SL
e n or me IS P
HOBBY
CALEFF
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFF
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
CALEFFI
code
a
with UPS 25-60 pump
with UPS 25-80 pump
Radiators outlet
Panel outlets
A
2
4
2
4
2
4
Optimiser
Optimiser

balacing valves
CALEFFI
1
2
co
n fo r
m e n or m e IS PE
SL
SYSTEM
FLOW
CALEFFI
15
16
1
2
3
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
Return manifold
equipped with
shut-off valves.
SYSTEM
RETURN
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
BOILER
FLOW
14
Optimiser
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BOILER
RETURN
SOGGIORNO
WC
End fittings with

automatic air vent,
17
13
Heating and cooling controller Optimiser

Flow and return temperature gauges with pockets
Hydraulic diagram
CAMERA
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Safety thermostat
Pressure gauge
14
RPT
SF
11
15
Temperature gauge
Temperature probe
10
Humidity % probe
ST
RPT
ST
12
Safety thermostat
Ball shut-off valve
SR
17

Pressure gauge
BF
Pump
12
BR
17
13

Operating principle
SECONDARY
FLOW
The
medium
temperature
is
regulated by a three-way mixing
valve with a sector obturator
comprehensive of an actuator
managed by a specific digital
controller.
The controller receives the signal
from four probes, flow probe on the
mixing valve outlet, probe on the
panel circuit return, outside probe
and room probe.
The flow in the valve is regulated by
a shaped obturator (1) that, by
turning, closes or opens the hot
water flow ports (2) and the water
returning ports from the circuit (3) to
adjust the desired flow temperature.
temperature.
SECONDARY
RETURN
2
PRIMARY
INLET
to be smaller in size and easily to connect.
PRIMARY
RETURN
Manual opening
By removing the actuator, the valve can be opened-closed
manually by using a screwdriver.
Fully closed
Fully open
op
clo
se
open
en
se
Flow unit
The flow unit is made out of a single casting with the necessary ports
to connect with the functional components such as the safety
thermostat, temperature gauge, pressure gauge, drain cock and flow
temperature probe.
external
plug-socket
system with a protective
rubber cap. This system
does not require opening
the lid to connect the
cables.
actuator (should this ever
be
necessary)
is
30
CLOSE
MAX 0,8 A
230 V
50
60
10
COMMON
40
20
ACTUATOR
OPEN
with an auxiliary microswitch
that can be used to switch
on the generator.
contact OFF.
Start opening mixing valve:
contact ON.
clo
Reduced head losses

70
0
80

Operation
enables controlling the flow supplied to the heating or cooling
elements connected before the outlet to the panel circuit regulating
unit.
shut-off valves and the differential by-pass kit for the primary circuit.
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
45
40
35
30
25
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
0,5
2018
0,2
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
16
14
12
2
20
0,5
5
0,1
2
10
Kv
5,40
4,10

Shut-off valve
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,1
0,2
10
Kv0,01
540
410

- Kv0.01 = flow rate in l/h for a loss of head of 1 kPa
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
2000
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
1000
10
900
800
700
600
500
10090
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
180
160
140
120
Differential valve
cooling elements and limits overpressure if there are thermostatic or
circuit.
200
50
540
20
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
5,40
5 mm
0,5
400
350
300
250
500450
F.O.
22
130
320
470
10
9
8
7
6
0,22
1,30
3,20
4,70
10
800
700
600
Kv (m3/h) Kv0,01 (l/h)
0,2
p (kPa)
Adjustment
position
2 turns
3 turns
4 turns
5 turns
0,1
p (mm w.g.)
1000900
Hydraulic characteristics of the flow rate regulating valve

connected circuits.
be automatically shut off by using the thermo-electric actuators.

Secondary
Secondary
Gs
Gs
Gp
Gp
Primary
Primary

Optimiser

multicoloured diode:
- prolonged red: controller error.
CALEFFI

A Sub D 9-pole mini-DIN data transmission cable is used for
program are available as optional extras.
The change (5 K) is shown in the lines on the display, with increments of 0.5 K in relation to the reference values: comfort heating 20C;
set-back correction 18C. Comfort cooling 22C or off. The actual room temperature is shown on the fourth line on the display.
Optimiser
5. Function keys:
Info
Set
+
Displays brief information relating to the current menu point.
Optimiser
Esc
Optimiser
Remote control base with

room probe
Optimiser
Optimiser
Optimiser
Optimiser
CALEFFI
Optimiser
CALEFFI
Optimiser

no longer needed; the controller is no longer able to manage this probe.
Optimiser
CALEFFI
Optimiser

Example: - flow temperature-heating start-up T = 20C
- flow T at outside min. temp. = 40C corresponds to a temperature range T of 20 K (100%).
- the adjustment of the correction is +1; this means that the flow temperature is raised by 1 K (5% of T), thus the flow temperature
will be 41C.
Immediate heating/cooling comfort function
The value can be modified by 0,5 K steps instead of 1K. The curve is therefore modified by 2,5% instead of 5%.
Heating terminal board

L
Live
N
Neutral
N
b1 Pump contact
La a1 a2 N
230 V~
L N
Probe connections
Terminal board X
X1
Outside probe
X2
Common outside and room probes
X3
Room probe
X4
Flow probe
X5
Common flow and return probes
X6
Return probe
b0 b1
( (
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
Heating / cooling terminal board
La a1 a2 N b0 b1 Lc c1 c2 N
Probes connection
Terminal board Y
y1 RH% probe
y2 RH% probe
y9 Summer-winter function connection for thermostats code 151003
y1 y2 y3 y4 y5 y6 y7 y8 y9
Terminal board X
x1
Outside probe
x2
Common outside probe and optional room probe code 151000
x3
Room probe thermostat, optional, code 151000
x4
Flow probe
x5
Common flow and return probe
x6
Return probe 1
x9
Summer-winter function connection for thermostats cod.151003

C
-20
-18
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
14616
13211
11958
10839
9838
8941
8132
7405
6752
C
-2
0
+2
+4
+6
+8
+10
+12
+14
6164
5634
5155
4721
4329
3974
3652
3360
3094
C
+16
+18
+20
+22
+24
+26
+28
+30
+32
2852
2632
2431
2247
2079
1925
1785
1657
1539
d0 d1
230 V~
L
Live
N
Neutral
La
Mixing valve relay contact
a1
Mixing valve opening contact
a2
Mixing valve closing contact
N
b0
Pump relay contact
b1
Pump contact
Lc
Heating/cooling circuit relay contact
c1
Heating control
c2
Cooling control
N
Heating/cooling circuit neutral output
d0
No-potential contact on Chiller activation outlet
d1
No-potential contact on Chiller activation inlet
C
+34
+36
+38
+40
+42
+44
+46
+48
+50
x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9
1430
1331
1239
1154
1076
1004
938
876
819
C
+52
+54
+56
+58
+60
+62
+64
+66
+68
767
718
673
631
592
556
522
491
462
C
+70
+72
+74
+76
+78
+80
+82
+84
+86
434
409
386
364
343
324
306
290
274
C
+88
+90
+92
+94
+96
+98
+100
260
246
233
221
210
199
189

C
18
19
20
C
21
22
23
15720
15260
14800
14370
13940
13520
The remote control base must be positioned horizontally, following the usual installation
instructions for a normal room probe thermostat. If this is not possible, the room probe
thermostat function must be disabled by positioning a jumper on terminal board X,
contact x2=x3. The controller automatically positions on the immediate comfort
function.

Optimiser
The wires must be connected in the same order as

the polarisation.
Optimiser
A B C D
Optimiser
Space for colour matching of cables between

interface and remote control
Optimiser

cooling slab.
It is set for RH = 8085%. On reaching the setting, it triggers the
diagrams.
Top side: carbon
CALEFFI
A B C D
Relative humidity probe
Probes connection
Dedicated raceway
connection of the
flow, return and
probe
thermostat
and
controller.
cable must be used.
done on the wiring.
0,5 mm2 section.
Steps for correctly positioning the max RH% limit probe.

The probe
is +secured to the manifold installed in the zone where
you want to check that the relative humidity RH% cannot exceed
the safety values. It is secured by means of the two clamps, using
the specific holes.
By controlling the following parameters it is possible to reach the
maximum heating power delivered by the panel.
- Minimum flow temperature, selectable via selector (5) on front panel.
- Relative humidity RH% limit point, checked with relative humidity
probe.
- Ambient temperature, checked via ambient thermostat.
Commissioning - Immediate start
Heating curve
curve
curve
50
40
40
25 % corrective
30
30
20
30
Setting range
Min. flow T
heating start
Setting range
50

The controller is ready to start operating immediately using the factory configurations, for radiant panel systems
20
25
20
15
10
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
Setting range
Setting range
Min. outside T, end of heating
Min. outside T corresponding to max. flow
Cooling curve
Setting range
30
20
Passive
time
band
10
0
40
30

OT - average
= active
Compensation RT
= 25%
Structure gradient
= 100
=1
IP correction value
= 20 K
max. blocking FT
= 55C
mOT constant
= 100
Slab Drying
= not active
Rotation correction
= 60 s
Neutral zone
=2K
Time programming
= see page 14 of
the manual
30
25
20
A. Factory set
Tmin. outside 25C
Tmax. outside 35C
Tmax. flow 18C
Tmin. flow 14C
B. Example
Tmin. outside 25C
Tmax. outside 40C
Tmax. flow 20C
Tmin. flow 14C
Setting range

OT - average
= active
Compensation RT
= off
Structure gradient
= 100
= Heat 1
= Heat/Cool 1-2
IP correction value
= 20 K
max. blocking FT
= Heat 55C
max. blocking FT
= Heat/Cool 14C
mOT constant
= 100
Slab drying
= not active
Rotation correction
= 60 s
Neutral zone
=2K
Time programming
= see page 14 of
the manual
Operating information shown on the display
Off
Standby
Comfort
Set-back
On
>
>>
#
Tmax
Automatic
Meaning
Off
Line choise
Selected value
Edited value
working range
working range
Value not available
Meaning
Meaning
Mixing valve opens / or scroll
menu up
Mixing valve closes/or scroll
menu down
Measured value
Probe control
Procedure:
Level 0
Select
> Configuration
> Operativity
> Slab drying
Select
Select
Select
Set

= off;
= active;
A = self-learning.
Active:

400
100
Self-learning:

and the actual measured value. This difference is used to change the flow temperature.
In this case the characteristic curve will be lowered. If the actual thermal load is greater, then the characteristic curve will be raised.
If a room probe thermostat is connected, the actual room temperature will be read.
reduced by 2 K.
Work states
Standby
In this state, the controller remains inactive, keeping the mixing valve closed and the pump off. The mixing valve and pump frost protection and
anti-blocking function remain active.
Comfort
Set-back correction
Maximum temperature
On the display there is: day of week, date, time, curve correction, work state, room temperature.
Example:
Fri 23. Apr

Corr. Room
Comfort
T- room
Remote control
22:41
+0.0K
+23.9C
Fri 23. Apr

22:41
Corr. comf.
+0
Frost protection
T. room
-x-C

4 programs are available, with a total of 12 configurable set points (SP).
Factory configuration: program 1 (2 set points); program 2 (5 set points). All programs are editable.
Set points identical every day
SP point
Time
Action
Active on
06:00
Comfort
22:00
Set-back
SP point
Time
Action
Active on
05:00
Set-back
07:00
Comfort
09:00
Comfort
22:00
Set-back
23:30
Standby

5 set points with different options each day.
For a detailed description of the different functions, please refer to the commissioning manual.
Application diagram
aa
Pump
Shut-off valve
Three-way valve
Clock
Thermostatic valve
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
Manual valve
HOBBY
BAGNO
WC
SOGGIORNO
Lockshield valve
Optimiser
S/W
RT Room thermostat
S/W Summer/Winter
Optimiser
Outside probe
1
2
TH
RT
Optimiser
CALEFFI
bar
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CL
2.5
co
1
2
nf o
SL
rm e n o r me IS PE
30
40
20
50
60
10
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
70
80
CALEFF
30
40
20
CAMERA
HOBBY
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
50
60
10
70
80
aa
Code 1745.. 003

Outside compensated temperature regulating unit for heating and cooling, with distribution kit for primary circuit.
Connections to primary circuit 3/4 M. Connections to regulating unit 1 F with nut. Panel circuit outlet connections
3/4 M - 18 mm. Primary circuit manifold outlet connections 3/4 M - 18 mm. Medium water and glycol solutions;
maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Control temperature range 290C. Primary inlet temperature range 5100C.
Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Panel manifold differential by-pass setting 25 kPa. Primary circuit differential by-pass
setting 10 kPa. Temperature gauge scale 080C. Pressure gauge scale 010 bar. Complete with: flow manifold for panel
system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 12) with brass body, flow rate regulating valve with flow meter with scale of
15 l/min; return manifold for panel system with 5 outlets (from 5 to 12) with brass body, shut-off valve. Regulating unit
with motorised three-way valve, three-point actuator, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, protection class IP 44. Digital
controller, electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz, complete with probes measuring outside, flow and return temperature and
relative humidity. Management of controller and room temperature with remote control. Flow adapter unit with brass body.
Flow adapter unit with brass primary circuit distribution manifolds with 3 outlets, brass body and flow rate regulating and
shut-off valves. By-pass kit with brass body, POM differential by-pass valve and stainless steel spring. Shut-off valves with
brass body and chrome-plated brass ball. Safety thermostat: factory setting 55C 3C, protection class IP 55, contact
rating 10 A / 240 V. Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60 (and UPS 25-80), protection class IP 44. Pre-formed PE-X
shell insulation for primary circuit. Supplied preassembled in painted steel panel box. Closure with a push-fit clamp.
Depth adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, including floor supports adjustable in height from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI
Mixing valves and actuators
CALEFFI
RE
IS
610 - 611 - 612 - 6370 series

TERE
BS EN ISO 9001:2008
Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01169/09 GB
Function
The mixing valves are used in central heating system regulation, by
mixing the water flowing out of the boiler with the water returning
from the system, in order to obtain the desired flow temperature of
the water supplied to the user.
They may be motorised and used in conjunction with outside
compensated regulators in order to supply hot water to the user
depending on the actual thermal load required, thereby adhering to
recent energy saving regulations.
- Tech. broch. 01122
- Ins. sheet 18057
- Ins. sheet 18075
Modulating digital controller for heating

and cooling - 161 series.
Optimiser digital outside compensated
regulator for heating - 1520 series.
Optimiser digital outside compensated
regulator for heating and heating/cooling 1520 series.
Product range
610
610
611
611
612
612
series
series
series
series
series
series
sizes 3/42 1/2 F

sizes DN 50DN 125
sizes 3/42 1/2 F
sizes DN 50DN 125
sizes 3/42 1/2 F
sizes DN 50 - DN 125
Three-way threaded butterfly mixing valve with manual control

Three-way flanged butterfly mixing valve with manual control
Four-way threaded butterfly mixing valve with manual control
Four-way flanged butterfly mixing valve with manual control
Three-way threaded segment mixing valve with manual control
Three-way flanged segment mixing valve with manual control
Code 63700. Actuator for mixing valves from 3/4 to 1 1/2, with auxiliary microswitch
Code 63701. Actuator for mixing valves from 2 to 5, with auxiliary microswitch
Materials
Body:
Rotor:
Cover:
Bushing:
Lever:
Seals:
cast iron EN 1561/98 EN-GJL-200

cast iron EN 1561/98 EN-GJL-200
aluminium
aluminium
PA66GF30
EPDM
Performance
Medium:
Rotor angle of rotation:

30%
6 bar
2110C
90
3/42 1/2 F
DN 50DN 125, PN 6 to be coupled with
counterflanges EN 1092-1
electric supply 230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac)

electric supply 230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac)
Actuator
3-contact type
Electric supply:
- code 637002, 637012:
- code 637004, 637014:
230 V - 50 Hz
24 V - 50 Hz
Power consumption:
- code 637002, 637004:
- code 637012, 637014:
3 VA
4,5 VA

- code 637002, 637004:
- code 637012, 637014:
10 (2) A - 250 V (ac)

16 (4) A - 250 V (ac)
Protection class:
IP 42
Operating time:
- code 637002, 637004:
- code 637012, 637014:
60 s
180 s
Dynamic torque:
- code 637002, 637004:
- code 637012, 637014:
15 Nm
35 Nm
Maximum ambient temperature:

Complete with adapter
55C
Dimensions
G
D
E
Code
A
610005 3/4"
610006
1"
610007 1 1/4"
610008 1 1/2"
610009
2"
B
52
52
52
52
52
C
65
65
70
78
75
D
130
130
140
156
150
E
65
65
70
78
75
F
40
40
40
40
40
G Weight (kg)
2,8
128
2,8
128
3,1
128
3,6
128
4,6
128
610020 2 1/2"
66
100
200
100
56
128
8,8
D
180
200
230
260
290
E
90
100
115
130
145
F
140
160
190
210
240
G
190
210
240
260
290
Weight (kg)
7,1
9,8
13,1
20,2
32
G
F
C
90
100
115
130
145
D
B
B
A
65
3/4"
65
1"
1 1/4" 70
1 1/2" 78
75
2"
2 1/2" 100
C
65
65
70
78
75
100
D
130
130
140
156
150
200
E
65
65
70
78
75
100
F
40
40
40
40
40
56
G Weight (kg)
128
2,9
128
3
128
3,3
128
4
128
5,1
158
9,7
Code
A
611050 DN 50
611060 DN 65
611080 DN 80
611100 DN 100
611120 DN 125
Weight (kg)
90
100
115
130
145
90
100
115
130
145
180
200
230
260
290
90
100
115
130
145
140
160
190
210
240
190
210
240
260
290
8,3
11,6
16,4
21
28
Code
611005
611006
611007
611008
611009
611020
Code
A
610050 DN 50
610060 DN 65
610080 DN 80
610100 DN 100
610120 DN 125
E
D
B
65
65
70
78
75
100
E
65
65
70
78
75
100
D
130
130
140
156
150
200
F
40
40
40
40
40
56
G Weight (kg)
128
2,8
128
2,8
128
3,1
128
3,6
128
4,6
158
8,8
Code
612050 DN 50
612060 DN 65
612080 DN 80
612100 DN 100
612120 DN 125
Weight (kg)
90
100
115
130
145
180
200
230
260
290
90
100
115
130
145
140
160
190
210
240
190
210
240
260
290
8
9,6
13,2
20,3
26
C
B
F
Code
63700.
A
25
D
E
B
100
C
125
Code
A
612005 3/4"
612006
1"
612007 1 1/4"
612008 1 1/2"
612009
2"
612020 2 1/2"
D
90
E
112
D
F
61
Weight (kg)
0,72
Code
63701.
A
79
C
B
130
C
83
D
44
E
162
Weight (kg)
1,3
Operating principle
Modifying the inlet position: customised installation
Caleffi 610 and 612 series valves, butterfly and segment type
respectively, are three-way devices while Caleffi 611 series are
four-way butterfly devices. 610 and 612 series valves may be used
as mixing or as diverter valves, while 611 series valves may only be
used for mixing purposes.
The four-way mixing valve also simultaneously controls the medium

in the primary circuit and the system
return medium. The two mediums
are mixed directly inside the valve
body, so as to enable double
circulation on both the primary and
secondary
circuits.
In
this
application, the mixing valve also
carries out hydraulic separation between the primary and
secondary circuits.
610, 611 and 612 series valves may be used with customised
ports:
1) for 610 and 611 series devices, the inlet port for the hot water
supplied by the boiler (identified with the label A ) may be
swapped with the system return cold water inlet, positioned in
line. The mixed water outlet remains the same in both
configurations, i.e. positioned at 90 underneath the graduated
plate.
2) for 612 series devices, the inlet port for the hot water supplied by
the boiler (identified with the label A ) may be swapped with the
outlet of the mixed water supplied to the system, positioned in
line. The system return cold water inlet remains the same in both
configurations, i.e. positioned at 90 on the part opposite the
graduated plate.
Only in the 612 series is it necessary to access the inside of the
valve body, by loosening the four hexagonal screws, and rotate
the rotor shaped bushing by 180. Please refer to the instruction
sheet for detailed information.
When customising the ports, we suggest the A label is removed
and the ports identified in accordance with the new scheme, in
order to make any future component maintenance procedures
easier.
Legend:
Legend:
The three-way mixing valve

simultaneously controls the medium
in the primary circuit and the system
return medium. In particular, the two
mediums are mixed directly inside
the valve.
Boiler flow
Boiler return
System return
A Boiler inlet (mixing valve function)
Mixing function
Diverter function
System return
Boiler inlet (mixing valve function)

Standard
Customed
610 series
610 series
Mixing function
System flow
Boiler flow
Boiler return
System flow
610 series
610 series
A
A
611 series
611 series
Mixing function
Diverter function
A
612 series
611 series
A
612 series
612 series
Installation example: 610 series 3-way butterfly valve - mixing

function
612 series
Installation example: 612 series 3-way segment valve - mixing

function
610 series
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
1600
1400
1200
1000
900
20
DN
12
5
3/
4
2000
1800
45
40
35
30
25
1
11
/4
11
/2
2
-D
N5
21
0
/2
DN
65
DN
8
DN 0
10
0
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
18
16
14
12
10
800
700
600
9
8
7
6
450
400
350
300
250
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
500
200
180
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
160
140
120
10090
0,90
0,80
0,70
0,60
200
120
140
160
180
100
60
70
80
90
50
25
30
20
10
12
14
16
18
6
7
8
9
35
40
45
0,5
3,5
4
4,5
2,5
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
0,6
0,5
0,3
0,35
0,40
0,45
50
0,7
0,8
0,9
80
70
60
G (m3/h)
Kv (m3/h)
Kv (m3/h)
2 1/2
1
1 1/4 1 1/2
2
72
11,9
16,8
30
45
DN 65 DN 80 DN100 DN 125
72
140
183
340
3/4
7,5
DN 50
45
611 series
p (mm w.g.)
1000
900
800
700
600
45
40
35
30
25
20
DN
12
5
1600
1400
1200
2
-
3/
4
1
11
/4
11
/2
2000
1800
DN
21
50
/2
DN
65
DN
80
DN
10
0
50
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
18
16
14
12
10
9
8
7
6
500
450
400
350
300
250
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
200
180
160
140
120
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
10090
0,90
0,80
0,70
0,60
120
140
160
180
G (m3/h)
Kv (m3/h)
Kv (m3/h)
3/4
7,8
DN 50
53
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
Motor-driven option
Caleffi 610, 611 and 612 series mixing valves are
supplied as manually-controlled devices, but can
be motorised through the application of Caleffi actuators 6370 series.
To find the most suitable size of Caleffi 610, 611 and 612 series
mixing valve, it is necessary to know two parameters:
- the flow rate of the medium passing through the mixing valve
- the head loss that can be attributed to the valve. Generally, the
valve is given a loss value of 515% of the head loss of the user
circuit.
Example
Required flow rate:
System piping:
Head loss in the user circuit:
G = 5 m3/h
2
p = 3000 mm w.g. = 30 kPa
Mixing valve chosen:
611 series
The head loss of the mixing valve pV should be between 5%

(pVA, point A) and 15% (pVB, point B) of the head loss of the user
circuit:
pVA = p 0,05 = 150 mm w.g. = 1,5 kPa (point A)
Using the hydraulic characteristic diagram for the 611 series valve,
we enter an x-coordinate with a value of 5 m3/h and move upwards
until points A and B have been identified (at the intersection with
the respective head loss values). The line joining points A and B
intersects the head loss curve for the 4-way 1 1/2 valve in the 611
series, which should therefore be installed in the system.
1
1 1/4 1 1/2
2
2 1/2
12,3
18,5
30
53
80
DN 65 DN 80 DN100 DN 125
80
140
230
410
612 series
Linear characteristics
Thanks to the shape of the ports allowing the
medium to pass through the sleeve, the system
regulation is of linear type. This is the optimal
condition for guaranteeing the best possible
control of variable thermal loads on the system.
pVB = p 0,15 = 450 mm w.g. = 4,5 kPa (point B)
200
100
60
70
80
90
50
25
30
20
10
12
14
16
18
6
7
8
9
35
40
45
0,5
3,5
4
4,5
2,5
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
0,5
0,6
0,35
0,40
0,45
0,3
0,7
0,8
0,9
80
70
60
50
Anti-friction system
Inside the valves, between the mixing devices and the body, there
is a sleeve in anti-friction material, which absorbs any variations in
volume caused by heat-related expansion of the valve parts; it also
ensures smooth rotation in all working temperature ranges.
Sizing method
p (kPa)
5000
Operation at high temperatures

The materials used for the body and internal parts and the EPDM
seals ensure the Caleffi 610, 611 and 612 series mixing valves are
suitable for use in heating systems with temperatures of up to 110C.
In the majority of cases, correct sizing leads to the selection of a

valve with a smaller diameter than that of the piping onto which it is
installed.
50
1000
900
20
DN
12
5
1600
1400
1200
45
40
35
30
25
11
/2
2
-D
N5
21
0
/2
DN
65
DN
80
DN
10
0
3/
4
2000
1800
1
11
/4
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
18
16
14
12
10
800
700
600
9
8
7
6
450
400
350
300
250
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
500
200
180
Installation
Valve installation
The 610, 611 and 612 series mixing valves installed with the rotor
axis horizontal may be oriented in any position, although avoiding
to place the cable guiding slit towards the top. If, on the other hand,
they are installed with the rotor axis vertical, the actuator must be
positioned above the valve.
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
160
140
120
10090
0,90
0,80
0,70
0,60
80
70
60
200
120
140
160
180
60
70
80
90
100
50
25
35
40
45
30
20
12
14
16
18
6
7
8
9
10
2,5
3,5
4
4,5
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
0,7
0,8
0,9
0,5
0,3
0,6
0,5
0,35
0,40
0,45
50
G (m3/h)
Kv (m3/h)
Kv (m3/h)
3/4
7,2
DN 50
42
1
1 1/4 1 1/2
2
2 1/2
11,9
16,5
30
42
62
DN 65 DN 80 DN100 DN 125
62
123
172
340
Motorising the
valve
When fitting 6730 series actuators to the valve, please refer to the
instruction sheet for detailed information.
Wiring diagrams
Actuator code 637002-637004
(SM50)
Actuator
code 637012-637014
(SM100)
Actuator
1- anti-clockwise rotation (ACW)
2- clockwise rotation (CW)
3- common
(graphical representation at the
end of indicated rotation)
4- common
5- normally closed N/C
6- normally open N/O
Actuator
1- clockwise rotation (CW)
2- anti-clockwise rotation (ACW)
3- common
(graphical representation at the
end of indicated rotation)
CW
4- normally open N/O
5- normally closed N/C
L
6- common
1 2 3 4 5 6
ACW
CW
ACW
1 2 3 4 5 6
ACW
ACW
Coupling with digital regulators

Actuator
code 637002
(SM50) with modulating
digital regulator for
heating and cooling
code 161000
Actuator
code 637012
(SM100) with modulating
digital regulator for
heating and cooling
code 161000
1 2 3 4 5 6
ACW
CW
1 2 3 4 5 6
ACW
9 10 11 12
CW
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
6
SA
SR TA
TS
ACW
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
7
230 V~ IN OUT
ACW
Open Close
7
SA
SR TA
230 V~ IN OUT
TS
Open Close
* When there is a safety thermostat eliminate the jumper

N.B: Check the direction in which the actuator rotates. If necessary, switch actuator terminals 1 and 2.
Actuator code 637012

(SM100) with
Optimiser digital
outside compensated
regulator code 152001
230 V~
1 2 3 4 5 6
L
Phase
N Neutral
ACW
ACW
CW
La Mixing valve relay
contact
a1 a2 N
a1 Mixing valve opening
contact
a2 Mixing valve closing
contact
N Neutral output for
mixing valve and pump
b1 Pump contact
L N La a1 a2 N b0 b1
( (
L
Phase
N Neutral
La Mixing valve relay
contact
a1 Mixing valve opening
contact
a2 Mixing valve closing
contact
N Neutral output for
mixing valve
and pump
L N
b0 Pump relay
contact
b1 Pump contact
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
N.B: Check the direction in which the actuator rotates. If necessary, switch actuator terminals 1 and 2.
230 V~
Actuator code 637002

(SM50) with Optimiser
digital outside
compensated regulator
code 152001
1 2 3 4 5 6
CW
ACW
ACW
a1 a2 N
La a1 a2 N b0 b1
( (
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
161
1520
Digital regulator for heating and

cooling, complete with f/r
probes and contact probe
holder.
778C.
Probe connection: 1/8 M.
Length of probe cable: 1 m.
Outside compensated
regulator complete with flow
contact probe and outside
probe.
Adjustment range: 2090C.
Code
Code
1 channel
2 channels
3 channels
152001
152002
152003
161000
1520
N.B. It is recommended to set the actuator operating time within the

regulator parameters (see actuator technical data).
Digital outside compensated

regulator for heating and cooling.
Complete with flow probe, outside
probe and relative humidity limit
probe.
Code
152021
1 channel
Shut-off valve
Pump
Temperature probe
Pressure gauge
Temperature gauge
220 - 240 V 50 Hz
220 - 240 V 50 Hz
220 - 240 V 50 Hz
230V L
N
Shut-off valve
Pump
1
2
3
4
L/MIN
Temperature probe
CALEFFI
CAMERA
Pressure gauge
1
2
1
2
S/W
CALEFFI
1
2
1
2
L/MIN
HOBBY
CAMERA
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
WC
CALEFFI
Summer/Winter selector
CALEFF
HOBBY
CAMERA
BAGNO
WC
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
Safety thermostat
1
2
3
4
L/MIN
CALEFFI
1
2
1
2
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
V
DE
LN
CALEFFI
150051
150051
Convertitore
Trasformatore
AC
50Hz
Convertitore
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
230V
24V
24V~
~ ~
1 2 3
AC 24V 50Hz
AC 230V
6(2)A
T50
24V~
4 5 6
1 2 3
4 5 6
ST
S/W
CAMERA
1
2
HOBBY
1
2
L/MIN
HOBBY
CAMERA
CALEFF
150052
1
2
4
L/MIN
CALEFFI
220 - 240 V 50 Hz
ST
1
2
4
L/MIN
Temperature gauge
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
SOGGIORNO
BAGNO
WC
SOGGIORNO
CALEFFI
WC
CALEFFI
CAMERA
610 series
Three-way butterfly mixing valve with manual control. Heavy series. Threaded connections 3/4 F (3/42 1/2). Flanged
connections DN 50 (DN 50DN 125). Coupling with counterflange EN 1092-1. Cast iron body and rotor. Aluminium cover.
PA66GF30 lever. EPDM seals. Medium water, glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Working temperature
range 2110C. Maximum working pressure 6 bar. Can be motorised.
611 series
Four-way butterfly mixing valve with manual control. Heavy series. Threaded connections 3/4 F (3/42 1/2). Flanged
612 series
Three-way segment mixing valve with manual control. Heavy series. Threaded connections 3/4 F (3/42 1/2). Flanged
6370 series
Actuator for 3/4 (3/45) mixing valves. Three point type regulation. Electric supply 230 V (ac) or 24 V (ac). Power
consumption 3 VA (3/41 1/2), 4,5 VA (25). Dynamic torque 15 Nm (3/41 1/2), 35 Nm (25). Operating time 60 s
(3/41 1/2), 180 s (25). Protection class IP 42. Maximum ambient temperature 55C. Equipped wth auxiliary microswitch,
contact rating 10 (2) A - 250 V (ac) (3/41 1/2), 16 (4) A - 250 V (ac) (25).
Code 161000
Modulating digital regulator for heating and cooling. Complete with flow/return probes and contact probe holder. Three-point
type. Electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz. Protection class IP 40. Adjustment temperature range 778C. With NTC flow/return
probes. Working temperature range -10125C. Time constant 2,5 s. Response 10.000 at 25C. Two-wire cable with 1/8 M
connection, length 1 m.
1520 series
OPTIMISER digital outside compensated regulator. Electric supply 230 V (ac) 10%, 5060 Hz. Power consumption 5,5 VA.
Output signals: 3 relay contacts for code 152001, 6 relay contacts for code 152002, 10 relay contacts for code 152003.
Contact rating 250 V (ac), 8(2) A (maximum 9 A in total). Protection class II. Protection class IP 40. Working ambient
temperature range 040C. Storage temperature range -2070C. Maximum permissible humidity Class F, in accordance with
DIN 40040. Mixing valve rotation time can be set between 10 and 900 s. Data retention with no power supply in indelible
EEPROM. RS 232 remote reading system. Clock operating life with no power supply 24 hours. Minimum sp function
changeover time 10 minutes. Dimensions: 180 x 130 x 60 mm.
Code 152021
OPTIMISER digital outside compensated regulator for heating and heating/cooling. Electric supply 230 V (ac), 10%;
50-60 Hz. Power consumption 5,5 VA. Output signals: 3 relay contacts for heating, 6 relay contacts for heat./cool. Contact
rating 250 V (ac), 8(2) A (maximum 9 A in total). Protection class II. Protection class IP 40. Working ambient temperature
range 040C. Storage temperature range -2070C. Maximum permissible humidity Class F, in accordance with DIN
40040. Mixing valve rotation time can be set between 10 and 900 s. Data retention with no power supply in indelible
EEPROM. Remote reading via RS 232 mini DIN connection. Clock operating life with no power supply 24 hours. Minimum
sp function changeover time 10 minutes. Dimensions: 180 x 130 x 60 mm.
Code 150050
Relative humidity limit probe. Electric supply 24 V - 50 Hz. RH% limit 8085%.
Code 150051
Converter. Electric supply 24 V - 50 Hz. Microswitch contact rating (TRIAC) 1 A (230 V). Maximum ambient temperature 50C.
DIN bar clamps.
Code 150052
Transformer. Electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz. Power consumption 10,5 VA. Maximum ambient temperature 50C. DIN bar
clamps.
CALEFFI
Distribution manifold
for heating systems
CALEFFI
662 series
G
T E RE
RE
IS
BS EN ISO 9001:2008
Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01180/09 GB
Function
The distribution manifold is used for the control and distribution of
thermal medium in heating systems.
It features accuracy in controlling the flow rate to the individual
circuits, shutting them off, and a reduced size.
Furthermore, the reduced head losses allow it to be used as a
distribution manifold for several zones, when installed directly in a
central heating system.
This manifold is supplied complete with special mounting brackets
which, during installation, allow the centre distance of the main flow
and return connections to be adjusted easily.
- Tech. broch. 01042 Thermo-electric actuator 6561 series
- Tech. broch. 01142 Thermo-electric actuator with manual
opening and position indicator 6563 series
- Tech. broch. 01054 Automatic air vent valves 5020 series
- Tech. broch. 01141 Automatic flow regulator with highresistance polymer cartridge
- Tech. broch. 01041 Automatic flow rate regulator with stainless
steel cartridge
Product range
662 series Distribution manifold for heating systems
size 1
Materials
Flow manifold
Body:
Lockshield valve
Headwork:
Lockshield stem:
Seals:
Cap:
Performance
Medium:
EPDM
Shut-off valve
Headwork:
Obturator stem:
Obturator:
Spring:
Seals:
Knob:
End fitting
Air vent:
Plug:
Brackets and supports:
Body:

PSU
stainless steel
EPDM
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
POM
PA6G30
10 bar
5100C
Main connections:
1 F
Centre distances available for main connections: 196 mm, 175 mm
154 mm, 133 mm and 112 mm
Outlets:
Centre distance:
Lockshield adjustment with 5 mm allen key

Return manifold
Body:


30%
3/4 M - 18
50 mm
29
196 - 175 - 154 - 133 - 112
51
Dimensions
3/4
50
A
6626B5
2
165
2
Code
N of outlets
Total L (A)
Weight (kg)
6626C5
3
215
2,4
6626D5
4
265
2,8
6626E5
5
315
3,4
6626F5
6
365
3,8
6626G5
7
425
4,1
6626H5
8
475
4,8
6626I5
9
525
5,5
6626L5
10
575
6
6626M5
11
625
6,9
6626N5
12
675
7,2
6626O5
13
735
7,7
3
1 Flow manifold complete with lockshield valves
for flow rate pre-adjustment
2 Return manifold complete with shut-off valves
fitted for thermo-electric actuator
3 End fittings complete with manual air vent,
double radial end fitting and plugs
4 Pair of mounting brackets for box or wall
installation
5 Upper and lower manifold supports for brackets;
may be assembled using the quick push-fit
system
Adjustable manifold centre distances
Flow manifold
1
2
The flow manifold is equipped with

outlet circuit shut-off and setting
lockshield valves.
In order to prevent leaks or seepage
over time, the assembly seal is
guaranteed by the EPDM O-Rings on
the headwork (1) and on the control
stem of the lockshield (2), while the
O-Ring on the obturator (3) permits
full closure of the outlet circuit, if
necessary.
Return manifold
The return manifold is equipped
with manual shut-off valves (1), by
means of which the flow to the
single circuits can be cut off.
They are moreover fitted for an
electro-thermal control (2) that,
used with a room thermostat,
permits keeping the ambient
temperature on the set values as
the thermal load varies.
The obturator stem (3) is made of
ground stainless steel in order to
minimize friction and prevent
dangerous encrustation.
The headwork has a double
seal (4) - (5) on the slide stem in
the form of an O-Ring in EPDM.
The EPDM obturator (6) is shaped
so as to optimize the hydraulic
characteristics of the valve and
minimize the noise caused by the
flow of the medium, also during
the progressive action of opening
or closing in operation with
Each bracket has a series of slots so that the manifold supports

can be attached manually. This means that the entire unit can be
mounted quickly and that the main centre distances of the
manifold (A-A) can be adjusted depending on installation needs.
Low head losses

The manifold outlet sections have been specifically designed to
generate low head loss.
This means the manifold can be used (as illustrated in the diagram)
as a distribution device for 2, 3 or 4 independent zones, when
installed directly in a central heating system.
A simple numeric example can be used to demonstrate the device

efficiency performing this function.
Imagine we are using the 662 series manifold with 2 outlets to
distribute the medium to other two zone manifolds with 5 outlets
each.
If we consider an average flow rate value per manifold of 700 l/h,
the calculation gives us an average value of around 6 kPa for the
zone manifold/valve and lockshield head loss.
The calculated value is in line with the head losses for the zone
valves used in this type of application.
2
1
4
5
Thermo-electric actuators can be used to make the various zones

operate independently in response to the chrono-thermostats
controlling them.
3
6
RT
CALEFFI
Modular manifolds
The manifolds are modular thanks
to the threaded connections with
O-Ring seal (1). The threading is
designed to create a perfect
hydraulic seal and to align the
relevant
respective
outlets
correctly when the components
are screwed on and fully
tightened.
RT
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Bracket and manifold mounting

The manifolds are easily
mounted onto the brackets (1)
using the modular supports (2)
supplied, without the aid of
mounting accessories (nuts and
wrenches).
2
1
Managing the medium directly in the central heating system
simplifies the electrical connection process of the thermo-electric
actuators fitted to the manifold for zone control purposes.
In order to determine the hydraulic characteristics of the circuit, it is necessary to calculate the total head loss suffered by the flow of medium
as it passes through the devices forming the manifold assembly and the radiator circuits.
From a hydraulic point of view, the system consisting of the manifold assembly and the circuits can be represented as a set of hydraulic elements
PRet. man.
PSV
PLV
P
PP/T/VR
PTot.
SV = Shut-off valve
LV = Lockshield valve
P/R = Pipe/Radiator
GP/ R
GTot.
PFlow man.
PLV
PFM
PTot.
PP/ R
GP/ R
PTot.
PLV
PSV
PP/R
PRM
PSV
PFM
GTot.
GTot.
GP/ R
PRM

(Flow + Return + Pipe/Radiator)
= Localised loss of circuit setting
lockshield valve (P/R circuit flow rate)
= Pipe/Radiator loss
(P/R circuit flow rate)
= Localised loss P/R circuit shut-off valve
(P/R circuit flow rate)
= Distributed loss of the flow manifold
(total flow rate)
= Distributed loss of the return
GP/ R
PTot. = PLV +PP/R + PSV + PFM + PRM
(1.1)
When the hydraulic characteristics of each component and the design flow rates are known, the total loss can be
calculated as the sum of the partial head losses for each specific component of the system, as indicated with the formula (1.1).
200
10090
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
45
40
35
30
25
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
0,5
2018
0,2
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
16
14
12
Kv0,01
540
410
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
45
40
35
30
25
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
0,5
2018
0,2
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
16
14
12
10
Kv
5,40
4,10
Lockshield (LV) fully open

Shut-off valve (SV)
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
20
10
0,1
2
0,5
0,1
0,2
10
50
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
0,1
80
70
60
180
160
140
120
50
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
10090
400
350
300
250
500450

Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
180
160
140
120
10
9
8
7
6
50
200
p (kPa)
800
700
600
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
27 outlets
400
350
300
250
500450
813 outlets
20
800
700
600
p (mm w.g.)
1000900
0,5
10
9
8
7
6
10
LV p (kPa)
SV
0,2
p (mm w.g.)
1000900
Kv
16,70*
10,40*
Kv0,01
1670*
1040*
* Average value
- Kv = flow rate in m3/h for a head loss of 1 bar

- Kv0,01 = flow rate in l/h for a head loss of 1 kPa
Example of total head loss calculation

Supposing we need to calculate the head loss of a manifold with three outlets with the following characteristics:
The pipes and radiators of the three circuits have the following flow rate and head loss characteristics:
Circuit 1
G1 = 80 l/h
PRadiator 1 = 1,3 kPa
PPipe 1 = 1,7 kPa
PP/R1 = 1,7 + 1,3 = 3 kPa
Circuit 2
G2 = 130 l/h
PRadiator 2 = 3 kPa
PPipe 2 = 6,8 kPa
PP/R2 = 6,8 + 3 = 9,8 kPa
Circuit 3
G3 = 200 l/h
PRadiator 3 = 5,3 kPa
PPipe 3 = 7,2 kPa
PP/R3 = 7,2 + 5,3 = 12,5 kPa
(1.2)
Each segment of the formula (1.1) is calculated using the following relationship:
P=G2/Kv0,012
G=flow rate in l/h
P = head loss in kPa (1 kPa =100 mm w.g.)
It should be highlighted that the calculation of PTot. must be made taking account of the circuit in which there are the greatest head losses
distributed along the entire circuit consisting of pipe + radiator.
It follows that:
PLV3
PP/R3
PSV3
PFM
PRM
= 2002/5402 = 0,14 kPa

= 12,5 kPa
= 2002/4102 = 0,24 kPa
= 4102/16702 = 0,06 kPa
= 4102/16702 = 0,06 kPa
} Values obtained by neglecting the changes due to tapping off flow rate to the single branched circuits.
Using formula (1.1), adding up all the calculated terms, we obtain:
PTot.= 0,14 +12,5 + 0,24 + 0,06 + 0,06 13 kPa
Note:
Because of the low head losses for the manifolds, the two terms relating to them can be neglected.
In general, the total head loss is reasonably approximate to that of the circuit consisting of the pipe, radiator and lockshield valve fully open.
Using the lockshield valve

The lockshield valve permits balancing the single circuits of the fan coils to obtain the actual flow rates in each of them that are determined at
the design stage. We consider each single circuit composed of: lockshield, pipe/fan coil and shut-off valve. To be able to set the system correctly
it is necessary to take into account the following data:
the flow rate of the medium that must pass through each circuit (design data).
the head loss that, for this flow rate, is generated in each circuit:
PCircuit = PP/R + PSV
(1.3)
PCircuit = PLV + PP/R + PSV
(1.4)
the head loss of the most disadvantaged circuit:

+ disadvantaged
In all the circuits the lockshield, for the flow rate GCircuit,
must provide an additional head loss equal to the
difference, which we can indicate as PLV (P lockshield).
SYSTEM
FLOW
SV
To permit an increase in flow rate, we sometimes consider

the lockshield valve of the circuit with the greatest head
losses open to 80%.
PCircuit
PTot.
Once the data PLV and GCircuit has been established for
each circuit, we need to refer to the graph displaying the
hydraulic characteristics of the lockshield and choose the
optimum adjustment curve to which the valve adjustment
position corresponds.
most
disadvantaged
circuit
PLV
LV
SYSTEM
RETURN
Example of adjustment
Suppose we need to balance three circuits with the head loss and flow rate characteristics for the pipe/radiator assembly shown in the example (1.2):
Since circuit No. 3 is the most disadvantaged one, because it has the greatest head loss for the pipe/radiator assembly, we need to adjust the
remaining circuits:
Circuit 3
PP/R3 = 12,5 kPa
G3 = 200 l/h
Circuit 1
PP/R1 = 3 kPa
G1 = 80 l/h
Circuit 2
PP/R2 = 9,8 kPa
G2 = 130 l/h
PLV3 = 2002/5402 = 0,14 kPa

PSV3 = 2002/4102 = 0,24 kPa
PSV1 = 802/4102 = 0,04 kPa
PSV2 = 1302/4102 = 0,1 kPa

Pcircuit 3 = 0,14 + 12,5 + 0,24 13 kPa

PCircuit 1 = 3,0 + 0,04 3 kPa

PCircuit 2 = 9,8 + 0,1 = 9,9 kPa
most disadvantaged
P 1
P most
P 2
P LV1
disadvantaged
circuit
P 3
P LV2
13 kPa
pcircuit
most disadvantaged
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
45
4500
40
4000
5 mm
3500
Circuit 1
PLV1 = 13 - 3 = 10 kPa
G1 = 80 l/h
No. of adjustment turns = 2
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
1000
10
600
2,5
3,5
FO
500
450
4,5
400
4,0
350
3,5
300
3,0
250
2,5
200
180
160
1,8
1,6
140
1,4
120
1,2
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,0
1,2
20
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,5
0,6
10
0,45
0,40
0,35
0,25
0,30
0,2
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
0,09
0,08
0,1
0,07
0,06
0,045
0,05
0,040
0,035
1
0,030
100
0,025
* Approximation to the nearest curve on the

adjustment graph, due to excess or fault
700
0,5
Circuit 3
Adjustment position fully open
9
8
0,020
Circuit 2
PLV2 = 13 - 9,9 = 3,1 kPa
G2 = 130 l/h
No. of adjustment turns 2,5*
900
800
2,0
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
To adjust circuits 1 and 2, the data we need

for each one to go and read the lockshield
valve adjustment position will be as follows:
Hydraulic characteristics of lockshield valve
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
45
4500
40
4000
5 mm
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
1000
900
800
9
8
700
600
2,5
3,5
TA
500
450
4,5
400
4,0
350
3,5
300
3,0
250
2,5
200
180
160
1,8
1,6
140
1,4
120
1,2
2,0
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
20
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
10
0,6
0,5
0,45
0,40
0,35
0,30
0,25
0,2
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
0,09
0,1
0,08
0,07
0,06
0,045
0,05
0,040
0,035
0,030
0,5
0,025
0,020
100
2,5
3,5
F.O.
0,22
0,60
1,30
3,20
4,70
5,40
22
60
130
320
470
540
Adjustment position
Kv
10
Kv0,01
- Kv = flow rate in m3/h for a head loss of 1 bar
- Kv0.01 = flow rate in l/h for a head loss of 1 kPa
662 series
Distribution manifold for heating systems with 2 (from 2 to 13) outlets. Brass body. EPDM seals. Main threaded connections
1 F. Centre distances available for main connections: 196 mm, 175 mm, 154 mm and 112 mm. Outlet threaded connections
3/4 M - 18, centre distance 50 mm. Medium water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum
working pressure 10 bar. Working temperature range 5100C.
Consisting of:
- Flow manifold complete with lockshield valves with 5 full pre-adjustment turns.
- Return manifold complete with shut-off valves fitted for thermo-electric actuator.
- End fittings consisting of double radial connection, manual air vent and plug.
- Pair of mounting brackets for box or wall installation.
- Upper and lower manifold supports for brackets; may be assembled using the quick push-fit system.
10
15
System
return
CALEFFI
16
System
flow
14
11
12
13
17
18
1) Flow manifold complete with lockshield valves for flow rate

pre-adjustment, 6621 series
2) Return manifold complete with shut-off valves fitted for
thermo-electric actuator, 6620 series
3) End fittings complete with manual air vent,
double radial end fitting and plug, 5996 series
4) Pair of mounting brackets for box or wall installation, code 658400
5) Upper and lower manifold supports for brackets; may be assembled
using the quick push-fit system
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
AUTOFLOW, 121 series

Filter, 120 series
Thermo-electric actuator, 6561 series
Thermo-electric actuator with manual opening and position
indicator, 6563 series
Drain cock, code 337231
DARCAL fitting, code 6805 . .
DARCAL fitting, code 6795 . .
Mechanical fitting, code 3475 . .
Screw plug, code 386500
Automatic air vent, code 502033
Flexible by-pass kit with fixed setting, code 662000
Drain cock, code 538400
Box, code 659..4 and code 661..5
Fixed set differential by-pass kit with flexible hose, code 662000
Function
In heating systems, the medium distribution circuits can be totally or partially shut off by closing the thermo-electric valves
in the manifolds or the thermostatic valves of the radiators.
After reducing the flow rate, the differential pressure in the circuit may increase up to values which may generate noise
problems, a high medium speed, mechanical erosion and hydraulic unbalancing of the system itself.
The differential by-pass kit for 662 series manifolds performs the function of keeping the flow and return pressure in the
manifold circuit balanced as the flow rate changes.
This special by-pass kit consists of a flexible hose which makes installation easier and allows the manifold to be adapted to
suit the brackets, according to the actual positions of the system flow and return piping.
Product range
Code 662000 Fixed set differential by-pass kit with flexible hose
size 3/4 x 3/4 F captive nut
Dimensions
Materials
Flexible hose:
stainless steel
Nuts:
Check valve support body:brass EN 12165 CW617N, chrome plated
Check valve obturator:
POM
Spring:
stainless steel
Hydraulic seals:
EPDM

30%
10 bar
0100C
20 kPa (2000 mm w.g.)
3/4 x 1/2 F captive nut
1/2 M x 3/4 F
Operating principle
The by-pass valve contains a non-return obturator integral with a

counter acting spring.
When the fixed set pressure value is reached, the valve obturator
gradually opens. In this way the flow is recirculated and, being
proportional to the closure of the thermo-electric valves, keeps the
differential pressure constant in the manifold circuit.
A
3/4"
Code
662000
B
1/2
C
420
Weight (kg)
0,24

The differential by-pass kit has a fixed set that cannot be changed
since it has no accessible adjustment devices.
As it is made using woven stainless steel, it remains flexible and is
easily fitted to the manifold.
The flexibility of the hose also offers the advantage of being able to
adjust the position of the flow and return manifolds on the brackets,
according to the actual centre distance between the system flow
and return piping.
20 kPa (2000 mm w.g.)
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
4500
45
4000
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
20
1000
800
900
700
600
500
350
400
450
300
250
200
180
100
50
60
1000
140
160
12
90
14
1200
120
1400
80
18
16
70
1800
1600
10
G (l/h)
Hose connections:
Check valve support connections:
CALEFFI
Performance
Medium:
Fixed set differential pressure:
Code 662000
Fixed set differential by-pass kit with flexible hose. Connections 3/4 x 3/4 F captive nut. Brass nuts, chrome plated. Stainless
steel flexible hose. Brass check valve support body. Stainless steel spring. EPDM hydraulic seals. Medium water and glycol
solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Working temperature range 0100C.
Differential pressure fixed set 20 kPa.
By-pass installation
To fit the differential by-pass kit on the 662 series manifolds, it is necessary to carry out the following steps:
1) When the system is empty, remove the plugs (A) from the flow and return manifold end fittings.
2) Screw the check valve support (B) (supplied) onto the return manifold end fitting and create a seal using hemp, PTFE tape or another suitable
sealant.
3) Fit the flexible hose (C) to the two manifold end fittings using the captive nuts, once the seals (D) (supplied) have been positioned correctly.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Automatic flow rate regulators
121 AUTOFLOW
broch. 01141
Combination of automatic flow rate regulator and ball valve.

Brass body.
AUTOFLOW high-resistance polymer cartridge.
Temperature range:
p range:
Flow rates:
Accuracy:
16 bar
0100C
50%
15200 kPa
0,124,5 m3/h
10%
Designed for pressure test port and drain valve connection.

Code
121141
121151
121161
121171
Kv (m3/h)
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
16,90
17,73
18,00
18,50
Minimum working p range

? p (kPa)
(kPa)
15
15
15
15
120 FILTER
15200
15200
15200
15200
broch. 01041
Combination of filter and ball valve.

Brass body.
Stainless steel filter cartridge.
Temperature range:
Filter mesh :
25 bar
0110C
50%
1/21 1/4: 0,87 mm; 1 1/2 and 2: 0,73 mm
Designed for pressure test port and drain valve connection.

If there are any insulated pipes, the reversible lever can be replaced with the extended lever.
Code
120141
120151
120161
120171
120181
120191
Kv (m3/h)
000
000
000
000
000
000
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
16,87
17,25
16,65
17,23
39,13
39,69
6561
broch. 01042
For 662 series manifolds.
Normally closed.
Code
Materials
Protective shell:
Colour:
Voltage (V)
230
224
656102
656104
6561
Normally closed
Electric supply:
Starting current:
Working current:
broch. 01042
Normally closed.
Code
Voltage (V)
(code 656102/04) white RAL 9010
(code 656112/14) grey RAL 9002
230 V (ac) - 24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)

1A
230 V (ac) = 13 mA
24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc) = 140 mA
3W
Power consumption:
Auxiliary microswitch contact rating
(code 656112/114):
0,8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
CE
50C
Operating time:
80 cm
230
224
656112
656114
Thermo-electric actuators with manual opening and position indicator
6563
broch. 01142
Normally closed.
Code
656302
656304
Materials
Protective shell:
Colour:
Voltage (V)
230
224
6563
656312
656314
Normally closed
Electric supply:
Starting current:
Working current:
broch. 01142
Normally closed.
Code
Voltage (V)
230
224
(code 656302/04) white RAL 9010
(code 656312/14) grey RAL 9002
230 V (ac) - 24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc)

1A
230 V (ac) = 13 mA
24 V (ac) - 24 V (dc) = 140 mA
3W
Power consumption:
Auxiliary microswitch contact rating
(code 656312/14):
0,8 A (230 V)
Protection class:
IP 40
CE
50C
Operating time:
80 cm
The 6563 series thermo-electric actuator is equipped with a control knob for manual opening, valve opening/closing indicator and a device
for returning to automatic operation from the manual position when the electric supply is restored.
automatic return from the manual to the automatic
position is particularly useful when testing or
servicing the system if:
necessarily having to connect and power up the
controls.
- the knob is left in the manual position at the end
of the tests. In this case the control automatically
reverts to automatic operation when the system is
electrically put into operation.
6621
Manifolds
662
Pair of manifolds complete with shut-off and
lockshield valves for flow rate
pre-adjustment.
Outlet centre distance: 50 mm.
Code
No. of
Connection outlets
1
1
1
1
1
662625
662635
662645
662655
662665
x
x
x
x
x
2
3
4
5
6
Outlets
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
M
M
M
M
M
6620
Return manifold complete with shut-off
valves, fitted for thermo-electric actuator.
Code
No. of
Connection outlets
1
1
1
1
1
662025
662035
662045
662055
662065
x
x
x
x
x
2
3
4
5
6
Outlets
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
M
M
M
M
M
Flow manifold complete

with lockshield valves for flow rate
pre-adjustment.
Code
662125
662135
662145
662155
662165
Connection
1
1
1
1
1
No. of
outlets
x
x
x
x
x
2
3
4
5
6
Outlets
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
Materials
Flow manifold
Body:
Lockshield valve
Headwork:
Lockshield stem:
Seals:
Cap:
M
M
M
M
M

EPDM
Lockshield adjustment with 5 mm allen key

Return manifold
Body:
Shut-off valve
Headwork:
Obturator stem:
Obturator:
Spring:
Seals:
Knob:

PSU
stainless steel
EPDM
stainless steel
EPDM
ABS
Performance
10 bar
5100C
Main connections:
1 F
Outlets:
Centre distance:
3/4 M - 18
50 mm
Air vents
Drain cock
5020
538
Automatic air vent

in stamped brass.
With hygroscopic safety cap.
Max. drain pressure: 2,5 bar.
Drain cock
with hose connection and cap.
Code
538400
Code
1/2 M
502033
3/8 M
Brackets
337
658
Drain cock with metal seal.

Adjustable outlet.
Polymer mounting brackets

with adjustable centre distance,
for 662 series manifolds.
With screws and fixings.
For use with boxes 659..4 series
or direct wall mounting.
Code
Code
658400
337231
3/8 M
386
End fitting
5996
Screw plug with nut, for manifold

outlets.
3/4
3/8
End fitting with manual air vent, and plug.

Main connection: 1 F.
Lower connection: 3/4 M.
Upper air vent connection: 3/8 F.
Lower cap connection: 1/2 F.
Double radial end fitting.
Code
386500
3/4
679
Fitting for multilayer plastic pipes
for continuous high temperature use.
Chrome plated.
1/2
3/4
For a correct use calibrate the multi layer pipe before installation
using the Caleffi 679 series calibrator.
Code
Code
599662
1 F
Fittings
680
679514
679524
679525
679544
679564
679565
679566
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
14x2
16x2
16x2,25
18x2
20x2
20x2,25
20x2,5
Fitting with self-adjustable diameter

for single and multilayer plastic pipes.
Temperature range:
580C (PE-X)
575C (Multilayer marked 95C).
Patented.
inside
Code
680507
680502
680503
680500
680501
680506
680515
680517
680524
680526
680535
680537
680544
680546
680555
680556
680564
680505
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
679
Calibrator and handle to calibrate
multilayer pipes before use
with fittings 679 series fittings.
outside
17,518,0
17,518,0
8,519,
19,019,5
19,510,0
19,510,0
10,511,0
10,511,0
11,512,0
11,512,0
12,513,0
12,513,0
13,514,0
13,514,0
14,515,0
15,515,5
15,516
17
10,512
12,514
12,514
14,516
12,514
14,516
14,516
16,518
14,516
16,518
16,518
18,520
16,518
18,520
18,520
18,520
18,520
22,50
Code
679001
679002
679003
679004
679006
679007
679008
679009
Calibrator 14x2
Calibrator 16x2
Calibrator 16x2,25
Calibrator 18x2
Calibrator 20x2
Calibrator 20x2,25
Calibrator 20x2,5
Burnished effect handle for calibrator
Calibration of the multi-layer pipe and assembly of the fitting

components, 679 series
347
Compression fitting for annealed copper,
hard copper, brass, mild steel and
stainless steel pipes.
With O-Ring seal.
Pipe
Code
347510
347512
347514
347515
347516
347518
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
10
12
14
15
16
18
Pipe clamp
Nut
Hose connection
Valve or manifold
connection
Choice of box size, 659 and 661 series, according to the number of outlets
L total
Code
6626B5 6626C5
No. of outlets
2
3
Length (total) of manifold (mm) 190
240
Length of box (mm)
400
400
659044 659044
661045 661045
6626D5
4
290
400
659044
661045
218,5
6626E5
5
340
600
659064
661065
6626F5
6
390
600
659064
661065
6626G5
7
450
600
659064
661065
6626H5
8
500
600
659064
661065
6626I5
9
550
800
659084
661085
6626L5
10
600
800
659084
661085
6626M5
11
650
800
659084
661085
6626N5
12
700
800
659084
661085
6626O5
13
760
1000
659104
661105
Boxes
Code
659044
659064
659084
659104
659124
659
Box for manifolds.

Wall or floor installation (with
660 series).
Closure with a push-fit
clamp.
Adjustable depth
from 110 to 140 mm.
Box for manifolds.

clamp.
Adjustable depth
from 80 to 120 mm.
(h x w x d)
500
500
500
500
500
x
x
x
x
x
1400
1600
1800
1000
1200
Code
660040
660060
660080
660100
660120
659
x
x
x
x
x
Code
110140
110140
110140
110140
110140
659045
659065
659085
659105
659125
(h x w x d)
500
500
500
500
500
659044
659064
659084
659104
659124
1400
1600
1800
1000
1200
x
x
x
x
x
80120
80120
80120
80120
80120
660
661
Floor installation KIT for box,

for 659..4 series.
Consists of:
- 2 supports - height 20 cm,
- 2 side panels,
Box for manifolds.

clamp.
Adjustable depth
from 110 to 150 mm.
Complete with floor
installation supports.
Adjustable height
from 270 to 410 mm.
Code
for
for
for
for
for
x
x
x
x
x
661045
661065
661085
661105
661125
(h x w x d)
500
500
500
500
500
x
x
x
x
x
1400
1600
1800
1000
1200
x
x
x
x
x
110150
110150
110150
110150
110150
Independent radiator system with wall-mounted boiler and direct distribution
Shut-off valve
Ball shut-off valve
Manual valve
Pump
RT
Room thermostat
Zone valve
Thermostatic valve
RT
AUTOFLOW
RT
CALEFFI
Zone heating system and differential by-pass valve
RT
CALEFFI
RT
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
Anti-freeze safety device

Garden tap, ball-type,
with anti-freeze safety device
IS
T E RE
RE
603 series
CALEFFI
BS EN ISO 9001:2008
Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01181/09 GB
Function
The anti-freeze safety device prevents ice build-up in domestic
water circuits, avoiding possible damage to water storages and
pipes in hydraulic, solar and irrigation systems.
When the minimum ambient operating temperature is reached, it
automatically opens so that a minimum quantity of water may flow
toward the drain, enabling a small continuous inflow of water; this
prevents water from freezing inside the pipe.
When the ambient temperature increases or in the event of contact
with warmer water, the opposite action occurs, causing the device
to shut off and circuit normal operating conditions to be restored.
A particular product has been developed by combining the freeze
protection device with a garden tap, ball-type, specifically
constructed for these installations.
Patent application No. MI2009U000006
Product range
Code 603041 Anti-freeze safety device
Code 603450 Garden tap, ball-type, with anti-freeze safety device
1/2 F nut
1/2 M x 3/4 M with hose connection
Dimensions
C
Materials
Control lever:
Lever fixing nut:
Anti-freeze device
Body:
Obturator stem:
Seal seat:
Springs:
Seal elements:
Strainers:

EPDM
B
Garden tap
Body:
Ball:
Ball control stem:
Seal elements:
stainless steel
stainless steel

stainless steel
stainless steel
NBR
stainless steel
Code
603041
C
26
Weight (kg)
0,120
Performance
Medium:
water
10 bar
-3090C
Opening temperature:
3C
Closing temperature:
4C
Accuracy:
1C
Connections: - anti-freeze device (603041):
1/2 F with nut
- garden tap (603450):
1/2 M x 3/4 M
with hose connection for 15 mm pipe
B
52,5
A
1/2
Code
A
603450 1/2
B
63
C
47
D
66
E
100
F
3/4
Weight (kg)
0,450
Operating principle
A thermostatic element (1) in contact with the
ambient air controls a shut-off obturator fitted
to a passage seat in contact with the water
contained in the pipe (2).
When the ambient temperature drops to the
minimum intervention value, the thermostat
contracts. This causes the obturator to move
and open a tiny passage so that water can
drain out, allowing a small amount of water to
flow in continuously; this prevents water from
freezing inside the pipe.
Water from the supply network, which is
usually warmer than the air temperature up to
the intervention value, laps the thermostat and
causes the opposite action: the channel
closes again and normal circuit operating
conditions are restored.
For optimal system operation without the risk
of freezing, it is recommended that the part of
the circuit in which the safety device is
installed is connected to the water supply
network and a suitable pressure level
maintained.
ANTI-FREEZE SAFETY DEVICE CLOSED
ANTI-FREEZE SAFETY DEVICE OPEN
Volume of water drained

While the anti-freeze device is in operation,
the drain outlet will drip as a result of the
cyclical opening and closing phases taking
place correctly. The amount of water drained
out varies in accordance with the outdoor
temperature, the temperature of the water in
the pipe and the length of piping exposed to
the air.
As a general guide, in the worst case
conditions, the amount of water drained out is
less than 500 cm3/h.
The valve is fitted with a ball
featuring blow-out proof design,
double O-ring seal and packing
gland; the control lever and fixing
nut are made of stainless steel,
for total resistance against
corrosion in different climatic
conditions.
The tap is fitted with a special

hooking system so that a bucket
or water container can be hung
easily on it while being filled.
The anti-freeze safety device

drain seat is made using
stainless steel, so as to
guarantee a perfect water
tightness without any corrosion
problems caused by contact with
drained water.
The outlet thread on the tap is

designed to allow direct coupling
with hose connections and the
normal accessories used in
conjunction with garden hoses,
for
easier
and
more
straightforward operation.
The drain zone is also protected

by a metal mesh outside the
body, to prevent dirt from
entering and causing the device
to malfunction.
Installation
Before installing the device, make sure that the system has been
flushed and cleaned to remove any traces of dirt that may have
accumulated during installation.
The device must only be installed in vertical position, as shown in
the diagram, so as to permit a free and unrestricted downward flow
of the water as it drains out.
The device must be installed in the points of the circuit at risk of
freezing so that the water may flow freely and in order to prevent
pipes, storages or components located upstream of the device
from freezing.
Pipes downstream of the device must be protected from frost if, due
to the intervention of the device, the water contained in them
remains stagnant without flowing.
In the case of exposed outdoor pipes, the installation of a suitable
heating cable will provide effective protection.
Backflow prevention device

When installing the device on a drinking water system, the garden
tap must be installed in accordance with current regulations relating
to anti-pollution protection, as specified by standard EN 1717.
The tap may be connected to a garden hose and the water
contained within the hose may come into contact with hazardous
substances.
A suitable backflow preventer, double check valve or vacuum
breaker valve should be selected and fitted in accordance with
type of use and the corresponding hazard level.
Application of code 603041 on domestic water circuit
SOLAR
HOT WATER
STORAGE
Application of code 603450
Installation
with heating cable
on pipe downstream
of the device
code 603041
Anti-freeze safety device. Connection 1/2 F with nut. Brass body, chrome plated. Brass obturator stem. Stainless steel seal seat.
NBR seal elements. Medium water. Working temperature range from -30C to 90C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Opening
temperature 3C. Closing temperature 4C. Accuracy 1C.
code 603450
Ball-type garden tap, with anti-freeze safety device. Connection 1/2 M x 3/4 M with hose connection for 15 mm pipe. Brass
body. Chrome plated. Brass ball and control stem, chrome plated. EPDM seal elements. Stainless steel control lever and fixing
nut. Medium water. Working temperature range from -30C to 90C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar.
Complete with: anti-freeze safety device. Brass body, chrome plated. Brass obturator stem. Stainless steel seal seat. NBR seal
elements. Medium water. Working temperature range from -30C to 90C. Maximum working pressure 10 bar. Opening
temperature 3C. Closing temperature 4C. Accuracy 1C.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
RE
IS
576 series
TERE
BS EN ISO 9001:2008
Cert. n FM 21654
01183/09 GB

Cert. n 0003
Function
The pressure reducing valve is a device which, installed on the
water mains, reduces and regulates the pressure entering from the
public network, irrespective of upstream pressure variations.
In case of necessity, this series of pressure reducing valves is easy
to inspect and maintain since it can be completely disassembled
from the top and therefore it is not necessary to remove the
appliance from the pipe.
The reducing valve can be used in water distribution networks,
drinking water supply systems and irrigation systems.
Product range
576 series Pressure reducing valve
sizes DN 80-DN 150 (DN 200 on request)
Dimensions
Materials
Body and cover:
Diaphragm:
Obturator:
Obturator seat:
cast iron EN-GJS-450-10

cloth covered elastomer - CR
PUR
stainless steel
Connections
CALEFFI
2
3
CALEFFI
bar
bar

2
1
16 bar
1,56 bar
on request 612 bar
65C
016 bar
Performance
Corrosion-resistant epoxy coating suitable for contact with drinking

water.
DN 80DN 150 (DN 200 on request)
Coupling with counterflange EN 1092-1
DN 80DN 150, PN 16;

DN 200, PN 10
Face-to-face gage according to ISO 5752 series 1
Code
576080
576100
576120
576150
576200
A
DN 80
DN 100
DN 125
DN 150
DN 200
B
108
112
141
145
174
C
466
466
576
576
686
D
310
350
400
480
600
Weight (kg)
34
37
84
87
115
Operating principle
The operating principle of the pressure reducing valve is based on

the balance between two opposing forces: the thrust exerted by the
downstream pressure on the lower part of the mobile valve is
counteracted by the adjustable compression force of the spring.
Since the active surface of the diaphragm is equivalent to the active
surface of the mobile valve, the thrust which the upstream pressure
exerts on the lower part of the diaphragm is compensated by the
thrust exerted on the upper part of the mobile valve, thus rendering
the appliance insensitive to changes in upstream pressure.
When the pressure downstream of the reducing valve becomes
lower than the regulating pressure, the force exerted by the spring
becomes predominant and the obturator opens, increasing the
degree of opening to increase the flow rate and restore the
pressure (Fig. 1). However when the downstream pressure
increases, the obturator closes, reducing the degree of opening to
limit the flow rate. The downstream pressure therefore remains
constant.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
Body
Stem
Seat
Cover
Lower cylinder
Obturator holder
Obturator stop
Flange
Mounting plate
Guide cylinder
Guide beat
Adjustment spring
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Diaphragm
Mobile valve
Guide ring
Lower cylinder O-ring
Non-removable nut
Nut
Cover fixing nut
Setting screw
Adjustment key
Pressure gauge
Pressure gauge cock
21
20
18
2
1
CALEFFI
bar
CALEFFI
bar
17
12
22
2
15
CALEFFI
2
3
bar
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM
CALEFFI
10
bar
13
23
19
14
16
5
3
1
11
Fig.1
The following cavitation diagram can be used to check the
operating conditions of the pressure reducing valve:
Zone 1 : normal operating conditions

Zone 2 : cavitation zone (use not recommended)
Zone 3 : impossible
Sizing
The diameter of the appliance must be chosen based on the
maximum flow rate and the conditions of use and not according the
diameter of the pipe.
Upstream pressure (bar)
2
3
The maximum flow rate is calculated considering an average

velocity in the inflow section of 1,5 m/s.
Downstream pressure (bar)
Installation
Maintenance
1. Before the installation, open all distribution taps to clean out the
system and to expel air remaining in the pipes.
2. Install the shut-off valves upstream and downstream to facilitate
future maintenance.
3. The reducing valve can be installed in any position.
When performing maintenance it is not necessary to remove the

appliance from the pipe.
CALEFFI
bar
CALEFFI
bar
1. Isolate the appliance by closing the shut-off valves.

2. Unscrew the setting screw (20) in an anticlockwise direction until
it is completely removed, diagram A.
3. Unscrew the nuts and remove the cover (4). Extract the mounting
plate (9) and the spring (12).
4. Disengage the diaphragm (13) from the pins. With the adjustment
key (21) positioned as indicated in diagram B unscrew the nut (18)
with a plate wrench.
5. Remove the flange (8), the diaphragm (13), the obturator stop (7)
and the lower cylinder (5).
6. To unscrew the seat (3) use the up-side down turned cover as
shown in diagram C.
7. After having removed the seat, extract the obturator holder (6)
and the gasket (20) using the stem (2).
bar
CALEFFI
1
NOTE: If necessary, the obturator gasket can be changed without

removing the seat. Check that it is correctly refitted.
20
9
bar
CALEFFI
1
12
CALEFFI
13
bar
CALEFFI
bar
8
5
bar
CALEFFI
bar
4
3
CALEFFI
4
3
A
2
4. Close the downstream shut-off valve.

5. Calibrate the device using the special key, turning it clockwise to
increase the value and anticlockwise to decrease it.
6. Read the desired value on the downstream pressure gauge.
CALEFFI
18
bar
CALEFFI
bar
21
B
Water hammer is one of the major causes of breakage in pressure
reducing valves. Consequently during installation in high-risk
systems, it is advisable to fit suitable devices to absorb water
hammer.
2
1
CALEFFI
2
3
bar
bar
Functional faults
The reducing valve does not maintain the set value
In the majority of cases, this problem is due to impurities depositing
on the seat seal and causing seepage and creeping, thereby
increasing downstream pressure.
The solution is to install a filter downstream of the valve and to
ensure that maintenance is properly carried out (see maintenance
section).
CALEFFI
20
2
576 series
Pressure reducing valve with compensated seat. Flanged connections DN 80 (from DN 80 to DN 150, PN 16; DN 200 PN 10).
Cast iron body. Stainless steel seat. Diaphragm in cloth covered elastomer - CR, obturator in PUR. Maximum working
temperature 65C. Maximum upstream pressure 16 bar. Downstream pressure setting range from 1,5 to 6 bar, on request
from 6 to 12 bar. Supplied with double pressure gauge 016 bar upstream and downstream. Corrosion-resistant epoxy
coating for contact with drinking water. Diaphragm, seat and obturator removable for maintenance purposes.
CALEFFI
Ball valve for solar thermal systems
CALEFFI
240 series
01185/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
ISO 9001 No. 0003
FM 21654
Function
The 240 series ball valve is used to shut off the medium contained
within solar thermal systems.
The control lever, supplied with an anti-scald knob, is equipped
with a device which can be used to lock the valve in open or closed
position.
The body, ball, control stem and lever are made of stainless steel to
guarantee optimal resistance in terms of contact with the medium
as well as the wear caused by external agents.
This particular series of ball valves has been specifically designed
to work at high temperature with a glycol solution, typical condition
of solar thermal systems.
Product range
240 series Ball valve for solar thermal systems
sizes 1/2, 3/4 and 1
Performance
Materials
Body:
Ball:
Control stem:
Lever:
Knob:
Ball seal seat:
AISI
AISI
AISI
AISI
316 stainless steel

316 stainless steel
316 stainless steel
304 stainless steel
expanded PUR
PTFE + graphite
Dimensions
Medium:
Nominal pressure:

50%
PN 63
-30200C
Connections:
1/2, 3/4, 1 F
400
p (kPa)
1"
1/2"
p (mm w.g.)
3/4"
350
3,5
300
250
2,5
200
180
160
140
1,8
1,6
1,4
120
1,2
100
0,9
0,8
0,7
60
0,6
50
0,45
0,4
35
0,35
30
0,3
25
0,25
C
70
75
90
D
115
115
170
Mass (kg)
0,305
0,390
0,645
18
0,1
20
16
14
12
10
4,5
Code 240400 240500 240600

Size
1/2
3/4
1
Kv (m3/h)
15
32
57
3,5
2,5
1,6
1,8
1,4
1,2
0,9
0,8
0,12
0,7
12
0,6
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,5
B
58
65
76
0,2
18
16
14
10
A
1/2"
3/4"
1
0,5
45
40
20
Code
240400
240500
240600
90
80
70
G (m3/h)
Locking device
The control lever can be locked in position for greater safety. Once the
valve has been opened or shut off, slide the shaped clamp (1)
downwards, inserting it into the relevant protruding slot (2) on the valve
body.
The hole (3) on the control lever may be used to fit a tamper-proof
safety seal or a padlock (not supplied) which locks the clamp (1) in
position.
Control lever knob
The knob (4) covering the control lever is made of plastic material with
low thermal conductivity. Specifically designed to withstand high
temperatures, it prevents burns during operation and is resistant to the
wear normally experienced by plastic materials when installed
outdoors.
Stainless steel components

In outdoor installations, the deterioration of product components
occurs more quickly due to the action of climatic agents, resulting in a
shortened period of normal operation.
Using stainless steel to make the components of the 240 series valve
ensures the device remains reliable and functional for long time. It also
ensures the device is suitable for contact with the high-temperature
glycol solution.
Installation
The valve can be fitted on either vertical or horizontal pipes.
Make sure that it is easy to move the control lever in order to open or
shut off the valve once it has been installed.
Use of the ball valve in solar panel circuit with inverse return
connection
Keep the valve in its open position with
a tamper-proof seal or padlock
(not supplied)
Use of the ball valve in a system with circulation unit
Use of the ball valve in solar panel circuit with balancing via
AUTOFLOW
Keep the valve in its open position with
a tamper-proof seal or padlock
(not supplied)
AUTOFLOW
Automatic
filling
AUTOFLOW
240 series
Ball valve for solar thermal systems. Threaded connections 1/2 x 1/2 (from 1/2 to 1) F. Stainless steel body, lever, control
stem and ball. PTFE and graphite ball seal seat. Expanded PUR knob. Medium water and glycol solutions; maximum
percentage of glycol 50%. Nominal pressure PN 63. Working temperature range -30200C.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
539 series
01188/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Function
In most cases the delivery pressure from the public water network
is very high, thus it needs to be reduced to provide the user with:
- greater comfort through a reduction in noise emission levels
(vibration, whistles),
- water save by avoiding excessive levels of consumption,
- a secure internal water circuit, limiting the risk of leakage and
mechanical wear on devices.
Compliant with NF 079 doc.4 - EN 1567
Product range
Code 539250 Pressure reducing valve
size 3/4 F
Dimensions
Materials
C
CB752S
CW602N
PA66G38
CW602N
brass CW614N
steel EN 10270-1 DH (C98)
stainless steel AISI 303
NBR
NBR

Body:
Nipples:
Cover:
Obturator:
Moving parts:
Spring:
Seat:
Diaphragm:
Hydraulic seals:
Performance
water
25 bar
16 bar
3 bar
80C
Code
A
539250 3/4
B
77
F
A
B
F
A
F
Connections:
- main:
refer to table of dimensions
- pressure gauge connection:
1/4 F
A
F
Medium:
Factory setting:
C
75
D
31,5
E
75,5
F
1/2
G Mass(kg)
25,5 0,880
2,5
2
1
1,5
Head losses in bar
Cut-away
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Flow rate in l/h

The black curve satisfies the requirements of standard NF. The red
curve represents the performance capabilities of pressure reducing
valve code 539250.
Installation and adjustment
Installation advice
1 Before installing the valve, open all taps to flush the entire system
and to purge air from the pipes.
2 Install upstream and downstream shut-off valves to facilitate future
maintenance operations.
3 Install the reducing valve in vertical or horizontal position, but
never upside-down.

recommended, most of all for two reasons:
- it is difficult to read the pressure gauge, if not actually
impossible;
- impurities could enter the device through the ports, used to
discharge the pressure, which are located on the cover.
Water hammer is one the main causes of failure of pressure
reducing valves. It is suggested a device to absorb the water
hammer (ANTISHOCK 525 series).
To prevent impurities from impairing the operation of the pressure
reducing valve, we advise the installation of a dirt separator
upstream of the reducing valve (DIRTCAL 5462 series).
4 Close the downstream shut-off valve.

5 Adjust the setting using the spring pressing screw, located on the
cover, using a 10 mm hexagonal wrench, turning clockwise to
increase the setting and anti-clockwise to reduce it.
6 Read off the value on the pressure gauge.
(Caleffi pressure reducing valves are factory set to 3 bar).
Series 539250
Pressure reducing valve. Threaded connections 3/4 F. Dezincification resistant alloy body and obturator. Brass moving parts.
Stainless steel seat. Steel spring. NBR seals. NBR diaphragm. Medium water. Maximum working temperature 80C. Maximum
upstream pressure 25 bar. Downstream pressure setting range 16. Factory setting 3 bar. Compliant with NF standard.
CALEFFI
Set point thermostatic regulating unit
CALEFFI
RE
IS
182 series
TERE
BS EN ISO 9001:2000
Cert. n FM 21654
01190/09 GB

Cert. n 0003
Function
systems, in combination with distribution manifolds.
built-in sensor.
- Tech. broch. 01126 Manifolds in composite specifically designed
for radiant panel systems 670 series.
Product range
Code 1825.1 Pre-assembled set point thermostatic regulating unit with manifolds and box, with UPS 25-60 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:
2555C
2C
90C
4 bar
Panel manifold differential by-pass setting

(code 182000, optional):
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)
Liquid crystal digital thermometer scale:

Connections:
2448C
010 bar
3/4 M with union

3/4 for coupling
with adapter code 675850
50 mm
- centre distance between primary circuit
connections:

p (mm w.g.)
60 mm
p (kPa)
50
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
1
20
10
2000
1,5
45
4000
0,5
4500
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
5000
0,2
0,1
Flow adapter unit

Body:

30%

Accuracy:

Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
PSU
Seals:
EPDM
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contact rating:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
H (m w.g.)
(kPa)
60
UPS 25-60
5
50
40

Unit
pump
RT
Safety
thermostat
10
1
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
3
2
1
Pump
model UPS 25-60
cast iron GG 15/20
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
Dimensions
n fo
Code
A
1
2
BAGNO
CUCINA
1
2
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
3
L/MIN
CUCINA
BAGNO
3
L/MIN
ENTRATA
BAGNO
1
2
CUCINA
3
L/MIN
SL
r m e n or me IS P E
3/4
Panel outlets
1
2
ENTRATA
CUCINA
ENTRATA
1
2
L/MIN
13 outlets
ENTRATA
9 outlets
5 outlets
co
G (m3/h)
Power consumption
Speed
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:
20
Room
thermostat
Three-speed pump:
Material: - body:
30
User side
ST
230 V
3/4
Return manifold equipped with

shut-off valves.
3
C
SYSTEM
RETURN
ENTRATA
CALEFFI
BAGNO
BOILER
RETURN
CUCINA
BOILER
FLOW
Flexible kit for

differential by-pass
setting (optional,
code 182000)

balancing valves.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
L/MIN
C
ENTRATA
6
bar
CUCINA
Serie 182
3
L/MIN
SYSTEM
FLOW
Pmax 10 bar
Tset 2060C
Alimentazione 24 V
1
2
4
L/MIN
BAGNO
10
CL
2.5
co n
fo r m
ES L
e no r me I SP
5
End fittings with automatic air
vent and fill/drain cock.
1. Thermostatic three-way mixing valve with built-in sensor

2. Three-speed circulation pump UPS 25-60
3. Provision for adjustable drain valve
4. Safety thermostat
5. Pressure gauge
6. Electrical wiring case
Hydraulic diagram
C Digital thermometer
T
BF
C
BR
RT
Room thermostat
ST
Safety thermostat
SR
Pressure gauge
RT
Pump
Provision for adjustable

drain valve
2
4
ST
C
5
SF
Operating principle
easy to connect.
Reduced head losses
Low-inertia thermostatic sensor
4
2
1
PRIMARY
INLET
3
SECONDARY
RETURN
The regulator element inside the thermostatic three-way valve

consists of a temperature sensor (1) fully immersed in the
mixed water outlet chamber. By expanding and contracting, it
continuously ensures a correct proportioning of hot water,
coming from the boiler, and water returning from the panel
circuit.
The water intake is regulated by a shaped obturator (2) that
slides inside a special cylinder placed between the hot water
flow (3) and the water returning from the circuit (4).
Even if the thermal load of the secondary circuit or the inlet
temperature from the boiler change, the mixing valve
automatically adjusts the flow rates until it obtains the set
temperature.
PRIMARY
RETURN
SECONDARY
FLOW
Flow unit
such as the safety thermostat and the pressure gauge.

Adjustment locking
4
bar
2
10
CL
co n
2.5

Serie 182
Pmax 10 bar
Tset 2060C
Alimentazione 24 V
fo r m
ES L
e no r me I SP
Safety thermostat
We recommend the safety thermostat is connected to the
heat generator so that the electric supply is cut off when the
triggering temperature is reached. To do so, connect the two
safety thermostat wires directly to the generator and create
an electrical jumper between the two contacts on the terminal
board for unit 182, previously connected to the safety
thermostat.
Pump
Variable speed pump
Three-way valve
Thermostatic valve
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
Lockshield
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
RT
Shut-off valve
Clock
RT
Room thermostat
co
L
n fo
r m e no rme IS PES
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
CALEFFI
RT
co
L
n fo
r m e no rme IS PES
182 series
Set point thermostatic regulating unit. Connections to the regulating unit 3/4 M with union. Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4
for coupling with adapter code 675850. Medium water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Adjustment
manifold differential by-pass setting (optional, code 182000) 25 kPa. Liquid crystal thermometer scale 2448C. Pressure
gauge scale 0-10 bar.
Complete with: flow manifold for panel system with 3 outlets (from 3 to 13) with PA66GF body, flow rate regulating valve with
flow meter with a scale of 14 l/min; return manifold for panel system with 3 outlets (from 3 to 13) with PA66GF body, shut-off
adapter unit with brass body. Electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz. Safety thermostat: factory set 55C 3C, protection class IP 55,
contact rating 10 A / 240 V. Three-speed UPS 25-60 pump, protection class IP 44. Supplied preassembled in painted steel
box. Closure with a push-fit clamp. Depth adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, including floor supports adjustable in height from
270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI

RE
IS
182 series
TERE
BS EN ISO 9001:2000
Cert. n FM 21654
01191/09 GB

Cert. n 0003
Function
radiators, in combination with distribution manifolds for radiant panels.
The set point regulating unit performs the function of keeping the flow
temperature constant, at the set value, for the medium distributed in a
low temperature system for floor radiant panels.
built-in sensor.
The function of the kit is to distribute a portion of the medium flowing
from the primary boiler circuit to the heating elements.
It is supplied complete with manifold and a differential by-pass kit for
primary circuit.
This accessory is essential when there is a primary circuit circulation
pump and the radiator circuits are controlled by thermostatic or
Product range
Code 1825.1 002 Pre-assembled set point thermostatic regulating unit with manifolds and box, distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-60 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:

Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
PSU
Seals:
EPDM

Accuracy:
2448C
010 bar

3/4 F
1 F with nut
3/4 for coupling with adapter
code 675850
50 mm
- primary circuit manifold connection
centre distance:
- primary circuit manifold outlets:
60 mm
1/2 F
40 mm

p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
45
4000
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
20
2000
1,5
4500
0,5
20 mm

10
Primary circuit distribution manifold

Body:
Primary circuit manifold average inner diameter:

POM
stainless steel
10 kPa (1.000 mm w.g.)
0,2

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:
25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)
0,1
2555C
2C
90C
4 bar
Panel manifold differential by-pass setting

(code 182000, optional):
Flow adapter unit

Body:

30%
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contact rating:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A / 240 V
H (m w.g.)
(kPa)
60
UPS 25-60
5
50
40

Unit
pump
RT
Safety
thermostat
10
1
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
3
2
1
Pump
model UPS 25-60
cast iron GG 15/20
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
Dimensions
n fo
Code
Panel outlets
A
1
2
1
2
BAGNO
1
2
4
L/MIN
BAGNO
4
L/MIN
CUCINA
4
L/MIN
ENTRATA
4
L/MIN
BAGNO
CUCINA
BAGNO
1
2
CUCINA
3
L/MIN
SL
r m e n or me IS P E
3/4
Radiator outlets
1
2
4
L/MIN
ENTRATA
CUCINA
ENTRATA
1
2
13 outlets
ENTRATA
9 outlets
5 outlets
co
G (m3/h)
Power consumption
Speed
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:
20
Room
thermostat
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:
30
User side
ST
230 V
3/4

shut-off valves.
Mod. Dep.
BOILER
RETURN
SYSTEM
RETURN
ENTRATA
CALEFFI
BAGNO
CALEFFI
Flexible kit for

differential
by-pass setting
(optional,
code 182000)

balancing valves.
1
2
1
2
C
ENTRATA
3
L/MIN
bar
CUCINA
Serie 182
1
2
4
L/MIN
SYSTEM
FLOW
Pmax 10 bar
Tset 2060C
Alimentazione 24 V
4
L/MIN
BAGNO
BOILER
FLOW
CUCINA
10
CL
2.5
co n
fo r m
ES L
e no r me I SP
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thermostatic three-way mixing valve with built-in sensor

Provision for adjustable drain valve
Safety thermostat
5.
6.
7.
8.
Pressure gauge
Hydraulic diagram
T
BF
C
BR
RT
Room thermostat
ST
Safety thermostat
SR
Pressure gauge
7
3
RT
Pump
2
4

drain valve
ST
C
5
SF
Operating principle
easy to connect.
Reduced head losses
4
2
1
PRIMARY
INLET
3
SECONDARY
RETURN

circuit.
temperature.
PRIMARY
RETURN
SECONDARY
FLOW
Flow unit

(360) between min. and max.. It also has tamper protection
Serie 182
Pmax 10 bar
Tset 2060C
Alimentazione 24 V
4
bar
2
10
CL
Adjustment locking
2.5
co n
fo r m
ES L
e no r me I SP

Operating principle
panel circuit.
It is composed of a distribution manifold and a
differential by-pass kit for the primary circuit.

Single casting
The primary circuit distribution manifold is created using a
single casting, without any connections between the internal
tubes. This eliminates potential leakage caused by coupling
with metals with different expansion coefficients.
The connections of the side outlets are positioned
tangentially to the main tubes, to make fitting mounting easier.
Coefficient of localized head loss at the inlet (F+R): 3,0
Coefficient of localized head loss at the outlet (F+R): 6,5
Differential valve
primary distribution circuit. It aids flow circulation towards the
heating elements and limits overpressure if there are
The differential valve has a fixed setting that cannot be
changed. It is preset to 10 kPa, the mean value for the loss of
head in the primary circuit.
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
2000
Example:
Let us calculate the head loss of the primary circuit manifold.
20
1800
1600
18
16
1400
14
1200
12
10
1000
Primary circuit manifold main connections:

D = 20 mm average diameter
?1 = 3 coefficient of localized head loss (F+R)
Primary circuit manifold outlets:

D = 15 mm average diameter
?2 = 6,5 coefficient of localized head loss (F+R)
900
800
700
600
Flow rate
(l/min) (m 3/h)
1
20
0,5
5
Gs = 700 l/h flow rate to secondary circuit

Grad = 130 l/h flow rate to individual radiator
Gtot = 2 Grad + Gs = 960 l/h total flow rate
10
0,1
0,2
500
vtot = Gtot / Atot = 960 10 -3 / [( 0,02 2 / 4) 3600] = 0,849 m/s

speed of water entering the primary circuit manifold
?pcp=?1 ? vtot2 / 2 = 1081,2 Pa = 1,08 kPa
localized manifold inlet head loss
(with ? = 1000 kg/m3 water density)
vrad = Grad / A = 130 10 -3 / [( 0,015 2 / 4) 3600] = 0,205 m/s

?prad = ?2 ? vrad2 / 2= 136,58 Pa = 0,136 kPa
localized head loss at the outlet.
Given the limited length of the primary circuit manifold, the
corresponding distributed head losses are negligible.
The total loss is as follows:
?p = ?pcp + ?prad = 1,08 + 0,136 1,2 kPa
Secondary
Primary
Gp
CALEFFI
Gs
Mod. Dep.
357
Primary
Gp
Secondary
CALEFFI
Gs
Mod. Dep.
357
Application diagram
Pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
Lockshield valve
1 2 3 4 5 6
t1
ON OFF
C
C
t1/t2/t3
t2
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Mod. Dep.
1
2
3
bar
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
C. MATRIM.
PRANZO
C
CAMERA
4
L/MIN
Serie 182
Pmax 10 bar
Tset 2060C
Alimentazione 24 V
1
2
PRANZO
C. MATRIM.
CAMERA
1
2
C. MATRIM.
357
C. MATRIM.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI
4
5
1
6
CL
2.5
0
co
nfo
SL
r m e n o r me IS P E
182 series
Set point thermostatic regulating unit with distribution kit for primary circuit. Connections to primary circuit 3/4 F. Connections to
regulating unit 1 F with nut. Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4 for coupling with adapter code 675850. Primary circuit
manifold outlet connections 1/2 F. Medium water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 30%. Adjustment
manifold differential by-pass (optional, code 182000) setting 25 kPa. Primary circuit differential by-pass setting 10 kPa. Liquid
crystal thermometer scale 2448C. Pressure gauge scale 010 bar.
adapter unit with brass body. Primary circuit distribution manifold with 2 outlets and brass body. By-pass kit with brass body,
POM differential by-pass valve and stainless steel spring. Electric supply 230 V - 50 Hz. Safety thermostat: factory set 55C
3C, protection class IP 55, contact rating 10 A / 240 V. Three-speed pump UPS 25-60, protection class IP 44. Supplied
pre-assembled in painted steel box. Closure with a push-fit clamp. Depth adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, including floor
supports adjustable in height from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI
CALEFFI

182 series
01192/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
replaces dp 01191/09GB
Function
radiators, in combination with distribution manifolds for radiant panels.
built-in sensor.
It is supplied complete with manifolds with built-in shut-off and
regulating valves and an adjustable differential by-pass kit for the
primary circuit. The latter accessory is essential when there is a
primary circuit circulation pump and the radiator circuits are
Product range
Pre-assembled set point thermostatic regulating unit with manifolds and box,
distribution kit for primary circuit, with UPS 25-60 pump
Performance
Materials
Medium:

Body:
Headwork:
Obturator:
PSU
Seals:
EPDM

Accuracy:
Connections:

EPDM

p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
5000
50
45
4000
40
3500
35
3000
30
2500
25
2000
1,5
4500
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
stainless steel
EPDM
stainless steel
ABS
1 F
1 F with nut
3/4 for coupling with adapter
code 675850
50 mm
0,2
- primary circuit:

50 mm
0,1
Return manifold
Body:
Shut-off valve
Obturator stem:
Springs:
Knob:
2448C
010 bar
Flow manifold
Body:
Obturator:
Hydraulic seals:
20 mm
Primary circuit manifold average inner diameter:

20

PA6G30
stainless steel
Primary circuit differential by-pass setting range:

230 kPa (0,23 m w.g.)
0,5

Body:
By-pass valve:
Spring:
2555C
2C
90C
4 bar
Panel manifold differential by-pass setting (code 182000, optional):

25 kPa (2.500 mm w.g.)
Flow adapter unit

Body:

30%
10
Code 1826.1 002
Safety thermostat
Factory set:
Protection class:
Contact rating:
55C 3C
IP 55
10 A/240 V
H (m w.g.)
(kPa)
60
UPS 25-60
5
50
40

Unit
pump
ST
RT
20
1
10
1
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
G (m /h)
Power consumption
Room
thermostat
Speed
3
2
1
Pump
Three-speed pump:
Material: Body:
30
User side
Safety
thermostat
230 V
model UPS 25-60

cast iron GG 15/20
Electric supply:
Protection class:
Pump connections:
(A)
P
(W)
n
(rpm)
0,40
0,30
0,20
90
65
45
1800
1100
700
230 V - 50 Hz
95%
80C
IP 44
130 mm
1 1/2 with nut
Dimensions
1
2
E
e nor me IS P
1
2
3
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
BAGNO
CUCINA
fo rm
CUCINA
BAGNO
CUCINA
1
2
L/MIN
BAGNO
330
50
13 outlets
CUCINA
500
3/4
co n
Code
10 outlets
BAGNO
6 outlets
SL
565
615
665
715
765
815
865
915
965
1015
1065
Radiator outlets
Panel outlets
A
7
shut-off valves.
1
BOILER
FLOW
3
C
BOILER
RETURN
BAGNO
CUCINA
ENTRATA
CALEFFI
SYSTEM
RETURN

balancing valves.
1
2
3
1
2
Flexible kit for

differential
by-pass setting
(optional,
code 182000)
1
2
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
4
BAGNO
ENTRATA
CUCINA
SYSTEM
FLOW
Serie 182
Pmax 10 bar
Tset 2060C
Alimentazione 24 V
4
bar
CL
2.5
1
2
3
4
10
0
co n
fo r m
ES L
e no r m e I SP

Thermostatic three-way mixing valve with built-in sensor

Provision for adjustable drain valve
Safety thermostat
5
6
7
8
Pressure gauge
Hydraulic diagram
T
BF
Room thermostat
ST
Safety thermostat
SR
BR
Pressure gauge
7
3
RT
RT
Pump
8
2
4

drain valve
ST
C
5
SF
Operating principle
easy to connect.
Reduced head losses

The materials used for the mixing valve construction eliminate
potential sticking due to scale. All functional parts, such as
the obturator, valve seats and guides, have been made using
a special material with low friction coefficient, which ensures
product performance over time.
4
2
1
PRIMARY
INLET
3
SECONDARY
RETURN

circuit.
temperature.
PRIMARY
RETURN
SECONDARY
FLOW
Flow unit

Serie 182
Pmax 10 bar
Tset 2060C
Alimentazione 24 V

4
bar
2
10
CL
Adjustment locking
2.5
co n
fo r m
ES L
e no r me I SP

Operating principle
panel circuit.
It is composed of distribution manifolds with built-in
regulating and shut-off valves and the adjustable differential
by-pass kit for the primary circuit.

- flow rate regulating valves built into the flow manifold. In this
way it is possible to set the right flow rate and balance the
various connected circuits.
- shut-off valves built into the return manifold. The same
circuits can be automatically shut off by using the
thermo-electric actuators.
p (mm w.g.)
p (kPa)
1000900
9
8
7
6
400
350
300
250
4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
200
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
10090
80
70
60
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
45
40
35
30
25
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
0,5
2018
Kv (m3/h) Kv0,01 (l/h)
F.O.
0,22
1,30
3,20
4,70
22
130
320
470
5,40
540
5 mm
Differential valve
primary distribution circuit. It aids flow circulation towards the
heating elements and limits overpressure if there are
The differential valve setting can be adjusted. It is preset to
5 kPa, the mean value for the loss of head in the primary
circuit. If necessary, the intervention value can be adjusted
within the range 230 kPa (0,23 m w.g.), using the
corresponding knob with graduated scale.
0,2
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
16
14
12
2,5
30
2
2
1,5
0,5
0,2
20
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
15
10
0,75

10
Kv0,01
540
410
40
0,5
Kv
5,40
4,10

Shut-off valve
(kPa)
50
1
20
0,5
5
10
0,1
2
Flow rate
(l/min) (m3/h)
0,1
0,2
10
p (m w.g.)
5
0,25
50
180
160
140
120
Adjustment
position
2 turns
3 turns
4 turns
5 turns
10
800
700
600
500450
Hydraulic characteristics of the flow rate regulating valve

Primary
Primary
Secondary
Gp
Secondary
Gp
Gs
Gs
Application diagram
Pump
Shut-off valve
Thermostatic valve
Clock
Lockshield valve
t1
- t1
- t2
- t3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
t2
t3
CALEFFI
TA
1
2
3
1
2
3
PRANZO
C. MATRIM.
CAMERA
1
2
C. MATRIM.
1
2
3
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
L/MIN
Serie 182
bar
PRANZO
C. MATRIM.
CAMERA
3
2
C. MATRIM.
Pmax 10 bar
Tset 2060C
Alimentazione 24 V
4
5
1
6
CL
on fo
SL
rm e n or me IS P E
182 series
Set point thermostatic regulating unit with distribution kit for primary circuit. Connections to primary circuit 1 F. Connections to
regulating unit 1 F with nut. Panel circuit outlet connections 3/4 for coupling with adapter code 675850. Primary circuit
manifold outlet connections 3/4 M - 18 mm. Medium water and glycol solutions; maximum percentage of glycol 30%.
Adjustment temperature range 25 55C. Maximum temperature at primary circuit inlet 90C. Maximum working pressure
4 bar. Panel manifold differential by-pass (optional, code 182000) setting 25 kPa (2500 mm w.g.). Primary circuit differential
by-pass setting range 230 kPa (0,23 m w.g.). Liquid crystal thermometer scale 2448C. Pressure gauge scale 010 bar.
adapter unit with brass body. Primary circuit distribution manifolds with 2 outlets, brass body and flow rate regulating and
shut-off valves. By-pass kit with brass body, PA6G30 differential by-pass valve and stainless steel spring. Electric supply
230 V - 50 Hz. Safety thermostat: factory set 55C 3C, protection class IP 55, contact rating 10 A/240 V. Three-speed pump
UPS 25-60, protection class IP 44. Supplied preassembled in painted steel box. Closure with a push-fit clamp. Depth
adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, including floor supports adjustable in height from 270 to 410 mm.
CALEFFI
Hot and cold domestic water

consumption multiple acquirer
CALEFFI
AQUAPRO 7556 series
01201/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
ISO 9001 No. 0003
FM 21654
Specifications
AQUAPRO is an electronic hot and cold domestic water
consumption data acquisition module. This compact appliance
comprises a calculator unit, to which up to 8 water jet meters can
be connected.
AQUAPRO is equipped with an 8-digit liquid crystal display for
easy reading of consumption values as well as a range of other
technical data.
AQUAPRO is designed for centralised remote transmission
(max. 250 modules, max. 2000 measuring points).
Displays
1st domestic water consumption
2nd domestic water consumption
Typical installation
755600
PUSH
Cod. 755600
Tfluido : 595C
3rd domestic water consumption
IDB
Tamb. : 545C
IP 54
Utente 2
Utente 3
Utente 4
Utente 5
Utente 6
Utente 7
Utente 8
76050

Utente 1
7941 - 7942 - 7943
8th domestic water consumption
24 V ~
Bus line
Bus network address
1
Segment test
Operational fault diagnosis

Product range
Code 755600 Domestic water consumption acquisition module
Code 755060 AQUAPRO interface for connection with 755600
Code 755061 AQUAPRO-REMOTE interface for connection between 755600 and modem
Dimensions
Performance
Electric supply:
24 V (ac) - 50 Hz - 1 W
Maximum number of connectable water jet meters:
8
Long life battery:
5 years
Ambient operating temperature:
545C
(with no humidity or dust)
D
PUSH
Data transmission:
Antitamper protection
B
A
using RS485/M-bus protocol EN 1434
Cod. 755600
Tfluido : 595C
IDB
Tamb. : 545C
IP 54

Utente 1
Utente 2
Utente 3
Utente 4
Utente 5
Utente 6
Utente 7
Utente 8
76050
Each AQUAPRO module admits max 8 pulse inputs.

Each user can be associated with max 2 pulse inputs.
Series
755600
A
147
B
165
C
120
D
40
Weight (Kg)
0,45
Dimensions
Hydraulic options
Domestic water function
D
C
A
7941
Consumer domestic water cut-off

composed of:
- BALLSTOP ball shut-off valve with check
valve.
- water jet meter, conforms to Directive
2004/22/EC (MID 001), with pulse output;
- ball shut-off valve with male terminal.
B
Code
Qnom m3/h K pulse
cold domestic water 1/2

hot domestic water 1/2
794140
794141
794150
794151
7942
10
10
10
10
1.6
1.6
2.5
2.5
Domestic water jet meter
Domestic water water jet meter in conformity

with Directive 2004/22/EC (MID 001) for
hot/cold domestic water with pulse output.
Complete with fittings.
Tmax: 90C.
Code
794140
794141
794150
794151
794160
794161
A
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
C
75
75
75
75
75
75
B
280
280
330
330
460
460
D
110
110
130
130
260
260
Weight (Kg)
1,10
1,10
1,50
1,50
3.50
5,50
Qnom m3/h K pulse
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
10
10
10
100
100
100
1.6
2.5
3.5
6
10
15
7943
Domestic water function

Consumer domestic water cut-off
composed of:
- BALLSTOP ball shut-off valve with
check valve;
- water jet meter, in conformity with
Directive 2004/22/EC (MID 001) with
pulse output;
- 90 elbow at the outlet.
Code
794340
794341
794350
794351
B
C
Code
794204
794205
794206
794207
794208
794209
A
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
B
110
130
260
260
300
300
C
190
226
358
378
438
458
D
16
19
34
34
45
45
E
68
68
159
159
185
199
F
Weight (Kg)
70
0,95
70
1,20
100
3,50
100
4,30
110
7,50
125
10,00
Qnom m3/h K pulse
10
10
10
10
1.6
1.6
2.5
2.5

794204
794205
794206
794207
794208
794209
Size
Code
Note: Can be installed in 7556 series box

only sizes less than 1.
Domestic water water jet meter

Conforms to Directive 2004/22/EC (MID 001)
Size
Single jet meter
Permanent flow rate Q3
Overload flow rate Q4
Working temperature range
COLD WATER
HOT WATER
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
PN 16
1,600 l/h 2,500 l/h 1,600 l/h 2,500 l/h
2,000 l/h 3,125 l/h 2,000 l/h 3,125 l/h
0.1-30C
30-90C
Horizontal installation (H)

Minimum flow rate Q1
Transition flow rate Q2
32 l/h
128 l/h
50 l/h
200 l/h
32 l/h
128 l/h
50 l/h
200 l/h
Vertical installation (V)

64 l/h
160 l/h
100 l/h
250 l/h
64 l/h
160 l/h
100 l/h
250 l/h
Max error % for Q2 Q Q4

for Q1 Q Q2
2%
5%
3%
5%
Code
794340/41
794350/51
75
75
Weight (Kg)
1,10
1,10
AQUAPRO interface
755060 series
Wall box for AQUAPRO system
7556
Wall box made of painted
sheet metal for interiors
(RAL 9010), fitted for
installation of domestic
water function.
Code
Code
755604
755608
no. of functions
Useful dim. (h x w x d)
max 4
400 x 0650 x 110-140

600 x 1100 x 110 -140
max 8
755604
Fitted with 4 guides
755060
755061
AQUAPRO interface
AQUAPRO REMOTE interface
Specifications
With the AQUAPRO interface it is possible to have central M-Bus
transmission equipped with a single data collection point, with the
possibility of remote data transmission via GSM modem (code
755846) or analogue modem (code 755845).
Using a portable PC and complementary software, the operator can
transfer and print out the consumption data by connecting this
interface locally to the portable PC, or by connecting from a
remote PC.
Electric supply:
Dimensions:
230 V (ac) - 50 Hz 10 VA
160 x 125 x 40 mm
The supply includes:

- Serial cable for PC connection
- Acquisition software provided on USB FLASH PEN
- Instruction manual
- USB/RS232 converter
Typical installation
755600
755600
Fitted with 8 guides
PUSH
PUSH
Tfluido : 595C
PUSH
IDB
Tamb. : 545C
Cod. 755600
IP 54
Tfluido : 595C
IP 54
Utente 3
Utente 4
Utente 7
Utente 8
76050
Utente 2
Utente 6
7941 - 7942 - 7943
Utente 1
Utente 2
Utente 3
Utente 4
Utente 5
Utente 6
Utente 7
Utente 8
IDB
Tamb. : 545C
IP 54

Utente 1
Utente 2
Utente 3
Utente 4
Utente 5
Utente 6
Utente 7
Utente 8
76050
Cod. 755600
IDB
Tamb. : 545C
76050
Cod. 755600
Tfluido : 595C
Utente 1
Utente 5
8
PUSH
Cod. 755600
Tfluido : 595C
PUSH
IDB
Tamb. : 545C
Cod. 755600
IP 54
Tfluido : 595C
Bus line
Utente 2
Utente 3
Utente 4
Utente 6
Utente 7
Utente 8
IDB
Tamb. : 545C
IP 54

76050

Utente 1
Utente 5
Utente 1
Utente 2
Utente 3
Utente 4
Utente 5
Utente 6
Utente 7
Utente 8
1
PUSH
FAST
FAST-TELE
AQUAPRO
Tfluido : 595C
IDB
Tamb. : 545C
IP 54

76050
Utente 4
Utente 8
Utente 1
Utente 2
Utente 3
Utente 4
Utente 5
Utente 6
Utente 7
Utente 8
Cod. 755055
Cod. 755056
Cod. 755060
Cod. 755500
CD
PWR
Utente 3
Utente 7
755061
AQUAPRO TELE
56K FAXMODEM
SD
Cod. 755600
IP 54
Utente 2
Utente 6

Sonde temp. 0 90C
Tamb. : 545C
Attenzione:
IP 54

aprire la scatola
76049
Modem
PUSH
IDB
Tamb. : 545C

Utente 1
Utente 5
76050
Cod. 755600
Tfluido : 595C
755845
755846 (GSM)
Local
service
76050
24 V ~
RD
230 V ~
FAST
FAST-TELE
AQUAPRO
bus
24 V ~
Cod. 755055
Cod. 755056
Cod. 755060
Cod. 755500
Sonde temp. 0 90C
Tamb. : 545C
IP 54
Local
service
Attenzione:
aprire la scatola
76049
755608
230 V ~
755060
AQUAPRO
Options
Code
755832
755845
755846
755855/N
water metering and cost allocation software

analogue modem
GSM digital modem
bus cable (FROR 450/750 - 2x1 mm2) - 100 m reel
AQUAPRO acquirer electrical connections

1 - 2 Power supply 24 V (ac)
3 - 5 Bus line data transmission
9 - 10 1st Pulse
12 - 13 3rd Pulse
VIII Pulse
VII Pulse
VI Pulse
V Pulse
II Pulse
III Pulse
IV Pulse
15 - 16 5th Pulse
I Pulse
BUS data transmission line
10 - 11 2nd Pulse
13 - 14 4th Pulse
Rx Polarised cable
Tx
24 V (a c)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
16 - 17 6th Pulse
18 - 19 7th Pulse
19 - 20 8th Pulse
For mounting in a box or directly on a wall, use the screws provided in the package, fixing them in the curved slots which enable the device
to be levelled correctly.
Sample screenshots of the AQUAPRO cost allocation system
Code 755600
ACQUAPRO module for acquisition of domestic water consumption data supplied with 24 V (ac), with maximum 8 inputs
and LCD display for local readings, can be connected via BUS cable code 755855/N to controller for centralised display.
Data transmission in BUS mode. Ambient operating temperature with no humidity or dust: 5-45C.
Code 755060
AQUAPRO interface, for acquisition of consumption data via digital transmission in Bus mode. Power supply 230 V (ac) 50 Hz - 10 VA. Includes software. Maximum number of connectable AQUAPRO devices: 250.
Code 755061
AQUAPRO interface, for acquisition of consumption data via digital transmission in Bus mode. Power supply 230 V (ac) 50 Hz - 10 VA. Includes software. Maximum number of connectable AQUAPRO devices: 250. Fitted for transmission via
analogue/digital modem 755845/755846.
7941 series
Consumer domestic water cut-off for CONTECA centralised system consisting of: water jet meter (MID 001) with pulse
output, sizes 1/2 and 3/4 (K=10); BALLSTOP ball shut-off valve with check valve. With male terminal.
7942 series
Water jet meter (MID 001) for consumer hot/cold domestic water with direct local display and pulse output k=10 (100).
Connections 1/22 M. Maximum temperature 90C. Complete with fittings.
7943 series
Water jet meter (MID 001) for consumer hot/cold domestic water with direct local display and pulse output k=10.
Connections 1/23/4. BALLSTOP ball shut-off valve with check valve. With 90 elbow terminal at the outlet.
7556 series
Box made of painted sheet metal for interiors (RAL 9010). Fitted with connections for installing 7941 and 7943 series
domestic water functions.
CALEFFI
Universal user module, PLURIMOD

Centralised domestic water
CONTECA heat metering
CALEFFI
RE
IS
7000 series
TERE
BS EN ISO 9001:2008
Cert. n FM 21654

Cert. n 0003
01203/09 GB
Specifications
Current regulations and provisions regarding the design of
centralised domestic water/heating systems require the application
of user modules.
The user module (independent flame-free mini-boiler) offers
independent heating control and therefore keeps a record of direct
consumption data, both in terms of thermie/refrigeration units and
domestic hot/cold water.
The user module incorporates multiple hydraulic solutions which
can be actuated directly on-site.
Three-way zone valve, equipped with by-pass setting.
Two-way zone valve (by-pass in closed position).
Vertical or horizontal positioning with left side ot right side

connection.
AUTOFLOW arrangement.
Possibility for aggregation of 3 domestic water outlets.
Standard functions
On/off zone regulation
Heat metering in conformity with directive 2004/22/EC (MID)

with arrangement for centralised transmission.
Insulation.
to other users
Optional functions
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
2 34
90
89 0
123456
12
TECNICA
2 34
90
8
6
45 7
67
12
89 0
45
123456
FREDDA
12
2 34
90
6
45 7
12
89 0
45
67
5 67
6
45 7
12
5 67
Possibility for aggregation of 3 domestic water outlets (DHW,

DCW and any dual water).
AUTOFLOW automatic flow rate regulator.
Mix function with mechanical thermostatic mixing valve 5217 series.
CALDA
67
5 67
2 34
da C.H.P
6
45 7
12
45
8 90
FREDDA
123456
3
8 90
TECNICA
12
89 0
8 90
CALDA
90
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
12
45
567
123456
3
8 90
Numero di serie
Utente
67
Anno di produzione
CALEFFI S.p.A.
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
domestic hot water

production
Materials
Components:
Connecting pipes:
- 520x520 galvanised plate box

adjustable depth between 110 and 150 mm
brass EN 12165 CW617N; CW614N; CW602N

copper
Performance
Temperature range:
Medium:
Maximum percentage of glycol:
Connections:
Insulation
Material:
Temperature range:
10 bar
390C
30%
3/4 M
semi-rigid expanded polyurethane

090C
class B2
- door made of painted plate for interiors (RAL 9010)

- actuator, 6440 series
- one-piece zone valve
- bracket template with 2 pairs of ball shut-off valves and flushing
pipes
- CONTECA heat meter, 7554 series
- template for positioning of triple-function domestic water outlet,
700050/700051 series
- meter template connection point.
Template - for PLURIMOD module - code 700005

Dimensions
68,5
68,5
33
80
Recessed box with galvanised base and painted door for interiors
(RAL 9010); equipped with finishing frame, adjustable from 110 to
150 mm in depth.
100
520
80
130
383
50
80
80
The template box code 700005 is supplied complete with:

- 2 pairs of 3/4 M ball valves
- 2 flushing pipes for initial washing of the system
- adhesive label showing the flow direction (to be applied)
- cardboard to protect against any rubble created during the
finishing stages of the construction work
- the template box has guides for positioning the water meters,
code 700050/700051
142
236
520
142
110150
Positioning the template box

The special shape of the template box allows it to be applied in several positions, making it a universal product.
1) Horizontal (left-hand connection)
2) Vertical (top connection)
3) Horizontal (right-hand connection)
From
C.H.P.
FLOW
FLOW
FLOW
From
C.H.P.
user
DCW
dual
water
DHW
FOLW
user
From
C.H.P.
FLOW
FLOW
DHW
DHW
dual
water
dual
water
DCW
DCW
user
1) Horizontal with MIX function

(left-hand connection)
2) Vertical with MIX function

(top connection)
3) Horizontal with MIX function

(right-hand connection)
From
C.H.P.
FLOW
FLOW
FLOW
From
C.H.P.
user
DCW
DHW
FLOW
user
From
C.H.P.
FLOW
FLOW
DHW
DHW
MIX
MIX
MIX
DCW
DCW
user
Note: Any domestic water functions should be positioned in accordance with the above instructions. The central position is assigned to the
dual water or technical function. Other positioning schemes do not allow for the installation of the MIX function code 700055.
PLURIMOD hydraulic module - code 700015-700016

3
Bracketing the electronic metering panel
BOILER
FLOW
1. Remove the CONTECA electronic panel (5) by turning it

anticlockwise and remove the metal plate (B) by loosening the
fixing screws.
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
2 34
12
89 0
90
CALEFFI S.p.A.
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
12
45
567
8 90
6
45 7
Numero di serie
Utente
67
Anno di produzione
123456
3
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB

K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
Numero di serie
B
CALEFFI S.p.A.
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
755810
PN
Utente
CALEFFI
The hydraulic module includes:
12
2 34
12
89 0
90
567
8 90
45
6
45 7
zone valve assembly complete with temperature probe pockets

volume meter 3/4, 7554 series
actuator, 6440 series
template for AUTOFLOW, code 700075
CONTECA electronic panel, 7554 series
insulation
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
123456
BOILER
RETURN
2. Open the electronic panel and disconnect the pulse cable of the
flow rate gauge (terminal 9/10). Remove the insulation (6).
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
The PLURIMOD hydraulic module code 700015/16 is supplied for

hydraulic installation as shown in Fig. 1 (LHS riser).
If installation on the RHS riser is required, the following steps will be
necessary:
67
Fig. 1
3. Disconnect the module from the ball valves.

4. Turn the module by 180 in relation to the zone valve axis.
Remove the closure disc (C).
700015 - hydraulic module DN 3/4, actuator 230 V

700016 - hydraulic module DN 3/4, actuator 24 V
C
Note: By adjusting the by-pass knob (A), the module can be
changed from a two-way module
(by-pass closed) to
CALEFFI
three-way module with adjustable by-pass.
The hydraulic module can be connected via the left-hand
connection or the right-hand connection, provided that the
direction of flow is respected.
Actuator specifications
3-contact actuator.
Auxiliary microswitch.
Power consumption: 4 VA.
Ambient temperature range: 055C.
Protection class:
IP 44 (vertical control stem),
IP 40 (horizontal control stem).
Operating time: 40 s (90 rotation).
CALEFFI
5. Turn the flow water by 180, observing the flow direction.
CALEFFI
12
12
12
90
89 0
89 0
90
2 34
2 34
45
5 67
123456
6
45 7
8 90
6
45 7
67
12
67
45
5 67
123456
3
8 90
ACTUATOR
Max
0,8 A
6. Replace the insulation and the closure disc.
OPEN
CLOSE
7. Fix the locking plate in place.

PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
Anno di produzione
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.

K=
l/imp.
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
755810
PN
Utente
CALEFFI
TA
CALEFFI
123456
09 8
2 34
32 1
543
45 7
6
09
broch. 01131
09
Note: For further details, please see
765
21
67
8. Reconnect the module to the ball valves.

9. Reattach the electronic panel and connect the pulse cable for the
flow meter.
10.Close the CONTECA electronic panel again.
A) Hydraulic module with open zone valve
B) Hydraulic module with closed zone valve

p (mm w.g.)
p (bar)
1
10000
p (bar)
p (mm w.g.)
10000
0,5
5000
0,5
5000
0,3
3000
0,3
3000
0,2
2000
0,2
2000
0,1
1000
0,1
1000
0,05
500
0,05
500
0,03
300
0,03
300
0,02
200
0,02
200
100
0,01
100
Operating range (noise)

To protect users from noise which may be generated inside the
plumbing unit it is necessary to ensure a flow rate value which is
below the noise threshold relating to differential pressures. The
following values are provided as an indication.
Noise limits - p (mm w.g.)
5000
G (l/h)
2000
1000
500
200
5000
G (l/h)
2000
1000
200
0,01
500
Kv = 3,46
1 By-pass open by 1 turn; Kv = 0,72

2 By-pass open by 2 turns; Kv = 1,47
3 By-pass completely open; Kv = 1,77
700075... Compact automatic flow rate regulator
p1800 Noise unlikely

1800 < p < 2200 Noise likely
p 2200 Noise very likely
The dotted red line in diagram A indicates the max. limit of the
operating flow rate
G=3,46 0,18 = 1460 l/h
which corresponds to a velocity, reached by the medium, of
approximately 1,2 m/sec.
Inspecting the strainer

Loosen cap A (with 24 mm wrench) to access the filter easily for
regular inspection and maintenance.
By removing the template sleeve ((4) in Fig. 1), it is possible to

connect the flow rate regulator code 700075...
... To complete the code, please consult the table below:
with range p 15200 kPa
m3/h digit
m3/h digit
m3/h digit
m3/h digit
m3/h digit
0,12 M12
0,15 M15
0,20 M20
0,25 M25
0,30 M30
0,35 M35
0,40 M40
0,50 M50
0,60 M60
0,70 M70
0,80 M80
0,90 M90
1,00 1M0
1,20 1M2
1,40 1M4
Example: maximum flow rate required 600 l/h, code 700075 M60
HYDRAULIC OPTIONS
700050 - 700051 Domestic water function
TECNICA
90
89 0
2 34
90
89 0
6
45 7
12
67
123456
FREDDA
12
2 34
90
6
45 7
12
89 0
45
67
567
2 34
45
567
6
45 7
12
567
123456
before bracketing the domestic hot water function onto

the template supports, check the flow direction
indicated on the BALLSTOP body valve.
before bracketing the water meter, check the flow
direction marked on the meter body itself.
Note: the DHW/DCW functions are supplied separately. The

template connection point allows the hydraulic water
network to be flushed before installation takes place. The
positive displacement meter is supplied, for subsequent
hydraulic bracketing and any necessary electrical wiring on
the electronic panel.
COLD WATER
HOT WATER
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
PN 16
1.600 l/h 2.500 l/h 1.600 l/h 2.500 l/h
2.000 l/h 3.125 l/h 2.000 l/h 3.125 l/h
0,130C
3090C
Horizontal installation (H)

Transitional flow rate Q2
32 l/h
128 l/h
50 l/h
200 l/h
32 l/h
128 l/h
50 l/h
200 l/h

Transitional flow rate Q2
64 l/h
160 l/h
100 l/h
250 l/h
64 l/h
160 l/h
100 l/h
250 l/h
3%
5%
8 90
12
2 34
89 0
12
6
45 7
123456
12
CALDA
8 90
2 34
90
8
6
45 7
67
12
89 0
45
567
45
90
M0
l/imp.
CALEFFI S.p.A
K=
Numero di serie
567
(ac)
sso: ritorno
700055 Mix function
DE-07-MI0
CALEFFI
67
2%
5%
8 90
CALDA
To prevent dripping caused by condensation, it is wise to position

the domestic cold water (DCW) or dual water (DW) gauge on the
lower part of the template supports.
Technical data domestic water function

In conformity with directive 2004/22/CE (MID 001)
Max % error per Q2 Q Q4

per Q1 Q Q2
Dimensions
Single jet meter
8 90
12
FREDDA
Characteristic components:
- BALLSTOP valve with built-in check valve 3/4 M
- Template connection point
- Shut-off ball valve 3/4 M with male terminal
- Domestic water meter (supplied)
2004/22/EC certification
12
TECNICA
DCW
Notes:
123456
45
dual
water
700050 DHW / DCW function with local reading 3/4 M x 3/4 M

700051 DHW / DCW function with pulse output 3/4 M x 3/4 M
8 90
67
CALDA
DHW
80
Mixed
water
12
2 34
90
89 0
6
45 7
User connections 1/2 M with union
10 bar
85C
12
Copper pipes and fittings: Max. working pressure:

67
Components:
Mixing valve 5217 series with anti-scald safety function, certified to
NF 079 standard with temperature adjustment 3050C
FREDDA
45
567
123456
3
8 90
Note: The mix function requires the presence of two domestic

water functions (DHW - DCW) code 700050/700051 and
excludes the option of a third domestic water function.
Note: for further details, please see
broch. 01092
CONTECA heat meter, 7554 series
Conforms to directive 2004/22/EC/MID

Accuracy class: 3 according to EN 1434
Temperature probe
Type:
Temperature difference limit:
Measurement sensitivity:
Water meter
Nominal pressure:
Maximum temperature of the medium:
Lowest flow rate Q i :
Nominal flow rate Q p :
Installation:
NTC
380 K
0,05C
PN10
90C
50 l/h
2500 l/h
horizontal / vertical
Calculation unit
Metrological specifications:
conformity to EN 1434-1
2004/22/EC MID
Centralised transmission:
in M-Bus mode
Ambient classification:
MID 2004/22/EC E1-M1
Supply:
24 V (ac) - 1 W - 50 Hz
Protection class in accordance with DIN 40050:
IP 54
Terminal board - electric cables and signals
III Pulse
II Pulse
m3
m3
PUL Return
Return temp. probe

Flow temp. probe
Meter
I Pulse
Heat-A/C
Zone valve status
Polarized cable
Rx
24 V (ac)
F

The display is activated by pressing the button on the front PUSH .
In order to extend the battery life, the display is switched off 30 s
after the sensor button was last pressed.
Flow
Tx
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

RT
FT
Heating probes
(for system with 2 pipes)

The CONTECA heat meter features various metering configurations
referring to two-pipe and aggregated pulse acquisition systems
that determine set connection positions.
Carrier medium volume
1st pulse consumption
7 Zone valve status*
9 - 10 Mass meter
Two-pipe system
2nd pulse consumption
19 - 20 Flow probe (TA)
18 - 19 Return probe (RT)

3rd pulse consumption
Flow rate
2.1) One single pulse meter

(1st pulse consumption)
10 - 11 DHW or DCW
2) Pulse acquisition (Type OA-OC)
Power
12 - 13 DCW
(2nd pulse consumption)
2.2) Three pulse meters
Flow temperature
10 - 11 DHW
Return temperature
10 - 11 DHW
12 - 13 DCW
(2nd pulse consumption)
13 - 14 Generic/Dual
(3rd pulse consumption)
*Compulsory connection for consumption certification
broch. 01111
755890
755810
Remote energy totaliser

Electronic 8-digit LCD totaliser equipped
with cover plate for three-slot recessed
electric box, for remote monitoring of
thermie or refrigeration unit consumption.
Lithium battery: duration 8 years - max.
frequency 20 Hz.
Cable section (2x1 mm2), max. length 150 m.
The CONTECA meter, via software, is able to keep a record of the

thermie and refrigeration units in separate registers through
the evaluation of the thermal gradient inversion.
75588.
22 Refrigeration
units
23 Thermie
Refrigeration unit metering
Pulse output
The pulse output can be used to transfer the thermie and/or

refrigeration unit energy values to a generic acquirer. The pulse
weighs 1 kWh.
The pulse output with no potential is an open collector with pulse
period 120 ms - Vmax 24 V (dc).
Code
0V
755881
755882
21
Single pulse output - THERMIE

Double pulse output - THERMIE/REFRIGERATION UNITS
DATA CENTRALISATION
(A) CONTROLLER
Remote acquisition
755010
Controller
PUSH
Utente
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
PN

K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
Utente
(B) INTERFACE FAST-TELE
Remote acquisition
PUSH
Utente
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
Numero di serie
analogic
CALEFFI S.p.A.
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
Modem
7558545 7558546
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
Utente
Data centralisation
solutions (A), (B)
and (C) are alternatives
to one another
PUSH
(C) FAST INTERFACE
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
Utente
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
FAST-TELE
PUSH
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
digital
Utente
FAST
N.B.: The transmission bus code 755855/N is a two-way device

(section 2 x 1 mm2).
The controller allows a maximum of 250 users. The laying
methods are in accordance with the tree distribution (star).
The maximum length of each individual section is 1200 m.
It is possible to lay up to a maximum of 4 separate sections.
Local acquisition
broch. 01111
Code 700005
Template for PLURIMOD universal positioning user module, consisting of:
- Box made of painted plate for interiors (RAL 9010) with universal closure door.
(w = 520 - h = 520 - d = 110150 mm).
- Two pairs of ball shut-off valves 3/4 M.
- Flushing pipes for checking water tightness and washing the system.
- Triple domestic water function positioning flaps (DHW - DCW - Dual water or technical function).
Code 700015/16
PLURIMOD universal positioning hydraulic module with adjustable configuration from two-way to three-way, with adjustable
by-pass. Equipped with:
- Hydraulic unit with ball zone valve and pockets for temperature gauges.
- Actuator, 6440 series, supply 230 V for code 700015 or 24 V (ac) for code 700016.
- CONTECA heat meter - EC 2004/22 certification (MID).
- Template for AUTOFLOW.
- Insulation.
Code 700050/51
Domestic cold water (DCW) function, domestic hot water (DHW) function and dual water (DW) or technical function equipped
with:
- BALLSTOP shut-off ball valve with built-in check valve.
- Water meter without pulse output (K 10) 3/4 code 700050; with pulse output code 700051.
- Shut-off ball valve with male terminal.
- Template connection point for water meter.
Code 700055
Domestic water MIX function consisting of:
- Thermostatic mixing valve, 5217 series, 3/4 certified to standard NF 079 doc. 8.
- Copper pipes and quick push-fit connections.
Code 700075...
Compact automatic flow rate regulator, AUTOFLOW. Quick push-fit connections. Brass body. High resistance polymer
cartridge. Stainless steel spring. EPDM seals. Medium water and glycol solutions. Maximum percentage of glycol 50%.
Maximum working pressure 16 bar. Working temperature range 0100C. Range p 15200 kPa. Range of available flow
rates 0,121,4 m3/h. Accuracy 10%.
Code 700010
Compact touch-screen CONTECA controller, with RS232 - RS485, USB and LAN ports, user monitoring function (maximum
250) and daily logging of consumption data. Enabled for SMS message alarm and remote activation management, and for
automatic transmission of data via FTP server. Supply 230 V (ac).
CALEFFI
Recess-mounting two-way user satellite

for instant domestic water production
SAT22 series
CALEFFI
01206/10 GB
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001
FM 21654
ISO 9001 No. 0003
Specifications
The SAT22 satellite unit regulates the plumbing units heat
requirement and instantly generates domestic hot water through
the same medium, making the general supply network as simple as
possible (two pipes only).
The SAT22 user satellite is therefore the most complete
simplification for individual plumbing units in central systems.
The SAT22 user satellite, a two-way system with modulating control
of the heating medium, is particularly suitable for centralised
systems with condensing boilers, and for centralised systems
served by remote heating.
- Basic functions
- ON/OFF heating regulation with medium modulation through p
control valve
- instant hot domestic water production wit exchanger/sensor/DHW
pre-adjustment valve system and control of primary return
temperature
- thermostatic domestic water mixing with anti-scald device
MI
MA 7
- heat metering in conformity with Directive 2004/22/EC (MI004) with

arrangement for centralised transmission
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
PN

K=
l/imp.
Utente
- Optional functions
- cold domestic water meter code 794204 in conformity with
Directive 2004/22/EC (MI001)
- centralised data transmission code 755010
0000000
Notes: The positioning of the wall box is the first essential and
necessary step for installation of the SAT22 user
satellite, which can only be installed indoors.
Wall box code 794972 is only used for user satellite
code SAT22.
Materials
Ball valves:
- insulated brazed exchanger:

- body:
- valve with non-return (domestic water inlet):
non-return EN 13959 type approved
Connection pipes:
Fe360 plate thickness 15/10 mm

epoxy polyester powder coating
RAL 9010
copper
Performance
Medium:
Connections:
10 bar
090C
water/glycol solutions, max 30%
3/4 M
Box:
Pnom 50 kW
- thermostatic mixing valve with adjustable anti-scald function:

3050C 2C
- two-way ball zone valve and actuator:
230 V (ac) - 6 W
- 7554 series CONTECA heat meter:
24 V (ac) - 50 Hz - 1 W
fitted for RS485/M-bus
- differential pressure regulator with fixed setting:
15 kPa
- 127 series AUTOFLOW
SAT22
LEGEND
Two-way user satellite
1)
AUTOFLOW compact automatic flow rate regulator (600-1200 l/h)
2)
Flow temperature probe pocket (equipped with filter)
3)
Ball zone valve (6442 series)
4)
Differential pressure regulator with fixed setting 15 kPa
5)
Brazed exchanger (Pnom 50 Kw)
6)
DHW pre-adjustment valve with primary return max.

temperature control for systems with condensing boilers and
remote heating sub-central units
7)
Anti-scald mixing valve
8)
DCW positive displacement meter (optional) code 794204
7
6
10
MI
MA 7
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
11
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
Utente
In conformity with Directive 2004/22/EC (MI001)
COLD WATER
1/2
PN 16
1,600 l/h
2,000 l/h
0,130C
0000000
Size
Single jet meter
C.H.
Heating
Heating
C.H.
DCW
DCW
DHW
12
Max error percentage
64 l/h
160 l/h
2% for Q2 Q Q4
5% for Q1 Q Q2
9-10)CONTECA heat meter in conformity with

Directive 2004/22/EC (MI004)
11)
Return probe pocket
12)
Recess-mounting wall box for interiors
Dimensions of wall box code 794972
75
75
580 mm
75
90
57
PIPING CENTRE DISTANCE PLANE
BOILER
FLOW
HEATING
FLOW
HEATING
RETURN
BOILER
RETURN
75
The heating medium main supply is equipped with an AUTOFLOW

compact automatic flow rate regulator (1) (flow rate 900 l/h, on
request 6001200 l/h).
Heating function
The ball zone valve (3) equipped with 230 V (ac) (24 V (ac)
optional) actuator controls the plumbing unit heat flow and the
differential pressure regulator (4) maintains a constant pressure
difference throughout the entire heating circuit.
DHW function
The brazed exchanger (5), equipped with built-in temperature
probe, together with pre-adjustment valve (6) and mixing valve (7)
with anti-scald function, is responsible for DHW production.
The DCW inlet can be fitted with an additional meter (8).
212300 mm
58 75
COLD WATER
OUTLET
COLD WATER
INLET
MIXED WATER
OUTLET
750 mm
Operating principle
35
140 mm
Heat metering
The 7554 series CONTECA heat meter (10) determines the total
user energy requirement through the pair of probes and the flow
rate meter (9).
Wallbox code 794972 is supplied with a recess-mounting wall box
made of painted sheet metal for interiors (RAL 9010) with door, ball
shut-off valves and check valves.
A) Heating function (differential regulator fully open).

Without AUTOFLOW
2000
0,1
1000
0,05
500
0,03
300
0,02
200
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
0,2
The red lines in the

diagrams and in the charts,
positioned at the p value of
0.25 bar, indicate the
precautionary
operating
limits for preventing noise
generation.
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
3000
MI
0,3
5000
MA 7
p (mm w.g.)
2
p (bar)
0,5
Utente
Gwork = kv 0,25
0000000
0,01
100
Kv = 2,3 m3/h
50
BOILER
FLOW
HEATING
FLOW
HEATING
RETURN
BOILER
RETURN
COLD
WATER
INLET
MIXED
WATER
OUTLET
G (l/h)
COLD
WATER
OUTLET
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
0,005
B) Exchanger primary hot domestic water function (exchanger regulating

valve fully open). Without AUTOFLOW
p (bar)
p (mm w.g.)
5000
0,3
3000
0,2
2000
MI
MA 7
0,5
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
Utente
0,1
1000
0,05
500
0,03
300
0,02
200
0000000
0,01
Kv = 1,6 m3/h
100
50
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
0,005
BOILER
FLOW
HEATING
FLOW
HEATING
RETURN
BOILER
RETURN
COLD
WATER
OUTLET
COLD
WATER
INLET
MIXED
WATER
OUTLET
G (l/h)
C) Heating and hot domestic water function

(differential regulator and exchanger regulating valve fully open).
Without AUTOFLOW
p (mm w.g.)
3000
0,2
2000
0,1
1000
MI
5000
0,3
MA 7
p (bar)
0,5
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
Numero di serie
Utente
0,05
500
0,03
300
0,02
200
0,01
100
Kv = 2,7 m3/h
0000 000
0,005
5000
BOILER
FLOW
HEATING
FLOW
HEATING
RETURN
BOILER
RETURN
COLD
WATER
INLET
COLD
WATER
OUTLET
G (l/h)
MIXED
WATER
OUTLET
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
SET temperature fluctuation (48C) in response to changes in

DHW requirement
DHW production
Operating principle
The performance of the exchanger depends on the
primary medium flow rate and on the temperature of the
medium.
The thermostatic valve
US (A) modulates the
primary outlet flow rate
IP
based on the sensor
(B) which is immersed
in the exchanger.
Domestic water mix temperature (C)

EO
Fig. 3
0
1
2
3
UP
IS
Transients with primary temperature of 70C

50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
100
200
300
400
500
600
Time (s)
Domestic water flow rate (l/h)

EO
Transients with primary temperature of 70C

1200
Thermostatic valve
The thermostatic valve is equipped
with a control knob which allows preadjustment of the plumbing unit
DHW.
0
1
2
3
1000
The pre-adjustment values are purely

42C indicative since they depend on the
45C primary flow rate and temperature
48C and the domestic water inlet
52C temperature (factory pre-adjustment
3).
An anti-scald mixing valve is installed on the DHW
outlet which enables the DHW temperature to be
precisely regulated, above all levelling off possible
temperature increases due to sudden downward
variations of the domestic water flow rate (see fig. 3).
This mixing valve incorporates a definable anti-scald
function.
0
1
2
3
4
800
600
400
200
0
100
200
300
Time (s)
400
500
600
DHW function
Heating and DHW function
DHW temperature compared to required flow rate

parameterised with boiler flow temperature and
AUTOFLOW 600 l/h.
DHW temperature compared to required flow rate

parameterised with boiler flow temperature and
AUTOFLOW 900 l/h.
Flow. Temp. Centr. 50C

300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
50,00
49,00
48,00
47,00
46,00
45,00
44,00
43,00
42,00
41,00
40,00
39,00
38,00
37,00
36,00
35,00
200
COMPLIANT
ZONE
Domestic water temperature (C)
50,00
49,00
48,00
47,00
46,00
45,00
44,00
43,00
42,00
41,00
40,00
39,00
38,00
37,00
36,00
35,00
200
COMPLIANT
ZONE
Domestic water temperature (C)
Fig. 4

300
400
DHW function
Flow
medium
(l/h) (IP)
50
600
19
700
800
900
580
720
21
26
55
27
760
28
760
34
940
720
950
920
1000
34
35
65
1000
1000
36
38
36
1000
DHW
l/h
60
36
27
kW
600
700
800
900
1000
Heating - DHW function

Heating
Flow
medium
(l/h) (IP) (l/h) (US)
Primary temperature C (IP)
520
500
Flow rate (l/h)
Flow rate (l/h)
T inlet DCW = 14C

T outlet DHW = 47C (+0 / -2C)
600
700
800
900
1200
Primary temperature C (IP)

50
55
60
350
400
500
600
720
320
250
300
400
500
9
11
14
18
380
470
550
650
14
17
20
24
480
540
640
780
65
12
17
19
23
28
440
550
670
750
880
70
16
20
24
27
32
500
600
740
860
1000
75
18
22
27
31
36
570
670
800
940
1050
21
24
29
34
40
127 series Compact automatic flow rate regulator
Heating function:
The ball zone valve (2) equipped with 230/24 V (ac) actuator
controls the plumbing unit heat flow and the differential
pressure regulator (3) maintains a constant pressure difference
throughout the entire heating circuit.
140 series Differential pressure regulator (3)
Regulation curve
p (kPa)
30
The heating medium main supply is equipped with an

AUTOFLOW compact automatic flow rate regulator (1)
(available flow rate ranges 6001200 l/h).
Unless specified otherwise, the M90 cartridge with flow rate
900 l/h must be installed.
25
20
... To complete the code refer to the following table:
15
with p range 15200 kPa
10
m3/h
0,60
0,70
0,80
0,90
1,00
1,20
digit
M60
M70
M80
M90
1M0
1M2
5
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1000
Flow rate (l/h)
Central transmission electrical diagram
B
2
MI
MA 7
A
PUSH
Numero di serie
M08 1259
76072
755810
Anno di produzione
2008
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
PN

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
76072
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
2008
Utente
M08 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
CALEFFI S.p.A.
2008
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
Utente
76072
M08 1259
755810
PN

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
2008
76072
Anno di produzione
Utente
M08 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Numero di serie
76072
76072
2008
Utente
PN

K=
l/imp.
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
M08 1259
76072
CALEFFI S.p.A.
M08 1259
Anno di produzione
PUSH
Cod. 7554
IDB
DN
755810
PN

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
0000 000
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN
Numero di serie
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
2008
76072
Anno di produzione
Utente
M08 1259
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
2008
Utente
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
PUSH
Cod. 7554
IDB
DN
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
User satellite installed

inside the plumbing unit
755810
PN
Numero di serie
Utente
PUSH
Cod. 7554
IDB
DN
755810
PN
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
2008
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
Utente
Anno di produzione
M08 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
PUSH
Cod. 7554
IDB
DN

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
Cod. 7554
IDB
DN

K=
l/imp.
M07 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
User satellite installed in shared

parts (outside of plumbing unit)
Utente
SAT22
755810
PN

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
2008
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
Utente
M08 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
2008
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
76072
M08 1259
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
2008
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
Utente
76072
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
76072
CALEFFI S.p.A.
M08 1259
PUSH
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB
755810
PN
Numero di serie
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
2008
76072
Anno di produzione
Utente
M08 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
PUSH
Cod. 7554
DN
IDB

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
Utente
755010
CALEFFI
Hydronic Solutions
M08 1259
755810
PN

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
Anno di produzione
Utente
2008
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Numero di serie
M08 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
2008
CALEFFI S.p.A.
Anno di produzione
Utente
PUSH
Cod. 7554
IDB
DN
755810
PN

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
M08 1259
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Numero di serie
CALEFFI S.p.A.
2008
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
Anno di produzione
Utente
76072
Cod. 7554
IDB
DN
755810
PN

K=
l/imp.
76072
CALEFFI S.p.A.
M08 1259
PUSH
PUSH
Cod. 7554
IDB
DN
755810
PN
Numero di serie
DE-07-MI004-PTB024
2008
76072
Anno di produzione
Utente
76072
PUSH
Cod. 7554
IDB
DN

H :1090C H : 380 K
Riscaldamento:
K=
l/imp.
Cod. 755010 - Serial
Controller
BUS Line
BUS Line
755855 LSC
755855 LSC
FAST
FAST-TELE
AQUAPRO
Cod. 755055
Cod. 755056
Cod. 755060
Cod. 755500
Sonde temp. 0 90C
amb.:
545C
Attenzione:
IP 54
Alimentazione elettrica: 230 V
(ac) -
50 Hz - 10 W

aprire la scatola
76049
~ 230 V (ac)
755055 (alternative to 755010)
Guidelines for hydraulic - electrical installation

- Normally wall box code 794972 is supplied separately in order to ensure correct laying of the system-plumbing unit connection
pipes.
- Before installing the SAT22 satellite unit it is advisable to flush the system using a U-connection pipe, if applicable. The satellite includes
a positive displacement meter, exchanger and probe pocket with inlet filter, components which may fail or become clogged.
Electric supply:
230 V (ac) line placed under plumbing unit control on activation of thermostat or timer-thermostat
24 V (ac) centralised line for CONTECA heat meter.
Centralised transmission line via BUS cable code 755855 LSC (2x1 mm2 cable inserted in dedicated raceway).
755010
755055
CONTECA TOUCH controller
The controller is able to acquire, via bus, all the totalised values of
the individual users (heating units / refrigeration units / mass /
opening times of the zone valve), user operating status (ON/OFF),
totalised values from the supplementary pulse meters (hot/cold
domestic water) and operational diagnostics.
All the above-described totalised values are recorded on a daily
basis in log files that are useful for analysing consumption and
allocating costs.
Maximum number of plumbing units: 250.
Comprises:
- Data acquisition software.
- Instruction manual.
Comprises:
- 1 CPU touch screen
- 1 rack for wall mounting
The controller has the following
features:
- 1 touch screen LCD monitor for
display of consumption and user
data
- 1 RS232 port
- 1 RS485 port
- 2 USB ports
- 1 LAN port
- GSM modem
Electric supply:
230 V (ac) 10% - 50 Hz - 60 W.
Ambient conditions:
1035C with no dust.
FAST interface
As an alternative to controller code 755010 it is possible to have

RS485/M-bus central transmission via FAST interface.
Using a portable PC with Windows environment and
complementary software, the operator can transfer the
consumption data of the individual units by connecting this
interface locally to the portable PC.
Maximum number of plumbing units: 30.
Specifications:
Electric supply: 230 V (ac) - 50 Hz - 5 VA.
RS232-C interface.
Dimensions 165 x 120 x 40 mm.
MAINTENANCE AND FUNCTIONAL DIAGNOSTICS

To ensure correct operation and maximum efficiency of the user
satellite, it is necessary to perform the following maintenance
operations and functional checks, including during first start-up:
So that the order can be processed, details regarding the

plumbing units must be sent to Caleffi.
a) Inspect and clean the filter mesh in the pocket on the flow pipe (see
diagram on page 2)
b) Check the clogging of the heat exchanger (5)
c) Check the operation of the zone valve (3) by switching the room
timer-thermostat.
d) Visually check for water leakage from the fittings or shut-off valves
794204
NOTE: it is advisable at the end of the winter heating period to close

the plumbing unit distribution valves (second and third ball
valve from the right).
Pulse domestic water function
If the building has a controller code 755010

and therefore a central transmission line, it is
advisable to use the pulse-type cold domestic
water meter.
The plumbing unit CONTECA module, suitably
connected to the rotary meter, acquires the
pulses and makes them available for
transmission over the bus, facilitating compression and logging of
all plumbing unit consumption. Nominal flow rate: Qnom 1.6 m3/h.
Code SAT22
Recess-mounting two-way user satellite for heating and instant hot domestic water production equipped with CONTECA
heat meter for local display and arranged for RS485/M-bus transmission. Conforms to Directive 2004/22/EC (MID). Fitted for
cold domestic water pulse litre counter code 794204. The SAT22 satellite unit comprises: two-way ball zone valve, with 6440
series actuator (230 V (ac)); brazed exchanger with pre-adjustment valve (Pnom 50 kW). Adjustable thermostatic mixing
valve 3050 2C, differential pressure valve.
Code 794972
Wall box for SAT22 user satellite including:
- Recess-mounting wall box for interiors (l=580 mm - h=7501050 mm - d=140 mm) painted with epoxy polyester powder
coating RAL 9010.
- Inlet connections from central hearing plant at the bottom 3/4 M.
- Outlet connections to plumbing unit at the bottom 3/4 M.
Code 794204
Positive displacement meter for plumbing unit cold domestic water with 2004/22/CE (MI001) certification, with direct local
display and pulse output k=10. Connection 1/2 M; Qnom 1.6 m3/h. Maximum temperature 30C.
CALEFFI

Catalog Tehnic Complet

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalog Tehnic Complet

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Temperature relief - valve

Temperature relief valves are used in heating systems with the

brass EN 12165 CW617N

Sizes 1 1/2 M x 1 1/4 F, 1 1/2 M x 1 1/2 F

References to I.S.P.E.S.L. standards

- calibration temperature at which the valve starts to open:

- discharge temperature at which the nominal discharge flow rate is achieved:

- emergency intervention temperature at which the valve starts to open if the

- heat capacity P without top-up reset:

The approval certificate is the document issued by the I.S.P.E.S.L.

Without top-up reset

With top-up reset

The temperature relief valve can be fitted

Check valves for

Class A Check valve

Maximum operating pressure: 10 bar

In the case of considerable back

An isolation cock is fitted upstream of the valve to enable control of

Double check valve with

Check valve with Female-Female

CODE 304540 304550 304560 304570 304580 304590

CODE 304640 304650 304660 304670 304680

CODE 304740 304750 304760

CODE 304840 304850

Class A flanged check valves

- Body and cover made of cast iron with 150 micron

Maximum operating pressure: 16 bar

Minimum flow rates shown with a pressure loss of 1.5 m

CODE 304905 304906 304908 304910 304912 304915 304920

* Average speed on an entry section

FAX +39 0322 863723

Anti-pollution check valves

ISO 9001 No. 0003

sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2, 2

brass EN 12165 CW617N

brass EN 12165 CW617N

*Internal check valve DN

Application of the EA type anti-pollution check valve with reference to European

The anti-pollution check valve consists of a valve body (1),

Hydraulic seal devices

Elastomers complying with food regulations

Upstream pressure loss

In the event of strong

Correct conditions of flow

Double check valve, 3048 series

Downstream pressure increase

The double check valve may be used, where permitted by

3045 304540 304550 304560 304570 304580 304590

** double check valve

* single check valve

Installation and operation checking procedures

Inspection and operation checking

series 131 - 135

Sizes 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2 and 2

brass EN 12165 CW617N

brass EN 12164 CW614N

cast iron ASTM A536 GR65-45-12

Max. percentage of glycol:

water, glycol solution non hazardous, therefore

Water, glycol solution non hazardous, therefore excluded

DN 65 DN 300, PN 16 (to be coupled with

Advantages of balanced systems

A balanced system provides the following main benefits:

1. Allows the system emitters to perform correctly to heat, cool and